100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views9,003 pages

Nissan X Trail Model t32 Series Service Repair Manual

1. The document provides precautions for working on the accelerator control system and removing the battery terminal. It warns against accidental activation of the supplemental restraint system and describes how to avoid rendering it inoperative. 2. When using power tools or hammers near air bag sensors, the ignition must be off, the battery disconnected, and one must wait at least 3 minutes to avoid accidental deployment. 3. There are instructions for properly disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, which involve turning off the ignition and ACC power, waiting the specified time, and checking ECU diagnostics after reconnecting the battery.

Uploaded by

Jhonnatan

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

2K views9,003 pages

Nissan X Trail Model t32 Series Service Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Jhonnatan

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 9003

ENGINE

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION ACC ACC

E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 4 F

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 4

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .......................................................... 4 G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation .......................................... 4
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................. 5
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 2
H

ACC-1
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010782911

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010782918

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

ACC-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
ACC
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes D
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
K

ACC-3
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782913

JSBIA4306GB

Accelerator pedal assembly Brake pedal assembly

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782914

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor harness connector.
2. Remove brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-85, "Exploded View". (RHD models)
3. Loosen mounting bolts, and remove accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble accelerator lever. Never remove accelerator pedal position sensor from
accelerator lever.
• Avoid impact from dropping etc. during handling.
• Be careful to keep accelerator lever away from water.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the protrusion of the bracket into the locating hole of
the accelerator pedal assembly before tightening the accelerator
pedal assembly mounting bolts.

: Locating pin

CAUTION:
• When inserting accelerator pedal assembly to protrusion ,
never scratch locating hole with the protrusion.
• Tighten bolts with the locating pin securely inserted in the
bracket hole.
JSBIA4307ZZ

CAUTION:
When harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform “ACCELERA-
TOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING”. Refer to following;

ACC-4
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Engine Reference A
MR20DD : EC-144, "Description"
QR25DE : EC-553, "Description"
ACC
R9M :—

Inspection INFOID:0000000010782915
C
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the whole operation range when it is fully depressed and
released. D
• Check accelerator pedal securely returns to the fully released position.
• For the electrical inspection of accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to following;
E
Engine Reference
MR20DD : EC-373, "Component Inspection"
F
QR25DE : EC-759, "Component Inspection"
R9M : EC-1181, "Component Inspection (Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor)"

ACC-5
DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SECTION AV B

E
CONTENTS
BASE AUDIO DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 32 F
Work Flow ................................................................32
PRECAUTION ............................................... 6
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 34 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 34
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................... 6 AUDIO UNIT ...............................................................34 H
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .......................34
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 6
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 7 AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ...................... 35
Precaution for Harness Repair .................................. 7 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................35 I

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 9 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 36

Component Function Check ....................................36 J
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 9
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36
Component Parts Location ........................................ 9
Audio Unit ................................................................ 12 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 38
Speaker ................................................................... 12 Description ...............................................................38 K
Microphone ............................................................. 13 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38
Antenna and Antenna Feeder ................................. 13
USB Connector and AUX Jack ............................... 16 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 40 L
Steering Switch ....................................................... 16 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................40
Component Inspection .............................................41
SYSTEM .............................................................17
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 42 M
AUDIO SYSTEM ........................................................ 17 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................42
AUDIO SYSTEM : System Description ................... 17 Component Inspection .............................................43
AUDIO SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ......................... 19
AV
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT ... 44
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ................20 Description ...............................................................44
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 20 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................44
Component Inspection .............................................44 O
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 21
AUDIO UNIT .......................................................21 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 46
Reference Value ..................................................... 21 AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .......................... 46 P
Symptom Table .......................................................46
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 24
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYMPTOMS ................ 48
BASE AUDIO .....................................................24
Symptom Table .......................................................48
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 24
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 49
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 32

AV-1
Description .............................................................. 49 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 90
Fail-Safe (NAVI Control Unit) .................................. 91
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 51 Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) ......... 92
AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 51 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (NAVI CONTROL
Removal and Installation ........................................ 51 UNIT) .................................................................. 96
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 96
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 52
CONSULT Function ................................................ 97
Removal and Installation ........................................ 52
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................... 53
Removal and Installation ........................................ 53
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) ..................................... 99
CONSULT Function ................................................ 99
FRONT SQUAWKER ......................................... 54
Removal and Installation ........................................ 54 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 105

USB CONNECTOR AND AUX JACK ............... 55 NAVI CONTROL UNIT ..................................... 105
Removal and Installation ........................................ 55 Reference Value ................................................... 105
Fail-Safe (NAVI Control Unit) ................................ 109
MICROPHONE ................................................... 56 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 109
Removal and Installation ........................................ 56 DTC Index ............................................................. 110

STEERING SWITCH .......................................... 57 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 111

Removal and Installation ........................................ 57 Reference Value ................................................... 111
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) ....... 117
ROOF ANTENNA .............................................. 58 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 120
Exploded View ........................................................ 58 DTC Index ............................................................. 120
Removal and Installation ........................................ 58
WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 122
ANTENNA FEEDER .......................................... 59
Feeder Layout ........................................................ 59 NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................... 122
WITH NAVIGATION
LHD .......................................................................... 122
PRECAUTION ............................................. 61 LHD : Wiring Diagram ........................................... 122

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 61 RHD ......................................................................... 137

RHD : Wiring Diagram .......................................... 138
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 153
SIONER" ................................................................. 61
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 61 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 153
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ........................... 62
Precaution for Harness Repair ............................... 62 MULTI AV SYSTEM ................................................ 153
MULTI AV SYSTEM : Work Flow .......................... 153
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 64
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ..................... 154
COMPONENT PARTS ....................................... 64 AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM : Work Flow
Component Parts Location ..................................... 64 . 155
NAVI Control Unit ................................................... 68
Speaker .................................................................. 69 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 157
Microphone ............................................................. 70 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING NAVI
Steering Switch ....................................................... 71 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 157
Antenna and Antenna Feeder ................................ 71 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
USB Connector and AUX Jack ............................... 76 NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Description ..................... 157
SD Card .................................................................. 76
Steering Angle Sensor ............................................ 76 CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT) ........... 157
Around View Monitor Control Unit .......................... 76 CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT) : De-
Front Camera ......................................................... 76 scription ................................................................. 157
Side Camera ........................................................... 77 CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT) :
Rear Camera .......................................................... 77 Work Procedure .................................................... 157

SYSTEM ............................................................. 78 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING

System Description ................................................. 78 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 158

AV-2
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U0416 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) .................................. 175 A
Description ............................................................ 158 DTC Description .................................................... 175
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 175
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : B
Work Procedure .................................................... 159 U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............. 176
DTC Description .................................................... 176
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176
CONTROL UNIT) ..................................................... 159 C
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 177
CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure ..................... 159
NAVI CONTROL UNIT ............................................. 177
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description ............. 177 D
ADJUSTMENT ......................................................... 160 NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ...... 177
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ....................... 160 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 177 E
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSI- AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
TION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure ............... 161 DTC Description .................................................... 178
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 178 F
MONITOR) ............................................................... 161
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 180
VIEW MONITOR) : Description ............................. 161 G
NAVI CONTROL UNIT ............................................. 180
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description ............. 180
VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure ..................... 161
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 180
H
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 166 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 180
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
C1A00 CONTROL UNIT ................................... 166
DTC Description .................................................... 180
DTC Description .................................................... 166 I
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Di-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166
agnosis Procedure ................................................. 181
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ................. 167
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR- J
DTC Description .................................................... 167
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167
CUIT ................................................................ 182
DTC Description .................................................... 182
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ................. 168 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 182 K
DTC Description .................................................... 168
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT .......................................................... 186
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM ...................... 170 DTC Description .................................................... 186 L
DTC Description .................................................... 170 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL M
C1A07 CVT ....................................................... 171 CIRCUIT .......................................................... 192
DTC Description .................................................... 171 DTC Description .................................................... 192
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 192
AV
C1A39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 172 U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
DTC Description .................................................... 172 CIRCUIT .......................................................... 195
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172 DTC Description .................................................... 195 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 195
C1B56 SONAR ................................................. 173
DTC Description .................................................... 173 U112F EPS CIRCUIT ...................................... 201
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173 P
DTC Description .................................................... 201
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 201
U0122 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC
UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) ................................... 174 U1217 NAVI CONTROL UNIT ........................ 202
DTC Description .................................................... 174 DTC Description .................................................... 202
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 174 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 202

U1229 NAVI CONTROL UNIT ........................ 203

AV-3
DTC Description ....................................................203 U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION ........ 230
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................203 DTC Description .................................................... 230
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 230
U122F NAVI CONTROL UNIT ......................... 204
DTC Description ....................................................204 U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH ............................... 231
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................204 DTC Description .................................................... 231
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 231
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 205
DTC Description ....................................................205 U1308 REAR CAMERA .................................... 232
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................205 DTC Description .................................................... 232
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 232
U1244 GPS ANTENNA .................................... 206
DTC Description ....................................................206 U1309 AIR PUMP ............................................. 233
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................206 DTC Description .................................................... 233
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 233
U1263 USB ...................................................... 208
DTC Description ....................................................208 U130A PUMP CONTROL UNIT ....................... 234
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................208 DTC Description .................................................... 234
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 234
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR ................ 209
DTC Description ....................................................209 U130B REAR CAMERA ................................... 235
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................209 DTC Description .................................................... 235
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 235
U12AB ANTENNA ........................................... 210
DTC Description ....................................................210 U1310 NAVI CONTROL UNIT .......................... 236
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................210 DTC Description .................................................... 236
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236
U12AC NAVI CONTROL UNIT ........................ 212
DTC Description ....................................................212 U1320 REPROGRAMMING ............................. 237
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................212 DTC Description .................................................... 237
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 237
U12AD NAVI CONTROL UNIT ........................ 213
DTC Description ....................................................213 U150E BCM CIRCUIT ...................................... 238
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................213 DTC Description .................................................... 238
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 238
U12AE NAVI CONTROL UNIT ........................ 214
DTC Description ....................................................214 U1971 SONAR .................................................. 239
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................214 DTC Description .................................................... 239
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 239
U12AF NAVI CONTROL UNIT ........................ 215
DTC Description ....................................................215 U1972 EPS ....................................................... 240
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................215 DTC Description .................................................... 240
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 240
U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE .............. 216
DTC Description ....................................................216 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 241
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................216
NAVI CONTROL UNIT ............................................ 241
U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE .............. 217 NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 241
DTC Description ....................................................217
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................217 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 241
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Di-
U12B2 DAB ANTENNA ................................... 218 agnosis Procedure ................................................ 241
DTC Description ....................................................218
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................218 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 243
Description ............................................................ 243
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 220 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243
DTC Description ....................................................220
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................220 CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 245
Description ............................................................ 245
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT ..................... 222 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 245
DTC Description ....................................................222
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................222 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 247
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 247

AV-4
Component Inspection .......................................... 248 USB CONNECTOR AND AUX JACK ............. 266
Removal and Installation ....................................... 266 A
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 249
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 249 GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 267
Component Inspection .......................................... 250 Feeder Layout ....................................................... 267
B
Removal and Installation ....................................... 267
STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 251
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 251 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 268
Component Inspection .......................................... 251 Removal and Installation ....................................... 268 C
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 252 FRONT CAMERA ............................................ 269
Removal and Installation ....................................... 269
MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 252 D
Symptom Table ..................................................... 252 REAR CAMERA .............................................. 270
Removal and Installation ....................................... 270
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYMPTOMS ............... 256
E
Symptom Table ..................................................... 256 SIDE CAMERA ................................................ 271
Removal and Installation ....................................... 271
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 257
Description ............................................................ 257 MICROPHONE ................................................ 272 F
Removal and Installation ....................................... 272
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 262
STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 273
NAVI CONTROL UNIT ..................................... 262 Removal and Installation ....................................... 273 G
Removal and Installation ....................................... 262
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 274
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 263 Exploded View ....................................................... 274 H
Removal and Installation ....................................... 263 Removal and Installation ....................................... 274
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 264 ROOF ANTENNA ............................................ 275
Removal and Installation ....................................... 264 Exploded View ....................................................... 275 I
Removal and Installation ....................................... 275
FRONT SQUAWKER ....................................... 265
Removal and Installation ....................................... 265 ANTENNA FEEDER ........................................ 276 J
Feeder Layout ....................................................... 276

AV-5
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010714743

AV-6
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
B
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes D
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000010714745
K

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals. L
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit. M
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000010714746

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AV
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
O

PKIA0306E

AV-7
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

AV-8
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010714747
B

LHD MODELS
C

JSNIA7345ZZ

Map lamp

AV-9
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]

No. Component Function

Antenna rod
Refer to AV-13, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
Antenna base

Rear door speaker RH

Refer to AV-12, "Speaker".
Front door speaker RH
Transmits the auto ACC input signal to the audio unit.
BCM Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed in-
stallation.
Front door speaker LH

Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-12, "Speaker".

Front squawker RH

Audio unit Refer to AV-12, "Audio Unit".

Front squawker LH Refer to AV-12, "Speaker".

• Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the audio unit.
Combination meter • Transmits the steering switch signal to the audio unit via AV communication.
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed installation.
Steering switch Refer to AV-16, "Steering Switch".

USB connector and AUX jack Refer to AV-16, "USB Connector and AUX Jack".

Microphone Refer to AV-13, "Microphone".

RHD MODELS

AV-10
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]

AV
JSNIA7346ZZ

Map lamp O

No. Component Function

P
Antenna rod
Refer to AV-13, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
Antenna base

Rear door speaker RH

Refer to AV-12, "Speaker".
Front door speaker RH

AV-11
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
No. Component Function
Transmits the auto ACC input signal to the audio unit.
BCM Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed in-
stallation.
Front door speaker LH

Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-12, "Speaker".

Front squawker RH
• Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the audio unit.
Combination meter • Transmits the steering switch signal to the audio unit via AV communication.
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed installation.
Audio unit Refer to AV-12, "Audio Unit".

Front squawker LH Refer to AV-12, "Speaker".

USB connector and AUX jack Refer to AV-16, "USB Connector and AUX Jack".

Steering switch Refer to AV-16, "Steering Switch".

Microphone Refer to AV-13, "Microphone".

Audio Unit INFOID:0000000010714748

Description
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio and CD player are integrated into the
audio unit.
• The audio unit supports CD-R/CD-RW and provides the playback
of MP3/WMA music files.

JSNIA7347ZZ

Specification

Audio amplifier 16 W × 4
AM/FM electric tuner FM diversity function Without
CD changer Without
Used disc φ 12 cm (4.7 in)
CD drive
CD-R/CD-RW playback function With*
MP3 / WMA playback function With
® With
Bluetooth module
Steering switch With
*: If the reflectance of the surface of the media is low, the data may not be read.
Speaker INFOID:0000000010714749

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

• φ 16 cm speaker is installed to the bottom of the front door.

AV-12
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
• Sound signal is input from the audio unit to output high, mid, and
low range sounds. A

Rated input : 20 W
Maximum B
: 40 W
input
Impedance :4Ω
C

JSNIA5958ZZ

D
FRONT SQUAWKER
• φ8.0 cm squawker for high-range sounds is installed in the instru-
ment panel assembly.
• Sound signal is input from the audio unit to output high range E
sounds.

ALNIA1593ZZ

REAR DOOR SPEAKER H

• φ 16 cm speaker is installed to the bottom of the rear door.
• Sound signal is input from the audio unit to output high, mid, and
low range sounds. I
Rated input : 20 W
Maximum J
: 40 W
input
Impedance :4Ω
K

JSNIA5958ZZ

L
Microphone INFOID:0000000010957681

• The microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.

• The power is supplied from the audio unit to the microphone, trans- M
mitting sound signals to the audio unit at the during hands-free
phone communication.
AV

JPNIA1448ZZ

P
Antenna and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000010714750

ANTENNA AMP. AND RADIO ANTENNA

• AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base are located on the rear of the roof.
• The antenna amp. is built into the antenna base.

AV-13
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
• The AM/FM radio main antenna path has an antenna amp. to obtain sufficient reception power.

JSNIA7229GB

ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

LHD Models

JSNIA7348ZZ

Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector

Connector GPS antenna*

AV-14
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
: Clips
A
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

*: Not applicable
RHD Models B

AV
JSNIA7349ZZ

Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector

O
Connector GPS antenna*
: Clips
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle. P

*: Not applicable

AV-15
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
USB Connector and AUX Jack INFOID:0000000010714751

• USB connector and AUX jack is installed on the instrument lower

panel center.

USB connector
AUX jack

• iPod and USB memory can be connected to the audio unit.

• Connection to an external audio device can provide sound output.

External input terminal for connection φ3.5 mm stereo mini-jack

NOTE: JSNIA6736ZZ

When connected to monaural mini-jack plug cable, sound may not

be output.
Steering Switch INFOID:0000000010714752

• Hands-free phone and audio operations can be performed.

• This switch is connected to combination meter, and switch opera-
tion signal is transmitted to combination meter.
• Combination meter transmits steering switch signal to audio unit
via AV communication.

JSNIA7234ZZ

AV-16
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
SYSTEM
A
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010714753
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

JSNIA7351GB
J
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system is equipped with following functions.
K
Functions
AM/FM radio
L
CD playback
AUX connection
USB connection M
Speed sensitive volume

Bluetooth® audio
AV
Hands-free phone function
Meter display
NOTE: O
• The auto ACC function allows the operation of audio without operating the ignition switch. In addition, even
after the ignition switch is turned OFF, audio can be operated for 10 minutes. For the auto ACC function,
refer to PCS-68, "AUTO ACC FUNCTION : System Description".
P
• The settings of the auto ACC function can be changed with the CONSULT (work support of BCM). For
details, refer to BCS-47, "BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM)".
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
The MP3/WMA playback function enables music to play for a long time: the user need not change the CD dur-
ing a long trip. The text display function is also adopted so that the title name and artist name of the ID3 tag/
WMA tag can be displayed.
Operating signal
AV-17
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
Audio system operation can be performed with audio fascia switch and steering switch.
AM/FM Radio Function
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into audio unit.
• The radio signal received by the window antenna is input to the antenna amp. and sent to the audio unit.
• Audio unit outputs the sound signal to each speaker.
CD Playback Function
• CD function is built into audio unit.
• Audio unit outputs sound signal to each speaker when CD is inserted to audio unit.
AUX Connection Function
• When the external device is connected to the AUX (auxiliary) input jack, the external device inputs a sound
signal to the audio unit.
• When AUX mode is selected, audio unit outputs sound signal to each speaker.
USB Connection Function
• Music files in USB memory can be played.
• Sound signals are transmitted from USB connector to the audio unit and each speaker.
Speed Sensitive Volume Function
• The audio unit receives the vehicle speed signal from the combination meter and changes the sound volume
in conjunction with the vehicle speed.
• The control level can be selected by the customer.
Bluetooth® Audio Mode
• Bluetooth® audio function is built into audio unit.
• Bluetooth® audio can play music data in the portable audio by means of Bluetooth® communications
between the portable audio and the audio unit.
• When Bluetooth® audio mode is selected, audio unit outputs sound signal to each speaker.
Hands-Free Phone function
• Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting to cellular phone using Bluetooth®.
• Operation is performed by steering switch.
Meter Display

Audio Indicator
• The steering switch is connected to the combination meter.
• The combination meter transmits a steering switch signal to the audio unit via AV communication when the
user operates the audio with the steering switch.
• The audio unit changes the status of function according to the steering switch operation when receiving a
steering switch signal.
• The audio unit transmits an audio indicator signal to the combination meter via AV communication and dis-
plays the status of audio on the combination meter (in the information display) when the function is changed
by an operation (including the operation of audio unit switch).
Hands-free Phone Indicator
• When a cell phone that is connected with the audio unit via Bluetooth® communication receives a phone
call, the incoming call is displayed on the information display in combination meter.
• When audio unit recognizes an incoming call from a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication, it transmits
the meter display signal to combination meter via AV communication.
• When combination meter receives the meter display signal, it displays the incoming call of cell phone on
information display.
• When an incoming call is received, the driver can operate the steering switch to answer the phone.
• When steering switch is operated, the combination meter receives the steering switch signal, and then com-
bination meter transmits the steering switch signal to the audio unit via AV communication.
• When audio unit receives the steering switch signal, it activates the hands-free phone.

AV-18
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
AUDIO SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010714754

JSNIA7352GB
P

AV-19
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000010714755

DESCRIPTION
• On board diagnosis is performed in service mode.
• On board diagnosis checks if the system operates normally.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items.

Item Content
ON/OFF setting of the following items can be performed.
• AF (alternate frequency)
AF-Reg • REG (region)
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but not used.
Unit configuration The current system status is displayed.
Comparison can be performed between actual vehicle signal and signal recog-
Monitor
nized by the audio system.
Diagnostics
Faults Audio system malfunction detected by audio unit can be checked.
Self test Operation check of an audio function can be performed.
Clear fault Faults result can be cleared.
Region Reception frequency band (the reception area) setting of the radio can be set.
Radio Monitor The reception state of the radio signal can be checked.
LCD Contrast The contrast setting of the display can be adjusted.

METHOD OF STARTING
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn the audio unit ON at AM/FM mode.
3. Pressing the “SETUP” switch more than 2 seconds, and then
turn the MENU dial counterclockwise, clockwise and counter-
clockwise more than 3 clicks respectively while pressing the
“SETUP” switch.
4. When the self-diagnosis mode starts, the initial screen is dis-
played and then, release the “SETUP” switch.

JSNIA7353ZZ

Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode

Turn ignition switch OFF.

AV-20
AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AUDIO UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010714756
B

TERMINAL LAYOUT
C

G
JSNIA7230ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
H
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.) I
+ – Signal name
Output

J
2 3 Outputs
Sound signal front speaker [Ignition switch ON] waveform
(Y)*1 (R)*1 Output
LH+ Sound output synchronized
(W)*2 (P)*2 with sound. K

SKIB3609E

3 L
Sound signal front speaker
(R)*1 — — — — —
LH−
(P)*2
M

Outputs
4 5 Sound signal rear speaker [Ignition switch ON] waveform AV
Output
(GR) (BR) LH+ Sound output synchronized
with sound.

SKIB3609E
O
5 Sound signal rear speaker
— — — — —
(BR) LH−
7 Groun P
Ignition signal Input [Ignition switch ON] 9.0 - 16.0 V Battery voltage
(LG) d
[Ignition switch ON]
Lighting switch is 1st or 9.0 - 16.0 V 12.0 V
9 Groun 2nd
Illumination signal Input
(V) d
[Ignition switch ON]
3.2 V or less 0V
Lighting switch is OFF

AV-21
AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

11 12 Outputs
Sound signal front speaker [Ignition switch ON] waveform
(W)*1 (GR)*1 Output
RH+ Sound output synchronized
(G)*2 (V)*2 with sound.

SKIB3609E

12
Sound signal front speaker
(GR)*1 — — — — —
RH−
(V)*2

Outputs
13 14 Sound signal rear speaker [Ignition switch ON] waveform
Output
(LG) (Y) RH+ Sound output synchronized
with sound.

SKIB3609E

14 Sound signal rear speaker

— — — — —
(Y) RH−
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification (des-
tination unit).
[Ignition switch ON] Waveform ac-
18 Groun Vehicle speed signal (8- When vehicle speed is cording to ve-
Input
(G) d pulse) approx. 40 km/h (25 hicle speed is
MPH) input

JSNIA0012GB

19 Groun
Battery power supply Input [Ignition switch OFF] 9.0 - 16.0 V Battery voltage
(L) d
21 Groun
Microphone VCC Output [Ignition switch ON] — 5.0 V
(B) d
23
— AUX sound signal LH Input — — —
(L)
24
— AUX sound signal RH Input — — —
(G)
25
— AUX sound signal ground — — — —
(Y)
26
— Shield — — — —
(—)
[Ignition switch ON]
Lighting switch is 1st or 9.0 - 16.0 V 12.0 V
30 Groun 2nd
Illumination signal Input
(R) d
[Ignition switch ON]
3.2 V or less 0V
Lighting switch is OFF

AV-22
AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
The value be-
tween the
maximum in-
37 38 [Ignition switch ON] put voltage C
Microphone signal Input
(W) (—) Give a voice. and the mini-
mum input
voltage is
4.72V or less. PKIB5037J D
38
— Microphone ground — — — —
(—)
43
E
— EQ 1 — — — 0V
(B)
[Ignition switch ON or
45 Groun — 0 – 0.5 V
Auto ACC input signal Input ACC] F
(W) d
[Ignition switch OFF] — 3.15 V
46 AV communication signal Input/
— — — — G
(SB) (H) output
47 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) output
48 AV communication signal Input/
H
— — — —
(SB) (H) output
49 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) output I
67
— Antenna amp. ON signal Output [Ignition switch ON] 7.0 - 16.0 V 12.0 V
(—)
68 Groun J
Antenna signal Input [Ignition switch ON] 7.0 - 16.0 V 12.0 V
(—) d
70
— USB ground — — — —
(—) K
71
— V BUS signal — — 4.75 - 5.25 V 5.0 V
(—)
72 L
— USB D- signal — — — —
(—)
73
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(—) M
74
— Shield — — — —
(—)
*1: Models with 4 speakers AV
*2: Models with 6 speakers

AV-23
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

WIRING DIAGRAM
BASE AUDIO
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010714757

JRNWD4104GB

AV-24
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

JRNWD4105GB

AV-25
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

JRNWD4106GB

AV-26
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

JRNWD4107GB

AV-27
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

JRNWD4108GB

AV-28
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

JRNWD4109GB

AV-29
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

JRNWD4110GB

AV-30
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

JRNWD4111GB

AV-31
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010714758

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JSNIA0669GB

Reference 1··· Refer to AV-46, "Symptom Table".

DETAILED FLOW
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-46, "Symptom Table".

>> GO TO 3.
3.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 4.
4.FINAL CHECK
AV-32
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]
Perform the operation to check that the malfunction symptom is solved or any other symptoms are present.
Is there any symptom? A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
B

AV-33
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714759

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.

Battery 19
Ignition switch ON or START 7
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between audio unit harness connector and ground.

Probe
Audio unit Condition
Signal name Terminal Standard Reference value
Connector (+) (−) Ignition switch
Battery power supply 19 OFF
M46 Ground 9.0 - 16.0 V Battery voltage
Ignition power supply 7 ON
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check harness between audio unit and fuse.

AV-34
AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714760

NOTE: B
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply. C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect audio unit connector and combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
E
Audio unit Combination meter
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
46 47 F
47 48
M47 M42 Existed
48 47
G
49 48
4. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and ground.
H
Audio unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal
46 I
Ground
47
M47 Not existed
48
J
49
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END K
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

AV-35
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010714761

1.VEHICLE SPEED FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between audio unit harness connector and ground.

Terminals
(+) Reference value
Condition
Audio unit (−) (Approx.)

Connector Terminal
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification (desti-
nation unit).
Speedometer operated
[When vehicle speed is
M46 18 Ground
approx. 40 km/h (25
MPH)]

JSNIA0012GB

CAUTION:
Always drive safely.
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Refer to AV-36, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714762

Audio unit Combination meter

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M46 18 M34 38 Existed
4. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and ground.

Audio unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M46 18 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “METER/M&A”
AV-36
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A” with CONSULT. Refer to MWI-86, "CONSULT Function".
Is any DTC detected? A
YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
B

AV-37
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000010957773

Audio unit supplies power to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound voice to the audio unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010957774

Audio unit Microphone

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
37 1
M47 21 R21 4 Existed
38 2
4. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and ground.

audio unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
37
M47 Not existed
21
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Connect audio unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between audio unit harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Audio unit (–) Standard
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M47 21 Ground — 5.0 V
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-51, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect microphone harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector.

AV-38
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

Audio unit A
(+) (–) Condition Standard Reference value
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B

The value between the

maximum input voltage
M47 37 M47 38
Give a
and the minimum input
C
voice.
voltage is 4.72V or
less.

PKIB5037J
D

Is inspection result OK?

YES >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-51, "Removal and Installation". E
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-56, "Removal and Installation".

AV-39
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714763

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.

Combination meter Spiral cable

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M34 22 M33 29 Existed
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.

Combination meter
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M34 22 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
1. Disconnect steering switch connector.
2. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connectors.

Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M33 29 M303 10 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-23, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER VOLTAGE
1. Connect combination meter harness connector, steering switch connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between combination meter harness connector.

Combination meter
Voltage
+ - Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
Keep pressing BACK switch 0V
Keep pressing MENU UP switch 0.5 V
M34 22 21 Keep pressing MENU DOWN switch 1.2 V
Keep pressing TEL switch 2.1 V
Keep pressing ENTER switch 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

AV-40
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-41, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation".
B
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010714764

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector.

C
Steering switch Resistance
Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.) Ω
D
ENTER switch is pressed 1982 – 2064
TEL switch is pressed 708 – 738
MENU DOWN switch is E
10 314 – 328
pressed
MENU UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
BACK switch is pressed 0 JSNIA7127GB
F
4 SEEK UP switch is pressed 1982 – 2064
SEEK DOWN switch is
pressed
708 – 738 G
5 TEL END switch is pressed 314 – 328
VOL UP switch is pressed 118 – 124 H
VOL DOWN switch is
0
pressed

AV-41
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714765

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT

Combination meter Spiral cable

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M34 23 M33 24 Existed
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.

Combination meter
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M34 23 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
1. Disconnect steering switch connector.
2. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connectors.

Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M33 24 M303 5 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-23, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER VOLTAGE
1. Connect combination meter harness connector, steering switch connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between combination meter harness connector.

Combination meter
Voltage
+ - Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
Keep pressing VOLUME DOWN switch 0V
Keep pressing VOLUME UP switch 0.5 V
M34 23 21 Keep pressing TEL END switch 1.2 V
Keep pressing SEEK DOWN switch 2.1 V
Keep pressing SEEK UP switch 3.3 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

A V - 4 2
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-43, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation".
B
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010714766

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector.

AV-43
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000010714767

Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714768

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT

Combination meter Spiral cable

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M34 21 M33 23 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
1. Disconnect steering switch connector.
2. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connectors.

Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M33 23 M303 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-23, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
Check steering switch. Refer to AV-44, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010714769

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector.

AV-44
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

Steering switch Resistance

A
Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.) Ω

ENTER switch is pressed 1982 – 2064

B
TEL switch is pressed 708 – 738
MENU DOWN switch is
10 314 – 328
pressed
C
MENU UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
BACK switch is pressed 0 JSNIA7127GB

4 SEEK UP switch is pressed 1982 – 2064 D

SEEK DOWN switch is
708 – 738
pressed
5 TEL END switch is pressed 314 – 328 E
VOL UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
VOL DOWN switch is
pressed
0 F

AV-45
AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010714770

RELATED TO AUDIO SYSTEM

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take

Audio unit power supply and ground circuit.
Audio unit does not start. —
Refer to AV-34, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Audio unit power supply and ground circuit.
No sound from all speakers.
Refer to AV-34, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
No sound comes out. Only a certain speaker (front right, • Sound signal circuit malfunction between audio unit and
front left, rear right, or rear left, etc.) speaker.
does not output sound. • Malfunction in speaker.
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Noise comes out from all speaker. Malfunction in audio unit.
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between audio unit and
Noise comes out only from a certain
speaker.
speaker (front right, front left, rear
• Malfunction in speaker.
Noise is mixed with audio. right, or rear left, etc.).
• Poor installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and looseness)
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Noise is mixed with radio only
(when the car hits a bump or while Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna feeder.
driving over bad roads).
• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Any radio cannot be received or
poor reception is caused even af-
Radio is not received or poor re- • Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
ter moving to a service area with
ception. • Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna feeder.
good reception (e.g. a place with
clear view and no obstacles gen-
erating external noises).
The function automatically ad-
justing volume (speed sensitive • Vehicle speed signal circuit.
volume) does not operate due Refer to AV-36, "Component Function Check".
—
to the change in vehicle speed. • Malfunction in audio unit.
(Volume can be controlled with Refer to AV-51, "Removal and Installation".
the volume control knob.)

RELATED TO USB
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of USB equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.

Probable malfunction location / Action

Symptoms Check items
to take

With iPod or USB “Yes” is display for “USB

iPod or USB memory
memory Connected, connected”.
iPod or USB memory can not be
check “USB connect- • USB and AUX harness
recognized. “No” is display for “USB con-
ed” in diagnostic func- • USB connector and AUX jack
tion of audio unit. nected”.
• Audio unit
iPod is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.

AV-46
AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A

No voice sound is heard when Voice sound is heard when other modes • USB and AUX harness
AUX mode is selected. are selected. • USB connector and AUX jack

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH B

Symptoms Possible malfunction location / Action to take

Steering switch signal ground circuit. Refer to AV-44, "Diagnosis Pro-
C
All steering switches are not operated.
cedure".
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation".
D
“BACK”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “TEL” and “ENTER” Steering switch signal A circuit.
switches are not operated. Refer to AV-40, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“VOL DOWN”, “VOL UP”, “TEL END”, “SEEK DOWN” and Steering switch signal B circuit.
“SEEK UP” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-42, "Diagnosis Procedure". E

AV-47
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010957799

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location/Action to take

Does not recognize cellular
Repeat the registration of cellular phone. Audio unit
phone connection.
Hands-free phone cannot be Audio unit power supply and ground circuit.
—
established. Refer to AV-34, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".

The other party's voice cannot Audio system sound is normal. Sound signal (TEL voice, TEL guidance) circuit
be heard by hands-free phone. Audio system sound does not sound. Refer to AV-46, "Symptom Table".

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Possible malfunction location / Action to take

Steering switch signal ground circuit. Refer to AV-44, "Diagnosis Pro-
All steering switches are not operated.
cedure".
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation".
“BACK”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “TEL” and “ENTER” Steering switch signal A circuit.
switches are not operated. Refer to AV-40, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“VOL DOWN”, “VOL UP”, “TEL END”, “SEEK DOWN” and Steering switch signal B circuit.
“SEEK UP” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-42, "Diagnosis Procedure".

AV-48
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000010714771

RELATED TO AUDIO B
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interfer-
ence, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. C
Check that noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and
operation of each piece of electrical equipment. Then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor- D
rectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check that the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the red book Compact
Disc Standard and may not play. E

Symptoms Cause and Counter measure

Check that the disc was inserted correctly. F
Check that the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone
(about 1 hour) before using the player. G
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the nor-
mal temperature.
Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, H
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
pliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the I
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright. J
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
K
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multisession disc, some
the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips L
depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or
Move immediately to the next song
when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound
M
when playing.
and then the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore,
desired order. the files might not play in the desired order. AV
Poor reception only from a certain
Check incoming radio wave signal strength of applicable broadcast station.
radio broadcast station.
The majority of rattle sounds are not indicative of an issue with the speaker, usually something O
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker
nearby the speaker is causing the rattle.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction. P
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

AV-49
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

Symptom Cause and Counter measure

Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
lowing conditions.
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party's voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
Poor sound quality far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

AV-50
AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

AUDIO UNIT
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714772
B

REMOVAL
CAUTION: C
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after
ignition switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and
wait for three minutes with the driver′s door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply. D
1. Remove instrument finisher B. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded View"
(RHD models).
2. Remove instrument finisher E. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded View" E
(RHD models).
3. Remove A/C control. Refer to HAC-125, "Removal and Installation" (automatic air conditioning), HAC-
222, "Removal and Installation" (manual air conditioning). F
4. Remove the audio unit screws, then pull out the audio unit.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
6. Remove the audio unit bracket screws and the audio unit brackets. G

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. H

AV-51
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011010046

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front door speaker screws .
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the front door speaker
and remove.

JSNIA6727ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

AV-52
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011010047

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-19, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear door speaker screws .
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker
and remove.

JSNIA6727ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV-53
FRONT SQUAWKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
FRONT SQUAWKER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011066765

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar garnish. Refer to INT-23, "FRONT PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front squawker grille using a suitable tool. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-
40, "Exploded View" (RHD models).
3. Pull out the front squawker, disconnect the harness connector from front squawker and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV-54
USB CONNECTOR AND AUX JACK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
USB CONNECTOR AND AUX JACK
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011010048

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the instrument lower panel. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded
View" (RHD models).
2. Release the pawls and remove the USB connector AUX jack C
from the instrument lower panel .

JSNIA6728ZZ
F

INSTALLATION G
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV-55
MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011010049

REMOVAL
1. Remove the map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-76, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the microphone connector from the map lamp
assembly .
3. Release the microphone pawls, then remove the microphone .

: Pawl

ALNIA1366ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV-56
STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011010050

Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View". B

NOTE:
Always remove steering switch together with steering wheel.
C

AV-57
ROOF ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
ROOF ANTENNA
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011010051

JSNIA6913ZZ

Antenna rod Antenna base

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011010052

REMOVAL
1. Remove the antenna rod.
2. Remove the headlining assembly. Refer to INT-37, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the mounting nut to remove the antenna base from the roof panel.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
If the antenna base mounting nut is tightened looser than the specified torque, then this will lower the
sensitivity of the antenna. On the other hand, if the nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque,
then this will deform the roof panel.

AV-58
ANTENNA FEEDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
ANTENNA FEEDER
A
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000010714779

LHD MODELS B

JSNIA7348ZZ
AV

Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector

Connector GPS antenna*
O
: Clips
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle. P
*: Not applicable
RHD MODELS

AV-59
ANTENNA FEEDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]

JSNIA7349ZZ

Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector

Connector GPS antenna*
: Clips
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

*: Not applicable

AV-60
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010714784

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000011010176

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key K
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
L
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition M
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
AV
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of O
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE: P
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

AV-61
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.

D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000010714786

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000010714787

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

AV-62
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of A
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

AV-63
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010714788

LHD MODELS

JSNIA7355ZZ

Map lamp

AV-64
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

No. Component Function A

Antenna rod
AV-71, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder"
Antenna base
B
Rear door speaker RH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".

Side camera RH Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".

C
Front door speaker RH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".
Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN com-
ABS actuator and electric unit munication.
(control unit) Refer to BRC-25, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)", for detailed installation D
location.
Front camera Refer to AV-76, "Front Camera".
E
Transmits the shift position signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN commu-
nication.
TCM (CVT models) Refer to the following for detailed installation location.
• RE0F10D: TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" F
• RE0F10G: TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
Transmits the gear position signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN commu-
IPDM E/R (M/T models) nication. G
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location", for detailed installation location.
• Transmits the door switch signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN com-
munication.
• Transmits the following signals to the NAVI control unit.
H
- Reverse signal
BCM
- Dimmer signal
- Auto acc input signal
I
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed in-
stallation location.
Front door speaker LH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".
J
Side camera LH Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".

Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".

K
Transmits the sonar indicator signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN com-
munication.
Sonar control unit Refer to following for detailed installation location.
• Without park assist: SN-8, "Component Parts Location" L
• With park assist: SN-119, "Component Parts Location"
Rear camera Refer to AV-77, "Rear Camera".

Front squawker RH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker". M

NAVI control unit Refer to AV-68, "NAVI Control Unit".

Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-76, "Steering Angle Sensor". AV

GPS antenna Refer to AV-71, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".

Front squawker LH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".

O
• Transmits the steering switch signal to the NAVI control unit via AV communication.
• Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the NAVI control unit.
• Receives the meter display signal from the NAVI control unit via AV communication.
Combination meter • Receives the buzzer output signal from the around view monitor control unit via CAN P
communication.
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed installation
location.
Steering switch Refer to AV-71, "Steering Switch".

USB connector and AUX jack Refer to AV-76, "USB Connector and AUX Jack".

AV-65
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
No. Component Function
Around view monitor control unit Refer to AV-76, "Around View Monitor Control Unit".

Microphone Refer to AV-70, "Microphone".

RHD MODELS

JSNIA7356ZZ

Map lamp

AV-66
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

No. Component Function A

Antenna rod
AV-71, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder"
Antenna base
B
Rear door speaker RH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".

Side camera RH Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".

C
Front door speaker RH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".

Front camera Refer to AV-76, "Front Camera".

Transmits the shift position signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN commu- D
nication.
TCM (CVT models) Refer to the following for detailed installation location.
• RE0F10D: TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
• RE0F10G: TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" E
Transmits the gear position signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN commu-
IPDM E/R (M/T models) nication.
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location", for detailed installation location. F
Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN com-
ABS actuator and electric unit munication.
(control unit) Refer to BRC-25, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)", for detailed installation G
location.
• Transmits the door switch signal to the around view monitor control unit via CAN com-
munication.
• Transmits the following signals to the NAVI control unit.
H
- Reverse signal
BCM
- Dimmer signal
- Auto acc input signal
I
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed in-
stallation location.
Front door speaker LH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".
J
Side camera LH Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".

Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".

K
Transmits the sonar indicator signal to the NAVI control unit and the around view monitor
control unit via CAN communication.
Sonar control unit Refer to following for detailed installation location.
• Without park assist: SN-8, "Component Parts Location" L
• With park assist: SN-119, "Component Parts Location"
Rear camera Refer to AV-77, "Rear Camera".

Front squawker RH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker". M

• Transmits the steering switch signal to the NAVI control unit via AV communication.
• Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the NAVI control unit.
• Receives the meter display signal from the NAVI control unit via AV communication. AV
Combination meter • Receives the buzzer output signal from the around view monitor control unit via CAN
communication.
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location", for detailed installation
location. O
NAVI control unit Refer to AV-68, "NAVI Control Unit".

GPS antenna Refer to AV-71, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder". P

Front squawker LH Refer to AV-69, "Speaker".

Around view monitor control unit Refer to AV-76, "Around View Monitor Control Unit".

USB connector and AUX jack Refer to AV-76, "USB Connector and AUX Jack".

Steering switch Refer to AV-71, "Steering Switch".

AV-67
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
No. Component Function
Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-76, "Steering Angle Sensor".

Microphone Refer to AV-70, "Microphone".

NAVI Control Unit INFOID:0000000010714789

The audio system is equipped with following function.

DESCRIPTION
• 7 inch display integrated NAVI control unit is installed at the center
of the instrument panel.
• The NAVI control unit is equipped with the following parts. It is the
master unit integrated with functions and controls the multi-AV sys-
tem.

Units equipped
SD card slot
7-inch monitor
Audio amplifier ALNIA1590ZZ

AM/FM electronic tuner

CD drive

Bluetooth® module
• A possible route line is generated on the camera image from the rear view camera, and it is shown on the
display.
• It has the built-in gyro sensor and acceleration sensor as a vehicle position calculation sensor. Map data is
read from an SD card in the SD slot.
- SD card
• It records the map data, guide information, etc.
- Gyroscope
• Detects vehicle cornering condition.
- Acceleration sensor
• Detects the inclination angle and height variation of the vehicle.
Display
• Touch panel function is adopted to improve operability.
• Composite image signals (around view camera image) are displayed.
Audio Amplifier
• 40 W x 4ch amplifiers are installed.
• Audio sound, TEL voice and guiding voice are output to each speaker.
AM/FM Electronic Tuner
• The AM/FM electric tuner includes the PLL frequency synthesizer system.
CD Drive
• It is CD-R/CD-RW compliant and enables MP3 and WMA files to play music.
• It displays the artist name, album title or song title recorded to the file by the ID3 tag/WMA tag display func-
tion.
Bluetooth® Module
• Wireless connection to the audio device equipped with Bluetooth® communication can play music.
• Five units of Bluetooth® communication devices including audio devices and cellular phones can be regis-
tered to the NAVI control unit.
Specification

AV-68
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

7-inch A
Screen size
(15.5 cm × 8.72 mm)

Display Number of pixels 480 × 272 pixels

Drive type TFT active matrix method B
Touch panel detection Analog resistive touch
Amplifier output 40 W × 4 ch
C
Used disc φ12 cm
CD-ROM (CD-DA)

Playable disc CD CD-R*1 D

CD-RW*1
CD drive MP3
Playable format Music E
WMA
Artist name
Text display function ID3 / WMA tag Album title F
Song title
High communication standard USB2.0
G
MP3
Playable format Music
WMA
Artist name H
Text display function ID3 / WMA tag Album title
USB
Song title
iPod Classic 5th generation and later
I

iPod nano 1st generation and later

iPod Action*2
iPod touch 1st generation and later J
iPhone 3G and later
Compliant communication
type
Wireless connection Bluetooth® communication
K
Bluetooth® audio A2DP 1.2
Compliant profile
AVRCP 1.4
L
Compliant communication
Wireless connection Bluetooth® communication compliant
Hands-free phone type type
Compliant profile HFP v10r00
M
Camera controller Guideline display function Width/distance display
Speed sensitive volume function
Other functions
Steering switch compliant AV
*1: If the reflectance of the surface of the media is low, the data may not be read.
*2: It may not be used if it is not updated to the latest firmware or partial functions may not work if it is used.
O
Speaker INFOID:0000000010714790

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER P

AV-69
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• φ16.0 cm speaker is installed to the bottom of the front door.
• Sound signal is input from the NAVI control unit to output high, mid
and low range sound.

Maximum input : 40 W
Rated input : 20 W
Impedance :4Ω

JSNIA5958ZZ

FRONT SQUAWKER
• φ8.0 cm squawker for high-range sounds is installed in the instru-
ment panel assembly.
• Sound signal is input from the NAVI control unit to output high
range sounds.

ALNIA1593ZZ

REAR DOOR SPEAKER

• φ16.0 cm speaker is installed to the bottom of the rear door.
• Sound signal is input from the NAVI control unit to output high, mid
and low range sound.

Maximum input : 40 W
Rated input : 20 W
Impedance :4Ω

JSNIA5958ZZ

Microphone INFOID:0000000010714791

• The microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.

• The power is supplied from the NAVI control unit to the micro-
phone, transmitting sound signals to the NAVI control unit at the
during hands-free phone communication.

JPNIA1448ZZ

AV-70
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Steering Switch INFOID:0000000010714792

A
• Hands-free phone, navigation, and audio operations can be per-
formed.
• This switch is connected to combination meter, and switch opera- B
tion signal is transmitted to combination meter.
• Combination meter transmits steering switch signal to NAVI control
unit via AV communication.
C

D
JSNIA7234ZZ

Antenna and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000010714793

E
ANTENNA AMP. AND RADIO ANTENNA
Without DAB antenna F
• AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base are located on the rear of the roof.
• The antenna amp. is built into the antenna base.
• The AM/FM radio main antenna path has an antenna amp. to obtain sufficient reception power.
G

JSNIA5180GB
J
With DAB antenna
• AM/FM radio rod antenna, antenna base and DAB antenna are located on the rear of the roof.
• The antenna amp. and DAB antenna are built into the antenna base.
K
• The AM/FM radio main antenna path has an antenna amp. to obtain sufficient reception power.

JSNIA7241GB
P
GPS ANTENNA

AV-71
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel.
• Power is supplied from the NAVI control unit.
• This antenna amplifies radio waves received from the GPS satel-
lite and transmits the GPS signal to the NAVI control unit.
NOTE:
An object on the instrument panel may cause the reception sensitiv-
ity to be decreased.

JSNIA5132ZZ

ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

LHD Models Without DAB antenna

JSNIA7348ZZ

Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector

Connector GPS antenna

AV-72
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
: Clips
A
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

RHD Models without DAB antenna

JSNIA7349ZZ
AV
Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector
Connector GPS antenna
O
: Clips
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
P
LHD Models With DAB antenna

AV-73
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JSNIA7358ZZ

Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector

Connector GPS antenna
: Clips
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

RHD Models with DAB antenna

AV-74
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

L
JSNIA7359ZZ

Antenna base Antenna rod With clip connector M

Connector GPS antenna
: Clips
AV
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

AV-75
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
USB Connector and AUX Jack INFOID:0000000010714794

• USB connector and AUX jack is installed on the instrument lower

panel center.

USB connector
AUX jack

• iPod and USB memory can be connected to the NAVI control unit.
• Connection to an external audio device can provide sound output.

External input terminal for connection φ3.5 mm stereo mini-jack

NOTE: JSNIA6736ZZ

When connected to monaural mini-jack plug cable, sound may not

be output.
SD Card INFOID:0000000010714795

Map data is sent to the NAVI control unit from the SD slot.
Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000010714796

• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.

• Steering angle sends the steering signal necessary for predictive
course line of the rear view monitor to the NAVI control unit via
CAN communication. (Models without around view monitor)
• Steering angle sends the steering signal necessary for predictive
course line of the rear view monitor to the around view monitor
control unit via CAN communication. (Models with around view
monitor)

JSNIA1571ZZ

Around View Monitor Control Unit INFOID:0000000010714797

• The around view monitor control unit is installed at the end of the
glove box assembly.
• Necessary signals are transmitted/received to/from control unit via
CAN communication.
• Camera image signals received from each camera are converted/
synthesized in the around view monitor control unit and transmitted
to the NAVI control unit.
• Vehicle width guide lines, predicted course line, vehicle front guid-
ing line and vehicle side line, and vehicle icon are rendered with
the around view monitor control unit and combined with camera
image.
JSOIA0646ZZ

Front Camera INFOID:0000000010714798

• The front camera is installed to the front grille.

• Super-small CMOS camera (color) using CMOS* for the image
pickup element is adopted.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the front of the vehicle is sent to the
around view monitor control unit.
NOTE:
*: “CMOS” is abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semicon-
ductor, and features low power consumption and high speed reading
rate of electric charge.
JSNIA5851ZZ

AV-76
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Specification
A
Image pickup element 1/4-inch CMOS image sensor
Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
Minimum brightness 1 lx
B

Angle of view H: 190.4° V: 141.8°

Side Camera INFOID:0000000010714799

• The side camera is installed to the door mirror.

• Super-small CMOS camera (color) using CMOS* for the image D
pickup element is adopted.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the side of the vehicle is sent to the E
around view monitor control unit.
NOTE:
*: “CMOS” is abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semicon-
ductor, and features low power consumption and high speed reading F
rate of electric charge.
JSNIA5852ZZ

G
Specification

Image pickup element 1/4-inch CMOS image sensor

H
Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
Minimum brightness 1 lx
Angle of view H: 190.4° V: 141.8° I

Rear Camera INFOID:0000000010714800

• The rear camera is installed to the back door finisher. J

• Super-small CMOS camera (color) using CMOS* for the image
pickup element is adopted.
• With the mirror processing function, a mirror image is sent as if it is K
viewed by a rear view mirror.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the rear of the vehicle is sent to the L
around view monitor control unit.
NOTE:
*: “CMOS” is abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semicon-
ductor, and features low power consumption and high speed reading M
JSNIA5853ZZ
rate of electric charge.
Specification
AV
Image pickup element 1/4-inch CMOS image sensor
Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
O
Minimum brightness 1 lx
Angle of view H: 190.4° V: 141.8°
Image With mirror processing function P

AV-77
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000010714801

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSNIA7281GB

*1: With M/T models

*2: With CVT models
DESCRIPTION
Refer to Owner’s Manual for navigation and audio system operating instructions.
Audio function and display are built into NAVI control unit.
This navigation has the following functions.
• Map data on SD card.
• Full support for playback of music from iPod*, iPhone, and USB device.
*: iPod is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• High resolution full color touch panel 7 inch “QVGA” display.
• FM/AM digital tuner.
• DAB radio.
• USB interface.
• AUX in jack
• Bluetooth® audio streaming.
• Hands-free phone system.
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the operation of audio and navigation without operating the ignition switch. In
addition, even after the ignition switch is turned OFF, audio and navigation can be operated for 10 minutes.
For the auto ACC function, refer to PCS-68, "AUTO ACC FUNCTION : System Description".
• The settings of the auto ACC function can be changed with the CONSULT (work support of BCM). For
details, refer to BCS-47, "BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM)".
NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Description

AV-78
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• The navigation system can be operated by control panel of the NAVI control unit and display (touch panel) of
the NAVI control unit. A
• Guide sound during the operation of the navigation system is output from NAVI control unit to front speaker.
• NAVI control unit calculates the vehicle location based on the signals from GYRO (angle speed sensor),
vehicle sensor, and GPS satellite, as well as the map data from map SD card. It is displayed on display of
B
the NAVI control unit.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three C
signals:
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor
• Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor)
• Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information) D
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map SD card (map-matching), and indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate
data is judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found by the GPS with the result by E
map-matching.

The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis- F

tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
• Travel distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sen- G
sor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance cor-
rection function has been adopted. H
• Travel direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyro-
scope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS informa-
tion). They have both advantages and disadvantages.
SEL684V
I

Type Advantage Disadvantage

J
Gyroscope Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is
(angular velocity sensor) accurately. driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna Can detect the vehicle's travel direction Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle
(GPS information) (North/South/East/West). speed is low. K

More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
L
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method
in the “Location Detection Principle” with a road map data from map
M
SD card.
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map SD card.
AV

SEL685V

P
The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain
time when GPS information is difficult to receive.

AV-79
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been repo-
sitioned.
Alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and
the incorrect road can be avoided if there is an error in distance
and/or direction.
They are of the same priority if two roads are running in parallel.
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alter-
nately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and con-
figuration of the road.
SEL686V

• Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which

the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map SD card,
or when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road
pattern are different due to repair.
The map-matching function may find another road and position the
vehicle mark on it when driving on a road not present in the map.
Then, the vehicle mark may change to it when the correct road is
detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map SD card is limited. Therefore, correction by
SKIA0613E
map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap
between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel-
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049
mile).
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position-
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
SEL526V
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the
vehicle.

Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:

• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.
AUXILIARY INPUT FUNCTION
• Sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with USB connector and AUX jack.
• AUX sound signals are transmitted to each speaker via NAVI control unit.
USB CONNECTION FUNCTION
• iPod or music files in USB memory can be played.
• Sound signals are transmitted to each speaker via NAVI control unit.

AV-80
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• iPod is recharged when connected to USB connector and AUX jack.
iPod is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. A
NOTE:
Use the enclosed USB harness when connecting iPod to USB connector and AUX jack.
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM B
• Volume level of this system gone up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed.
• The control level can be selected by the customer.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM C
• Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting to cellular phone using Bluetooth®.
• Operation is performed by steering switch.
• Guide sound that is heard during operation is output from NAVI control unit to front speaker. D

METER DISPLAY
Audio Indicator E
• The steering switch is connected to the combination meter.
• The combination meter transmits a steering switch signal to the NAVI control unit via AV communication
when the user operates the audio with the steering switch.
F
• The NAVI control unit changes the status of function according to the steering switch operation when receiv-
ing a steering switch signal.
• The NAVI control unit transmits an meter display signal to the combination meter via AV communication and
displays the status of audio on the combination meter (in the information display) when the function is G
changed by an operation.
Navigation Indicator
• When the navigation system is ON, the NAVI control unit transmits a meter display signal to the combination H
meter via AV communication.
• The combination meter displays a navigation status on the combination meter (in the information display)
when receiving a meter display signal. I
Hands-free Phone Indicator
• When a cell phone that is connected with the NAVI control unit via Bluetooth® communication receives a
phone call, the incoming call is displayed on the information display in combination meter. J
• When NAVI control unit recognizes an incoming call from a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication, it
transmits the meter display signal to combination meter via AV communication.
• When combination meter receives the meter display signal, it displays the incoming call of cell phone on K
information display.
• When an incoming call is received, the driver can operate the steering switch to answer the phone.
• When steering switch is operated, the combination meter receives the steering switch signal, and then com-
L
bination meter transmits the steering switch signal to the NAVI control unit via AV communication.
• When NAVI control unit receives the steering switch signal, it activates the hands-free phone.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR FUNCTION M
• This system is equipped with wide-angle cameras on the front and rear of the vehicle and on both right and
left door mirrors. The images from front view, rear view, front-side view (RH side), and birds-eye view that
shows the view from the top of the vehicle are displayed to monitor the vehicle surroundings.
• Around view monitor control unit cuts out and expands the image received from each camera to create each AV
view.
• In front view and rear view, the vehicle width, distance lines and predictive course lines are superimposed
and displayed. In front-side view, the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line are dis- O
played.
• The Birds-Eye view converts the images from 4 cameras into the overhead view and displays the status of
the vehicle on display. The vehicle icon that are displayed on the Birds-Eye view display are rendered by
around view monitor control unit. P

Around View Monitor Screen

• Around view monitor combines and displays the travel direction view and “Birds-Eye view”, “Front-Side
view”.
• Around view monitor control unit renders the view icon and warning message on display.

AV-81
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Screen constitution

JSNIA7282GB

NOTE:
There is the icon which is not displayed by specifications.
Operation Description
• Around view monitor operates by pressing the “CAMERA” switch or shifting the selector lever to the reverse
position.
• When the selector lever is in any position other than the reverse position, the screen is switched to the
around view monitor by pressing the “CAMERA” switch.
• The screen is switched to the around view monitor by shifting the selector lever to the reverse position.
• In the around view monitor, Birds-Eye view, Front-side view can be switched by pressing the “CAMERA”
switch.
• The around view monitor is cancelled 3 minutes after pressing the “CAMERA” switch or vehicle speed is
approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH), and then the screen returns to the screen before displaying the around
view monitor when selector lever is in a position other than the reverse position.
• In the Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed to show the border of 4 camera images. In addition, red
fixed lines are displayed in 4 corners of the vehicle icon. After turning the ignition switch ON, the invisible
area is highlighted with yellow and red fixed lines are blink only once.

AV-82
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Around view monitor screen transition
A

I
JSNIA7287GB

FRONT VIEW
• The front view image is from the front camera. J
• When the selector lever is in any position other than the reverse position, the front view is displayed by
pressing the “CAMERA” switch. It improves the visibility of obstacles in front of the vehicle and helps driving
by the images displayed from Birds-Eye view and Front-Side view.
K
• Display the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in front view and display the predic-
tive course line according to the steering angle.
• If the steering angle is within approximately 90 degrees, the predictive course lines on the left/right side are
displayed. If the steering angle is exceeding approximately 90 degrees, only the predictive course line on the L
outside (in the opposite side of steering direction) is displayed.
• Around view monitor control unit receives the steering angle signal from steering angle sensor via CAN com-
munication, and controls the direction and distance of the predictive course line. M
• ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed by CONSULT.

AV-83
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Front view guiding lines

JSNIA0770GB

REAR VIEW
• The rear view image is from the rear camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, the rear view is displayed. Backing and parking are
improved by the images from Birds-Eye view and Front-Side view.
• Display the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in Rear view and display the predic-
tive course line according to the steering angle.
• The predictive course line is not displayed at the steering neutral position.
• Around view monitor control unit receives the steering angle signal from steering angle sensor via CAN com-
munication, and controls the direction and distance of the predictive course line.
• ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed by CONSULT.
Rear view guiding lines

JSNIA4567GB

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

• Moving Object Detection (MOD) is a function that notifies the driver of the presence of moving objects in the
area around the vehicle. MOD detects moving objects from camera image, illuminates frame of view in yel-
low whenever “MOD” icon is displayed in blue, and sounds buzzer in combination meter.
• MOD detects moving objects while camera image is displayed on display.
• Around view monitor control unit performs the following process when moving objects are detected.
- Superimposes yellow frame line on camera image signal and outputs them to display.
- Transmits buzzer output signal to combination meter via CAN communication so that buzzer in combination
meter sounds.
• Around view monitor control unit detects moving objects from camera image according to an image recogni-
tion method called optical flow.

AV-84
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• MOD does not detect a background as a moving object when the vehicle moves (when whole screen
moves), but detects a moving object when an actual moving object is displayed on screen. A
• MOD can be set to permanent OFF by the following operation.
- Permanent OFF: Settings can be performed on the information display of the combination meter.
• Color of “MOD” icon indicates whether or not MOD is operative. “MOD” icon is displayed as shown in the fol-
B
lowing table. When MOD is operative, “MOD” icon is displayed in blue. When MOD is not operative, “MOD”
icon is displayed in gray or orange. MOD icon is not displayed when MOD is off (permanent off).
• MOD illuminates frame of view in yellow and sounds buzzer, when any of the conditions in the following table
are satisfied. C

Operation Condition
View where MOD is operative D
Shift position Vehicle speed
P and N position 0 km/h (0 MPH) Birds-eye view
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8
R position Rear view E
km/h (5 MPH)
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8
D position Front view
km/h (5 MPH)
F
• MOD does not operate or stops operation when any of the conditions in the following table are satisfied.
“MOD” icon is displayed in gray or orange.
G
“MOD” icon
Operation stop condition Note
color
Front or rear door is open. Gray Operation of Birds-eye view stops when door is open.
H
Back door is open. Gray Operation of Birds-eye view and rear view stops when back door is open.
Rear camera installation Operation of rear view stops when rear view camera installation angle is
Gray
angle is incorrect incorrect. I
Front camera image is Operation of Birds-eye view and front view stops when front camera im-
Gray
abnormal (Temporary) age is temporarily abnormal.
Side camera image is ab- Operation of Birds-eye view stops when side camera image is temporari- J
Gray
normal (Temporary) ly abnormal.
Rear camera image is ab- Operation of Birds-eye view and rear view stops when rear camera image
Gray
normal (Temporary) is temporarily abnormal.
K
System malfunction Orange Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index"

FRONT-SIDE VIEW
• The front-side view image is from the side camera RH. (LHD models) L
• The front-side view image is from the side camera LH. (RHD models)
• In Front-Side view, display the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line.
M

AV-85
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Front-side view area and guiding line

JSNIA0771GB

NOTE:
RHD model displays a image from side camera LH.
BIRDS-EYE VIEW
• The image from the 4 cameras is cut out and converted into the overhead view, and the surroundings of the
vehicle is displayed in birds-eye view.
• In Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the 4 cameras.
Birds-Eye view display image

AWNIA3345GB

AV-86
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Birds-Eye view display area
A

H
JSNIA3986GB

Camera Image Operation Principle

• If the camera image calibration is incomplete, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the I
Birds-Eye view display. (Calibration operation is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing
around view monitor control unit.)
• Around view monitor control unit receives the camera switch signal via CAN communication from NAVI con-
trol unit by pressing the “CAMERA” switch. J
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera switch signal supplies the power to each camera
and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, around view monitor control unit receives the reverse sig- K
nal, supplies the power to each camera, and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera image signal from each camera cuts out the
required screen for each view, superimposes the camera image, vehicle icon, guiding lines, and outputs
them to the NAVI control unit. L

Precautions for Vehicle Width Guide Line and Predictived Course Line Display on The Rear View Monitor Display
Side distance guide lines and predictive course line on the display may be different from actual lines depend-
ing on vehicle conditions and road conditions. M

PRECAUTIONS FOR ROAD CONDITIONS

AV-87
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• Since guide lines and predictive course line are drawn based on the road, a different distance may be dis-
played if a protruding block is present nearby.

JSNIA3995GB

PRECAUTIONS FOR BLOCK

AV-88
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
• Since guide lines and predictive course line are drawn based on the road, a different distance may be dis-
played if a protruding block is present nearby. A

H
JSNIA3996GB

AV-89
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010714802

WITHOUT BSW

JSNIA7360GB

AV-90
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
WITH BSW
A

JSNIA7361GB
P
Fail-Safe (NAVI Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010828199

If a malfunction occurs in the multi-AV system, NAVI control unit performs fail-safe activation according to the
detected malfunction.

AV-91
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Detection item Multi-AV system operation in fail-safe mode DTC

The system using the CAN communication signal from control unit which cannot
U1000
CAN communication communicate does not function.
The system using the CAN communication signal does not function. U1010
U1217
U1229
U12AC
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate.
U12AD
NAVI control unit NOTE:
U12AE
Symptom other than an item may occur.
U12AF
U12B0
U12B1
A function of NAVI control unit becomes mismatched with a vehicle specification and
Configuration U12AA
destination.
GPS antenna The vehicle positions of a navigation screen differ. U1244
The system of ECU which detected abnormalities does not operate. U1300
AV communication
The system which is using AV communication does not operate. U1310
U122F
DAB radio antenna DAB radio is not received.
U12B2
USB connector Audio equipment which connected to USB does not operate. U1263
Radio antenna Radio is not received. U12AB

Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010828200

AV-92
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0122 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is B
VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
C
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0416 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel D
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is E
U0428 stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- • BSW system is stopped.
sensor is not complete.
TION • DAA system is stopped.
F
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle G
sensor signal is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
H
stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot • When communication of vehicle signal, I
U1000
transmit/receive CAN communication signal wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
continuously for 2 seconds or more. is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is J
stopped.
- LDW system is stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped. K
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
U1010 MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is L
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) stopped.
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition • Camera image is not displayed (Gray
U111A switch is ON. screen display).
M
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL NOTE: • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not stopped.
saved. AV
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG- O
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of front camera image signal is P
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111C
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.

AV-93
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111D
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
U112F Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the EPS system is malfunction
EPS CIRCUIT cel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle stopped.
U1232
sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • BSW system is stopped.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
angle sensor is received. • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON.
U1302
• When camera power supply output is ON: 5.9 Camera power output is stopped
CAMERA POWER VOLT
- 6.5 V
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply
measurement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view • Unmatched icon display (red) is dis-
monitor control unit and information read played (applicable for unmatched camera
U1304
from camera are not the same. only).
CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
NOTE: • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not cancel.
saved.
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
trol unit is incomplete. • On applicable camera screen marking
U1305 (Red) is displayed.
NOTE:
CONFIG UNFINISH • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. cancel.

• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is

U1308 stopped.
R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDG- Camera image calibration is incomplete • BSW system is stopped.
MNT • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped.
Around view monitor control unit detects the
U1309
value of current from pump control unit is incor- BSW system is stopped.
PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE
rect
U130A PUMP ECU JUDGE If the pump control unit is malfunction BSW system is stopped.
Around view monitor control unit receives the • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U130B
incorrect communication signal from rear view stopped.
RR CAMERA COMM ERROR
camera • BSW system is stopped.
U1320 Reprogramming of around view monitor control Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
REPROGRAMMING unit is incomplete cel
U150E Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the BCM is malfunction
BCM CIRCUIT cel
U1971 Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER correct signal from sonar control unit via CAN
cel
DIAG communication

AV-94
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
U1972 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
correct signal from EPS control unit via CAN
EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG cel
communication B
When around view monitor control unit is not
Other Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.
C

AV-95
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (NAVI CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (NAVI CONTROL UNIT)
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000010714805

The NAVI control unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below:
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM

Mode Item Content

Version data of the NAVI control unit is
Version —
displayed.
• Touch Display Calibration
• Destination Input While
Allows correction of the position detec-
User Configuration Driving —
tion accuracy of the touch panel.
• Screenshot to USB
• Time interval
FM monitor — Monitors the dynamic values of the cur-
AM monitor — rent tuner

• Antenna Status
• Field Strength
• Signal Quality
• Audio Mode
• Audio Quality
• Audio Bitrate
Radio
• Audio Sampling Rate
DAB monitor • Ensemble Channel Current status is displayed.
• Ensemble Name
• Ensemble ID
• Service Name
• Service ID
• FM Frequency
• FM PI-Code
• TPEG in current Ensemble

AV-96
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (NAVI CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Mode Item Content
A
• SD card slot Access
• Power Supply
• Speed Signal
• Direction Signal B
• Illumination Signal
• GPS Antenna
• GPS Tracking
Running System Status
• Satellites Visible
The current system status is displayed.
C
• Satellites Tracked
• Microphone Current
• Steer. Wheelkey
• Radio Antenna D
• DAB-Antenna
• USB Device
• iPod firmware ver.
System State E
• BT Status
Speaker Test 4 kHz This activates a sequence of test tone
— outputs to the audio circuits one after the
Speaker Test 100 Hz other for 1 second. F
This provides a test sequence where
test displays (plain colored display: e.g.
white, black, red, blue, green) are shown G
one after the other.
The respective color is shown for an in-
Display-Test —
dicated period of time (parameter). After
the display test, the design of the display H
previously available is stored. While the
screen shows a plain colored display, a
pixel malfunction may be detected.
I
• SD Card Access
• BT Module Access
A system self test is executed and the
Self Test • GPS Antenna
results are stored into the error memory.
• Radio Antenna J
• DAB-Antenna
Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the NAVI control unit on board diagnosis does not start or the screen does not
display anything. K
METHOD OF STARTING
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF. L
3. While pressing the “SETUP” switch, turn the TUNE-SCROLL
dial counterclockwise 3 or more clicks, then clockwise 3 or more
clicks, then counterclockwise 3 or more clicks. When self diag- M
nosis mode begins, a short beep will be heard. Shifting from cur-
rent screen to previous screen is performed by pressing BACK
button.
AV

O
JSNIA7283ZZ

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Version, User Config, Radio, System State or Self P
Test can be selected.
END ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Turn OFF ignition switch.
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010714806

APPLICATION ITEMS
AV-97
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (NAVI CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
CONSULT performs the following functions via the communication with the NAVI control unit.

Diagnosis mode Description

Ecu Identification The NAVI control unit part number is displayed.
Performs a diagnosis on the NAVI control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communica-
Self Diagnostic Result
tion circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The NAVI control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing NAVI control unit.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of NAVI control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Refer to AV-110, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item [Unit] Description

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on CAN communication
VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]
line.
ILLUM SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of illumination signal for the NAVI control unit.
IGN SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of ignition signal.
REV SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of reverse signal received from BCM.

CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows.

Function Description
Allows the reading of vehicle specification written in NAVI control
Before Replace ECU
unit to store the specification in CONSULT.
Read/Write Configuration
Allows the writing of the vehicle information stored in CONSULT
After Replace ECU
into the NAVI control unit.
Allows the writing of the vehicle specification into the NAVI control
Manual Configuration
unit by hand.

AV-98
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
A
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010714807

CONSULT FUNCTIONS B
CONSULT performs the following functions via the CAN communication with the around view monitor control
unit.
C
Diagnosis mode Description
ECU Identification Around view monitor control unit part number can be identified.
Around view monitor control unit diagnosis is performed. Current and previous malfunctions are D
Self Diagnostic Results
displayed collectively.
Diagnosis of vehicle signal that is received by around view monitor control unit can be per-
Data Monitor
formed. E
• Calibration and initialization of each camera can be performed.
• Fine tuning of Birds-eye view can be performed.
• Target line calibration of rear wide view can be performed.
• Language of warning message can be selected. F
Work Support • Display of predicted course line can be switched to ON/OFF.
• Neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor can be performed.
• Camera screen activation enhancing display can be switched to ON/OFF.
G
• Calibration for BSW can be performed.
• Displays causes of system cancellation occurred during system control.
Enables an operational check of a load by transmitting a driving signal from the around view
Active Test H
monitor control unit to the load.
• The vehicle specification that is written in around view monitor control unit can be displayed
Configuration or stored.
• The vehicle specification can be written when around view monitor control unit is replaced. I
ECU IDENTIFICATION
Around view monitor control unit part number can be identified.
J
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".
• In CONSULT self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively. K
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000] and [U1010] is detected. The counter
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
L
Freeze Frame Data (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT.

Item name Display content M

ODO/TRIP
METER Total driving distance (odometer value) upon DTC detection is displayed.
(km) AV

DATA MONITOR
NOTE: O
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the around view monitor control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system. P

Display Item Remarks

ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL Receiving status of steering angle signal received from steering angle sensor is switched to
[ON/OFF] ON/OFF.
REVERSE SIGNAL
Receiving status of reverse signal received from NAVI control unit is displayed by ON/OFF.
[ON/OFF]

AV-99
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Display Item Remarks
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Receiving status of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
[ON/OFF] unit) is displayed by ON/OFF.
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL Receiving status of camera switch signal received from NAVI control unit is displayed by ON/
[ON/OFF] OFF.
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL Receiving status of camera OFF signal received from NAVI control unit is displayed by ON/
[ON/OFF] OFF.
Input type of steering angle sensor is displayed.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE
NOTE:
[Absolute]
For this vehicle, “Absolute” is displayed.
Type of steering gear ratio is displayed.
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE
NOTE:
[TYPE 0]
For this vehicle, “TYPE 0” is displayed.
STEERING POSITION
Steering position is displayed.
[RHD/LHD]
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Input status of rear camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
Indicates [On/Off] status of the washer switch signal input.
WASH SW
NOTE:
[OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.
R-CAMERA COMM STATUS
Communication status with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
R-CAMERA COMM LINE
Status of communication line with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Input status of front view camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
• Input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (LHD mod-
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG els)
[OK/NG] • Input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (RHD mod-
els)
• Input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (LHD mod-
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG els)
[OK/NG] • Input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (RHD mod-
els)
PUMP COMM STATUS
Communication status with pump control unit is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
ILL
Receiving status of dimmer signal received from BCM is displayed by ON/OFF.
[ON/OFF]
ITS SW 1 Indicates the state of the warning systems switch as seen by the around view monitor control
[ON/OFF] unit.
Indicates the state of the warning systems switch indicator output.
ITS SW 1 IND
NOTE:
[OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.
TURN SIGNAL
Indicates [OFF/LEFT/RIGHT] status of the turn signal input.
[OFF/LEFT/RIGHT]
Indicates the status of warning systems switch as seen by the around view monitor control unit.
ITS SW 2
NOTE:
[NO SET]
For this vehicle, “NO SET” is displayed.
Indicates the status of warning systems switch indicator output.
ITS SW 2 IND
NOTE:
[NO SET]
For this vehicle, “NO SET” is displayed.
VEHICLE SPEED
Vehicle speed from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
[km/h]
The stop/start status received from ECM is displayed.
IDLE STOP STATUS
NOTE:
[ON/OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.

AV-100
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Display Item Remarks
A
TRAILER HITCH SW
The towed vehicle connection status is displayed.
[ON/OFF]
STEERING ANGLE
Steering angle received from steering angle sensor is displayed. B
[°]

WORK SUPPORT
C
Display Item Remarks
NON-VIEWABLE AREA REMINDER ON/OFF setting of the non-viewable area reminder can be performed.
REAR WIDE-VIEW FIXED GUIDE D
The position of rear wide view guiding line can be changed.
LINE CORRECTION
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE DIS-
ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed.
PLAY E
The calibration can be initialized to factory shipment condition.
INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALI- NOTE:
BRATION Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
F
Steering angle sensor neutral position can be adjusted and registered.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AD- CAUTION:
JUSTMENT For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS ac- G
tuator control unit side. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".
Performs the calibration of front camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE: H
(FRONT CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
• Performs the calibration of side camera RH. (LHD models)
I
• Performs the calibration of side camera LH. (RHD models)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
NOTE:
(PASS-SIDE CAMERA)
Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed. J
• Performs the calibration of side camera LH. (LHD models)
• Performs the calibration of side camera RH. (RHD models)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
NOTE:
(DR-SIDE CAMERA)
Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
K
formed.
Performs the calibration of rear camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE: L
(REAR CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
The confirmation and adjustment of the difference between each camera can be performed. M
FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW The fine adjustment function of camera calibration can check and adjust the difference be-
tween each camera.
Language of warning message shown during camera image display can be selected.
SELECT LANGUAGE OF WARNING AV
[ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, DUTCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, PORTUGAL, RUSSIAN, JAP-
MESSAGE
ANESE, CHINESE 1 (TRADITIONAL), CHINESE 2 (SIMPLIFIED), KOREAN]
REAR CAMERA ITS Calibration for BSW can be performed.
O
NOTE:
CAUSE OF LDW CANCEL
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
CAUSE OF BSW CANCEL Displays causes of automatic system cancellation occurred during control of the BSW system.
P
Displays causes of automatic system cancellation occurred during control of the around view
CAUSE OF IPA CANCEL
monitor with Park Assist system.
NOTE:
• Causes of the maximum five cancellations (system cancel) are displayed.
• The displayed cancellation causes display the number of the ignition switch ON/OFF up to 254. It is fixed to
254 if it is over 254. It returns to 0 when the same cancellation cause is detected again.
Display Items for The Cause of BSW Cancel

AV-101
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Cause of cancellation Description

REAR CAMERA DIRTY Rear camera lens is dirty.
TRUNK OPEN Back door is open.
TRAILER HITCH ON Towing (by attaching a trailer).
R CAMERA COMM ERR Communication error between around view monitor control unit and rear camera.
LOW WASH FLUID Washer fluid level is low.
LO TMP(AIR WIPING) Ambient temperature drops to -20 °C (-4 °F) or less.
LO TMP(WSH WIPING) Washer fluid temperature drops to -20 °C (-4 °F) or less.
CAMERA ANGLE ERROR Improper installation of rear camera.
PUMP C/U COMM ERROR Communication error between around view monitor control unit and pump control unit.
CAMERA IMAGE ERROR Camera image signal is malfunction.
NO RECORD —

Display Items for The Cause of Around View Monitor with Park Assist Cancel
NOTE:
• Causes of the maximum five cancellations (system cancel) are displayed.
• The displayed cancellation causes display the number of the ignition switch ON/OFF up to 254. It is fixed to
254 if it is over 254. It returns to 0 when the same cancellation cause is detected again.

Cause of cancellation Description

STRG SEN CIRCUIT A malfunction is detected in steering angle sensor.
TRUNK OPEN Back door is open.
Vehicle towed A towing vehicle is connected.
VDC CIRCUIT VDC detects a malfunction.
VHCL SPD UNMATCH A malfunction is detected in vehicle speed signal.
SONAR CIRCUIT A sonar control unit malfunction has occurred.
The CAN communication signals needed by the Around view monitor control unit cannot be re-
CAN COMM ERROR
ceived.
BCM CIRCUIT BCM detects a malfunction.
ESP CIRCUIT EPS control unit detects a malfunction.
CVT CIRCUIT TCM detects a malfunction.
ECM CIRCUIT ECM detects a malfunction.
DOOR OPEN A door is open.
VDC OFF VDC OFF switch is pressed.
SHIFT POSITION A shift position other than the specified position is detected.
NO RECORD —

ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Never perform “Active Test” while driving the vehicle.
• The “Active Test” cannot be performed when the following systems malfunction is displayed.
- LDW
- BSW
• Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then perform the test.

Test items Description

LED LH INDICATOR BSW indicator LH can be illuminated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.
LED RH INDICATOR BSW indicator RH can be illuminated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.
WASH ACTIVE Camera washer can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.

AV-102
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Test items Description
A
AIR ACTIVE Camera blower can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.
AIR & WASH ACTIVE Camera blower and washer can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.

LED LH INDICATOR B

Test item Operation Description BSW indicator LH

Stops transmitting the BSW indicator LH signal below to C
Off OFF
end the test
LED LH INDICATOR
Transmits the BSW indicator LH signal to the BSW indi-
On ON
cator D

LED RH INDICATOR
E
Test item Operation Description BSW indicator RH
Stops transmitting the BSW indicator RH signal below to
Off OFF
end the test
LED RH INDICATOR F
Transmits the BSW indicator RH signal to the BSW indi-
On ON
cator

WASH ACTIVE G

Test item Operation Description Rear camera washer

Off
Stops transmitting the rear camera washer signal below
OFF
H
to end the test
WASH ACTIVE
Transmits the rear camera washer signal to the pump
On ON
control unit via communication line
I
NOTE:
The test can be performed only when the trunk lid is closed. (Trunk room lamp switch is OFF.)
AIR ACTIVE J

Test item Operation Description Rear camera air blower

Stops transmitting the rear camera air blow signal below K
Off OFF
to end the test
AIR ACTIVE
Transmits the rear camera air blow signal to the pump
On ON
control unit via communication line L
NOTE:
The test can be performed only when the trunk lid is closed. (Trunk room lamp switch is OFF.)
AIR & WASHER ACTIVE M

Rear camera air blower and

Test item Operation Description
washer AV
Stops transmitting the rear camera air blow / washer sig-
Off OFF
AIR & WASHER AC- nal below to end the test
TIVE Transmits the rear camera air blow / washer signal to O
On ON
the pump control unit via communication line
NOTE:
The test can be performed only when the trunk lid is closed. (Trunk room lamp switch is OFF.) P
CONFIGURATION
Configuration includes functions as follows.

AV-103
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Function Description
Allows the reading of vehicle specification written in around view
Before Replace ECU
monitor control unit to store the specification in CONSULT.
Read/Write Configuration
Allows the writing of the vehicle information stored in CONSULT
After Replace ECU
into the around view monitor control unit.
Allows the writing of the vehicle specification into the around view
Manual Configuration
monitor control unit by hand.

AV-104
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010714808
B

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On

VHCL SPD SIG
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off E
Ignition switch Lighting switch is ON On
ILLUM SIG
ON Lighting switch is OFF Off
F
Ignition switch
— On
ON
IGN SIG
Ignition switch
— Off G
ACC

Ignition switch Selector lever is in R position On

REV SIG
ON Selector lever is in any position other than R Off
H
TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA7236ZZ M
PHYSICAL VALUES
AV

AV-105
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

2 3 Igni-
Waveform synchro-
Sound signal front tion
(Y)*1 (R)*1 Output Sound output. nized with voice is
LH switch
(W)*2 (P)*2 output.
ON

SKIB3609E

Igni-
Waveform synchro-
4 5 Sound signal rear tion
Output Sound output. nized with voice is
(GR) (BR) LH switch
output.
ON

SKIB3609E

Igni-
tion
switch — — 0 - 0.5 V
ON or
7 Grou Auto ACC input ACC
Input
(W) nd signal
Igni-
tion
— — 3.15 V
switch
OFF
8 Input/
— CAN–H — — — —
(L) Output

Igni- Lighting switch is

— 0V
9 Grou tion OFF.
Illumination signal Input
(V) nd switch Lighting switch is
ON 10.8 – 15.6 V 12.0 V
ON.

12 Igni-
11 Waveform synchro-
(GR)* Sound signal front tion
(W)*1 1 Output Sound output. nized with voice is
RH switch
(G)*2 output.
(V)*2 ON

SKIB3609E

Igni-
Waveform synchro-
13 14 Sound signal rear tion
Output Sound output. nized with voice is
(LG) (Y) RH switch
output.
ON

SKIB3609E

17 Input/
— CAN–L — — — —
(R) Output

AV-106
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE: B
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
Igni- C
Vehicle speed sig- When vehicle Input waveform that
18 Grou tion
nal Input speed is approx. repeats 1.0 V or less
(G) nd switch
(8-pulse) 40 km/h (25 MPH) – 3.0 V or more.
ON
D

JSNIA0012GB
E
Igni-
19 Grou Battery power tion
Input — 10.8 – 15.6 V Battery voltage
(L) nd supply switch
OFF F
Igni-
20 Grou tion
Ground — — — 0V
(B) nd switch G
ON
21 AUX audio signal
— Input — — — —
(G) RH
H
22 AUX audio signal
— — — — — —
(Y) ground
23 AUX audio signal I
— Input — — — —
(L) LH
Selector lever is in
Igni- 10.8 – 15.6 V 12.0 V
R position.
25 Grou tion J
Reverse signal Input Selector lever is in
(BR) nd switch
ON other than R posi- — 0V
tion.
K
Either of the fol-
lowing conditions
• Lighting switch
OFF L
• Expose the auto — 0V
Igni- light optical sen-
30 Grou tion sor to light when
Dimmer signal Input the light switch M
(BG) nd switch
ON is ON.
Block the light
beam from the AV
auto light optical 10.8 – 15.6 V 12.0 V
sensor when the
light switch is ON.
31 AV communication Input/ O
— — — — —
(SB) signal (H) Output
32 AV communication Input/
— — — — —
(LG) signal (L) Output P

AV-107
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

The value between

Igni-
the maximum input
34 Grou tion
Microphone signal Input Give a voice. voltage and the min-
(W) nd switch
imum input voltage
ON
is 4.72V or less.

PKIB5037J

Igni-
35 Grou tion
Microphone VCC Output — — 5.0 V
(B) nd switch
ON
36 — Shield — — — — —
37 — Shield — — — — —
38 AV communication Input/
— — — — —
(SB) signal (H) Output
39 AV communication Input/
— — — — —
(LG) signal (L) Output
Igni-
40 Grou tion
Ignition signal Input — 10.8 – 15.6 V 12.0 V
(LG) nd switch
ON

Igni- Input the waveform

41 Grou Camera image tion At camera images synchronized with
Input
(G) nd signal switch is displayed. the rear view cam-
ON era image.

SKIB0827E

42 — Shield — — — — —
81 — USB ground — — — — —
82 — V BUS signal Output — — — —
Input/
83 — USB D− signal — — — —
Output
Input/
84 — USB D+ signal — — — —
Output
85 — Shield — — — — —
Igni-
Not connected to
Grou GPS antenna sig- tion
86 Input GPS antenna con- — 5.0 V
nd nal switch
nector.
ON
87 — Shield — — — — —
Antenna amp. ON
88 — Output — — 10.8 – 15.6 V 12.0 V
signal
89 — Antenna signal Input — — — —
DAB antenna sig-
90 — Input — — — —
nal
*1: Models with 4 speakers
*2: Models with 6 speakers

AV-108
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Fail-Safe (NAVI Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010714809

A
If a malfunction occurs in the multi-AV system, NAVI control unit performs fail-safe activation according to the
detected malfunction.
B
Detection item Multi-AV system operation in fail-safe mode DTC
The system using the CAN communication signal from control unit which cannot
U1000
CAN communication communicate does not function.
C
The system using the CAN communication signal does not function. U1010
U1217
U1229 D
U12AC
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate.
U12AD
NAVI control unit NOTE:
U12AE
Symptom other than an item may occur.
U12AF E
U12B0
U12B1
A function of NAVI control unit becomes mismatched with a vehicle specification and
Configuration
destination.
U12AA F

GPS antenna The vehicle positions of a navigation screen differ. U1244

The system of ECU which detected abnormalities does not operate. U1300 G
AV communication
The system which is using AV communication does not operate. U1310
U122F
DAB radio antenna DAB radio is not received.
U12B2 H
USB connector Audio equipment which connected to USB does not operate. U1263
Radio antenna Radio is not received. U12AB
I
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010714810

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
J
tion priority chart.

Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 U12AA: CONFIGURATION ERROR
K

• U1000: CAN COMM CIRC

2
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
L
• U12AC: DISPLAY TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH
• U12AD: ECU TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH
• U12AE: INTERNAL AMP TEMP WARNING
• U12AF: CD MECHANISM TEMP WARNING M
3
• U12B0: SUPPLY VOLTAGE UNDER 9V
• U12B1: SUPPLY VOLTAGE OVER 16V
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
• U1310: CONTROL UNIT(AV) AV
• U1217: BLUETOOTH MODULE
• U1229: iPod CERTIFICATION
• U122F: DAB CONN ERROR O
4 • U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN
• U1263: USB OVERCURRENT
• U12AB: FM ANTENNA ERROR
• U12B2: DAB ANTENNA CONN P

AV-109
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010714811

DTC Display item Refer to

AV-177, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC De-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRC
scription"
AV-180, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC De-
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
scription"
U1217 BLUETOOTH MODULE AV-202, "DTC Description"
U1229 iPod CERTIFICATION AV-203, "DTC Description"
U122F DAB CONN ERROR AV-204, "DTC Description"
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-206, "DTC Description"
U1263 USB OVERCURRENT AV-208, "DTC Description"
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR AV-209, "DTC Description"
U12AB FM ANTENNA ERROR AV-210, "DTC Description"
U12AC DISPLAY TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH AV-212, "DTC Description"
U12AD ECU TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH AV-213, "DTC Description"
U12AE INTERNAL AMP TEMP WARNING AV-214, "DTC Description"
U12AF CD MECHANISM TEMP WARNING AV-215, "DTC Description"
U12B0 SUPPLY VOLTAGE UNDER 9V AV-216, "DTC Description"
U12B1 SUPPLY VOLTAGE OVER 16V AV-217, "DTC Description"
U12B2 DAB ANTENNA CONN AV-218, "DTC Description"
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT AV-220, "DTC Description"
U1310 CONTROL UNIT(AV) AV-236, "DTC Description"

AV-110
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010714812

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B

NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. C
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch When steering angle sensor signal is input ON D

ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF

Ignition switch When selector lever is in “R” ON

REVERSE SIGNAL
ON
E
When selector lever is in any position other than “R” OFF

Ignition switch When vehicle speed is input ON

VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF F
Ignition switch When camera switch signal is input ON
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF
When camera OFF signal is input ON
G
Ignition switch
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF
Ignition switch H
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE — Absolute
ON
Ignition switch
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE — TYPE 0
ON
I
Ignition switch LHD models LHD
STEERING POSITION
ON RHD models RHD
When rear camera image signal input status is normal OK J
Ignition switch
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL When rear camera image signal input status is not
ON NG
normal
Ignition switch K
WASH SW — OFF
ON
When communication status with rear camera is nor-
OK
Ignition switch mal L
R-CAMERA COMM STATUS
ON When communication status with rear camera is not
NG
normal
When communication line with rear camera is normal OK M
Ignition switch
R-CAMERA COMM LINE When communication line with rear camera is not nor-
ON NG
mal
When front camera image signal input status is nor- AV
OK
Ignition switch mal
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
ON When front camera image signal input status is not
NG
normal O
When driver side camera image signal input status is
OK
Ignition switch normal
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
ON When driver side camera image signal input status is P
NG
not normal
When passenger side camera image signal input sta-
OK
Ignition switch tus is normal
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
ON When passenger side camera image signal input sta-
NG
tus is not normal

AV-111
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch When communication signal is input OK

PUMP COMM STATUS
ON Other than the above NG

Ignition switch When lighting switch is ON ON

ILL
ON When lighting switch is OFF OFF
Warning systems switch is ON. (Warning systems ON
ON
Ignition switch indicator illuminates.)
ITS SW 1
ON Warning systems switch is OFF. (Warning systems
OFF
ON indicator OFF.)
Ignition switch
ITS SW 1 IND — OFF
ON
Turn signal RH: ON RIGHT
Ignition switch
TURN SIGNAL Turn signal LH: ON LEFT
ON
Turn signal: OFF OFF
Ignition switch
ITS SW 2 — NO SET
ON
Ignition switch
ITS SW 2 IND — NO SET
ON
Displays approxi-
mately the same
VEHICLE SPEED Ignition switch ON speed as the value
indicated on the
speedometer.
Ignition switch
IDLE STOP STATUS — OFF
ON

Ignition switch When a towing vehicle is connected ON

TRAILER HITCH SW
ON Other than the above OFF
Displays a value
STEERING ANGLE Ignition switch ON that corresponds to
the steering angle.

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA4749ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Without BSW

AV-112
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(B)
ON
C
Ignition
2 1
Battery power supply Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(Y) (B)
OFF
Ignition D
4 1
Ignition signal Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(SB) (B)
ON
9 E
— Camera switch signal Input — — — —
(G)
10 Input/
— CAN-L — — — —
(R) Output F
12 Input/
— CAN-H — — — —
(L) Output
Ignition G
Camera image signal
23 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
ground
ON
Input the waveform synchronized H
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
24
23 Camera image signal Output switch — I
(G)
ON

J
JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
25
Ground Rear camera ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(B) K
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.
L
Ignition
26 Rear camera image
27 Input switch —
(R) signal (+)
ON
M

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
AV
Rear camera image
27 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
signal (−)
ON
Ignition O
28 Rear camera power
27 Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(W) supply
ON
Ignition P
29 Driver side camera
Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(Y) ground
ON
Ignition
30 29 Driver side camera
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(L) (Y) power supply
ON

AV-113
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Driver side camera
31 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
image signal (−)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
32 Driver side camera
31 Input switch —
(G) image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
33 Passenger side cam-
Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(L) era ground
ON
Ignition
34 33 Passenger side cam-
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(B) (L) era power supply
ON
Ignition
Passenger side cam-
35 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
era image signal (−)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
36 Passenger side cam-
35 Input switch —
(Y) era image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
37
Ground Front camera ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(V)
ON
Ignition
38 37 Front camera power
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(L) (V) supply
ON
Ignition
Front camera image
39 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
signal (−)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
40 Front camera image
39 Input switch —
(LG) signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

With BSW

AV-114
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(B)
ON
C
Ignition
2 1
Battery power supply Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(Y) (B)
OFF
Ignition D
3 1
Ignition signal Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(SB) (B)
ON
Ignition Approx. 2 sec. after ignition E
7
Ground BSW indicator LH Output switch switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb 5.5 - 16 V 12.0 V
(R)
ON check).
Ignition Approx. 2 sec. after ignition F
8
Ground BSW indicator RH Output switch switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb 5.5 - 16 V 12.0 V
(G)
ON check)
27 Input/
— CAN-H — — — — G
(L) Output
28 Input/
— CAN-L — — — —
(R) Output
H
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status.

Communication sig- Ignition I

36
Ground nal Output switch —
(Y)
(CAMERA → PUMP) ON

J
PKIB5039J

Ignition
37 K
Ground COMM GND — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(V)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status. L

Communication sig- Ignition

38
Ground nal Input switch —
(SB) M
(PUMP → CAMERA) ON

PKIB5039J AV
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.
O
Ignition
47
48 Camera image signal Output switch —
(G)
ON
P

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
Camera image signal
48 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
ground
ON

AV-115
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status.

Ignition
49 52 Rear camera commu- Input/
switch —
(LG) (B) nication signal Output
ON

JSNIA0836GB

Ignition
50 52 Rear camera power
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(R) (B) supply
ON
Ignition
52
Ground Rear camera ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(B)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
53 Rear camera image
54 Input switch —
(W) signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
Rear camera image
54 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
signal (−)
ON
Ignition
56 58 Driver side camera
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(L) (Y) power supply
ON
Ignition
58 Driver side camera
Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(Y) ground
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
59 Driver side camera
60 Input switch —
(G) image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
Driver side camera
60 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
image signal (−)
ON
Ignition
62 64 Passenger side cam-
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(B) (L) era power supply
ON
Ignition
64 Passenger side cam-
Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(L) era ground
ON

AV-116
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Input the waveform synchronized B
with the camera image signal.

Ignition C
65 Passenger side cam-
66 Input switch —
(Y) era image signal (+)
ON

D
JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
Passenger side cam-
66 Ground
era image signal (−)
— switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V E
ON
Ignition
68 70 Front camera power
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(L) (V) supply F
ON
Ignition
70
Ground Front camera ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(V) G
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.
H
Ignition
71 Front camera image
72 Input switch —
(LG) signal (+)
ON
I

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
J
Front camera image
72 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
signal (−)
ON
K
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010714813

DTC L
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
C1A00 Around view monitor control unit internal mal- Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
CONTROL UNIT function cel M
• The battery voltage sent to around view mon-
itor control unit remains less than 7.9 V for 5
C1A01 seconds Around view monitor with Park Assist is can- AV
POWER SUPPLY CIRC • The battery voltage sent to around view mon- cel
itor control unit remains more than 19.3 V for
5 seconds
• BSW system is cancel O
If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from • DAA system is stopped.
C1A03 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) re- • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC ceived by the around view monitor control unit cancel
via CAN communication, are inconsistent • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
P
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• DAA system is stopped.
C1A04 If a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC system cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel

AV-117
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
C1A07 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the CVT is malfunction
CVT CIRCUIT cel
• BSW system is cancel
C1A39 • DAA system is stopped.
If the steering angle sensor is malfunction
STRG SEN CIR • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
cancel
C1A56 The around view monitor control unit detects Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR CIRC that sonar control unit has a malfunction cel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0122 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0416 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U0428 stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- • BSW system is stopped.
sensor is not complete.
TION • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot • When communication of vehicle signal,
U1000
transmit/receive CAN communication signal wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
continuously for 2 seconds or more. is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- LDW system is stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
U1010 MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) stopped.
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition • Camera image is not displayed (Gray
U111A switch is ON. screen display).
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL NOTE: • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not stopped.
saved.
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.

AV-118
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of front camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111C
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen B
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
C
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111D
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display). D
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
U112F Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the EPS system is malfunction E
EPS CIRCUIT cel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U1232
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle stopped. F
sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • BSW system is stopped.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
angle sensor is received. • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped. G
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
U1302
when ignition switch is turned ON. H
• When camera power supply output is ON: 5.9 Camera power output is stopped
CAMERA POWER VOLT
- 6.5 V
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply
measurement. I
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view • Unmatched icon display (red) is dis-
monitor control unit and information read played (applicable for unmatched camera J
U1304
from camera are not the same. only).
CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
NOTE: • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not cancel.
saved. K
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
trol unit is incomplete. • On applicable camera screen marking
U1305 (Red) is displayed.
NOTE: L
CONFIG UNFINISH • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. cancel.

• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is

U1308 stopped.
M
R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDG- Camera image calibration is incomplete • BSW system is stopped.
MNT • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped. AV
Around view monitor control unit detects the
U1309
value of current from pump control unit is incor- BSW system is stopped.
PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE
rect
O
U130A PUMP ECU JUDGE If the pump control unit is malfunction BSW system is stopped.
Around view monitor control unit receives the • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U130B
incorrect communication signal from rear view stopped.
RR CAMERA COMM ERROR
camera • BSW system is stopped.
P

U1320 Reprogramming of around view monitor control Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
REPROGRAMMING unit is incomplete cel
U150E Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the BCM is malfunction
BCM CIRCUIT cel

AV-119
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
U1971 Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER correct signal from sonar control unit via CAN
cel
DIAG communication
Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
U1972 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
correct signal from EPS control unit via CAN
EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG cel
communication
When around view monitor control unit is not
Other Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010714814

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.

Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
2 U1320: REPROGRAMMING
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
3
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
4
• U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
5 • U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION
6 • U130B: RR CAMERA COMM ERROR
7 • U1308: R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDGMNT
• C1A01: POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT 1
• C1A04: ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC
• C1A07: CVT SYSTEM
• C1A39: STRG SEN CIR
• C1B56: SONAR SYSTEM
• U0122: VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS
• U0416: VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS
• U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
8 • U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
• U112F: EPS SYSTEM
• U1302: CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
• U1304: CAMERA CALIBRATION
• U1309: PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE
• U130A: PUMP ECU JUDGE
• U150E: BCM SYSTEM
• U1971: SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER DIAGNOSIS
• U1972: EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAGNOSIS
• C1A00: CONTROL UNIT
9
• C1A03: VHCL SPEED SE CIRC

DTC Index INFOID:0000000010714815

Fail-safe subject system

• A: Around View Monitor system
• B: MOD (Moving Object Detection)
• C: BSW (Blind Spot Warning)
• D: DAA (Driver Attention Alert)
• E: Around view monitor with Park Assist

AV-120
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Fail-safe A
System
DTC Display contents of CONSULT Refer to
B (MOD icon
A C D E
color) B
C1A00 CONTROL UNIT × AV-166
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRC × AV-167
C
C1A03 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC × (Orange) × × × AV-168
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC × (Orange) × × × AV-170
C1A07 CVT system × AV-171 D
C1A39 STRG CIRCUIT × × AV-172
C1B56 SONAR CIRC × AV-173
U0122 VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS × (Orange) × × × AV-174
E

U0416 VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS × (Orange) × × × AV-175

U0428 ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION × × (Orange) × × × AV-176
F
U1000NOTE CAN COMM CIRC × × (Orange) × × × AV-178
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) × AV-180
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-182
G
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-186
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-192 H
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-195
U112F EPS CIRCUIT × AV-201
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB × × (Orange) × × × AV-205 I
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT × AV-222
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIB × × AV-230
J
U1305NOTE CONFIG UNFINISH × AV-231
U1308 R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDGMNT × × AV-232
U1309 PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE × (Blue) × AV-233 K
U130A PUMP ECU JUDGE × (Blue) × AV-234
U130B RR CAMERA COMM ERROR × (Orange) × AV-235
L
U1320 REPROGRAMMING × AV-237
U150E BCM CIRCUIT × AV-238
U1971 SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG × AV-239 M
U1972 EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG × AV-240
NOTE:
AV
Some systems activate fail-safe when U1000 is detected, and some do not.
• The systems which activate failsafe are those which use the signal from the control unit where communica-
tion with the around view monitor control unit is interrupted.
• When U1305 is detected, operates with vehicle settings set to default values. O

AV-121
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

WIRING DIAGRAM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
LHD
LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010714816

JRNWD4112GB

AV-122
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4113GB

AV-123
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4114GB

AV-124
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4115GB

AV-125
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4116GB

AV-126
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4117GB

AV-127
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4118GB

AV-128
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4119GB

AV-129
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4120GB

AV-130
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4121GB

AV-131
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4122GB

AV-132
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4123GB

AV-133
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4124GB

AV-134
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4125GB

AV-135
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4126GB

AV-136
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4127GB

P
RHD

AV-137
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]
RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011045532

JRNWD4128GB

AV-138
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4129GB

AV-139
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4130GB

AV-140
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4131GB

AV-141
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4132GB

AV-142
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4133GB

AV-143
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4134GB

AV-144
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4135GB

AV-145
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4136GB

AV-146
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4137GB

AV-147
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4138GB

AV-148
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4139GB

AV-149
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4140GB

AV-150
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4141GB

AV-151
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH NAVIGATION]

JRNWD4142GB

AV-152
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
MULTI AV SYSTEM
B
MULTI AV SYSTEM : Work Flow INFOID:0000000010714817

OVERALL SEQUENCE C

M
JSNIA4482GB

AV
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-97, "CONSULT Function".
• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-110, "DTC Index".
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-252, "Symptom Table".
O
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items. P
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-153
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT

1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-97, "CONSULT Function".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-110, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-252, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

AV-154
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM : Work Flow INFOID:0000000010714818

A
OVERALL SEQUENCE

JSNIA4482GB
L

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-99, "CONSULT Function".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-252, "Symptom Table". M

DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AV
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred). O
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2. P
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “AVM”. Refer to AV-99, "CONSULT Function".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “AVM” is not displayed.
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:

AV-155
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-252, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “AVM” with CONSULT.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-156
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING NAVI CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000010714819 B

Perform the following operations when replacing NAVI control unit.

Configuration, refer to AV-157, "CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
C
CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000010714820

D
• Since vehicle specifications are not included in the NAVI control unit after replacement, it is required to write
vehicle specifications with CONSULT.
• The NAVI control unit configuration includes functions as follows. E
Function Description
Allows the reading of vehicle specification written in NAVI control
Before Replace ECU F
unit to store the specification in CONSULT.
Read/Write Configuration
Allows the writing of the vehicle information stored in CONSULT
After Replace ECU
into the NAVI control unit.
G
Allows the writing of the vehicle specification into the NAVI control
Manual Configuration
unit by hand.

CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010714821 H

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

I
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “Before Replace ECU”, and save the current vehicle specification in CONSULT.
Is the vehicle specification saved normally?
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.REPLACE NAVI CONTROL UNIT K
Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 3. L
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT Configuration M
Select “Configuration” or “After Replace ECU”, and write the vehicle specification saved in CONSULT to NAVI
control unit.
AV
>> GO TO 6.
4.REPLACE NAVI CONTROL UNIT
O
Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 5.
P
5.WRITE VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT Configuration
Select “Manual Configuration”, and write the setting value as shown in the following table to NAVI control unit
according to the vehicle specification.
CAUTION:
Grasp vehicle specifications precisely. The control of ECU may not function normally if the specifica-
tions are misread.
AV-157
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
NOTE:
• The items shown in this list depend on vehicle specifications.
• The config list may not be displayed depending on vehicle specifications. This is not a malfunction.
• If selection items are not displayed on the CONSULT screen, touch “NEXT”.

MANUAL SETTING ITEM

Detail
Items Setting value
LHD LHD models
STEERING
RHD RHD models
GASOLINE Gasoline engine models
ENGINE TYPE
DIESEL Diesel engine models
MT M/T models
TRANSMISSION
CVT CVT models
• Without around view monitor system
NONE/AVM
• With around view monitor system without park assist
CAMERA SYSTEM
REAR CAMERA With rear view monitor system
AVM+PA With around view monitor system and park assist
BASE Without BOSE system
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE With BOSE system
NORMAL Gasoline or diesel engine
ENGINE TYPE
HYBRID Hybrid
WITHOUT Without front camera
FRONT CAMERA
WITH With front camera

>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT Self Diagnostic Result
Perform self-diagnosis of CONSULT, and check whether or not DTC U12AA is detected.
Is DTC U12AA detected?
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 7.
7.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the NAVI control unit is normal.

>> WORK END

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CON-
TROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL
UNIT : Description INFOID:0000000010714822

• Always perform the around view monitor control unit configuration after replacing the around view monitor
control unit.
• Always perform the around view monitor calibration after removing and installing or replacing the rear cam-
era.
• Always perform the rear camera calibration after removing and installing or replacing the rear camera.
• Always perform the rear camera calibration after replacing the around view monitor control unit.
• Always perform the around view monitor calibration after replacing the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:

AV-158
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
The system does not operate normally unless the around view monitor and rear camera calibration are
performed. Always perform it. A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL
UNIT : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010714823
B
1.AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION
Perform the around view monitor control unit configuration with CONSULT. Refer to AV-159, "CONFIGURA- C
TION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 2. D
2.AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT CALIBRATION
Perform the around view monitor calibration with CONSULT. Refer to AV-161, "CALIBRATING CAMERA
IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure". E

>> GO TO 3.
F
3.REAR CAMERA CALIBRATION
Perform the rear camera calibration with CONSULT. Refer to DAS-110, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".
G
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS H
Perform the self-diagnosis of around view monitor control unit with CONSULT (AVM). Check if any DTC is
detected.
Is any DTC detected? I
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.LDW AND BSW SYSTEM ACTION TEST J
1. Perform the BSW and DAA system action test. Refer to DAS-92, "BSW : Work Procedure" (BSW) and
DAS-95, "DAA : Work Procedure" (DAA).
2. Check that the BSW and DAA system operates normally. K

>> WORK END

L
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000010714824 M

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

CONSULT Configuration AV
Perform “Before Replace ECU”, and save the current vehicle specification in CONSULT.
Is the vehicle specification saved normally?
YES >> GO TO 2. O
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT P
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT Configuration

AV-159
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Select “Configuration” or “After Replace ECU”, and write the vehicle specification saved in CONSULT to
around view monitor control unit.

>> GO TO 6.
4.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 5.
5.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT Configuration
Select “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” and write in the following list at a around view monitor
control unit depending on a vehicle specification.

Setting item
Detail
Items Setting value
LHD LHD models
HANDLE
RHD RHD models
A/T CVT models
TRANSMISSION
M/T M/T models
WITHOUT Without LDW
LDW FUNCTION
WITH With LDW
2WD 2WD models
4WD/2WD
4WD 4WD models
TYPE C Without navigation system
DISPLAY
TYPE G With navigation system
WITHOUT Without sonar system
SONAR
WITH With sonar system

>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT Self Diagnostic Result
Perform self-diagnosis of CONSULT, and check whether or not DTC U1305 is detected.
Is DTC U1305 detected?
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 7.
7.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the around view monitor control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and
predictive course lines) are normal.

>> WORK END

PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
INFOID:0000000010714825

Adjust the center position of the predictive course line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.

AV-160
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000010714826 A

1.DRIVING
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more. B

>> END
C
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description
INFOID:0000000010714827 D
• Calibration must be performed after removing/replacing the cameras, removing parts (e.g. front grille, door
mirror, and others) mounted on the cameras, or replacing the Around view monitor control unit.
• The use of CONSULT is required to perform calibration or writing of calibration results to the Around view E
monitor control unit.
• Align the white lines on the road near the vehicle at the boundary of each camera image by this camera cal-
ibration. The white lines far from the vehicle may not be aligned at the boundary of each camera image. The F
farther the line, the greater the difference is.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000010714828 G

CALIBRATION FLOWCHART
Following the flowchart shown in the figure, perform the calibration. H

O
JSNIA7284GB

NOTE:
View in the incomplete calibration state is indicated by “ ” on the around view monitor. P
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1.AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN CONFIRMATION

AV-161
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Check that there is no indication of “Incomplete calibration”.
Is the “Incomplete calibration” display visible?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

AWNIA2590GB

2.PERFORM SIMPLIFIED CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT BY “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”

1. Put target line 1 on the ground beside each axle using packing tape, etc.
2. Put target lines 2 equal to the vehicle total length + approximately 1.0 m (39.3 in) from the vehicle side
(right and left) at approximately 30 cm (11.8 in) away from the vehicle (make the line as parallel with the
vehicle as possible)
Preparation of simplified target line

JSNIA0927ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2

A. Approx. 30 cm (11.8 in) B. Approx. 1.0 m (39.3 in)

3. CONSULT work support

Touch “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” on the CONSULT screen.
4. On the CONSULT screen, touch “SELECT” button to select right or left camera and perform camera cali-
bration as instructed below:
- If the marker on the screen deviates from Target line 1, touch “AXIS X” button and “AXIS Y” button to
adjust so that the marker is placed on the Target line 1.
- If Target line 2 is misaligned among the cameras, adjust each camera image to bring Target line 2 into a
straight line.
CAUTION:
Never adjust the front camera and rear camera. Only adjust the right and left cameras.

AV-162
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Simplified target line adjustment method
A

E
JSNIA0929ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 3. Marker for target line 1

F
Crosshairs cursor (mark indicated
4. Boundary between cameras 5.
the selected camera)
Adjustment method for target lines 1 Adjustment method for target lines 2
A. B. G
(right) (right)

5. Adjust right and left cameras. Touch "APPLY" on the CONSULT screen to display adjustment results.
6. After adjusting right and left cameras, check that the marker is properly placed on the screen and there is
H
no deviation in Target line 1.
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory default condition with “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled on this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”. I
Is the difference corrected?
YES >> On the CONSULT screen, touch “OK” button to complete writing to the around view monitor con-
trol unit. J
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”
K
Preparation of target line
1. Hang a string with a weight as shown in the figure. Put the points FM0, RM0 (mark) on the ground at the
center of the vehicle front end and rear end with white packing tape or a pen.
2. Route the vinyl string under the vehicle, and then pull and fix it on the point approximately 1.0 m (39.9 in) L
to the front and rear of the vehicle through the points FM0 and RM0 using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 1
M

JSNIA6880ZZ

AV-163
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

1. Thread 2. Weight 3. Point FM0 (mark)

4. Point RM0 (mark) 5. Packing tape (to fix the vinyl string) 6. Vinyl string

3. Put the points FM and RM (mark) 75 cm (29.5 in) from the points FM0 and RM0 individually.
4. Route the vinyl string through the points FM and RM using a triangle scale, and then fix it at approximately
1.5 m (59 in) on both sides with packing tape.
5. Put the points FL, FR, RL, and RR (mark) to both right and left [vehicle width / 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)] from the
points FM and RM.
Target line preparation procedure 2

JSNIA0921ZZ

1. Point FM 2. Point RM 3. Triangle scale

4. Point FL (mark) 5. Point FR (mark) 6. Point RL (mark)
7. Point RR (mark)
30 cm (11.8 in)
A. 75 cm (29.5 in) B. Approx. 1.5 m (59 in) C. [Vehicle width/ 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)
from the points FM and RM]

6. Draw the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR with vinyl string, and fix it with packing tape.
7. Put a mark on the center of each axle, draw vertical lines to the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR
from the marks on the center of the axle using a triangle scale, and then fix the lines using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 3

JSNIA0922ZZ

1. Point FL 2. Point FR 3. Point RL

4. Point RR 5. Center position of axle 6. Triangle scale

Perform “Calibrating Camera Image”

CONSULT work support

AV-164
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
1. On the CONSULT screen, touch “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING
CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)”, or A
“CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)” to accept the selection.
NOTE:
To cancel the indication of Incomplete calibration, select items based on the target camera.
B
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, adjust the parameter
by touching the “AXIS X” button, “AXIS Y” button, and
“ROTATE” button to place the calibration marker shown on the
camera screen on the target line drawn on the ground. C

Adjustment range
Rotation direction (Center dial) : 31 patterns (16 on the center) D
Upper/lower direction (upper/lower
: −22 – 22
switch)
Left/right direction (left/right switch) : −22 – 22
E
JSNIA4212ZZ
3. Touch “APPLY” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is
displayed and adjustment results are shown on the camera screen.
CAUTION:
F
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Do never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.
4. Touch “OK” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is displayed and adjustment results are written to
the around view monitor control unit. G
CAUTION:
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Do never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played. H

>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” I
This mode is designed to align the boundary between each camera image that could not be aligned in the
“Calibrating Camera Image” mode.
CONSULT work support J
1. Select “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” by touching CONSULT screen.
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, adjust the parameter
by touching the “AXIS X” button, “AXIS Y” button”, and K
“ROTATE” button to place the calibration marker shown on the
camera screen on the target line drawn on the ground.
NOTE:
L
Touch “SELECT” button on the CONSULT screen to select the
target camera.
3. Touch “APPLY” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is
displayed and adjustment results are shown on the camera M
screen.
CAUTION:
JSNIA4214ZZ
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Do never perform other AV
operations while “PRCSNG” is displayed.
4. Touch “OK” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is displayed and adjustment results are written to
the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION: O
• Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.
• After pressing the “OK” button, never press buttons other than the “BACK” button. P
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory default condition with “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled in this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.

>> Calibration end

AV-165
C1A00 CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
C1A00 CONTROL UNIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923274

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
AVM CIRC
C1A00 Around view monitor control unit malfunction is detected
(Around view monitor circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1A00” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “C1A00” detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-166, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923275

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

With CONSULT
Check if any DTC other than “C1A00” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
AV-120, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-166
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923276

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
The battery voltage sent to the around view monitor control unit remains less
POWER SUPPLY CIRC
C1A01 than 7.9 V for 5 seconds or the Ignition power supply sent to the around view
(Power supply circuit)
monitor control unit remains more than 19.3 V for 5 seconds
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Connector, harness, fuse
• Around view monitor control unit E
FAIL-SAFE
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
F
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1A01” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”. H
Is “C1A01” detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-167, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923277
J
1.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit of around view monitor control unit.Refer to AV-241, "AROUND VIEW K
MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation". L
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

AV-167
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714829

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from ABS actuator and electric
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC
C1A03 unit (control unit) received by the around view monitor control unit via
(Vehicle speed sensor circuit)
CAN communication, are inconsistent

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Wheel speed sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
• DAA system is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC C1A03 is displayed with DTC U1000 or C1A04, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diag-
nosis) for DTC U1000 or C1A04.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description".
• C1A04: Refer to AV-170, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more.
CAUTION:
Always drive safety.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
6. Check if the “C1A03” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “C1A03” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-168, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714830

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check if “C1A04” or “U1000” is detected other than “C1A03” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
AV-120, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.

AV-168
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to A
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
B

AV-169
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714831

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC
C1A04 If a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS system
(ABS/TCS/VDC circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
• DAA system is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC C1A04 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1000.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A04” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “C1A04” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714832

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “C1A04” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-170
C1A07 CVT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
C1A07 CVT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923278

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
CVT CIRC
C1A07 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT
(CVT circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• CVT
• TCM
E
FAIL-SAFE
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. G
3. Check if the “C1A07” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “C1A07” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-171, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923279
I

1.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

J
With CONSULT.
Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “C1A07” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is DTC “U1000” detected?
K
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
With CONSULT.
Check if any DTC is detected in "Self Diagnostic Result" of "AT/CVT". M
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
the following. AV
• RE0F10D: TM-288, "DTC Index"
• RE0F10G: TM-529, "DTC Index"
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
O

AV-171
C1A39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
C1A39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714833

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
STRG SEN CIR
C1A39 If the steering angle sensor is malfunction
(Steering angle sensor circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
• DAA system is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC C1A39 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1000.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A39” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “C1A39” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714834

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1A39” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-172
C1B56 SONAR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
C1B56 SONAR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923280

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
SONAR CIRC The around view monitor control unit detects that sonar control unit has a mal-
C1B56
(Sonar circuit) function.
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Sonar control unit
FAIL-SAFE E
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
F
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT.
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. G
2. Check if the “C1B56” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
“C1B56” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-173, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923281
I

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

J
With CONSULT.
Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “C1B56” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
“U1000” detected?
K
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
With CONSULT.
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SONAR”. M
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
SN-143, "DTC Index". AV
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-173
U0122 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U0122 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714835

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
If around view monitor control unit detects an error signal that is re-
VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS
U0122 ceived from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN com-
(VDC P-run diagnosis)
munication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
• DAA system is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC U0122 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1000.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0122” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U0122” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-174, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714836

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0122” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-174
U0416 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U0416 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714837

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
If around view monitor control unit detects an error signal that is re-
VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS
U0416 ceived from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN com-
(VDC checksum diagnosis)
munication
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
E
FAIL-SAFE
• DAA system is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel F
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC U0416 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1000. H
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
DTC Description". I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0416” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”. K
Is “U0416” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-175, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". L
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714838
M
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0416” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”. AV
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". O
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. P
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-175
U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714839

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA-
U0428 TION The neutral position adjustment of the steering angle sensor is incomplete.
(Steering angle sensor calibration)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Neutral position of steering angle sensor is not yet adjusted
• Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
• Predicted course line is not displayed
• DAA system is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC C0428 is displayed with DTC U1232, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1232.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to AV-205, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U0428 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714840

1.ADJUST THE NEUTRAL POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

When U0428 is detected, adjust the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.

>> Perform adjustment of the neutral position of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, "Work
Procedure".
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
unit side.

AV-176
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714841
B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on board multi-
plex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. A modern
vehicle is equipped with many ECMs, and each control unit shares information and links with other control C
units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, 2 control units are connected with 2 commu-
nication lines (CAN H-line and CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-41, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart" for details of the D
communication signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
E
Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
CAN COMM CIRC F
U1000 When the NAVI control unit cannot communicate for 2 seconds or more.
(CAN communication circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE G
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
The system using the CAN communication signal from control unit which cannot communicate does not func- H
tion
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: I
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened. J
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT K
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. L
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1000 detected? M
YES >> Refer to AV-177, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END AV
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714842

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN O

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC. P
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-177, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description".
Is DTC U1000 detected again?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagno-
sis Flow Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT

AV-177
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714843

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on board multi-
plex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. A modern
vehicle is equipped with many ECMs, and each control unit shares information and links with other control
units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, 2 control units are connected with 2 commu-
nication lines (CAN H-line and CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-41, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart" for details of the
communication signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis contents

DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT Around view monitor control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN com-
U1000
(CAN communication circuit) munication signal for 2 seconds or more.
NOTE:
If “U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are cancel
• When communication of steering angle sensor signal is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
- DAA system is cancel
- BSW system is cancel
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
• When communication of vehicle signal, wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
- DAA system is cancel
- BSW system is cancel
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1000 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714844

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON, and then wait for 30 seconds or more.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?

AV-178
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". A

AV-179
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714845

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Malfunction is detected during initial diagnosis of the NAVI control unit CAN con-
U1010
[Control unit (CAN)] troller.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
The system using the CAN communication signal does not function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1010 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-180, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714846

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-180, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description".
Is DTC U1010 detected again?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714847

CAN controller controls the communication of CAN communication signal and the error detection.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

AV-180
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Trouble diagnosis A
DTC Detecting condition
Trouble diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
[Control unit (CAN)]
B
POSSIBLE CAUSE
MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped.
C
FAIL-SAFE
Around view monitor system
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE D
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
E
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”. F
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC“U1010” detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-181, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". G
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714848
H

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

I
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-180, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL J
UNIT : DTC Description".
Is DTC U1010 detected again?
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation". K
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-181
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714849

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
U111A Camera image signal circuit is open or shorted.
(Rear camera image signal)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Camera image signal circuit between rear camera and around view monitor control unit
• Rear camera
FAIL-SAFE
Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111A detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-182, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714850

1.CHECK CONTINUITY REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and rear camera harness
connector.
With BSW

Around view monitor control

Rear camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
50 8
M102 D177 Existed
52 7

Without BSW

Around view monitor control

Rear camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
26 2
M24 D176 Existed
25 1
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.

AV-182
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
With BSW

Around view monitor control A

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M102 50 Not existed B

Without BSW

Around view monitor control C

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M24 26 Not existed D
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. E
2.CHECK VOLTAGE REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector. F
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW
G
Around view monitor control unit
Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage H
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 50 52 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
I
Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
J
Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
K
M24 25 26 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and rear camera harness
connector. AV
With BSW

Around view monitor control O

Rear camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
53 5 P
M102 D177 Existed
54 1

AV-183
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Without BSW

Around view monitor control

Rear camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
28 4
M24 D176 Existed
27 5
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
53
M102 Not existed
54

Without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
28
M24 Not existed
27
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
Terminal

M102 53 54

JSNIA0834GB

AV-184
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit A

Terminal
Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
B
Terminal

M24 28 27
D

JSNIA0834GB

Is inspection result normal? E

YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace rear camera. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
F

AV-185
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714851

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG-
U111B NAL Camera image signal circuit is open or shorted.
(Side camera right image signal)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Camera image signal circuit between side camera RH and around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
5. Check if the “U111B” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U111B” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-186, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714852

1.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (driver side) connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver
side) harness connector.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
62 7
M102 D43 Existed
64 8

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
33 8
M24 D43 Existed
34 7

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

Door mirror (driver side)
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals

AV-186
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
56 7
M102 D23 Existed A
58 8

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

Door mirror (driver side)
B
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
29 8 C
M24 D23 Existed
30 7
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
D
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity E
Ground
Connector Terminal
M102 62 Not existed

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Ground G
Connector Terminal
M24 34 Not existed

RHD models with BSW H

Around view monitor control
unit Continuity
Ground I
Connector Terminal
M102 56 Not existed

RHD models without BSW J

Around view monitor control
unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal K
M24 30 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY M
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (driver side) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground. AV
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal O
Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
P
M102 62 64 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V

AV-187
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 34 33 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 56 58 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 30 29 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (driver side) connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and door mirror (driver
side) harness connector.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
65 16
M102 D43 Existed
66 15

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
35 15
M24 D43 Existed
36 16

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

Door mirror (driver side)
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
59 16
M102 D23 Existed
60 15

AV-188
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control A

Door mirror (driver side)
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
31 15 B
M24 D23 Existed
32 16
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground. C
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity D
Connector Terminals Ground
65
M102 Not existed E
66

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control F

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
35 G
M24 Not existed
36

RHD models with BSW

H
Around view monitor control
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground I
59
M102 Not existed
60
J
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
K
Connector Terminals Ground
31
M24 Not existed
32 L
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. M
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (driver side) connector. AV
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector terminals.
O

AV-189
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
Reference value
(+) (−)
Connector
Terminal

M102 65 66

JSNIA0834GB

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
Reference value
(+) (−)
Connector
Terminal

M24 36 35

JSNIA0834GB

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
Reference value
(+) (−)
Connector
Terminal

M102 59 60

JSNIA0834GB

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
Reference value
(+) (−)
Connector
Terminal

M24 32 31

JSNIA0834GB

Is inspection result normal?

AV-190
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-271, "Removal and Installation". A

AV-191
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714853

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
U111C Camera image signal circuit is open or shorted.
(Front camera image signal)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Camera image signal circuit between front camera and around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
5. Check if the “U111C” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U111C” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714854

1.CHECK CONTINUITY FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and front camera connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and front camera harness
connector.
With BSW

Around view monitor control

Front camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
68 2
M102 E165 Existed
70 1

Without BSW

Around view monitor control

Front camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
38 2
M24 E165 Existed
37 1
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M102 68 Not existed

AV-192
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Without BSW

Around view monitor control A

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M24 38 Not existed B

Is inspection result normal?

YES >> GO TO 2. C
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and front camera connector. D
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW E
Around view monitor control unit
Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage F
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 68 70 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V G
Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

H
Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal I
M24 38 37 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and front camera connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and front camera harness L
connector.
With BSW

Around view monitor control M

Front camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
71 4 AV
M102 E165 Existed
72 5

Without BSW
O
Around view monitor control
Front camera
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals P
40 4
M24 E165 Existed
39 5
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.

AV-193
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
With BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
71
M102 Not existed
72

Without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
40
M24 Not existed
39
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and front camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector terminals.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
Terminal

M102 71 72

JSNIA0834GB

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal
Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
Terminal

M24 40 39

JSNIA0834GB

Is inspection result normal?

YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-269, "Removal and Installation".

AV-194
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714855

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG-
U111D NAL Camera image signal circuit is open or shorted.
(Side camera left image signal)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Camera image signal circuit between side camera LH and around view monitor control unit
E
FAIL-SAFE
Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. G
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
5. Check if the “U111D” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”. H
Is “U111D” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-195, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714856
J
1.CHECK CONTINUITY SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
K
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger
side) harness connector.
L
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

Door mirror (driver side)
unit Continuity
M
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
56 7
M102 D3 Existed
58 8 AV
LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

Door mirror (driver side) O
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
29 8
M24 D3 Existed P
30 7

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals

AV-195
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
62 7
M102 D98 Existed
64 8

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
33 8
M24 D98 Existed
34 7
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M102 56 Not existed

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M24 30 Not existed

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M102 62 Not existed

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M24 34 Not existed
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 56 58 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V

AV-196
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit A

Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)
B
Terminal
M24 30 29 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V

RHD models with BSW C

Around view monitor control unit
Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage D
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 62 64 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V E
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

F
Terminal Reference voltage
Standard voltage
Connector (+) (−) (Approx.)

Terminal G
M24 34 33 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger J
side) harness connector.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control K

Door mirror (driver side)
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
59 16 L
M102 D3 Existed
60 15

LHD models without BSW M

Around view monitor control
Door mirror (driver side)
unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals AV
31 15
M24 D3 Existed
32 16
O
RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity P
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
65 16
M102 D98 Existed
66 15

AV-197
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control Door mirror (passenger

unit side) Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
35 15
M24 D98 Existed
36 16
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
59
M102 Not existed
60

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
31
M24 Not existed
32

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
65
M102 Not existed
66

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
36
M24 Not existed
35
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector terminals.

AV-198
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit A

Terminal
Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
B
Terminal

M102 59 60
D

JSNIA0834GB

LHD models without BSW E

Around view monitor control unit
Terminal
Reference value F
Connector (+) (−)
Terminal
G

M24 32 31 H

JSNIA0834GB I
RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

J
Terminal
Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
Terminal K

L
M102 65 66

M
JSNIA0834GB

RHD models without BSW

AV
Around view monitor control unit
Terminal
Reference value
Connector (+) (−) O
Terminal

M24 36 35

JSNIA0834GB

Is inspection result normal?

AV-199
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace side camera LH. Refer to AV-271, "Removal and Installation".

AV-200
U112F EPS CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U112F EPS CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923282

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
EPS CIRC
U112F The around view monitor control unit detects that EPS has a malfunction.
(EPS circuit)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
EPS
FAIL-SAFE E
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
F
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON G
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “U112F” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
“U112F” detected as the current malfunction? H
YES >> Refer to AV-201, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923283

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS J

With CONSULT.
Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “U112F” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
K
“U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2. L

2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

With CONSULT. M
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “EPS/DAST3”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to AV
STC-21, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
O

AV-201
U1217 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1217 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714857

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
BLUETOOTH MODULE
U1217 NAVI control unit malfunction is detected.
(Bluetooth module connection)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1217 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-202, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714858

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-202, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1217 detected again?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-202
U1229 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1229 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714859

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
iPod CERTIFICATION
U1229 NAVI control unit malfunction is detected.
(iPod certification error)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE E
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: F
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
G
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds. I
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1229 detected? J
YES >> Proceed to AV-203, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714860

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN L

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC. M
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-203, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1229 detected again?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation". AV
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-203
U122F NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U122F NAVI CONTROL UNIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714861

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
DAB CONN ERROR
Communication error with digital audio broadcast module internal to NAVI con-
U122F (Digital broadcasting connection er-
trol unit.
ror)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE
DAB radio is not received
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U122F detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-204, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714862

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-204, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U122F detected again?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-204
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714863

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
U1232 The neutral position registration of the steering angle sensor can not finish.
(Steering angle sensor calibration)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE E
• Predicted course line is not displayed
• DAA system is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel F
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using CONSULT. I
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1232 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-205, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714864 K

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

L
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-205, "DTC Description". M
Is DTC U1232 detected again?
YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-222, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END AV

AV-205
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714865

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
GPS ANTENNA CONN
U1244 GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected.
(GPS antenna connection)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• GPS antenna is not connected
• GPS antenna
FAIL-SAFE
The vehicle positions of a navigation screen differ.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1244 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-206, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714866

1. CHECK GPS ANTENNA

Visually check GPS antenna and antenna feeder.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK NAVI CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between NAVI control unit connector and ground.

Terminals
(+) Voltage
NAVI control unit (−) (Approx.)

Terminal
86 Ground 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END

AV-206
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
NO >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
A

AV-207
U1263 USB
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1263 USB
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714867

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
USB OVERCURRENT
U1263 Overcurrent of the USB connector and AUX jack is detected.
(USB over current error)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors (USB harness between the NAVI control unit and USB connector and AUX jack)
• USB connector and AUX jack
FAIL-SAFE
Audio equipment which connected to USB does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1263 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-208, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714868

1.CHECK USB HARNESS

Visually check USB harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace USB harness.
2.CHECK USB CONNECTOR AND AUX JACK.
Visually check USB connector and AUX jack.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace USB connector and AUX jack. Refer to AV-266, "Removal and Installation".

AV-208
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714869

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
CONFIGURATION ERROR
U12AA NAVI control unit is not properly configured or configuration is not recognized.
(Configuration Error)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE E
A function of NAVI control unit becomes mismatched with a vehicle specification and destination
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: F
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
G
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds. I
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AA detected? J
YES >> Proceed to AV-209, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714870

1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION L
When U12AA is detected, configuration data must be written.

>> Write configuration data with CONSULT. Refer to AV-157, "CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL M
UNIT) : Work Procedure".

AV-209
U12AB ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12AB ANTENNA
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714871

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
FM ANTENNA ERROR
U12AB FM antenna connection error is detected.
(Frequency modulation antenna error)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• FM antenna feeder connection
• FM antenna feeder
FAIL-SAFE
Radio is not received
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AB detected?
YES >> Proceed toAV-210, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714872

NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.ANTENNA INSPECTION
Visually inspect the antenna rod and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-276, "Feeder Layout".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN NAVI CONTROL UNIT AND ANTENNA AMP.(ANTENNA BASE)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect base harness connector and NAVI control unit harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and antenna base harness connector.

AV-210
U12AB ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

NAVI control unit Antenna base A

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
88 1
M352 M375 Existed B
89 2
4. Check the continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground.
C
NAVI control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground D
88
M352 Not existed
89
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
F

AV-211
U12AC NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12AC NAVI CONTROL UNIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714873

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
DISPLAY TEMPERATURE TOO
U12AC HIGH Excessive display circuit temperature is detected.
(Display temperature too high)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AC detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-212, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714874

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-212, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U12AC detected again?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-212
U12AD NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12AD NAVI CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714875

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
ECU TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH
U12AD (Electronic control unit temperature Excessive internal ECU circuit temperature is detected.
too High)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
NAVI control unit
E
FAIL-SAFE
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened. G
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened. I
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
J
Is DTC U12AD detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-213, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END K

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714876

L
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. M
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-213, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U12AD detected again? AV
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
O

AV-213
U12AE NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12AE NAVI CONTROL UNIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714877

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
INTERNAL AMP TEMP WARNING
U12AE (Internal amplifier temperature warn- Excessive internal amplifier circuit temperature is detected.
ing)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AE detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-214, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714878

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-214, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U12AE detected again?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-214
U12AF NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12AF NAVI CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714879

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
CD MECHANISM TEMP WARNING
U12AF (CD mechanism temperature warn- Excessive CD mechanism circuit temperature is detected.
ing)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
NAVI control unit
E
FAIL-SAFE
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened. G
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened. I
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
J
Is DTC U12AF detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-215, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END K

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714880

L
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. M
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-215, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U12AF detected again? AV
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
O

AV-215
U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714881

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
SUPPLY VOLTAGE UNDER 9V
U12B0 (Supply of the battery voltage less NAVI control unit power supply voltage is less than the lower limit.
than 9V continued for 20 seconds)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• NAVI control unit power supply circuit
• NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12B0 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-216, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714882

1.CHECK NAVI CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Check NAVI control unit power supply circuit. Refer to AV-241, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

AV-216
U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714883

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
SUPPLY VOLTAGE OVER 16V
U12B1 (Supply of the battery voltage more NAVI control unit power supply voltage is more than the upper limit.
than 16V continued for 20 seconds)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• NAVI control unit power supply circuit
• NAVI control unit E
FAIL-SAFE
The function of some multi-AV systems does not operate
F
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes G
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC. J
Is DTC U12B1 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-217, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". K
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714884
L
1.CHECK NAVI CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check NAVI control unit power supply circuit. Refer to AV-241, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce- M
dure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation". AV
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

AV-217
U12B2 DAB ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U12B2 DAB ANTENNA
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714885

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
DAB ANTENNA CONN
U12B2 DAB antenna connection and circuit malfunction is detected.
(DAB antenna connection error)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• DAB antenna is unconnected
• Harness or connector (DAB antenna circuit is open or short)
FAIL-SAFE
DAB radio is not received
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12B2 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-218, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714886

NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.CHECK ANTENNA BASE (DAB ANTENNA) HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Visually check antenna base (DAB antenna) and antenna feeder.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN NAVI CONTROL UNIT AND ANTENNA AMP.(ANTENNA BASE)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect base harness connector and NAVI control unit harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and antenna base harness connector.

AV-218
U12B2 DAB ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

NAVI control unit Antenna base A

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
M390 90 M375 3 Existed
B
4. Check the continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground.

NAVI control unit C

Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
M390 90 Not existed
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
E

AV-219
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714887

U1300 is displayed when the AV signal error is detected for the multi AV system. It is always displayed
together with the error of the control unit connected to the NAVI control unit via AV communication.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
• AV communication signal cannot be transmitted by the
AV COMM CIRCUIT abnormalities in NAVI control unit.
U1300
(AV communication circuit) • AV communication signal cannot receive by the abnor-
malities of ECU connected to AV communication circuit.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV communication circuit
• NAVI control unit
• Combination meter
FAIL-SAFE
The system of ECU which detected abnormalities does not operate.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1300 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-220, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714888

NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT ⇔ COMBINATION
METER)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the connectors of NAVI control unit and combination meter.
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector.

AV-220
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

NAVI control unit Combination meter A

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
38 47
M28 M42 Existed B
39 48
4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground.
C
NAVI control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground D
38
M28 Not existed
39
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY OF NAVI COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (COMBINATION METER ⇔ NAVI CONTROL F
UNIT)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the connectors of combination meter and NAVI control unit. G
3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and NAVI control unit harness connector.

Combination meter NAVI control unit H

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
47 31
M42 M28 Existed I
48 32
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
J
Combination meter
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground K
47
M42 Not existed
48
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT M
Check the combination meter power supply and ground circuit. Refer to MWI-129, "COMBINATION METER :
Diagnosis Procedure".
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
O

AV-221
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011009296

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy the following conditions for 2
CAMERA POWER VOLT seconds or more when ignition switch is turned ON.
U1302
(Camera power voltage) • When camera power supply output is ON: 5.9 - 6.5 V
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply measurement.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector (Camera power supply circuit)
• Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera power output is stopped
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1302 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-222, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011009297

1.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the around view monitor control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-241, "AROUND
VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT)
1. Disconnect around view monitor control unit harness connector and rear camera harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M102 50 Not existed

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M24 26 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV-222
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
NO >> Repair the harness or connectors.
3.CHECK REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY (1) A

1. Connect around view monitor control unit harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON.
B
3. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit C

Terminal Reference value
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.)

Terminal
D
M102 50 52 6.0 V

Without BSW E
Around view monitor control unit
Terminal Reference value
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.) F
Terminal
M24 26 25 6.0 V
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation". H
4.CHECK REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY (2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
I
2. Connect rear camera harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals.
With BSW
J

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference value K
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 50 52 6.0 V L

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit M

Terminal Reference value
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.)

Terminal AV
M24 26 25 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace rear camera. Refer to AV-270, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT) P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit harness connector and front camera harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.

AV-223
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M102 68 Not existed

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M24 38 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair the harness or connectors.
6.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY (1)
1. Connect around view monitor control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference value
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 68 70 6.0 V

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference value
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 38 37 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
7.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY (2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect front camera harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminal Reference value
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 68 70 6.0 V

AV-224
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit A

Terminal Reference value
Connector (+) (–) (Approx.)
B
Terminal
M24 38 37 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-269, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT) D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect following harness connector .
E
- Around view monitor control unit
- Door mirror (passenger side) (LHD models)
- Door mirror (driver side) (RHD models)
3. Check the continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground. F
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity G
Connector Terminal Ground
M102 62 Not existed

LHD models without BSW H

Around view monitor control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
I
M24 34 Not existed

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit J

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M102 56 Not existed
K
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity L
Connector Terminal Ground
M24 30 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair the harness or connectors.
9.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY (1) AV
1. Connect around view monitor control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals. O
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

P
Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 62 64 6.0 V

AV-225
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 34 33 6.0 V

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 56 58 6.0 V

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 30 29 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
10.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY (2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect following harness connector.
- Door mirror (passenger side) (LHD models)
- Door mirror (driver side) (RHD models)
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 62 64 6.0 V

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 34 33 6.0 V

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 56 58 6.0 V

AV-226
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit A

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)
B
Terminal
M24 30 29 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-271, "Removal and Installation".
11.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT) D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect following harness connector .
E
- Around view monitor control unit
- Door mirror (driver side) (LHD models)
- Door mirror (passenger side) (RHD models)
3. Check the continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground. F
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity G
Connector Terminal Ground
M102 56 Not existed

LHD models without BSW H

Around view monitor control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
I
M24 30 Not existed

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit J

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M102 62 Not existed
K
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity L
Connector Terminal Ground
M24 34 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair the harness or connectors.
12.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY (1) AV
1. Connect around view monitor control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals. O
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

P
Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 56 58 6.0 V

AV-227
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 30 29 6.0 V

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 62 64 6.0 V

RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 34 33 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
13.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY (2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect following harness connector.
- Door mirror (driver side) (LHD models)
- Door mirror (passenger side) (RHD models)
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between around view monitor control unit terminals.
LHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 56 58 6.0 V

LHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M24 30 29 6.0 V

RHD models with BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)

Terminal
M102 62 64 6.0 V

AV-228
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
RHD models without BSW

Around view monitor control unit A

Terminals Reference value
Connector + – (Approx.)
B
Terminal
M24 34 33 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-271, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV-229
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714889

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
Camera calibration is incomplete.
CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
U1304 NOTE:
(Camera image calibration)
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not saved.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Perform camera calibration
FAIL-SAFE
Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed (applicable for unmatched camera only).
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1304 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-230, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714890

1.PERFORM CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE

Perform camera calibration when DTC U1304 is detected.

>> Perform camera calibration. Refer to AV-161, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Description".

AV-230
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923284

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
The vehicle specifications of around view monitor control unit is incomplete.
CONFIG UNFINISH
U1305 NOTE:
(Configuration unfinish)
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not saved.
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Vehicle specifications for around view monitor control unit is incomplete
E
FAIL-SAFE
• On applicable camera screen marking (Red) is displayed.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel.
F
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. H
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1305 detected? I
YES >> Refer to AV-231, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923285

1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION OF AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT K

Perform configuration of around view monitor control unit when DTC U1305 is detected.
L
>> Perform configuration of around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-159, "CONFIGURATION
(AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
M

AV-231
U1308 REAR CAMERA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1308 REAR CAMERA
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714891

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDG-
MNT
U1308 Camera image calibration is incomplete
(Rear camera (right & left) calibra-
tion judgment)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Calibration for camera image is incomplete
• Camera communication line
FAIL-SAFE
• BSW system is cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC U1308 is displayed with DTC U130B, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U130B.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to AV-235, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “ALL DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1308” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1308” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-232, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714892

1.PERFORM CALIBRATION OF CAMERA IMAGE

Perform calibration of camera image when DTC U1308 is detected.

>> Perform calibration of camera image. Refer to DAS-100, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".

AV-232
U1309 AIR PUMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1309 AIR PUMP
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714893

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE Around view monitor control unit detects the value of current from air pump is in-
U1309
(Pump input current judge) correct

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
Air pump
FAIL-SAFE E
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
G
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “ALL DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1309” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1309” detected as the current malfunction? H
YES >> Refer to AV-233, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END I

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714894

J
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON. K
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1309” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1309” detected as the current malfunction?
L
YES >> Replace the air pump. Refer to DAS-154, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
M

AV-233
U130A PUMP CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U130A PUMP CONTROL UNIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714895

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
PUMP ECU JUDGE
U130A If the pump control unit is malfunction
(Pump control unit judgement)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Pump control unit
FAIL-SAFE
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U130A” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U130A” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-234, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714896

1.CHECK VOLTAGE PUMP CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY

Check pump control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to DAS-131, "PUMP CONTROL UNIT : Diag-
nosis Procedure".
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the pump control unit. Refer to DAS-153, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair the pump control unit power supply and ground circuit.

AV-234
U130B REAR CAMERA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U130B REAR CAMERA
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714897

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
REAR CAMERA COMM ERROR Around view monitor control unit receives the incorrect communica-
U130B
(Rear camera communication error) tion signal from rear camera unit

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Rear camera
• Around view monitor control unit
E
FAIL-SAFE
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is cancel
• BSW system is cancel
F
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. G
2. Shift the selector lever to “R” position.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U130B” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”. H
Is “U130B” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-235, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714898
J
1.REPLACE REAR CAMERA
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Replace the rear camera. Refer to AV-270, "Removal and Installation". K
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Erases All self-diagnosis results.
5. Shift selector lever to “R” position. L
6. Perform “All DTC Reading” again.
7. Check if the “U130B” is detected in self-diagnosis results of “AVM”.
Is inspection result normal? M
YES >> Refer to INSPECTION END.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-270, "Removal and Installation".
AV

AV-235
U1310 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1310 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010714899

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
CONTROL UNIT (AV)
U1310 AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is detected
[Control unit (AV)]

POSSIBLE CAUSE
NAVI control unit
FAIL-SAFE
The system which is using AV communication does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1310 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-236, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714900

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-236, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1310 detected again?
YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

AV-236
U1320 REPROGRAMMING
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1320 REPROGRAMMING
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923286

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
REPROGRAMMING
U1320 Reprogramming of around view monitor control unit is incomplete
(Reprogramming failed)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE E
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait at least a minute. G
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. If “U1320” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”, erase it.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait at least a minute. H
6. Check if the “U1320” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1320” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-237, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923287

1.PERFORM REPROGRAMMING
K
Perform reprogramming of the around view monitor control unit again.

>> GO TO 2. L
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-237, "DTC Description".
M
Is DTC U1320 detected again?
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
AV

AV-237
U150E BCM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U150E BCM CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923288

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
BCM CIRC
U150E BCM malfunction is detected
(Body control module circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• BCM
• Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “U150E” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U150E” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-238, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923289

1.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

With CONSULT.
Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “U150E” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-181, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
With CONSULT.
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BCM”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BCS-78, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-238
U1971 SONAR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1971 SONAR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923290

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
SONAR Message Counter Around view monitor control unit receives an incorrect signal from sonar con-
U1971
(Sonar message counter) trol unit via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
Sonar control unit
FAIL-SAFE E
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

WITH CONSULT
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. G
2. Check if the “U1971” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1971” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-239, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923291 I

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

With CONSULT. J
Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “U1971” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. K
Refer to AV-178, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS L

With CONSULT.
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SONAR”. M
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
SN-143, "DTC Index". AV
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-239
U1972 EPS
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
U1972 EPS
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010923292

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Trouble diagnosis
DTC Detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
EPS Message Counter
Around view monitor control unit receives an incorrect signal from EPS control
U1972 (Electronically controlled power
unit via CAN communication
steering message counter)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
EPS control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Around view monitor with Park Assist is cancel
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
WITH CONSULT
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the “U1972” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
“U1972” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to AV-240, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010923293

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

With CONSULT.
Check if the “U1000” is detected other than “U1972” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to AV-181, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
With CONSULT.
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “EPS/DAST3”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
STC-21, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-240
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714901
B
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
C
With stop/start system

Power source Fuse No.

Battery #63 D
Ignition switch ON or START #56

Without stop/start system

E
Power source Fuse No.
Battery #16
Ignition switch ON or START #30 F
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. G

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground. H

Terminal
(+) Ignition I
Signal name switch posi- Standard Value (Approx.)
NAVI control unit (−) tion
Connector Terminal
J
Battery power
M27 19 OFF 10.8 V – 15.6 V Battery voltage
supply Ground
Ignition signal M28 40 ON 10.8 V – 15.6 V 12.0 V K
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check harness between NAVI control unit and fuse. L
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714902
M

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses. AV
With stop/start system

Power source Fuse No.

O
Battery #63
Ignition switch ON or START #56

Without stop/start system P

Power source Fuse No.
Battery #16
Ignition switch ON or START #30
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.

AV-241
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Condition
Terminal Standard Reference voltage
Connector (+) (–) voltage (Approx.)
Ignition
Terminal switch

2 OFF
M101 1 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
3 ON

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Condition
Terminal Standard Reference voltage
Connector (+) (–) voltage (Approx.)
Ignition
Terminal switch

2 OFF
M24 1 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
4 ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the around view monitor control unit power supply circuit.
3.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the around view monitor control unit connector.
3. Check for continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M101 1 Existed

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M24 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair the around view monitor control unit ground circuit.

AV-242
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000010714903

NAVI control unit supplies power to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound voice to the NAVI con- B
trol unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714904

C
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened. D
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN NAVI CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect NAVI control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
F

NAVI control unit Microphone

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
34 1
M28 35 R21 4 Existed
H
36 2
4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground.
I
NAVI control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
34 J
M28 Not existed
35
Is the inspection result normal?
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC L
1. Connect NAVI control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground. M

Terminal
NAVI control unit Voltage
AV
Standard
Connector Terminal (–) (Approx.)

NAVI control unit

O
M28 35 Ground — 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. P
NO >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect microphone harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the signal between NAVI control unit harness connector.

AV-243
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

NAVI control unit

Terminal
Condition Standard Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector
Terminal

The value between the

maximum input voltage
Give a
M28 34 36 and the minimum input
voice.
voltage is 4.72V or
less.

PKIB5037J

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-272, "Removal and Installation".

AV-244
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000010714905

Around view monitor control unit supplies to the front camera, rear camera and side camera. And then it B
superimpose the images from each camera and outputs then to the NAVI control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714906

C
NOTE:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after ignition
switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 minutes
with the driver's door opened. D
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect NAVI control unit harness connector and around view monitor control unit harness connector.
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and around view monitor control unit har-
F
ness connector.
Without BSW

Around view monitor control G

NAVI control unit
unit Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
41 24 H
M28 M24 Existed
42 23

With BSW
I
Around view monitor control
NAVI control unit
unit Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
41 47
M28 M102 Existed
42 48
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
L
2.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground.
M
NAVI control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M28 41 Not existed AV

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> GO TO 3. O
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect NAVI control unit harness connector and around view monitor control unit harness connector. P
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground.

AV-245
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Terminal
(+)
Condition Reference value
NAVI control unit (−)
Connector Terminal

At camera image is dis-

M28 41 Ground
played.

SKIB0827E

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

AV-246
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714907

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT B

Combination meter Spiral cable

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D
M34 22 M33 29 Existed
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. E

Combination meter
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground F
M34 22 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE H
1. Disconnect steering switch connector.
2. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connectors.
I
Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M33 29 M303 10 Existed
J

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> GO TO 3. K
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-23, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER VOLTAGE
1. Connect combination meter harness connector, steering switch connector and spiral cable connector. L
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between combination meter harness connector.
M
Combination meter
Voltage
+ - Condition
Connector (Approx.)
A V
Terminal
Keep pressing SOURCE switch 0V
Keep pressing MENU UP switch 0.5 V O
M34 22 21 Keep pressing MENU DOWN switch 1.2 V
Keep pressing TEL switch 2.1 V
Keep pressing ENTER switch 3.3 V P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

AV-247
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-248, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010714908

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector.

Steering switch Resistance

Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.) Ω

ENTER switch is pressed 1982 – 2064

TEL switch is pressed 708 – 738
MENU DOWN switch is
10 314 – 328
pressed
MENU UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
SOURCE switch is pressed 0 JSNIA7127GB

4 SEEK UP switch is pressed 1982 – 2064

SEEK DOWN switch is
708 – 738
pressed
5 TEL END switch is pressed 314 – 328
VOL UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
VOL DOWN switch is
0
pressed

AV-248
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714909

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT B

Combination meter Spiral cable

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D
M34 23 M33 24 Existed
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground. E

Combination meter
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground F
M34 23 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE H
1. Disconnect steering switch connector.
2. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connectors.
I
Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M33 24 M303 5 Existed
J

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> GO TO 3. K
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-23, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER VOLTAGE
1. Connect combination meter harness connector, steering switch connector and spiral cable connector. L
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between combination meter harness connector.
M
combination meter
Voltage
+ - Condition
Connector (Approx.)
AV
Terminal
Keep pressing VOLUME DOWN switch 0V
Keep pressing VOLUME UP switch 0.5 V O
M34 23 21 Keep pressing TEL END switch 1.2 V
Keep pressing SEEK UP switch 2.1 V
Keep pressing SEEK DOWN switch 3.3 V P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

AV-249
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-250, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010714910

Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector.

Steering switch Resistance

Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.) Ω

ENTER switch is pressed 1982 – 2064

TEL switch is pressed 708 – 738
MENU DOWN switch is
10 314 – 328
pressed
MENU UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
SOURCE switch is pressed 0 JSNIA7127GB

4 SEEK UP switch is pressed 1982 – 2064

SEEK DOWN switch is
708 – 738
pressed
5 TEL END switch is pressed 314 – 328
VOL UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
VOL DOWN switch is
0
pressed

AV-250
STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010714911

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT B

Combination meter Spiral cable

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D
M34 21 M33 23 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE F
1. Disconnect steering switch connector.
2. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connectors.
G
Spiral cable
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
H
M33 23 M303 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. I
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-23, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
J
Check steering switch. Refer to AV-251, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END K
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010714912

L
Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector.

Steering switch Resistance M

Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.) Ω

ENTER switch is pressed 1982 – 2064

A V
TEL switch is pressed 708 – 738
MENU DOWN switch is
10 314 – 328
pressed
O
MENU UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
SOURCE switch is pressed 0 JSNIA7127GB

4 SEEK UP switch is pressed 1982 – 2064 P

SEEK DOWN switch is
708 – 738
pressed
5 TEL END switch is pressed 314 – 328
VOL UP switch is pressed 118 – 124
VOL DOWN switch is
0
pressed

AV-251
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010714913

RELATED TO NAVIGATION
NOTE:
Combined part of AV switch and NAVI control unit.

Probable malfunction location / Action

Symptoms Check items
to take
• NAVI control unit power supply and
ground circuit.
Refer to AV-241, "NAVI CONTROL
UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
All switches cannot be operated. • Disconnect the battery negative ter-
minal. Reconnect the terminal. If the
same symptom occurs, replace NAVI
Display does not turn ON. control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Re-
moval and Installation".
Disconnect the battery negative termi-
nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
All switches can be operated. symptom occurs, replace NAVI control
unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and In-
stallation".
• NAVI control unit power supply and
ground circuit.
Refer to AV-241, "NAVI CONTROL
UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Display does not turn ON. • Disconnect the battery negative ter-
minal. Reconnect the terminal. If the
All switches cannot be operat- same symptom occurs, replace NAVI
ed. control unit. Refer to AV-262, "Re-
moval and Installation".
Disconnect the battery negative termi-
nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
Display turn ON. symptom occurs, replace NAVI control
unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and In-
stallation".
Disconnect the battery negative termi-
nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
Only specified switch cannot be
– symptom occurs, replace NAVI control
operated.
unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and In-
stallation".
• Check that the map Disconnect the battery negative termi-
“OK” is displayed for “SD
SD card is in the SD nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
Card Access”.
card slot. symptom occurs, replace Map SD card.
Map screen is not displayed.
• Check “SD Card Ac-
(RGB image other than map is Disconnect the battery negative termi-
cess” in “SERVICE
normal.) “OK” is not displayed for “SD nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
SYSTEM SELF
TEST”, “SERVICE Card Access”. symptom occurs, replace NAVI control
MENU”. unit or Map SD card.

Check that the map Disconnect the battery negative termi-

“OK” is displayed for SD
SD card is in the SD nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
Card Access.
card slot. symptom occurs, replace Map SD card.

Voice guidance is not heard* Check “SD Card Ac- Disconnect the battery negative termi-
cess” in “SERVICE nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
“OK” is not displayed for SD
SYSTEM SELF symptom occurs, replace NAVI control
Card Access.
TEST”, “SERVICE unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and In-
MENU”. stallation".

AV-252
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Probable malfunction location / Action
Symptoms Check items
to take A
Disconnect the battery negative termi-
“Illumination Signal” reaches nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
Check “Illumination 100% when the lighting symptom occurs, replace NAVI control B
Signal” in “SERVICE switch is ON. unit. Refer to AV-262, "Removal and In-
Display does not dim. stallation".
SYSTEM STATUS”,
“SERVICE MENU”. “Illumination Signal” does
not reach 100% when the Illumination signal circuit
C
lighting switch is ON.
Disconnect the battery negative termi-
A value of “Speed Signal” D
nal. Reconnect the terminal. If the same
Check “Speed Signal” changes according to vehi-
symptom occurs, replace NAVI control
in “SERVICE SYS- cle speeds.
Vehicle icon does not move. unit or GPS antenna.
TEM STATUS”, “SER-
VICE MENU”. A value of “Speed Signal” E
does not change according Vehicle speed signal circuit
to vehicle speeds.
*: check that voice guidance is set to on in the set up menu of navigation. F
*: check that the volume of voice guidance is not set to low.
RELATED TO AUDIO
G
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuits mal-
No sound from all speakers. function. Refer to AV-241, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diag- H
nosis Procedure".
No sound comes out or the lev- • Poor connector connection of speaker.
el of the sound is low. Only a certain speaker (front right, front • Sound signal circuit malfunction between NAVI control
left, rear right, or rear left) does not out- unit and speaker.
I
put sound. • Malfunction in speaker.
• Malfunction in NAVI control unit.
Noise comes out from all speaker. Malfunction in NAVI control unit. J
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between NAVI control
Noise comes out only from a certain unit and speaker. K
speaker (front right, front left, rear right, • Malfunction in speaker.
Noise is mixed with audio. or rear left). • Poor installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and loose-
ness)
• Malfunction in NAVI control unit. L
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the
car hits a bump or while driving over bad Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna feeder.
roads). M
• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Any radio cannot be received or poor
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
Radio is not received or poor reception is caused even after moving
• Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna feed- AV
reception. to a service area with good reception
er.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob-
stacles generating external noises).
O
RELATED TO USB
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of USB equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
P

AV-253
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Probable malfunction location / Action

Symptoms Check items
to take

With iPod or USB iPod or USB memory name • USB and AUX harness
memory Connected, is displayed for “USB De- • USB connector and AUX jack
iPod or USB memory can not be vice”. • NAVI control unit
check “USB Device” in
recognized.
“SERVICE STATUS”, “Removed” is displayed for • USB and AUX harness
“SERVICE MENU”. “USB Device”. • USB connector and AUX jack
iPod is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location

No voice sound is heard when Voice sound is heard when other modes • USB and AUX harness
AUX mode is selected. are selected. • USB connector and AUX jack

RELATED TO CAMERA

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location / Action to take

Camera image is not dis-
Reverse signal circuit malfunction (around view monitor
played. (Only warning mes- —
control unit).
sage under area is displayed.)
Camera image does not
— Reverse signal circuit malfunction (NAVI control unit).
switch.
The screen switches when
pressing the “CAMERA” switch
Camera image signal circuit.
or the shift position is in “R”, —
Refer to AV-245, "Diagnosis Procedure".
however, all views are not dis-
played.
It cannot be switched to rear
view monitor even when the The front view image is normal. Reverse signal circuit (around view monitor control unit).
shift position is in “R”.
The predictive course line dis-
play in front view and rear view —
is malfunctioning.
• The front view screen is not
displayed.
—
• The front of Birds-Eye view
screen is not displayed.
• The rear view screen is not
displayed.
—
• The rear of Birds-Eye view
screen is not displayed.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AVM” with CON-
• The front-side screen is not SULT.
displayed. Refer to AV-99, "CONSULT Function".
• The passenger side of Birds- —
Eye view screen is not dis-
played.
The driver side of Birds-eye
—
view screen is not displayed.
When shift position is in other
than “R”, the front-side and
front screen or the Birds-Eye
—
view and front screen remain
displaying even if the vehicle
speed increases.

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

AV-254
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Symptoms Possible malfunction location / Action to take A

Steering switch signal ground circuit. Refer to AV-251, "Diagnosis Pro-
All steering switches are not operated.
cedure".
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation". B
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “TEL” and “EN- Steering switch signal A circuit.
TER” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-247, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“VOL DOWN”, “VOL UP”, “TEL END”, “SEEK UP” and “SEEK Steering switch signal B circuit. C
DOWN” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-249, "Diagnosis Procedure".

AV-255
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010714914

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location/Action to take

Does not recognize cellular
Repeat the registration of cellular phone. NAVI control unit
phone connection.
NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit.
Hands-free phone cannot be
— Refer to AV-241, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
established.
Procedure".

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Possible malfunction location / Action to take

Steering switch signal ground circuit. Refer to AV-251, "Diagnosis Pro-
All steering switches are not operated.
cedure".
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
“SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “TEL” and “EN- Steering switch signal A circuit.
TER” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-247, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“VOL DOWN”, “VOL UP”, “TEL END”, “SEEK UP” and “SEEK Steering switch signal B circuit.
DOWN” switches are not operated. Refer to AV-249, "Diagnosis Procedure".

AV-256
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000010714915

NOTE: B
For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
C
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
No image is displayed. D
The display is turned off. Press “ -” to turn on the display.
No voice guidance is available or
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the voice guidance volume level.
the volume is too high or too low.
E
The map SD card is not inserted. Insert the map SD card correctly.
No map is displayed on the screen.
A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press “MAP”.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has F
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction.
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
G
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the H
information in the Address Book.
RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic I
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause. J
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor-
rectly mastered by the customer on a computer. K
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play.
L
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. M
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal AV
temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music
Cannot play CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
O
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition,
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
pliance with the specifications.
P
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the CD.
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.

AV-257
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multi session disc, some
the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or
when playing when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Poor reception only from a certain
Check incoming radio wave signal strength of applicable broadcast station.
radio broadcast station.
The majority of rattle sounds are not indicative of an issue with the speaker, usually something
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker
nearby the speaker is causing the rattle.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.

MAP SD CARD

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Check the map SD card data. Files can be lost.
The message “Error” ap-
The SD card is not recognized by the system. If you see any damage, replace the map SD
pears.
card.

RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Set the destination and perform route
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
calculation.
Route information is not dis-
played. You are not driving on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.
Route guidance is cancelled. Turn on the route guidance.
The auto reroute calculation (or
detour calculation) suggests Route calculations took priority conditions into consider-
This is not a malfunction.
the same route as the one pre- ation, but the same route was calculated.
viously suggested.
Reset the destination to a main or or-
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated.
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.
The suggested route is not dis-
played. Divide your trip by selecting one or two
intermediate destinations, and per-
The starting point and destination are too far away.
form a global route calculation based
on multiple route calculations.
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads
Adjust the location of the starting point
close to the starting point or destination, the system may
or destination.
suggest an indirect route.
An indirect route is suggested.
The system may suggest an indirect route because route
Reset the destination to a main or or-
calculation does not take into consideration some areas
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
such as narrow streets.

AV-258
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
A
The landmark information does Updated information will be included
This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect data on the
not correspond to the actual in- in the next version of the map SD
map SD card.
formation. card.
The suggested route does not B
Set the starting point, waypoints and
exactly connect to the starting There is no data for route calculation closes to these loca-
destination on a main road, and per-
point, waypoints, or destinations.
form route calculation.
tion.
C
RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution D

This is because the quantity of the displayed in-
formation is reduced so that the screen does
not become difficult to read. There is also a E
Names of roads and locations differ
chance that the names of roads or locations This is not a malfunction.
between 2D and 3D view.
may be displayed several times, and that the
names appearing on the screen may be differ-
ent because of a processing procedure. F
The vehicle was transported after the ignition
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where
switch was pressed off, for example, by a ferry
GPS signals can be received.
or car transporter.
The vehicle icon is not displayed in G
the correct position. The position and direction of the vehicle icon
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for
may be incorrect depending on the driving en-
a while to automatically correct the position
vironments and the levels of positioning accu-
and direction of the vehicle icon. H
racy of the navigation system.
When the vehicle is travelling on a The system automatically places the vehicle
Updated road information will be included in
new road, the vehicle icon is located icon on the nearest available road, because the
the next version of the map SD card.
on another nearby road. new road is not stored in the map data. I
The screen does not switch to the
The daytime screen was set the last time the Set the screen to the night screen mode using
night screen even after turning on
headlights were turned on. <Day/Night> when you turn on the headlights.
the headlights. J
The map does not scroll even when The current location map screen is not dis-
Press “MAP”.
the vehicle is moving. played.
The current location map screen is not dis- K
The vehicle icon is not displayed. Press “MAP”.
played.
Drive the vehicle for a while [at approximately
When using tire chains or replacing the tires,
30 km/h (19 MPH) for about 30 minutes] to
speed calculations based on the speed sensor L
automatically correct the vehicle icon posi-
The location of the vehicle icon is may be incorrect.
tion.
misaligned from the actual position.
The map data has an error or is incomplete (the
Updated road information will be included in M
vehicle icon position is always misaligned in the
the next version of the map SD card.
same area).

RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE

AV
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
In some cases, voice guidance is not available even
This is not a malfunction. O
when the vehicle should make a turn.
Go back to the suggested route or request
Voice guidance is not available The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
route calculation again
P
Voice guide is set to off. Turn voice guidance ON.
Route guidance is set to off. Route guidance is set to ON.
The guidance contact does not
The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on
correspond to the actual condi- Follow all traffic rules and regulations.
the types of intersections at which turn are made.
tion.

RELATED TO TRAFFIC INFORMATION

AV-259
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The traffic information is not set to on. Set the traffic information to on.
You are in an area where traffic information is not avail- Scroll to an area where traffic information is avail-
The traffic information is
able able
not displayed
The map scale is set at a level where the display of icons Check that the map scale is set at a level in which
is impossible. the display of icons is possible.
With the automatic de- The automatic detour search is not intended for
tour route search ON, There is no faster route compared to the current route, avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fasted
no detour route is set to based on the road network and traffic information. rote taking into consideration such things as traffic
avoid congested areas. jams.
The route does not Observe the actual road condition and follow the
avoid road section with The navigation system is designed not to avoid this instructions on road for detour when necessary. If
traffic information stat- event because the actual period of closure may differ the road closure is for certain, use detour function
ing it is closed due to from the declared roadwork period. and set the detour distance to avoid the closed
road construction. road section.
Traffic information dis-
Observe the actual road conditions and regula-
played differs from in-
Other media may use different information sources. tions. Always observe safe driving practices and
formation from other
follow all traffic regulations.
media (e.g. radio).

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Symptom Cause and Counter measure

RELATED TO TELEPHONE

Symptoms Cause and Counter measure

1. Ensure that the command format is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker.
Refer to AV-96, "On Board Diagnosis Function".

AV-260
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH NAVIGATION]
Symptoms Cause and Counter measure
A
The system consistently selects 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
the wrong entry from the phone can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
B

AV-261
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714916

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• The auto ACC function allows the accessory power supply for a certain period of time even after
ignition switch OFF. For this reason, when performing diagnosis, turn the ignition switch OFF and
wait for 3 minutes with the driver's door opened.
• The operation of the vehicle during standby may cause an accessory power supply.
• Before replacing NAVI control unit, perform “Read/Write Configuration” to save or print current vehi-
cle specification. For details, refer to AV-157, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING NAVI CON-
TROL UNIT : Description".
1. Remove instrument finisher B. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded View"
(RHD models).
2. Remove instrument finisher E. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded View"
(RHD models).
3. Remove A/C control. Refer to HAC-125, "Removal and Installation" (automatic air conditioning), HAC-
222, "Removal and Installation" (manual air conditioning).
4. Remove the NAVI control unit screws, then pull out the NAVI control unit.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the NAVI control unit and remove.
6. Remove the NAVI control unit bracket screws and the NAVI control unit brackets.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Read/Write Configuration” when replacing NAVI control unit. For details, refer to
AV-157, "CONFIGURATION (NAVI CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".

AV-262
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714917

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front door speaker screws .
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the front door speaker
and remove.

JSNIA6727ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV-263
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714918

REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-19, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear door speaker screws .
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker
and remove.

JSNIA6727ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

AV-264
FRONT SQUAWKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
FRONT SQUAWKER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714919

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the front pillar garnish. Refer to INT-23, "FRONT PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front squawker grille using a suitable tool. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-
40, "Exploded View" (RHD models). C
3. Pull out the front squawker, disconnect the harness connector from front squawker and remove.
INSTALLATION D
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV-265
USB CONNECTOR AND AUX JACK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
USB CONNECTOR AND AUX JACK
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714920

REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument lower panel. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded
View" (RHD models).
2. Release the pawls and remove the USB connector AUX jack
from the instrument lower panel .

JSNIA6728ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV-266
GPS ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
GPS ANTENNA
A
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000010714921

Refer to AV-276, "Feeder Layout". B

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714922

REMOVAL C
1. Remove the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded
View" (RHD models).
D
2. Remove the GPS antenna screw and the GPS antenna .

G
JSNIA6732ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H

AV-267
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714923

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before replacing around view monitor control unit, perform “Read/Write Configuration” to save or
print current vehicle specification. For details, refer to AV-158, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Description".
1. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-13, "Exploded View" (LHD models), IP-40, "Exploded View" (RHD
models).
2. Remove the around view monitor control unit bracket mounting
screws , and disconnect the harness connector, And then
around view monitor control unit assembly is raised upwards
and remove the pawls .
3. Remove the around view monitor control unit assembly from the
vehicle.
4. Remove the around view monitor control unit mounting screws,
And then remove the around view monitor control unit from
bracket.

JSNIA6758ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Must be perform additional service when replacing around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-
158, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
Description".
• Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.).

AV-268
FRONT CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
FRONT CAMERA
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714924

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front camera mounting screws , And then remove
the front camera from the front grille. C

JSNIA6759ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
G
2. Perform camera image calibration. Refer to AV-161, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Description".
CAUTION: H
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.).

AV-269
REAR CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
REAR CAMERA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714925

REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door finisher. Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the back door finisher cap. Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the air tube, washer tube and rear camera harness
connector .

JSNIA6761ZZ

4. Push camera in the direction shown by arrow, compress the pawl , and disengage pawl to remove
rear camera from the back door.

JSNIA6762ZZ

INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Perform camera image calibration (around view monitor system). Refer to AV-161, "CALIBRATING CAM-
ERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description".
3. Perform calibrating camera image (LDW/BSW system). Refer to DAS-110, "Description".
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.).

AV-270
SIDE CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
SIDE CAMERA
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714926

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the door mirror finisher. Refer to MIR-27, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the side camera mounting screws , And than remove
the side camera from the door mirror finisher. C

JSNIA6760ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Perform camera image calibration. Refer to AV-161, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW G
MONITOR) : Description".
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov- H
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.).

AV-271
MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714927

: Pawl

ALNIA1366ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV-272
STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714928

Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View". B

NOTE:
Always remove steering switch together with steering wheel.
C

AV-273
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010714929

DISASSEMBLY

Spiral cable
Steering angle sensor

JSNIA0135ZZ

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714930

REMOVAL
1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-23, "Exploded View".
2. Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Perform steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".

AV-274
ROOF ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
ROOF ANTENNA
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010714931

JSNIA6913ZZ

G
Antenna rod Antenna base

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

H
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010714932

REMOVAL I
1. Remove the antenna rod.
2. Remove the headlining assembly. Refer to INT-37, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the mounting nut to remove the antenna base from the roof panel. J
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: K
If the antenna base mounting nut is tightened looser than the specified torque, then this will lower the
sensitivity of the antenna. On the other hand, if the nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque,
then this will deform the roof panel. L

AV-275
ANTENNA FEEDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH NAVIGATION]
ANTENNA FEEDER
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000010714933

JSNIA7191ZZ

Antenna rod Antenna base GPS antenna

: Clips

: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

AV-276
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BCS B

E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 COMMON ITEM .........................................................21 F
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 COMMON ITEM) .....................................................21
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 3 G
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DOOR LOCK ..............................................................22
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
SIONER" ................................................................... 4 DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and
Super Lock) .............................................................22 H
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
tion After Battery Disconnect ..................................... 4 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System, With-
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6 out Super Lock) .......................................................23 I
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6 DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System,
With Super Lock) .....................................................24
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 6 J
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System
Location ..................................................................... 6
and Super Lock) ......................................................25
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 7 K
MULTI REMOTE ENT ................................................26
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
Component Parts Location ........................................ 7
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (With Super Lock)....26 L
SYSTEM .............................................................10 MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Without Super
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................... 10 Lock) ........................................................................27
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description.... 10 BCS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ................... 12 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ...................................29
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Func-
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM ......... 13 tion (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) .............................29 N
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM :
System Description ................................................. 13 BUZZER .....................................................................30
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)....30
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ...................................... 16 O
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description.... 17 INT LAMP ...................................................................30
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ....... 17 LAMP) ......................................................................30
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : P
System Description ................................................. 18 HEADLAMP ...............................................................31
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD
SHIPPING MODE CONTROL SYSTEM .................... 19 LAMP) (LED Headlamp) ..........................................31
SHIPPING MODE CONTROL SYSTEM : System HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD
Description .............................................................. 20 LAMP) (Halogen Headlamp) ...................................33
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................21 WIPER ........................................................................35

BCS-1
WIPER : CONSULT Function - WIPER .................. 35 BCM ................................................................... 81
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 81
FLASHER .................................................................. 36
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASH- BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 104
ER) (LED Headlamp) .............................................. 36
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASH- ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
ER) (Halogen Headlamp) ....................................... 37 CONTROL UNIT ............................................... 104
Description ............................................................ 104
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 38
Work Procedure .................................................... 104
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock) ................. 38 CONFIGURATION (BCM) ................................ 106
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - Description ............................................................ 106
INTELLIGENT KEY) (Without Super Lock) ............ 42 Work Procedure .................................................... 106
Configuration list ................................................... 107
COMB SW ................................................................. 46
COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB SHIPPING MODE CANCEL OPERATION ....... 109
SW) ......................................................................... 46 Work Procedure .................................................... 109
BCM ........................................................................... 47 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 110
BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM) .............. 47
U1000 CAN COMM .......................................... 110
IMMU ......................................................................... 47
DTC Description .................................................... 110
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) (With
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110
Intelligent Key System) ........................................... 47
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) (With- U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 111
out Intelligent Key System) ..................................... 47 DTC Description .................................................... 111
BATTERY SAVER .................................................... 47 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 111
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - U0415 VEHICLE SPEED .................................. 112
BATTERY SAVER) ................................................. 48 DTC Description .................................................... 112
TRUNK ...................................................................... 48 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) B2562 LOW VOLTAGE .................................... 113
(With Intelligent Key System and Super Lock) ....... 48
DTC Description .................................................... 113
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK)
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 113
(With Intelligent Key System, Without Super Lock)
... 49 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 114
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 114
(Without Intelligent Key System, With Super Lock)
... 49 COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT .. 115
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 115
(Without Intelligent Key System and Super Lock)... 50
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT ...... 117
THEFT ALM .............................................................. 50 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 117
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
THEFT) (With Intelligent Key System) .................... 50 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 119
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
THEFT) (Without Intelligent Key System) ............... 51
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMP-
TOMS ................................................................ 119
SIGNAL BUFFER ...................................................... 52 Symptom Table ..................................................... 119
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM -
SIGNAL BUFFER) .................................................. 52 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 120
Description ............................................................ 120
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 53
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 121
BCM ................................................................... 53
Reference Value ..................................................... 53 BCM .................................................................. 121
Fail-safe .................................................................. 76 Removal and Installation ....................................... 121
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 77
COMBINATION SWITCH ................................. 122
DTC Index .............................................................. 78
Removal and Installation ....................................... 122
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 81

BCS-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010842517
B
• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time. C
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. D
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC E
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch. F
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. G
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
H
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
I
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. J
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time. K

D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes L
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes BCS
V9X engine : 4 minutes
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of N
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION: O
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry. P
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.

BCS-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010842518

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000010842519

CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory
power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables.
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect
both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing
work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro-
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Open driver door.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open.

BCS-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
5. Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open.
NOTE: A
• Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed.
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a
B
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
C
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) D
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.

BCS

BCS-5
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010688574

RHD MODELS

JMMIA1631ZZ

BCM
Behind of glove box

LHD MODELS

BCS-6
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

JMMIA1811ZZ
K

BCM
Behind instrument panel (LH) L

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM

BCS
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000010688575

N
RHD models

BCS-7
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

JMMIA1813ZZ

Combination meter IPDM E/R BCM

Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL
Location". SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion".
Electric parking brake control mod- Automatic back door control module
ule Refer to DLK-25, "DOOR LOCK
Refer to PB-8, "Component Parts SYSTEM :
Location". Component Parts Location" (With
Intelligent Key and super lock) or
DLK-335, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location" (With
Intelligent Key, without super lock)

LHD models

BCS-8
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

JMMIA1812ZZ
K

Automatic back door control module Electric parking brake control mod- IPDM E/R
Refer to DLK-25, "DOOR LOCK ule Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts L
SYSTEM : Refer to PB-8, "Component Parts Location".
Component Parts Location" (With Location".
Intelligent Key and super lock) or
DLK-335, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : BCS
Component Parts Location" (With
Intelligent Key, without super lock)
BCM Combination meter
N
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL
SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion".
O

BCS-9
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010688576

OUTLINE
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls the various electrical components. It inputs the information required to
the control from CAN communication and the signal received from each switch and sensor.
• BCM has combination switch reading function for reading the operation status of combination switches (light,
turn signal, wiper and washer) in addition to a function for controlling the operation of various electrical com-
ponents. It also has the signal transmission function as the passed point of signal and the power saving con-
trol function that reduces the power consumption with the ignition switch OFF.
• BCM is equipped with the diagnosis function that performs the diagnosis with CONSULT and various set-
tings.
BCM CONTROL FUNCTION LIST

System Reference
BCS-13, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : Sys-
Combination switch reading system
tem Description"
Signal buffer system BCS-17, "SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description"
BCS-18, "POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : Sys-
Power consumption control system
tem Description"
BCS-20, "SHIPPING MODE CONTROL SYSTEM : System De-
Shipping mode control system
scription"
• EXL-21, "HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (LED
headlamp)
Headlamp system
• EXL-225, "HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halo-
gen headlamp)
• EXL-24, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description" (LED
headlamp)
Auto light system
• EXL-228, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description"
(Halogen headlamp)
• EXL-30, "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System De-
scription" (LED headlamp)
Daytime running light system
• EXL-234, "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System De-
scription" (Halogen headlamp)
• EXL-36, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM : System Description" (LED headlamp)
Turn signal and hazard warning lamp system
• EXL-236, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen headlamp)
• EXL-38, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP SYS-
TEM : System Description" (LED headlamp)
Parking, license plate and tail lamps system
• EXL-239, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP SYS-
TEM : System Description" (Halogen headlamp)
• EXL-42, "STOP LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (LED
headlamp)
Stop lamp system
• EXL-243, "STOP LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halo-
gen headlamp)
• EXL-44, "FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description"
(LED headlamp)
Front fog lamp system
• EXL-245, "FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion" (Halogen headlamp)
• EXL-46, "REAR FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description"
(LED headlamp)
Rear fog lamp system
• EXL-247, "REAR FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description"
(Halogen headlamp)

BCS-10
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
System Reference
A
• EXL-48, "EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description" (LED headlamp)
Exterior lamp battery saver system
• EXL-249, "EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description" (Halogen headlamp) B
INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System
Interior room lamp control system
Description"
INL-14, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : C
Interior room lamp battery saver system
System Description"
INL-18, "ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Descrip-
Illumination control system
tion" D
• WW-13, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM (WITH
LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR) : System Description" (With rain sen-
sor)
Front wiper and washer system E
• WW-17, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM (WITH-
OUT LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR) : System Description" (Without
rain sensor)

Rear wiper and washer system

WW-21, "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System De- F
scription"
Rear window defogger system DEF-7, "System Description"
Warning chime system WCS-8, "WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description" G
• DLK-35, "System Description" (Type 1)
• DLK-345, "System Description" (Type 2)
• DLK-646, "System Description" (Type 3) H
Power door lock system • DLK-797, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion" (Type 4)
NOTE:
Refer to DLK-22, "Information" for details of type. I
• DLK-38, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description"
(Type 1)
• DLK-348, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description" J
Intelligent Key system
(Type 2)
NOTE:
Refer to DLK-22, "Information" for details of type.
• DLK-649, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System
K
Description" (Type 3)
• DLK-800, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM : System
Remote keyless entry system
Description" (Type 4) L
NOTE:
Refer to DLK-22, "Information" for details of type.
• DLK-62, "System Description" (Type 1)
• DLK-371, "System Description" (Type 2) BCS
• DLK-655, "System Description" (Type 3)
Back door opener system • DLK-803, "BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM : System De-
scription" (Type 4)
N
NOTE:
Refer to DLK-22, "Information" for details of type.
SEC-15, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNC-
Intelligent Key system/engine start system O
TION : System Description"
• SEC-25, "NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion" (With Intelligent Key system)
Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS
• SEC-214, "NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM : System Descrip- P
tion" (Without Intelligent Key system)
• SEC-34, "VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion" (With Intelligent Key system)
Vehicle security system
• SEC-217, "VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion" (Without Intelligent Key system)
Power window system PWC-12, "System Description"
CAN gateway LAN-110, "System Description"

BCS-11
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000011039000

FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC

BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.

Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe

B2190–00: CHAIN OF BCM-IMM ANT Inhibit engine cranking
B2191–00: ID DISCORD, BCM-IMMANT Inhibit engine cranking
B2192–00: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking
B2193–00: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking
B2195–00: ANTI-SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking
B2196–00: DONGLE NG Inhibit engine cranking
B2198–00: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking
B2557–00: VEHICLE SPEED Inhibit steering lock
B2602–00: SHIFT POSITION Inhibit steering lock
B2604–00: PNP/CLUTCH SW Inhibit steering lock
B2608–00: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking
B260F–00: ENG STATE SIG LOST Inhibit engine cranking
B26F1–00: IGN RELAY OFF Inhibit engine cranking
B26F2–00: IGN RELAY ON Inhibit engine cranking
B27D4–00: BCM - S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT Inhibit steering unlock
B27D5–00: S/L SENSOR TEST OUTPUT Inhibit steering unlock
B27D6–00: S/L CAN COMM CIRCUIT Inhibit steering lock
B27D7–00: S/L PWR RELAY Inhibit steering lock
B27D8–00: S/L VEHICLE SPEED MALFUNCTION Inhibit steering lock
B27D9–00: S/L IGN MALFUNCTION Inhibit steering lock/unlock
B27DA–00: IPDM CAN COMM CIRCUIT Inhibit steering lock
B27DC–00: S/L POWER SUPPLY Inhibit steering lock
B27DD–00: BCM - S/L ID DISCORD Inhibit steering lock
B27DE–00: S/L MECHANICAL MALFUNCTION Inhibit steering lock
B27DF–00: S/L HIGH LEVEL MALFUNCTION Inhibit steering lock/unlock
B27E0–00: S/L LOW LEVEL MALFUNCTION Inhibit steering lock
B27E1–00: S/L SAFETY CIRCUIT Inhibit steering lock
B27E5–00: S/L IGN OFF POSITION Inhibit steering lock
B27E6–00: S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE Inhibit steering lock
B27E8–00: S/L UNDETERMINED LOCK POS Inhibit steering lock
U0415: VEHICLE SPEED Inhibit steering lock

REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION

BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal.
When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear
wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor.
Condition of cancellation
1. More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop.
2. Turn rear wiper switch OFF.
3. Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch.
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY RAIN SENSOR MALFUNCTION
BCM detects the rain sensor serial link error and the rain sensor malfunction.
BCM controls the following fail-safe when rain sensor has a malfunction.
BCS-12
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Front wiper switch AUTO and sensing rain drop: The condition just before the activation of fail-safe is main-
tained until the front wiper switch is turned OFF. A
• Front wiper switch AUTO and not sensing rain drop: Front wiper is LO operation until the front wiper switch is
turned off.
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW B
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input
voltage is less than approximately 9 V. C
NOTE:
When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function
returns to normal operation.
D
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010688578
E
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMMIA1753GB

K
OUTLINE
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) and recognizes the
status of each switch.
• BCM has a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 - 5) and 5 input terminals (INPUT 1 - 5). It reads a L
maximum of 20 switch status.
COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX
BCS

BCS-13
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Combination switch circuit

JMMIA1754GB

Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list

System OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5
INPUT 1 — HI BEAM PASSING RR FOG FR FOG
INPUT 2 WIP VOLUME 1 — HEADLAMP AUTO LIGHT TAIL LAMP
INPUT 3 FR WASHER RR WASHER — TURN LH TURN RH
INPUT 4 FR WIPER LO FR WIPER HI FR WIPER INT/AUTO — LIGHT OFF
INPUT 5 WIP VOLUME 2 WIP VOLUME 3 RR WIPER INT RR WIPER ON —

COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION

Description
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 10 ms interval
normally.
NOTE:
BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 60 ms interval
when BCM is controlled at low power consumption control mode.

JMMIA1637GB

• BCM operates as follows and judges the status of the combination switch.
- It operates the transistor on OUTPUT side in the following order: OUTPUT 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1, and outputs
voltage waveform.
- The voltage waveform of OUTPUT corresponding to the formed circuit is input into the interface on INPUT
side if any (1 or more) switches are ON.

BCS-14
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
- It reads this change of the voltage as the status signal of the combination switch.
A

H
JMMIA1757GB

Operation Example
In the following operation example, the combination of the status signals of the combination switch is replaced I
as follows: INPUT 1 - 5 to “1 - 5” and OUTPUT 1 - 5 to “A - E”.
Example 1: When a switch (TURN RH switch) is turned ON
• The circuit between OUTPUT 5 and INPUT 3 is formed when the TURN RH switch is turned ON. J

BCS

O
JMMIA1755GB

• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “3E” when the signal of OUTPUT 5 is input to INPUT 3.
• BCM judges that the TURN RH switch is ON when the signal “3E” is detected.
P
Example 2: When some switches (TURN RH switch, FR WASHER switch) are turned ON

BCS-15
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The circuits between OUTPUT 5 and INPUT 3 and between OUTPUT 1 and INPUT 3 are formed when the
TURN RH switch and FR WASHER switch are turned ON.

JMMIA1756GB

• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “3AE” when the signals of OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 5 are
input to INPUT 3.
• BCM judges that the TURN RH switch and FR WASHER switch are ON when the signal “3AE” is detected.
WIPER VOLUME DIAL POSITION
• BCM judges the WIP VOLUME 1 - 4 by the status of WIP VOLUME 1, 2 and 3 switches.
4 clicks type
Switch status
Wiper volume
WIP VOLUME 1 WIP VOLUME 2 WIP VOLUME 3
1 ON ON OFF
2 ON OFF OFF
3 OFF OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON
• BCM judges the WIP VOLUME 1 - 5 by the status of WIP VOLUME 1, 2 and 3 switches.
5 clicks type
Switch status
Wiper volume
WIP VOLUME 1 WIP VOLUME 2 WIP VOLUME 3
1 ON ON OFF
2 ON OFF OFF
3 OFF OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON
5 OFF ON ON
NOTE:
For details of wiper volume dial position, refer to WW-13, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM (WITH
LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR) : System Description" (with rain sensor) or WW-17, "FRONT WIPER AND
WASHER SYSTEM (WITHOUT LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR) : System Description" (without rain sensor).
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM

BCS-16
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010688579

A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMMIA1814GB F
OUTLINE
BCM has the signal transmission function that outputs/transmits each input/received signal to each unit.
G
Signal transmission function list

Signal name Input Output Description H

Inputs the push-button ignition
Push-button ignition switch switch (push switch) signal and
(Push switch) (with Intelligent transmits the ignition switch sta-
Key system) tus judged with BCM via CAN
I
• Automatic back door control
Ignition switch ON signal module (CAN) communication.
• IPDM E/R (CAN) Inputs the ignition switch signal
Ignition switch (without Intelli- and transmits the ignition switch J
gent Key system) status judged with BCM via
CAN communication.
• Around view monitor control Inputs the door switch signal K
Door switch signal Any door switch unit (CAN) and transmits it via CAN com-
• Combination meter (CAN) munication.

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM L

BCS

BCS-17
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010688580

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMMIA1815GB

OUTLINE
• BCM incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power consumption according to the
vehicle status.
• BCM switches the status (control mode) by itself with the power saving control function. It performs the sleep
request to each unit (IPDM E/R, combination meter, automatic back door control module and electric parking
brake control module) that operates with the ignition switch OFF.
Normal mode (wake-up)
- CAN communication is normally performed with other units
- Each control with BCM is operating properly
CAN communication sleep mode (CAN sleep)
- CAN transmission is stopped
- Control with BCM only is operating
Low power consumption mode (BCM sleep)
- Low power consumption control is active
- CAN transmission is stopped
LOW POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL WITH BCM
BCM reduces the power consumption with the following operation in the low power consumption mode.
• The reading interval of the each switches changes from 10 ms interval to 60 ms interval.
Sleep mode activation
• BCM receives the sleep-ready signal (ready) from IPDM E/R, combination meter and AV control unit via
CAN communication.
• BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (sleep) to each unit when all of the CAN sleep conditions are ful-
filled.
• Each unit stops the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wake up signal. BCM is in CAN com-
munication sleep mode.
• BCM is in the low power consumption mode and perform the low power consumption control when all of the
BCM sleep conditions are fulfilled with CAN sleep condition.

BCS-18
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Sleep condition
CAN sleep condition BCM sleep condition A
1
• Ignition switch* : LOCK or OFF
• Push-button ignition switch (push switch)*2: No change 2 sec-
onds B
• Warning chime: Not operation
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer*2: Not operation
• Stop lamp switch: OFF
• Turn signal indicator lamp: Not operation C
Receiving the sleep-ready signal (ready) from all units • Exterior lamp: OFF
• Door lock status: No change
• Meter display signal: Non-transmission
D
• Door switch status: No change 2 seconds
• Back door opener switch status: No change 2 seconds
• Rear window defogger: OFF
• RAP system: OFF E
• CONSULT communication status: Not communication
*1: Without Intelligent Key system
*2: With Intelligent Key system F
Wake-up operation
• BCM transmits sleep wake up signal (wake up) to each unit when any condition listed below is established,
and then goes into normal mode from low power consumption mode. G
• Each unit starts transmissions with CAN communication by receiving sleep wake up signals.
Wake-up condition
Wake-up condition H
• Receiving the sleep-ready signal (Not-ready) from any units
• Ignition switch*1: OFF → ON or START
• Key switch*1: OFF → ON, ON → OFF I
• Push-button ignition switch (push switch)*2: OFF→ ON
• Hazard switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• HI BEAM switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
J
• PASSING switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• HEADLAMP switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• TAIL LAMP switch: OFF → ON
• FR FOG switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF K
• RR FOG switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• Driver door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• Passenger door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• Rear RH door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF L
• Rear LH door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• Back door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• Driver door request switch: OFF → ON
• Passenger door request switch: OFF → ON BCS
• Back door opener switch: OFF → ON
• Back door opener request switch: OFF → ON
• Stop lamp switch: OFF → ON
• Front door lock assembly (driver side) (unlock sensor): OFF → ON, ON → OFF N
• Remote keyless entry receiver communication: Receiving
• Door lock and unlock switch: NEUTRAL → LOCK, NEUTRAL → UNLOCK
*1: Without Intelligent Key system O
*2: With Intelligent Key system
SHIPPING MODE CONTROL SYSTEM
P

BCS-19
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SHIPPING MODE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010688581

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMMIA1403GB

DESCRIPTION
• BCM switches the status (shipping mode or normal mode) by itself according to the extended storage fuse
switch condition, and transmits shipping mode status signal to combination meter and each unit via CAN
communication.
• When shipping mode function operates, each control unit does not detect DTCs.
• BCM control functions are limited in shipping mode. Refer to BCS-120, "Description".
• The combination meter displays extended storage fuse warning message* on the information display, and
turns the turn signal indicator lamp (LH/RH) ON, when BCM is in shipping mode.
*: When shipping mode function operates, “SHIPPING MODE ON PUSH STORAGE FUSE” is displayed.

BCS-20
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000010688582
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode Function Description
Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
D
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. E
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. F
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item H
Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
I
Door lock DOOR LOCK × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × × J
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP ×
K
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × ×
— AIR CONDITONER* × × L
Intelligent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×
Combination switch COMB SW ×
BCS
Body control system BCM ×
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × N
Back door open TRUNK ×
Vehicle security THEFT ALM × ×
RAP RETAINED PWR × O
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
P
NOTE:
*: This item is displayed, but not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.

BCS-21
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description

BATTERY VOLTAGE V Battery voltage of the moment a particular DTC is detected.
VEHICLE SPEED km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected.
EXTERNAL TEMP °C External temperature of the moment a particular DTC is detected
NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK STATUS —
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
POWER SUPPLY
min Displays the cumulative time from the time that the battery terminal is connected.
COUNTER

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System
and Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008704

BCM CONSULT FUNCTION

CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description

Anti-hijack function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode
SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents

REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-BD/TR Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

BCS-22
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Contents
A
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
KEY SW B
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

ACTIVE TEST
C
Test item Description
This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched D
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check super lock actuator operation
SUPER LOCK • The all door lock actuators are set when “LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are released when “UNLOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched E
This test is able to check door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK IND • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation F

DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key Sys-
tem, Without Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008705 G

BCM CONSULT FUNCTION

CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. H
WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description I

Anti-hijack function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation J
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode K
SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation

DATA MONITOR L
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. BCS

Monitor Item Contents

REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side) N
REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-BD/TR Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
O
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH P
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

BCS-23
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Contents
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
KEY SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description

This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
SUPER LOCK
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK IND
This item is displayed, but cannot be used

DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key
System, With Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008706

WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description

Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode
SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents

DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
KEY SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch

BCS-24
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ACTIVE TEST
A
Test item Description
This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched B
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check super lock actuator operation
SUPER LOCK • The all door lock actuators are set when “LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched C
• The all door lock actuators are released when “UNLOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK IND • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation D

DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key
System and Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008707
E

WORK SUPPORT
F
Monitor item Description
Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate G
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE
This item is displayed, but cannot be used H
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode
SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
I
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable J
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents K

DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH

DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
BCS
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
NOTE: N
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored O
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
KEY SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch P

ACTIVE TEST

BCS-25
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Test item Description

This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
SUPER LOCK
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK IND
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

MULTI REMOTE ENT

MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (With Su-
per Lock) INFOID:0000000011008710

WORK SUPPORT

Test item Description

Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: Non-operation
• MODE 2: 30 sec.
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minute
• MODE 5: 3 minute
• MODE 6: 4 minute
• MODE 7: 5 minute
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS NOTE:
LOCK UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
WELCOME LIGHT OP SET
This item is displayed, but cannot be used

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Condition

CONFRM ID ALL
CONFRM ID4
Indicates [Yet] at all time.Switches to [Done] when a registered key is inserted into ignition key
CONFRM ID3
cylinder.
CONFRM ID2
CONFRM ID1
Indicates [ID OK] when key ID that is registered is received or is not yet received. Indicates [ID
NOT REGISTERED
NG] when key ID that is not registered is received.
TP 4
TP 3
Indicates the number of IDs that are registered.
TP 2
TP 1

CLUTCH SW*1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch

BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]*2 condition of stop lamp switch power supply

BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch

BCS-26
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Condition
A
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver door status
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger door status
DOOR STAT-RR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door RH status B
DOOR STAT-RL Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door LH status
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored C
STOP/START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start off switch
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from keyfob
D
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from keyfob
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
E
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from keyfob
F
KEY SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
IGN SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in START position G
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models.
*2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
H
ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description I

FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]
NOTE:
HORN
This item is displayed, but cannot be used J
This test is able to operate the blower relay in fuse block (J/B)
IGN CONT2 • On: Operates
• Off: Non-operation K
NOTE:
MIRROR+5
This item is displayed, but cannot be used

TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE: L
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
BCS
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to audio unit or NAVI control unit
AUTO ACC 2 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
N
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to ignition relay
AUTO ACC 1 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check trunk/luggage room lamp operation O
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
• Off: Non-operation
P
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Without
Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008713

WORK SUPPORT

BCS-27
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Test item Description

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Condition

CLUTCH SW*1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch

BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]*2 condition of stop lamp switch power supply

BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver door status
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger door status
DOOR STAT-RR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door RH status
DOOR STAT-RL Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door LH status
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
STOP/START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start off switch
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from keyfob
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from keyfob
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from keyfob

BCS-28
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Condition
A
KEY SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
IGN SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in START position B
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models.
2
* : OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
C
ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description

D
FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]
NOTE:
HORN
This item is displayed, but cannot be used E
This test is able to operate the blower relay in fuse block (J/B)
IGN CONT2 • On: Operates
• Off: Non-operation
F
NOTE:
MIRROR+5
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
TRUNK/BACK DOOR G
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
H
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to audio unit or NAVI control unit
AUTO ACC 2 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to ignition relay I
AUTO ACC 1 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check trunk/luggage room lamp operation J
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
• Off: Non-operation

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER K

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER)

INFOID:0000000011008741
L

WORK SUPPORT
BCS
Service item Setting item Description

MODE1*
NOTE:
SET R-DEF TIMER MODE2 Do not use this function.
N
MODE3
*: Factory setting
O
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable P
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Description

PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
REAR DEF SW Displays “Press (On)/other (Off)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch

ACTIVE TEST

BCS-29
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Test Item Description

REAR DEFOGGER Rear window defogger operates when “On” on CONSULT screen is touched

BUZZER
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER) INFOID:0000000011008744

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Display item
Description
[Unit]
PUSH SW
Status of push-button ignition switch judged by BCM.
[On/Off]
VEH SPEED 1
Value of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter with CAN communication line.
[km/h]
TAIL LAMP SW
Status of lighting switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function.
[On/Off]
FR FOG SW
Status of front fog lamp switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function.
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR
Status of driver side door switch judged by BCM.
[On/Off]
CDL LOCK SW
Status of door lock unlock switch judged by BCM.
[On/Off]

ACTIVE TEST

Display item
Description
[Unit]
IGN KEY WARN ALM The key warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
SEAT BELT WARN TEST This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
LIGHT WARN ALM The light warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
REVERSE WARNING This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE:
Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.
INT LAMP
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) INFOID:0000000011008729

WORK SUPPORT

Service item Setting item Setting

On* With interior room lamp timer function
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
Off Without interior room lamp timer function
On* With fog override function
FOG LAMP OVERRIDE
Off Without fog override function
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

BCS-30
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Monitor item A
Description
[Unit]
REQ SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
[On/Off]
B
REQ SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
PUSH SW C
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
[On/Off]
D
DOOR SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH E
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RL
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
[On/Off]
F
DOOR SW-BK
Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
[On/Off]
CDL LOCK SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch G
[On/Off]
CDL UNLOCK SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch
[On/Off]
H
KEY CYL LK-SW NOTE:
[On/Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
KEY CYL UN-SW NOTE:
[On/Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored I
RKE-LOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key or keyfob
[On/Off]
RKE-UNLOCK
J
Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key or keyfob
[On/Off]
KEY SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
[On/Off] K

ACTIVE TEST
L
Test item Operation Description
On Outputs interior room lamp control signal.
INT LAMP
Off Stops interior room lamp control signal. BCS
HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD LAMP) (LED Headlamp) INFOID:0000000011010965 N

WORK SUPPORT
O
Service item Setting item Setting
MODE1* Normal
MODE2 More sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON earlier than normal operation)
P
CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING
MODE3 More sensitive setting than MODE2 (Turns ON earlier than MODE2)
MODE4 Less sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON later than normal operation)
MODE1 NOTE:
TWILIGHT On
MODE2 This item is displayed, but cannot be used

BCS-31
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Service item Setting item Setting
MODE1
MODE2 NOTE:
WIPER LINK
MODE3 This item is displayed, but cannot be used

MODE4
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item
Description
[Unit]
PUSH SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
[On/Off]
ENGINE STATE
Indicates [STOP/STALL/CRANK/RUN] condition of engine states
[STOP/STALL/CRANK/RUN]
VEH SPEED 1
Indicates [km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter
[km/h]
TURN SIGNAL R
[On/Off]
TURN SIGNAL L
[On/Off]
TAIL LAMP SW
[On/Off]
HI BEAM SW
[On/Off]
HEADLAMP SW
[On/Off]
Each switch status that BCM judges from the combination switch reading function.
LIGHT OFF SW
[On/Off]
PASSING SW
[On/Off]
AUTO LIGHT SW
[On/Off]
FR FOG SW
[On/Off]
RR FOG SW
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RL
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-BK
Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
[On/Off]
OPTI SEN (DTCT) NOTE:
[V] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

BCS-32
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
Description
[Unit] A
OPTI SEN (FILT) NOTE:
[V] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
OPTICAL SENSOR B
The sensor condition received from light & rain sensor
[On/Off/NG]

ACTIVE TEST C
Test item Operation Description
• Transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication D
to turn the front fog lamp ON
On
FR FOG LAMP • Transmits the front fog light request signal to combination meter via CAN commu-
nication to turn the front fog lamp indicator lamp ON
Off Stops the front fog light request signal transmission E
• Outputs voltage to turn the rear fog lamp ON
On • Transmits the rear fog lamp status signal to combination meter via CAN commu-
RR FOG LAMP nication to turn the rear fog lamp indicator lamp ON F
• Stops the voltage to turn the rear fog lamp OFF
Off
• Stops the rear fog lamp status signal transmission
On Outputs voltage to turn the stop lamp RH ON G
STOP LAMP 1
Off Stops the voltage to turn the stop lamp RH OFF
On Outputs voltage to turn the stop lamp LH ON
STOP LAMP 2 H
Off Stops the voltage to turn the stop lamp LH OFF
On Outputs voltage to turn the high-mounted stop lamp ON
STOP LAMP 3
Off Stops the voltage to turn the high-mounted stop lamp OFF I
Transmits the daytime running light request signal to IPDM E/R using CAN commu-
On
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT nication to turn the daytime running light ON
Off Stops the daytime running light request signal transmission J
On Transmits the dimmer signal to NAVI control unit and dims display
ILL DIM SIGNAL*
Off Stops the dimmer signal transmission
K
*: For models without navigation, this item is displayed, but cannot be tested.
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD LAMP) (Halogen Headlamp)
INFOID:0000000011008727 L

WORK SUPPORT
BCS
Service item Setting item Setting
MODE1* Normal
MODE2 More sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON earlier than normal operation) N
CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING
MODE3 More sensitive setting than MODE2 (Turns ON earlier than MODE2)
MODE4 Less sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON later than normal operation)
O
MODE1 NOTE:
TWILIGHT On
MODE2 This item is displayed, but cannot be used

MODE1 P
MODE2 NOTE:
WIPER LINK
MODE3 This item is displayed, but cannot be used

MODE4
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR

BCS-33
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

AUTO LIGHT SW*1

[On/Off]

FR FOG SW*2
[On/Off]
RR FOG SW
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RL
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-BK
Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
[On/Off]
OPTI SEN (DTCT) NOTE:
[V] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
OPTI SEN (FILT) NOTE:
[V] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

OPTICAL SENSOR*1 The sensor condition received from light & rain sensor
[On/Off/NG]

*1: For models without auto light system, this item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
*2: For models without front fog lamp, this item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACTIVE TEST

BCS-34
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Test item Operation Description A

• Transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication
to turn the front fog lamp ON
On
FR FOG LAMP*1 • Transmits the front fog light request signal to combination meter via CAN commu-
B
nication to turn the front fog lamp indicator lamp ON
Off Stops the front fog light request signal transmission
• Outputs voltage to turn the rear fog lamp ON C
On • Transmits the rear fog lamp status signal to combination meter via CAN commu-
RR FOG LAMP nication to turn the rear fog lamp indicator lamp ON
• Stops the voltage to turn the rear fog lamp OFF
Off D
• Stops the rear fog lamp status signal transmission
On Outputs voltage to turn the stop lamp RH ON
STOP LAMP 1
Off Stops the voltage to turn the stop lamp RH OFF
E
On Outputs voltage to turn the stop lamp LH ON
STOP LAMP 2
Off Stops the voltage to turn the stop lamp LH OFF
On Outputs voltage to turn the high-mounted stop lamp ON F
STOP LAMP 3
Off Stops the voltage to turn the high-mounted stop lamp OFF
Transmits the daytime running light request signal to IPDM E/R using CAN commu-
On G
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT nication to turn the daytime running light ON
Off Stops the daytime running light request signal transmission
On Transmits the dimmer signal to NAVI control unit and dims display
ILL DIM SIGNAL*2 H
Off Stops the dimmer signal transmission

*1: For models without front fog lamp, this item is displayed, but cannot be tested.
*2: For models without navigation, this item is displayed, but cannot be tested. I
WIPER
WIPER : CONSULT Function - WIPER INFOID:0000000011008738 J

WORK SUPPORT
K
Service item Setting item Description
Linked with vehicle speed
On*3 (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the vehicle speed and L
WIPER SPEED SET- wiper volume dial position.) The setting of front wiper
INT operation can be
TING*1 Not linked with vehicle speed changed.
Off (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the wiper volume dial BCS
position.)
Linked with light & rain sensor
On*3 (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the light & rain sensor,
vehicle speed, and wiper volume dial position) The setting of front wiper N
RAIN SENSOR*2 AUTO operation can be
Not linked with light & rain sensor changed
Off (Front wiper intermittent time linked with the vehicle speed and
wiper volume dial position) O
On* 3 Front wiper drop wipe and rear wiper drop wipe operation ON The setting of drop wipe
FR RR DRIP operation can be
Off Front wiper drop wipe and rear wiper drop wipe operation OFF changed
P
REAR WIPER LINK On Rear wiper operation linked with reverse ON The setting of rear wiper
WITH REVERSE operation linked with re-
SETTING Off*3 Rear wiper operation linked with reverse OFF verse can be changed

*1: For models without light & rain sensor

*2: For models with light & rain sensor
*3: Factory setting

BCS-35
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item
Description
[Unit]
PUSH SW
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch.
[Off/On]
VEH SPEED 1 Displays the value of the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter via CAN com-
[km/h] munication.
FR WIPER HI
[Off/On]
FR WIPER LOW
[Off/On]
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function.
FR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
FR WIPER INT
[Off/On]
FR WIPER STOP Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN
[Off/On] communication.
INT VOLUME
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function.
[1 − 7]
RR WIPER ON
[Off/On]
RR WIPER INT
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function.
[Off/On]
RR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
RR WIPER STOP
Displays the status of the rear wiper stop position signal received from rear wiper motor.
[Off/On]
H/L WSR SW*
Status of headlamp washer switch judged by BCM.
[Off/On]
RAIN SENSOR
Request signal from light & rain sensor detected by BCM is displayed.
[OFF/LOW/HIGH/SPLASH/NG]
*: For models without headlamp washer switch, this item is indicated but is not used.
ACTIVE TEST

Test item Operation Description

Hi Operates the front wiper HI operation.
Lo Operates the front wiper LO operation.
FR WIPER
INT Operates the front wiper INT/AUTO operation.
Off Stops the front wiper operation.
On Operates the rear wiper operation.
RR WIPER
Off Stops the rear wiper operation.
HEADLAMP WASHER* On Operates the headlamp washer operation.
*: For models without headlamp washer, this item is indicated but is not used.
FLASHER
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) (LED Headlamp) INFOID:0000000011010966

WORK SUPPORT

BCS-36
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Service item Setting item Setting A

On* With 3-time flasher function
3-TIME FLASHER SETTING
Off Without 3-time flasher function
B
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: C
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item
D
Description
[Unit]
REQ SW -DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side) E
[On/Off]
REQ SW -AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
PUSH SW F
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
[On/Off]
TURN SIGNAL R
[On/Off] G
Each switch status that BCM detects from the combination switch reading function
TURN SIGNAL L
[On/Off]
HAZARD SW H
The switch status input from the hazard switch
[On/Off]
RKE-LOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
[On/Off] I
RKE-UNLOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
[On/Off]
RKE-PANIC NOTE: J
[On/Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) (Halogen Headlamp) INFOID:0000000011008728

WORK SUPPORT
L
Service item Setting item Setting
On* With 3-time flasher function
3-TIME FLASHER SETTING
Off Without 3-time flasher function BCS
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
N
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
O
Monitor item
Description
[Unit]
REQ SW -DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
P
[On/Off]
REQ SW -AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
PUSH SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
[On/Off]

BCS-37
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
Description
[Unit]
TURN SIGNAL R
[On/Off]
Each switch status that BCM detects from the combination switch reading function
TURN SIGNAL L
[On/Off]
HAZARD SW
The switch status input from the hazard switch
[On/Off]
RKE-LOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key or keyfob
[On/Off]
RKE-UNLOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key or keyfob
[On/Off]
RKE-PANIC NOTE:
[On/Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super
Lock) INFOID:0000000011008715

WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description

INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this
mode
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ENGINE START BY I-KEY • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
• MODE 5: 3 minutes
• MODE 6: 4 minutes
• MODE 7: 5 minutes
NOTE:
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
Ignition battery saver system mode can be changed to operation with this mode
IGN/ACC BATTERY SAVER • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UN- NOTE:
LOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK NOTE:
UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
BCS-38
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. A

Monitor Item Condition

REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side) B
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
C
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch

CLUTCH SW*1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch

BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]*2 condition of stop lamp switch power supply D

BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
E
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch
PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1 F
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of reverse/neutral position switch
SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
G
STARTER RELAY - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter relay
ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states
Display the starter relay/starter control relay status signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communi- H
ST/INHIRELAY-IPDM
cation
REVERSE SIGNAL - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of R position
CRANKING PERMIT - ECM Display the engine cranking permit signal from ECM via CAN communication I
IS STATUS - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start system
STARTER CUT RELAY - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay signal from ECM via CAN communication
J
VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) by
VEH SPEED 2
numerical value [Km/h]
K
IGN REQ - IPDM Display the ignition request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
STARTER REQ - IPDM Display the starter request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver door status L
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger door status
DOOR STAT-RR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door RH status
BCS
DOOR STAT-RL Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door LH status
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
N
ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of Intelligent Key ID
PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility
NOTE: O
PRMT RKE STRT
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
Indicates [KEY On/NOT On] condition of Intelligent Key ID and Intelligent Key is detected in-
I-KEY OK FLAG
side vehicle
P
PRBT ENG STRT Indicates whether or not the engine is in start prohibited status
Indicates whether or not it is in engine start possible status when Intelligent Key verification is
ID AUTHENT CANCEL TIMER
unnecessary
ACC BATTERY SAVER Indicates [On/Off] whether or not ignition battery saver is in operation
Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in cranking prohibited status due to starter motor protection
CRNK PRBT TMR
function operation

BCS-39
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Condition
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in AUTO CRANKING MODE status
CRNK PRBT TME Indicates the time for changing from cranking prohibited status to cranking possible status
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates the time that AUTO CRANKING MODE operates
CRANKING TME Indicates the cranking operation time
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK
This item is displayed, but not used
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intel-
RKE OPE COUN1
ligent Key, the numerical value start changing
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L IGN OFF POSITION Indicates [On/Off] condition of Ignition OFF signal
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 1 Indicates [Gnd/On] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L POWER OUTPUT Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
S/L POWER CHECK Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
ANTICIPATED POWER Indicates [On/Off] condition of anticipated power supply
S/L LOCK REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit lock request signal
S/L - BCM (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of CAN communication
S/L POWER ERROR Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply error
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
VEH SPEED NORMAL (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
ENGINE RUNNING (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of engine running
S/L ID DISCORD Indicates [Correct/Incorrect] condition of ID verification
S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE Indicates [On/Off] condition of antiscan mode
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT Indicates [Inhibition/No inhbt] condition of inhibit steering lock
S/L UNLOCK (CAN) Indicates [Finished/Unfinished] condition of steering lock unit unlock
S/L ID STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Coded/Blank] condition of registration ID
S/L RESET STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Exit/No exit] condition of steering lock unit reset signal
S/L LO-LEVEL MALFUNC
Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of lo-level malfunction
(CAN)
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN) Indicates [Armed/Malf/Unlocked/Undefined] condition of lock/unlock position signal
S/L ACT MALFUNCTION (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of steering lock unit malfunction
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of hi-level malfunction
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (SPD) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (PWR) Indicates [Allowed/Forbid] condition of safety line inhibition
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of sensor test power supply
S/L SEN TEST PERMIT (CAN) Indicates [Forbid/Authorize] condition of sensor test
S/L STAT NOT DETECT (CAN) Indicates [Ok/Undefind] condition of steering lock undefined position signal
S/L LOCKING FINISHED (CAN) Indicates [Unfinshd/Finished] condition of steering lock unit lock status signal
STOP/START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start off switch
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

BCS-40
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Condition
A
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
RKE PBD Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door open request signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE: B
KEY SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
IGN SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
C
NOTE:
START SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models. D

2
* : OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.

ACTIVE TEST
E
Test item Description
This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate F
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
• Buzzer 1: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipi...) when CONSULT screen is touched G
• Buzzer 2: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipi-pipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
INSIDE BUZZER touched
• Buzzer 3: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipipi-pipipipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
touched H
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
INDICATOR
• KEY ON: [Intelligent Key system malfunction] displays when CONSULT screen is touched I
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation J
FLASHER
The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/Off” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
HORN
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
K
This test is able to operate the blower relay in fuse block (J/B)
IGN CONT2 • On: Operates
• Off: Non-operation
L
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check BCM sends starter request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communi-
cation BCS
• MODE 1: IGN ON, START request OFF
ENGINE START REQUEST
• MODE 2: IGN OFF, START request ON
• MODE 3: IGN ON, START request ON
• Off: Non-operation
N
NOTE:
IGNITION RELAY
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
O
This test is able to operate the starter control relay
STARTER CUT RELAY • On: Operates
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE: P
ENGINE START
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used

BCS-41
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item Description
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to audio unit or NAVI control unit
AUTO ACC 2 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to ignition relay
AUTO ACC 1 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check trunk/luggage room lamp operation
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
• Off: Non-operation

INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Without Super

Lock) INFOID:0000000011008716

WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description

INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this
mode
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ENGINE START BY I-KEY • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
• MODE 5: 3 minutes
• MODE 6: 4 minutes
• MODE 7: 5 minutes
NOTE:
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
Ignition battery saver system mode can be changed to operation with this mode
IGN/ACC BATTERY SAVER • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UN- NOTE:
LOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK NOTE:
UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used

SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

BCS-42
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Monitor Item Condition A

REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
B

PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch

1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch
CLUTCH SW* C
BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]*2 condition of stop lamp switch power supply
BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
D
DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch
PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch E
IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of reverse/neutral position switch
SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
F

STARTER RELAY - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter relay

ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states G
Display the starter relay/starter control relay status signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communi-
ST/INHIRELAY-IPDM
cation
REVERSE SIGNAL - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of R position H
CRANKING PERMIT - ECM Display the engine cranking permit signal from ECM via CAN communication
IS STATUS - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start system
STARTER CUT RELAY - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay signal from ECM via CAN communication
I

VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) by J
VEH SPEED 2
numerical value [Km/h]
IGN REQ - IPDM Display the ignition request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
STARTER REQ - IPDM Display the starter request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication K
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver door status
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger door status
L
DOOR STAT-RR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door RH status
DOOR STAT-RL Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door LH status
NOTE: BCS
BK DOOR STATE
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of Intelligent Key ID
PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility N
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

I-KEY OK FLAG
Indicates [KEY On/NOT On] condition of Intelligent Key ID and Intelligent Key is detected in- O
side vehicle
PRBT ENG STRT Indicates whether or not the engine is in start prohibited status
Indicates whether or not it is in engine start possible status when Intelligent Key verification is P
ID AUTHENT CANCEL TIMER
unnecessary
ACC BATTERY SAVER Indicates [On/Off] whether or not ignition battery saver is in operation
Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in cranking prohibited status due to starter motor protection
CRNK PRBT TMR
function operation
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in AUTO CRANKING MODE status
CRNK PRBT TME Indicates the time for changing from cranking prohibited status to cranking possible status

BCS-43
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Condition
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates the time that AUTO CRANKING MODE operates
CRANKING TME Indicates the cranking operation time
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK
This item is displayed, but not used
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intel-
RKE OPE COUN1
ligent Key, the numerical value start changing
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L IGN OFF POSITION Indicates [On/Off] condition of Ignition OFF signal
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 1 Indicates [Gnd/On] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L POWER OUTPUT Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
S/L POWER CHECK Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
ANTICIPATED POWER Indicates [On/Off] condition of anticipated power supply
S/L LOCK REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit lock request signal
S/L - BCM (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of CAN communication
S/L POWER ERROR Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply error
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
VEH SPEED NORMAL (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
ENGINE RUNNING (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of engine running
S/L ID DISCORD Indicates [Correct/Incorrect] condition of ID verification
S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE Indicates [On/Off] condition of antiscan mode
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT Indicates [Inhibition/No inhbt] condition of inhibit steering lock
S/L UNLOCK (CAN) Indicates [Finished/Unfinished] condition of steering lock unit unlock
S/L ID STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Coded/Blank] condition of registration ID
S/L RESET STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Exit/No exit] condition of steering lock unit reset signal
S/L LO-LEVEL MALFUNC
Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of lo-level malfunction
(CAN)
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN) Indicates [Armed/Malf/Unlocked/Undefined] condition of lock/unlock position signal
S/L ACT MALFUNCTION (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of steering lock unit malfunction
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of hi-level malfunction
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (SPD) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (PWR) Indicates [Allowed/Forbid] condition of safety line inhibition
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of sensor test power supply
S/L SEN TEST PERMIT (CAN) Indicates [Forbid/Authorize] condition of sensor test
S/L STAT NOT DETECT (CAN) Indicates [Ok/Undefind] condition of steering lock undefined position signal
S/L LOCKING FINISHED (CAN) Indicates [Unfinshd/Finished] condition of steering lock unit lock status signal
STOP/START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start off switch
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
RKE PBD Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door open request signal from Intelligent Key

BCS-44
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Condition
A
NOTE:
KEY SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
IGN SW B
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
START SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
C
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models.
*2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.

ACTIVE TEST D

Test item Description

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation E
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation F
• Buzzer 1: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipi...) when CONSULT screen is touched
• Buzzer 2: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipi-pipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
INSIDE BUZZER touched
• Buzzer 3: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipipi-pipipipi-...) when CONSULT screen is G
touched
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning lamp operation H
• KEY ON: [Intelligent Key system malfunction] displays when CONSULT screen is touched
INDICATOR
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation
I
FLASHER
The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/Off” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
HORN J
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
This test is able to operate the blower relay in fuse block (J/B)
IGN CONT2 • On: Operates
• Off: Non-operation K
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check BCM sends starter request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communi- L
cation
• MODE 1: IGN ON, START request OFF
ENGINE START REQUEST
• MODE 2: IGN OFF, START request ON
• MODE 3: IGN ON, START request ON BCS
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
IGNITION RELAY
This item is displayed, but cannot be used N
This test is able to operate the starter control relay
STARTER CUT RELAY • On: Operates
• Off: Non-operation O
NOTE:
ENGINE START
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE: P
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to audio unit or NAVI control unit
AUTO ACC 2 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation

BCS-45
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item Description
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to ignition relay
AUTO ACC 1 • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check trunk/luggage room lamp operation
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
• Off: Non-operation

COMB SW
COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB SW) INFOID:0000000010688597

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item [UNIT] Description

FR WIPER HI Displays the status of the FR WIPER HI switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
FR WIPER LOW Displays the status of the FR WIPER LOW switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
FR WASHER SW Displays the status of the FR WASHER switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
FR WIPER INT Displays the status of the FR WIPER INT/AUTO switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the com-
[Off/On] bination switch reading function.
INT VOLUME
Displays the status of wiper volume dial position judged by BCM with the combination switch reading function.
[1 - 7]
RR WIPER ON Displays the status of the RR WIPER ON switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
RR WIPER INT Displays the status of the RR WIPER INT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
RR WASHER SW Displays the status of the RR WASHER switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
TURN SIGNAL R Displays the status of the TURN RH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
[Off/On] reading function.
TURN SIGNAL L Displays the status of the TURN LH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
[Off/On] reading function.
TAIL LAMP SW Displays the status of the TAIL LAMP switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
HI BEAM SW Displays the status of the HI BEAM switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
[Off/On] reading function.
HEAD LAMP SW Displays the status of the HEADLAMP switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
LIGHT OFF SW Displays the status of the LIGHT OFF switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.
PASSING SW Displays the status of the PASSING switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
[Off/On] reading function.
AUTO LIGHT SW Displays the status of the AUTO LIGHT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
[Off/On] switch reading function.

BCS-46
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item [UNIT] Description
A
FR FOG SW Displays the status of the FR FOG switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
[Off/On] reading function.
RR FOG SW Displays the status of the RR FOG switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
[Off/On] reading function. B

BCM
BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM) INFOID:0000000010688598
C

WORK SUPPORT
D
Item Description
RESET SETTING VALUE Return a value set with Work Support of each system to a default value in factory shipment.
E
AUTO ACC FNCTN (AU-
Switches the operation of audio and navigation systems between continuous and not continuous after
DIO/NAVI SET AFTER IGN
ignition is OFF.
OFF)
F
IMMU
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) (With Intelligent Key System) INFOID:0000000011008725
G
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable H
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item Content I

PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch.

WORK SUPPORT J

Service item Description

CONFIRM DONGLE ID It is possible to check that dongle unit is applied to the vehicle. K
ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description

L
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation.
THEFT IND
Security indicator lamp is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT screen touched.
BCS
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) (Without Intelligent Key System)
INFOID:0000000011008726

N
WORK SUPPORT

Service item Description

O
CONFIRM DONGLE ID It is possible to check that dongle unit is applied to the vehicle.

ACTIVE TEST
P
Test item Description
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation.
THEFT IND
Security indicator lamp is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT screen touched.

BATTERY SAVER

BCS-47
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) INFOID:0000000011008732

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item
Description
[Unit]
REQ SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
[On/Off]
REQ SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
PUSH SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-RL
Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
[On/Off]
DOOR SW-BK
Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
[On/Off]
CDL LOCK SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch
[On/Off]
CDL UNLOCK SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch
[On/Off]
KEY CYL LK-SW NOTE:
[On/Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
KEY CYL UN-SW NOTE:
[On/Off] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-LOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key or keyfob
[On/Off]
RKE-UNLOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key or keyfob
[On/Off]
KEY SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
[On/Off]

ACTIVE TEST

Test item Operation Description

ON Turns interior room lamp relay ON.
BATTERY SAVER
OFF Turns interior room lamp relay OFF.

TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (With Intelligent Key System and Super
Lock) INFOID:0000000011008719

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

BCS-48
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Monitor Item Contents A

PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
STARTER CUT RELAY Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay
NOTE:
B
DETECTION SENSOR (BK)
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter
C
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW D
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
E
BACK DOOR OPENER SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
F
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (With Intelligent Key System, Without
Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008720
G
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable H
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents I

PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
STARTER CUT RELAY Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay
DETECTION SENSOR (BK) Indicates [On/Off] condition of hands free sensor
J

VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter
NOTE: K
KEY CYL SW-TR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
L
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
BACK DOOR OPENER SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch
BCS
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (Without Intelligent Key System, With N

Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008721

O
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. P

Monitor Item Contents

STARTER CUT RELAY Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

BCS-49
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Contents
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
BACK DOOR OPENER SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (Without Intelligent Key System and
Super Lock) INFOID:0000000011008722

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor Item Contents

STARTER CUT RELAY Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
BACK DOOR OPENER SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

THEFT ALM
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM - THEFT) (With Intelligent Key System)
INFOID:0000000011008723

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitored Item Description

REQ SW -DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (driver side).
REQ SW -AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (passenger side).
REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door opener request switch.
PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
DOOR SW-BK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch.
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch.
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored.

BCS-50
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitored Item Description
A
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR B
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
SEN CANCEL SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sensor cancel switch.
RKE-LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
C
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
D
NOTE:
KEY SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored.

WORK SUPPORT E

Service Item Description

SECURITY ALARM SET This mode is able to confirm and change vehicle security alarm ON-OFF setting. F
Select the siren function ON or OFF, and siren type.
• MODE 1: Without siren
• MODE 2: With siren G
SIREN SET
• MODE 3: With external complete protection (with siren)
• MODE 4: Without any external protection (with siren)
• MODE 5: Without external tilt protection (with siren)
H
ACTIVE TEST

Test Item Description I

SIREN Activates the self-diagnosis function for siren control unit.
NOTE:
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
This item is indicated, but not used J
NOTE:
HEAD LAMP
This item is indicated, but not used

THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM - THEFT) (Without Intelligent Key System) K
INFOID:0000000011008724

DATA MONITOR L
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. BCS

Monitored Item Description

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side). N
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
O

DOOR SW-BK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch.
P
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch.
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
This item is indicated, but not monitored.

BCS-51
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitored Item Description
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
SEN CANCEL SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sensor cancel switch.
RKE-LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Keyfob.
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Keyfob.
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
KEY SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of Key switch.

WORK SUPPORT

Service Item Description

SECURITY ALARM SET This mode is able to confirm and change vehicle security alarm ON-OFF setting.
Select the siren function ON or OFF, and siren type.
• MODE 1: Without siren
• MODE 2: With siren
SIREN SET
• MODE 3: With external complete protection (with siren)
• MODE 4: Without any external protection (with siren)
• MODE 5: Without external tilt protection (with siren)

ACTIVE TEST

Test Item Description

SIREN Activates the self-diagnosis function for siren control unit.
NOTE:
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
This item is indicated, but not used
NOTE:
HEAD LAMP
This item is indicated, but not used

SIGNAL BUFFER
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM - SIGNAL BUFFER) INFOID:0000000010688605

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item [UNIT] Description

PUSH SW
Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch (push switch) judged by BCM.
[Off/On]

BCS-52
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A
BCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010688606
B

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

NOTE: C
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
D
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is not recog-
Yet
nized by any Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
CONFRM ID ALL E
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is recognized
Done
by any Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is not recog-
Yet F
nized by the fourth Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
CONFIRM ID4
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is recognized
Done
by the fourth Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
G
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is not recog-
Yet
nized by the third Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
CONFIRM ID3
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is recognized
Done H
by the third Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is not recog-
Yet
nized by the second Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
CONFIRM ID2 I
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is recognized
Done
by the second Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is not recog-
Yet J
nized by the first Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
CONFIRM ID1
The Intelligent Key ID that the NATS antenna amp. receives is recognized
Done
by the first Intelligent Key ID registered to BCM.
BCM detects registered Intelligent Key ID, or BCM does not detect Intelli-
K
ID OK
NOT REGISTERED gent Key ID.
BCM detects non-registration Intelligent Key ID. ID NG
L
The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet
TP 4
The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done
The ID of third Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet BCS
TP 3
The ID of third Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done
The ID of second Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet
TP 2 N
The ID of second Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done
The ID of first Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet
TP 1
The ID of first Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done
O
Driver door request switch is not pressed Off
REQ SW -DR
Driver door request switch is pressed On
Passenger door request switch is not pressed Off P
REQ SW -AS
Passenger door request switch is pressed On
Trunk lid opener request switch is not pressed Off
REQ SW -BD/TR
Trunk lid opener request switch is pressed On
Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed Off
PUSH SW
Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed On

BCS-53
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Other than engine cranking Off
STARTER CUT RELAY
At engine cranking On
Hands free sensor is not detected. Off
DETECTION SENSOR (BK)
Hands free sensor is detected. On
The clutch pedal is not depressed. Off
CLUCH SW
The clutch pedal is depressed On
The brake pedal is not depressed and ignition switch ON Off
BRAKE SW 1
The brake pedal is depressed and ignition switch ON On
The brake pedal is not depressed Off
BRAKE SW 2
The brake pedal is depressed On
Selector lever in P position Off
DETE/CANCL SW
Selector lever in any position other than P On
The clutch pedal is depressed Off
START CLUTCH SW
The clutch pedal is not depressed On
Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed Off
PUSH SW -IPDM
Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed On
Power position in OFF or ACC Off
IGN RLY1 -F/B
Power position in ON On
• Selector lever in any position other than P or N (CVT models)
Off
• Control lever in any position other than neutral (M/T models)
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM
• Selector lever in P or N position (CVT models)
On
• Control lever in neutral position (M/T models)
Selector lever in any position other than P or N Off
SFT PN -IPDM
Selector lever in P or N position On
Other than engine cranking Off
At engine cranking (short cranking) Crank
STARTER RELAY - IPDM
Operation prohibited status Invalid
At engine cranking On
Engine stopped STOP
While the engine stalls STALL
ENGINE STATE
At engine cranking CRANK
Engine running RUN
Power position in OFF Off, Off
Engine restart Off, On
ST/INHI RELAY - IPDM
At engine cranking INVALID
Engine running On, On
Selector lever in any position other than R position Off
REVERSE SIGNAL - IPDM
Selector lever in R position On
The engine start is prohibited PRHBT
The engine start is permitted PERMIT
CRANKING PERMIT - ECM
When it is stopped requested during engine start STOP
When not communication with ECM Off
Stop/start system not operating Off
IS STATUS - ECM
Stop/start system operating On

BCS-54
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
A
Other than engine cranking Off
STARTER CUT RELAY - ECM
At engine cranking On
Equivalent to speed- B
VEH SPEED 1 While driving
ometer reading
Equivalent to speed-
VEH SPEED 2 While driving
ometer reading
C
Power position in OFF or ACC Off
IGN REQ - IPDM
Power position in ON On
Other than engine cranking Off D
STARTER REQ - IPDM
At engine cranking On
Driver door is locked LOCK
DOOR STAT-DR E
Driver door is unlocked UNLOCK
Passenger door is locked LOCK
DOOR STAT-AS
Passenger door is unlocked UNLOCK F
Rear door RH is locked LOCK
DOOR STAT-RR
Rear door RH is unlocked UNLOCK
Rear door LH is locked LOCK
G
DOOR STAT-RL
Rear door LH is unlocked UNLOCK
Back door is locked LOCK H
BK DOOR STATE
Back door is unlocked UNLOCK
Steering is locked Reset
ID OK FLAG
Steering is unlocked Set I
When the engine start is prohibited Reset
PRMT ENG STRT
When the engine start is permitted Set
J
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT Reset
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Intelligent Key ID and Intelligent Key is detected outside vehicle NOT On K
I-KEY OK FLAG
Intelligent Key ID and Intelligent Key is detected inside vehicle KEY On
Not activated fail safe function Reset
PRBT ENG STRT
Engine start is prohibited by fail safe function SET L
Engine start is prohibited without Intelligent Key STOP
ID AUTHENT CANCEL TIMER
Engine start is permitted without Intelligent Key OPRAT
BCS
ACC battery saver timer is stop STOP
ACC BATTERY SAVER
ACC battery saver timer is running OPRAT
Cranking is permitted Off N
CRNK PRBT TMR
Cranking is prohibited On
Not auto cranking Off
AUT CRANK TMR O
During auto cranking On
CRNK PRBT TME Cranking prohibit timer sec
AUT CRANK TMR Auto cranking timer sec P
CRANKING TME Cranking timer sec
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK —
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Operation frequency
RKE OPE COUN1 During the operation of the Intelligent Key
of the Intelligent Key

BCS-55
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2 —
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Power position in ON Off
S/L IGN OFF POSITION
Power position in OFF or ACC On
Steering lock unit is not operated GND
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 1
Steering is lock unit is operated On
Steering lock unit is not operated Off
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 2
Steering is lock unit is operated On
Steering lock unit is operated Off
S/L POWER OUTPUT
Steering is lock unit is not operated On
Steering lock unit is operated Off
S/L POWER CHECK
Steering is lock unit is not operated On
Not outputs the steering lock unit anticipated power supply Off
ANTICIPATED POWER
Outputs the steering lock unit anticipated power supply On
Steering lock unit is not operated Off
S/L LOCK REQ
Steering is lock unit is operated On
When not communication between BCM and steering lock unit Off
S/L - BCM (CAN)
When communication between BCM and steering lock unit On
Steering lock unit power supply is normal Off
S/L POWER ERROR
Steering lock unit power supply is malfunction On
Power position ON and steering is unlocked Off
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L)
Power position ON and steering is locked On
While the vehicle is stopped Off
VEH SPEED NORMAL (S/L)
While the vehicle is running On
Engine stopped Off
ENGINE RUNNING (S/L)
Engine running On
When the BCM and steering lock unit ID becomes consistent Correct
S/L ID DISCORD
When the BCM and steering lock unit ID becomes not consistent Incorrect
Steering lock system is normal Off
S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE
Steering lock system is malfunction On
Power position in OFF No inhbt
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT
Power position in ACC or ON Inhibition
Steering is locked Unfinshd
S/L UNLOCK (CAN)
Steering is unlocked Finished
The ID of steering lock unit is registered Coded
S/L ID STATUS (CAN)
The ID of steering lock unit is not registered Blank
Steering is unlocked Exit
S/L RESET STATUS (CAN)
Steering is lock unit is operated (look → unlock) No exit
Steering lock system is normal No malf
S/L LO-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN)
Steering lock system is malfunction Malf
Steering is locked Armed
Steering is unlocked Malf
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN)
Steering lock system is malfunction Unlocked
Steering is lock unit is operated Undfined

BCS-56
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
A
Steering lock unit is normal No malf
S/L ACT MALFUNCTION (CAN)
Steering lock unit is malfunction Malf
Steering lock system is normal No malf B
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN)
Steering lock system is malfunction Malf
When the steering lock unit receives the lock/unlock request signal to the
0 km/h
vehicle stopped C
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (SPD)
When the steering lock unit receives the lock/unlock request signal to the
> 0 km/h
vehicle running
Steering lock system is normal Allowed D
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (PWR)
Steering lock system is malfunction Forbid
Steering lock unit is not operated On
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) E
Steering is lock unit is operated Off
Steering lock system is normal Forbid
S/L SEN TEST PERMIT (CAN)
Steering lock system is malfunction Authorize F
Steering is locked OK
S/L STAT NOT DETECT (CAN)
Steering is unlocked Undfined
Steering is unlocked Unfinshd
G
S/L LOCKING FINISHED (CAN)
Steering is locked Finished
Other than front wiper switch HI Off H
FR WIPER HI
Front wiper switch HI On
Other than front wiper switch LO Off
FR WIPER LOW
Front wiper switch LO On I
Front washer switch OFF Off
FR WASHER SW
Front washer switch ON On
J
Other than front wiper switch INT/AUTO Off
FR WIPER INT
Front wiper switch INT/AUTO On
Front wiper is not in STOP position Off K
FR WIPER STOP
Front wiper is in STOP position On
Wiper volume dial po-
INT VOLUME Wiper volume dial is in a dial position L
sition
Other than rear wiper switch ON Off
RR WIPER ON
Rear wiper switch ON On
BCS
Other than rear wiper switch INT Off
RR WIPER INT
Rear wiper switch INT On
Rear washer switch OFF Off N
RR WASHER SW
Rear washer switch ON On
Rear wiper is in STOP position Off
RR WIPER STOP O
Rear wiper is not in STOP position On
Other than turn signal switch RH Off
TURN SIGNAL R
Turn signal switch RH On P
Other than turn signal switch LH Off
TURN SIGNAL L
Turn signal switch LH On
Other than lighting switch 1ST Off
TAIL LAMP SW
Lighting switch 1ST On

BCS-57
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Other than lighting switch HI Off
HI BEAM SW
Lighting switch HI On
Other than lighting switch 2ND Off
HEAD LAMP SW
Lighting switch 2ND On
Other than lighting switch OFF Off
LIGHT OFF SW
Lighting switch OFF On
Other than lighting switch PASS Off
PASSING SW
Lighting switch PASS On
Other than lighting switch AUTO Off
AUTO LIGHT SW
Lighting switch AUTO On
Front fog lamp switch OFF Off
FR FOG SW
Front fog lamp switch ON On
Rear fog lamp switch OFF Off
RR FOG SW
Rear fog lamp switch ON On
Driver door closed Off
DOOR SW-DR
Driver door opened On
Passenger door closed Off
DOOR SW-AS
Passenger door opened On
Rear RH door closed Off
DOOR SW-RR
Rear RH door opened On
Rear LH door closed Off
DOOR SW-RL
Rear LH door opened On
Back door closed Off
DOOR SW-BK
Back door opened On
Other than power door lock switch LOCK Off
CDL LOCK SW
Power door lock switch LOCK On
Other than power door lock switch UNLOCK Off
CDL UNLOCK SW
Power door lock switch UNLOCK On
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Hazard switch is OFF Off
HAZARD SW
Hazard switch is ON On
Rear window defogger switch OFF Off
REAR DEF SW
Rear window defogger switch ON On
Headlamp washer switch OFF Off
H/L WSR SW
Headlamp washer switch ON On
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Back door opener switch OFF Off
BACK DOOR OPENER SW
Back door opener switch ON On

BCS-58
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
A
NOTE:
STOP/START SW Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Sensor cancel switch is not pressed Off
SEN CANCEL SW B
Sensor cancel switch is pressed On
• LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed (with Intelligent Key
system)
Off C
• LOCK button of the keyfob is not pressed (without Intelligent Key sys-
RKE-LOCK tem)
• LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed (with Intelligent Key sys-
tem) On D
• LOCK button of the keyfob is pressed (without Intelligent Key system)
• UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed (with Intelligent Key
system) E
Off
• UNLOCK button of the keyfob is not pressed (without Intelligent Key
system)
RKE-UNLOCK
• UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed (with Intelligent Key
system)
F
On
• UNLOCK button of the keyfob is pressed (without Intelligent Key sys-
tem)
NOTE: G
RKE-TR/BD Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored. H
NOTE:
RKE-MODE CHG Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Power back door button OFF Off I
RKE PBD
Power back door button ON On
Car crash information signal (NORMAL) is detected. NOMAL
J
SHOCK SENSOR Car crash information signal (AIR BAG OPEN) is detected. On
Car crash information signal is not detected. Off
Bright outside of the vehicle Close to 5 V K
OPTI SEN (DTCT)
Dark outside of the vehicle Close to 0 V
Bright outside of the vehicle (Lighting switch AUTO) Close to 5 V
OPTI SEN (FILT) L
Dark outside of the vehicle (Lighting switch AUTO) Close to 1.50 V
NOTE:
OPTICAL SENSOR Off
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
BCS
No rain (or very light rain) Off
Light rain LOW
RAIN SENSOR Heavy rain HIGH N
When liquid is splashed on the front window SPLSH
Rain sensor internal error NG
Mechanical key is removed from key cylinder Off
O
KEY SW
Mechanical key is inserted to key cylinder On
Other than power position in ON Off
IGN SW P
Power position in ON On
Other than power position in START Off
START SW
Power position in START On

BCS-59
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TERMINAL LAYOUT

JMMIA1641ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE:
Waveform reference

Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output

6*2 Back door opener Back door re- ON (Pressed) 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Input
(R) request switch quest switch OFF (Not pressed) 9 – 16 V
Hold up hands to detec-
9*1 Hands free sen- 0 – 0.5 V
Ground Hands free sensor Input tion area
(G) sor
Other than above 9 – 16 V

BCS-60
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
OFF (When rear RH door B
9 – 16 V
10 Rear RH door closed)
Ground Rear RH door switch Input
(W) switch ON (When rear RH door
0 – 0.5 V
opened) C
OFF
9 – 16 V
11 Back door (When back door closed)
Ground Back door switch Input
(LG) switch ON D
0 – 0.5 V
(When back door opened)
OFF (When rear LH door
9 – 16 V
12 Rear LH door closed) E
Ground Rear LH door switch Input
(R) switch ON (When rear LH door
0 – 0.5 V
opened)
OFF (When passenger F
9 – 16 V
13 Passenger door Passenger door door closed)
Ground Input
(SB) switch switch ON (When passenger
0 – 0.5 V
door opened)
G
Rear wiper stop position 0 – 0.5 V

H
15 Power position
Ground Rear wiper auto stop Input Any position other than
(LA/G) ON
rear wiper stop position I

JMMIA1654GB

J
16 Back door opener Back door OFF (Not pressed) 9 – 16 V
Ground Input
(Y) switch opener switch ON (Pressed) 0 – 0.5 V
OFF (When driver door
K
9 – 16 V
17 Driver door closed)
Ground Driver door switch Input
(SB) switch ON (When driver door
0 – 0.5 V L
opened)
20 CAN-H (CAN com- Input/
Ground — —
(L) munication circuit 1) Output
BCS

Intelligent Key is outside N

the vehicle

JMMIA1652GB
O
Power position
21*2 Ground
Rear bumper anten-
Input ON and any
(BR) na (-)
door is open
P

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle

JMMIA1653GB

BCS-61
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output

Intelligent Key is outside

the vehicle

JMMIA1652GB
Power position
22*2 Ground
Inside key antenna
Input ON and any
(Y) (Luggage room) (-)
door is open

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle

JMMIA1653GB

Intelligent Key is outside

the vehicle

JSMIA1507GB
Power position
23*2 Ground
Inside key antenna
Output ON and any
(L) (Luggage room) (+)
door is open

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle

JSMIA1506GB

Intelligent Key is outside

the vehicle

JSMIA1507GB
Power position
24*2 Ground
Rear bumper anten-
Output ON and any
(G) na (+)
door is open

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle

JSMIA1506GB

BCS-62
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
Disarmed phase 0V B

C
38
Ground Alarm link Output
(V) Armed phase
D
JSMIA1405GB

Brake pedal is not depressed 0V

E
39 High-mounted stop
Ground Output
(LA/W) lamp output Brake pedal is depressed 9 – 16 V
40 CAN-L (CAN com- Input/
Ground — — F
(P) munication circuit 1) Output

41*2 Steering lock unit Steering lock Activated 9 – 16 V

Ground Output
(V) power supply output unit Not activated 0 – 0.5 V G
Turn signal switch OFF 0V

42 Turn signal LH out- Ignition switch

Ground Output I
(LA/G) put (Side) ON Turn signal switch LH

PKID0926E

6.5 V J
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
V)
Turn signal switch OFF 0V
K

L
43 Turn signal RH out- Ignition switch
Ground Output
(LA/Y) put (Side) ON Turn signal switch RH
BCS
PKID0926E

6.5 V
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
V) N
Interior room lamp battery saver is activated 9 – 16 V
44 Interior room lamp
Ground Output Interior room lamp battery saver is not acti-
(P) relay control 0V O
vated
45 CAN-L (CAN com- Input/
Ground — —
(R) munication circuit 2) Output
P
46 CAN-H (CAN com- Input/
Ground — —
(L) munication circuit 2) Output

BCS-63
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
Power position OFF 12 V

47 Rain sensor serial Input/

Ground
(G) link Output Power position ON

JPMIA0156GB

8.7 V
48 CAN-H (CAN com- Input/
Ground — —
(L) munication circuit 2) Output
49 CAN-L (CAN com- Input/
Ground — —
(R) munication circuit 2) Output

50 Door lock and unlock Door lock and NEUTRAL position 9 – 16 V

Ground Input
(BG) switch LOCK unlock switch LOCK position 0V

51 OFF 9 – 16 V
Ground Hazard switch Input Hazard switch
(Y) ON 0V

57 Detention switch ACC or ON 9 – 16 V

Ground Output Power position
(L) power supply OFF 0 – 0.5 V

60 Headlamp washer Headlamp Pressed 0V

Ground Input
(R) switch washer switch Not pressed 9 – 16 V

63 Power window relay OFF or ACC 9 – 16 V

Ground Output Power position
(G) control ON 0 – 0.5 V

64 Rear window defog- Rear window Not activated 9 – 16 V

Ground Output
(LA/R) ger relay control defogger Activated 0 – 1.5 V

65 OFF 9 – 16 V
Ground ACC relay control Output Power position
(BR) ACC or ON 0 – 0.5 V

67 Ignition relay (J/B) OFF or ACC 9 – 16 V

Ground Output Power position
(Y) control ON 0 – 0.5 V

68 OFF or ACC 9 – 16 V
Ground Blower relay control Output Power position
(LA/W) ON 0 – 0.5 V

BCS-64
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
All switches OFF B
12 V
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Rear wiper switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 3) C

Wiper volume dial 1 D

(All switches OFF)
JMMIA1642GB

E
Rear wiper switch INT
(Wiper volume dial 3)
73 Combination switch Combination F
Ground Input
(LG) INPUT 5 switch
Wiper volume dial 4
(All switches OFF) G
JMMIA1643GB

Wiper volume dial 5 I

(All switches OFF)

JMMIA1644GB J

Lighting switch 2ND

0V
(Wiper volume dial 3) K
All switch OFF
(Wiper volume dial 3)
74 Combination switch Combination Lighting switch 1ST L
Ground Output
(Y) OUTPUT 5 switch (Wiper volume dial 3)
Front fog lamp switch ON
(Lighting switch 2ND) BCS
Turn signal switch RH JMMIA1642GB
(Lighting switch 2ND)
ON 0 – 0.5 V N

O
75 Security indicator Security indica-
Ground Output Blinking
(BG) lamp control tor lamp
P
JPMIA0590GB

12 V
OFF 9 – 16 V

BCS-65
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
All switches OFF 12 V
Front washer switch ON
Rear washer switch ON

Turn signal switch LH

Combination
JMMIA1643GB
76 Combination switch switch
Ground Input
(G) INPUT 3 (Wiper volume
dial 3)

Turn signal switch RH

JMMIA1642GB

Lighting switch 2ND

12 V
(Wiper volume dial 3)
All switches OFF
(Wiper volume dial 3)

Front wiper switch INT/

AUTO
(Lighting switch 2ND)
77 Combination switch Combination JMMIA1642GB
Ground Input
(GR) INPUT 4 switch
Front wiper switch LO
(Lighting switch 2ND)
Front wiper switch MIST
(Lighting switch 2ND)

Front wiper switch HI

(Lighting switch 2ND) JMMIA1643GB

BCS-66
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
All switches OFF B
12 V
(Wiper volume dial 3)

Front fog lamp switch ON

(Wiper volume dial 3) D

78 Combination switch Combination JMMIA1642GB

Ground Input
(V) INPUT 1 switch E
Lighting switch HI
(Lighting switch 2ND)
Lighting switch PASS F
(Wiper volume dial 3)

Rear fog lamp switch ON G

(Wiper volume dial 3) JMMIA1643GB

All switches OFF H

12 V
(Wiper volume dial 3)

Wiper volume dial 1

(All switches OFF) J

79 Combination switch Combination JMMIA1642GB

Ground Input
(W) INPUT 2 switch K
Lighting switch 1ST
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Lighting switch 2ND L
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Lighting switch AUTO
(Wiper volume dial 3) BCS
Wiper volume dial 2 JMMIA1643GB
(All switches OFF)

80 Door lock and unlock Door lock and NEUTRAL position 9 – 16 V N

Ground Input
(SB) switch UNLOCK unlock switch UNLOCK position 0V
Insert mechanical key into ignition key cylin-
9 – 16 V
81* 3 der O
Ground Key switch Input
(L) Remove mechanical key from ignition key
0V
cylinder
ON (Pressed) 0 – 0.5 V P
82*2 Ground
Passenger door re-
Input
Passenger door
(W) quest switch request switch OFF (Not pressed) 9 – 16 V

82*3 START 9 – 16 V
Ground Key switch (START) Input Power position
(LA/R) Other than START 0 – 0.5 V

BCS-67
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
All switches OFF
0V
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Lighting switch HI
(Lighting switch 2ND)
Front wiper switch HI
(Lighting switch 2ND)
Rear washer switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 3)

84 Combination switch Combination Wiper volume dial 4 JMMIA1643GB

Ground Output
(BR) OUTPUT 2 switch (All switches OFF)

Wiper volume dial 5

(All switches OFF)

JMMIA1642GB

All switches OFF

0V
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Front washer switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Front wiper switch MIST
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Front wiper switch LO
(Wiper volume dial 3)
Wiper volume dial 2
85 Combination switch Combination (All switches OFF) JMMIA1643GB
Ground Output
(SB) OUTPUT 1 switch Wiper volume dial 5
(All switches OFF)

Wiper volume dial 1

(All switches OFF)

JMMIA1642GB

All switches OFF 0V

Lighting switch 2ND
Lighting switch PASS
Combination
86 Combination switch switch Front wiper switch INT/
Ground Output
(P) OUTPUT 3 (Wiper volume AUTO
dial 3)

Rear wiper switch INT

JMMIA1643GB

BCS-68
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
All switches OFF 0V B
Lighting switch AUTO
Rear fog lamp switch ON
Combination C
87 Combination switch switch Turn signal switch LH
Ground Output
(BG) OUTPUT 4 (Wiper volume
dial 3)
D
Rear wiper switch ON
JMMIA1643GB

Push-button ignition Push-button ig- OFF 0V

E
88*2 Ground switch illumination Output nition switch illu-
(W) power supply mination ON 12 V

90*2 Steering lock condi- Steering lock Activated 9 – 16 V F

Ground Input
(Y) tion unit Not activated 0 – 0.5 V
P position (Release selec-
94 0 – 0.5 V G
Ground Detention switch Input Selector lever tor button)
(G)
Any position other than P 9 – 16 V

95 Extended storage Extended stor- OFF 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Input H
(V) fuse switch age fuse switch ON (Power position OFF) 9 – 16 V

99 Stop/start OFF Stop/start OFF Pressed 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Input
(R) switch switch Not pressed 9 – 16 V I

J
Intelligent Key is outside
the vehicle
K
JSMIA1348GB
Power position
100*2 Ground
Driver door antenna
Output ON and any
(V) (+) L
door is open

Intelligent Key is inside BCS

the vehicle

JSMIA1406GB N

Push-button ig- Pressed 0 – 0.5 V

101*2 Ground
Push-button ignition
Input nition switch
switch (Push switch) O
(Y) (push switch) Not pressed 9 – 16 V

LOCK status (Unlock sen-

Front door lock as- 9 – 16 V
104 sor switch OFF)
Ground sembly driver side Input Driver door P
(R) UNLOCK status (Unlock
(Unlock sensor) 0 – 0.5 V
sensor switch ON)

105*2 Driver door request Driver door re- ON (Pressed) 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Input
(Y) switch quest switch OFF (Not pressed) 9 – 16 V

105* 3 Key switch (IPDM E/ ON 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Input Power position
(Y) R) OFF 9 – 16 V

BCS-69
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output

106 ACC or ON 0 – 0.5 V

Ground ACC output Output Power position
(W) OFF 3.15 V

107 Sensor cancel Sensor cancel OFF (Not pressed)

Ground Input
(V) switch switch

JPMIA0011GB

ON (Pressed) 0V

109*3 Input/ Just after inserting ignition key in key cylinder Pointer of tester should move
Ground NATS antenna amp.
(P) Output Other than above 0V
Either of the following
conditions
• Lighting switch OFF
0V
• Bright outside of the ve-
hicle (Lighting switch
AUTO)
110 Power position
Ground Dimmer signal Output Either of the following
(BG) ON
conditions
• Lighting switch 1ST or
2ND 12 V
• Dark outside of the ve-
hicle (Lighting switch
AUTO)

111 Door lock status indi- Door lock status OFF 0V

Ground Output
(R) cator lamp indicator lamp ON 12 V

112 Stop/start OFF Stop/start OFF ON 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Output
(SB) switch indicator switch indicator OFF 9 – 16 V

113*3 Input/ Just after inserting ignition key in key cylinder Pointer of tester should move
Ground NATS antenna amp.
(LG) Output Other than above 0V
When a registered Intelli-
gent Key backside is con-
0V
tacted to push-button
ignition switch
Intelligent Key
battery is re-
114*2 Ground NATS antenna amp.
Input/
moved and
(Y) Output
brake pedal is
depressed Other than above

JMMIA1650GB

BCS-70
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
When a registered Intelli- B
gent Key backside is con-
0V
tacted to push-button
ignition switch
C
Intelligent Key
battery is re-
115*2 Ground NATS antenna amp.
Input/
moved and
(W) Output D
brake pedal is
depressed Other than above

E
JMMIA1651GB

Intelligent Key is outside

G
the vehicle

JMMIA1652GB
Power position H
116*2 Ground
Inside key antenna
Input ON and any
(BG) (Console) (-)
door is open
I

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle
J

JMMIA1653GB

L
Intelligent Key is outside
the vehicle

BCS
JSMIA1348GB
Power position
117*2 Ground
Inside key antenna
Output ON and any
(GR) (Console) (+)
door is open N

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle
O

JSMIA1406GB
P

BCS-71
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output

Intelligent Key is outside

the vehicle

JSMIA1507GB
Power position
118*2 Ground
Passenger door an-
Input ON and any
(SB) tenna (-)
door is open

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle

JSMIA1506GB

Intelligent Key is outside

the vehicle

JSMIA1507GB
Power position
119*2 Ground
Passenger door an-
Output ON and any
(P) tenna (+)
door is open

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle

JSMIA1506GB

Intelligent Key is outside

the vehicle

JMMIA1652GB
Power position
120*2 Ground
Driver door antenna
Input ON and any
(BR) (-)
door is open

Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle

JMMIA1653GB

BCS-72
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output

121 Back door Activated 9 – 16 V B

Ground Back door open Output
(LA/V) opener actuator Not activated 0V

122 OFF 0V
Ground Rear fog lamp Output Rear fog lamp C
(Y) ON 9 – 16 V

123 Power position Rear wiper switch OFF 0V

Ground Rear wiper Output
(LA/R) ON Rear wiper switch ON 9 – 16 V D
UNLOCK (Actuator is acti-
9 – 16 V
124 vated)
Ground Rear door UNLOCK Output Rear door
(W) Other than UNLOCK (Ac- E
0V
tuator is not activated)
LOCK (Actuator is activat-
9 – 16 V
125 ed) F
Ground Rear door LOCK Output Rear door
(L) Other than LOCK (Actua-
0V
tor is not activated)

127 Luggage room lamp Luggage room OFF 9 – 16 V G

Ground Output
(R) control lamp ON 0 – 0.5 V

129 Not depressed 0V

Ground Stop lamp LH output Output Brake pedal H
(LA/W) Depressed 9 – 16 V

131*4 Super lock (Rear Super lock actu- Activated 9 – 16 V

Ground Output
(R) door) ator (Rear door) Not activated 0V I
Turn signal switch OFF 0V

133 Turn signal LH out- Power position

Ground Output K
(GR) put (Rear) ON Turn signal switch LH

PKID0926E

6.5 V L
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
V)

134 Not depressed 0V BCS

Ground Stop lamp RH output Output Brake pedal
(LA/Y) Depressed 9 – 16 V
Turn signal switch OFF 0V
N

O
136 Turn signal RH out- Power position
Ground Output
(P) put (Rear) ON Turn signal switch RH

PKID0926E
P
6.5 V
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
V)
137 Battery power sup-
Ground Input Power position ON 9 – 16 V
(W) ply (BCM)

BCS-73
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
When all doors are closed
Map lamp, room (Interior room lamp are 9 – 16 V
138 Interior room lamp lamp and per- turned OFF)
Ground Output
(SB) control sonal lamp
(Door position) Any doors opens (Interior
0–1V
room lamp are turned ON)
UNLOCK (Actuator is acti-
9 – 16 V
139 Passenger door UN- vated)
Ground Output Passenger door
(L) LOCK Other than UNLOCK (Ac-
0V
tuator is not activated)
LOCK (Actuator is activat-
9 – 16 V
141 ed)
Ground Front doors LOCK Output Front doors
(V) Other than LOCK (Actua-
0V
tor is not activated)
Battery power sup-
143
Ground ply (Front door lock Input Power position ON 9 – 16 V
(LA/V)
actuator)
Battery power sup-
144
Ground ply (Turn signal Input Power position ON 9 – 16 V
(BG)
lamp)
145 Battery power sup-
Ground Input Power position ON 9 – 16 V
(GR) ply (Stop lamp)
146
Ground Ground — Power position OFF 0V
(B)
147
Ground Ground — Power position OFF 0V
(B)
UNLOCK (Actuator is acti-
9 – 16 V
148 Driver door UN- vated)
Ground Output Driver door
(G) LOCK Other than UNLOCK (Ac-
0V
tuator is not activated)

149*4 Super lock (Front Super lock actu- Activated 9 – 16 V

Ground Output
(W) door) ator (Front door) Not activated 0V
Battery power sup-
151
Ground ply (Rear door lock Input Power position ON 9 – 16 V
(R)
actuator)
152 Battery power sup-
Ground Input Power position ON 9 – 16 V
(LG) ply (Rear wiper)
OFF (Clutch pedal is de-
9 – 16 V
156 Clutch interlock Clutch interlock pressed)
Ground Input
(V) switch switch ON (Clutch pedal is not
0 – 0.5 V
depressed)
OFF (Brake pedal is not
0V
157 Stop lamp depressed)
Ground Stop lamp switch 2 Input
(LG) switch ON (Brake pedal is de-
9 – 16 V
pressed)
Stop lamp switch OFF
(Brake pedal is not de- 9 – 16 V
158 Power position pressed)
Ground Stop lamp switch 1 Input
(W) ON Stop lamp switch ON
(Brake pedal is de- 0V
pressed)

BCS-74
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
OFF (Clutch pedal is de- B
9 – 16 V
159 Clutch pedal posi- Clutch pedal po- pressed)
Ground Input
(R) tion switch sition switch ON (Clutch pedal is not
0 – 0.5 V
depressed) C

Sounding D
NOTE:
164*2 Intelligent Key warn- Intelligent Key The pulse cycle changes
Ground Output depending on buzzer
(Y) ing buzzer warning buzzer
sounds. E
JMMIA1702GB

Not sounding 0 – 0.5 V F

166*2 Steering lock unit OFF or ACC 9 – 16 V
Ground Input Power position
(P) power supply ON 0 – 0.5 V
G
Turn signal switch OFF 0V

167 Turn signal LH out- Power position

Ground Output
(BR) put (Front) ON Turn signal switch LH I

PKID0926E

6.5 V
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
J
V)
Turn signal switch OFF 0V
K

L
168 Turn signal RH out- Power position
Ground Output
(GR) put (Front) ON Turn signal switch RH

BCS
PKID0926E

6.5 V
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
V) N
170 “HIGH” operation 9 – 16 V
Ground PTC relay-3 control Output PTC heater
(L) Other than above 0 – 0.1 V
At engine cranking 0 – 0.1 V O
171
Ground Starter relay control Output Starter motor
(G) Other than above 9 – 16 V
OFF 9 – 16 V
172 PTC relay-1 control P
Ground Output PTC heater “LOW”, “MID” or “HIGH”
(V) signal 0 – 0.1 V
operation

173 PTC relay-2 control “MID” or “HIGH” operation 0 – 0.1 V

Ground Output PTC heater
(BG) signal Except above 9 – 16 V
*1: With automatic back door
*2: With Intelligent Key system

BCS-75
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
*3: Without Intelligent Key system
*4: RHD models
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010688607

FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC

BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.

Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe

REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION

BCS-76
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY RAIN SENSOR MALFUNCTION
BCM detects the rain sensor serial link error and the rain sensor malfunction. A
BCM controls the following fail-safe when rain sensor has a malfunction.
• Front wiper switch AUTO and sensing rain drop: The condition just before the activation of fail-safe is main-
tained until the front wiper switch is turned OFF. B
• Front wiper switch AUTO and not sensing rain drop: Front wiper is LO operation until the front wiper switch is
turned off.
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW C
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input
voltage is less than approximately 9 V. D
NOTE:
When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function
returns to normal operation.
E
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010688608

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart. F

Priority DTC
1 B2562–00: LOW VOLTAGE G
• U1000–00: CAN COMM
2
• U1010–00: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
H
• B2190–00: CHAIN OF BCM-IMM ANT
• B2191–00: ID DISCORD, BCM-IMMANT
• B2192–00: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
3 • B2193–00: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM I
• B2195–00: ANTI-SCANNING
• B2196–00: DONGLE NG
• B2198–00: NATS ANTENNA AMP
J

BCS

BCS-77
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Priority DTC
• B2556–00: PUSH-BTN IGN SW
• B2557–00: VEHICLE SPEED
• B2602–00: SHIFT POSITION
• B2604–00: PNP/CLUTCH SW
• B2608–00: STARTER RELAY
• B260F–00: ENG STATE SIG LOST
• B261A–00: PUSH-BTN IGN SW
• B261F–00: ASCD CNCL/CLTCH SW
• B2620–00: NEUTRAL SW
• B26E8–00: CLUTCH SW
• B26F1–00: IGN RELAY OFF
• B26F2–00: IGN RELAY ON
• B26FC–00: KEY REGISTRATION
• B27D1–00: START CUT RELAY OFF
• B27D2–00: START CUT RELAY ON
• B27D3–00: S/L THERMAL PROTECTION
• B27D4–00: BCM - S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT
• B27D5–00: S/L SENSOR TEST OUTPUT
4 • B27D6–00: S/L CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• B27D7–00: S/L PWR RELAY
• B27D8–00: S/L VEHICLE SPEED MALFUNCTION
• B27D9–00: S/L IGN MALFUNCTION
• B27DA–00: IPDM CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• B27DB–00: S/L IGN OFF
• B27DC–00: S/L POWER SUPPLY
• B27DD–00: BCM - S/L ID DISCORD
• B27DE–00: S/L MECHANICAL MALFUNCTION
• B27DF–00: S/L HIGH LEVEL MALFUNCTION
• B27E0–00: S/L LOW LEVEL MALFUNCTION
• B27E1–00: S/L SAFETY CIRCUIT
• B27E3–00: S/L KEY NOT REGISTRATION
• B27E4–00: S/L REGISTRATION STATUS
• B27E5–00: S/L IGN OFF POSITION
• B27E6–00: S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE
• B27E7–00: S/L UNDETERMINED UNLOCK POS
• B27E8–00: S/L UNDETERMINED LOCK POS
• U0415–00: VEHICLE SPEED
• B2621–00: INSIDE ANTENNA
5
• B2622–00: INSIDE ANTENNA

DTC Index INFOID:0000000010688609

NOTE:
The details of time display are as follows.
• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.
• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.
×:Applicable
Key system Security indica-
CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data Reference
malfunction tor lamp ON
No DTC is detected.
further testing — — — — —
may be required.
U1000–00: CAN COMM — — — — BCS-110
U1010–00: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) — — — — BCS-111
U0415–00: VEHICLE SPEED × — × — BCS-112

B2190–00: CHAIN OF BCM-IMM •SEC-110*1

× — — ×
ANT •SEC-270*2

B2191–00: ID DISCORD, BCM-IM- •SEC-113*1

× — — ×
MANT •SEC-273*2

BCS-78
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Key system Security indica-
CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data Reference
malfunction tor lamp ON A
1
•SEC-114*
B2192–00: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM × — — ×
•SEC-274*2
B
•SEC-116*1
B2193–00: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM × — — ×
•SEC-275*2

•SEC-118*1 C
B2195–00: ANTI-SCANNING × — — ×
•SEC-277*2

•SEC-119*1
B2196–00: DONGLE NG × — — × D
•SEC-278*2

•SEC-121*1
B2198–00: NATS ANTENNA AMP × — — ×
•SEC-280*2
E
B2556–00: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — SEC-123
B2557–00: VEHICLE SPEED × × × — SEC-125
B2562–00: LOW VOLTAGE — × — — BCS-113 F
B2602–00: SHIFT POSITION × × × — SEC-127
B2604–00: PNP/CLUTCH SW × × × — SEC-130
G
•SEC-133*1
B2608–00: STARTER RELAY × × × —
•SEC-283*2

•SEC-134*1 H
B260F–00: ENG STATE SIG LOST × × × —
•SEC-284*2
B261A–00: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — PCS-101
B261F–00: ASCD CNCL/CLTCH SW — × × — SEC-136
I

B2620–00: NEUTRAL SW × × × — SEC-139

•DLK-149*3 J
B2621–00: INSIDE ANTENNA — × × —
•DLK-460*4

•DLK-152*3
B2622–00: INSIDE ANTENNA — × × —
•DLK-463*4 K
B26E8–00: CLUTCH SW — × × — SEC-143
B26F1–00: IGN RELAY OFF × × × — PCS-103
L
B26F2–00: IGN RELAY ON × × × — PCS-105
B26FC–00: KEY REGISTRATION — × × — SEC-142

•SEC-146*1 BCS
B27D1–00: START CUT RELAY OFF — × × —
•SEC-286*2

•SEC-149*1
B27D2–00: START CUT RELAY ON — × × — N
•SEC-289*2
B27D3–00: S/L THERMAL PROTEC-
— × × — SEC-152
TION
O
B27D4–00: BCM - S/L SENSOR CIR-
× × × — SEC-153
CUIT
B27D5–00: S/L SENSOR TEST OUT-
× × × — SEC-155 P
PUT
B27D6–00: S/L CAN COMM CIR-
× × × — SEC-158
CUIT
B27D7–00: S/L PWR RELAY × × × — SEC-160
B27D8–00: S/L VEHICLE SPEED
× × × — SEC-162
MALFUNCTION
B27D9–00: S/L IGN MALFUNCTION × × × — SEC-164

BCS-79
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Key system Security indica-
CONSULT display Fail-safe Freeze Frame Data Reference
malfunction tor lamp ON

B27DA–00: IPDM CAN COMM CIR- •SEC-165*1

× × × —
CUIT •SEC-292*2
B27DB–00: S/L IGN OFF — × × — SEC-167
B27DC–00: S/L POWER SUPPLY × × × — SEC-169
B27DD–00: BCM - S/L ID DISCORD × × × — SEC-171
B27DE–00: S/L MECHANICAL MAL-
× × × — SEC-173
FUNCTION
B27DF–00: S/L HIGH LEVEL MAL-
× × × — SEC-174
FUNCTION
B27E0–00: S/L LOW LEVEL MAL-
× × × — SEC-175
FUNCTION
B27E1–00: S/L SAFETY CIRCUIT × × × — SEC-176
B27E3–00: S/L KEY NOT REGIS-
— × × — SEC-178
TRATION
B27E4–00: S/L REGISTRATION
— × × — SEC-179
STATUS
B27E5–00: S/L IGN OFF POSITION × × × — SEC-180
B27E6–00: S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE × × × — SEC-182
B27E7–00: S/L UNDETERMINED
— × × — SEC-184
UNLOCK POS
B27E8–00: S/L UNDETERMINED
× × × — SEC-186
LOCK POS
*1: With Intelligent Key system
*2: Without Intelligent Key system
*3: With super lock
*4: Without super lock

BCS-80
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM A
BCM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010688610
B

BCS

JRMWF4030GB

BCS-81
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4031GB

BCS-82
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4032GB

BCS-83
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4033GB

BCS-84
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4034GB

BCS-85
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4035GB

BCS-86
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4036GB

BCS-87
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4037GB

BCS-88
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4038GB

BCS-89
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4039GB

BCS-90
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4040GB

BCS-91
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4041GB

BCS-92
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4042GB

BCS-93
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4043GB

BCS-94
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4044GB

BCS-95
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4045GB

BCS-96
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4046GB

BCS-97
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4047GB

BCS-98
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4048GB

BCS-99
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4049GB

BCS-100
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4050GB

BCS-101
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRMWF4051GB

BCS-102
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BCS

JRMWF4052GB

BCS-103
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
Description INFOID:0000000010688611

BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing BCM, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before replace-
ment.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” cannot be used, use the “Manual Configuration” after
replacing BCM.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing BCM, always perform “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration” with
CONSULT. Or not doing so, BCM control function does not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “Read / Write Configuration” in order.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• If you set incorrect “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration”, incidents might occur.
NOTE:
• When replacing BCM, perform the system initialization (NATS) (if equipped).
• When replacing BCM, perform the system initialization (CAN gateway).
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010688612

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (BCM)

CONSULT Configuration
Perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read/ Write Configuration” to save or print current vehicle specification.
Refer to BCS-106, "Description".
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” of “Read/Write Configuration” cannot be used, use the “Manual Configuration” after
replacing BCM.

>> GO TO 2.
2.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (CAN GATEWAY)
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” to save or print current vehicle specification.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” cannot be used, use the “Manual Configuration” after
replacing BCM.

>> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 4.
4.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (BCM)
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration” to write vehicle speci-
fication. Refer to BCS-106, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 5.
5.INITIALIZE BCM (NATS) (IF EQUIPPED)
BCS-104
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Perform BCM initialization. (NATS)
A
>> GO TO 6.
6.INITIALIZE CAN GATEWAY B
Perform CAN GATEWAY initialization. Refer to LAN-113, "Work Procedure".

>> WORK END C

BCS

BCS-105
CONFIGURATION (BCM)
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CONFIGURATION (BCM)
Description INFOID:0000000010688613

Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing BCM.
Configuration has three functions as follows.

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current BCM.
Before Replace ECU
Read / Write Configuration • Saves the read vehicle configuration.
After Replace ECU Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
Manual Configuration Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
NOTE:
Manual setting item: Items which need selection by vehicle specifications
Automatic setting item: Items which are written in automatically (Setting cannot be changed)
For some models and specifications, the automatic setting item may not be displayed.
CAUTION:
When replacing BCM, always perform “Re/programming, Configuration” with CONSULT. Or not doing
so, BCM control function does not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “Read / Write Configuration” in order.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Read / Write Configuration” except for new BCM.
• If you set incorrect “Read / Write Configuration”, incidents might occur.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010688614

1.WRITING MODE SELECTION

CONSULT Configuration
Select “Re/programming, Configuration” of BCM.

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.

When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OF “READ / WRITE CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration”.

>> WORK END

3.PERFORM “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to BCS-107, "Configuration list".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
NOTE:
If items are not displayed, touch “Next”. Refer to BCS-107, "Configuration list" for written items and setting
value.
4. Touch “Next”.
5. Touch “OK”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “OK” even if the indicated configuration of brand new BCM is same as the
desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model
cannot be memorized.
6. Check that the configuration has been successfully written and touch “End”.

BCS-106
CONFIGURATION (BCM)
< BASIC INSPECTION >

>> GO TO 4. A
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by BCM operates normally. B

>> WORK END

C
Configuration list INFOID:0000000010688615

CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally if D
the setting is not correct.
WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
E
SETTING ITEM
NOTE
Items Setting value
F
SUPER LOCK WITH ⇔ WITHOUT —
• WITHOUT: Without headlamp washer
H/L WASHER WITHOUT ⇔ MODE1
• MODE1: With headlamp washer
G
• MODE1: Except for Europe (LHD) models with head-
lamp washer
HLW CYL SW INP NMB OF TIM MODE1 ⇔ MODE2
• MODE2: For Europe (LHD) models with headlamp
washer H
• WITHOUT: Except for Europe (RHD) models
THEFT ALM AREA WITHOUT ⇔ MODE4
• MODE4: For Europe (RHD) models
HANDLE LHD ⇔ RHD — I
• MODE1: For MR engine or QR engine models
ECM TYPE MODE1 ⇔ MODE2
• MODE2: Except for MR engine or QR engine models
• WITH: For Europe (RHD) models J
DONGLE WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
• WITHOUT: Except for Europe (RHD) models
TPMS WITH ⇔ WITHOUT —
K
• WITH: With high beam assist system
HBA SYSTEM WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
• WITHOUT: Without high beam assist system
Key Fob Type LCK/UNLCK/PBD —
L
• MODE1: For MR engine or QR engine models
ALT TYPE MODE1 ⇔ MODE4
• MODE4: Except for MR engine or QR engine models
• MT with ABS: M/T models
TRANSMISSION MT with ABS ⇔ AT with ABS BCS
• AT with ABS: Except M/T models
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications
WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM N

SETTING ITEM
NOTE
Items Setting value O
• WITHOUT: Without auto light
AUTO LIGHT WITHOUT ⇔ MODE5
• MODE5: With auto light
SUPER LOCK WITH ⇔ WITHOUT — P
• WITHOUT: Without headlamp washer
H/L WASHER WITHOUT ⇔ MODE1
• MODE1: With headlamp washer
• MODE1: Except for Europe (LHD) models with head-
lamp washer
HLW CYL SW INP NMB OF TIM MODE1 ⇔ MODE2
• MODE2: For Europe (LHD) models with headlamp
washer

BCS-107
CONFIGURATION (BCM)
< BASIC INSPECTION >
SETTING ITEM
NOTE
Items Setting value
• WITH: With light & rain sensor
RAIN SENSOR CONFIG WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
• WITHOUT: Without light & rain sensor
• WITHOUT: Except for Europe (RHD) models
THEFT ALM AREA WITHOUT ⇔ MODE4
• MODE4: For Europe (RHD) models
HANDLE LHD ⇔ RHD —
• MODE1: For MR engine or QR engine models
ECM TYPE MODE1 ⇔ MODE2
• MODE2: Except for MR engine or QR engine models
• WITH: For Europe (RHD) models
DONGLE WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
• WITHOUT: Except for Europe (RHD) models
TPMS WITH ⇔ WITHOUT —
• WITH: With high beam assist system
HBA SYSTEM WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
• WITHOUT: Without high beam assist system
Key Fob Type LCK/UNLCK —
• MODE1: For MR engine or QR engine models
ALT TYPE MODE1 ⇔ MODE4
• MODE4: Except for MR engine or QR engine models
• MT with ABS: M/T models
TRANSMISSION MT with ABS ⇔ AT with ABS
• AT with ABS: Except M/T models
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications

BCS-108
SHIPPING MODE CANCEL OPERATION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
SHIPPING MODE CANCEL OPERATION
A
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010688616

1.SHIPPING MODE CANCEL OPERATION B

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Push in (switch on) the extended storage fuse switch. Refer to PG-129, "How To Check".
3. Turn ignition switch ON. C
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 2 seconds.

>> GO TO 2. D
2.SHIPPING MODE CANCEL CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch ON. E
2. Check that extended storage fuse warning message is not displayed on information display.

>> WORK END F

BCS

BCS-109
U1000 CAN COMM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010688617

DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication
Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-41, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONSULT display description DTC Detection Condition

CAN COMM When BCM cannot communicate CAN communication signal continuously
U1000–00
(CAN communication circuit) for 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-110, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010688618

1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION

Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
Is DTC “U1000–00” displayed?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".

BCS-110
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010688619

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC CONSULT display description DTC Detection Condition

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) C
U1010–00 BCM detected internal CAN communication circuit malfunction.
[Control unit (CAN)]

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
BCM
FAIL-SAFE
— E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT. G
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-111, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". H
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010688620

I
1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC “U1010–00” is detected, replace BCM.
J

>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".

BCS

BCS-111
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010688621

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONSULT display description DTC Detection Condition

VEHICLE SPEED When the vehicle speed signal received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
U0415–00
(Vehicle speed) trol unit) remains abnormal for 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• BCM
FAIL-SAFE
Inhibit steering lock
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.DTC CONFIRMATION
1. Erase the DTC.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Perform the “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM with CONSULT, when passed 2 seconds or more after the
ignition switch is turned ON.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-112, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO–1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO–2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010688622

1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAG RESULTS

Perform “Self-Diagnostic Result” of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CONSULT. Refer to BRC-
84, "DTC Index".
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".

BCS-112
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010688623

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC CONSULT display description DTC Detection Condition

LOW VOLTAGE When the power supply voltage to BCM remains less than 8.8 V for 120 seconds or C
B2562–00
(Low voltage) more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
• Harness or connector (power supply circuit)
• BCM
FAIL-SAFE E
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.DTC CONFIRMATION F

1. Erase DTC.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
G
3. Perform the “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM with CONSULT, when passed 120 seconds or more after the
ignition switch is turned ON.
Is any DTC detected?
H
YES >> Refer to BCS-113, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO–1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO–2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010688624

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

Check BCM power supply circuit. Refer to BCS-114, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the circuit normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation". K
NO >> Repair the malfunctioning part.

BCS

BCS-113
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010688625

1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.

(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M86 95
Ground 9 – 16 V
M85 137
Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M85 Existed
147
Does continuity exist?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

BCS-114
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010688626

1.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN B

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
NOTE: C
BCM connector disconnects M86 and M87 only.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector.
D
BCM Combination switch
System Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
OUTPUT 1 85 2 E
OUTPUT 2 84 10
M86
OUTPUT 3 86 M31 15 Existed
OUTPUT 4 87 4
F

OUTPUT 5 M87 74 7
Does continuity exist? G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT H
Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM I
System Continuity
Connector Terminal
OUTPUT 1 85
J
OUTPUT 2 84 Ground
M86
OUTPUT 3 86 Not existed
OUTPUT 4 87 K
OUTPUT 5 M87 74
Does continuity exist?
L
YES >> Repair harnesses or connectors.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INTERNAL CIRCUIT BCS
1. Connect combination switch connector.
2. Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunctioning.
3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. N
NOTE:
Check that the combination switch outputs a signal from combination switch input system.

(+)
O
Voltage
System Combination switch (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
P
OUTPUT 1 2
OUTPUT 2 10
OUTPUT 3 M31 15 Ground Refer to BCS-53, "Reference Value".
OUTPUT 4 4
OUTPUT 5 7

BCS-115
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace combination switch. Refer to BCS-122, "Removal and Installation".

BCS-116
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010688627

1.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN B

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector. C

BCM Combination switch

System Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D
INPUT 1 78 8
INPUT 2 79 6
E
INPUT 3 M87 76 M31 5 Existed
INPUT 4 77 3
INPUT 5 73 1 F
Does continuity exist?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harnesses or connectors. G
2.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. H
BCM
System Continuity
Connector Terminal
I
INPUT 1 78
INPUT 2 79 Ground
INPUT 3 M87 76 Not existed J
INPUT 4 77
INPUT 5 73
K
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Repair harnesses or connectors.
NO >> GO TO 3. L
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. BCS

(+)
Voltage N
System BCM (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
INPUT 1 78
O
INPUT 2 79
Refer to BCS-53, "Refer-
INPUT 3 M87 76 Ground
ence Value".
INPUT 4 77 P
INPUT 5 73
Is the measurement value normal?
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
BCS-117
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Connect combination switch connector.
2. Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunction.
3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
System BCM (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
INPUT 1 78
INPUT 2 79
Refer to BCS-53, "Refer-
INPUT 3 M87 76 Ground
ence Value".
INPUT 4 77
INPUT 5 73
Is the measurement value normal?
Yes >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
No >> Replace combination switch. Refer to BCS-122, "Removal and Installation".

BCS-118
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010688628
B

1. Perform “Data Monitor” of CONSULT to check for any malfunctioning item.

2. Check the malfunction combinations. C
Malfunction item: ×

Data monitor item

RR WASHER SW

AUTO LIGHT SW
FR WASHER SW

TURN SIGNAL R

HEAD LAMP SW
TURN SIGNAL L
FR WIPER LOW

LIGHT OFF SW
TAIL LAMP SW
RR WIPER INT
FR WIPER INT

RR WIPER ON
WIP VOLUME

PASSING SW
FR WIPER HI

HI BEAM SW

RR FOG SW
FR FOG SW
Malfunc-
tion com-
bination
E

× × × A F
× × × × B
× × × × C
× × × × D G
× × × × E
× × × × F H
× × × × G
× × × × H
× × × × I I
× × × J
All Items K
J
If only one item is detected or the item is not applicable to the combinations A to K L
All Items are normal M
3. Identify the malfunctioning part from the agreed combination and repair or replace the part. K

Malfunction
Malfunctioning part Repair or replace
combination L
A Combination switch OUTPUT 1 circuit
B Combination switch OUTPUT 2 circuit
Inspect the combination switch output circuit applicable to the malfunction- BCS
C Combination switch OUTPUT 3 circuit
ing part. Refer to BCS-117, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D Combination switch OUTPUT 4 circuit
E Combination switch OUTPUT 5 circuit N
F Combination switch INPUT 1 circuit
G Combination switch INPUT 2 circuit
H Combination switch INPUT 3 circuit
Inspect the combination switch input circuit applicable to the malfunctioning O
part. Refer toBCS-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I Combination switch INPUT 4 circuit
J Combination switch INPUT 5 circuit
P
K BCM Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation".
L Combination switch Replace combination switch. Refer to BCS-122, "Removal and Installation".
M Connector and harness Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".

BCS-119
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000010688629

SHIPPING MODE
• Shipping mode inhibits battery power consumption during transportation or storage of the vehicle. Vehicle is
set to shipping mode before being shipped from the factory.
• When ignition switch is OFF, BCM operates shipping mode.
• BCM control function is limited in shipping mode. Remote keyless entry function is not operated during the
shipping mode.
• For shipping mode cancel operation, refer to BCS-109, "Work Procedure".
NOTE:
Do not cancel shipping mode during storage of the vehicle. Always cancel shipping mode before delivery of
the vehicle to customer.

BCS-120
BCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A
BCM
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010688630
B
NOTE:
Before replacing BCM, perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” to save or print current
vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-106, "Description". C

REMOVAL (RHD MODELS)

1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to BCS-3, "Precautions for Removing Bat- D
tery Terminal".
2. Remove the glove box assembly and glove box housing, Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the BCM . E
4. Remove the BCM mounting nuts .

H
JMMIA1655ZZ

5. Remove the BCM. I

REMOVAL (LHD MODELS)
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to BCS-3, "Precautions for Removing Bat-
tery Terminal". J
2. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the BCM mounting nut , then pull out the BCM .
K

BCS

ALMIA0690ZZ
N
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the BCM and remove.

INSTALLATION O
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration” P
when replacing BCM. Refer to BCS-104, "Work Procedure".
NOTE:
• Be sure to perform the system initialization (NATS) when replacing BCM.
• Be sure to perform the system initialization (CAN gateway) when replacing BCM.

BCS-121
COMBINATION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
COMBINATION SWITCH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010688631

REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation" (RHD models) or IP-14,
"Removal and Installation" (LHD models).
2. Remove screws and disconnect connector then pull up
combination switch to remove it.

JMMIA1168ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

BCS-122
BRAKES

SECTION
BRAKE SYSTEM
BR B

E
CONTENTS
LHD Bleeding Brake System ...........................................14 BR

PRECAUTION ............................................... 5 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .......................... 15

Inspection ................................................................15
G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System BRAKE BOOSTER ........................................... 16
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Inspection ................................................................16
SIONER" ................................................................... 5 H
FRONT DISC BRAKE ....................................... 17
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
tion After Battery Disconnect ..................................... 5 BRAKE PAD ..............................................................17
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 6 BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ...............17 I
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 6
Precaution for Brake System .................................... 7 DISC ROTOR .............................................................17
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment .............17
J
PREPARATION ............................................ 8
REAR DISC BRAKE ......................................... 19
PREPARATION ................................................... 8
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 8 BRAKE PAD ..............................................................19
K
Lubricant or/and Sealant ........................................... 8 BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ...............19

DISC ROTOR .............................................................19

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 9
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment .............19 L
SYSTEM .............................................................. 9
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 21
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ......................... 9
BRAKE PEDAL ................................................. 21 M
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Lamp/Indicator Lamp ................................................ 9 Exploded View .........................................................21
Removal and Installation .........................................21
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 10 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................22 N

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS BRAKE PIPING ................................................. 24

(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................10 FRONT .......................................................................24 O
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 10
FRONT : Exploded View .........................................24
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 11 FRONT : Hydraulic Piping .......................................25
FRONT : Removal and Installation ..........................25 P
BRAKE PEDAL ..................................................11 FRONT : Inspection .................................................27
Inspection and Adjustment ...................................... 11
REAR .........................................................................27
BRAKE FLUID ....................................................13 REAR : Exploded View ............................................27
Inspection ................................................................ 13 REAR : Hydraulic Piping ..........................................29
Draining ................................................................... 13 REAR : Removal and Installation ............................29
Refilling ................................................................... 13 REAR : Inspection ...................................................31

BR-1
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ........................... 32 REAR DISC BRAKE .......................................... 60
Exploded View ........................................................ 32
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 BRAKE PAD .............................................................. 60
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 34 BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................. 60
Inspection ............................................................... 35 BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 60
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment .............. 62
BRAKE BOOSTER ............................................ 36
Exploded View ........................................................ 36 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 62
Removal and installation ........................................ 36 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 62
Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 38 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and In-
stallation .................................................................. 63
VACUUM LINES ................................................ 40 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
Assembly ................................................................ 65
MR20DD .................................................................... 40 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and
MR20DD : Exploded View ...................................... 40 Adjustment .............................................................. 66
MR20DD : Removal and Installation ...................... 40
MR20DD : Inspection ............................................. 40 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 67
QR25DE .................................................................... 40
QR25DE : Exploded View ...................................... 41 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
QR25DE : Removal and Installation ....................... 41 (SDS) ................................................................. 67
QR25DE : Inspection .............................................. 41 General Specifications ............................................ 67
R9M ........................................................................... 41 Brake Pedal ............................................................ 67
R9M : Exploded View ............................................. 42 Brake Booster ......................................................... 67
R9M : Removal and Installation .............................. 42 Front Disc Brake ..................................................... 67
R9M : Inspection ..................................................... 42 Rear Disc Brake ...................................................... 67
RHD
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................ 43
PRECAUTION ............................................ 69
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) ............................... 43
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View... 43 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 69
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and In- Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
stallation ................................................................. 43 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ......... 46 SIONER" ................................................................. 69
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) ............................... 46 tion After Battery Disconnect .................................. 69
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View... 46 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover... 70
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and In- Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 70
stallation ................................................................. 47 Precaution for Brake System .................................. 71
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ......... 49
PREPARATION .......................................... 72
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)... 50
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) PREPARATION ................................................. 72
: Exploded View ...................................................... 50 Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 72
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) Lubricant or/and Sealant ......................................... 72
: Removal and Installation ...................................... 51
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 73
: Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 52
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) SYSTEM ............................................................ 73
: Inspection ............................................................. 54
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ....................... 73
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)... 54 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) Lamp/Indicator Lamp .............................................. 73
: Exploded View ...................................................... 55
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 74
: Removal and Installation ...................................... 56 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 74
: Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 57
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 74
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)
: Inspection ............................................................. 59 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 75

BR-2
BRAKE PEDAL ..................................................75 VACUUM LINES ............................................. 102
Inspection and Adjustment ...................................... 75 Exploded View ....................................................... 102 A
Removal and Installation ....................................... 102
BRAKE FLUID ....................................................77 Inspection .............................................................. 102
Inspection ................................................................ 77
B
Draining ................................................................... 77 FRONT DISC BRAKE ..................................... 103
Refilling ................................................................... 77
Bleeding Brake System ........................................... 78 BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) .............................. 103
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View.. 103 C
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................79 BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and In-
Inspection ................................................................ 79 stallation ................................................................ 103
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ........ 106
BRAKE BOOSTER ............................................80 D
Inspection ................................................................ 80 BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) .............................. 106
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View.. 106
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................81 BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and In- E
stallation ................................................................ 107
BRAKE PAD .............................................................. 81
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection ........ 109
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment .............. 81
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE).. 110 BR
DISC ROTOR ............................................................. 81
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment ............ 81
: Exploded View ..................................................... 110
REAR DISC BRAKE ..........................................83 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) G
: Removal and Installation ..................................... 111
BRAKE PAD .............................................................. 83 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment .............. 83 : Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 112 H
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)
DISC ROTOR ............................................................. 83 : Inspection ............................................................ 114
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment ............ 83
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE).. 114 I
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 85 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)
: Exploded View ..................................................... 115
BRAKE PEDAL ..................................................85 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)
Exploded View ........................................................ 85 J
: Removal and Installation ..................................... 116
Removal and Installation ......................................... 85 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)
Inspection and Adjustment ...................................... 86 : Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 117
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) K
BRAKE PIPING ..................................................88
: Inspection ............................................................ 119
FRONT ....................................................................... 88
FRONT : Exploded View ......................................... 88 REAR DISC BRAKE ....................................... 120 L
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping ....................................... 89
BRAKE PAD ............................................................ 120
FRONT : Removal and Installation ......................... 89
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ............................... 120
FRONT : Inspection ................................................ 91 M
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................ 120
REAR ......................................................................... 91 BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ............. 122
REAR : Exploded View ........................................... 91
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ............................... 122
REAR : Hydraulic Piping ......................................... 92 N
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .. 122
REAR : Removal and Installation ............................ 92
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and In-
REAR : Inspection ................................................... 94
stallation ................................................................ 123
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and O
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................95
Exploded View ........................................................ 95 Assembly ............................................................... 125
Removal and Installation ......................................... 95 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 97 Adjustment ............................................................. 126 P
Inspection ................................................................ 98
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE BOOSTER ............................................99 (SDS) .......................................................... 127
Exploded View ........................................................ 99
Removal and installation ......................................... 99 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 100 (SDS) ............................................................... 127
General Specifications ........................................... 127

BR-3
Brake Pedal ...........................................................127 Front Disc Brake ................................................... 127
Brake Booster ........................................................127 Rear Disc Brake .................................................... 128

BR-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [LHD]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000011022305

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
BR
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000011022306

K
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory
power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables. L
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect
both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing M
work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- N
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Open driver door. P
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open.
5. Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open.
NOTE:
• Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed.

BR-5
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [LHD]
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000011022307

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000011062349

D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes

BR-6
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [LHD]
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes A
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes
B
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal. C
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) D

1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.

NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied. E
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
BR
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of G
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION: H
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000010838491
I
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. J
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-6, "General Maintenance".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off K
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash
them with water.
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each L
item of brake pedal.
• Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the master cylinder, brake caliper and other components.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause M
improper operation.
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a flare
N
nut torque wrench (A).
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative
terminal before performing the work. O
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the
parts.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing
P
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low
mileage.
- Front brake pad: Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and
JPFIA0061ZZ
Adjustment".
- Front disc rotor: Refer to BR-17, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Rear brake pad: Refer to BR-19, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Rear disc rotor: Refer to BR-19, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-7
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [LHD]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000010838492

Tool name Description

• Air tight
Handy vacuum pump
• Inspection of check valve

ZZC1313D

Brake caliper wrench Return the piston

NNFIA0040ZZ

Pick tool Removing piston seal and piston boot

JMJIA0490ZZ

Lubricant or/and Sealant INFOID:0000000010838493

Name Description Note

Multi-purpose grease Clevis pin of brake pedal —
Polyglycol ether based lubricant • Master cylinder assembly —

MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based • Front brake

Molykote is a registered of Dow Corning
grease Corporation
• Front brake Molykote is a registered of Dow Corning
MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent • Rear brake Corporation
• Front brake
Rubber grease —
• Rear brake

BR-8
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [LHD]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
SYSTEM
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST
B
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator Lamp INFOID:0000000010838494

C
Name Design Layout/Function
For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
Brake warning D
lamp For function: Refer to MWI-26, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Brake Warning
Lamp (Red)".

BR-9
Symptom

×: Applicable
Reference page

Possible cause and

BRAKE
SUSPECTED PARTS

Noise
Shake
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Shimmy, Judder
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

Pads damaged BR-17, BR-19

×
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Pads uneven wear BR-17, BR-19

×
Shims damaged BR-46,BR-49,BR-62

×
Rotor imbalance BR-17, BR-19

×
×

BR-10
Rotor damage BR-17, BR-19

×
Rotor runout BR-17, BR-19

×
Rotor deformation BR-17, BR-19

×
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

Rotor deflection BR-17, BR-19

×
Rotor rust BR-17, BR-19

×
×

Rotor thickness variation BR-17, BR-19

×
AXLE AND SUSPENSION NVH in FAX, RAX and FSU, RSU section
×
×
×

TIRE NVH in WT section

×
×
×

ROAD WHEEL NVH in WT section

×
×
×
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

× × DRIVE SHAFT NVH in FAX section

STEERING NVH in ST section

×
×
×
[LHD]

INFOID:0000000010838495
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838496
B

INSPECTION
Brake Pedal Height C
Check the height (H1) between the dash lower panel and the
brake pedal upper surface.
D
H1 : Refer to BR-67, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION:
Remove the floor carpet. E

BR
JPFIA0065ZZ

Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Pedal Position Switch (with ASCD).
G
Check the clearance (C) among the brake pedal bracket and the
stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD)
threaded end.
H
C : Refer to BR-67, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION:
The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released. I
NOTE:
Pull the brake pedal pad to make the clearance between the stop
lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) threaded J
end and the brake pedal lever. JPFIA0674ZZ

Brake Pedal Play

Press the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal play (A) (stroke until K
fluid pressure occurs).

A : Refer to BR-67, "Brake Pedal". L

JPFIA0277ZZ N
Depressed Brake Pedal Height
Check the height between the dash lower panel and the brake
pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake pedal at 490 N O
(50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON.

H2 : Refer to BR-67, "Brake Pedal". P

CAUTION:
Remove the floor carpet.

JPFIA0068ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
BR-11
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
Brake Pedal Height
Perform the following procedure when brake pedal height is not within the specified value because brake
pedal height is not adjustable.
1. Check input rod length. Refer to BR-38, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Replace brake pedal assembly when input rod length is within specified value.
Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Pedal Position Switch (with ASCD).
1. Remove instrument lower panel. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD).
3. Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) 45° counterclockwise.
4. Press-fit the stop lamp switch and brake position switch (with
ASCD) until the stop lamp switch and brake pedal position
switch (with ASCD) hits the brake pedal bracket 45° clock-
wise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the brake pedal bracket and
stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with
ASCD) threaded end must be the specified value.

C : Refer to BR-67, "Brake Pedal".

• The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is JPFIA0674ZZ

released.
Depressed Brake Pedal Height
1. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
2. Check the height between the dash lower panel and the
brake pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake
pedal at 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON.

H2 : Refer to BR-67, "Brake Pedal".

CAUTION:
Remove the floor carpet.

JPFIA0068ZZ

BR-12
BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
BRAKE FLUID
A
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838497

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL B

• Check that the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the
standard (between MAX − MIN lines).
• Visually check for any brake fluid leakage around the reservoir C
tank.
• Check the brake system for any leakage if the fluid level is
extremely low (lower than MIN).
• Check the brake system for fluid leakage if the warning lamp D
remains illuminated even after the parking brake is released.
• Check the reservoir tank for the mixing of foreign matter (e.g. dust)
and oils other than brake fluid. E
JPFIA0007ZZ

BRAKE LINE
BR
1. Check brake line (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb)
G
and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the
engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque H
and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part
if any brake fluid leakage is present.
I

SBR389C
J
Draining INFOID:0000000010838498

CAUTION: K
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) har- L
ness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleed valve.
2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradu- M
ally discharge brake fluid.

BRA0007D
P
Refilling INFOID:0000000010838499

CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) har-
ness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work.

BR-13
BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank, and
refill with new brake fluid.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than
brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the
full stroke, and then release the pedal. Repeat this operation at
intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged.
Then close the bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed.
Repeat the same work on each wheel. PFIA0403J

3. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-14, "Bleeding Brake Sys-

tem".
Bleeding Brake System INFOID:0000000010838500

CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) har-
ness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work.
• Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.r.dust) and oil other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve of the rear right brake.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
3. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the
bleeder valve.
4. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all of the air is out of the brake line.
5. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque.
• Front disc brake
- 1 piston type: Refer to BR-50, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View".
- 2 piston type: Refer to BR-55, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View".
• Rear disc brake: Refer to BR-62, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
6. Perform steps 2 to 6. Occasionally fill with the brake fluid in order to keep it in the reservoir tank at least
half of MAX line. Bleed air in the following order: rear right brake → front left brake → rear left brake →
and front right brake in order.
7. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR-
13, "Inspection".
8. Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-11,
"Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-14
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
A
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838501

FLUID LEAK B
Check for brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder mounting face, reservoir tank mounting face and brake
tube connections.
C

BR-15
BRAKE BOOSTER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
BRAKE BOOSTER
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838502

OPERATION
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the
brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases.
AIR TIGHT
1. Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually
increases each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation.
3. Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake
pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 sec-
onds or more.

BR-16
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838503
B
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary. C

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-67, "Front Disc Brake".

BRA0010D
BR
ADJUSTMENT
Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotor and brake pads according to the following procedure after refin-
ishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
G
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc
rotor are securely fitted.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. H
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. I
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
DISC ROTOR J
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838504

K
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. L
• For 2WD, refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• For 4WD, refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".
Runout M
1. Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with wheel nuts (2 points at least).
2. Check the wheel bearing axial end play.
• For 2WD, refer to FAX-16, "Inspection". N
• For 4WD, refer to FAX-77, "Inspection".
3. Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge. O

Runout (with it attached : Refer to BR-67, "Front Disc

to the vehicle) Brake". P
4. Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shift-
ing the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing assembly installation
position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit
value.
5. Refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after BRA0013D
performing the above operation.
CAUTION:

BR-17
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
• Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or
more.
• If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor.
- For 2WD, refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
- For 4WD, refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-67, "Front Disc Brake".

Thickness
Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace the disc rotor if the thickness is below the
wear limit.
• For 2WD, refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• For 4WD, refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-67, "Front Disc

Brake".

SBR020B

ADJUSTMENT
Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and brake pads according to the following procedure after refin-
ishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pad and disc
rotor are securely fitted.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.

BR-18
REAR DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
REAR DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838505
B
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary. C

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-67, "Rear Disc Brake".

K
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. L
• For 2WD, refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
• For 4WD, refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".
Runout M
1. Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with wheel nuts (2 points at least).
2. Check the wheel bearing axial end play.
• For 2WD, refer to RAX-9, "Inspection". N
• For 4WD, refer to RAX-21, "Inspection".
3. Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge. O

Runout (with it attached : Refer to BR-67, "Rear Disc

BR-19
REAR DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LHD]
• Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or
more.
• If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor.
- For 2WD, refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
- For 4WD, refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-67, "Rear Disc Brake".

Thickness
Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace the disc rotor if the thickness is below the
wear limit. .
• For 2WD, refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
• For 4WD, refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-67, "Rear Disc

Brake".

SBR020B

BR-20
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

BRAKE PEDAL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838507
B

JSFIA2684GB J

Clevis pin Brake pedal assembly Brake pedal pad

Snap pin Clip Stop lamp switch K
Brake pedal position switch (with AS-
CD)
: Apply multi-purpose grease. L
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
M
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838508

REMOVAL N
1. Remove instrument lower panel. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the stop lamp switch and the brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) harness connectors.
O
3. Rotate the stop lamp switch and the brake pedal switch (with
ASCD) counterclockwise to remove.
P

JPFIA0815ZZ

BR-21
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]

4. Disconnect the accelerator pedal harness connector.

5. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from clevis of brake
booster .

JPFIA0816ZZ

6. Remove the brake pedal assembly.

CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster and master cylinder assembly so as not to drop out or contact them other
parts.
7. Remove the accelerator pedal from the brake pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-4, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
8. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-22, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Never reuse the clevis pin and snap pin.
• Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been
already applied)
NOTE:
The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction.
• Never impact brake pedal such as drop and interference with tools and parts.
• Replace brake pedal when impacting brake pedal.
• Perform adjustment after installation. Refer to BR-22, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838509

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check for the following items and replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary.
• Check rivet for deformation, crack, and damage.
• Check the brake pedal for bend, damage, and cracks on the
welded parts.
CAUTION:
Never loose bolt .

JSFIA2250ZZ

BR-22
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
• Check clevis pin and plastic stopper for damage and deforma-
tion. Replace clevis pin if necessary. A

PFIA0756J

D
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust each item of brake pedal after installing the brake pedal assembly to the vehicle. Refer to BR-11,
"Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform the release position learning of the accelerator pedal. E
- MR20DD: Refer to EC-144, "Work Procedure".
- QR25DE: Refer to EC-553, "Work Procedure".
- R9M: Refer to EC-961, "Work Procedure". BR

BR-23
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
BRAKE PIPING
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838510

JSFIA2537GB

Brake tube ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Connector bracket
trol unit)
Connector Brake booster Master cylinder assembly
Brake tube bracket Lock plate Brake hose
Union bolt Copper washer
To rear brake tube

: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

BR-24
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000010838511

JSFIA2379ZZ

G
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Front disc brake Master cylinder assembly
trol unit)
Brake booster Connector Rear disc brake
H
Brake tube Brake hose

: Flare nut
: Union bolt I

FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838512

J
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it K
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash. L
1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
M
3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube from the brake hose .
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. N
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake
hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when discon- O
necting to prevent entrance of dirt.

P
JPFIA0847ZZ

BR-25
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
4. Remove the union bolt and copper washers , and remove
the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly.
5. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose.

JPFIA0819ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Assemble the union bolt and the copper washer to the
brake hose.
CAUTION:
Never reuse the copper washer.
2. Align the brake hose pin with the brake caliper assembly pro-
jection , and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

JPFIA0820ZZ

3. Install the brake tube to the brake hose , temporarily tighten

the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the
brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate .
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted
and bent.

JPFIA0821ZZ

4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut
torque wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
6. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-27, "FRONT :
Inspection". JPFIA0061ZZ

BR-26
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
FRONT : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838513

A
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interfer-
ence with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections. B
CAUTION:
Clearance with brake hose and each parts being secured more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in unladen
condition*. C
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are quantity to specified. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats
are brought out of vehicle.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately D
5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
E
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.
REAR
BR
REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838514

MR20DD
G

JSFIA2655GB

O
Brake tube Lock plate Brake hose
Union bolt Copper washer Brake tube bracket
Brake tube bracket Brake tube bracket P
To connector To rear brake hose Floor side
Caliper side

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

BR-27
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
EXCEPT MR20DD

JSFIA2656GB

Brake tube Lock plate Brake hose

Union bolt Copper washer Brake tube bracket
Brake tube bracket
To connector To rear brake hose Floor side
Caliper side

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

BR-28
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
REAR : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000010838515

JSFIA2379ZZ

G
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Front disc brake Master cylinder assembly
trol unit)
Brake booster Connector Rear disc brake
H
Brake tube Brake hose

: Flare nut
: Union bolt I

REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838516

J
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it K
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash. L
• Wipe off immediately when attaching brake fluid with disc rotor and caliper assembly.
1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining". M
3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube from the hose .
CAUTION: N
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake
hoses and tubes. O
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when discon-
necting to prevent entrance of dirt.
P
JSFIA1064ZZ

4. Disconnect the lock plate , then remove the brake hose.

BR-29
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
5. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube from the hose .
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake
hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when discon-
necting to prevent entrance of dirt.
6. Disconnect the lock plate , then remove the brake hose from
the brake hose bracket .
JSFIA2702ZZ

7. Remove the union bolt and copper washers , and remove

the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly.

JSFIA0471ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
• Wipe off immediately when attaching brake fluid with disc rotor and caliper assembly.
1. Assemble the union bolt and copper washers to the brake
hose.
CAUTION:
Never reuse the copper washer.
2. Align the brake hose L-pin with the brake caliper assembly
hole , and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

JSFIA0472ZZ

3. Install the brake hose to the brake tube , temporarily tighten

the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the
brake hose to the brake hose bracket with the lock plate .
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted
and bent.

JSFIA2658ZZ

BR-30
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut
torque wrench (A). A
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
B

JPFIA0061ZZ

D
5. Install the brake hose to the brake tube and the brake tube
, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not
rotate further, and fix the brake hose to brake hose brackets with E
the lock plate .
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted BR
and bent.

G
JSFIA1065ZZ

6. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut H
torque wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. I
7. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION: J
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
8. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
9. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-31, "REAR : K
Inspection". JPFIA0061ZZ

REAR : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838517

L
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no looseness
at connections. M
CAUTION:
Clearance with brake hose and each parts being secured more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in unladen
condition*. N
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are quantity to specified. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats
are brought out of vehicle.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately O
5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present. P

BR-31
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838518

JSFIA2562GB

Reservoir cap Oil strainer Reservoir tank

Grommet Cylinder body Screw
O-ring

: Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant.

: Apply brake fluid.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838519

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster. Then
remove the master cylinder assembly.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid
may splash.
1. Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-35, "Inspection".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
3. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-142, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the TCM (as a set with bracket). Refer to TM-415, "Removal and Installation".

BR-32
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
5. Remove the air duct assembly, the air duct 1, the air duct 2, the air cleaner cover, the cleaner element, the
air cleaner body, and the mass air flow sensor. A
• For MR20DD, refer to EM-31, "Removal and Installation".
• For QR25DE, refer to EM-175, "Removal and Installation".
• For R9M, refer to EM-308, "Removal and Installation".
B
6. Remove the engine cover.
• For R9M, refer to EM-306, "Removal and Installation".
7. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch harness connector and the harness clip.
C
8. Separate the brake tube from the master cylinder assembly with
a flare nut wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. D

BR
JSFIA2238ZZ

9. Remove the master cylinder assembly. G

CAUTION:
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
• Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed.
H

• The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed.

Never damage it when removing the master cylinder.
• The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never I
hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the
master cylinder assembly.
J

JSFIA2382ZZ

L
10. Remove the O-ring.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never
wash them with water.
N
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Never reuse the O-ring.
• Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed.
• Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant to the brake booster [see O
in the figure] when installing the master cylinder assembly to the
brake booster.
P

JPFIA0013ZZ

BR-33
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]

• The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never

damage it when handling the master cylinder.
• Check that no dirt and dust are present on the piston before instal-
lation. Clean it with new brake fluid if necessary.
• The piston may drop off when pulled strongly. Never hold the pis-
ton. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder
assembly.
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes.

JSFIA2382ZZ

• Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the master cylinder
assembly by hand. Then tighten it to the specified torque with a
flare nut torque wrench (A). Refer to BR-32, "Exploded View".
• Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-14, "Bleeding Brake Sys-
tem".
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-35, "Inspection".

JSFIA2238ZZ

Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010838520

DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble the cylinder body.
• Remove the reservoir tank only when necessary.
• Never drop parts to remove. Replace new parts when dropping.
1. Fix the master cylinder assembly to a vise.
CAUTION:
• Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips when fixing the cylinder body to a vise.
• Never overtighten the vise.
2. Remove the reservoir tank mounting screw.
3. Remove the reservoir tank and grommet from the cylinder body.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Never use mineral oils such as kerosene or gasoline and rubber grease during the cleaning and
assembly process.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
• Never drop when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommet and install it to the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse grommets.
2. Install the reservoir tank to the cylinder body.
3. Fix the cylinder body to a vise.
CAUTION:

BR-34
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
• Place the reservoir tank with the chamfered screw hole
( ) facing up. A
• Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips
when fixing the cylinder body to a vise.
• Never overtighten the vise. B
4. Tilt the reservoir tank so that a mounting screw can be fixed.
Assemble with screw.
C

JSFIA2383ZZ

D
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838521

INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL E

Check the brake fluid level switch. Refer to BRC-159, "Component Inspection".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the following items and replace if necessary. BR
• Check the master cylinder for deformation, twist, contact with other parts or looseness of connection.
• Check for fluid leakage from connection. Refer to BR-27, "FRONT : Inspection".
CAUTION:
If the fluid leakage is present, retighten to the specified torque. Replace parts if necessary. G

BR-35
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
BRAKE BOOSTER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838522

JSFIA2541GB

Brake booster Check valve Master cylinder assembly

Vacuum sensor Gasket

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Removal and installation INFOID:0000000010838523

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never
wash them with water.
1. Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-38, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
3. Remove brake master cylinder assembly. Refer to BR-32, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove vacuum hose from check valve.
• For MR20DD, refer to BR-40, "MR20DD : Removal and Installation".
• For QR25DE, refer to BR-41, "QR25DE : Removal and Installation".
• For R9M, refer to BR-42, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove cowl top extension. Refer to EXT-25, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove brake tube between master cylinder assembly and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BR-24, "FRONT : Exploded View".

BR-36
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
7. Remove snap pin and clevis pin .
A

JPFIA0019ZZ

D
8. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster so as to avoid dropping out. E
9. Remove brake booster.
CAUTION:
Never deform or bend the brake tubes. BR
10. Remove check valve from brake booster.
11. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-38, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSTALLATION G
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never H
wash them with water.
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install check valve and vacuum sensor as shown in figure. I
- Except R9M

A :98°± 5°
B :0°±5°
J

: Vehicle upper side

L
JSFIA2543ZZ

- R9M
M
A : 70°±5°
B : 0°±5°
N
: Vehicle upper side

JSFIA2542ZZ
P
• Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installation, the
dash panel may damage threads.
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes when installing the brake booster.
• Always use new gasket between the brake booster and the dash panel.
• Replace clevis pin when found damage.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g.dust) and oil other than brake fluid to enter reservoir tank.
• Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
BR-37
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
CAUTION:
Never reuse brake fluid to drain.
• Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-11,
"Inspection and Adjustment".
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838524

INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL

Air Tight
CAUTION:
Check the air tight condition when the master cylinder and the brake booster is installed.
1. Check the air tight use a handy vacuum pump.

At vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, : Vacuum should decrease within 3.3 kPa (24.8 mmHg,
−19.69 inHg, −0.067 bar) 0.98 inHg, 0.033 bar) for 15 seconds.
2. If the air tight condition cannot be maintained, perform the following operation.
a. Check the no dirt and dust are present on the brake booster and brake master cylinder mating faces.
Clean it if necessary.
b. Check the O-ring on the master cylinder. If anything is found, replace the O-ring. Refer to BR-32,
"Removal and Installation".
c. Check the air tight condition again. If the condition still cannot be maintained, replace the brake booster.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check Valve Inspection
1. Check the check valve to use a handy vacuum pump.

In the case of connecting to brake : Vacuum should decrease within 3.3 kPa (24.8 mmHg,
booster 0.98 inHg, 0.033 bar) for 15 seconds at vacuum of −
66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.69 inHg, −0.067 bar).
In the case of connecting to vacuum : Vacuum should not exist.
hose
Input Rod Length rod Inspection
1. Check the input length (A).

:Input rod

A : Refer to BR-67, "Brake Booster".

2. Replace the brake booster if the input rod length is not the stan-
dard.

JSFIA2251ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Operation
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the
brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases.
NOTE:
A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. this is nor-
mal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.
Air Tight
1. Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine.

BR-38
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
2. Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually A
increases each time.
3. Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake
pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 sec- B
onds or more.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-11, "Inspection and C
Adjustment".

BR-39
VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
VACUUM LINES
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838525

MR20DD

JSFIA2423ZZ

Vacuum piping Vacuum hose Clamp

To intake manifold Paint mark To brake booster

MR20DD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838526

REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping.
2. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-40, "MR20DD : Inspection".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install the vacuum hose.
• When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the
back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never use lubricating oil during assembly.

A : 24 mm (0.95 in) or more

- Face the paint mark of vacuum hose (built-in check valve) to
upward to assemble.
- Face the paint mark of vacuum piping (intake manifold side) to
upward to assemble.
- Face the other paint marks to vehicle front side to assemble. JPFIA0023ZZ

- For clamp mounting direction (the orientation of pawl), refer to BR-

40, "MR20DD : Exploded View".
MR20DD : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838527

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Appearance
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.
QR25DE
BR-40
VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
QR25DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838528

A
QR25DE

JSFIA2385ZZ G

Vacuum piping Vacuum hose Clamp

To intake manifold Paint mark To brake booster H

QR25DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838529

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping.
2. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-41, "QR25DE : Inspection". J
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install the vacuum hose.
• When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the K
back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never use lubricating oil during assembly. L

A : 24 mm (0.95 in) or more

- Face the paint mark of vacuum hose (built-in check valve) to M
upward to assemble.
- Face the paint mark of vacuum piping (intake manifold side) to
upward to assemble. N
- Face the other paint marks to vehicle front side to assemble. JPFIA0023ZZ

- For clamp mounting direction (the orientation of pawl), refer to BR-

41, "QR25DE : Exploded View".
O
QR25DE : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838530

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL P

Appearance
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.
R9M

BR-41
VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
R9M : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838983

R9M

JSFIA2547GB

Vacuum hose Clamp Connector

Vacuum hose bracket
To vacuum pump Paint mark To brake booster

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

R9M : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838984

REMOVAL
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-306, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping.
3. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-42, "R9M : Inspection".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install the vacuum hose.
• When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the
back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never use lubricating oil during assembly.

A : 24 mm (0.95 in) or more

- For clamp mounting direction (the orientation of pawl), refer to BR-

42, "R9M : Exploded View".
R9M : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838985

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Appearance
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.

BR-42
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838531
B

JSFIA2246GB

H
Cylinder body Inner shim cover Inner shim
Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Return spring Pad retainer
Torque member Outer pad Outer shim I
Outer shim cover

1: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS 880N or silicone-based grease.

J
2: Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

K
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838532

L
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed M
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. N
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. O

JPFIA0832ZZ

BR-43
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose will not stretch.

JPFIA0850ZZ

4. Remove the brake pads, shims, shim covers and pad retainer
(as a set with pad return spring) from the torque member .
CAUTION:
• Remove pad retainer together with pad return springs.
• Never deform the pad return springs and pad retainer
when removing the pad retainer from the torque member.
• Never damage the piston boots.
• Never drop the brake pads, shims and shim covers.
• Remember each position of the removed brake pads.

JPFIA0118ZZ

5. Remove the pad return springs from the pad retainer .

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs when removing the
pad return springs from the pad retainer.
6. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-46, "BRAKE PAD
(1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

JSFIA2329ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install the pad return springs to pad retainer if the pad
return springs has been removed.

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs.

JSFIA2329ZZ

BR-44
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
2. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face
between the pad retainers and torque member if the pad A
retainers has been removed.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
3. Install the pad retainer (upper side with pad return spring) to B
torque member if the pad retainers has been removed.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be C
lifted up from the torque member.
• Never deform the pad retainers and pad return springs.
JSFIA1938ZZ

D
4. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the
matching faces between the shim and the shim cover ,
and install the shim and the shim covers to the brake pad . E
CAUTION:
Always replace the shims and shim covers when replacing
the brake pad. BR
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

G
JSFIA1330ZZ

H
5. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face
between the brake pad and torque member .
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
I

K
JSFIA1337ZZ

6. Install the brake pads to the torque member.

L
CAUTION:
Both inner and outer pads have a pad return system.
Securely push the pad return spring into the disc rotor
side of brake pad . M

O
JSFIA2330ZZ

7. Install cylinder body to torque member. P

CAUTION:
• Never damage the piston boot.
• When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because
brake fluid returns to reservoir tank when pressing piston in.
NOTE:
Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston.

BR-45
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
8. Install the lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified
torque.

JPFIA0832ZZ

9. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer
to BR-46, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
10. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838533

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

• Replace the shims and shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
• Eliminate rust on the pad return spring, pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is exces-
sively attached.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-52, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assem-
bly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838597

JSFIA2246GB

BR-46
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]

Cylinder body Inner shim cover Inner shim A

Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Return spring Pad retainer
Torque member Outer pad Outer shim
B
Outer shim cover

1: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS 880N or silicone-based grease.

2: Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent. C
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. D

BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838598

E
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. BR
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off. G
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
H

JPFIA0832ZZ

K
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose will not stretch.
L

N
JPFIA0850ZZ

4. Remove the brake pads, shims, shim covers and pad retainer O
(as a set with pad return spring) from the torque member .
CAUTION:
• Remove pad retainer together with pad return springs. P
• Never deform the pad return springs and pad retainer
when removing the pad retainer from the torque member.
• Never damage the piston boots.
• Never drop the brake pads, shims and shim covers.
• Remember each position of the removed brake pads.

JPFIA0118ZZ

BR-47
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]

5. Remove the pad return springs from the pad retainer .

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs when removing the
pad return springs from the pad retainer.
6. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-49, "BRAKE PAD
(2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

JSFIA2329ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install the pad return springs to pad retainer if the pad
return springs has been removed.

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs.

JSFIA2329ZZ

2. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face

between the pad retainers and torque member if the pad
retainers has been removed.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
3. Install the pad retainer (upper side with pad return spring) to
torque member if the pad retainers has been removed.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be
lifted up from the torque member.
• Never deform the pad retainers and pad return springs.
JSFIA1938ZZ

4. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the

matching faces between the shim and the shim cover ,
and install the shim and the shim covers to the brake pad .
CAUTION:
Always replace the shims and shim covers when replacing
the brake pad.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

JSFIA1330ZZ

BR-48
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
5. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face
between the brake pad and torque member . A
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

JSFIA1337ZZ

D
6. Install the brake pads to the torque member.
CAUTION:
Both inner and outer pads have a pad return system. E
Securely push the pad return spring into the disc rotor
side of brake pad .
BR

JSFIA2330ZZ H

7. Install cylinder body to torque member.

CAUTION: I
• Never damage the piston boot.
• When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because
brake fluid returns to reservoir tank when pressing piston in.
J
NOTE:
Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston.
8. Install the lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified
torque. K

JPFIA0832ZZ
N

9. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer
to BR-49, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
O
10. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838599

P
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Replace the shims and shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
• Eliminate rust on the pad return spring, pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is exces-
sively attached.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.

BR-49
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-57, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assem-
bly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838534

REMOVAL

JPFIA0834GB

Brake caliper assembly

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

DISASSEMBLY

JSFIA2351GB

BR-50
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]

Cap Bleeder valve Cylinder body A

Piston seal Piston Piston boot
Sliding pin Sliding pin boot Bushing
B
Torque member

: Apply rubber grease.

: Apply brake fluid. C

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly. D

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000010838535
E
REMOVAL
WARNING: BR
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it G
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. H
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. I
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
4. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and separate brake hose from brake caliper assembly. Refer to
BR-25, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". J
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake cali-
per assembly.
CAUTION: K
Never drop brake pad and brake caliper assembly.
6. Remove disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
L
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

M
JPFIA0835ZZ

INSTALLATION
N
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION: O
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water. P
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g.dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Install disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

BR-51
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assem-
bly. Refer to BR-25, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer. JPFIA0835ZZ

4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
• Never reuse brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the surface of disc rotor.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-54, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1
PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
6. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation"
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-54, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) :
Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000010838536

DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member, brake pad and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cyl-
inder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-43,
"BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop.
2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing from sliding pin .

JPFIA0851ZZ

4. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the pistons.

MAA0272D

BR-52
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using seal pick tool.
CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
6. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
7. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-54, "BRAKE B
CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

JPFIA0038ZZ

D
ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
2. Apply new brake fluid to piston seals , and install them to cyl- E
inder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston seals.
BR

JPFIA0039ZZ H

3. Apply rubber grease to piston boots . Cover the piston end

with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot
I
securely into a groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston boots.
J

JPFIA0040ZZ

L
4. apply new brake fluid to pistons . Push piston into cylinder
body by hand and push piston boot piston-side lip into the pis-
ton groove.
CAUTION: M
Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to pre-
vent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
N

O
JPFIA0034ZZ

BR-53
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
5. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pin
and bushing , and install bushing to sliding pin.

JPFIA0836ZZ

6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pins

and sliding pin boots , and install sliding pins and sliding pin
boots to torque member .
7. Install the cylinder body to tighten sliding pin bolts to the speci-
fied torque.

JPFIA0837ZZ

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838537

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the cylinder inner wall for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Pistons
Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. When any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and
replace if necessary. Refer to BR-52, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly
and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)

BR-54
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838604

A
REMOVAL

JPFIA0422GB G

Brake caliper assembly

H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

DISASSEMBLY
I

N
JSFIA1969GB

Cap Bleeder valve Cylinder body

O
Sliding pin Sliding pin boot Bushing
Piston seal Piston Piston boot
Torque member P
: Apply rubber grease.

: Apply brake fluid.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

BR-55
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000010838605

REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
4. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and separate brake hose from brake caliper assembly. Refer to
BR-25, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake cali-
per assembly.
CAUTION:
Never drop brake pad and brake caliper assembly.
6. Remove disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

JPFIA0835ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g.dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Install disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assem-
bly. Refer to BR-25, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer. JPFIA0835ZZ

4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:

BR-56
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
• Never reuse brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the surface of disc rotor. A
5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-59, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2
PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
6. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation" B
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-59, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) :
Inspection".
C
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000010838606

DISASSEMBLY D
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member, brake pad and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cyl-
inder body. E
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-47,
"BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION: BR
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop.
2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing from sliding pin . G

JSFIA0496ZZ J

4. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. K
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the pistons.
L

BRB0032D

N
5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using seal pick tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
O
6. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
7. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-59, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
P

SFIA0141E

ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.

BR-57
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
2. Apply new brake fluid to piston seals , and install them to cyl-
inder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston seals.

JPFIA0032ZZ

3. Apply rubber grease to piston boots . Cover the piston end

with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot
securely into a groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston boots.

JPFIA0033ZZ

4. apply new brake fluid to pistons . Push piston into cylinder

body by hand and push piston boot piston-side lip into the pis-
ton groove.
CAUTION:
Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to pre-
vent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.

JPFIA0034ZZ

5. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pin

and bushing , and install bushing to sliding pin.

JSFIA0497ZZ

BR-58
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pins
and sliding pin boots , and install sliding pins and sliding pin A
boots to torque member .
7. Install the cylinder body to tighten sliding pin bolts to the speci-
fied torque. B

JSFIA0498ZZ

D
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838607

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY E

Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the cylinder inner wall for rust, wear, cracks or damage. BR
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member G
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Pistons
Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. H
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing I
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. J
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
K
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. When any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and L
replace if necessary. Refer to BR-57, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly
and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal
M
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-59
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
REAR DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838611

JSFIA2411GB

Cylinder body Inner shim cover Inner shim

Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Torque member Outer pad
Outer shim Outer shim cover

1: Apply rubber grease.

2 : Apply MOLYKOTE® AS 880N or silicone-based grease.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838612

REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Must be performed additional service when replacing brake pad. Refer to PB-52, "Work Procedure".
3. Remove tires.

BR-60
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
4. Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
A

JPFIA0832ZZ

D
5. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose and the electric parking brake harness will not stretch.
E

G
JPFIA0850ZZ

6. Remove the brake pads, shims and shim covers. H

CAUTION:
• Never damage the piston boots.
• Never drop the brake pads, shims and shim covers. I
• Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
• Never damage the electric parking brake harness and bracket.
7. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-62, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment". J
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed K
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. L
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.

M
1. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the
mating faces between the shim and the pad , and the
mating faces between the shim and the shim cover , and N
then install the shim and shim cover to the pad.
CAUTION:
Always replace the shims and shim covers when replacing O
the brake pad.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

P
JSFIA1805ZZ

2. Install the brake pads to the torque member.

3. Apply rubber grease to the cylinder body mounting bolts, and then install the cylinder body to torque mem-
ber.
CAUTION:

BR-61
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
• Never damage the piston boot.
• When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because
brake fluid returns to reservoir tank when pressing piston in.
4. Install the lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified
torque.

JPFIA0832ZZ

5. Must be performed additional service when removing and installing/replacing brake pad.
When removing and installing brake pad
1. Perform “BRAKE OPERATION”. Refer to PB-61, "Work Procedure".
2. Perform “BRAKE RELEASE”. Refer to PB-63, "Work Procedure".
When replacing brake pad
• Refer to PB-52, "Work Procedure".
6. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer
to BR-62, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
7. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838613

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

• Replace the shims and shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
• Eliminate rust on the pad and the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-65, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-19, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838618

REMOVAL

BR-62
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]

JSFIA2412GB BR

Brake caliper assembly

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) G

DISASSEMBLY
H

M
JSFIA2413GB

Cap Bleeder valve Cylinder body

N
Sliding pin Bushing Bushing
Torque member

: Apply rubber grease. O

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838619

P
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:

BR-63
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Must be performed additional service when replacing brake calipper. Refer to PB-55, "Work Procedure".
3. Remove tires.
4. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.
5. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
6. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and separate brake hose from brake caliper assembly. Refer to
BR-29, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake cali-
per assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never drop brake pad and brake caliper assembly.
• Never damage the electric parking brake harness and
bracket.
8. Remove disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".

JPFIA0835ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g.dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Install disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assem-
bly. Refer to BR-29, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer. JPFIA0835ZZ

4. Must be performed additional service when removing and installing/replacing brake pad.
When removing and installing brake pad
1. Perform “BRAKE OPERATION”. Refer to PB-61, "Work Procedure".
2. Perform “BRAKE RELEASE”. Refer to PB-63, "Work Procedure".
When replacing brake pad
• Refer to PB-52, "Work Procedure".
5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
BR-64
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
CAUTION:
• Never reuse brake fluid. A
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the surface of disc rotor.
6. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-66, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY :
Inspection and Adjustment". B
7. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation"
8. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-66, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and
Adjustment". C
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010838620

DISASSEMBLY D
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member and brake pad when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-60, E
"BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop. BR
2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing from sliding pin .
G

JSFIA0496ZZ

J
4. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
5. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-66, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and
Adjustment". K
ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap. L

2. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pin

and bushing , and install bushing to sliding pin. M

JPFIA0836ZZ

BR-65
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LHD]
3. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pins
and sliding pin boots , and install sliding pins and sliding pin
boots to torque member .

JPFIA0837ZZ

4. Install the cylinder body to tighten cylinder body mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-60,
"BRAKE PAD : Exploded View".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838621

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the cylinder inner wall for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-60, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. When any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and
replace if necessary. Refer to BR-65, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-19, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-66
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [LHD]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications INFOID:0000000010838545
B

Unit: mm (in)
C
Caliper type 1 piston type 2 piston type
Cylinder bore diameter 60.33 (2.3752) 44.45 × 2 (1.7500 × 2)
Front brake 123.6 × 47.5 × 10.5 (4.87 × 1.870 × 133.6 × 48.5 × 10.0 (5.26 × 1.909 × D
Pad length × width × thickness
0.413) 0.39)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 296 × 26.0 (11.65 × 1.024) 320 × 28.0 (12.60 × 1.102)
Cylinder bore diameter 38.2 (1.504) E
Rear brake Pad length × width × thickness 82.9 × 39.8 × 9.0 (3.263 × 1.567 × 0.354)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 292 × 16.0 (11.50 × 0.630)
BR
Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter 23.81 (0.9374)
Control valve Valve type Electric brake force distribution
Brake booster Diaphragm diameter 275 (10.83) G
Recommended brake fluid Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000010838546

H
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
I
Brake pedal height 175.9 – 185.9 (6.93 – 7.32)
Depressed brake pedal height
75.0 (2.95) or more
[Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON]
J
Clearance between stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) threaded
0.20 – 1.96 (0.0079 – 0.0772)
end and the brake pedal lever
Brake pedal play 3 – 11 (0.12 – 0.43)
K
Brake Booster INFOID:0000000010838547

Unit: mm (in) L
Item Standard
Input rod length 158.95 – 160.45 (6.26 –6.32)
M
Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000010838548

Unit: mm (in) N
Item Limit
Brake caliper type 1 piston type 2 piston type
Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) O
Wear thickness 24.0 (0.945) 26.0 (1.0236)
Disc rotor Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) 0.020 (0.0008) 0.020 (0.0008)
P
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.035 (0.0014) 0.035 (0.0014)

Rear Disc Brake INFOID:0000000010838549

Unit: mm (in)

BR-67
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [LHD]
Item Limit
Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness 14.0 (0.551)
Disc rotor Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) 0.020 (0.0008)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.070 (0.0028)

BR-68
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [RHD]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000011022310

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
BR
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000011022309

BR-69
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [RHD]
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000011022308

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000011062270

D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes

BR-70
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [RHD]
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes A
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes
B
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal. C
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) D

1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.

NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied. E
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
BR
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of G
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION: H
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000010838554
I
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun. J
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-6, "General Maintenance".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off K
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash
them with water.
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each L
item of brake pedal.
• Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the master cylinder, brake caliper and other components.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause M
improper operation.
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a flare
N
nut torque wrench (A).
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative
terminal before performing the work. O
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the
parts.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing
P
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low
mileage.
- Front brake pad: Refer to BR-81, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and
JPFIA0061ZZ
Adjustment".
- Front disc rotor: Refer to BR-81, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Rear brake pad: Refer to BR-83, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Rear disc rotor: Refer to BR-83, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-71
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [RHD]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000010838555

Tool name Description

• Air tight
Handy vacuum pump
• Inspection of check valve

ZZC1313D

Brake caliper wrench Return the piston

NNFIA0040ZZ

Pick tool Removing piston seal and piston boot

JMJIA0490ZZ

Lubricant or/and Sealant INFOID:0000000010838556

Name Description Note

Multi-purpose grease Clevis pin of brake pedal —
Polyglycol ether based lubricant • Master cylinder assembly —

MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based • Front brake

BR-72
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [RHD]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
SYSTEM
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST
B
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator Lamp INFOID:0000000010838557

C
Name Design Layout/Function
For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
Brake warning D
lamp For function: Refer to MWI-26, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Brake Warning
Lamp (Red)".

BR-73
Symptom

×: Applicable
Reference page

Possible cause and

BRAKE
SUSPECTED PARTS

Noise
Shake
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Shimmy, Judder
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

Pads damaged BR-81, BR-83

×
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Pads uneven wear BR-81, BR-83

×
Shims damaged BR-103, BR-107, BR-120

×
Rotor imbalance BR-81, BR-83

×
×

BR-74
Rotor damage BR-81, BR-83

×
Rotor runout BR-81, BR-83

×
Rotor deformation BR-81, BR-83

×
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

Rotor deflection BR-81, BR-83

×
Rotor rust BR-81, BR-83

×
×

Rotor thickness variation BR-81, BR-83

×
AXLE AND SUSPENSION NVH in FAX, RAX and FSU, RSU section
×
×
×

TIRE NVH in WT section

×
×
×

ROAD WHEEL NVH in WT section

×
×
×
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

× × DRIVE SHAFT NVH in FAX section

STEERING NVH in ST section

×
×
×
[RHD]

INFOID:0000000010838558
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838559
B

INSPECTION
Brake Pedal Height C
Check the height (H1) between the dash lower panel and the
brake pedal upper surface.
D
H1 : Refer to BR-127, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION:
Remove the floor carpet. E

BR
JPFIA0065ZZ

Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Pedal Position Switch (with ASCD).
G
Check the clearance (C) among the brake pedal bracket and the
stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD)
threaded end.
H
C : Refer to BR-127, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION:
The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released. I
NOTE:
Pull the brake pedal pad to make the clearance between the stop
lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) threaded J
end and the brake pedal lever. JPFIA0674ZZ

Brake Pedal Play

Press the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal play (A) (stroke until K
fluid pressure occurs).

A : Refer to BR-127, "Brake Pedal". L

H2 : Refer to BR-127, "Brake Pedal". P

CAUTION:
Remove the floor carpet.

JPFIA0068ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
BR-75
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
Brake Pedal Height
Perform the following procedure when brake pedal height is not within the specified value because brake
pedal height is not adjustable.
1. Check input rod length. Refer to BR-99, "Removal and installation".
2. Replace brake pedal assembly when input rod length is within specified value.
Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Pedal Position Switch (with ASCD).
1. Remove instrument lower panel. Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD).
3. Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) 45° counterclockwise.
4. Press-fit the stop lamp switch and brake position switch (with
ASCD) until the stop lamp switch and brake pedal position
switch (with ASCD) hits the brake pedal bracket 45° clock-
wise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the brake pedal bracket and
stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with
ASCD) threaded end must be the specified value.

C : Refer to BR-127, "Brake Pedal".

• The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is JPFIA0674ZZ

released.
Depressed Brake Pedal Height
1. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
2. Check the height between the dash lower panel and the
brake pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake
pedal at 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON.

H2 : Refer to BR-127, "Brake Pedal".

CAUTION:
Remove the floor carpet.

JPFIA0068ZZ

BR-76
BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
BRAKE FLUID
A
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838560

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL B

SBR389C
J
Draining INFOID:0000000010838561

BRA0007D
P
Refilling INFOID:0000000010838562

CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) har-
ness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work.

BR-77
BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank, and
refill with new brake fluid.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than
brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the
full stroke, and then release the pedal. Repeat this operation at
intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged.
Then close the bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed.
Repeat the same work on each wheel. PFIA0403J

3. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-78, "Bleeding Brake Sys-

tem".
Bleeding Brake System INFOID:0000000010838563

CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) har-
ness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work.
• Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.r.dust) and oil other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve of the rear left brake.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
3. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the
bleeder valve.
4. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all of the air is out of the brake line.
5. In case of rear brake caliper with electric parking brake system, operate parking brake 5 times to bleed the
air.
6. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque.
• Front disc brake (1 piston type) : Refer to BR-110, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) :
Exploded View".
• Front disc brake (2 piston type) : Refer to BR-115, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) :
Exploded View".
• Rear disc brake: Refer to BR-122, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
7. Perform steps 2 to 6. Occasionally fill with the brake fluid in order to keep it in the reservoir tank at least
half of MAX line. Bleed air in the following order: rear right brake → front left brake → rear left brake →
and front right brake in order.
8. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR-
77, "Inspection".
9. Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-75,
"Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-78
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
A
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838564

FLUID LEAK B
Check for brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder mounting face, reservoir tank mounting face and brake
tube connections.
C

BR-79
BRAKE BOOSTER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
BRAKE BOOSTER
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838565

BR-80
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838566
B
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary. C

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-127, "Front Disc Brake".

Runout (with it attached : Refer to BR-127, "Front Disc

BR-81
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
• Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or
more.
• If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor.
- For 2WD, refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
- For 4WD, refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-127, "Front Disc Brake".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-127, "Front Disc

Brake".

SBR020B

BR-82
REAR DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
REAR DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838568
B
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary. C

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-128, "Rear Disc Brake".

Runout (with it attached : Refer to BR-128, "Rear Disc

BR-83
REAR DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [RHD]
• Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or
more.
• If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor.
- For 2WD, refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
- For 4WD, refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-128, "Rear Disc Brake".

Wear thickness : Refer to BR-128, "Rear Disc

Brake".

SBR020B

BR-84
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

BRAKE PEDAL
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838570
B

JSFIA2685GB J

Clevis pin Brake pedal assembly Brake pedal pad

REMOVAL N
1. Remove instrument lower panel. Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the stop lamp switch and the brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) harness connectors.
O
3. Rotate the stop lamp switch and the brake pedal switch (with
ASCD) counterclockwise to remove.
P

JPFIA0815ZZ

BR-85
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]

4. Disconnect the accelerator pedal harness connector.

5. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from clevis of brake
booster .

JPFIA0816ZZ

6. Remove the brake pedal assembly.

CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster and master cylinder assembly so as not to drop out or contact them other
parts.
7. Remove the accelerator pedal from the brake pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-4, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
8. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-86, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Never reuse the clevis pin and snap pin.
• Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been
already applied)
NOTE:
The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction.
• Never impact brake pedal such as drop and interference with tools and parts.
• Replace brake pedal when impacting brake pedal.
• Perform adjustment after installation. Refer to BR-86, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838572

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

JSFIA2250ZZ

BR-86
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
• Check clevis pin and plastic stopper for damage and deforma-
tion. Replace clevis pin if necessary. A

PFIA0756J

D
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust each item of brake pedal after installing the brake pedal assembly to the vehicle. Refer to BR-75,
"Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform the release position learning of the accelerator pedal.Refer to EC-961, "Work Procedure". E

BR-87
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
BRAKE PIPING
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838573

JSFIA2704GB

Brake booster Master cylinder assembly Brake tube

ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Connector bracket Connector
trol unit)
Brake tube bracket Lock plate Brake hose
Union bolt Copper washer
To rear brake tube

, , : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

BR-88
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000010838574

JSFIA2427ZZ

G
Brake booster Master cylinder assembly Front disc brake
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Connector Rear disc brake
trol unit)
H
Brake tube Brake hose

: Flare nut
: Union bolt I

FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838575

J
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it K
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash. L
1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining".
M
3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube from the brake hose .
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. N
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake
hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when discon- O
necting to prevent entrance of dirt.

P
JPFIA0847ZZ

BR-89
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
4. Remove the union bolt and copper washers , and remove
the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly.
5. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose.

JPFIA0819ZZ

JPFIA0820ZZ

3. Install the brake tube to the brake hose , temporarily tighten

the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the
brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate .
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted
and bent.

JPFIA0821ZZ

4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut
torque wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-77, "Refilling".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
6. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-91, "FRONT :
Inspection". JPFIA0061ZZ

BR-90
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
FRONT : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838576

N
JSFIA2656GB

Brake tube Lock plate Brake hose

O
Union bolt Copper washer Brake tube bracket
Brake tube bracket
To connector To rear brake hose Floor side P
Caliper side

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

BR-91
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
REAR : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000010838578

JSFIA2427ZZ

Brake booster Master cylinder assembly Front disc brake

ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Connector Rear disc brake
trol unit)
Brake tube Brake hose

: Flare nut
: Union bolt

REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838579

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
• Wipe off immediately when attaching brake fluid with disc rotor and caliper assembly.
1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining".
3. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube from the hose .
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake
hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when discon-
necting to prevent entrance of dirt.

JSFIA1064ZZ

4. Disconnect the lock plate , then remove the brake hose.

BR-92
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
5. Loosen the flare nut with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube from the hose . A
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake B
hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when discon-
necting to prevent entrance of dirt.
C
6. Disconnect the lock plate , then remove the brake hose from
the brake hose bracket .
JSFIA2702ZZ

D
7. Remove the union bolt and copper washers , and remove
the brake hose from the brake caliper assembly.
E

G
JSFIA0471ZZ

INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water. I
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank. J
• Wipe off immediately when attaching brake fluid with disc rotor and caliper assembly.
1. Assemble the union bolt and copper washers to the brake
hose. K
CAUTION:
Never reuse the copper washer.
2. Align the brake hose L-pin with the brake caliper assembly L
hole , and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

JSFIA0472ZZ

N
3. Install the brake hose to the brake tube , temporarily tighten
the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate further, and fix the
brake hose to the brake hose bracket with the lock plate . O
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted
and bent.
P

JSFIA2658ZZ

BR-93
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
4. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut
torque wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.

JPFIA0061ZZ

5. Install the brake hose to the brake tube and the brake tube
, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not
rotate further, and fix the brake hose to brake hose brackets with
the lock plate .
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted
and bent.

JSFIA1065ZZ

6. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a flare nut
torque wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
7. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
8. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
9. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-94, "REAR :
Inspection". JPFIA0061ZZ

REAR : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838580

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no looseness
at connections.
CAUTION:
Clearance with brake hose and each parts being secured more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in unladen
condition*.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are quantity to specified. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats
are brought out of vehicle.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately
5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.

BR-94
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838581

I
JSFIA2563GB

Reservoir cap Oil strainer Reservoir tank J

Grommet Cylinder body Screw
O-ring
K
: Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant.

: Apply brake fluid.

L
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
M
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838582

REMOVAL
N
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water. O
• Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster. Then
remove the master cylinder assembly.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid P
may splash.
1. Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-98, "Inspection".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining".
3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch harness connector.

BR-95
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
4. Separate the brake tube from the master cylinder assembly with
a flare nut wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.

JSFIA2238ZZ

5. Remove the master cylinder assembly.

CAUTION:
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
• Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed.

• The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed.

Never damage it when removing the master cylinder.
• The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never
hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the
master cylinder assembly.

JSFIA2239ZZ

6. Remove the O-ring.

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never
wash them with water.
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Never reuse the O-ring.
• Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed.
• Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant to the brake booster [see
in the figure] when installing the master cylinder assembly to the
brake booster.

JPFIA0013ZZ

BR-96
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
• The piston of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never
damage it when handling the master cylinder. A
• Check that no dirt and dust are present on the piston before instal-
lation. Clean it with new brake fluid if necessary.
• The piston may drop off when pulled strongly. Never hold the pis-
B
ton. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder
assembly.
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
C

JSFIA2239ZZ

D
• Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the master cylinder
assembly by hand. Then tighten it to the specified torque with a
flare nut torque wrench (A). Refer to BR-95, "Exploded View". E
• Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System"
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-98, "Inspection".
BR

G
JSFIA2238ZZ

Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010838583

DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION: I
• Never disassemble the cylinder body.
• Remove the reservoir tank only when necessary.
• Never drop parts to remove. Replace new parts when dropping.
J
1. Fix the master cylinder assembly to a vise.
CAUTION:
• Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips when fixing the cylinder body to a vise.
• Never overtighten the vise. K
2. Remove the reservoir tank mounting screw.
3. Remove the reservoir tank and grommet from the cylinder body.
L
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Never use mineral oils such as kerosene or gasoline and rubber grease during the cleaning and
assembly process. M
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
• Never drop when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommet and install it to the cylinder body. N
CAUTION:
Never reuse grommets.
2. Install the reservoir tank to the cylinder body. O
3. Fix the cylinder body to a vise.
CAUTION:
P

BR-97
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
• Place the reservoir tank with the chamfered screw hole
( ) facing up.
• Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips
when fixing the cylinder body to a vise.
• Never overtighten the vise.
4. Tilt the reservoir tank so that a mounting screw can be fixed.
Assemble with screw.

JPFIA0826ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000010838584

INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL

Check the brake fluid level switch. Refer to BRC-159, "Component Inspection".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Check the master cylinder for deformation, twist, contact with other parts or looseness of connection.
• Check for fluid leakage from connection. Refer to BR-91, "FRONT : Inspection".
CAUTION:
If the fluid leakage is present, retighten to the specified torque. Replace parts if necessary.

BR-98
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
BRAKE BOOSTER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838585

I
JSFIA2240GB

Master cylinder assembly Check valve Vacuum sensor J

Brake booster Gasket

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) K

Removal and installation INFOID:0000000010838586

L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never M
wash them with water.
1. Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-100, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining". N
3. Disconnect vacuum sensor harness connector.
4. Remove brake master cylinder assembly. Refer to BR-95, "Removal and Installation".
O
5. Remove vacuum hose from check valve. Refer to BR-102, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove cowl top extension. Refer to EXT-25, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove brake tube between master cylinder assembly and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). P
Refer to BR-88, "FRONT : Exploded View".

BR-99
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
8. Remove snap pin and clevis pin .

JPFIA0019ZZ

9. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly.

CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster so as to avoid dropping out.
10. Remove brake booster.
CAUTION:
Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
11. Remove check valve from brake booster.
12. Remove vacuum sensor from brake booster.
13. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-100, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never
wash them with water.
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install check valve and vacuum sensor as shown in figure.

A :±15°
:Vehicle upper side

JSFIA2245ZZ

• Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installation, the
dash panel may damage threads.
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes when installing the brake booster.
• Always use new gasket between the brake booster and the dash panel.
• Replace clevis pin when found damage.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g.dust) and oil other than brake fluid to enter reservoir tank.
• Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
Never reuse brake fluid to drain.
• Check each item of brake pedal.
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838587

INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL

Air Tight
CAUTION:
Check the air tight condition when the master cylinder and the brake booster is installed.
1. Check the air tight use a handy vacuum pump.

BR-100
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]

At vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, : Vacuum should decrease within 3.3 kPa (24.8 mmHg, A
−19.69 inHg, −0.067 bar) 0.98 inHg, 0.033 bar) for 15 seconds.
2. If the air tight condition cannot be maintained, perform the following operation.
B
a. Check the no dirt and dust are present on the brake booster and brake master cylinder mating faces.
Clean it if necessary.
b. Check the O-ring on the master cylinder. If anything is found, replace the O-ring. Refer to BR-95,
"Removal and Installation". C
c. Check the air tight condition again. If the condition still cannot be maintained, replace the brake booster.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL D
Check Valve Inspection
1. Check the check valve to use a handy vacuum pump.
E
In the case of connecting to brake : Vacuum should decrease within 3.3 kPa (24.8 mmHg,
booster 0.98 inHg, 0.033 bar) for 15 seconds at vacuum of −
66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.69 inHg, −0.067 bar). BR
In the case of connecting to vacuum : Vacuum should not exist.
hose
G
Input Rod Length rod Inspection
1. Check the input length (A).
H
:Input rod

A : Refer to BR-127, "Brake Booster". I

2. Replace the brake booster if the input rod length is not the stan-
dard.
J

JPFIA0238ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION K

Operation
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the L
brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases.
NOTE:
A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. this is nor-
mal phenomenon due to the brake system operation. M
Air Tight
1. Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine. N
2. Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually
increases each time.
O
3. Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake
pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 sec-
onds or more.
P
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake assembly. Refer to BR-75, "Inspection and
Adjustment".

BR-101
VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
VACUUM LINES
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838986

JSFIA2546GB

Vacuum piping Clamp Vacuum hose

Connector Vacuum hose bracket
To vacuum pump Paint mark To brake booster

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838987

REMOVAL
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-306, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping.
3. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-102, "Inspection".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install the vacuum hose.
• When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the
back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never use lubricating oil during assembly.

A : 24 mm (0.95 in) or more

- For clamp mounting direction (the orientation of pawl), refer to BR-

102, "Exploded View".
Inspection INFOID:0000000010838988

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Appearance
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.

BR-102
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838594
B

JSFIA2246GB

H
Cylinder body Inner shim cover Inner shim
Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Return spring Pad retainer
Torque member Outer pad Outer shim I
Outer shim cover

1: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS 880N or silicone-based grease.

J
2: Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

K
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838595

JPFIA0832ZZ

BR-103
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose will not stretch.

JPFIA0850ZZ

JPFIA0118ZZ

5. Remove the pad return springs from the pad retainer .

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs when removing the
pad return springs from the pad retainer.
6. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-106, "BRAKE
PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

JSFIA2329ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install the pad return springs to pad retainer if the pad
return springs has been removed.

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs.

JSFIA2329ZZ

BR-104
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
2. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face
between the pad retainers and torque member if the pad A
retainers has been removed.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
3. Install the pad retainer (upper side with pad return spring) to B
torque member if the pad retainers has been removed.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be C
lifted up from the torque member.
• Never deform the pad retainers and pad return springs.
JSFIA1938ZZ

G
JSFIA1330ZZ

H
5. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face
between the brake pad and torque member .
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
I

K
JSFIA1337ZZ

6. Install the brake pads to the torque member.

L
CAUTION:
Both inner and outer pads have a pad return system.
Securely push the pad return spring into the disc rotor
side of brake pad . M

O
JSFIA2330ZZ

7. Install cylinder body to torque member. P

BR-105
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
8. Install the lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified
torque.

JPFIA0832ZZ

9. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer
to BR-106, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
10. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838596

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

• Replace the shims and shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
• Eliminate rust on the pad return spring, pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is exces-
sively attached.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-103, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-103, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-103, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-112, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and
Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-81, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838969

JSFIA2246GB

BR-106
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]

Cylinder body Inner shim cover Inner shim A

Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Return spring Pad retainer
Torque member Outer pad Outer shim
B
Outer shim cover

1: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS 880N or silicone-based grease.

2: Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent. C
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. D

BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838970

JPFIA0832ZZ

K
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose will not stretch.
L

N
JPFIA0850ZZ

JPFIA0118ZZ

BR-107
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]

5. Remove the pad return springs from the pad retainer .

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs when removing the
pad return springs from the pad retainer.
6. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-109, "BRAKE
PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

JSFIA2329ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install the pad return springs to pad retainer if the pad
return springs has been removed.

: Disc rotor side

CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return springs.

JSFIA2329ZZ

2. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face

4. Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the

JSFIA1330ZZ

BR-108
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
5. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the match face
between the brake pad and torque member . A
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

JSFIA1337ZZ

D
6. Install the brake pads to the torque member.
CAUTION:
Both inner and outer pads have a pad return system. E
Securely push the pad return spring into the disc rotor
side of brake pad .
BR

JSFIA2330ZZ H

7. Install cylinder body to torque member.

JPFIA0832ZZ
N

9. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer
to BR-109, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
O
10. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838971

BR-109
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-107, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-107, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-107, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-117, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and
Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-81, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE)
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838600

REMOVAL

JPFIA0834GB

Brake caliper assembly

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

DISASSEMBLY

JSFIA2351GB

BR-110
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]

Cap Bleeder valve Cylinder body A

Piston seal Piston Piston boot
Sliding pin Sliding pin boot Bushing
B
Torque member

: Apply rubber grease.

: Apply brake fluid. C

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly. D

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000010838601
E
REMOVAL
WARNING: BR
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it G
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. H
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts. I
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining".
4. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and separate brake hose from brake caliper assembly. Refer to
BR-89, "FRONT : Removal and Installation". J
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake cali-
per assembly.
CAUTION: K
Never drop brake pad and brake caliper assembly.
6. Remove disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
L
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

M
JPFIA0835ZZ

BR-111
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assem-
bly. Refer to BR-89, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer. JPFIA0835ZZ

4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
• Never reuse brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the surface of disc rotor.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-114, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1
PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
6. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation"
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-106, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000010838602

DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member, brake pad and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cyl-
inder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-103,
"BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop.
2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing from sliding pin .

JPFIA0851ZZ

4. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the pistons.

MAA0272D

BR-112
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using seal pick tool.
CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
6. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
7. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-114, "BRAKE B
CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

JPFIA0038ZZ

D
ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
2. Apply new brake fluid to piston seals , and install them to cyl- E
inder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston seals.
BR

JPFIA0039ZZ H

3. Apply rubber grease to piston boots . Cover the piston end

with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot
I
securely into a groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston boots.
J

JPFIA0040ZZ

O
JPFIA0034ZZ

BR-113
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
5. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pin
and bushing , and install bushing to sliding pin.

JPFIA0836ZZ

6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pins

and sliding pin boots , and install sliding pins and sliding pin
boots to torque member .
7. Install the cylinder body to tighten sliding pin bolts to the speci-
fied torque.

JPFIA0837ZZ

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838603

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the cylinder inner wall for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Pistons
Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-103, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-103, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-103, "BRAKE PAD (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. When any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and
replace if necessary. Refer to BR-112, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly
and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-81, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE)

BR-114
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838972

A
REMOVAL

JPFIA0422GB G

Brake caliper assembly

H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

DISASSEMBLY
I

N
JSFIA1969GB

Cap Bleeder valve Cylinder body

O
Sliding pin Sliding pin boot Bushing
Piston seal Piston Piston boot
Torque member P
: Apply rubber grease.

: Apply brake fluid.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

BR-115
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000010838973

REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining".
4. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and separate brake hose from brake caliper assembly. Refer to
BR-89, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake cali-
per assembly.
CAUTION:
Never drop brake pad and brake caliper assembly.
6. Remove disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".

JPFIA0835ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g.dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Install disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assem-
bly. Refer to BR-89, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer. JPFIA0835ZZ

4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to
BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:

BR-116
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
• Never reuse brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the surface of disc rotor. A
5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-119, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2
PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
6. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation" B
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-119, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) :
Inspection".
C
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000010838974

DISASSEMBLY D
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member, brake pad and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cyl-
inder body. E
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-107,
"BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION: BR
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop.
2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing from sliding pin . G

JSFIA0496ZZ J

4. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. K
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the pistons.
L

BRB0032D

N
5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using seal pick tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
O
6. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
7. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-119, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
P

SFIA0141E

ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.

BR-117
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
2. Apply new brake fluid to piston seals , and install them to cyl-
inder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston seals.

JPFIA0032ZZ

3. Apply rubber grease to piston boots . Cover the piston end

with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot
securely into a groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston boots.

JPFIA0033ZZ

4. apply new brake fluid to pistons . Push piston into cylinder

body by hand and push piston boot piston-side lip into the pis-
ton groove.
CAUTION:
Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to pre-
vent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.

JPFIA0034ZZ

5. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pin

and bushing , and install bushing to sliding pin.

JSFIA0497ZZ

BR-118
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pins
and sliding pin boots , and install sliding pins and sliding pin A
boots to torque member .
7. Install the cylinder body to tighten sliding pin bolts to the speci-
fied torque. B

JSFIA0498ZZ

D
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection INFOID:0000000010838975

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY E

Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the cylinder inner wall for rust, wear, cracks or damage. BR
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member G
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Pistons
Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage. H
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing I
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below. J
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-107, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-107, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
K
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-107, "BRAKE PAD (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. When any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and L
replace if necessary. Refer to BR-117, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Disassembly
and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal
M
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-81, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-119
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
REAR DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838976

JSFIA2411GB

Cylinder body Inner shim cover Inner shim

Inner pad (with pad wear sensor) Torque member Outer pad
Outer shim Outer shim cover

1: Apply rubber grease.

2 : Apply MOLYKOTE® AS 880N or silicone-based grease.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838977

REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Must be performed additional service when replacing brake pad. Refer to PB-52, "Work Procedure".
3. Remove tires.

BR-120
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
4. Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
A

JPFIA0832ZZ

D
5. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose and the electric parking brake harness will not stretch.
E

G
JPFIA0850ZZ

6. Remove the brake pads, shims and shim covers. H

CAUTION:
• Never damage the piston boots.
• Never drop the brake pads, shims and shim covers. I
• Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
• Never damage the electric parking brake harness and bracket.
7. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-122, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment". J
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed K
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out. L
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.

P
JSFIA1805ZZ

2. Install the brake pads to the torque member.

3. Apply rubber grease to the cylinder body mounting bolts, and then install the cylinder body to torque mem-
ber.
CAUTION:

BR-121
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
• Never damage the piston boot.
• When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because
brake fluid returns to reservoir tank when pressing piston in.
4. Install the lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified
torque.

JPFIA0832ZZ

5. Must be performed additional service when removing and installing/replacing brake pad.
When removing and installing brake pad
1. Perform “BRAKE OPERATION”. Refer to PB-61, "Work Procedure".
2. Perform “BRAKE RELEASE”. Refer to PB-63, "Work Procedure".
When replacing brake pad
• Refer to PB-52, "Work Procedure".
6. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel is present for the front disc brake. Refer
to BR-122, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
7. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838978

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

• Replace the shims and shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
• Eliminate rust on the pad and the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-120, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-120, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-120, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-125, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-83, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010838979

REMOVAL

BR-122
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]

JSFIA2412GB BR

Brake caliper assembly

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) G

DISASSEMBLY
H

M
JSFIA2413GB

Cap Bleeder valve Cylinder body

N
Sliding pin Bushing Bushing
Torque member

: Apply rubber grease. O

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010838980

P
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:

BR-123
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Must be performed additional service when replacing brake calipper. Refer to PB-55, "Work Procedure".
3. Remove tires.
4. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.
5. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining".
6. Remove union bolt and copper washer, and separate brake hose from brake caliper assembly. Refer to
BR-92, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake cali-
per assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never drop brake pad and brake caliper assembly.
• Never damage the electric parking brake harness and
bracket.
8. Remove disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".

JPFIA0835ZZ

INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. However avoid washing brake
components with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g.dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Install disc rotor.
• 2WD: Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to RAX-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose and copper washers to brake caliper assem-
bly. Refer to BR-92, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer. JPFIA0835ZZ

4. Must be performed additional service when removing and installing/replacing brake pad.
When removing and installing brake pad
1. Perform “BRAKE OPERATION”. Refer to PB-61, "Work Procedure".
2. Perform “BRAKE RELEASE”. Refer to PB-63, "Work Procedure".
When replacing brake pad
• Refer to PB-52, "Work Procedure".
5. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
BR-124
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
CAUTION:
• Never reuse brake fluid. A
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on the surface of disc rotor.
6. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to BR-126, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY :
Inspection and Adjustment". B
7. Install tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation"
8. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-126, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and
Adjustment". C
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010838981

DISASSEMBLY D
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member and brake pad when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-120, E
"BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop. BR
2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing from sliding pin .
G

JSFIA0496ZZ

J
4. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
5. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-126, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and
Adjustment". K
ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap. L

2. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pin

and bushing , and install bushing to sliding pin. M

JPFIA0836ZZ

BR-125
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [RHD]
3. Apply rubber grease to mating faces between sliding pins
and sliding pin boots , and install sliding pins and sliding pin
boots to torque member .

JPFIA0837ZZ

4. Install the cylinder body to tighten cylinder body mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-120,
"BRAKE PAD : Exploded View".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010838982

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the cylinder inner wall for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-120, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-120, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-120, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. When any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and
replace if necessary. Refer to BR-125, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-83, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".

BR-126
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RHD]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications INFOID:0000000010930899
B

Unit: mm (in)
C
Caliper type 1 piston type 2 piston type
Cylinder bore diameter 60.33 (2.3752) 44.45 × 2 (1.7500 × 2)
Front brake 123.6 × 47.5 × 10.5 (4.87 × 1.870 × 133.6 × 48.5 × 10.0 (5.26 × 1.909 × D
Pad length × width × thickness
0.413) 0.39)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 296 × 26.0 (11.65 × 1.024) 320 × 28.0 (12.60 × 1.102)
Cylinder bore diameter 38.2 (1.504) E
Rear brake Pad length × width × thickness 82.9 × 39.8 × 9.0 (3.263 × 1.567 × 0.354)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 292 × 16.0 (11.50 × 0.630)
BR
Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter 23.81 (0.9374)
Control valve Valve type Electric brake force distribution
Brake booster Diaphragm diameter 250 (0.9374) G
Recommended brake fluid Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000010838623

H
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
I
Brake pedal height 175.0 – 185.0 (6.89 – 7.28)
Depressed brake pedal height
85.0 (3.35) or more
[Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON]
J
Clearance between stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch (with ASCD) threaded
0.20 – 1.96 (0.0079 – 0.0772)
end and the brake pedal lever
Brake pedal play 3 – 11 (0.12 – 0.43)
K
Brake Booster INFOID:0000000010838624

Unit: mm (in) L
Item Standard
Input rod length 124.25 – 125.75 (4.89 – 4.95)
M
Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000010930900

BR-127
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RHD]
Rear Disc Brake INFOID:0000000010930901

Unit: mm (in)

Item Limit
Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness 14.0 (0.551)
Disc rotor Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) 0.020 (0.0008)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.070 (0.0028)

BR-128
BRAKES

SECTION
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
BRC B

E
CONTENTS
WITH VDC (ESP) TCS FUNCTION .........................................................51 BRC
TCS FUNCTION : System Description ....................52
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................... 7
ABS FUNCTION ........................................................53
G
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ............................ 7 ABS FUNCTION : System Description ....................53
Information ................................................................ 7
EBD FUNCTION ........................................................55
PRECAUTION ............................................... 8 EBD FUNCTION : System Description ....................55 H

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 8 BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (BLSD)

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System FUNCTION .................................................................56
BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (BLSD) I
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................... 8 FUNCTION : System Description ............................56
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION .....................................58
tion After Battery Disconnect ..................................... 8 J
BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 9 ....58
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 10
Precaution for Stop/Start System Service ............... 10 BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION ...........60 K
Precautions for Harness Repair .............................. 10 BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION :
Precaution for Brake System .................................. 11 System Description ..................................................60
Precaution for Brake Control System ...................... 11 L
HILL START ASSIST (UPHILL START SUPPORT)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 14 FUNCTION .................................................................62
hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT)
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................14 FUNCTION : System Description ............................62 M
Component Parts Location ...................................... 14
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ......... 25 ADVANCED HILL DESCENT CONTROL (DOWN-
Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor ............................ 27 HILL DRIVE SUPPORT) FUNCTION ........................64
ADVANCED hill descent control (DOWNHILL N
Steering Angle Sensor ............................................ 27
VDC (ESP) OFF Switch .......................................... 28 DRIVE SUPPORT) FUNCTION : System Descrip-
hill descent control (Downhill Drive Support) tion ...........................................................................64
Switch ...................................................................... 28 O
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ........................66
Brake Fluid Level Switch ......................................... 28
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Brake Vacuum Sensor ............................................ 29 Lamp/Indicator Lamp ...............................................67
P
SYSTEM .............................................................30 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
System Description ................................................. 30 METER) ......................................................................67
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 43 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
Fail-Safe .................................................................. 43 METER) : Chassis Control Display ..........................67
VDC (ESP) FUNCTION ............................................. 48 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR
VDC (ESP) FUNCTION : System Description ........ 48
AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)] ....... 70

BRC-1
CONSULT Function ................................................ 70 C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM ....... 119
DTC Description .................................................... 119
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 76 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT C1110, C1153 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELEC-
(CONTROL UNIT) .............................................. 76 TRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) .......................... 122
Reference Value ..................................................... 76 DTC Description .................................................... 122
Fail-Safe ................................................................. 79 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 83
DTC Index .............................................................. 84 C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYS-
TEM ................................................................... 123
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 86 DTC Description .................................................... 123
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................ 86
LHD ........................................................................... 86
C1113, C1145, C1146 YAW RATE/SIDE/DE-
LHD : Wiring Diagram ............................................. 86 CEL G SENSOR ............................................... 126
DTC Description .................................................... 126
RHD ........................................................................... 90 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126
RHD : Wiring Diagram ............................................ 91
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR ................................. 127
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 95 DTC Description .................................................... 127
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 127
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 95
Work Flow ............................................................... 95 C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH .......................... 133
Diagnostic Work Sheet ........................................... 96 DTC Description .................................................... 133
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 133
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT C1118 4WD SYSTEM ....................................... 135
(CONTROL UNIT) .............................................. 98 DTC Description .................................................... 135
Description .............................................................. 98 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135
Work Procedure ...................................................... 98
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SEN- SYSTEM ........................................................... 137
SOR NEUTRAL POSITION ............................... 99 DTC Description .................................................... 137
Description .............................................................. 99 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137
Work Procedure ...................................................... 99
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT
CALIBRATION OF DECEL G SENSOR ......... 102 VALVE SYSTEM .............................................. 140
Description .............................................................102 DTC Description .................................................... 140
Work Procedure .....................................................102 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 140

CONFIGURATION [ABS ACTUATOR AND C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL .................................. 143

ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)] .............. 104 DTC Description .................................................... 143
Work Procedure .....................................................104 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 107 C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM ............. 145
DTC Description .................................................... 145
C10D7 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ............... 107 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145
DTC Description ....................................................107
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................107 C1142 PRESS SENSOR .................................. 147
DTC Description .................................................... 147
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SEN- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 147
SOR .................................................................. 109
DTC Description ....................................................109
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 150
DTC Description .................................................... 150
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................109
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 150
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SEN-
C1144 INCOMPLETE STEERING ANGLE
SOR .................................................................. 113
DTC Description ....................................................113
SENSOR ADJUSTMENT ................................. 153
DTC Description .................................................... 153
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................114
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 153

BRC-2
C1154 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH ...... 155 Component Function Check .................................. 191
DTC Description .................................................... 155 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 191 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 155 Component Inspection ........................................... 192

C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH .......... 157 hill descent control (DOWNHILL DRIVE
B
DTC Description .................................................... 157 SUPPORT) SWITCH ....................................... 193
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 157 Component Function Check .................................. 193
Component Inspection .......................................... 159 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 193
Component Inspection ........................................... 194 C
C1160 INCOMPLETE DECEL G SENSOR
CALIBRATION ................................................. 161 ABS WARNING LAMP ................................... 195
DTC Description .................................................... 161 Component Function Check .................................. 195 D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 161 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 195

C1164, C1165 CV SYSTEM ............................. 162 BRAKE WARNING LAMP .............................. 196
DTC Description .................................................... 162 Component Function Check .................................. 196 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 162 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 196

C1166, C1167 SV SYSTEM ............................. 165 VDC (ESP) WARNING LAMP ......................... 197
BRC
DTC Description .................................................... 165 Component Function Check .................................. 197
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 197

C1170 VARIANT CODING ............................... 168 VDC (ESP) OFF INDICATOR LAMP .............. 198 G
DTC Description .................................................... 168 Component Function Check .................................. 198
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 198

hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT) H

C1197 VACUUM SENSOR .............................. 170
DTC Description .................................................... 170 INDICATOR LAMP .......................................... 199
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170 Component Function Check .................................. 199
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 199 I
C1198 VACUUM SENSOR .............................. 173
DTC Description .................................................... 173 hill decent control (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUP-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173 PORT) INDICATOR LAMP ............................. 201 J
Component Function Check .................................. 201
C1199 BRAKE BOOSTER ............................... 176 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 201
DTC Description .................................................... 176
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 202 K

C119A VACUUM SENSOR .............................. 179 EXCESSIVE OPERATION FREQUENCY ...... 202
DTC Description .................................................... 179 Description ............................................................. 202 L
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 179 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 202
C1B60 CHASSIS CONTROL SYSTEM ........... 182 UNEXPECTED BRAKE PEDAL REACTION . 204
DTC Description .................................................... 182 Description ............................................................. 204 M
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 182 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 204
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 184 THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG ............. 206
DTC Description .................................................... 184 N
Description ............................................................. 206
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 184 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 206
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN) ........................ 185 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 207 O
DTC Description .................................................... 185 Description ............................................................. 207
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 207
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 187 BRAKE PEDAL VIBRATION OR OPERA- P
DTC Description .................................................... 187 TION SOUND OCCURS .................................. 208
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 187 Description ............................................................. 208
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 208
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 188
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 188 VEHICLE JERKS DURING ............................. 209
Description ............................................................. 209
VDC (ESP) OFF SWITCH ................................ 191
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 209

BRC-3
VDC (ESP) WARNING LAMP, ABS WARN- Precautions for FEB System Service .................... 226
ING LAMP AND BRAKE WARNING LAMP
TURN ON ......................................................... 210 PREPARATION ......................................... 227
Description .............................................................210 PREPARATION ................................................ 227
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................210 Special Service Tools ........................................... 227
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION .............. 211 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 227
Description .............................................................211 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 228
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 212 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 228
WHEEL SENSOR ............................................ 212 Component Parts Location ................................... 228
Distance Sensor .................................................... 231
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR .......................................212 Stop Lamp Switch ................................................. 231
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ..........212
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Instal- SYSTEM ........................................................... 232
lation ......................................................................212 System Description ............................................... 232
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 236
REAR WHEEL SENSOR .........................................213 Fail-safe (Distance Sensor) .................................. 236
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ............213
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa- WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ..................... 236
tion .........................................................................214 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Lamp/Indicator Lamp ............................................ 237
SENSOR ROTOR ............................................ 216
OPERATION ..................................................... 238
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR .......................................216 Switch Name and Function ................................... 238
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Instal- Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch ............ 238
lation ......................................................................216
HANDLING PRECAUTION .............................. 241
REAR SENSOR ROTOR .........................................216 Description ............................................................ 241
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion .........................................................................216 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DISTANCE SENSOR).. 242
CONSULT Function (LASER/RADAR) ................. 242
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT) ............................................ 217 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 244
LHD ..........................................................................217 DISTANCE SENSOR ........................................ 244
LHD : Exploded View .............................................217 Reference Value ................................................... 244
LHD : Removal and Installation .............................217 Fail-safe (Distance Sensor) .................................. 246
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 246
RHD ..........................................................................219 DTC Index ............................................................. 247
RHD : Exploded View ............................................219
RHD : Removal and Installation ............................220 WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 248
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 222 FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING ............. 248
Removal and Installation .......................................222 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 248
VDC (ESP) OFF SWITCH ................................ 223 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 257
Removal and Installation .......................................223
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 257
hill descent control (DOWNHILL DRIVE Work Flow ............................................................. 257
SUPPORT) SWITCH ........................................ 224
Removal and Installation .......................................224 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING DISTANCE SENSOR ........................................ 259
Description ............................................................ 259
PRECAUTION ............................................ 225 Work Procedure .................................................... 259

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 225 DISTANCE SENSOR INITIAL VERTICAL

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System ALIGNMENT ..................................................... 260
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Description ............................................................ 260
SIONER" ................................................................225 Required Tools ...................................................... 260
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ..........225 Preparation ........................................................... 260

BRC-4
Distance Sensor Initial Vertical Alignment ............ 260 C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP ............................... 285
DTC Logic .............................................................. 285 A
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT ................. 262 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 285
Description ............................................................ 262
Work Procedure (Preparation) .............................. 262 C1A24 NP RANGE .......................................... 286
Work Procedure (Setting The ICC Target Board).. 264 B
DTC Logic .............................................................. 286
Work Procedure (Radar Alignment) ...................... 266 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 286
ACTION TEST .................................................. 268 C1A26 ECD MODE MALFUNCTION .............. 288 C
Description ............................................................ 268 DTC Logic .............................................................. 288
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 268 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 288

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 269 C1A39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............ 289 D
DTC Logic .............................................................. 289
C10B7 YAW RATE SENSOR .......................... 269 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 289
DTC Logic ............................................................. 269 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 269 C1B5D FEB OPE COUNT LIMIT .................... 290
DTC Logic .............................................................. 290
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 290
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 .......................... 270 BRC
DTC Logic ............................................................. 270 U0121 VDC CAN 2 .......................................... 291
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 270 DTC Logic .............................................................. 291
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 291 G
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ................. 271
DTC Logic ............................................................. 271 U0126 STRG SEN CAN 1 ............................... 292
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 271 DTC Logic .............................................................. 292
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 292 H
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM ...................... 273
DTC Logic ............................................................. 273 U0401 ECM CAN 1 ......................................... 293
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 273 DTC Logic .............................................................. 293 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 293
C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW ............. 274
DTC Logic ............................................................. 274 U0415 VDC CAN 1 .......................................... 294
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 274 DTC Logic .............................................................. 294 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 294
C1A07 CVT ....................................................... 276
DTC Logic ............................................................. 276 U0428 STRG SEN CAN 2 ............................... 295 K
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 276 DTC Logic .............................................................. 295
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 295
C1A12 RADAR OFF-CENTER ......................... 277
DTC Logic ............................................................. 277 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 296 L
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 277 DTC Logic .............................................................. 296
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 296
C1A14 ECM ...................................................... 278 M
DTC Logic ............................................................. 278 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 297
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 278 DTC Logic .............................................................. 297
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 297
C1A15 GEAR POSITION ................................. 279 N
DTC Logic ............................................................. 279 U1527 CCM CAN 1 ......................................... 298
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 279 DTC Logic .............................................................. 298
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 298 O
C1A16 RADAR BLOCKED .............................. 281
DTC Logic ............................................................. 281 U153F CCM CAN 2 ......................................... 299
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 281 DTC Logic .............................................................. 299
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 299 P
C1A17 DISTANCE SENSOR ........................... 283
DTC Logic ............................................................. 283 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 300
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 283 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 300

C1A18 RADAR AIMING INCMP ...................... 284 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 301
DTC Logic ............................................................. 284
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 284

BRC-5
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM SYMP- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 302
TOMS ............................................................... 301
Symptom Table .....................................................301 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 304

SYSTEM SETTINGS CANNOT BE TURNED DISTANCE SENSOR ........................................ 304

ON/OFF ............................................................ 302 Exploded View ...................................................... 304
Removal and Installation ....................................... 304
Symptom Table .....................................................302
Description .............................................................302

BRC-6
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Information INFOID:0000000010724304
B
• Both “VDC” and “ESP” are used in this manual. These indicate the same system.
• Both “hill start assist” and “Uphill start support” are used in this manual. These indicate the same system.
• Both “advanced hill descent control” and “downhill drive support” are used in this manual. These indicate the C
same system.
• Both “active trace control” and “dynamic cornering enhancement” are used in this manual. These indicate
the same system. D

BRC

BRC-7
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010723615

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000010723616

BRC-8
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a A
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned. B
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock C
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010735263
D

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even E
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. BRC
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the G
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
H
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected. I
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. J
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2. K
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
L
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
M
of the specified time.

D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes N
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes O
V9X engine : 4 minutes
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of P
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.

BRC-9
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000010723618

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precaution for Stop/Start System Service INFOID:0000000011003224

CAUTION:
When performing an inspection and its related work with the engine at idle, always turn the stop/start
OFF switch ON or open the hood to release the stop/start system.
Precautions for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000010723619

• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).

SKIB8766E

• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.

NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost.

SKIB8767E

BRC-10
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communica-
tion line. A
Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000010723620

WARNING: B
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants". C
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
D
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each
item of brake pedal. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause E
improper operation.
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten flare nut of brake tube to the specified torque using a flare BRC
nut torque wrench (A).
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative
terminal before performing the work. Refer to BRC-9, "Precautions G
for Removing Battery Terminal".
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the
parts. H

JPFIA0061ZZ
I
Precaution for Brake Control System INFOID:0000000010723621

• Always perform a pre-driving check to drive the vehicle. J

• Always check speed and safety while driving the vehicle.
• To operate CONSULT while driving, more than one person is required to be in the vehicle to avoid interfer-
ence to driving and ensure safety.
• Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and the operation noises occur, when VDC function, TCS func- K
tion, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake
force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with
gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) or active ride control func- L
tion (control of chassis control module) operates. This is not a malfunction because it is caused by VDC
function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control func-
M
tion (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) or
active ride control function (control of chassis control module) that is normally operated.
• When starting engine or when starting vehicle just after starting engine, brake pedal may vibrate or motor
operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is normal condition. N
• Brake stopping distance may become longer than models without ABS function depending on the road con-
ditions, when ABS function is operated on slippery road like rough road, gravel road or snowy road.
• When a malfunction is indicated, always collect information from the customer about conditions of occur-
O
rence, estimate cause, and perform operation. Check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and brake
fluid leakage, as well as electrical system.
• The optimum performance is achieved by control for VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD func-
tion, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill P
start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace
control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control
module), when all of brakes, suspensions and tires installed on the vehicle are the specified size and parts.
Brake performance and controllability may be negatively affected when other parts than the specified are
installed.
• Brake stopping distance may become longer and steering stability may be negatively affected, when tires in
different size and combination or other parts than the specified are used.

BRC-11
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• When a radio (including wiring), antenna and antenna lead line are located near ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit), a malfunction or improper operation may occur for the control of VDC function, TCS func-
tion, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake
force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with
gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control
function (control of chassis control module).
• When the following items are replaced by other parts than genuine parts or modified, ABS warning lamp,
brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp may turn ON, and the control may not operate normally for VDC
function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control func-
tion (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module).
- Suspension component parts (shock absorber, spring, bushing and others)
- Tire and wheel (other than the specified size)
- Brake component parts (brake pad, disc rotor, brake caliper and others)
- Engine component parts (ECM, muffler and others)
- Body reinforcement component parts (rollover bar, tower bar and others)
• When suspension, tire and brake related parts are excessively worn or deteriorated and the vehicle is
driven, ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp may turn ON, and the control may
not operate normally for VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differen-
tial (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function,
advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function
(control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control module).
• ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp may turn ON, when only front wheel or rear
wheel is rotated using a free roller. This is not a malfunction, because it is caused by wheel speed difference
between wheel that is rotated and wheel that is not rotated. In this case, perform self-diagnosis, check self-
diagnosis results, and erase memory.
• When power supply voltage is not normal, ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp
turn ON. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) stops control for VDC function, TCS function, ABS func-
tion, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribu-
tion function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline
engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (con-
trol of chassis control module). Ordinary brake operates. After power supply returns to normal, ABS warning
lamp, brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp turn OFF. The control becomes operative for VDC func-
tion, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist
function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function
(4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module).
• Brake pedal vibrates and operation sound occurs during sudden acceleration and cornering, when VDC
function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force dis-
tribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline
engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (con-
trol of chassis control module) are operated. This is not a malfunction because it is caused by VDC function,
TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution
function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine),
active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of
chassis control module) that is operated normally.
• VDC warning lamp may turn ON and VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) func-
tion, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent
control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control
module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control module) may not normally operate, when
driving on a special road the is extremely slanted (bank in a circuit course). This is not a malfunction if the
status returns to normal for VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control func-
tion (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module) after the engine is started again. In this case,
perform self-diagnosis, check self-diagnosis results, and erase memory.
• A malfunction in yaw rate/side/decel G sensor system may be detected when the vehicle sharply turns dur-
ing a spin turn, acceleration turn or drift driving while VDC function and TCS function are OFF (VDC OFF
switch is pressed and VDC OFF indicator lamp is in ON status). This is not a malfunction if the status returns

BRC-12
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
to normal for VDC function and TCS function after the engine is started again. In this case, perform self-diag-
nosis, check self-diagnosis results, and erase memory. A

BRC

BRC-13
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010723622

LHD
2WD Models

JSFIA2501ZZ

Back of spiral cable assembly Engine room (RH side) Steering knuckle
Engine room (LH side) Instrument driver lower panel Rear axle housing

No. Component parts Function

Rear RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Rear RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

BRC-14
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
No. Component parts Function
A
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal B
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
Combination meter • VDC OFF indicator lamp signal C
• VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
• hill start assist indicator lamp signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric D
unit (control unit) via chassis control module via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for
detailed installation location.
E
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• Active trace control signal BRC
• Active ride control signal
• Chassis control module malfunction signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric
Chassis control module unit (control unit) via CAN communication. G
• hill start assist display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to combination meter via CAN
communication.
H
• hill start assist display request signal
Refer to DAS-166, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installa-
tion location.
Front RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor" I

Front RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric J
unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• N range signal
• P range signal
• R range signal K
* • Current gear position signal
TCM • Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo- L
cation" (gasoline engine models), TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYS-
TEM : Component Parts Location" (diesel engine models) for detailed
installation location.
M
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Engine speed signal N
ECM • Engine status signal
• ECM malfunction signal
Refer to EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location" (MR20DD models), EC-812, "Component Parts Location" O
(R9M models) for detailed installation location.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication. P
IPDM E/R • Ignition switch ON signal
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.

BRC-15
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
No. Component parts Function
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
• Brake pedal position switch signal
BCM
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation" for detailed installation location.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
Electric parking brake control module • Electric parking brake operation signal
Refer to PB-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
Steering angle sensor BRC-27, "Steering Angle Sensor"

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-25, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)"

Front LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Front LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Brake fluid level switch BRC-28, "Brake Fluid Level Switch"

Brake vacuum sensor BRC-29, "Brake Vacuum Sensor"

VDC OFF switch BRC-28, "VDC (ESP) OFF Switch"

Rear LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Rear LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

*: CVT models
4WD Models

BRC-16
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

BRC

JSFIA2502ZZ

P
Back of spiral cable assembly Engine room (RH side) Steering knuckle
Engine room (LH side) Instrument driver lower panel Center console
Rear axle housing

BRC-17
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

No. Component parts Function

Rear RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Rear RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
Combination meter • VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
• hill start assist indicator lamp signal
• hill descent control indicator lamp signal*2
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via chassis control module via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
• hill descent control display request signal*2
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Active trace control signal
• Active ride control signal
• Chassis control module malfunction signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
Chassis control module • hill start assist display request signal
• hill descent control display request signal*2
Mainly transmits the following signals to combination meter via CAN
communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
• hill descent control display request signal*2
Refer to DAS-166, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
Front RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Front RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• N range signal
• P range signal
• R range signal
• Current gear position signal
TCM*1 • Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion" (gasoline engine models), TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location" (diesel engine models) for detailed installa-
tion location.

BRC-18
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
No. Component parts Function
A
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Engine speed signal B
• Engine status signal
ECM • ECM malfunction signal
Refer to EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation" (MR20DD engine models), EC-440, C
"Component Parts Location" (QR25DE engine models), EC-812, "Com-
ponent Parts Location" (R9M engine models) for detailed installation lo-
cation.
D
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R • Ignition switch ON signal
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation lo- E
cation.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
BRC
• Stop lamp switch signal
• Brake pedal position switch signal
BCM
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal G
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion" for detailed installation location.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
H
(control unit) via CAN communication.
Electric parking brake control module • Electric parking brake operation signal
Refer to PB-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca-
tion. I
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• 4WD malfunction signal
4WD control unit • 4WD operation signal J
Refer to DLN-14, "Component Parts Location" (MR20DD engine and
QR25DE engine models), DLN-117, "Component Parts Location" (R9M
engine models) for detailed installation location.
K
Steering angle sensor BRC-27, "Steering Angle Sensor"

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-25, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)"
L
Front LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Front LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Brake fluid level switch BRC-28, "Brake Fluid Level Switch" M

Brake vacuum sensor BRC-29, "Brake Vacuum Sensor"

VDC OFF switch BRC-28, "VDC (ESP) OFF Switch" N

MWI-42, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : hill descent control
hill descent control switch*2 (Downhill Drive Support) Indicator lamp"
Rear LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor" O

Rear LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

*1: CVT models P

*
2: Gasoline engine models
RHD
2WD Models

BRC-19
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

JSFIA2503ZZ

Back of spiral cable assembly Instrument driver lower panel Engine room (RH side)
Steering knuckle Engine room (LH side) Rear axle housing

No. Component parts Function

Rear RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Rear RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

BRC-20
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
No. Component parts Function
A
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal B
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
Combination meter • VDC OFF indicator lamp signal C
• VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
• hill start assist indicator lamp signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit D
(control unit) via chassis control module via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location.
E

Front RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Front RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor" BRC
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• N range signal G
• P range signal
• R range signal
TCM* • Current gear position signal
• Shift position signal H
• TCM malfunction signal
Refer to TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion" for detailed installation location.
I
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Engine speed signal J
ECM
• Engine status signal
• ECM malfunction signal
Refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation lo-
cation. K
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R • Ignition switch ON signal L
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation lo-
cation.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication. M
• Stop lamp switch signal
• Brake pedal position switch signal
BCM
• Cranking signal
N
• Ignition switch ON signal
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion" for detailed installation location.
O

BRC-21
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
No. Component parts Function
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Active trace control signal
• Active ride control signal
• Chassis control module malfunction signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
Chassis control module (control unit) via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to combination meter via CAN
communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
Refer to DAS-166, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
Electric parking brake control module • Electric parking brake operation signal
Refer to PB-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca-
tion.
Steering angle sensor BRC-27, "Steering Angle Sensor"

VDC OFF switch BRC-28, "VDC (ESP) OFF Switch"

Brake fluid level switch BRC-28, "Brake Fluid Level Switch"

Brake vacuum sensor BRC-29, "Brake Vacuum Sensor"

Front LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Front LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-25, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)"

Rear LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Rear LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

*: CVT models
4WD Models

BRC-22
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

BRC

L
JSFIA2504ZZ

Back of spiral cable assembly Instrument driver lower panel Engine room (RH side) M
Steering knuckle Engine room (LH side) Rear axle housing

N
No. Component parts Function
Rear RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Rear RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor" O

BRC-23
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
No. Component parts Function
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
Combination meter • VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
• VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
• hill start assist indicator lamp signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via chassis control module via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location.
Front RH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Front RH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• N range signal
• P range signal
• R range signal
TCM* • Current gear position signal
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Refer to TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion" for detailed installation location.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Engine speed signal
ECM
• Engine status signal
• ECM malfunction signal
Refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation lo-
cation.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R • Ignition switch ON signal
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation lo-
cation.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
• Brake pedal position switch signal
BCM
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion" for detailed installation location.

BRC-24
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
No. Component parts Function
A
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• Active trace control signal
• Active ride control signal B
• Chassis control module malfunction signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit
Chassis control module (control unit) via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal C
Mainly transmits the following signals to combination meter via CAN
communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
Refer to DAS-166, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation D
location.
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication. E
Electric parking brake control module • Electric parking brake operation signal
Refer to PB-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca-
tion.
BRC
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) via CAN communication.
• 4WD malfunction signal
4WD control unit
• 4WD operation signal G
Refer to DLN-117, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
Steering angle sensor BRC-27, "Steering Angle Sensor" H
VDC OFF switch BRC-28, "VDC (ESP) OFF Switch"

Brake fluid level switch BRC-28, "Brake Fluid Level Switch"

I
Brake vacuum sensor BRC-29, "Brake Vacuum Sensor"

Front LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

J
Front LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-25, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)"

Rear LH wheel sensor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor" K

Rear LH sensor rotor BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"

*: CVT models L
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010723623

Electric unit (control unit) is integrated with actuator and comprehen- M

sively controls VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD func-
tion, Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, Brake assist
function, bake force distribution function, hill start assist function and
advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with Gasoline N
engine).

JSFIA2254ZZ P
CONTROL UNIT
• Brake fluid pressure, engine and transaxle are controlled according to signals from each sensor.
• If malfunction is detected, the system enters fail-safe mode.
ACTUATOR
The following components are integrated with ABS actuator.
Pump
BRC-25
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• Pressure the brake fluid and send.
• Returns the brake fluid reserved in reservoir to master cylinder by reducing pressure.
Motor
Activates the pump according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Motor Relay
Operates the motor ON/OFF according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Actuator Relay
Operates each valve ON/OFF according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
ABS In Valve
Switches the fluid pressure line to increase or hold according to signals from control unit.
NOTE:
Valve is a solenoid valve.
ABS Out Valve
Switches the fluid pressure line to increase, hold or decrease according to signals from control unit.
NOTE:
Valve is a solenoid valve.
Cut Valve 1, Cut Valve 2
Shuts off the ordinary brake line from master cylinder, when VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip dif-
ferential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function and
advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine) are activated.
NOTE:
Valve is a solenoid valve.
Suction Valve 1, Suction Valve 2
Supplies the brake fluid from master cylinder to the pump, when VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip
differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function and
advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine) are activated.
NOTE:
Valve is a solenoid valve.
Inlet Valve
Brake fluid sucked from the reservoir by the pump does not backflow.
NOTE:
Valve is a solenoid valve.
Outlet Valve
Brake fluid discharged from the pump does not backflow.
NOTE:
Valve is a solenoid valve.
Return Check Valve
Returns the brake fluid from brake caliper to master cylinder by bypassing orifice of each valve when brake is
released.
Reservoir
Temporarily reserves the brake fluid drained from brake caliper and wheel cylinder, so that pressure efficiently
decreases when decreasing pressure of brake caliper.
Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
Calculates the following information that affects the vehicle, and transmits a signal to ABS actuator and elec-
tric unit (control unit) via communication lines. [Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor is integrated in ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).]
• Vehicle rotation angular velocity (yaw rate signal)
• Vehicle lateral acceleration (side G signal) and longitudinal acceleration (decel G signal)
Pressure Sensor
Detects the brake fluid pressure and transmits signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). [Pressure
sensor is integrated in ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).]

BRC-26
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor INFOID:0000000010723624

A
• Wheel sensor of front wheel is installed on steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
Never measure resistance and voltage value using a tester B
because sensor is active sensor.
• Sensor rotor of front wheel is integrated in wheel hub assembly.
• Wheel sensor of rear wheel is installed on wheel hub assembly.
(2WD models) C
CAUTION:
Never measure resistance and voltage value using a tester
because sensor is active sensor. D
• Wheel sensor of rear wheel is installed on rear axle housing. (4WD
JSFIA1272ZZ
models)
CAUTION:
Never measure resistance and voltage value using a tester because sensor is active sensor. E
• Sensor rotor of rear wheel is integrated in wheel hub assembly. (2WD models)
• Sensor rotor of rear wheel is installed on drive shaft (wheel side).
(4WD models) BRC

JSFIA1567ZZ

I
• Downsize and weight reduction is aimed. IC for detection portion
and magnet for sensor rotor are adopted.
• Power supply is supplied to detection portion so that magnetic field J
line is read. Magnetic field that is detected is converted to current
signal.
• When sensor rotor rotates, magnetic field changes. Magnetic field
change is converted to current signals (rectangular wave) and is K
transmitted to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Change
of magnetic field is proportional to wheel speed.
L
JPFIC0131GB

Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000010723625

M
Detects the following information and transmits steering angle sen-
sor signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. N
• Steering wheel rotation amount
• Steering wheel rotation angular velocity
• Steering wheel rotation direction O

P
JSFIA2318ZZ

BRC-27
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC (ESP) OFF Switch INFOID:0000000010723626

• Non-operational status or standby status of the following functions

can be selected using VDC OFF switch. VDC OFF indicator lamp
indicates the operation status of function. (ON: Non-operational
status, OFF: Standby status)
- VDC function
- TCS function
- Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
- Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
NOTE:
ABS function, EBD function, Brake limited slip differential (BLSD)
function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill
JSFIA1148ZZ
start assist function and advanced hill descent control function (4WD
models with gasoline engine) control operates.
• VDC OFF indicator lamp turns OFF (standby status) when the engine is started again after it is stopped once
while VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON (non-operational status).
hill descent control (Downhill Drive Support) Switch INFOID:0000000010723627

The operation of the hill descent control switch enables the arbitrary
switching of the advanced hill descent control function between stop
status and standby status. The status of the function is indicated by
the hill descent control indicator lamp.
• ON:
- When advanced hill descent control function is under operating
condition
- Advanced hill descent control function operating or operational
(condition is satisfied)
• Blinking: Advanced hill descent control function operating or oper-
ational (condition is not satisfied)
JSFIA2255ZZ
• OFF: Advanced hill descent control function switch OFF (non-
operational status)
NOTE:
Applied to 4WD models with gasoline engine.
Brake Fluid Level Switch INFOID:0000000010723628

Detects the brake fluid level in reservoir tank and transmits con-
verted electric signal from combination meter to ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication, when brake fluid
level is the specified level or less.

JSFIA2256ZZ

BRC-28
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Brake Vacuum Sensor INFOID:0000000010723629

A
Detects the vacuum in brake booster and transmits converted elec-
tric signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
B

D
JSFIA2257ZZ

BRC

BRC-29
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000010723631

• The system switches fluid pressure of each brake to increase, to hold or to decrease according to signals
from control unit in ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). This control system is applied to VDC func-
tion, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist
function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function and advanced hill descent control function
(4WD models with gasoline engine).
• Fail-safe function is available for each function and is activated by each function when system malfunction
occurs.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
• 4WD control unit is applied to 4WD models.
• TCM is applied to CVT models.
• hill descent control switch is applied to 4WD models with gasoline engine.

JSFIA2365GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTRET SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

BRC-30
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

Component parts Signal description A

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
B
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via
CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal C
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
Combination meter • VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
• hill start assist indicator lamp signal D
• hill descent control indicator lamp signal*1
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via
chassis control module via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal E
• hill descent control display request signal*1
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. BRC
• N range signal
• P range signal
TCM*2 • R range signal
• Current gear position signal
G
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN H
communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Engine speed signal
• Engine status signal I
• ECM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
IPDM E/R communication. J
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. K
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal L
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Active trace control signal M
• Active ride control signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via
Chassis control module CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal N
• hill descent control display request signal*1
Mainly transmits the following signals to combination meter via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
O
• hill descent control display request signal*1
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Electric parking brake control module communication.
• Electric parking brake operation signal P
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
*3 communication.
4WD control unit • 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal

BRC-31
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
*1: 4WD models with gasoline engine
*2: CVT models
*3: 4WD models
VALVE OPERATION [VDC FUNCTION, TCS FUNCTION, BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
(BLSD) FUNCTION, BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION, BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION, hill
start assist FUNCTION AND ADVANCED hill descent control FUNCTION (4WD MODELS WITH
GASOLINE ENGINE)]
Each valve is operated and fluid pressure of brake is controlled.
VDC Function, TCS Function, Brake Limited Slip Differential (BLSD) Function, Brake Assist Function, Brake force
distribution Function, hill start assist Function and Advanced hill descent control Function (4WD Models with Gaso-
line Engine) are in Operation (During Pressure Increases)

JSFIA1735GB

Component parts Not activated When pressure increases

Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close)
Cut valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close)
Suction valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is supplied (open)
Suction valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is supplied (open)
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Each brake (fluid pressure) — Pressure increases

During pressure front RH brake increases

• Brake fluid is conveyed to the pump from the master cylinder through suction valve 1 and is pressurized by
the pump operation. The pressurized brake fluid is supplied to the front RH brake through the ABS IN valve.
For the left brake, brake fluid pressure is maintained because the pressurization is unnecessary. The pres-
surization for the left brake is controlled separately from the right brake.
During pressure front LH brake increases
• Brake fluid is conveyed to the pump from the master cylinder through suction valve 2 and is pressurized by
the pump operation. The pressurized brake fluid is supplied to the front LH brake through the ABS IN valve.

BRC-32
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
For the right brake, brake fluid pressure is maintained because the pressurization is unnecessary. The pres-
surization for the right brake is controlled separately from the left brake. A
During pressure rear RH brake increases
• Brake fluid is conveyed to the pump from the master cylinder through suction valve 2 and is pressurized by
the pump operation. The pressurized brake fluid is supplied to the rear RH brake through the ABS IN valve. B
For the left brake, brake fluid pressure is maintained because the pressurization is unnecessary. The pres-
surization for the left brake is controlled separately from the right brake.
During pressure rear LH brake increases
C
• Brake fluid is conveyed to the pump from the master cylinder through suction valve 1 and is pressurized by
the pump operation. The pressurized brake fluid is supplied to the rear LH brake through the ABS IN valve.
For the right brake, brake fluid pressure is maintained because the pressurization is unnecessary. The pres- D
surization for the right brake is controlled separately from the left brake.
VDC Function, TCS Function, Brake Limited Slip Differential (BLSD) Function, Brake Assist Function, Brake force
distribution Function, hill start assist Function and Advanced hill descent control Function (4WD Models with Gaso- E
line Engine) are in Operation (During Pressure Holds)

BRC

JSFIA1736GB
M
Component parts Not activated When pressure holds
Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close)
Cut valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close) N
Suction valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Suction valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
O
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Each brake (fluid pressure) — Pressure holds P

During pressure front RH brake holds

• Since the cut valve 1 and the suction valve 1 are closed, the front RH brake, master cylinder, and reservoir
are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front RH brake. The pressurization for the left
brake is controlled separately from the right brake.

BRC-33
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
During pressure front LH brake holds
• Since the cut valve 2 and the suction valve 2 are closed, the front LH brake, master cylinder, and reservoir
are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front LH brake. The pressurization for the right
brake is controlled separately from the left brake.
During pressure rear RH brake holds
• Since the cut valve 2 and the suction valve 2 are closed, the rear RH brake, master cylinder, and reservoir
are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear RH brake. The pressurization for the left brake
is controlled separately from the right brake.
During pressure rear LH brake holds
• Since the cut valve 1 and the suction valve 1 are closed, the rear LH brake, master cylinder, and reservoir
are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear LH brake. The pressurization for the right
brake is controlled separately from the left brake.
VDC Function, TCS Function, Brake Limited Slip Differential (BLSD) Function, Brake Assist Function, Brake force
distribution Function, hill start assist Function and Advanced hill descent control Function (4WD Models with Gaso-
line Engine) are in Operation (During Pressure Decrease)

JSFIA1737GB

Component parts Not activated When pressure decrease

Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
Cut valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
Suction valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Suction valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Each brake (fluid pressure) — Pressure decreases

During pressure front RH brake decreased

• Since the suction valve 1 and the ABS OUT valve close and the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve open, the
fluid pressure applied on the front RH brake is reduced by supplying the fluid pressure to the master cylinder
via the ABS IN valve and the cut valve 1. The pressurization for the right brake is controlled separately from
the left brake.

BRC-34
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
During pressure front LH brake decreased
• Since the suction valve 2 and the ABS OUT valve close and the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve open, the A
fluid pressure applied on the front LH brake is reduced by supplying the fluid pressure to the master cylinder
via the ABS IN valve and the cut valve 2. The pressurization for the left brake is controlled separately from
the right brake.
B
During pressure rear RH brake decreased
• Since the suction valve 2 and the ABS OUT valve close and the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve open, the
fluid pressure applied on the rear RH brake is reduced by supplying the fluid pressure to the master cylinder
via the ABS IN valve and the cut valve 2. The pressurization for the right brake is controlled separately from C
the left brake.
During pressure rear LH brake decreased D
• Since the suction valve 1 and the ABS OUT valve close and the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve open, the
fluid pressure applied on the rear LH brake is reduced by supplying the fluid pressure to the master cylinder
via the ABS IN valve and the cut valve 1. The pressurization for the left brake is controlled separately from
the right brake. E
Component Parts and Function

Component parts Function

BRC

• Pressure the brake fluid and send.

Pump
• Returns the brake fluid reserved in reservoir to master cylinder by reducing pressure.
G
Motor Activates the pump according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Cut valve 1
Shuts off the ordinary brake line from master cylinder.
Cut valve 2
H
Suction valve 1
Supplies the brake fluid from master cylinder to the pump.
Suction valve 2
ABS IN valve Switches the fluid pressure line to increase or hold according.
I
ABS OUT valve Switches the fluid pressure line to increase, hold or decrease according.
Returns the brake fluid from each brake to master cylinder by bypassing orifice of each valve when
return check valve
brake is released. J
Temporarily reserves the brake fluid drained from each brake, so that pressure efficiently decreases
Reservoir
when decreasing pressure of each brake.
Pressure sensor Detects the brake fluid pressure and transmits signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). K
VALVE OPERATION (ABS FUNCTION)
Each valve is operated and fluid pressure of brake is controlled.
L

BRC-35
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
When Brake Pedal is Applied

JSFIA1738GB

Component parts Not activated When pressure increases

During pressure front RH brake increases

• When the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the front RH brake from the
master cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS OUT
valve is closed.
During pressure front LH brake increases
• When the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the front LH brake from the mas-
ter cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS OUT
valve is closed.
During pressure rear RH brake increases
• When the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the rear RH brake from the mas-
ter cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS OUT
valve is closed.
During pressure rear LH brake increases
• When the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the rear LH brake from the mas-
ter cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS OUT
valve is closed.

BRC-36
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
When ABS Function is in Operation (During Pressure Increases)
A

BRC

H
JSFIA1738GB

Component parts Not activated When pressure increases

Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open) I
Cut valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
Suction valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
J
Suction valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close) K
Each brake (fluid pressure) — Pressure increases

L
During pressure front RH brake increases
• Brake fluid is supplied to the front RH brake from the master cylinder through the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN
valve. Since the suction valve 1 and the ABS OUT valve is closed, the fluid does not flow into the reservoir. M
The amount of brake fluid supplied to the front RH brake from the master cylinder is controlled according to
time that the ABS IN valve is not energized (time that the ABS IN valve is open).
During pressure front LH brake increases N
• Brake fluid is supplied to the front LH brake from the master cylinder through the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN
valve. Since the suction valve 2 and the ABS OUT valve is closed, the fluid does not flow into the reservoir.
The amount of brake fluid supplied to the front LH brake from the master cylinder is controlled according to
O
time that the ABS IN valve is not energized (time that the ABS IN valve is open).
During pressure rear RH brake increases
• Brake fluid is supplied to the rear RH brake from the master cylinder through the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN P
valve. Since the suction valve 2 and the ABS OUT valve is closed, the fluid does not flow into the reservoir.
The amount of brake fluid supplied to the rear RH brake from the master cylinder is controlled according to
time that the ABS IN valve is not energized (time that the ABS IN valve is open).
During pressure rear LH brake increases
• Brake fluid is supplied to the rear LH brake from the master cylinder through the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN
valve. Since the suction valve 1 and the ABS OUT valve is closed, the fluid does not flow into the reservoir.

BRC-37
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
The amount of brake fluid supplied to the rear LH brake from the master cylinder is controlled according to
time that the ABS IN valve is not energized (time that the ABS IN valve is open).
When ABS Function is Operating (During Pressure Holds)

JSFIA1739GB

Component parts Not activated When pressure holds

Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
Cut valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
Suction valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Suction valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Each brake (fluid pressure) — Pressure holds

During pressure front RH brake holds

• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the front RH brake, master cylinder, and reser-
voir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front RH brake.
During pressure front LH brake holds
• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the front LH brake, master cylinder, and reser-
voir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front LH brake.
During pressure rear RH brake holds
• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the rear RH brake, master cylinder, and reser-
voir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear RH brake.
During pressure rear LH brake holds
• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the rear LH brake, master cylinder, and reser-
voir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear LH brake.

BRC-38
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
When ABS Function is in Operation (During Pressure Decreases)
A

BRC

H
JSFIA1740GB

Component parts Not activated When pressure decreases

Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open) I
Cut valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
Suction valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
J
Suction valve 2 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is supplied (open) K
Each brake (fluid pressure) — Pressure decreases

During pressure front RH brake decreased L

• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the front RH
brake is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when sent to
the master cylinder by the pump.
M
During pressure front LH brake decreased
• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the front LH
brake is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when sent to N
the master cylinder by the pump.
During pressure rear RH brake decreased
• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the rear RH O
brake is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when sent to
the master cylinder by the pump.
During pressure rear LH brake decreased P
• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the rear LH
brake is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when sent to
the master cylinder by the pump.

BRC-39
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
When Brake Release

JSFIA1741GB

Component pars Not activated When pressure decrease

During pressure front RH brake release

• Brake fluid is supplied to the front RH brake through the return check valve of the ABS IN valve and the cut
valve 1, and returns to the master cylinder.
During pressure front LH brake release
• Brake fluid is supplied to the front LH brake through the return check valve of the ABS IN valve and the cut
valve 2, and returns to the master cylinder.
During pressure rear RH brake release
• Brake fluid is supplied to the rear RH brake through the return check valve of the ABS IN valve and the cut
valve 2, and returns to the master cylinder.
During pressure rear LH brake release
• Brake fluid is supplied to the rear LH brake through the return check valve of the ABS IN valve and the cut
valve 1, and returns to the master cylinder.
Component Parts and Function

Component parts Function

• Pressure the brake fluid and send.
Pump
• Returns the brake fluid reserved in reservoir to master cylinder by reducing pressure.
Motor Activates the pump according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).

BRC-40
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Component parts Function
A
Cut valve 1
Shuts off the ordinary brake line from master cylinder.
Cut valve 2
Suction valve 1
Supplies the brake fluid from master cylinder to the pump. B
Suction valve 2
ABS IN valve Switches the fluid pressure line to increase or hold according.
ABS OUT valve Switches the fluid pressure line to increase, hold or decrease according.
C
Returns the brake fluid from each brake to master cylinder by bypassing orifice of each valve when
return check valve
brake is released.
Temporarily reserves the brake fluid drained from each brake, so that pressure efficiently decreases
Reservoir D
when decreasing pressure of each brake.
Pressure sensor Detects the brake fluid pressure and transmits signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).

CONDITION FOR TURN ON THE WARNING LAMP E

Turns ON when ignition switch turns ON and turns OFF when the system is normal, for bulb check purposes.

Condition (status) ABS warning lamp Brake warning lamp VDC warning lamp BRC
Ignition switch OFF OFF OFF OFF
For approx. 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON ON ON ON
G
Approx. 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when the before
OFF ON OFF
engine starts, system is in normal operation)
After engine starts OFF OFF OFF
H
When parking brake operates (parking brake switch ON) OFF OFF OFF
When brake fluid is less than the specified level (brake fluid level
OFF ON ON
switch ON)
I
VDC function is malfunctioning OFF OFF ON
TCS function is malfunctioning OFF OFF ON
ABS function is malfunctioning ON OFF ON J
EBD function is malfunctioning ON ON ON
Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function is malfunctioning OFF OFF ON
K
Brake assist function is malfunctioning OFF OFF ON
Brake force distribution function is malfunctioning OFF OFF ON
hill start assist function is malfunctioning OFF OFF ON L
* OFF OFF ON
Advanced hill descent control function is malfunctioning
Brake vacuum sensor function is malfunctioning OFF ON OFF
M
VDC function is operating OFF OFF Blinking
TCS function is operating OFF OFF Blinking
ABS function is operating OFF OFF OFF N
EBD function is operating OFF OFF OFF
Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function is operating OFF OFF Blinking
O
Brake assist function is operating OFF OFF OFF
Brake force distribution function is operating OFF OFF OFF
hill start assist function is operating OFF OFF OFF P
Advanced hill descent control function is operating* OFF OFF OFF

*: 4WD models with gasoline engine

CONDITION FOR TURN ON THE INDICATOR LAMP
Turns ON when ignition switch turns ON and turns OFF when the system is normal, for bulb check purposes.

BRC-41
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

hill descent
VDC OFF indi- hill start assist control indica-
Condition (status)
cator lamp indicator lamp
tor lamp*
Ignition switch OFF OFF OFF OFF
For approx. 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON ON ON ON
Approx. 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal
OFF OFF OFF
operation)
After engine starts (when system is in normal operation) OFF OFF OFF
When VDC OFF switch is ON (VDC function and TCS function are OFF) ON OFF OFF
VDC function is malfunctioning OFF OFF OFF
TCS function is malfunctioning OFF OFF OFF
hill start assist function is operating OFF Blinking OFF
hill start assist function is operational (condition is satisfied) OFF ON OFF
hill start assist function is operational (condition is not satisfied) OFF OFF OFF
hill start assist function is malfunctioning OFF OFF OFF

Advanced hill descent control function is operating* OFF OFF ON

Advanced hill descent control function is operational (condition is satisfied)* OFF OFF ON

Advanced hill descent control function is operational (condition is not satisfied)* OFF OFF Blinking

Advanced hill descent control function is malfunctioning* OFF OFF OFF

*: 4WD models with gasoline engine

BRC-42
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010723632

BRC

P
JSFIA2516GB

Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000010735268

VDC FUNCTION, TCS FUNCTION, BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (BLSD) FUNCTION,
BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION, BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION, hill start assist FUNC-
TION AND ADVANCED hill descent control FUNCTION (4WD MODELS WITH GASOLINE ENGINE)
BRC-43
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in system [ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differen-
tial (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced
hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chas-
sis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control module). The vehicle status
becomes the same as models without VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) func-
tion, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent con-
trol function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control
module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control module). However, ABS function and EBD
function are operated normally.
ABS FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp and VDC warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in system
[ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function, ABS
function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function,
hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active
trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis
control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models without VDC function, TCS function, ABS
function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function,
hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active
trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis
control module). However, EBD function is operated normally.
NOTE:
ABS self-diagnosis sound may be heard the same as in the normal condition, because self-diagnosis is per-
formed when ignition switch turns ON and when vehicle initially starts.
EBD FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a mal-
function occurs in system [ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for VDC
function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist
function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD
models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride
control function (control of chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models without
VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function
(4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module).

DTC Fail-safe condition

The following functions are suspended.
C10D7 • Deceleration control (brake control by VDC function) performed by pulling the parking brake switch while driving the
vehicle [10 km/h (6.2 MPH) or more].
C1101 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
C1102
• TCS function
C1103 • ABS function
• EBD function (only when both 2 rear wheels are malfunctioning)
C1104
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1105 • Brake assist function
C1106 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
C1107 • Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
C1108
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)

BRC-44
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
A
C1109 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function B
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1110 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function C
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) D
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function E
• ABS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1111 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function BRC
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) G
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
H
*1
• ABS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1113 • Brake assist function*1 I
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
J
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function K
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
L
C1115 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function M
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
N
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function O
• Brake assist function
C1116 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1 P
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
C1118
• Advanced hill descent control function*1

BRC-45
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
C1120 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
C1121
• TCS function
C1122 • ABS function
• EBD function
C1123
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1124 • Brake assist function
C1125 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
C1126 • Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
C1127
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1130 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1140 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
C1142 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
C1143 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake force distribution function
C1144 • hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)

BRC-46
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
A
C1145 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function*1 B
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function*1
C1146 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function C
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) D
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
E
• ABS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1153 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function BRC
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) G
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function H
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1154 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1 I
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended. J
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function K
C1155 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1 L
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function M
• TCS function
• ABS function*1
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function N
C1160 • Brake assist function*1
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1 O
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
P

BRC-47
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
C1164 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
C1165
• TCS function
C1166 • ABS function
• EBD function
C1167
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
C1170
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
C1197
Electrical vacuum assistance of brake booster is suspended
C1198
C1199 Normal control
C119A Electrical vacuum assistance of brake booster is suspended
The following functions are suspended.
C1B60 • Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
U1000 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
U1002
• TCS function
• ABS function*2
• EBD function*2
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
U1010 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
*1: 4WD models with gasoline engine
*2: When a malfunction detected in CAN communication [between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
and chassis control module].
VDC (ESP) FUNCTION
VDC (ESP) FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010723634

• Side slip or tail slip may occur while driving on a slippery road or intending an urgent evasive driving. VDC
function detects side slip status using each sensor when side slip or tail slip is about to occur and improves
vehicle stability by brake control and engine output control during driving.
• In addition to TCS function, ABS function and EBD function, target side slip amount is calculated according
to steering operation amount from steering angle sensor and brake operation amount from pressure sensor.
By comparing this information with vehicle side slip amount that is calculated from information from yaw rate/
side G sensor and wheel sensor, vehicle driving conditions (conditions of understeer or oversteer) are
judged and vehicle stability is improved by brake force control on all 4 wheels and engine output control.

JSFIA0672GB

• VDC function can be switched to non-operational status (OFF) by operating VDC OFF switch. In this case,
VDC OFF indicator lamp turns ON.

BRC-48
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• Control unit portion automatically improves driving stability by performing brake force control as well as
engine output control, by transmitting drive signal to actuator portion according to difference between target A
side slip amount and vehicle side slip amount.
• VDC warning lamp blinks while VDC function is in operation and indicates to the driver that the function is in
operation.
B
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system diagnosis.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in VDC function, the control is suspended for VDC
function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force dis-
tribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline C
engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (con-
trol of chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models without VDC function, TCS
function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution func- D
tion, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine),
active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of
chassis control module). However, ABS function and EBD function are operated normally. Refer to BRC-43,
"Fail-Safe". E
NOTE:
VDC has the characteristic as described here, This is not the device that helps reckless driving.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM BRC
NOTE:
• 4WD control unit is applied to 4WD models.
• TCM is applied to CVT models. G

N
JSFIA2367GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL O

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

BRC-49
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Combination meter
communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
• VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• N range signal
• P range signal
TCM*1 • R range signal
• Current gear position signal
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Engine speed signal
• Engine status signal
• ECM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
IPDM E/R communication.
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Electric parking brake control module communication.
• Electric parking brake operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
*2 communication.
4WD control unit • 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
*1: CVT models
*2: 4WD models
OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS
VDC Function That Prevents Oversteer Tendency

BRC-50
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• During a cornering, brake force (brake fluid pressure) is applied on front wheel and rear wheel on the outer
side of turn. Moment directing towards the outer side of turn is generated. Oversteer is prevented. A

JPFIC0135GB D

• Changing driving lane on a slippery road, when oversteer tendency is judged large, engine output is con-
trolled as well as brake force (brake fluid pressure) of 4 wheels. Oversteer tendency decreases.
E

BRC

JPFIC0136GB
H
VDC Function That Prevents Tendency
• During a cornering, brake force (brake fluid pressure) is applied on front wheel and rear wheel on the inner
side of turn. Moment directing towards the inner side of turn is generated. Understeer is prevented.
I

JPFIC0137GB
L
• Applying braking during a cornering on a slippery road, when understeer tendency is judged large, engine
output is controlled as well as brake force (brake fluid pressure) of four wheels. Understeer tendency
decreases. M

JPFIC0138GB P
TCS FUNCTION

BRC-51
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
TCS FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010723635

• Wheel spin status of drive wheel is detected by wheel sensor of 4

wheels. Engine output and transmission shift status is controlled
so that slip rate of drive wheels is in appropriate level. When wheel
spin occurs on drive wheel, ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) perform brake force control of LH and RH drive wheels (apply
brake force by increasing brake fluid pressure of drive wheel) and
decrease engine torque by engine torque control. Wheel spin
amount decreases. Engine torque is controlled to appropriate
level.
• TCS function can be switched to non-operational status (OFF) by
operating VDC OFF switch. In this case, VDC OFF indicator lamp
turns ON.
• VDC warning lamp blinks while TCS function is in operation and
indicates to the driver that the function is in operation.
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system diagnosis.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in TCS
function, the control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function,
brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function,
brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced
hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine),
active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module). The
vehicle status becomes the same as models without VDC function,
JSFIA0972GB
TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control func-
tion (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module). However, ABS function and EBD function are
operated normally. Refer to BRC-43, "Fail-Safe".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
• 4WD control unit is applied to 4WD models.
• TCM is applied to CVT models.

JSFIA2367GB

BRC-52
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL
Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table. A

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN B
communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN C
Combination meter
communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
D
• VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. E
• N range signal
• P range signal
TCM*1 • R range signal
• Current gear position signal
BRC
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN G
communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Engine speed signal
• Engine status signal H
• ECM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
IPDM E/R communication. I
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. J
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal K
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Electric parking brake control module communication.
• Electric parking brake operation signal L
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
4WD control unit*2 • 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal M
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal N
*1: CVT models
*2: 4WD models
ABS FUNCTION O

ABS FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010723636

P
• By preventing wheel lock through brake force (brake fluid pressure) control that is electronically controlled by
detecting wheel speed during braking, stability during emergency braking is improved so that obstacles can
be easily bypassed by steering operation.
• During braking, control units calculates wheel speed and pseudo-vehicle speed, and transmits pressure
increase, hold or decrease signals to actuator portion according to wheel slip status.

BRC-53
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• The following effects are obtained by preventing wheel lock during
braking.
- Vehicle tail slip is prevented during braking when driving straight.
- Understeer and oversteer tendencies are moderated during brak-
ing driving on a corner.
- Obstacles may be easily bypassed by steering operation during
braking.
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system diagnosis.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in ABS
function, the control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function,
ABS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist
function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with
gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis
control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis
control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models
without VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, brake limited
slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force
distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent
control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace
control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride
control function (control of chassis control module). However, EBD
function is operated normally. Refer to BRC-43, "Fail-Safe".
JPFIC0140GB
NOTE:

• ABS function has the characteristic as described here, This is not the device that helps reckless driving.
• To stop vehicle efficiently, ABS does not operate and ordinary brake operates at low speed [approx. 10 km/h
(6 MPH) or less, but differs subject to road conditions).
• Self-diagnosis is performed immediately after when engine starts and when vehicle initially is driven [by vehi-
cle speed approx. 15 km/h (9 MPH)]. Motor sounds are generated during self-diagnosis. In addition, brake
pedal may be felt heavy when depressing brake pedal lightly. These symptoms are not malfunctions.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSFIA2368GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

BRC-54
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

Component parts Signal description A

Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
Combination meter
• VDC warning lamp signal
B
• ABS warning lamp signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
BCM communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal C

EBD FUNCTION
EBD FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010723637
D

• By preventing rear wheel slip increase through rear wheel brake force (brake fluid pressure) control that is
electronically controlled when slight skip on front and rear wheels are detected during braking, stability dur- E
ing braking is improved.
• EBD function is expanded and developed from conventional ABS function and corrects rear wheel brake
force to appropriate level by electronic control according to load weight (number of passengers).
BRC

JPFIC0142GB
I
• During braking, control unit portion compares slight slip on front
and rear wheels by wheel speed sensor signal, transmits drive sig-
nal to actuator portion when rear wheel slip exceeds front wheel J
slip for the specified value or more, and controls rear wheel brake
force (brake fluid pressure) so that increase of rear wheel slip is
prevented and slips on front wheel and rear wheel are nearly
K
equalized. ABS control is applied when slip on each wheel
increases and wheel speed is the threshold value of ABS control or
less.
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system diagnosis. L
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in EBD
function, the control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function,
ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) M
function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill
start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD
models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control
of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control N
of chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same
as models without VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD
function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist O
function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function,
advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline
engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control
module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control JPFIC0143GB
P
module). Refer to BRC-43, "Fail-Safe".

BRC-55
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSFIA2368GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

Component parts Signal description

Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
Combination meter • VDC warning lamp signal
• ABS warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
BCM communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal

BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (BLSD) FUNCTION

BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (BLSD) FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000010723638

• LH and RH driving wheel spin is always monitored. If necessary, appropriate brake force is independently
applied to LH or RH driving wheel so that one-sided wheel spin is avoided and traction is maintained. Mainly
starting ability is improved.
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function operates while VDC function is in non-operational status (OFF)
by VDC OFF switch.
• VDC warning lamp blinking while brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function is in operation and indicates
to the driver that the function is in operation.
• Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and the operation noises occur, when brake limited slip differen-
tial (BLSD) function operates. This is not a malfunction because it is caused by brake limited slip differential
(BLSD) function that is normally operated.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function,
the control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function,
brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control
function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
and active ride control function (control of chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as
models without VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist func-

BRC-56
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
tion, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD
models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride A
control function (control of chassis control module). However, ABS function and EBD function are operated
normally. Refer to BRC-43, "Fail-Safe".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
NOTE:
• 4WD control unit is applied to 4WD models.
• TCM is applied to CVT models. C

BRC

J
JSFIA2367GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

K
Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

Component parts Signal description

L
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal M
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Combination meter
communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal N
• VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN O
communication.
• N range signal
• P range signal
TCM*1 • R range signal P
• Current gear position signal
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal

BRC-57
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Component parts Signal description
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Engine speed signal
• Engine status signal
• ECM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
IPDM E/R communication.
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Electric parking brake control module communication.
• Electric parking brake operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
*2 communication.
4WD control unit • 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
*1: CVT models
*2: 4WD models
BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION
BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010723639

• When the driver brakes hard in an emergency, the stopping distance is reduced by increasing brake fluid
pressure.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in brake assist function, the control is suspended
for VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake
force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with
gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control
function (control of chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models without VDC
function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force dis-
tribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline
engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (con-
trol of chassis control module). However, ABS function and EBD function are operated normally. Refer to
BRC-43, "Fail-Safe".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
• 4WD control unit is applied to 4WD models.

BRC-58
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• TCM is applied to CVT models.
A

BRC

H
JSFIA2367GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table. I

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN J
communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via K
Combination meter
CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
• VDC warning lamp signal L
• Brake warning lamp signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. M
• N range signal
• P range signal
TCM*1 • R range signal
• Current gear position signal N
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN O
communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Engine speed signal
• Engine status signal P
• ECM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
IPDM E/R communication.
• Ignition switch ON signal

BRC-59
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Component parts Signal description
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Electric parking brake control module communication.
• Electric parking brake operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
4WD control unit*2 • 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
*1: CVT models
*2: 4WD models
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010723640

• Brake force distribution function helps provide a more stable and

secure feeling.

JPFIC0171GB

• During cornering, when brake operation is performed brake fluid

pressure of each wheel is controlled based on steering operation
amount by the driver and vehicle cornering status amount detected
by each sensor.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in brake
force distribution function, the control is suspended for VDC func-
tion, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function,
brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start
assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD mod-
els with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of
chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of
JPFIC0172GB
chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as
models without VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist func-
tion, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD
models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride
control function (control of chassis control module). However ABS function and EBD function are operated
normally. Refer to BRC-43, "Fail-Safe".
NOTE:
Brake force distribution function may not always be operates in all driving conditions.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
• 4WD control unit is applied to 4WD models.

BRC-60
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• TCM is applied to CVT models.
A

BRC

H
JSFIA2369GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table. I

Component parts Signal description

BRC-61
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Component parts Signal description
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
Chassis control module
• Active trace control signal
• Active ride control signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Electric parking brake control module communication.
• Electric parking brake operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
4WD control unit*2 • 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
*1: CVT models
*2: 4WD models
hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT) FUNCTION
hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT) FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000010723641

• This function maintains brake fluid pressure so that the vehicle does not move backwards even if brake
pedal is released to depress accelerator pedal to start the vehicle while it is stopped on an uphill slope by
depressing brake pedal.
• This function operates when the vehicle is in stop status (engine running) on an uphill slope of slope ratio
10% or more, selector lever is in the position other than P or N, brake pedal is depressed and accelerator
pedal is not depressed. (CVT models)
• This function operates when the vehicle is in stop status (engine running) on an uphill slope of slope ratio
10% or more, shift lever is in the position other than neutral position, brake pedal is depressed and acceler-
ator pedal is not depressed. (M/T models)
• hill start assist indicator lamp turn ON when hill start assist function is satisfied to operational conditions.
• hill start assist indicator lamp blinks when hill start assist function is operation conditions.
• hill start assist function is only for the start aid. It maintains the brake fluid pressure for approx. 2 seconds
after releasing the brake pedal, and then decreases the pressure gradually. If the vehicle can start by the
accelerator operation, the brake is released automatically and a smooth start can be performed.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in hill start assist function, does not turn ON or
blink the hill start assist indicator lamp on the combination meter, the control is suspended for VDC function,
TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution
function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine),
active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of
chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models without VDC function, TCS func-
tion, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill
start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace
control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control
module). However, ABS function and EBD function are operated normally. Refer to BRC-43, "Fail-Safe".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
• 4WD control unit is applied to 4WD models.

BRC-62
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• TCM is applied to CVT models.
A

BRC

H
JSFIA2369GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table. I

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN J
communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via K
CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
Combination meter
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
• VDC warning lamp signal L
• Brake warning lamp signal
• hill start assist indicator lamp signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via
chassis control module via CAN communication.
M
• hill start assist display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. N
• N range signal
• P range signal
TCM*1 • R range signal
• Current gear position signal O
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN P
communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Engine speed signal
• Engine status signal
• ECM malfunction signal

BRC-63
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Component parts Signal description
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
IPDM E/R communication.
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via
CAN communication.
Chassis control module • hill start assist display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to combination meter via CAN communication.
• hill start assist display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Electric parking brake control module communication.
• Electric parking brake operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
4WD control unit*2 • 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
*1: CVT models
*2: 4WD models
ADVANCED hill descent control (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) FUNCTION
ADVANCED hill descent control (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) FUNCTION : System
Description INFOID:0000000010723642

• Advanced hill descent control function is applied to 4WD models with gasoline engine.
• At a steep descent, vehicle speed is normally controlled by the driver′s brake operation. On the other hand,
advanced hill descent control function automatically reduces and maintains vehicle speed.
• Advanced hill descent control function starts when all of the following conditions are satisfied: hill descent
control switch is ON and, vehicle speed is 25 km/h (15.5 MPH) or less, the inclination is 10% or more and
selector lever is in the other than P and N position.
• Advanced hill descent control function is cancelled when depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal.
(Advanced hill descent control function restarts when releasing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal.)
NOTE:
• While driving in the forward direction, the vehicle decelerates when the brake pedal is depressed and
maintains the speed [15 km/h (9.3 MPH) or less] achieved at a brake pedal release.
• While driving in the forward direction, the vehicle accelerates when the accelerator pedal is depressed and
maintains a speed [15 km/h (9.3 MPH) or less] achieved at an accelerator pedal release.
• As for M/T models, although the hill descent control indicator lamp blinks and advanced hill descent control
function becomes deactivated when engine coolant water temperature is low, this is normal. (advanced hill
descent control function starts when engine coolant water temperature rises and hill descent control indica-
tor lamp turns ON.)
• hill descent control switch is ON and turns ON when advanced hill descent control function are operation or
satisfied to operational conditions.
• The Stop lamp of the rear combination lamp stays ON during the operation of advanced hill descent control
function.
• Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and the operation noises occur, when advanced hill descent con-
trol function operates. This is not a malfunction because it is caused by advanced hill descent control func-
tion that is normally operated.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in advanced hill descent control function, the oper-
ation of the hill descent control switch does not turn ON or blink the hill descent control indicator lamp on the
combination meter, and the control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differen-
tial (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function,
BRC-64
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
advanced hill descent control function, active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as A
models without VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist func-
tion, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function, active
trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis
B
control module). However, ABS function and EBD function are operated normally. Refer to BRC-43, "Fail-
Safe".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM C
NOTE:
TCM is applied to CVT models.
D

BRC

JSFIA2370GB K
INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL
Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.
L

BRC-65
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Parking brake switch signal
• Brake fluid level switch signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
Combination meter
• VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
• VDC warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal
• hill descent control indicator lamp signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via chas-
sis control module via CAN communication.
• hill descent control display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• N range signal
• P range signal
TCM* • R range signal
• Current gear position signal
• Shift position signal
• TCM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Engine speed signal
• Engine status signal
• ECM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
IPDM E/R communication.
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• Cranking signal
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
Chassis control module • hill descent control display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to combination meter via CAN communication.
• hill descent control display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
4WD control unit
• 4WD malfunction signal
• 4WD operation signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Steering angle sensor communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
*: CVT models
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST

BRC-66
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator Lamp INFOID:0000000010723643

Name Design Layout/Function

For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
B
ABS warning lamp For function: Refer to MWI-24, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : ABS Warning Lamp".
C
For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
VDC warning lamp For function: Refer to MWI-61, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : VDC (ESP) Warning Lamp".
D
For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
Brake warning lamp For function: Refer to MWI-26, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : Brake Warning Lamp (Red)".
E
For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
VDC OFF indicator lamp For function: Refer to MWI-60, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : VDC (ESP) OFF Indicator Lamp". BRC
For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
hill start assist indicator lamp For function: Refer to MWI-44, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : hill start assist (Uphill Start Support) Indicator lamp". G
For layout: Refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
hill descent control indicator
lamp* For function: Refer to MWI-42, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : hill descent control (Downhill Drive Support) Indicator lamp". H
*: 4WD models with gasoline engine
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER)
I
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Chassis Control Display
INFOID:0000000010723644

J
DESIGN/PURPOSE
• hill start assist function information is displayed on the information display.
• Advanced hill descent control function information is displayed on the information display. (4WD models with
K
gasoline engine)
System Information
L

BRC-67
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
hill start assist function
Design Description

hill start assist function operation condition is not satisfied

JSFIA2371ZZ

• Not blinking (tire): hill start assist function operation condition is satisfied (not
operating)
• Blinking (tire): hill start assist function is operating

JSFIA2372ZZ

Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
Design Description

Advanced hill descent control function is not operating

JSFIA2371ZZ

Advanced hill descent control function is operating

JSFIA2373ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

Not applicable
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:

BRC-68
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
hill descent control display request signal is 4WD models
A

JSFIA2493GB

SIGNAL PATH D

hill start assist Function

• The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits a hill start assist display request signal to the E
chassis control module via CAN communication when operating status in the hill assist function.
• The chassis control module receiving a hill start assist display request signal, and transmits a hill start assist
display request signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• The combination meter shows the chassis control display on the information display, according to the signal. BRC
Advanced hill descent control Function (4WD Models with Gasoline Engine)
• The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits a hill descent control display request signal to the
chassis control module via CAN communication when operating status in the advanced hill descent control G
function.
• The chassis control module receiving a hill descent control display request signal, and transmits a hill
descent control display request signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. H
• The combination meter shows the chassis control display on the information display, according to the signal.

BRC-69
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010723645

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes as follows.

Mode Function description

ECU identification Parts number of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) can be read.
Self Diagnostic Result Self-diagnostic results and freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*
Date Monitor Input/Output data in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT drives some actuators apart from the ABS actuator and elec-
Active Test
tric unit (control unit) and also shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Work support Components can be quickly and accurately adjusted.
Re/programming, Configura- • Read and save the vehicle specification (TYPE ID).
tion • Write the vehicle specification (TYPE ID) when replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
*: The following diagnosis information is erased by erasing
• DTC
• Freeze frame data (FFD)
ECU IDENTIFICATION
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
When “CRNT” is displayed on self-diagnosis result
• The system is presently malfunctioning.
When “PAST” is displayed on self-diagnosis result
• System malfunction in the past is detected, but the system is presently normal.
Freeze frame data (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT.

Item name Display Item

The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after the DTC is detected is displayed.
• When “0” is displayed: It indicates that the system is presently malfunctioning.
• When except “0” is displayed: It indicates that system malfunction in the past is detected, but the system is pres-
IGN counter ently normal.
(0 – 39) NOTE:
Each time when ignition switch is turned OFF to ON, numerical number increases in 1→2→3...38→39. When
the operation number of times exceeds 39, the number do not increase and “39” is displayed until self diagnosis
is erased.

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
×: Applicable
Monitor item selection
Item (Unit) Note
INPUT SIGNALS MAIN ITEMS
FR LH SENSOR Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor is dis-
× ×
(km/h) played.
FR RH SENSOR Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor is dis-
× ×
(km/h) played.

BRC-70
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Monitor item selection
Item (Unit) Note A
INPUT SIGNALS MAIN ITEMS
RR LH SENSOR Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor is dis-
× ×
(km/h) played.
B
RR RH SENSOR Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor is dis-
× ×
(km/h) played.
DECEL G-SEN
× × Decel G detected by decel G sensor is displayed. C
(G)

FR RH IN SOL*1 ×
Operation status of front RH wheel ABS IN valve is dis-
(On/Off) played.
D
FR RH OUT SOL*1 ×
Operation status of front RH wheel ABS OUT valve is dis-
(On/Off) played.

FR LH IN SOL*1 ×
Operation status of front LH wheel ABS IN valve is dis- E
(On/Off) played.

FR LH OUT SOL*1 ×
Operation status of front LH wheel ABS OUT valve is dis-
(On/Off) played. BRC
*1 Operation status of rear RH wheel ABS IN valve is dis-
RR RH IN SOL ×
(On/Off) played.

RR RH OUT SOL*1 Operation status of rear RH wheel ABS OUT valve is dis- G
×
(On/Off) played.

RR LH IN SOL*1 ×
Operation status of rear LH wheel ABS IN valve is dis-
(On/Off) played. H

RR LH OUT SOL*1 ×
Operation status of rear LH wheel ABS OUT valve is dis-
(On/Off) played.
I
EBD WARN LAMP
(On/Off) Brake warning lamp ON/OFF status is displayed.*2

STOP LAMP SW
× × Stop lamp switch signal input status is displayed. J
(On/Off)
MOTOR RELAY
× ABS motor and motor relay status is displayed.
(On/Off)
K
ACTUATOR RLY*1 × ABS actuator relay status is displayed.
(On/Off)
ABS WARN LAMP
× ABS warning lamp ON/OFF status is displayed.*2 L
(On/Off)
OFF LAMP
× VDC OFF indicator lamp ON/OFF status is displayed.*2
(On/Off)
M
SLIP/VDC LAMP
× VDC warning lamp ON/OFF status is displayed.*2
(On/Off)
BATTERY VOLT Voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control
× × N
(V) unit) is displayed.
Current gear position judged from current gear position sig-
GEAR*3 × ×
nal is displayed.
Current shift position judged from shift position signal is dis-
O
SELECT LVR POSI*3 × ×
played.
YAW RATE SEN Yaw rate detected by yaw rate/side/decel G sensor is dis-
× × P
(d/s) played.
R range signal input status judged from R range signal is
R POSI SIG*3 displayed.
4WD MODE MON
× Drive status is displayed.
(2WD/4WD)
N range signal input status judged from N range signal is
N POSI SIG*3 displayed.

BRC-71
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Monitor item selection
Item (Unit) Note
INPUT SIGNALS MAIN ITEMS
P range signal input status judged from P range signal is dis-
P POSI SIG*3 played.
ACCEL POS SIG
× Displays the Accelerator pedal position.
(%)
SIDE G-SENSOR Side G detected by yaw rate/side/decel G sensor is dis-
×
(m/s2) played.
STR ANGLE SIG Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor is dis-
×
(deg) played.
PRESS SENSOR Brake fluid pressure detected by pressure sensor is dis-
×
(bar) played.
EBD SIG
Operation status of EBD function is displayed.
(On/Off)
ABS SIG
Operation status of ABS function is displayed.
(On/Off)
TCS SIG
Operation status of TCS function is displayed.
(On/Off)
VDC SIG
Operation status of VDC function is displayed.
(On/Off)
EBD FAIL SIG
Fail-safe signal status of EBD function is displayed.
(On/Off)
ABS FAIL SIG
Fail-safe signal status of ABS function is displayed.
(On/Off)
TCS FAIL SIG
Fail-safe signal status of TCS function is displayed.
(On/Off)
VDC FAIL SIG
Fail-safe signal status of VDC function is displayed.
(On/Off)
CRANKING SIG
Cranking status is displayed.
(On/Off)
FLUID LEV SW
× Brake fluid level signal input status is displayed.
(On/Off)
PARK BRAKE SW
Parking brake switch signal input status is displayed.
(On/Off)

USV[FL-RR]*1 Operation status of cut valve 1 is displayed.

(On/Off)

USV[FR-RL]*1 Operation status of cut valve 2 is displayed.

(On/Off)

HSV[FL-RR]*1 Operation status of suction valve 1 is displayed.

(On/Off)

HSV[FR-RL]*1 Operation status of suction valve 2 is displayed.

(On/Off)

V/ROUTPUT*1 ABS actuator relay status is displayed.

(On/Off)
M/R OUTPUT
ABS motor and motor relay status is displayed.
(On/Off)
ENGINE RPM Engine speed status is displayed.
STP ON RLY
Operation status of stop lamp ON relay is displayed.
(On/Off)

DDS SW*4 Operation status of hill descent control switch is displayed.

(On/Off)

BRC-72
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Monitor item selection
Item (Unit) Note A
INPUT SIGNALS MAIN ITEMS

DDS SIG*4 Operation status of advanced hill descent control function is

(On/Off) displayed.
B
USS SIG*5 Operation status of hill start assist function is displayed.
(On/Off)

1ST GEAR SIG*6 1st range status is displayed.

C
(On/Off)
OFF SW
× × VDC OFF switch status is displayed.
(On/Off) D
*1: Display occasionally changes On/Off for a moment after ignition switch is turned ON. This is operation for
checking purposes and is not a malfunction.
*2: Refer to BRC-67, "WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator Lamp" for ON/OFF con- E
ditions of each warning lamp and indicator lamp.
*3: CVT models
*4: “DDS” means “hill descent control” or “downhill drive support”.
*5: “USS” means “hill start assist” or “Uphill Start Support”. BRC
*6: M/T models
ACTIVE TEST
G
The active test is used to determine and identify details of a malfunction, based on self-diagnosis test results
and data obtained in the DATA MONITOR. In response to instructions from CONSULT, instead of those from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) on the vehicle, a drive signal is sent to the actuator to check its
operation. H
CAUTION:
• Never perform ACTIVE TEST while driving the vehicle.
• Always bleed air from brake system before active test. I
• Never perform active test when system is malfunctioning.
NOTE:
• When active test is performed while depressing the pedal, the pedal depressing stroke may change. This is
not a malfunction. J
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approx. 10 seconds after operation start.
• When performing active test again after “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, select “BACK”.
• ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp may turn ON during active test. This is not a K
malfunction.
ABS In Valve and ABS Out Valve
When “Up”, “Keep” or “Down” is selected on display screen, the following items are displayed when system is L
normal.

Display
Test item Display item M
Up Keep Down
FR RH IN SOL Off On On
FR RH OUT SOL Off Off On* N
USV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
FR RH SOL
USV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
O
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
FR LH IN SOL Off Off On P
FR LH OUT SOL Off Off *
On
USV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
FR LH SOL
USV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off Off Off

BRC-73
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Display
Test item Display item
Up Keep Down
RR RH IN SOL Off On On
RR RH OUT SOL Off Off On*
USV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
RR RH SOL
USV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
RR LH IN SOL Off On On
RR LH OUT SOL Off Off On*
USV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
RR LH SOL
USV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
*: Immediately after being selected, status is “On”. Status changes to “Off” after approx. 2 seconds.
ABS In Valve (ACT), ABS Out Valve (ACT)
When “Up”, “ACT UP” or “ACT KEEP” is selected on display screen, the following items are displayed when
system is normal.

Display
Test item Display item
Up ACT KEEP ACT UP
FR RH IN SOL Off Off Off
FR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off

FR RH ABS SOLE- USV[FL-RR] Off Off Off

NOID(ACT) USV[FR-RL] Off On On
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
HSV[FL-RL] Off On* Off
FR LH IN SOL Off Off Off
FR LH OUT SOL Off Off Off

FR LH ABS SOLE- USV[FL-RR] Off On On

NOID(ACT) USV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
HSV[FL-RR] Off On* Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
RR RH IN SOL Off Off Off
RR RH OUT SOL Off Off Off

RR RH ABS SOLE- USV[FL-RR] Off On On

NOID(ACT) USV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
HSV[FL-RR] Off On* Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off Off Off
RR LH IN SOL Off Off Off
RR LH OUT SOL Off Off Off

RR LH ABS SOLE- USV[FL-RR] Off Off Off

NOID(ACT) USV[FR-RL] Off On On
HSV[FL-RR] Off Off Off
HSV[FR-RL] Off On* Off

BRC-74
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
*: Immediately after being selected, status is “On”. Status changes to “Off” after approx. 2 seconds.
A
ABS MOTOR
When “ON” or “OFF” is selected on display screen, the following items are displayed when system is normal.

Display B
Test item Display item
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off
C
ACTUATOR RLY On On
ABS MOTOR
V/R OUTPUT On Off
M/R OUTPUT On Off D

STOP LAMP ON RELAY

When “ON” or “OFF” is selected on display screen, the following items are displayed when system is normal. E

Display
Test item
On Off
BRC
STOP ON RLY On Off

WORK SUPPORT
G
Item Description
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT Perform neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor.
H
DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION Perform decel G sensor calibration.

RE/PROGRAMMING, CONFIGURATION
Configuration includes the following functions. I

Function Description
• Allows the reading of vehicle specification (Type ID) written in ABS ac- J
Before replacing ECU tuator and electric unit (control unit).
Read/Write Configuration • Allows the reading of vehicle specification (Type ID) store in CONSULT.
Allows the writing of vehicle information (Type ID) stored in CONSULT K
After replacing ECU
into the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Allows the writing of vehicle specification (Type ID) into the ABS actuator
Manual Configuration
and electric unit (control unit) by hand. L

BRC-75
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010723646

CONSULT DATA MONITOR STANDARD VALUE

NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item Condition Reference valve in normal operation

Vehicle stopped 0.00 km/h (MPH)
FR LH SENSOR Nearly matches the speedometer dis-
When driving*1 play (within ±10%)
Vehicle stopped 0.00 km/h (MPH)
FR RH SENSOR Nearly matches the speedometer dis-
When driving*1 play (within ±10%)
Vehicle stopped 0.00 km/h (MPH)
RR LH SENSOR Nearly matches the speedometer dis-
When driving*1 play (within ±10%)
Vehicle stopped 0.00 km/h (MPH)
RR RH SENSOR Nearly matches the speedometer dis-
When driving*1 play (within ±10%)
When stopped Approx. 0 G
DECEL G-SEN During acceleration Positive value
During deceleration Negative value
When front RH ABS IN valve is active On
FR RH IN SOL*2
When front RH ABS IN valve is not activated Off
When front RH ABS OUT valve is active On
FR RH OUT SOL*2
When front RH ABS OUT valve is not activated Off
When front LH ABS IN valve is active On
FR LH IN SOL*2
When front LH ABS IN valve is not activated Off
When front LH ABS OUT valve is active On
FR LH OUT SOL*2
When front LH ABS OUT valve is not activated Off
When rear RH ABS IN valve is active On
RR RH IN SOL*2
When rear RH ABS IN valve is not activated Off
When rear RH ABS OUT valve is active On
RR RH OUT SOL*2
When rear RH ABS OUT valve is not activated Off
When rear LH ABS IN valve is active On
RR LH IN SOL*2
When rear LH ABS IN valve is not activated Off
When rear LH ABS OUT valve is active On
RR LH OUT SOL*2
When rear LH ABS OUT valve is not activated Off

Brake warning lamp is ON*3 On

EBD WARN LAMP
Brake warning lamp is OFF*3 Off
Brake pedal depressed On
STOP LAMP SW
Brake pedal not depressed Off
When ABS motor and motor relay are active On
MOTOR RELAY
When ABS motor and motor relay are not activated Off

BRC-76
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Monitor item Condition Reference valve in normal operation
A
When ABS actuator relay is active On
ACTUATOR RLY*2 When ABS actuator relay is not activated (in fail-
Off
safe mode)
B
ABS warning lamp is ON*3 On
ABS WARN LAMP
ABS warning lamp is OFF*3 Off
C
VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON*3 On
OFF LAMP
VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF*3 Off

VDC warning lamp is ON*3 On D

SLIP/VDC LAMP
VDC warning lamp is OFF*3 Off
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON 10 – 16 V
E
GEAR*4 When driving Depending on shift status
SLCT LVR POSI When selector lever operating Selector lever position is displayed
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 d/s BRC
YAW RATE SEN Turning right Negative value
Turning left Positive value
G
When selector lever is in the R position On
R POSI SIG*4
When selector lever is in the other than R position Off
When 2WD 2WD H
4WD MODE MON
When 4WD 4WD
When selector lever is in the N position On
N POSI SIG*4 I
When selector lever is in the other than N position Off
When selector lever is in the P position On
P POSI SIG*4
When selector lever is in the other than P position Off J
Never depress accelerator pedal
0%
(Ignition switch ON)
ACCEL POS SIG
Depress accelerator pedal K
0 – 100%
(Ignition switch ON)
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 m/s2
SIDE G-SENSOR
L
Turning right Negative value
Turning left Positive value
When driving straight ±2.5° M
STR ANGLE SIG When steering wheel is steered to RH by 90° Approx. +90°
When steering wheel is steered to LH by 90° Approx. −90°
Brake pedal not depressed Approx. 0 bar N
PRESS SENSOR
Brake pedal depressed (−40) – 300 bar
When EBD function is active On
EBD SIGNAL O
When EBD function is not activated Off
When ABS function is active On
ABS SIGNAL
When ABS function is not activated Off P
When TCS function is active On
TCS SIGNAL
When TCS function is not activated Off
When VDC function is active On
VDC SIGNAL
When VDC function is not activated Off

BRC-77
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Monitor item Condition Reference valve in normal operation
When EBD function is fail-safe On
EBD FAIL SIG
When EBD function is normal Off
When ABS function is fail-safe On
ABS FAIL SIG
When ABS function is normal Off
When TCS function is fail-safe On
TCS FAIL SIG
When TCS function is normal Off
When VDC function is fail-safe On
VDC FAIL SIG
When VDC function is normal Off
When cranking On
CRANKING SIG
When other than cranking Off
When brake fluid level switch is ON (brake fluid level
On
FLUID LEV SW is less than the specified level)
When brake fluid level switch is OFF Off
When parking brake is active On
PARK BRAKE SW
When parking brake is released Off
When cut valve 1 is active On
USV[FL-RR]
When cut valve 1 is not activated Off
When cut valve 2 is active On
USV[FR-RL]
When cut valve 2 is not activated Off
When suction valve 1 is active On
HSV[FL-RR]
When suction valve is not activated Off
When suction valve 2 is active On
HSV[FR-RL]
When suction valve is not activated Off
When ABS actuator relay is active On
V/R OUTPUT
When ABS actuator relay is not activated Off
When ABS motor and motor relay are active On
M/R OUTPUT
When ABS motor and motor relay are not activated Off
Engine stopped 0 tr/min
ENGINE RPM
Engine running Almost same reading as tachometer
When stop lamp ON relay is active On
STP ON RLY
When stop lamp ON relay is not activated Off
When hill descent control switch is ON On
DDS SW*5
When hill descent control switch is OFF Off
When advanced hill descent control function is ac-
On
tive
DDS SIG*5
When advanced hill descent control function is not
Off
activated
When hill start assist function is active On
USS SIG*6
When hill start assist function is not activated Off
When shifter lever is in the 1st gear position On
1ST GEAR SIG*7 When shifter lever is in the other than 1st gear posi-
Off
tion
When VDC OFF switch is ON On
OFF SW
When VDC OFF switch is OFF Off
*1: Confirm tire pressure is standard value.

BRC-78
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
*2:Display occasionally changes On/Off for a moment after ignition switch is turned ON. This is operation for
checking purposes and is not a malfunction. A
*3: Refer to BRC-67, "WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator Lamp" for ON/OFF con-
ditions of each warning lamp and indicator lamp.
*4: CVT models
B
*5: “DDS” means “hill descent control” or “downhill drive support”.
*6: “USS” means “hill start assist” or “Uphill Start Support”.
*7: M/T models
C
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000010723647

VDC FUNCTION, TCS FUNCTION, BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (BLSD) FUNCTION, D
BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION, BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION, hill start assist FUNC-
TION AND ADVANCED hill descent control FUNCTION (4WD MODELS WITH GASOLINE ENGINE)
VDC warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in system [ABS actuator and E
electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differen-
tial (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced
hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chas-
sis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control module). The vehicle status BRC
becomes the same as models without VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) func-
tion, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent con-
trol function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control G
module) and active ride control function (control of chassis control module). However, ABS function and EBD
function are operated normally.
ABS FUNCTION H
ABS warning lamp and VDC warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in system
[ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for VDC function, TCS function, ABS
function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function,
hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active I
trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis
control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models without VDC function, TCS function, ABS
function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, J
hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine), active
trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride control function (control of chassis
control module). However, EBD function is operated normally.
K
NOTE:
ABS self-diagnosis sound may be heard the same as in the normal condition, because self-diagnosis is per-
formed when ignition switch turns ON and when vehicle initially starts.
L
EBD FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp and VDC warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a mal-
function occurs in system [ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for VDC
function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist M
function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function (4WD
models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and active ride
control function (control of chassis control module). The vehicle status becomes the same as models without N
VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, advanced hill descent control function
(4WD models with gasoline engine), active trace control function (control of chassis control module) and
active ride control function (control of chassis control module). O

DTC Fail-safe condition

The following functions are suspended. P
C10D7 • Deceleration control (brake control by VDC function) performed by pulling the parking brake switch while driving the
vehicle [10 km/h (6.2 MPH) or more].

BRC-79
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
C1101 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
C1102
• TCS function
C1103 • ABS function
• EBD function (only when both 2 rear wheels are malfunctioning)
C1104
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1105 • Brake assist function
C1106 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
C1107 • Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
C1108
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
C1109 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1110 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1111 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function*1
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1113 • Brake assist function*1
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1115 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)

BRC-80
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
A
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function B
• Brake assist function
C1116 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1 C
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended. D
C1118
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
C1120 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function E
C1121
• TCS function
C1122 • ABS function
• EBD function
C1123
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function BRC
C1124 • Brake assist function
C1125 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
C1126 • Advanced hill descent control function*1 G
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
C1127
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended. H
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1130 • Brake force distribution function I
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) J
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
K
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function L
C1140 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1 M
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended. N
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function O
C1142 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) P
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)

BRC-81
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
C1143 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake force distribution function
C1144 • hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
C1145 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function*1
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function*1
C1146 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1153 • Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1154 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
C1155 • Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function*1
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
C1160 • Brake assist function*1
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)

BRC-82
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DTC Fail-safe condition
A
C1164 The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
C1165
• TCS function
C1166 • ABS function B
• EBD function
C1167
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function C
• hill start assist function
C1170
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) D
C1197
Electrical vacuum assistance of brake booster is suspended
C1198
E
C1199 Normal control
C119A Electrical vacuum assistance of brake booster is suspended
The following functions are suspended. BRC
C1B60 • Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
U1000 The following functions are suspended. G
• VDC function
U1002
• TCS function
• ABS function*2
H
• EBD function*2
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
U1010 • Brake force distribution function I
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function*1
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) J
*1: 4WD models with gasoline engine
*2: When a malfunction detected in CAN communication [between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
and chassis control module]. K

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010723648

When multiple DTCs are displayed simultaneously, check one by one depending on the following priority list. L

Priority Detected item (DTC)

• U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT M
1 • U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN)
• U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE N
2 • C1153 EMERGENCY BRAKE
• C1170 VARIANT CODING
• C10D7 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM O
• C1118 4WD SYSTEM
3 • C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1
• C1144 ST ANG SEN SIGNAL
• C1B60 EXTERNAL CONTROL MODULE P
• C1109 BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNROMAL]
4 • C1111 PUMP MOTOR
• C1140 ACTUATOR RLY

BRC-83
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Priority Detected item (DTC)
• C1101 RR RH SENSOR-1
• C1102 RR LH SENSOR-1
• C1103 FR RH SENSOR-1
• C1104 FR LH SENSOR-1
• C1105 RR RH SENSOR-2
• C1106 RR LH SENSOR-2
• C1107 FR RH SENSOR-2
• C1108 FR LH SENSOR-2
• C1113 G SENSOR
• C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
• C1116 STOP LAMP SW
• C1120 FR LH IN SOL
• C1121 FR LH OUT SOL
• C1122 FR RH IN SOL
• C1123 FR RH OUT SOL
• C1124 RR LH IN SOL
5
• C1125 RR LH OUT SOL
• C1126 RR RH IN SOL
• C1127 RR RH OUT SOL
• C1142 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
• C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT
• C1145 YAW RATE SENSOR
• C1146 SIDE G SEN CITCUIT
• C1154 PNP POSI SIG
• C1160 DECEL G SEN SET
• C1164 CV 1
• C1165 CV 2
• C1166 SV 1
• C1167 SV 2
• C1197 VACUUM SENSOR
• C1198 VACUUM SEN CIR
• C1199 BRAKE BOOSTER
• C119A VACUUM SEN VOLT
6 • C1155 BR FLUID LEVEL LOW

DTC Index INFOID:0000000010723649

VDC warning ABS warning Brake warning

DTC Display item Refer to
lamp lamp lamp
C10D7 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM OFF OFF OFF BRC-107, "DTC Description"
C1101 RR RH SENSOR-1 ON ON ON*1
C1102 RR LH SENSOR-1 ON ON ON*1
BRC-109, "DTC Description"
C1103 FR RH SENSOR-1 ON ON ON*1
C1104 FR LH SENSOR-1 ON ON ON*1
C1105 RR RH SENSOR-2 ON ON ON*1
C1106 RR LH SENSOR-2 ON ON ON*1
BRC-113, "DTC Description"
C1107 FR RH SENSOR-2 ON ON ON*1
C1108 FR LH SENSOR-2 ON ON ON*1
BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNROM-
C1109 ON ON ON BRC-119, "DTC Description"
AL]
C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE ON ON ON BRC-122, "DTC Description"
C1111 PUMP MOTOR ON ON ON BRC-123, "DTC Description"

OFF*2
C1113 G SENSOR ON OFF BRC-126, "DTC Description"
ON*3

BRC-84
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC warning ABS warning Brake warning
DTC Display item Refer to
lamp lamp lamp A
ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIG-
C1115 ON ON ON BRC-127, "DTC Description"
NAL]
C1116 STOP LAMP SW ON OFF OFF BRC-133, "DTC Description" B
C1118 4WD SYSTEM OFF OFF OFF BRC-135, "DTC Description"
C1120 FR LH IN SOL ON ON ON BRC-137, "DTC Description"
C
C1121 FR LH OUT SOL ON ON ON BRC-140, "DTC Description"
C1122 FR RH IN SOL ON ON ON BRC-137, "DTC Description"
C1123 FR RH OUT SOL ON ON ON BRC-140, "DTC Description" D
C1124 RR LH IN SOL ON ON ON BRC-137, "DTC Description"
C1125 RR LH OUT SOL ON ON ON BRC-140, "DTC Description"
E
C1126 RR RH IN SOL ON ON ON BRC-137, "DTC Description"
C1127 RR RH OUT SOL ON ON ON BRC-140, "DTC Description"
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1 ON OFF OFF BRC-143, "DTC Description" BRC
C1140 ACTUATOR RLY ON ON ON BRC-145, "DTC Description"
C1142 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT ON OFF OFF BRC-147, "DTC Description"
C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT ON OFF OFF BRC-150, "DTC Description"
G

C1144 ST ANG SEN SIGNAL ON OFF OFF BRC-153, "DTC Description"

C1145 YAW RATE SENSOR ON OFF OFF H
BRC-126, "DTC Description"
C1146 SIDE G SEN CITCUIT ON OFF OFF
C1153 EMERGENCY BRAKE ON ON OFF BRC-122, "DTC Description"
C1154 PNP POSI SIG ON OFF OFF BRC-155, "DTC Description" I
C1155 BR FLUID LEVEL LOW ON OFF OFF BRC-157, "DTC Description"
*2
OFF J
C1160 DECEL G SEN SET ON OFF BRC-161, "DTC Description"
ON*3
C1164 CV 1 ON ON ON
BRC-162, "DTC Description"
C1165 CV 2 ON ON ON K
C1166 SV 1 ON ON ON
BRC-165, "DTC Description"
C1167 SV 2 ON ON ON
L
C1170 VARIANT CODING ON ON ON BRC-168, "DTC Description"
C1197 VACUUM SENSOR OFF OFF ON BRC-170, "DTC Description"
C1198 VACUUM SEN CIR OFF OFF ON BRC-173, "DTC Description" M
C1199 BRAKE BOOSTER OFF OFF ON BRC-176, "DTC Description"
C119A VACUUM SEN VOLT OFF OFF ON BRC-179, "DTC Description"
N
C1B60 EXTERNAL CONTROL MODULE OFF OFF OFF BRC-182, "DTC Description"
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ON ON ON BRC-184, "DTC Description"
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN) ON ON ON BRC-185, "DTC Description" O
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ON ON ON BRC-187, "DTC Description"
*1: Only when both 2 rear wheels are malfunctioning
*2: 2WD models P
*3: 4WD models

BRC-85
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

WIRING DIAGRAM
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
LHD
LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010723650

JRFWC1746GB

BRC-86
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

BRC

JRFWC1747GB

BRC-87
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

JRFWC1748GB

BRC-88
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

BRC

JRFWC1749GB

BRC-89
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

JRFWC1750GB

RHD

BRC-90
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010723651

BRC

JRFWC1751GB
P

BRC-91
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

JRFWC1752GB

BRC-92
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

BRC

JRFWC1753GB

BRC-93
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

JRFWC1754GB

BRC-94
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010723652
B

DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FROM THE CUSTOMER C
Clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, perform an interview utilizing BRC-96, "Diagnostic
Work Sheet" and reproduce the symptom as well as fully understand it. Ask customer about his/her complaints
carefully. Check symptoms by driving vehicle with customer, if necessary. D
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. Never guess easily like “maybe the customer means that...,” or “
maybe the customer mentions this symptom”. E

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM BRC

Reproduce the symptom that is indicated by the customer, based on the information from the customer
obtained by interview. Also check that the symptom is not caused by fail-safe mode. Refer toBRC-79, "Fail-
Safe". G
CAUTION:
When the symptom is caused by normal operation, fully inspect each portion and obtain the under-
standing of customer that the symptom is not caused by a malfunction. H

>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. J
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Record or print self-diagnosis results and freeze frame data (FFD). GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6. K
4.RECHECK SYMPTOM
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnostic results for “ABS”. L
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedures for the error-detected system.
NOTE:
If some DTCs are detected at the some time, determine the order for performing the diagnosis based on M
BRC-83, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5. N
NO >> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview. Refer to GI-44,
"Intermittent Incident".
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE ERROR-DETECTED PART O
1. Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2. Reconnect part or connector after repairing or replacing.
3. When DTC is detected, erase self-diagnostic result for “ABS”. P

>> GO TO 7.
6.IDENTIFY ERROR-DETECTED SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Estimate error-detected system based on symptom diagnosis and perform inspection.

BRC-95
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Can the error-detected system be identified?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview. Refer to GI-44,
"Intermittent Incident".
7.FINAL CHECK
With CONSULT
1. Check the reference value for “ABS”.
2. Recheck the symptom and check that the symptom is not reproduced on the same conditions.
Is the symptom reproduced?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000010723653

Description
• In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore, it is important to understand the
symptom and status well enough by asking the customer about his/her concerns carefully. To systemize all
the information for the diagnosis, prepare the interview sheet referring to the interview points.
• In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may cause a DTC to be detected.
INTERVIEW SHEET SAMPLE

Interview sheet
Registration Initial year
Customer number registration
MR/MS
name
Vehicle type VIN
Storage date Engine Mileage km (Mile)
Does not operate ( ) function
Warning lamp for ( ) turns ON.
Symptom Noise Vibration
Other
( )
First occurrence Recently Other ( )
Frequency of occurrence Always Under a certain conditions of Sometimes ( time(s)/day)
Irrelevant

Climate con- Weather Fine Cloud Rain Snow Others ( )

ditions Temperature Hot Warm Cool Cold Temperature [Approx. °C (°F)]
Relative humidity High Moderate Low
Urban area Suburb area Highway
Road conditions
Mountainous road (uphill or downhill) Rough road
Irrelevant
When engine starts During idling
During driving During acceleration At constant speed driving
Operating condition, etc.
During deceleration
During cornering (right curve or left curve)
When steering wheel is steered (to right or to left)

BRC-96
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Interview sheet
A
Registration Initial year
Customer number registration
MR/MS
name
Vehicle type VIN
B
Storage date Engine Mileage km (Mile)

Other conditions
C
Memo

BRC

BRC-97
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC
UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ABS ACTUATOR AND ELEC-
TRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000010723654

When replaced the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), be sure to perform the following item.
• Configuration: Refer to BRC-104, "Work Procedure".
• Adjust the neutral position of steering angle sensor: Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".
• Calibration of the decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-102, "Work Procedure".
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010723655

1.CONFIGURATION
With CONSULT
Perform configuration of the ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC-104, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 2.
2.ADJUSTMENT THE NEUTRAL POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
With CONSULT
Perform adjustment the neutral of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 3.
3.CALIBRATION OF DECEL G SENSOR
With CONSULT
Perform calibration of decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-102, "Work Procedure".

>> END of work.

BRC-98
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000010723656

Always adjust the neutral position of steering angle sensor before driving when the following operation is per- B
formed.
×: Required —: Not required

Procedure Adjust the neutral position of steering angle sensor C

Removing/ installing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) —
Replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ×
Removing/installing steering angle sensor × D
Replacing steering angle sensor ×
Removing/installing steering components ×
E
Replacing steering components ×
Removing/installing suspension components ×
Replacing suspension components × BRC
Removing/installing tire —
Replacing tire —
G
Tire rotation —
Adjusting wheel alignment. ×

Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010723657

ADJUST THE NEUTRAL POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

CAUTION: I
Always use CONSULT when adjusting the neutral position of steering angle sensor. (It cannot be
adjusted other than with CONSULT.)
1.CHECK THE VEHICLE STATUS (1) J

Stop vehicle with front wheels in the straight-ahead position.

Does the vehicle stay in the straight-ahead position? K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Steer the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Stop the vehicle.
2.ADJUST NEUTRAL POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR L
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION: M
Never start engine.
2. Select “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT” in this order.
3. Select “START”. N
CAUTION:
Never touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
4. After approx. 10 seconds, select “END”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF, and then turn it ON again. O
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the operation above.
P
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DATA MONITOR (1)
With CONSULT
1. The vehicle is either pointing straight ahead, or the vehicle needs to be moved. Stop when it is pointing
straight ahead.

BRC-99
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
2. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR”, “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” and “STR ANGLE SIG” in the order. Check that
the signal is within the specified value.

STR ANGLE SIG : 0±2.5°

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEERING COMPONENT PARTS
Check the installation condition of steering component parts. Refer to ST-11, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SUSPENSION COMPONENT PARTS
Check the installation condition of suspension component parts.
• Front: Refer to FSU-7, "Inspection".
• Rear: Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. GO TO 6.
6.CHECK WHEEL ALIGMENT
Check the wheel alignment.
• Front: Refer to FSU-8, "Inspection".
• Rear: Refer to RSU-7, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Adjust the wheel alignment. GO TO 7.
• Front: Refer to FSU-9, "Adjustment".
• Rear: Refer to RSU-8, "Adjustment".
7.CHECK THE VEHICLE STATUS (2)
Stop vehicle with front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Does the vehicle stay in the straight-ahead position?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Steer the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. GO TO 8.
8.CHECK DATA MONITOR (2)
With CONSULT
1. The vehicle is either pointing straight ahead, or the vehicle needs to be moved. Stop when it is pointing
straight ahead.
2. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR”, “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” and “STR ANGLE SIG” in the order. Check that
the signal is within the specified value.

STR ANGLE SIG : 0±2.5°

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK DATA MONITOR (3)
With CONSULT
1. The vehicle is either pointing straight ahead, or the vehicle needs to be moved.
CAUTION:
• Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19MPH) or more for 300 m (985 ft) or more.
• Never use tester

BRC-100
ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
2. The vehicle is either pointing straight ahead, or the vehicle needs to be moved. Stop when it is pointing
straight ahead. A
3. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR”, “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” and “STR ANGLE SIG” in the order. Check that
the signal is within the specified value.
B
STR ANGLE SIG : 0±2.5°
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10. C
NO >> GO TO 1.
10.ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MEMORY
D
With CONSULT
1. Record or print self-diagnosis results and freeze frame data (FFD).
2. Erase self-diagnosis result of “ABS”.
Are the memories erased? E
YES >> End of work.
NO >> Check the items indicated by the self-diagnosis.
BRC

BRC-101
CALIBRATION OF DECEL G SENSOR
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
CALIBRATION OF DECEL G SENSOR
Description INFOID:0000000010723658

CAUTION:
Always perform the decel G sensor calibration before driving when the following operation is per-
formed.
NOTE:
Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor calibration is performed when performing the decel G sensor calibration.
×: Required —: Not required

Procedure Decel G sensor calibration

Removing/ installing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ×
Replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ×
Removing/installing steering components —
Replacing steering components —
Removing/installing suspension components —
Replacing suspension components —
Removing/installing tire —
Replacing tire —
Tire rotation —
Adjusting wheel alignment. —

Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010723659

Decel G sensor calibration

CAUTION:
Always use CONSULT for the decel G sensor calibration. (It cannot be adjusted other than with CON-
SULT.)
NOTE:
Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor calibration is performed when performing the decel G sensor calibration.
1.CHECK THE VEHICLE STATUS
1. Steer the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Stop the vehicle on level surface.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is the vehicle stopped in the straight-ahead position on level surface?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Steer the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Stop the vehicle on level surface.
2.PERFORM DECEL G SENSOR CALIBRATION
CAUTION:
• Never allow passenger or load on the vehicle.
• Never apply vibration to the vehicle body when opening or closing door during calibration.
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
2. Select “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT”, “DECEL G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in this order.
3. Select “START”.
4. After approx. 10 seconds, select “END”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn it ON again.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the operation above.

>> GO TO 3.

BRC-102
CALIBRATION OF DECEL G SENSOR
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

3.CHECK DATA MONITOR A

With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle. Steer the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Stop the vehicle on level sur-
face. B
2. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR”, “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” and “DECEL G SENSOR” in this order. Check
that the signal is within the specified value.

DECEL G SENSOR : Approx. ±0.08 G C

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> GO TO 4. D
NO >> GO TO 1.
4.ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MEMORY
With CONSULT E
Erase self-diagnosis result of “ABS”.
Are the memories erased?
YES >> End of work. BRC
NO >> Check the items indicated by the self-diagnosis.

BRC-103
CONFIGURATION [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)]
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
CONFIGURATION [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010723660

CAUTION:
• Use “Manual Configuration” only when “TYPE ID” of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
cannot be read.
• After configuration, turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON and check that the VDC warning lamp
turns OFF after staying illuminated for approximately two seconds.
• If an error occurs during configuration, start over from the beginning.
1.CHECKING TYPE ID (1)
Use FAST (service parts catalogue) to search ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) of the applicable
vehicle and find “Type ID”.
Is “Type ID” displayed?
YES >> Print out “Type ID” and GO TO 2.
NO >> “Configuration” is not required for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Replace in the
usual manner.
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
2.CHECKING TYPE ID (2)
CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “Before Replace ECU” of “Read/Write Configuration”.
2. Check that “Type ID” is displayed on the CONSULT screen.
Is “Type ID” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 7.
3.VERIFYING TYPE ID (1)
CONSULT Configuration
Compare a “Type ID” displayed on the CONSULT screen with the one searched by using FAST (service parts
catalogue) to check that these “Type ID” agree with each other.
NOTE:
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”.

>> GO TO 4.
4.SAVING TYPE ID
CONSULT Configuration
Save “Type ID” on CONSULT.

>> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACING ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (1)
Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never perform the following work items:
• Air bleeding
• Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position
• Calibration of decel G sensor

>> GO TO 6.
6.WRITING (AUTOMATIC WRITING)
BRC-104
CONFIGURATION [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)]
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “After Replace ECU” of “Re/programming, Configuration” or that of “Read / Write Configuration”. A
2. Select the “Type ID” agreeing with the one stored on CONSULT and the one searched by using FAST
(service parts catalogue) to write the “Type ID” into the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NOTE: B
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”.

>> GO TO 9. C
7.REPLACING ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (2)
Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation". D
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never perform the following work items: E
• Air bleeding
• Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position
• Calibration of decel G sensor
BRC

>> GO TO 8.
8.WRITING (MANUAL WRITING) G
CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “Manual Configuration”.
2. Select the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalogue) to write the “Type ID” into the ABS H
actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NOTE:
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”. I

>> GO TO 9.
9.VERIFYING TYPE ID (2) J
Compare “Type ID” written into the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the one searched by using
FAST (service parts catalogue) to check that these “Type ID” agree with each other.
NOTE: K
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”.

>> GO TO 10. L

10.CHECKING VDC WARNING LAMP

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. M
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and check that the VDC warning lamp turns OFF after staying illuminated for
approximately two seconds.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine. N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Perform the self-diagnosis of “ABS”. O

11.PERFORMING SUPPLEMENTARY WORK

1. Perform the air bleeding. P
- LHD: Refer to BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
- RHD: Refer to BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
2. Perform the adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".
3. Perform the calibration of decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-102, "Work Procedure".
4. Perform the self-diagnosis of all systems.
5. Record or print self-diagnosis result and freeze frame data (FFD).
6. Erase self-diagnosis results.

BRC-105
CONFIGURATION [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)]
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

>> End of work.

BRC-106
C10D7 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
C10D7 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723661
B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
C10D7 When a malfunction is detected in electric parking brake system. D
(Parking brake system)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector E
• Electric parking brake control module
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE BRC
The following functions are suspended.
• Deceleration control (brake control by VDC function) performed by pulling the parking brake switch while
driving the vehicle [10 km/h (6.2 MPH) or more]. G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING H
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
J
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
K
Is DTC “C10D7” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-107, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
L
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723662

M
1.CHECK ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “EHS/PKB”. N
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to PB-36, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2. O
2.CHECK CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. P
2. Disconnect the electric parking brake control module harness connector.
3. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
4. Check the each harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
5. Check the each pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 3.

BRC-107
C10D7 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Connect the electric parking brake control module harness connector.
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C10D7” or “U1000” detected?
YES (“C10D7”)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-108
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723663

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
RR RH SENSOR-1
C1101 When an open circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.
(Rear RH wheel sensor-1)
RR LH SENSOR-1 D
C1102 When an open circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.
(Rear LH wheel sensor-1)
FR RH SENSOR-1
C1103 When an open circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.
(Front RH wheel sensor-1)
E
FR LH SENSOR-1
C1104 When an open circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.
(Front LH wheel sensor-1)

POSSIBLE CAUSE BRC

• Harness or connector
• Wheel sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) G
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function H
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function (only when both 2 rear wheels are malfunctioning) I
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• hill start assist function
• Brake force distribution function J
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) K
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING L
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
M
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
N
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
3. Stop the vehicle. O
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1101”, “C1102”, “C1103”, “C1104” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-109, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723664

CAUTION:
Never check between wheel sensor harness connector terminals.

BRC-109
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

1.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the wheel sensor for damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE WHEEL SENSOR (1)
With CONSULT
1. Replace the wheel sensor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
- Rear: Refer to BRC-214, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
4. Start the engine.
5. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
6. Stop the vehicle.
7. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1101”, “C1102”, “C1103”, “C1104” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
3. Check the wheel sensor harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine.
4. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
5. Stop the vehicle.
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1101”, “C1102”, “C1103”, “C1104” detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END
5.CHECK TERMINAL
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and then check the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
3. Disconnect the each wheel sensor harness connector and then check the each wheel sensor pin termi-
nals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the wheel sensor harness connector.

BRC-110
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more. A
5. Start the engine.
6. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
7. Stop the vehicle.
B
8. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1101”, “C1102”, “C1103”, “C1104” detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
C
NO >> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel E
sensor harness connector. (Check the continuity when steering wheel is steered to RH and LH, or center
harness in wheel housing is moved.)
Measurement connector and terminal for power supply circuit
BRC
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
19 E22 (FR LH wheel) 1 G
16 E39 (FR RH wheel) 3
E36 Existed
31 B44 (RR LH wheel) 5
H
17 B41 (RR RH wheel) 7

Measurement connector and terminal for signal circuit

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor I

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
8 E22 (FR LH wheel) 2
J
4 E39 (FR RH wheel) 4
E36 Existed
18 B44 (RR LH wheel) 6
29 B41 (RR RH wheel) 8 K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 8. L

8.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (3)

With CONSULT M
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the wheel sensor harness connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more. N
4. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
5. Start the engine.
6. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
7. Stop the vehicle. O
8. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1101”, “C1102”, “C1103”, “C1104” detected?
YES >> GO TO 9. P
NO >> INSPECTION END
9.REPLACE WHEEL SENSOR (2)
With CONSULT
1. Replace the wheel sensor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
- Rear: Refer to BRC-214, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".

BRC-111
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Start the engine.
5. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
6. Stop the vehicle.
7. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1101”, “C1102”, “C1103”, “C1104” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-112
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723665

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
• When a short circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear RH wheel sensor is in following state.
RR RH SENSOR-2 - Rear RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear RH wheel sensor power supply
C1105 D
(Rear RH wheel sensor-2) voltage
• When distance between rear RH wheel sensor and rear RH wheel sensor rotor is large.
• When installation of rear RH wheel sensor or rear RH wheel sensor rotor is not normal.
• When a short circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit. E
• When power supply voltage of rear LH wheel sensor is in following state.
RR LH SENSOR-2 - Rear LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear LH wheel sensor power supply
C1106
(Rear LH wheel sensor-2) voltage
• When distance between rear LH wheel sensor and rear LH wheel sensor rotor is large. BRC
• When installation of rear LH wheel sensor or rear LH wheel sensor rotor is not normal.
• When a short circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front RH wheel sensor is in following state. G
FR RH SENSOR-2 - Front RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front RH wheel sensor power sup-
C1107
(Front RH wheel sensor-2) ply voltage
• When distance between front RH wheel sensor and front RH wheel sensor rotor is large.
• When installation of front RH wheel sensor or front RH wheel sensor rotor is not normal. H
• When a short circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front LH wheel sensor is in following state.
FR LH SENSOR-2 - Front LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front LH wheel sensor power supply I
C1108
(Front LH wheel sensor-2) voltage
• When distance between front LH wheel sensor and front LH wheel sensor rotor is large.
• When installation of front LH wheel sensor or front LH wheel sensor rotor is not normal.
J
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• Wheel sensor K
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Sensor rotor
FAIL-SAFE L
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
M
• ABS function
• EBD function (only when both 2 rear wheels are malfunctioning)
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function N
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
O
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE P
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.

BRC-113
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723666

CAUTION:
Never check between wheel sensor harness connector terminals.
1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply system. Refer to BRC-188, "Diagnosis
Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.CHECK TIRE
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check tire air pressure, wear and size. Refer to WT-66, "Tire Air Pressure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Adjust air pressure or replace tire, and GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DATA MONITOR (1)
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine.
4. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
5. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END
5.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the wheel sensor for damage.
BRC-114
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
3. Remove dust and foreign matter adhered to the sensor rotor with a vacuum dust collector through the
wheel sensor mounting hole. A
CAUTION:
Install wheel sensor with no backlash and float, and tighten the mounting bolt to the specified
torque.
B
• Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
• Rear: BRC-213, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE WHEEL SENSOR (1) D
With CONSULT
1. Replace the wheel sensor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". E
- Rear: Refer to BRC-214, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
4. Start the engine. BRC
5. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE: G
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
6. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting H
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 7.
I
NO >> GO TO 19.
7.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
With CONSULT J
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. K
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> INSPECTION END L
8.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness. M
3. Check the wheel sensor harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11. N
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 9.
9.CHECK DATA MONITOR (2) O
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
P
3. Start the engine.
4. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
5. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.

BRC-115
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
10.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (3)
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK TERMINAL
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and then check the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec-
tor.
3. Disconnect the each wheel sensor harness connector and then check the each wheel sensor pin termi-
nals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 12.
12.CHECK DATA MONITOR (3)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the wheel sensor harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
5. Start the engine.
6. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
7. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 14.
13.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (4)
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> INSPECTION END
14.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.
BRC-116
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
19, 8
B
16, 4
E36 Ground Not existed
31, 18
17, 29 C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 15. D
15.CHECK DATA MONITOR (4)
With CONSULT E
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the wheel sensor harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
BRC
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
5. Start the engine.
6. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”. G
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
7. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor. H
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
I
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 17.
16.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (5) J
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle. K
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> GO TO 17. L
NO >> INSPECTION END
17.REPLACE WHEEL SENSOR (2)
M
With CONSULT
1. Replace the wheel sensor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
- Rear: Refer to BRC-214, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". N
2. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
4. Start the engine. O
5. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”. P
6. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> GO TO 19.

BRC-117
C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

18.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (6)

With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> INSPECTION END
19.REPLACE SENSOR ROTOR
With CONSULT
1. Replace the sensor rotor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-216, "FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation".
- Rear: Refer to BRC-216, "REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
4. Start the engine.
5. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
6. Stop the vehicle.
7. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1105”, “C1106”, “C1107”, “C1108” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-118
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723667

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
When ignition power supply voltage is in following state.
BATTERY VOLTAG [ABNORMAL]
C1109 • Ignition power supply voltage: 10 V ≥ Ignition power supply voltage
(Battery voltage [abnormal])
• Ignition power supply voltage: 16 V ≤ Ignition power supply voltage
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E
• Fuse
• Ignition power supply system
• Battery
BRC
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function G
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function H
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function I
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
J
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
K
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

L
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT M
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1109” detected? N
YES >> Proceed to BRC-119, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723668

1.CHECK CONNECTOR P

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 2.

BRC-119
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.
Is DTC “C1109” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 28 Ground Approx. 0 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
5. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 28 Ground 10 − 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO (with stop / start system)>>GO TO 4.
NO (without stop / start system)>>GO TO 5.
4.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(WITH STOP / START SYSTEM)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 10A fuse (#60).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (28) and 10A fuse (#60).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(WITHOUT STOP / START SYSTEM)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 10A fuse (#21).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (28) and 10A fuse (#21).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.

BRC-120
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E36 Ground Existed B
38
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7. C
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
7.CHECK TERMINAL
D
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). E
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
BRC

BRC-121
C1110, C1153 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1110, C1153 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723669

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROLLER FAILURE
C1110 When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
(Controller failure)
EMERGENCY BRAKE When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning. (Pressure increase
C1153
(Emergency brake) is too much or too little)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function (When DTC “C1110”)
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• hill start assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1110” or “C1153” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-122, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723670

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) even if other display than “C1110” or “C1153” is dis-
played in self-diagnosis for “ABS”.

>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".

BRC-122
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723671

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
PUMP MOTOR
C1111 When a malfunction is detected in motor or motor relay.
(Pump motor and motor relay)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Fusible link E
• Battery power supply system
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended. BRC
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function G
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• hill start assist function
• Brake force distribution function H
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) I
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING J
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
L
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
M
Is DTC “C1111” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-123, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END N

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723672

O
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness. P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.
Is DTC “C1111” detected?

BRC-123
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 1 Ground 10 – 16 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
5. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 1 Ground 10 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO (R9M engine models)>>GO TO 4.
NO (Except for R9M engine models)>>GO TO 5.
4.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (R9M ENGINE MODELS)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 40A fusible link (#M).
3. Check continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
terminal (1) and 40A fusible link (#M).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (EXCEPT FOR R9M ENGINE
MODELS)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 40A fusible link (#K).
3. Check continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
terminal (1) and 40A fusible link (#K).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13 Existed
E36 Ground
38
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.

BRC-124
C1111 ABS MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
7.CHECK TERMINAL A

Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness.
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
C
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC

BRC-125
C1113, C1145, C1146 YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1113, C1145, C1146 YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723673

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
G SENSOR
C1113 When a malfunction is detected in decel G sensor signal.
(Decel G sensor)
YAW RATE SENSOR
C1145 When a malfunction is detected in yaw rate sensor signal.
(Yaw rate sensor circuit)
SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
C1146 When a malfunction is detected in side G sensor signal.
(Side G sensor circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function (4WD models)
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function (4WD models)
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1113”, “C1145”, “C1146” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723674

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) even if other display than “C1113”, “C1145” or “C1146”
is displayed in self-diagnosis for “ABS”.

>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".

BRC-126
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723675

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] When difference in wheel speed between any wheel and others is detected during
C1115
(Wheel sensor [abnormal signal]) the vehicle is driven, because of installation of other tires than specified.

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• Wheel sensor
• Sensor rotor E
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended. BRC
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function G
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function H
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) I
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION L

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute. M
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected? N
YES >> Proceed to BRC-127, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723676

CAUTION: P
Never check between wheel sensor harness connector terminals.
1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply system. Refer to BRC-188, "Diagnosis
Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
BRC-127
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.CHECK TIRE
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check tire air pressure, wear and size. Refer to WT-66, "Tire Air Pressure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Adjust air pressure or replace tire, and GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DATA MONITOR (1)
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine.
4. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
5. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END
5.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the wheel sensor for damage.
3. Remove dust and foreign matter adhered to the sensor rotor with a vacuum dust collector through the
wheel sensor mounting hole.
CAUTION:
Install wheel sensor with no backlash and float, and tighten the mounting bolt to the specified
torque.
• Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
• Rear: Refer to BRC-213, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE WHEEL SENSOR (1)
With CONSULT
1. Replace the wheel sensor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
- Rear: Refer to BRC-214, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
4. Start the engine.
5. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:

BRC-128
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
6. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor. A
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively? B
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 19.
7.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2) C
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle. D
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected?
YES >> GO TO 19. E
NO >> INSPECTION END
8.CHECK CONNECTOR (2) BRC
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
3. Check the wheel sensor harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 9.
H
9.CHECK DATA MONITOR (2)
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”. I
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine.
4. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR” J
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
5. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor. K
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively? L
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
10.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (3) M

With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
N
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected?
O
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK TERMINAL P
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and then check the ABS actu-
ator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
3. Disconnect each wheel sensor harness connector and then check the each wheel sensor pin terminals for
damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
BRC-129
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 12.
12.CHECK DATA MONITOR (3)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the wheel sensor harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
5. Start the engine.
6. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
7. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 14.
13.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (4)
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> INSPECTION END
14.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel
sensor harness connector. (Check the continuity when steering wheel is steered to RH and LH, or center
harness in wheel housing is moved.)
Measurement connector and terminal for power supply circuit

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
19 E22 (FR LH wheel) 1
16 E39 (FR RH wheel) 3
E36 Existed
31 B44 (RR LH wheel) 5
17 B41 (RR RH wheel) 7

Measurement connector and terminal for signal circuit

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
8 E22 (FR LH wheel) 2
4 E39 (FR RH wheel) 4
E36 Existed
18 B44 (RR LH wheel) 6
29 B41 (RR RH wheel) 8
5. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.

BRC-130
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
19, 8
B
16, 4
E36 Ground Not existed
31, 18
17, 29 C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 15. D
15.CHECK DATA MONITOR (4)
With CONSULT E
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the wheel sensor harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
BRC
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
5. Start the engine.
6. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”. G
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”.
7. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor. H
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
I
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 17.
16.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (5) J
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle. K
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected?
YES >> GO TO 17. L
NO >> INSPECTION END
17.REPLACE WHEEL SENSOR (2)
M
With CONSULT
1. Replace the wheel sensor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
- Rear: Refer to BRC-214, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". N
2. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
4. Start the engine. O
5. Select “ABS” and “DATA MONITOR”, check “FR LH SENSOR”, “FR RH SENSOR”, “RR LH SENSOR”
and “RR RH SENSOR”.
NOTE:
Set the “DATA MONITOR” recording speed to “10 msec”. P
6. Read a value (wheel speed) of both normal wheel sensors and error-detecting wheel sensor.
Regarding the deference at 30 km/h (19 MPH) between the wheel speed detected by the error detecting
wheel sensor and the maximum/minimum wheel speed detected by the normal wheel sensors, is the differ-
ence within 5%, respectively?
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> GO TO 19.

BRC-131
C1115 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

18.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (6)

With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected?
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> INSPECTION END
19.REPLACE SENSOR ROTOR
With CONSULT
1. Replace the sensor rotor.
- Front: Refer to BRC-216, "FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation".
- Rear: Refer to BRC-216, "REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
4. Start the engine.
5. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
6. Stop the vehicle.
7. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1115” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-132
C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723677

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
STOP LAMP SW
C1116 When stop lamp switch signal is not input when brake pedal operates.
(Stop lamp switch)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Stop lamp switch
• BCM
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function BRC
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function G
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) H
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J

>> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. L
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1116” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-133, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723678 N

1.CHECK BCM SYSTEM

O
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “BCM”.
Is any DTC detected?
P
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a short period of time.
BRC-133
C1116 STOP LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Vehicle stopped, and perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1116” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Check pin terminals and connection of each harness connector for abnormal conditions. Repair or
replace error-detected parts.

BRC-134
C1118 4WD SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1118 4WD SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723679

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
4WD SYSTEM
C1118 When a malfunction is detected in 4WD system.
(4WD system)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• 4WD control unit
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Advanced hill descent control function (Gasoline engine models) BRC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. J
Is DTC “C1118” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". K
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723680

L
1.CHECK 4WD SYSTEM
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”. M
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC.
• MR20DD engine and QR25DE engine models: Refer to DLN-30, "DTC Index". N
• R9M engine models: Refer to DLN-134, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS O

With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
P
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a short period of time.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Vehicle stooped, and perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1118” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".

BRC-135
C1118 4WD SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Check pin terminals and connection of each harness connector for abnormal conditions. Repair or
replace error-detected parts.

BRC-136
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723681

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
FR LH IN ABS SOL
C1120 When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS IN valve.
(Front LH ABS IN solenoid valve)
FR RH IN ABS SOL D
C1122 When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS IN valve.
(Front RH ABS IN solenoid valve)
RR LH IN ABS SOL
C1124 When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS IN valve.
(Rear LH ABS IN solenoid valve)
E
RR RH IN ABS SOL
C1126 When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS IN valve.
(Rear RH ABS IN solenoid valve)

POSSIBLE CAUSE BRC

• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Fusible link G
• Battery power supply system
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended. H
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function I
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function J
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) K
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING L

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION N

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. O
Is any DTC “C1120”, “C1122”, “C1124”, “C1126” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". P
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723682

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
BRC-137
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.
Is any DTC “C1120”, “C1122”, “C1124”, “C1126” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK ABS IN VALVE POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
5. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ABS IN VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 30A fusible link (#G).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (25) and 30A fusible link (#G).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK ABS IN VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

BRC-138
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). A
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. B

BRC

BRC-139
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723683

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
C1121 When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS OUT valve.
(Front LH ABS OUT solenoid valve)
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
C1123 When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS OUT valve.
(Front RH ABS OUT solenoid valve)
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
C1125 When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS OUT valve.
(Rear LH ABS OUT solenoid valve)
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
C1127 When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS OUT valve.
(Rear RH ABS OUT solenoid valve)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Fusible link
• Battery power supply system
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1121”, “C1123”, “C1125”, “C1127” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723684

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
BRC-140
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. A
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.
Is any DTC“C1121”, “C1123”, “C1125”, “C1127” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK ABS ONT VALVE POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.
E
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
BRC
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
G
Never start engine.
5. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

H
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4. J
4.CHECK ABS OUT VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. K
2. Check the 30A fusible link (#G).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (25) and 30A fusible link (#G).
L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
M
5.CHECK ABS OUT VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the N
ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) O

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E36 Ground Existed
38 P

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK TERMINAL
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness.

BRC-141
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC-142
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723685

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
C1130 When a malfunction is detected in ECM system.
(Engine system signal)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• ECM
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• CAN communication line E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function BRC
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake force distribution function G
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) H

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING I
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION K
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. L
Is DTC “C1130” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-143, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". M
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723686
N
1.CHECK ENGINE SYSTEM
With CONSULT
O
Perform self-diagnosis for “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. P
• MR20DD models: Refer to EC-109, "DTC Index".
• QR25DE models: Refer to EC-517, "DTC Index".
• R9M models: Refer to EC-908, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
BRC-143
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a short period of time.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns OFF.
6. Vehicle stopped, and perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1130” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Check pin terminals and connection of each harness connector for abnormal conditions. Repair or
replace error-detected parts.

BRC-144
C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723687

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ACTUATOR RLY
C1140 When a malfunction is detected in actuator relay.
(Actuator relay)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Fusible link E
• Battery power supply system
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended. BRC
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function G
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function H
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) I
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION L

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. M
Is DTC “C1140” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-145, "Diagnosis Procedure".
N
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723688
O

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. P
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.

BRC-145
C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is DTC “C1140” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 30A fusible link (#G).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (25) and 30A fusible link (#G).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK ACTUATOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E36 Ground Existed
38
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK TERMINAL
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC-146
C1142 PRESS SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1142 PRESS SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723689

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
C1142 When a malfunction is detected in pressure sensor.
(Pressure sensor circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Stop lamp switch system
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Brake system E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function BRC
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function G
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) H
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION K

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. L
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1142” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-147, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723690 N

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH SYSTEM

Check the stop lamp switch system. Refer to BRC-133, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. P
2.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEAKAGE
Check the brake fluid leakage.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-13, "Inspection".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-77, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
BRC-147
C1142 PRESS SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
3.CHECKBR-100, "INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT" BRAKE PIPING
Check the brake piping.
• Front
- LHD models: Refer to BR-27, "FRONT : Inspection".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-91, "FRONT : Inspection".
• Rear
- LHD models: Refer to BR-31, "REAR : Inspection".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-94, "REAR : Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
4.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL
Check the brake pedal.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-22, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-86, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Check the brake master cylinder.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-35, "Inspection".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-98, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE
Check the brake booster and the check valve.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-38, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-100, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
7.CHECK VACUUM PIPING
Check the vacuum piping.
• LHD models
- MR20DD: Refer to BR-40, "MR20DD : Inspection".
- QR25DE: Refer to BR-41, "QR25DE : Inspection".
- R9M: Refer to BR-42, "R9M : Inspection".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-102, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
8.CHECK FRONT DISC BRAKE
Check the front disc brake.
• LHD models
- 1 piston type: Refer to BR-54, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
- 2 piston type: Refer to BR-59, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
• RHD models
- 1 piston type: Refer to BR-114, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
- 2 piston type: Refer to BR-119, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?

BRC-148
C1142 PRESS SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. A
9.CHECK REAR DISC BRAKE
Check the rear disc brake.
B
• LHD models: Refer to BR-66, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and Adjustment".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-126, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
10.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS D
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a short period of time. E
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1142” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). BRC
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and terminal for damage,
looseness and disconnection. Repair or replace error-detected parts. G

BRC-149
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723691

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT
C1143 When a malfunction is detected in steering angle sensor.
(Steering angle sensor circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• Steering angle sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Fuse
• Ignition power supply system
• CAN communication line
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1143” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723692

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.
Is DTC “C1143” detected?
BRC-150
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END A
3.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
B
2. Disconnect the steering angle sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between steering angle sensor harness connector and ground.

Steering angle sensor

C
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M30 4 Ground Approx. 0 V D
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine. E
5. Check the voltage between steering angle sensor harness connector and ground.

Steering angle sensor BRC

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M30 4 Ground 10 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO (With stop / start system)>>GO TO 4.
NO (Without stop / start system)>>GO TO 5. H
4.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER SUOOLY CIRCUIT (WITH STOP / START SYSTEM)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. I
2. Check the 10A fuse (#54).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between steering angle sensor harness connector terminal (4) and
10A fuse (#54).
J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
K
5.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER SUOOLY CIRCUIT (WITHOUT STOP / START SYSTEM)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 10A fuse (#30). L
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between steering angle sensor harness connector terminal (4) and
10A fuse (#30).
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT N
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between steering angle sensor harness connector and ground.
O
Steering angle sensor
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
P
M30 1 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
7.CHECK TERMINAL
Check steering angle sensor pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

BRC-151
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
8.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check the CAN communication. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. Refer to BRC-10, "Precautions for Harness Repair".

BRC-152
C1144 INCOMPLETE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1144 INCOMPLETE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723693

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ST ANG SEN SIGNAL
C1144 When neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor is not complete.
(Steering angle sensor not complete)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• Steering angle sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E
• Incomplete neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended. BRC
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function G
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) H
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J

>> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. L
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1144” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-153, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723694 N

1.ADJUST THE NEUTRAL POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

Perform neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure". O

>> GO TO 2.
P
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1144” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-153
C1144 INCOMPLETE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

3.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC-154
C1154 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1154 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723695

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
PNP POSI SIG
C1154 When a malfunction is detected in TCM system.
(PNP position signal)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• TCM
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• CAN communication line E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function BRC
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake force distribution function G
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) H

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

BRC-155
C1154 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase Self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a short period of time.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Vehicle stopped, and perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1154” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Check pin terminals and connection of each harness connector for abnormal conditions. Repair or
replace error-detected parts.

BRC-156
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723697

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
BE FLUID LEVEL LOW • When brake fluid level low signal is detected.
C1155
(Brake fluid level low) • When an open circuit is detected in brake fluid level switch circuit.

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Brake fluid level switch E
• Combination meter
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended. BRC
• VDC function
• TCS function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function G
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine) H
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I

1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF J
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT L
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1155” detected?
M
YES >> Proceed to BRC-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
N
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723698

1.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL O

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the brake fluid level.
- LHD models: Refer to BR-13, "Inspection". P
- RHD models: Refer to BR-77, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Refill the brake fluid, and GO TO 2.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-13, "Refilling".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-77, "Refilling".

BRC-157
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)

With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1155” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
Check the brake fluid level switch. Refer to BRC-159, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace the reservoir tank, and GO TO 4.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-34, "Disassembly and Assembly".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-97, "Disassembly and Assembly".
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1155” detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END
5.CHECK CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch harness connector.
3. Check the brake fluid level switch harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
4. Check the brake fluid level switch pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
5. Disconnect the combination meter harness connector.
6. Check the combination meter harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
7. Check the combination meter pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (3)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the brake fluid level switch harness connector.
2. Connect the combination meter harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1155” detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-158
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

7.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH CIRCUIT A

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch harness connector.
3. Disconnect the combination meter harness connector.
B
4. Check the continuity between brake fluid level switch harness connector and combination meter harness
connector.

Brake fluid level switch Combination meter

C
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E37 1 M34 25 Existed D
5. Check the continuity between brake fluid level switch harness connector and ground.

Brake fluid level switch E

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E37 1 Ground Not existed
BRC
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 8. G
8.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between brake fluid level switch harness connector and ground.
H
Brake fluid level switch
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
I
E37 2 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9. J
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 9.
9.CHECK COMBINATION METER
K
Check the combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). L
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
M
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010723699

1.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH N

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between terminals of brake fluid level switch. O

Brake fluid level switch

Condition Continuity
Terminal P
When brake fluid level in reservoir tank is within the specified level. Not existed
1–2 When brake fluid level in reservoir tank is less than the specified
Existed
level.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace the reservoir tank.

BRC-159
C1155 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• LHD models: Refer to BR-34, "Disassembly and Assembly".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-97, "Disassembly and Assembly".

BRC-160
C1160 INCOMPLETE DECEL G SENSOR CALIBRATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1160 INCOMPLETE DECEL G SENSOR CALIBRATION
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723700

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
DECEL G SEN SET
C1160 When calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor is not complete.
(Decel G sensor set)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Incomplete calibration of decel G sensor
E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function BRC
• ABS function (4WD models)
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function (4WD models) G
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module) H
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
I
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. J
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1160” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-161, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723701

1.CALIBRATION OF DECEL G SENSOR M

Perform decel G sensor calibration. Refer to BRC-102, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 2. N
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
O
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1160” detected?
P
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-161
C1164, C1165 CV SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1164, C1165 CV SYSTEM
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723702

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CV 1
C1164 When a malfunction is detected in cut valve 1.
(Cut valve 1)
CV 2
C1165 When a malfunction is detected in cut valve 2.
(Cut valve 2)

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1164” or “C1165” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723703

BRC-162
C1164, C1165 CV SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS A
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.
Is any DTC “C1164” or “C1165” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3. B
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK CUT VALVE POWER SUPPLY
C
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.
D
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION: BRC
Never start engine.
5. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.
G
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4. I
4.CHECK CUT VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. J
2. Check the 30A fusible link (#G).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (25) and 30A fusible link (#G).
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
L
5.CHECK CUT VALVE GGROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the M
ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) N

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E36 Ground Existed O
38
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6. P
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK TERMINAL
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".

BRC-163
C1164, C1165 CV SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC-164
C1166, C1167 SV SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1166, C1167 SV SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723704

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
SV 1
C1166 When a malfunction is detected in suction valve 1.
(Suction valve 1)
SV 2 D
C1167 When a malfunction is detected in suction valve 2.
(Suction valve 2)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector E
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Fusible link
• Battery power supply system BRC
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function G
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
H
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function I
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module) J
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
K
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
M
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC “C1166” or “C1167” detected? N
YES >> Proceed to BRC-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END O

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723705

1.CHECK CONNECTOR P

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

BRC-165
C1166, C1167 SV SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” again.
Is any DTC “C1166” or “C1167” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK SUCTION VALVE POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SUCTION VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 30A fusible link (#G).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (25) and 30A fusible link (#G).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK SUCTION VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

BRC-166
C1166, C1167 SV SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. A

BRC

BRC-167
C1170 VARIANT CODING
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1170 VARIANT CODING
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723706

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
VARIANT CODING
C1170 When calibration of configuration is not complete.
(Variant coding)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function
• EBD function
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1170” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-168, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723707

1.CONFIGURATION OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

Perform configuration of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-104, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1170” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).

BRC-168
C1170 VARIANT CODING
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation". A
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC

BRC-169
C1197 VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1197 VACUUM SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723708

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
VACUUM SENSOR
C1197 When a malfunction is detected in brake vacuum sensor.
(Vacuum sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• Brake vacuum sensor
• Vacuum piping
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
Electrical vacuum assistance of brake booster is suspended.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1197” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723709

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the brake vacuum sensor harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
3. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1197” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE
BRC-170
C1197 VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the brake booster and the check valve. A
- LHD models: Refer to BR-38, "Inspection and Adjustment".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-100, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace the brake booster or the check valve.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-36, "Removal and installation".
C
• RHD models: Refer to BR-99, "Removal and installation".
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
With CONSULT D
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. E
Is DTC “C1197” detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END BRC
5.CHECK VACUUM PIPING
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the vacuum piping. G
- LHD models
• MR20DD: Refer to BR-40, "MR20DD : Inspection".
• QR25DE: Refer to BR-41, "QR25DE : Inspection". H
• R9M: Refer to BR-42, "R9M : Inspection".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-102, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace the vacuum piping.
• LHD models
J
- MR20DD: Refer to BR-40, "MR20DD : Removal and Installation".
- QR25DE: Refer to BR-41, "QR25DE : Removal and Installation".
- R9M: Refer to BR-42, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-102, "Removal and Installation". K
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (3)
With CONSULT L
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
M
Is DTC “C1197” detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> INSPECTION END
N
7.CHECK TERMINAL
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector. O
3. Check the brake vacuum sensor pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
4. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
5. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector. P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
8.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (4)
With CONSULT

BRC-171
C1197 VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
1. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1197” detected?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> INSPECTION END
9.CHECK BRAKE VACUUMSENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector.

Brake vacuum sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 12
E31 2 E36 24 Existed
3 5
5. Check the continuity between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ground.

Brake vacuum sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E31 2 Ground Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
10.REPLACE BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Replace the brake vacuum sensor.
- LHD models: Refer to BR-36, "Removal and installation".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-99, "Removal and installation".
4. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
6. Start the engine.
7. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1197” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-172
C1198 VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1198 VACUUM SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723710

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
• When an open circuit is detected in vacuum sensor circuit.
VACUUM SEN CIR
C1198 • When a short circuit is detected in vacuum sensor circuit.
(Vacuum sensor circuit)
• When a malfunction is detected in vacuum sensor noise.
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• Brake vacuum sensor E
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
Electrical vacuum assistance of brake booster is suspended. BRC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
J
Is DTC “C1198” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-173, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". K
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723711

L
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the brake vacuum sensor harness connector for disconnection or looseness. M
3. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. N
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)
O
With CONSULT
1. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON. P
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1198” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK TERMINAL
BRC-173
C1198 VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Check the brake vacuum sensor pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
4. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
5. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1198” detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END
5.CHECK BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector.

Brake vacuum sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E31 2 Ground Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.REPLACE BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Replace the brake vacuum sensor.
- LHD models: Refer to BR-36, "Removal and installation".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-99, "Removal and installation".
4. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
6. Start the engine.
7. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.

BRC-174
C1198 VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is DTC “C1198” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). A
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END B

BRC

BRC-175
C1199 BRAKE BOOSTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1199 BRAKE BOOSTER
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723712

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
BRAKE BOOSTER
C1199 When brake booster vacuum is approx. 0 kPa (0 mmHg) during engine running.
(Brake booster)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• Brake vacuum sensor
• Vacuum piping
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1199” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723713

BRC-176
C1199 BRAKE BOOSTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
- RHD models: Refer toBR-100, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace the brake booster or the check valve.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-36, "Removal and installation". B
• RHD models: Refer to BR-99, "Removal and installation".
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
C
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
2. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. D
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1199” detected? E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END
5.CHECK VACUUM PIPING BRC

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Check the vacuum piping.
- LHD models G
• MR20DD: Refer to BR-40, "MR20DD : Inspection".
• QR25DE: Refer to BR-41, "QR25DE : Inspection".
• R9M: Refer to BR-42, "R9M : Inspection". H
- RHD models: Refer to BR-102, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6. I
NO >> Replace the vacuum piping.
• LHD models
- MR20DD: Refer to BR-40, "MR20DD : Removal and Installation".
J
- QR25DE: Refer to BR-41, "QR25DE : Removal and Installation".
- R9M: Refer to BR-42, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-102, "Removal and Installation".
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (3) K

With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”. L
2. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. M
Is DTC “C1199” detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> INSPECTION END N

7.CHECK TERMINAL
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. O
2. Disconnect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Check the brake vacuum sensor pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
4. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
5. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with P
harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
8.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (4)
BRC-177
C1199 BRAKE BOOSTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
With CONSULT
1. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1199” detected?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> INSPECTION END
9.CHECK BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector.

Brake vacuum sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
E31 2 Ground Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
10.REPLACE BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Replace the brake vacuum sensor.
- LHD models: Refer to BR-36, "Removal and installation".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-99, "Removal and installation".
4. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds or more.
6. Start the engine.
7. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1199” detected?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-178
C119A VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C119A VACUUM SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723714

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
VACUUM SEN VOLT
C119A When a malfunction is detected in supply power voltage of vacuum sensor.
(Vacuum sensor voltage)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• Brake vacuum sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E
FAIL-SAFE
Electrical vacuum assistance of brake booster is suspended.
BRC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF G
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2. H

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

With CONSULT I
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C119A” detected? J
YES >> Proceed to BRC-179, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723715

1.CHECK CONNECTOR L
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the brake vacuum sensor harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
3. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness. M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, and GO TO 2. N
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT O
1. Connect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. P
Is DTC “C119A” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

BRC-179
C119A VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
2. Disconnect the brake vacuum sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ground.

Brake vacuum sensor

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E31 3 Ground Approx. 0 V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Start the engine.
5. Check the voltage between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ground.

Brake vacuum sensor

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E31 3 Ground 4.75 − 5.25 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector.

Brake vacuum sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E31 3 E36 5 Existed
4. Check the continuity between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ground.

Brake vacuum sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E31 3 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply system. Refer to BRC-188,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK BRAKE VACUUM SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between brake vacuum sensor harness connector and ground.

Brake vacuum sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E31 2 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK TERMINAL
1. Check the vacuum sensor pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.

BRC-180
C119A VACUUM SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). A
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. B

BRC

BRC-181
C1B60 CHASSIS CONTROL SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
C1B60 CHASSIS CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723716

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
EXTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
C1B60 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control system.
(External control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• Chassis control module
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “C1B60” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-182, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723717

1.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL SYSTEM

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to DAS-204, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Check the chassis control module harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
4. Check the chassis control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness.
5. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
6. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection or looseness.
7. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.

BRC-182
C1B60 CHASSIS CONTROL SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the connector, and GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS A

With CONSULT
1. Connect the chassis control module harness connector. B
2. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. C
Is any DTC “C1B60” or “U1000” detected?
YES (“C1B60”)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation". D
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END E

BRC

BRC-183
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723718

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT When CAN communication signal is not continuously transmitted or received for
U1000
(CAN communication circuit) 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• CAN communication system malfunction
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
• ABS function*
• EBD function*
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
*: When a malfunction detected in CAN communication [between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
and chassis control module]
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “U1000” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-184, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723719

Proceed to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

BRC-184
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN)
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723720

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
SYSTEM COMM(CAN) When ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not transmitting or receiving
U1002
(CAN system communication) CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or less.

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• CAN communication line
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function BRC
*
• ABS function
• EBD function*
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function G
• Brake assist function
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function H
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine)
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
*: When a malfunction detected in CAN communication [between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) I
and chassis control module]
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K

>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. M
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC “U1002” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723721 O

CAUTION:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
P
• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.
1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR
With CONSULT
1. Select “ABS” and “CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor” in order with CONSULT.

BRC-185
U1002 SYSTEM COMM (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
2. Check the malfunction history between each control unit connected to ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit).
Check the result of “PAST”?
All items are “OK”>>Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
“TRANSMIT DIAG” is other than ”OK”>>GO TO 2.
“METER/M&A” is other than “OK”>>GO TO 3.
A control unit other than “ABS” and “METER/M&A” are anything other than “OK”>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK TRANSMITTING SIDE UNIT
Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals (14) and (26) for damage
or loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Erase self-diagnosis results. Then perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” with CONSULT.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair".
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER
• Check damage or loose connection between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (14) and combination meter harness connector terminal (42).
• Check damage or loose connection between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (26) and combination meter harness connector terminal (41).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Erase self-diagnosis results for “METER/M&A”. Then perform self-diagnosis for “METER/M&A”
with CONSULT.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair".
4.CHECK APPLICABLE CONTROL UNIT
Check damage or loose connection of each CAN communication line harness connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Erase self-diagnosis results. Then perform self-diagnosis for applicable control unit with CON-
SULT.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair".

BRC-186
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010723722

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of ABS actuator
U1010
(Control unit [CAN communication]) and electric unit (control unit).

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• VDC function
• TCS function
BRC
• ABS function*
• EBD function*
• Brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function
• Brake assist function G
• Brake force distribution function
• hill start assist function
• Advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine) H
• Active trace control function (control of chassis control module)
• Active ride control function (control of chassis control module)
*: When a malfunction detected in CAN communication [between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
and chassis control module] I

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING J
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION L
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. M
Is DTC “C1010” detected?
YES >> Proceed to BRC-187, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". N
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723723
O
1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector for disconnection and deformation.
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC-187
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723724

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 28 Ground 10 − 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO (With stop / start system)>>GO TO 2.
NO (Without stop / start system)>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(WITH STOP / START SYSTEM)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 10A fuse (#60).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (28) and 10A fuse (#60).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(WITHOUT STOP / START SYSTEM)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 10A fuse (#21).
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (28) and 10A fuse (#21).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
4.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND ABS MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E36 1 Ground 10 – 16 V
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:

BRC-188
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
Never start engine.
4. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. A

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal B
E36 1 Ground 10 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO (R9M engine models)>>GO TO 5.
NO (except for R9M engine models)>>GO TO 6.
D
5.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND ABS MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (R9M ENGINE MODELS)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 40A fusible link (#M). E
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (1) and 40A fusible link (#M).
Is the inspection result normal? BRC
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND ABS MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (EXCEPT FOR R9M ENGINE G
MODELS)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 40A fusible link (#K). H
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (1) and 40A fusible link (#K).
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
7.CHECK ACTUATOR RELAY, ABS IN VALVE, ABS OUT VALVE, CUT VALVE AND SUCTION VALVE POW- J
ER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. K

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage L
Connector Terminal
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
3. Turn the ignition switch ON. M
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
4. Check the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and ground. N

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Voltage
Connector Terminal O
E36 25 Ground 10 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
P
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK ACTUATOR RELAY, ABS IN VALVE, ABS OUT VALVE, CUT VALVE AND SUCTION VALVE POW-
ER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 30A fusible link (#G).

BRC-189
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
3. Check the continuity and short circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness con-
nector terminal (25) and 30A fusible link (#G).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
9.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E36 Ground Existed
38
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
10.CHECK TERMINAL
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness
connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC-190
VDC (ESP) OFF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC (ESP) OFF SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010723728

1.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH OPERATION B

Check that VDC OFF indicator lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when VDC OFF switch is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Proceed to BRC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723729
D

1.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Disconnect the VDC OFF switch harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and VDC
BRC
OFF switch harness connector.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) VDC OFF switch
Continuity G
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E36 15 M5 1 Existed
5. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the H
ground.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) I

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E36 15 Ground Not existed
J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. K
2.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between VDC OFF switch harness connector and ground.
L

VDC OFF switch

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M
M5 2 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. N
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
3.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH
O
Check the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-192, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. P
NO >> Replace the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-223, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the VDC OFF switch harness connector.
3. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” and “OFF SW” according to this order. Check VDC OFF switch signal.

BRC-191
VDC (ESP) OFF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

Condition DATA MONITOR

When VDC OFF switch is pressed and VDC OFF indicator
On
lamp in combination meter is in ON status
When VDC OFF switch is pressed and VDC OFF indicator
Off
lamp in combination meter is in OFF status
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TERMINAL
1. Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with har-
ness connector.
2. Check VDC OFF switch pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010723730

1.CHECK VDC OFF SWITCH

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-223, "Removal and Installation".
3. Check continuity between terminals of VDC OFF switch connector.

VDC OFF switch

Condition Continuity
Terminal
When VDC OFF switch is pressed Existed
1–2
When VDC OFF switch is not pressed Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-223, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-192
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010723731

1.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL SSWITCH OPERATION B

Check that hill descent control indicator lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF/Blinking when hill descent
control switch is operated.
• ON: hill descent control switch is ON and the operational conditions are satisfied C
• Blinking: hill descent control switch is ON and the operational conditions are not satisfied
• OFF: hill descent control switch is OFF
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Proceed to BRC-193, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723732
E

1.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT

BRC
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Disconnect the hill descent control switch harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and hill G
descent control switch harness connector.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) hill descent control switch H
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E36 9 M183 1 Existed
I
5. Check the continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and the
ground.
J
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E36 9 Ground Existed K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. L

2.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the continuity between hill descent control switch harness connector and the ground. M

hill descent control switch

— Continuity
Connector Terminal N
M183 3 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
3.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH P
Check the hill descent control switch. Refer to BRC-194, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace the hill descent control switch. Refer to BRC-224, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL

BRC-193
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
2. Connect the hill descent control switch harness connector.
3. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” and “DDS SW” according to this order. Check hill descent control switch
signal.

Condition DATA MONITOR

When hill descent control switch is pressed and hill descent
On
control indicator lamp in combination meter is in ON status
When hill descent control switch is pressed and hill descent
Off
control indicator lamp in combination meter is in OFF status
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TERMINAL
1. Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage or loose connection with har-
ness connector.
2. Check hill descent control switch pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and
Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010723733

1.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the hill descent control switch. Refer to BRC-224, "Removal and Installation".
3. Check the continuity between hill descent control switch connector terminals.

hill descent control switch

Condition Continuity
Terminal
hill descent control switch is ON Existed
1–3
hill descent control switch is OFF Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace the hill descent control switch. Refer to BRC-224, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-194
ABS WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
ABS WARNING LAMP
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010723734

1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP FUNCTION B

Check that ABS warning lamp in combination meter turns ON for approx. 1 second after ignition switch is
turned ON.
CAUTION: C
Never start engine.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END D
NO >> Proceed to BRC-195, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723735
E
1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT
BRC
Perform the trouble diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BRC-188, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS H
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected? I
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP SIGNAL J

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON, and wait for 10 seconds or more. K
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
2. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” and “ABS WARN LAMP” according to this order.
3. Check that data monitor displays “On” for approx. 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON and then L
changes to “Off”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation". M
NO >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation". N

BRC-195
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010723736

1.CHECK BRAKE WARNING LANP FUNCTION (1)

Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON for approx. 1 second after ignition switch is
turned ON (before engine start).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Proceed to BRC-196, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK BRAKE WARNING LANP FUNCTION (2)
Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when brake fluid level switch is operated
while brake fluid level in reservoir tank is with the specified level.
NOTE:
Brake warning lamp turns ON when brake fluid is less than the specified level (when brake fluid level switch is
ON).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check the brake fluid level switch system. Refer to BRC-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723737

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT
Perform the trouble diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BRC-188, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BRAKE WARNING LAMP SIGNAL
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON, and wait for 10 seconds or more.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
2. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” and “EBD WARN LAMP” according to this order.
3. Check that data monitor displays “On” for approx. 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON and then
changes to “Off”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".

BRC-196
VDC (ESP) WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC (ESP) WARNING LAMP
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010723738

1.CHECK VDC WARNING LAMP FUNCTION B

Check that VDC warning lamp in combination meter turns ON for approx. 1 second after ignition switch is
turned ON.
CAUTION: C
Never start engine.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END D
NO >> Proceed to BRC-197, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723739
E
1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT
BRC
Perform the trouble diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BRC-188, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS H
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected? I
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VDC WARNING LAMP SIGNAL J

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON, and wait for 10 seconds or more. K
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
2. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” and “SLIP/VDC LAMP” according to this order.
3. Check that data monitor displays “On” for approx. 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON and then L
changes to “Off”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation". M
NO >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation". N

BRC-197
VDC (ESP) OFF INDICATOR LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC (ESP) OFF INDICATOR LAMP
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010723740

1.CHECK VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (1)

Check that VDC OFF indicator lamp in combination meter turns ON for approx. 1 second after ignition switch
is turned ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Proceed to BRC-198, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (2)
Check that VDC OFF indicator lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when VDC OFF switch is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check VDC OFF switch system. Refer to BRC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723741

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT
Perform the trouble diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BRC-188, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.CHECK VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP SIGNAL (1)
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
2. Select “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” and “OFF LAMP” according to this order.
3. Check that data monitor displays “On” for approx. 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, and then
changes to “Off”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP SIGNAL (2)
With CONSULT
Check that data monitor displays “On” or “Off” each time when VDC OFF switch is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Check the VDC OFF switch system. Refer to BRC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure".

BRC-198
HILL START ASSIST (UPHILL START SUPPORT) INDICATOR LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
HILL START ASSIST (UPHILL START SUPPORT) INDICATOR LAMP
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000011004422

1.CHECK HILL START ASSIST INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (1) B

Check that hill start assist indicator lamp in combination meter turn ON when hill start assist function is satis-
fied to operational conditions.
NOTE: C
About satisfied to operational conditions, refer to BRC-62, "hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT)
FUNCTION : System Description".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Proceed to BRC-199, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK HILL START ASSIST INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (2) E
Check that hill start assist indicator lamp in combination meter blinks when hill start assist function is operating
conditions.
NOTE: BRC
About operating conditions, refer to BRC-62, "hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT) FUNCTION : Sys-
tem Description".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Proceed to BRC-199, "Diagnosis Procedure".
H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011004423

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER

I
Check the combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. J
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.CHECK HILL START ASSIST INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (1)
Check that hill start assist indicator lamp in combination meter turn ON when hill start assist function is satis- K
fied to operational conditions.
NOTE:
About satisfied to operational conditions, refer to BRC-62, "hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT) L
FUNCTION : System Description".

>> GO TO 3. M
3.CHECK HILL START ASSIST INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (2)
Check that hill start assist indicator lamp in combination meter blinks when hill start assist function is operating
conditions. N
NOTE:
About operating conditions, refer to BRC-62, "hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT) FUNCTION : Sys-
tem Description". O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 4. P
4.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
Check the chassis control module.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

BRC-199
HILL START ASSIST (UPHILL START SUPPORT) INDICATOR LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

5.CHECK HILL START ASSIST INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (3)

Check that hill start assist indicator lamp in combination meter turn ON when hill start assist function is satis-
fied to operational conditions.
NOTE:
About satisfied to operational conditions, refer to BRC-62, "hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT)
FUNCTION : System Description".

>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HILL START ASSIST INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (4)
Check that hill start assist indicator lamp in combination meter blinks when hill start assist function is operating
conditions.
NOTE:
About operating conditions, refer to BRC-62, "hill start assist (UPHILL START SUPPORT) FUNCTION : Sys-
tem Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation".

BRC-200
HILL DECENT CONTROL (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) INDICATOR LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
HILL DECENT CONTROL (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) INDICATOR
A
LAMP
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010723742
B
1.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (1)
Check that hill descent control indicator lamp in combination meter turns ON for approx. 1 second after ignition
C
switch is turned ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Proceed to BRC-201, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
2.CHECK HILL DESCENT CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION (2)
Check that hill descent control indicator lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when hill descent control
switch is operated. BRC
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check hill descent control switch system. Refer to BRC-193, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723743

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- H
CUIT
Perform the trouble diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BRC-188, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. J

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT K
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index". L
NO >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-201
EXCESSIVE OPERATION FREQUENCY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
EXCESSIVE OPERATION FREQUENCY
Description INFOID:0000000010723744

VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function or advanced hill descent control func-
tion (4WD models with gasoline engine) operates in excessive operation frequency.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723745

1.CHECK BRAKING FORCE

Check brake force using a brake tester.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check the brake system.
2.CHECK FRONT AXLE AND REAR AXLE
Check that there is no excessive looseness in front and rear axle.
• Front axle
- 2WD models: Refer to FAX-9, "Inspection".
- 4WD models: Refer to FAX-70, "Inspection".
• Rear axle
- 2WD models: Refer to RAX-6, "Inspection".
- 4WD models: Refer to RAX-16, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
Check the wheel sensor.
• Check installation and damage of wheel sensor.
• Check connection of wheel sensor harness connector.
• Check terminal of wheel sensor harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the wheel sensor.
• Front wheel sensor: Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
• Rear sensor rotor: Refer to BRC-214, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK SENSOR ROTOR
Check that there is no looseness, damage or foreign material on sensor rotor.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the sensor rotor.
• Front sensor rotor: Refer to BRC-216, "FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation".
• Rear sensor rotor: Refer to BRC-216, "REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK WARNING LAMP TURN OFF
• Check that VDC warning lamp and ABS warning lamp turn OFF approx. 1 second after ignition switch is
turned ON.
• Check that VDC warning lamp and ABS warning lamp turn OFF after engine started or driving.
CAUTION:
Brake warning lamp turns ON when parking brake is operated (parking brake switch is ON) (without
electric parking brake system) or brake fluid is less than the specified level (brake fluid level switch is
ON).
Is the inspection result normal?

BRC-202
EXCESSIVE OPERATION FREQUENCY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
YES >> Normal
NO >> Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” with CONSULT. A

BRC

BRC-203
UNEXPECTED BRAKE PEDAL REACTION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
UNEXPECTED BRAKE PEDAL REACTION
Description INFOID:0000000010723746

A malfunction of brake pedal feel (height or others) is detected when brake pedal is depressed.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723747

1.CHECK FRONT AXLE AND REAR AXLE

Check that there is no excessive looseness in front and rear axle.
• Front axle
- 2WD models: Refer to FAX-9, "Inspection".
- 4WD models: Refer to FAX-70, "Inspection".
• Rear axle
- 2WD models: Refer to RAX-6, "Inspection".
- 4WD models: Refer to RAX-16, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.CHECK DISC ROTOR
Check the disc rotor.
• Front
- LHD models: Refer to BR-17, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-81, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
• Rear
- LHD models: Refer to BR-19, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-83, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Refinish or replace the disc rotor.
3.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEAKAGE
Check the fluid leakage.
• Front
- LHD models: Refer to BR-27, "FRONT : Inspection".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-77, "Inspection".
• Rear
- LHD models: Refer to BR-31, "REAR : Inspection".
- RHD models: Refer to BR-94, "REAR : Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
4.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL
Check the each item of brake pedal.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-11, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-75, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Adjust the each item of brake pedal.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-11, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-75, "Inspection and Adjustment".
5.CHECK BRAKING FORCE
Check the brake force using a brake tester.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.

BRC-204
UNEXPECTED BRAKE PEDAL REACTION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NO >> Check each components of brake system.
6.CHECK BRAKE PERFORMANCE A

Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector so that ABS does not operate. Check
that brake force is normal in this condition. Connect harness connectors after checking.
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Normal
NO >> Check each components of brake system.
C

BRC

BRC-205
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG
Description INFOID:0000000010723748

Brake stopping distance is long when ABS function is operated.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723749

CAUTION:
Brake stopping distance on slippery road like rough road, gravel road or snowy road may become
longer when ABS is operated than when ABS is not operated.
1.CHECK BRAKING FORCE
Check the brake force using a brake tester.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check each components of brake system.
2.CHECK BRAKE PERFORMANCE
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector so that ABS does not operate. Check
the brake stopping distance in this condition. Connect harness connectors after checking.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Normal
NO >> Check each components of brake system.

BRC-206
DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Description INFOID:0000000010723750

VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake B
assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function, or advanced hill descent control func-
tion (4WD models with gasoline engine) does not operate.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723751 C

CAUTION:
VDC function, ABS function and EBD function never operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6.2
MPH) or less. D

1.CHECK WARNING LAMP

• Check that ABS warning lamp and VDC warning lamp turn ON and turn OFF approx. 1 second after ignition E
switch is turned ON or driving.
• Check that brake warning lamp turn ON and turn OFF after engine start or driving.
CAUTION:
BRC
Brake warning lamp turns ON when parking brake is operated (parking brake switch is ON) (without
electric parking brake system) or brake fluid is less than the specified level (brake fluid level switch is
ON).
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> Normal
NO >> Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” with CONSULT.
H

BRC-207
BRAKE PEDAL VIBRATION OR OPERATION SOUND OCCURS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
BRAKE PEDAL VIBRATION OR OPERATION SOUND OCCURS
Description INFOID:0000000010723752

• Brake pedal vibrates and motor sound from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) occurs, when the
engine starts.
• Brake pedal vibrates during braking.
CAUTION:
Vibration may be felt during brake pedal is lightly depressed (just placing a foot on it) in the following
conditions. This is normal.
• When shifting gears
• When driving on slippery road
• During cornering at high speed
• When passing over bumps or grooves [Approx. 50 mm (1.97 in) or more]
• When pulling away just after starting engine [at approx. 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) or more]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723753

1.SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check that there are pedal vibrations when the engine is started.
Do vibrations occur?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check the brake pedal.
• LHD models: Refer to BR-22, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• RHD models: Refer to BR-86, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2.SYMPTOM CHECK 2
Check that motor sound from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) occurs when the engine starts.
Does the operation sound occur?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS” with CONSULT.
3.SYMPTOM CHECK 3
Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) switches are operated.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> Check that radio (including wiring), antenna and antenna lead-in wires are not located near ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit). Move them if they are located near ABS actuator and elec-
tric unit (control unit).
NO >> Normal

BRC-208
VEHICLE JERKS DURING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VEHICLE JERKS DURING
A
Description INFOID:0000000010723754

The vehicle jerks when VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip differential B
(BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function or advanced
hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline engine) operates.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010723755 C

1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check that the vehicle jerks when VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited slip D
differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill start assist function or
advanced hill descent control function operates.
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> Normal
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1) BRC

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
G
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC.
NO >> GO TO 3. H
3.CHECK CONNECTOR
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the connector terminal for deformation, disconnection and looseness.
4. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector, and perform self-diagnosis J
for “ABS” again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. K
NO >> Poor connection of connector terminal. Repair or replace connector terminal.
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
L
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” and “TRANSMISSION”.
Is DTC detected?
M
YES >> Check the DTC.
NO >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• LHD models: Refer to BRC-217, "LHD : Removal and Installation".
• RHD models: Refer to BRC-220, "RHD : Removal and Installation". N

BRC-209
VDC (ESP) WARNING LAMP, ABS WARNING LAMP AND BRAKE WARNING
LAMP TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC (ESP) WARNING LAMP, ABS WARNING LAMP AND BRAKE WARN-
ING LAMP TURN ON
Description INFOID:0000000010737210

ABS warning lamp and Brake warning lamp turn ON for a moment when restating the engine. (Vehicles with
the stop / start system)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010737211

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
CAUTION:
The vehicle must be in a stopped state.
2. Connect booster battery (12V) and jumper cable to battery cable.
3. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “ENGINE”.
4. Select “AUTO STOP START” in “ACTIVE TEST”.
5. Touch “Start”.
CAUTION:
• Since the engine runs with the hood open, special care must be taken when performing the
work.
• If the idling stop state cannot be developed.
- M/T models: Refer to EC-848, "STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description (M/T models)".
- CVT models: Refer to EC-856, "STOP/START SYSTEM : System Description (CVT models)".
6. Check the ABS warning lamp state and the brake warning lamp state when “Cancel” is touched under the
idling stop state.
Are the ABS warning lamp and the brake warning lamp OFF?
YES >> Check the battery. Refer to PG-120, "R9M : Work Flow".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF → ON.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
• Start the engine.
2. Repeat step 1 two or more times.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-210
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000010723756

B
Symptom Result
Brake pedal slightly vibrates and operation sound (motor sound and sound from suspen-
sion) occurs when VDC function, TCS function, ABS function, EBD function, brake limited
This is not a malfunction, because it is C
slip differential (BLSD) function, brake assist function, brake force distribution function, hill
caused by VDC function, TCS function,
start assist function or advanced hill descent control function (4WD models with gasoline
ABS function, EBD function, brake limited
engine) operates.
slip differential (BLSD) function, brake as-
Brake stopping distance may become longer than models without ABS function depending sist function, brake force distribution func- D
on the road conditions, when ABS function is operated on slippery road like rough road, tion, hill start assist function and
gravel road or snowy road. advanced hill descent control function
(4WD models with gasoline engine) that
Brake pedal vibrates and operation sound occurs during sudden acceleration and corner-
are normally operated.
E
ing, when VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differential (BLSD) function, brake
assist function or brake force distribution function is operated.
This is not a malfunction, because it is BRC
Brake pedal vibrates and motor sound from the engine room occurs, when the engine starts
caused by operation check of ABS actua-
or the vehicle starts just after starting the engine.
tor and electric unit (control unit).
Acceleration may be felt insufficient depending on the road conditions. This is not a malfunction, because it is
caused by TCS function that puts the G
TCS function may operate momentarily, while driving on a road where friction coefficient highest priority to obtain the optimum
varies, or when downshifting, or fully depressing accelerator pedal. traction (stability).
ABS warning lamp and VDC warning lamp may turn ON, when the vehicle is on a rotating H
turntable or is given a strong shaking or large vibrations on a ship while the engine is run-
ning.
VDC warning lamp may turn ON and VDC function, TCS function, brake limited slip differ- In this case, restart the engine on a nor- I
ential (BLSD) function, brake assist function and brake force distribution function may not mal road. If the normal condition is re-
normally operate, when driving on a special road the is extremely slanted (bank in a circuit stored, there is no malfunction. In that
course). case, erase “ABS” self-diagnosis result
A malfunction in yaw rate/side/decel G sensor system may be detected when the vehicle
memory with CONSULT. J
sharply turns during a spin turn, acceleration turn or drift driving while VDC function, TCS
function, brake assist function and brake force distribution function are OFF (VDC OFF
switch is pressed and VDC OFF indicator lamp is in ON status).
K
This is normal. (When checking the vehi-
The vehicle speed does not increase, when the accelerator pedal is depressed while the cle on a chassis dynamometer, operate
vehicle is on a 2-wheel chassis dynamometer for speedometer check. VDC OFF switch so that TCS function is
OFF.) L
This is not a malfunction, because it is
Flow sound of brake fluid from engine room occurs when hill start assist function operates. caused by hill start assist function that is
normally operated. M

BRC-211
WHEEL SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

WHEEL SENSOR
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010723757

JSFIA0955GB

Front LH wheel sensor

Identification line

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

NOTE:
Front RH wheel sensor is symmetrically opposite of LH.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723758

REMOVAL
1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the mudguard (front). Refer to EXT-30, "FRONT MUDGUARD : Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove front wheel sensor from steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
Never rotate and never pull front wheel sensor as much as possible, when pulling out.
4. Remove front wheel sensor harness from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never twist or pull front wheel sensor harness, when removing.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal.
• Check that there is no foreign material like iron powder or damage on inner surface of front wheel sensor
mounting hole of steering knuckle and sensor rotor. Install after cleaning when there are foreign material like
iron powder, or replace when there is a malfunction.

BRC-212
WHEEL SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• Never twist front wheel sensor harness when installing front wheel
sensor. Check that grommet is fully inserted to bracket . A
Check that front wheel sensor harness is not twisted after installa-
tion.
CAUTION:
B
Check that front wheel sensor identification line faces toward
the vehicle front.

JPFIC0209ZZ

REAR WHEEL SENSOR D

REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010723759

E
2WD

BRC

JSFIA2266GB
M

Rear LH wheel sensor Rear LH wheel sensor harness con-

nector N
: Vehicle front

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) O

NOTE:
Rear RH wheel sensor is symmetrically opposite of LH.
4WD P

BRC-213
WHEEL SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]

JSFIA2267GB

Rear LH wheel sensor Rear LH wheel sensor harness con-

nector

: Vehicle front

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

NOTE:
Rear RH wheel sensor is symmetrically opposite of LH.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723760

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear wheel sensor from rear wheel hub assembly. (2WD)
CAUTION:
Never rotate or pull rear wheel sensor as much as possible, when pulling out.
2. Remove rear wheel sensor from axle housing. (4WD)
CAUTION:
Never rotate or pull rear wheel sensor as much as possible, when pulling out.
3. Remove rear wheel sensor harness from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never twist and never pull rear wheel sensor harness, when removing.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Check that there is no foreign material like iron powder or damage on inner surface of rear wheel sensor
mounting hole of rear final drive and sensor rotor. Install after cleaning when there are foreign material like
iron powder, or replace when there is a malfunction.

BRC-214
WHEEL SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• Never twist rear wheel sensor harness when installing rear wheel
sensor. Check that grommet is fully inserted to bracket . A
Check that rear wheel sensor harness is not twisted after installa-
tion.
B

JPFIC0209ZZ

BRC

BRC-215
SENSOR ROTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723761

REMOVAL
Replace wheel hub as an assembly when replacing because sensor rotor cannot be disassembled.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Replace wheel hub as an assembly when replacing because sensor rotor cannot be disassembled.
• 2WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".
• 4WD: Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation".
REAR SENSOR ROTOR
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723762

REMOVAL
2WD
Replace wheel hub as a assembly when replacing because sensor rotor cannot be disassembled. Refer to
RAX-7, "Removal and Installation".
4WD
1. Remove drive shaft. Refer to RAX-22, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove sensor rotor from rear drive shaft. Refer to RAX-22, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

BRC-216
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
A
LHD
LHD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010723763
B
LHD
C

BRC

J
JSFIA2432GB

ABS actuator and electric unit (con- ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Bracket
trol unit) harness connector trol unit) K
To master cylinder secondary side To master cylinder primary side To rear LH caliper
To front RH caliper To front LH caliper To rear RH caliper
L
: Vehicle front

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

M
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

LHD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723764

N
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal. Refer to BRC-9, "Precautions for Removing Battery
Terminal". O
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-13, "Draining".
3. Remove the engine cover. Refer to EM-306, "Removal and Installation".
P
4. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-25, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EXT-25, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-217
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
6. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector , follow the procedure below.
a. Push the pawl .
b. Move the lever in the direction until locked.
c. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector.

JSFIA1350ZZ

7. Loosen flare nut of brake tube using a flare nut wrench, and then remove brake tube between master cyl-
inder and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BR-32, "Removal and Installation".
8. LIft up the vehicle.
9. Remove clip at the heat insulator lower side to make working
space.

: Vehicle front

JSFIA2488ZZ

10. Remove bolts at the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) bracket lower side.

: Vehicle front

JSFIA2489ZZ

11. Lift down the vehicle.

12. Remove the clip of the air compressor high-pressure pipe to
make working space.

: Vehicle front

13. Remove the bolt at the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) bracket upper side, then remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit as a set with bracket.
CAUTION:
• Never remove and never install ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) by holding harness connector. JSFIA2490ZZ
• Be careful not to drop ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit) and apply excessive impact to it.
14. Remove bracket from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.

BRC-218
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• When replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), remove the inlet hole protector for brake tube
just before performing. A
• When installing brake tube, tighten to the specified torque using a flare nut torque wrench so that flare nut
and brake tube are not damaged. Refer to BR-32, "Exploded View".
• Never remove and install actuator by holding actuator harness.
B
• Bleed air from brake piping after installation. Refer to BR-14, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Never apply excessive impact to actuator, such as by dropping it.
• After installing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) har-
ness connector , move the lever in the direction to secure C
the locking.
• When replacing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), be
sure to perform the configuration. Refer to BRC-104, "Work Proce- D
dure".

JSFIA1352ZZ

RHD BRC

RHD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010723765

G
RHD

JSFIA2433GB
O

ABS actuator and electric unit (con- ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Bracket
trol unit) harness connector trol unit) P
To master cylinder secondary side To master cylinder primary side To rear LH caliper
To front RH caliper To front LH caliper To rear RH caliper
: Vehicle front

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

BRC-219
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
RHD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723766

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal. Refer to BRC-9, "Precautions for Removing Battery
Terminal".
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-77, "Draining".
3. Remove air duct and air cleaner body. Refer to EM-308, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector , follow the procedure below.
a. Push the pawl .
b. Move the lever in the direction until locked.
c. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness
connector.

JSFIA1350ZZ

5. Loosen flare nut of brake tube using a flare nut wrench, and
then remove brake tube between master cylinder and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) . Refer to BR-95,
"Exploded View".

JSFIA2273ZZ

6. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket.
CAUTION:
• Never remove and never install ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) by holding harness
connector.
• Be careful not to drop ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and apply excessive impact to
it.
7. Remove bracket, bushing and collar from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• When replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), remove the inlet hole protector for brake tube
just before performing.
• When installing brake tube, tighten to the specified torque using a flare nut torque wrench so that flare nut
and brake tube are not damaged. Refer to BR-95, "Exploded View".
• Never remove and install actuator by holding actuator harness.
• Bleed air from brake piping after installation. Refer to BR-78, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Never apply excessive impact to actuator, such as by dropping it.

BRC-220
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
• After installing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) har-
ness connector , move the lever in the direction to secure A
the locking.
• When replacing the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), be
sure to perform the configuration. Refer to BRC-104, "Work Proce-
B
dure".

JSFIA1352ZZ

BRC

BRC-221
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723767

REMOVAL
1. Remove spiral cable assembly. Refer to SR-23, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove steering angle sensor.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Perform steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment when steering angle sensor is removed and
installed, or replaced. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".

BRC-222
VDC (ESP) OFF SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
VDC (ESP) OFF SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723768

REMOVAL B
1. Remove lower instrument panel.
• For LHD, refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
• For RHD, refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation". C
2. Remove switch bracket.
• For LHD, refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
• For RHD, refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation". D
3. Remove VDC OFF switch from switch bracket while pushing
the pawl.
NOTE: E
For design of VDC OFF switch, refer to BRC-48, "VDC (ESP) FUNC-
TION : System Description".
BRC

G
JSFIA2274ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. H

BRC-223
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH VDC (ESP)]
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (DOWNHILL DRIVE SUPPORT) SWITCH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010723769

REMOVAL
1. Remove center console switch panel.
• For LHD, refer to IP-25, "Removal and Installation".
• For RHD, refer to IP-52, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove switch bracket.
3. Remove hill descent control switch from switch bracket while
pushing the pawl.
NOTE:
For design of hill descent control switch, refer to BRC-28, "hill
descent control (Downhill Drive Support) Switch".

JSFIA2274ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

BRC-224
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010930903

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
BRC
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010930904

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key K
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
L
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition M
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
N
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of O
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE: P
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

BRC-225
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.

D4D engine : 20 minutes

CAUTION:
• Never use the distance sensor removed from vehicle. Never disassemble or remodel.
• Erase DTC when replacing parts of FEB system. Then check the operation of FEB system after radar
alignment if necessary.
• Never change FEB system state ON/OFF without the consent of the customer.
• Turn the FEB system OFF in conditions similar to driving, such as free rollers or a chassis dyna-
mometer.

BRC-226
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000010836772
B

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description C
Tool name

D
KV99112700
(—) Uses for radar alignment
ICC target board E

JSOIA1012ZZ

BRC
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010836765

G
Tool name Description
Spirit level Uses for distance sensor initial vertical align-
ment.
H

JSOIA1620ZZ

BRC-227
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010721663

LHD MODELS

JSOIA1636ZZ

Back side of front bumper

No. Component parts Function

• Brake fluid pressure control signal is received from distance sensor
via chassis communication.
• Brake fluid pressure control signal is transmitted to ABS actuator
Chassis control unit
electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• Refer to DAS-166, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installa-
tion location.
• Vehicle speed signal and the operation statuses of the VDC, TCS and
ABS systems, etc. are transmitted to the distance sensor via CAN
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) communication.
• Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
• CVT control related signal is transmitted to distance sensor via CAN
communication.
• Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
TCM
cation" for detailed installation location. (Gasoline engine models)
• Refer to TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation" for detailed installation location. (Diesel engine models)

BRC-228
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
No. Component parts Function
A
• When Forward Emergency Braking operates, an engine torque down
request signal is received from the distance sensor.
• Refer to EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location" for detailed installation location. (MR20DD engine models) B
ECM
• Refer to EC-440, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installa-
tion location. (QR25DE engine models)
• Refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location. (R9M engine models) C
Stop lamp switch is installed at the upper part of the brake pedal and
Stop lamp switch
detects a brake operation performed by the driver.
• Performs the following operations using the signals received from the D
distance sensor via the CAN communication
- Description: Displays the FEB operation status
Combination meter - System display and warning: BRC-238, "Menu Displayed by Pressing
Each Switch" E
• Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for
detailed installation location.
• Stop lamp switch signal is transmitted to the distance sensor via CAN BRC
communication.
BCM
• Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation" for detailed installation location.
G
Steering angle sensor signal is transmitted to distance sensor via CAN
Steering angle sensor
communication.
• While Forward Emergency Braking is operating, when the system
wants to recommend an operation to the driver, and when the system
H
is canceled, a buzzer sounds due to a sonar output request from the
distance sensor.
Sonar control unit
• Refer to SN-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
I
location. (With Park Assist)
• Refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location. (Without Park Assist)
Distance sensor detects radar reflected from a vehicle ahead by irradi- J
Distance sensor ating radar forward and calculates a distance from the vehicle ahead
and relative speed, based on the detected signal.
K
RHD MODELS

BRC-229
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

JSOIA1637ZZ

Back side of front bumper

No. Component parts Function

Steering angle sensor signal is transmitted to distance sensor via CAN
Steering angle sensor
communication.
• Performs the following operations using the signals received from the
distance sensor via the CAN communication
- Description: Displays the FEB operation status
Combination meter - System display and warning: BRC-238, "Menu Displayed by Pressing
Each Switch"
• Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for
detailed installation location.
Stop lamp switch is installed at the upper part of the brake pedal and
Stop lamp switch
detects a brake operation performed by the driver.
• CVT control related signal is transmitted to distance sensor via CAN
communication.
• Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
TCM
cation" for detailed installation location. (Gasoline engine models)
• Refer to TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation" for detailed installation location. (Diesel engine models)
• When Forward Emergency Braking operates, an engine torque down
request signal is received from the distance sensor.
• Refer to EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location" for detailed installation location. (MR20DD engine models)
ECM
• Refer to EC-440, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installa-
tion location. (QR25DE engine models)
• Refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location. (R9M engine models)
• Vehicle speed signal and the operation statuses of the VDC, TCS and
ABS systems, etc. are transmitted to the distance sensor via CAN
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) communication.
• Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.

BRC-230
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
No. Component parts Function
A
• Stop lamp switch signal is transmitted to the distance sensor via CAN
communication.
BCM
• Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
cation" for detailed installation location. B
• Brake fluid pressure control signal is received from distance sensor
via chassis communication.
• Brake fluid pressure control signal is transmitted to ABS actuator
Chassis control unit
electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
C
• Refer to DAS-166, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installa-
tion location.
• While Forward Emergency Braking is operating, when the system D
wants to recommend an operation to the driver, and when the system
is canceled, a buzzer sounds due to a sonar output request from the
distance sensor.
Sonar control unit E
• Refer to SN-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location. (With Park Assist)
• Refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location. (Without Park Assist)
BRC
Distance sensor detects radar reflected from a vehicle ahead by irradi-
Distance sensor ating radar forward and calculates a distance from the vehicle ahead
and relative speed, based on the detected signal.
G
Distance Sensor INFOID:0000000010727967

• Distance sensor is installed on the back of the front bumper and H

detects a vehicle ahead by using millimeter waves.
• Distance sensor detects radar reflected from a vehicle ahead by
irradiating radar forward and calculates a distance from the vehicle
ahead and relative speed, based on the detected signal. I
• When judging the danger of crash according to the distance from
the vehicle ahead and the relative speed, the distance sensor
transmits a signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). J

JSOIA1619ZZ
K
Stop Lamp Switch INFOID:0000000010727968

• Stop lamp switch is installed at the upper part of the brake pedal L
and detects a brake operation performed by the driver.
• Stop lamp switch is turned ON, when depressing the brake pedal.
• Stop lamp switch signal is input to BCM. Stop lamp switch signals
M
are transmitted from BCM to distance sensor via CAN communica-
tion.

JSOIA0439ZZ O

BRC-231
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000010721664

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSOIA1621GB

DISTANCE SENSOR INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM

Input Signal Item

Transmit unit Signal name Description

Closed throttle position signal Receives idle position state (ON/OFF)
CAN com-
ECM munica- Accelerator pedal position signal Receives accelerator pedal position (angle)
tion
Engine speed signal Receives engine speed
Input speed signal Receives the number of revolutions of input shaft
CAN com- Current gear position signal Receives a current gear position
TCM munica-
tion Shift position signal Receives a selector lever position
Output shaft revolution signal Receives the number of revolutions of output shaft
CAN com-
BCM munica- Stop lamp switch signal Receives an operational state of the brake pedal
tion

BRC-232
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
Transmit unit Signal name Description
A
ABS malfunction signal Receives a malfunction state of ABS
ABS operation signal Receives an operational state of ABS
ABS warning lamp signal Receives an ON/OFF state of ABS warning lamp B
TCS malfunction signal Receives a malfunction state of TCS
ABS actuator CAN com-
and electric unit munica- TCS operation signal Receives an operational state of TCS
(control unit) tion VDC OFF switch signal Receives an ON/OFF state of VDC C
VDC malfunction signal Receives a malfunction state of VDC
VDC operation signal Receives an operational state of VDC
D
Vehicle speed signal (ABS) Receives wheel speeds of four wheels
Yaw rate signal Receives yaw rate acting on the vehicle
CAN com- E
Steering angle Receives the number of revolutions, turning direction,
munica- Steering angle sensor signal
sensor turning angle speed of the steering wheel
tion
CAN com- BRC
Combination Receives a selection state of Forward Emergency
munica- System selection signal
meter Brake
tion
Stop lamp Transmits a operational state of the brake pedal to the
Stop lamp switch signal G
switch BCM

Output Signal Item

H
Reception unit Signal name Description
CAN commu-
ECM Engine torque down request signal Transmits a signal to control the engine torque.
nication I
ABS actuator
and electric CAN commu- Transmits a brake fluid pressure control signal to acti-
Brake fluid pressure control signal
unit (control nication vates the brake via chassis control module
J
unit)
Vehicle ahead detection
indicator signal
Meter display Transmits a signal to display a state of the system on the K
Combination CAN commu- FEB system display sig-
signal information display via front camera unit
meter nication nal
FEB warning signal
L
FEB warning lamp signal Transmits a signal to illuminate the FEB warning lamp
CAN commu-
BCM Stop lamp drive signal Transmits a signal to active the stop lamp.
nication
M
Sonar control CAN commu-
Buzzer drive signal Transmits a buzzer signal to active the buzzer
unit nication

DESCRIPTION N
• Forward emergency braking (FEB) system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision
with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.
• FEB system operate at speeds above approximately 5km/h (3 MPH). O
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
• The FEB system uses a distance sensor to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.
• If there is a risk of a collision, FEB issues a visual and audible warning signal to the combination meter via P
CAN communication.
• If the driver does not take action, FEB issues the second visual and audible warning.
• And if the risk of a collision becomes imminent, FEB system applies braking command to ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
FEB Operating Condition
• FEB setting is ON (FEB warning lamp OFF)
• Vehicle speed: Approximately 5km/h and above
BRC-233
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
CVT models

JSOIA0952ZZ

Start of warning and partial brake Start of harder brake

Partial brake Harder brake

Situation Brake Warning

No obstacle approached No operation —
Partial brake

• Sounds the buzzer

Start of warning and partial brake
• Blinks vehicle ahead indicator

JSOIA0222ZZ

Harder brake

• Sounds the buzzer

Start of harder brake (Higher pitched buzzer)
• Indicates FEB warning

JSOIA0222ZZ

M/T models

JSOIA1130ZZ

BRC-234
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

Start of warning Start of partial brake Start of harder brake A

Partial brake Harder brake

B
Situation Brake Warning
No obstacle approached No operation —
• Sounds the buzzer C
Start of warning No operation
• Blinks vehicle ahead indicator
Partial brake

D
• Sounds the buzzer
Start of partial brake (Higher pitched buzzer)
• Indicates FEB warning
E

JSOIA0222ZZ

Harder brake BRC

• Sounds the buzzer

Start of harder brake (Higher pitched buzzer) G
• Indicates FEB warning

JSOIA0222ZZ H
CAUTION:
It is the driver′s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. As
there is a performance limit, it may not provide a warning or brake in certain conditions. I

BRC-235
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010727972

JSOIA1638GB

Fail-safe (Distance Sensor) INFOID:0000000010930906

If a malfunction occurs in the distance sensor cancels control, sounds a beep, and turns ON the FEB system
warning and warning lamp.

System Buzzer Warning lamp/Indicator lamp Description

• FEB system display: Yellow
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) Beep Cancel
• FEB warning lamp: On

WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST

BRC-236
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator Lamp INFOID:0000000010727970

Name Design Layout/Function

For layout, refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
B
FEB warning lamp For function, refer to MWI-36, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS :
FEB Warning Lamp".
C

BRC

BRC-237
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
OPERATION
Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000010721665

JSOIA1622ZZ

No. Switch name Description

FEB system setting screen
The setting of FEB system can be switched between ON and OFF
(Information display)

Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch INFOID:0000000010721666

SYSTEM DISPLAY

JSOIA1623ZZ

No. Switch name Description

• FEB warning lamp indicates that an abnormal condition is present in FEB system
FEB warning lamp
• When the FEB system turns OFF, the FEB warning lamp will illuminate.
FEB system indicator • Indicates that FEB system is ON
(Warning systems indicator) • Blinks when approaching vehicle ahead
FEB system indicator “Forward” po- • Indicates that FEB system is ON
sition • Blinks when approaching vehicle ahead
FEB warning Displays immediately before the harder brake operates

DISPLAY AND WARNING

Setting Display

BRC-238
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

Display on combination meter Display on combination meter FEB warn- A

System status Condition Buzzer
Upper part Middle part ing lamp

FEB OFF — — —
C

JSOIA1624ZZ

White White
D

E
FEB ON System ON OFF —

JSOIA1428ZZ JSOIA1625ZZ
BRC

Warning Operation
G
Display on combination meter Display on combination meter FEB warn-
System status Action Buzzer
Upper part Middle part ing lamp

Yellow (Blink) Yellow (Blink) H

There is a
possibility of a Short con-
collision with Partial brake tinuous I
the vehicle beeps
ahead

JSOIA1290ZZ JSOIA1625ZZ J
Red⇔White Yellow (Blink)

An obstacle K
ahead is
Continu-
avoided due to Harder brake
ous beeps
the system ap-
plying braking. L
JSOIA1477ZZ JSOIA1625ZZ

Warning Display M

BRC-239
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

Display on combination meter Display on combination meter FEB Master

System sta- warn- warn-
Condition Buzzer
tus Upper part Middle part ing ing
lamp lamp
Yellow (Blink) Yellow

Yellow
FEB system
malfunction Beep

The FEB sys-

tem is auto- JSOIA1290ZZ JSOIA1625ZZ

matically Yellow (Blink) Yellow

canceled.*
Yellow
Dirt around
the distance Beep
sensor

JSOIA1290ZZ JSOIA1625ZZ

NOTE:
*: The system operates if the ignition switch is turned OFF⇒ON after the condition improves

BRC-240
HANDLING PRECAUTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
HANDLING PRECAUTION
A
Description INFOID:0000000010721667

PRECAUTIONS FOR FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING B

• The forward emergency braking system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the
driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to care-
lessness or dangerous driving techniques. C
• The forward emergency braking system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
• The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the for-
ward emergency braking system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 80
km/h (50 MPH). D
• The distance sensor does not detect the following objects:
- Pedestrians, animals, or obstacles in the roadway
- Oncoming vehicles E
- Crossing vehicles
• The distance sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
- Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
- Interference by other radar sources. BRC
- Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.
- If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.motorcycle)
- When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. G
- When towing a trailer.
• In some road or traffic conditions, the forward emergency braking system may unexpectedly apply partial
braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
H
• Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
• The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The sys-
tem may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area of the front bumper such as ice, snow, I
stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that
check, clean and clear the sensor area of the front bumper regularly.
J

BRC-241
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DISTANCE SENSOR)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DISTANCE SENSOR)
CONSULT Function (LASER/RADAR) INFOID:0000000010981498

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with Distance sensor.

Diagnosis mode Description

Self Diagnostic Result Displays malfunctioning system memorized in Distance sensor.
Data Monitor Displays real-time input/output data of Distance sensor.
Active Test Distance sensor activates outputs to components.
It can monitor the adjustment direction indication in order to perform the radar alignment operation
Work Support
smoothly.
ECU Identification Displays Distance sensor part number.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitor the reception status of CAN communication viewed from Distance sensor.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Refer to BRC-247, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitored item
Description
[Unit]
VHCL SPEED SE Vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN com-
[km/h] munication.
YAW RATE Yaw rate signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communi-
[deg/s] cation.
PWR SUP MONI
Indicates IGN voltage input by Distance sensor.
[V]
DISTANCE
Indicates the distance from the vehicle ahead.
[m]
RELATIVE SPD
Indicates the relative speed of the vehicle ahead.
[m/s]
RADAR OFFSET NOTE:
[m] The item is indicated, but not used.
RADAR HEIGHT NOTE:
[m] The item is indicated, but not used.
STEERING ANGLE
The steering angle is displayed.
[deg]
STRG ANGLE SPEED
The steering angle speed is displayed.
[deg/s]
L/R ADJUST
Indicates a horizontal correction value of the radar.
[deg]
U/D ADJUST
Indicates a vertical correction value of the radar.
[deg]
FCW SYSTEM ON NOTE:
[On/Off] The item is indicated, but not used.
FCW SELECT NOTE:
[On/Off] The item is indicated, but not used.
PFCW SYSTEM ON NOTE:
[On/Off] The item is indicated, but not used.

BRC-242
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DISTANCE SENSOR)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
Monitored item
Description
[Unit] A
PFCW SELECT NOTE:
[On/Off] The item is indicated, but not used.
FEB SW B
Indicates [On/Off] status of FEB system
[On/Off]
FEB SELECT
Indicates an ON/OFF state of the FEB system.
[On/Off] C
BRAKE SW Indicates [On/Off] status as judged from brake pedal position switch signal (BCM transmits
[On/Off] brake pedal position switch signal through CAN communication)
IDLE SW Indicates [On/Off] status of idle switch read from distance sensor through CAN communication D
[On/Off] (ECM transmits On/Off status through CAN communication)
THRTL SENSOR NOTE:
[On/Off] The item is indicated, but not used. E
VEHICLE AHEAD DETECT
Indicates [On/Off] status of vehicle ahead detection indicator output
[On/Off]
STATIC OBSTACLE DETECT
Indicates [On/Off] status of static obstacle detection
BRC
[On/Off]
BUZZER O/P
Indicates [On/Off] status of warning chime output
[On/Off]
G
FUNC ITEM (FCW) NOTE:
[Without FCW/With FCW] The item is indicated, but not used.
FUNC ITEM (PFCW) NOTE: H
[Without P-FCW/With- PFCW] The item is indicated, but not used.
FUNC ITEM (FEB)
Indicates systems which can be set to ON/OFF by selecting FEB.
[Without FCA/With FCA]
I
FUNC ITEM (ICC) NOTE:
[Without ICC/With ICC] The item is indicated, but not used.
PRESS ORDER Indicates status as judged from brake fluid pressure signal [ABS actuator and electric unit (con- J
[bar] trol unit) transmits brake fluid pressure signal through CAN communication].

WORK SUPPORT
K
Work support items Description
Outputs millimeter waves, calculates dislocation of the millimeter waves, and indicates adjust-
MILLIWAVE RADAR ADJUST
ment direction. L
FEB OPERATION MILEAGE The mileage information for FEB operation is displayed.

Distance sensor alignment M

Refer to BRC-262, "Description".
ACTIVE TEST
N
Test item Description
BRAKE ACTUATOR Activates the brake by an arbitrary operation
ICC BUZZER This test is able to check FEB warning chime operation [On/Off] in the combination meter. O
This test is able to check FEB warning indicator operation [On/Off] in the combination meter
METER LAMP
information display.
P

BRC-243
DISTANCE SENSOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

DISTANCE SENSOR
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010721668

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item Condition Value/Status

Value of vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE While driving speed signal
(wheel speed)
Vehicle stopped 0.0
YAW RATE While driving Vehicle turning right Positive value
Vehicle turning left Negative value
Power supply volt-
PWR SUP MONI Ignition switch ON age value of dis-
tance sensor
Displays the dis-
Drive the vehicle and ac- When a vehicle ahead is detected tance from the pre-
DISTANCE tivate the vehicle-to-vehi- ceding vehicle
cle distance control mode
When a vehicle ahead is not detected 0.0

Drive the vehicle and ac- Displays the rela-

When a vehicle ahead is detected
RELATIVE SPD tivate the vehicle-to-vehi- tive speed
cle distance control mode When a vehicle ahead is not detected 0.0
NOTE:
LASER OFFSET —
The item is indicated, but not used
NOTE:
LASER HEIGHT —
The item is indicated, but not used
When setting the steering wheel in straight-ahead po-
0.0
sition
STEERING ANGLE Ignition switch ON
When turning the steering wheel 90° rightward +90
When turning the steering wheel 90° leftward -90
Steering wheel
STRG ANGLE
Ignition switch ON At the time of turning the steering wheel turning speed is
SPEED
displayed
Horizontal correc-
L/R ADJUST Ignition switch ON At the completion of radar alignment adjustment tion value is dis-
played
Vertical correction
U/D ADJUST Ignition switch ON At the completion of radar alignment adjustment
value is displayed
When the FEB system is ON On
FCW SYSTEM ON Engine running
When the FEB system is OFF Off
FEB system set with the information display is ON On
FCW SELECT Ignition switch ON
FEB system set with the information display is OFF Off
NOTE:
PFCW SYSTEM ON Off
The item is indicated, but not used
NOTE:
PFCW SELECT Off
The item is indicated, but not used

BRC-244
DISTANCE SENSOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
Monitor item Condition Value/Status
A
FEB system ON On
FEB SW Engine running
FEB system OFF Off
FEB system set with the information display is ON On B
FEB SELECT Ignition switch ON
FEB system set with the information display is OFF Off
When brake pedal is depressed On
BRAKE SW Ignition switch ON
When brake pedal is not depressed Off C
When brake pedal is depressed On
STOP LAMP SW Ignition switch ON
When brake pedal is not depressed Off
D
Idling On
IDLE SW Engine running
Except idling (depress accelerator pedal) Off
NOTE: E
THRTL SENSOR Off
The item is indicated, but not used
When a vehicle ahead is detected (vehicle ahead de-
On
VEHICLE AHEAD tection indicator ON) BRC
Drive the vehicle
DETECT When a vehicle ahead is not detected (vehicle ahead
Off
detection indicator OFF)

STATIC OBSTACLE When a vehicle static obstacle is detected On G

Drive the vehicle
DETECT When a vehicle static obstacle is not detected Off
When the buzzer of the FEB system operates On
BUZZER O/P Engine running H
When the buzzer of the FEB system not operates Off
FEB system set with the integral switch ON On
FUNC ITEM (FCW) Engine running
FEB system set with the integral switch OFF Off I
NOTE:
FUNC ITEM (PFCW) Off
The item is indicated, but not used
FEB system set with the integral switch ON On J
FUNC ITEM (FEB) Engine running
FEB system set with the integral switch OFF Off
NOTE:
FUNC ITEM (ICC) Off K
The item is indicated, but not used
When brake pedal is depressed Approx. 0 bar
PRESS ORDER
When brake pedal is not depressed 0 – 255 bar
L
TERMINAL LAYOUT

O
JSOIA1678ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES P

BRC-245
DISTANCE SENSOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Reference val-
Condition Standard value
Input/ ue
+ – Signal name
Output
1
Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0 - 0.1 V Approx. 0 V
(B)
2
— CAN communication-H — — — —
(L)
3
— CAN communication-L — — — —
(R)
5
— CHASSIS communication-H — — — —
(L)
6
— CHASSIS communication-L — — — —
(W)
8 1
Ignition power supply Input Ignition switch ON 10 - 16 V Battery voltage
(P) (B)

Fail-safe (Distance Sensor) INFOID:0000000010721669

If a malfunction occurs in the distance sensor cancels control, sounds a beep, and turns ON the FEB system
warning and warning lamp.

System Buzzer Warning lamp/Indicator lamp Description

• FEB system display: Yellow
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) Beep Cancel
• FEB warning lamp: On

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010721670

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.

Priority Detected items (DTC)

• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
1
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• C10B7: YAW RATE SENSOR
• C1A01: POWER SUPPLY CIR
• C1A02: POWER SUPPLY CIR 2
• C1A03: VHCL SPEED SE CIRC
• C1A04: ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC
• C1A05: BRAKE SW/STOP L SW
• C1A07: CVT CIRCUIT
• C1A12: LASER BEAM OFF CNTR
• C1A14: ECM CIRCUIT
• C1A15: GEAR POSITION
• C1A16: RADAR STAIN
• C1A17: ICC SENSOR MALF
2 • C1A18: LASER AIMING INCMP
• C1A21: UNIT HIGH TEMP
• C1A24: NP RANGE
• C1A26: ECD MODE MALF
• C1A39: STRG SEN CIR
• C1B5D: FEB OPE COUNT LIMIT
• U0121: VDC CAN CIR 2
• U0126: STRG SEN CAN CIR 1
• U0401: ECM CAN CIR 1
• U0415: VDC CAN CIR 1
• U0428: STRG SEN CAN CIR 2
• U1527: CCM CAN CIR 1
• U153F: CCM CAN CIR 2

BRC-246
DISTANCE SENSOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010721671

DTC
CONSULT display Reference
CONSULT B
C10B7 YAW RATE SENSOR BRC-269, "DTC Logic"
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIR BRC-270, "DTC Logic"
C
C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2 BRC-270, "DTC Logic"
C1A03 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC BRC-271, "DTC Logic"
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC BRC-273, "DTC Logic" D
C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP L SW BRC-274, "DTC Logic"
C1A07 CVT CIRCUIT BRC-276, "DTC Logic"
E
C1A12 LASER BEAM OFF CNTR BRC-277, "DTC Logic"
C1A14 ECM CIRCUIT BRC-278, "DTC Logic"
C1A15 GEAR POSITION BRC-279, "DTC Logic" BRC
C1A16 RADAR STAIN BRC-281, "DTC Logic"
C1A17 ICC SENSOR MALF BRC-283, "DTC Logic"
C1A18 LASER AIMING INCMP BRC-284, "DTC Logic" G
C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP BRC-285, "DTC Logic"
C1A24 NP RANGE BRC-286, "DTC Logic"
H
C1A26 ECD MODE MALF BRC-288, "DTC Logic"
C1A39 STRG SEN CIR BRC-289, "DTC Logic"
C1B5D FEB OPE COUNT LIMIT BRC-290, "DTC Logic" I
U0121 VDC CAN CIR 2 BRC-291, "DTC Logic"
U0126 STRG SEN CAN CIR 1 BRC-292, "DTC Logic"
J
U0401 ECM CAN CIR 1 BRC-293, "DTC Logic"
U0415 VDC CAN CIR 1 BRC-294, "DTC Logic"
U0428 STRG SEN CAN CIR 2 BRC-295, "DTC Logic" K
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT BRC-296, "DTC Logic"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) BRC-297, "DTC Logic"
L
U1527 CCM CAN CIR 1 BRC-298, "DTC Logic"
U153F CCM CAN CIR 2 BRC-299, "DTC Logic"

BRC-247
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

WIRING DIAGRAM
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010956827

JRFWC1755GB

BRC-248
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

BRC

JRFWC1756GB

BRC-249
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

JRFWC1757GB

BRC-250
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

BRC

JRFWC1758GB

BRC-251
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

JRFWC1759GB

BRC-252
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

BRC

JRFWC1760GB

BRC-253
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

JRFWC1761GB

BRC-254
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

BRC

JRFWC1762GB

BRC-255
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

JRFWC1763GB

BRC-256
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010721828
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

BRC

P
JSOIA0485GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION

It is also important to clarify the customer concerns before starting the inspection. Interview the customer
about the concerns carefully and understand the symptoms fully.
BRC-257
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
NOTE:
The customers are not professionals. Never assume that “maybe the customer means···” or “maybe the cus-
tomer mentioned this symptom”.

>> GO TO 2.
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the DTC is detected on the “Self-Diagnostic Results” of “LASER/RADAR”
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.ACTION TEST
Perform the FEB system action test to check the system operation. Check if any other malfunctions occur.

>> GO TO 4.
4.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the applicable diagnosis according to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to BRC-301, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 6.
5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC
1. Check the DTC in the “Self-Diagnostic Results”.
2. Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to BRC-247, "DTC Index".

>> GO TO 6.
6.MALFUNCTIONING PART REPAIR
Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 7.
7.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT)
1. Erases self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” again after repairing or replacing the specific items.
3. Check if any DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “LASER/RADAR”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.REPAIR CHECK (ACTION TEST)
Perform the following system action test. Check that the malfunction symptom is solved or no other symptoms
occur.
Is there a malfunction symptom?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Inspection End.

BRC-258
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DISTANCE SENSOR
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DISTANCE SENSOR
A
Description INFOID:0000000010721834

B
Always perform the following after removing and installing or replacing the distance sensor:
1. Distance sensor initial vertical alignment
2. Distance sensor alignment C
CAUTION:
The system does not operate normally unless the distance sensor is aligned properly.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010721835 D

1.DISTANCE SENSOR INITIAL VERTICAL ALIGNMENT

Perform the distance sensor initial vertical alignment. Refer to BRC-260, "Description". E

>> GO TO 2.
BRC
2.DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
Perform the distance sensor alignment. Refer to BRC-262, "Description".
G
>> Work End.

BRC-259
DISTANCE SENSOR INITIAL VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
DISTANCE SENSOR INITIAL VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
Description INFOID:0000000010721838

OUTLINE OF DISTANCE SENSOR INITIAL ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Always perform the distance sensor initial vertical alignment before distance sensor alignment.
NOTE:
If initial vertical alignment is not performed, the distance sensor adjustment may not be performed.
1. Required tools, refer to BRC-260, "Required Tools".
2. Preparation, refer to BRC-260, "Preparation".
3. Distance sensor initial vertical alignment, refer to BRC-260, "Distance Sensor Initial Vertical Alignment".
Required Tools INFOID:0000000010721839

The following tool is necessary to perform the distance sensor initial vertical alignment:
• Spirit level.

AWOIA0048ZZ

Preparation INFOID:0000000010721840

1.PREPARATION FOR DISTANCE SENSOR INITIAL VERTICAL ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

1. Verify correct vehicle suspension height. Refer to FSU-24, "Wheelarch Height".
2. Repair or replace any damaged body components.
3. Verify proper tire inflation pressures. Refer to WT-66, "Tire Air Pressure".
4. Remove any accumulations of mud, snow or ice from the vehicle underbody.
5. Verify that there is no load in the vehicle (cargo or passenger).
6. Place the vehicle on a known level horizontal surface such as a wheel or frame alignment rack to achieve
satisfactory sensor vertical alignment results.
7. Remove front fascia. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".

>> Refer to BRC-260, "Distance Sensor Initial Vertical Alignment".

Distance Sensor Initial Vertical Alignment INFOID:0000000010721841

NOTE:
The distance sensor initial vertical alignment procedure must be performed anytime the distance sensor is
removed and reinstalled.
1. The distance sensor is located near the right front head lamp
behind the front bumper fascia.

AWOIA0049ZZ

BRC-260
DISTANCE SENSOR INITIAL VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
2. Place the spirit level against the face of the distance sensor
. A

AWOIA0050ZZ

D
3. Turn the distance sensor adjustment screw to level the sen-
sor.
E

BRC

G
AWOIA0051ZZ

4. Insure the distance sensor electrical connector located on the bottom of the sensor is connected. H
5. Reinstall the front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".
6. Perform the distance sensor alignment procedure. Refer to BRC-262, "Description".
NOTE: I
With the front grill left removed, radar adjustment becomes easier.

BRC-261
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
Description INFOID:0000000010721842

OUTLINE OF RADAR ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

• A 4-wheel vehicle alignment must be performed before proceeding with radar alignment procedure.
• Always perform the radar alignment after removing and installing or replacing the distance sensor.
WARNING:
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should
contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
CAUTION:
The system does not operate normally unless the radar alignment is performed. Always perform it.
1. Preparation, refer to BRC-262, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".
2. Set the ICC sensor target board (SST: KV99112700) to the correct position in front of the vehicle. Refer to
BRC-264, "Work Procedure (Setting The ICC Target Board)".
3. Set the radar alignment mode (“MILLIWAVE RADAR ADJUST” on “Work support”) with CONSULT, and
then perform the adjustment according to the display. Refer to BRC-266, "Work Procedure (Radar Align-
ment)".
CAUTIONARY POINT FOR RADAR ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• For radar alignment procedure, choose a level location with a few meter of working space in front
and surrounding the vehicle.
• Vehicle must be stationary and unoccupied during the whole alignment procedure.
• Any slight vibration during the alignment procedure can cause the test to fail. If this happens, you
will have to restart the alignment process.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position.
• The battery voltage must not fall below 12 volts during the whole alignment procedure. Failure to
maintain adequate battery voltage will cause the test to fail. If this happens, you will have to restart
the alignment process.
• The ICC target board must be set in front of the vehicle facing the sensor.
• Adjust the radar alignment with CONSULT. (The radar alignment procedure cannot be adjusted with-
out CONSULT.)
• Never enter the vehicle during radar alignment.
• Never block the area between the radar and the ICC target board at any time during the alignment
process.
• Accurate steering wheel setting is crucial. Once set, do not disturb the steering wheel for the
remainder of the alignment procedure.
• For proper system operation and adjustment, all vehicle wheels must be of the same size.
Work Procedure (Preparation) INFOID:0000000010721843

1.ADVANCE PREPARATION FOR RADAR ALIGNMENT

1. Adjust all tire pressure to the specified value.
2. Empty the vehicle. (Remove any luggage from the passenger compartment, trunk room, etc.)
3. Fully fill the fuel tank, and then check that the coolant and oils are filled up to correct level.
4. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and release the parking brake. (CVT models)
5. Shift the selector lever to “N” position, and release the parking brake. (M/T models)
CAUTION:
Apply wheel chocks or other tire blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving.

BRC-262
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
6. Clean the right front side of the fascia in front of the distance
sensor . A
NOTE:
Check the distance sensor surface is clean.
B
>> GO TO 2.

JMOIA0055ZZ

2.PREPOSITION TARGET BOARD D

Adjust the height of the ICC target board center position.

BRC

JMOIA0057ZZ

H
H : 693 mm (27.28 in)
: Distance sensor

NOTE: I
Adjusting the ICC target board height may not allow the center to reach to H. In this case, raise the height to
upper limit of the adjustment range.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to ICC target board, use a weight to protect the board from falling. J

>> GO TO 3.
K
3.RADAR ALIGNMENT OPERATION AREA
L

BRC-263
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
Position the vehicle in a place that is level and where area can be secured.

JMOIA0058ZZ

W : 3,000 mm (118.11 in)

L : 2,000 mm (78.74 in)
H : 2,000 mm (78.74 in)
NOTE:
is a no object zone.

>> Go to BRC-264, "Work Procedure (Setting The ICC Target Board)".

Work Procedure (Setting The ICC Target Board) INFOID:0000000010721844

DESCRIPTION
Accurate adjustment of the radar alignment requires that the ICC target board be accurately positioned.
CAUTION:
If the radar alignment is adjusted with the ICC target board in the incorrect position, the FEB system
does not function normally.
1.PREPARATION OF SETTING ICC TARGET BOARD (1)

BRC-264
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

PKIB4694E BRC

“A” – “E” (“C” – “F”) : 2,040 mm (80.00 in)

G
1. Mark points “A”, “B”, “C” and “D”at the center of the lateral sur-
face of each wheels.
NOTE:
Hang a string with a cone from the fender so as to pass through H
the center of wheel, and then mark a point at the center of the
lateral surface of the wheel.
2. Draw line “LH” passing through points “A” and “B” on the left side I
of vehicle.
NOTE:
Approximately 2 m (6.56 ft) or more from the front end of vehi-
J
cle.
PKIB7667E
3. Mark point “E” on the line “LH” at the positions 2,040 mm (80.00
in) from point “A”.
4. Draw line “RH” passing through points “C” and “D” on the right side of vehicle in the same way as step 2. K
NOTE:
Approximately 2 m (6.56 ft) or more from the front end of vehicle.
5. Mark point “F” on the line “RH” at the positions 2,040 mm (80.00 in) from point “C”. L
6. Draw line “FW” passing through the points “E” and “F” on the front side of vehicle.
7. Mark point “X” at the center of point “E” and “F” on the line “FW”.
CAUTION:
Make sure that “E” to “X” is equal to “F” to “X”. M
8. With point “X” as the starting point, mark point “G” on “F” point
side 291 mm.
N
L1 : 2,040 mm (80.00 in)
L2 : 291 mm (11.46 in)

O
>> GO TO 2.

P
JSOIA0824ZZ

2.SETTING ICC TARGET BOARD

Place the center of ICC target board on point “G” at line “E-F” and install the ICC target board.
CAUTION:
For performing the radar alignment correctly, securely install (ICC target board) to be parallel with the
“E-F” line.

BRC-265
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THE ICC TARGET BOARD INSTALLATION AREA
Do not place anything other than ICC target board in the space shown in the figure (view from top).

JSOIA0825ZZ

No object zone Distance sensor ICC target board

W. 3,000 mm (118.11 in) L. 1,000 mm (39.37 in)

>> Go to BRC-266, "Work Procedure (Radar Alignment)".

Work Procedure (Radar Alignment) INFOID:0000000010721845

DESCRIPTION
The radar alignment is performed automatically with CONSULT.
CAUTION:
Perform all necessary work for radar alignment until the adjustment completes as shown in the proce-
dure. If the procedure does not complete, the FEB system is inoperable.
1.PERFORM RADAR ALIGNMENT
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect CONSULT and select “Work support” of “LASER/RADAR”.
3. Select “MILLIWAVE RADAR ADJUST” after the “Work support” screen is displayed.
NOTE:
Confirm the following items;
• The target should be accurately placed.
• The vehicle should be stopped.
4. Select “Start” after the “MILLIWAVE RADAR ADJUST” screen is displayed.
NOTE:
If the adjustment screen does not appear or an error appears within approximately 10 seconds after “MIL-
LIWAVE RADAR ADJUST” is selected, the following causes are possible.
• The ICC target board is not installed in the correct position.
• Adequate space is not secured around the ICC target board.
• The radar alignment procedure exceeds its proper installation range.
- Deformation of vehicle body.
- Deformation of unit.
- Deformation of bracket.
• The area is not suitable for the adjustment work.
• Right front side of fascia (distance sensor view) is not clean.
• The FEB warning lamp illuminates.

>> GO TO 2.

BRC-266
DISTANCE SENSOR ALIGNMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

2.RADAR ALIGNMENT A
1. Once the radar alignment procedure is started, you will be prompted by the CONSULT for the next instruc-
tion is displayed on the CONSULT screen.
2. Follow all the following instructions requested by CONSULT:
B
- Adjust ICC target board to position (top tilted toward vehicle)
- Adjust ICC target board to position (vertical position)
- Adjust ICC target board to position (top tilted away from vehi-
cle) C

JSOIA1629ZZ
E

3. Following instructions to perform physical adjustment to the sen-

sor which may include turning the screw driver by a specified
BRC
number of turns counter-clockwise or clockwise as speci-
fied on CONSULT.
CAUTION:
After the position 3 reading and during manual adjustment, G
it is OK to stand in front of the side of the fascia (distance
sensor view). Otherwise be careful not to cover the right
front side of the fascia (distance sensor view) with a hand H
or any other body part during adjustment.
NOTE: JSOIA1630ZZ
Reading on the CONSULT is not real-time and not automatically
update while turning the tool. To check the angle, end the alignment and restart the procedure. I

>> ALIGNMENT END

NOTE: J
If front grill is left removed, it must be installed.

BRC-267
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
ACTION TEST
Description INFOID:0000000010721856

• Perform action test to verify the customer's concern.

• Perform action test and check the system operation after system diagnosis.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010721857

1.CHECK FEB SYSTEM SETTING

1. Start the engine.
2. Check that the FEB system setting can be enabled/disabled on the vehicle information display.
3. Turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 30 seconds or more.
4. Check that the previous setting is saved when the engine starts again.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FEB SYSTEM
1. Enable the setting of the FEB system on the vehicle information display.
2. Check FEB warning lamp is OFF.

>> Inspection End.

BRC-268
C10B7 YAW RATE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
C10B7 YAW RATE SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010727798
B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition
YAW RATE SENSOR
C10B7 Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor calibration incorrect.
(Yaw rate sensor)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor not performed.
• Interruption in yaw rate/side/decel G sensor calibration. E
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
BRC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C10B7” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/ H
RADAR”.
Is “C10B7” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-269, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727799

1.PERFORM YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR CALIBRATION

K
1. Perform calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-102, "Work Procedure".
2. Erase DTCs using CONSULT.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/RADAR” using CONSULT.
L
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.
M

BRC-269
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766405

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

POWER SUPPLY CIR The battery voltage sent to distance sensor remains less than 7.9 V for 5 sec-
C1A01
(Power supply circuit) onds
POWER SUPPLY CIR 2 The battery voltage sent to distance sensor remains more than 19.3 V for 5
C1A02
(Power supply circuit 2) seconds

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Connector, harness, fuse
• Distance sensor
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A01” or “C1A02” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of
“RADAR”.
Is “C1A01” or “C1A02” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-270, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766406

1.CHECK DISTANCE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply and ground circuit of distance sensor. Refer to BRC-300, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

BRC-270
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766623

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from ABS actuator and electric unit (con- C
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC trol unit) and the A/T vehicle speed sensor signal (output shaft revolution signal)
C1A03
(Vehicle speed sensor circuit) from TCM, received by the distance sensor via CAN communication, are inconsis-
tent
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Wheel speed sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E
• Vehicle speed sensor A/T (output speed sensor)
• TCM
• Distance sensor
BRC
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “C1A03” is displayed with DTC “U1000” or “C1A04”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “C1A04”. H
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic" I
• C1A04: Refer to BRC-273, "DTC Logic"
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more. K
CAUTION:
Always drive safely.
4. Stop the vehicle. L
5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
6. Check if the “C1A03” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
M
Is “C1A03” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-271, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END N

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766624

O
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “C1A03” is displayed with DTC “U1000” or “C1A04”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “C1A04”.
Is applicable DTC detected? P
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic"
• C1A04: Refer to BRC-273, "DTC Logic"
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DATA MONITOR
1. Start the engine.

BRC-271
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
2. Drive the vehicle.
3. Check that the value of “VHCL SPD AT” is almost the same as the value of “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA
MONITOR” of “LASER/RADAR”.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the vehicle speed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-247, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-247, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-272
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A04 ABS/TCS/VDC SYSTEM
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766625

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC C
C1A04 If a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS system
(ABS/TCS/VDC circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled. E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY BRC
If DTC “C1A04” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A04” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/ I
RADAR”.
Is “C1A04” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-273, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766626

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY L

If DTC “C1A04” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. N
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-188, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-273
C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766627

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

BRAKE SW/STOP L SW
C1A05 Stop lamp switch signal received from BCM is abnormal
(Brake switch/Stop lamp switch)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Stop lamp switch circuit
• Stop lamp switch
• Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
• BCM
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “C1A05” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A05” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A05” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-274, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766628

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “C1A05” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP
Check the stop lamp when brake pedal is depressed/not depressed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check the stop lamp. Refer to EXL-176, "Symptom Table" (LED headlamp) or EXL-361, "Symp-
tom Table" (Halogen headlamp)
3.CHECK STOP LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “STOP LAMP” on “Active test” of “BCM-HEADLAMP” with CONSULT.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.

BRC-274
C1A05 BRAKE SW/STOP LAMP SW
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
NO >> Check the stop lamp circuit. Refer to EXL-176, "Symptom Table" (LED headlamp) or EXL-361,
"Symptom Table" (Halogen headlamp) A
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
B
2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “CHASSIS CONTROL”. Refer to DAS-204,
"DTC Index".
Is any DTC detected?
C
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) D
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
Is any DTC detected? E
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF BCM BRC
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BCM”. Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
Is any DTC detected? G
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.
NO >> GO TO 7.
H
7.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DISTANCE SENSOR
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/RADAR”. Refer to BRC-247, "DTC Index".
Is any DTC detected? I
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts identified by the self-diagnosis result.
NO >> INSPECTION END
J

BRC-275
C1A07 CVT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A07 CVT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010927801

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detection condition

CVT CIRCUIT
C1A07 If CVT is malfunctioning
(CVT circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Transmission assembly
• TCM
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “C1A07” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn ON FEB system and drive.
CAUTION:
Always drive safely.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
5. Check if the “C1A07” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A07” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010927802

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “C1A07” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF TCM
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
TM-288, "DTC Index" (Gasoline engine models) or TM-529, "DTC Index" (Diesel engine models).
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-276
C1A12 RADAR OFF-CENTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A12 RADAR OFF-CENTER
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766413

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

RADAR OFF-CENTER C
C1A12 Radar of distance sensor is off the aiming point
(Radar off-center)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
Radar is off the aiming point
FAIL-SAFE
The following systems are canceled. E
• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
• Distance Control Assist (DCA)
• Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)
• Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW) BRC

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. H
4. Check if the “C1A12” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A12” detected as the current malfunction? I
YES >> Refer to BRC-277, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766414

1.ADJUST RADAR AIMING K

1. Adjust the radar beam aiming with CONSULT. Refer to BRC-262, "Description".
2. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
3. Check if the “C1A12” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/RADAR”. L
Is “C1A12” detected?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END M

BRC-277
C1A14 ECM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A14 ECM
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766629

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

ECM CIRCUIT
C1A14 If ECM is malfunctioning
(ECM circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
• ECM
• Distance sensor
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “C1A14” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Operate the FEB system and drive.
CAUTION:
Always drive safely.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
5. Check if the “C1A14” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A14” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-278, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766630

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “C1A14” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
EC-109, "DTC Index" (MR20DD) or EC-517, "DTC Index" (QR25DE) or EC-908, "DTC Index"
(R9M).
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-278
C1A15 GEAR POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A15 GEAR POSITION
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766632

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

A mismatch between an current gear position signal transmitted from TCM via C
GEAR POSITION
C1A15 ECM and a gear position calculated by the distance sensor continues for approx-
(Gear position)
imately 11 minutes or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Input speed sensor
• Vehicle speed sensor A/T (output speed sensor)
• TCM E
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
BRC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
G
If DTC “C1A15” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, “C1A03” or “C1A04” first diagnose the DTC “U1000”, “C1A03”
or “C1A04”
Is applicable DTC detected?
H
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic"
• C1A03: Refer to BRC-271, "DTC Logic"
• C1A04: Refer to BRC-273, "DTC Logic" I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or faster for approximately 15 minutes or more.
CAUTION: K
Always drive safely.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. L
6. Check if “C1A15” is detected as the current malfunction in the “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A15” detected as the current malfunction? M
YES >> Refer to BRC-279, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
N
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766633

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY O

If DTC “C1A15” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, “C1A03” or “C1A04” first diagnose the DTC “U1000”, “C1A03”
or “C1A04”
Is applicable DTC detected? P
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic"
• C1A03: Refer to BRC-271, "DTC Logic"
• C1A04: Refer to BRC-273, "DTC Logic"
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
BRC-279
C1A15 GEAR POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
Check that “VHCL SPEED SE” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “LASER/RADAR”.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the vehicle speed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 7.
3.CHECK GEAR POSITION
Check that “GEAR” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “LASER/RADAR”.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the vehicle speed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK GEAR POSITION SIGNAL
Check that “GEAR” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
Check that “INPUT SPEED” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
TM-288, "DTC Index" (Gasoline engine models) or TM-529, "DTC Index" (Diesel engine models).
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
7.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-280
C1A16 RADAR BLOCKED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A16 RADAR BLOCKED
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766415

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

RADAR BLOCKED C
C1A16 Inclusion of dirt or stains on the distance sensor area of the front bumper
(Radar blocked)
NOTE:
DTC “C1A16” may be detected under the following conditions. (Explain to the customer about the difference D
between the contamination detection function and the indication when the malfunction is detected and tell
them “This is not malfunction”.)
• When contamination or foreign materials adhere to the distance sensor area of the front bumper E
• When driving while it is snowing or when frost forms on the distance sensor area of the front bumper
• When distance sensor area of the front bumper is temporarily fogged
POSSIBLE CAUSE BRC
• Stain or foreign materials is deposited
• Cracks or scratches exist
FAIL-SAFE G
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON. I
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A16” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
J
Is “C1A16” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-281, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
K
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766416

L
1.VISUAL CHECK 1
Check the contamination and foreign matter on the distance sensor area of the front bumper.
Does contamination or foreign materials adhere? M
YES >> Wipe out the contamination and foreign matter on the distance sensor area of the front bumper.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.VISUAL CHECK 2 N

1. Remove the front bumper. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".

2. Check distance sensor for contamination and foreign matter.
O
Does contamination or foreign matter adhere?
YES >> Wipe out the contamination and foreign matter from the distance sensor.
NO >> GO TO 3. P
3.VISUAL CHECK 3
Check distance sensor for cracks and scratches.
Is it found?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.

BRC-281
C1A16 RADAR BLOCKED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

4.PERFORM RADAR ALIGNMENT

1. Adjust the radar alignment with CONSULT. Refer to BRC-262, "Description".
2. Perform FEB system action test to check the operation status. Refer to BRC-268, "Description".
3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
4. Check the “C1A16” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/RADAR”.
Is “C1A16” detected?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.INTERVIEW
1. Ask if there is any trace of contamination or foreign materials adhering to the distance sensor area of the
front bumper.
2. Ask if distance sensor area of the front bumper was frosted during driving or if vehicle was driven in snow.
3. Ask if distance sensor area of the front bumper was temporarily fogged. (Windshield glass may also tend
to fog, etc.)
Is any of above conditions seen?
YES >> Explain to the customer about the difference between the contamination detection function and
the indication when the malfunction is detected and tell them “This is not malfunction”.
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-282
C1A17 DISTANCE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A17 DISTANCE SENSOR
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010727824

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

NOTE:
If DTC C1A17 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to BRC-
296, "DTC Logic". C

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

ICC SENSOR MALF D
C1A17 Distance sensor is malfunctioning.
(ICC sensor malfunction)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Distance sensor E
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
BRC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Wait for 10 minutes or more.
3. Start the engine.
4. Turn the FEB system ON. H
5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
6. Check if the “C1A17” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”. I
Is “C1A17” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-285, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727825

K
1.REPLACE DISTANCE SENSOR
L

>> Replace distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-283
C1A18 RADAR AIMING INCMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A18 RADAR AIMING INCMP
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010727826

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

LASER AIMING INCMP
C1A18 Distance sensor not adjusted.
(Laser aiming incomplete)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Distance sensor aiming adjustment not performed.
• Distance sensor aiming adjustment interrupted.
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Wait for 10 minutes or more.
3. Start the engine.
4. Turn the FEB system ON.
5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
6. Check if the “C1A18” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A18” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-285, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727827

1.ADJUST DISTANCE SENSOR

Perform distance sensor Initial vertical alignment and distance sensor alignment.

>> Refer to BRC-260, "Description" and BRC-262, "Description".

BRC-284
C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A21 UNIT HIGH TEMP
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766427

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

UNIT HIGH TEMP Temperature detected by the temperature sensor integrated in distance sensor C
C1A21
(Unit high temperature) remains more than 105 °C (221 °F) for 5 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
Temperature around the distance sensor becomes extremely low or high
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled. E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE BRC
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Wait for 10 minutes or more.
3. Start the engine.
G
4. Turn the FEB system ON.
5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
6. Check if the “C1A21” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”. H
Is “C1A21” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-285, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766428
J
1.CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Check for any malfunctions in engine cooling system. K
Is engine cooling system normal?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair engine cooling system. L

BRC-285
C1A24 NP RANGE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A24 NP RANGE
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766634

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

NP RANGE A mismatch between a shift position signal transmitted from TCM via ECM and an
C1A24
(NP range) current gear position signal continues for 60 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TCM
• Transmission range switch
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “C1A24” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC REPRODUCE (1)
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Wait for approximately 5 minutes or more after shifting the selector lever to “P” position.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
5. Check if the “C1A24” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A24” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC REPRODUCE (2)
1. Wait for approximately 5 minutes or more after shifting the selector lever to “N” position.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
3. Check if the “C1A24” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A24” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766635

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “C1A24” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM DATA MONITOR
Check that “SLCT LVR POSI” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.

BRC-286
C1A24 NP RANGE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
NO >> Perform diagnosis for transmission range switch circuit and repair or replace the malfunctioning
parts. Refer to TM-322, "Diagnosis Procedure" (Gasoline engine models) or TM-568, "Diagnosis A
Procedure" (Diesel engine models).
3.PERFORM TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
2. Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
C
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
TM-288, "DTC Index" (Gasoline engine models) or TM-529, "DTC Index" (Diesel engine models).
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
D

BRC

BRC-287
C1A26 ECD MODE MALFUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A26 ECD MODE MALFUNCTION
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766636

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

ECD MODE MALF
C1A26 If an abnormal condition occurs with ECD system
(ECD mode malfunction)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “C1A26” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, “U0415” or “U0121” first diagnose the DTC “U1000”, “U0415”
or “U0121”
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic"
• U0415: Refer to BRC-294, "DTC Logic"
• U0121: Refer to BRC-291, "DTC Logic"
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Wait for approximately 1 minute after turning the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A26” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “C1A26” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-288, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766637

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “C1A26” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, “U0415” or “U0121” first diagnose the DTC “U1000”, “U0415”
or “U0121”
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic"
• U0415: Refer to BRC-294, "DTC Logic"
• U0121: Refer to BRC-291, "DTC Logic"
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-288
C1A39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1A39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766639

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

STRG SEN CIR C
C1A39 If the steering angle sensor is malfunction
(Steering angle sensor circuit)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled. E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY BRC
If DTC “C1A39” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1A39” is detected as the current malfunction in self-diagnosis results of “LASER/RADAR”. I
Is “C1A39” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-289, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766640
K
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “C1A39” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. L
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2. M
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
N
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation". O

BRC-289
C1B5D FEB OPE COUNT LIMIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
C1B5D FEB OPE COUNT LIMIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766641

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

FEB OPE COUNT LIMIT
C1B5D (Forward Emergency Braking oper- FEB system operated 3 times within ignition switch ON.
ation count limit)
NOTE:
If “C1B5D” detected, perform the FEB system action test and check FEB system operates normally.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FEB system operated 3 times within ignition switch ON.
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM FEB SYSTEM ACTION TEST
Perform the FEB system action test.
Is there any malfunction symptom?
YES >> Refer to BRC-290, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766642

1.DTC CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1B5D” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is C1B5D detected as current malfunction?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Perform FEB system action test. Refer to BRC-268, "Description".

BRC-290
U0121 VDC CAN 2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U0121 VDC CAN 2
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766643

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

VDC CAN CIR2 If distance sensor detects an error signal that is received from ABS actuator and C
U0121
(VDC CAN circuit2) electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled. E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY BRC
If DTC “U0121” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0121” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/ I
RADAR”.
Is “U0121” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-291, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766644

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY L

If DTC “U0121” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. N
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index". O
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-291
U0126 STRG SEN CAN 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U0126 STRG SEN CAN 1
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766645

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

STRG SEN CAN CIR1 If distance sensor detects an error signal that is received from steering angle sen-
U0126
(Steering sensor CAN circuit1) sor via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0126” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0126” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “U0126” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-292, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766646

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “U0126” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-292
U0401 ECM CAN 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U0401 ECM CAN 1
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766647

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

ECM CAN CIR1 If distance sensor detects an error signal that is received from ECM via CAN com- C
U0401
(ECM CAN circuit1) munication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
ECM
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled. E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY BRC
If DTC “U0401” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0401” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/ I
RADAR”.
Is “U0401” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-293, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766648

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY L

If DTC “U0401” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”. N
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
EC-109, "DTC Index" (MR20DD) or EC-517, "DTC Index" (QR25DE) or EC-908, "DTC Index" O
(R9M).
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
P

BRC-293
U0415 VDC CAN 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U0415 VDC CAN 1
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766649

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

VDC CAN CIR1 If distance sensor detects an error signal that is received from ABS actuator and
U0415
(VDC CAN circuit1) electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0415” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0415” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “U0415” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-294, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766650

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “U0415” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-294
U0428 STRG SEN CAN 2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U0428 STRG SEN CAN 2
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766651

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

STRG SEN CAN CIR2 If distance sensor detects an error signal that is received from steering angle sen- C
U0428
(Steering sensor CAN circuit2) sor via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled. E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY BRC
If DTC “U0428” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0428” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/ I
RADAR”.
Is “U0428” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-295, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766652

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY L

If DTC “U0428” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic". M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”. N
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-84, "DTC Index". O
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-295
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766408

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

CAN COMM CIRCUIT If distance sensor is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2
U1000
(CAN communication circuit) seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
ITS communication system
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-296, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766409

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn the FEB system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-296
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010766411

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) C
U1010 If distance sensor detects malfunction by CAN controller initial diagnosis
[Control unit (CAN)]

POSSIBLE CAUSE
D
Distance sensor
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled. E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE BRC
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
G
4. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction?
H
YES >> Refer to BRC-297, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010766412

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J

1. Turn the FEB system ON.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/ K
RADAR”.
Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation". L
NO >> INSPECTION END

BRC-297
U1527 CCM CAN 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U1527 CCM CAN 1
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010927797

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

CCM CAN CIR 1
U1527 (Chassis control module CAN Distance sensor detects that chassis control module has a malfunction.
circuit 1)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U1527” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-204, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1527” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “U1527” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to BRC-298, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010927798

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “U1527” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-204, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer toBRC-304, "Removal and Installation".

BRC-298
U153F CCM CAN 2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
U153F CCM CAN 2
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010927799

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

CCM CAN CIR 2 C
Distance sensor detects an error signal that is received from chassis control mod-
U153F (Chassis control module CAN
ule via CAN communication
circuit 2)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE E
FEB system is canceled.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY BRC

If DTC “U153F” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected? G
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the FEB system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. I
4. Check if the “U153F” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/
RADAR”.
Is “U153F” detected as the current malfunction? J
YES >> Refer to BRC-299, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010927800

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY L

If DTC “U153F” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
M
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to BRC-296, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS N
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to O
DAS-204, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
P

BRC-299
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010731072

1.CHECK FUSES
Check if any of the following fuses are blown:

Signal name Fuse No.

Ignition power supply 30
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK DISTANCE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between distance sensor harness connector and ground.

Terminal
Condition
(+) (–) Voltage
Distance sensor (Approx.)
Ignition
Connector Terminal switch
Ground OFF 0V
E78 8 Battery volt-
ON
age
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the distance sensor power supply circuit.
3.CHECK DISTANCE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the distance sensor connector.
3. Check for continuity between distance sensor harness connector and ground.

Distance sensor
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
E78 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair the distance sensor ground circuit.

BRC-300
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010727978
B
Before performing diagnosis, check that it is not a symptom caused by normal operation. Refer to BRC-232,
"System Description".
C
Symptom Confirmation item Inspection item/Reference page
System settings cannot be
turned ON/OFF D
All of system display does not illuminate
FEB system display does not il- Refer to BRC-302, "Diagnosis
luminate Procedure"
Combination meter E
Other information display is not illuminated
Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index"
System settings cannot be
turned ON/OFF
All of system display does not illuminate BRC
FEB warning lamp does not illu- Refer to BRC-302, "Diagnosis
minate Procedure"
Combination meter
Other information display is not illuminated G
Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index"
Chime does not sound. Refer to
FEB warning buzzer is not SN-109, "Symptom Table"
sounding (Warning display is — (Without Park Assist) or SN-235, H
functioning normally) "Symptom Table" (Without Park
Assist).

BRC-301
SYSTEM SETTINGS CANNOT BE TURNED ON/OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
SYSTEM SETTINGS CANNOT BE TURNED ON/OFF
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010721673

CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagno-
sis if any DTC is detected.

Symptom Inspection item/Reference page

FEB warning lamp is not turned ON⇔OFF
FEB system does not turn ON/OFF BRC-302, "Diagnosis Procedure"
when operating steering switch

Description INFOID:0000000010721674

FEB system does not turn on/off.

• FEB warning lamp does not illuminate even if the steering switch is operated when FEB warning lamp is not
illuminated.
• FEB warning lamp does not turn off even if the steering switch is operated when FEB warning lamp is illumi-
nated.
NOTE:
The system ON/OFF condition will be memorized even if the ignition switch turns OFF.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721675

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results for “LASER/RADAR” with CONSULT.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.STEERING SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check that “FEB SELECT” operates normally in “” for “LASER/RADAR” with CONSULT.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
3.FEB WARNING LAMP
1. Select the active test item “” for “LASER/RADAR” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the FEB warning lamp illuminates when the test item is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to BRC-257, "Work Flow".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DATA MONITOR OF COMBINATION METER
Check that “BA W/L” operates normally in “” for “METER/M&A” with CONSULT, when the FEB setting ON by
steering switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. MWI-151, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace the distance sensor. Refer to BRC-304, "Removal and Installation".
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FEB SYSTEM
BRC-302
SYSTEM SETTINGS CANNOT BE TURNED ON/OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
Check that FEB warning lamp turned ON⇔OFF, when operating steering switch.
A
>> INSPECTION END

BRC

BRC-303
DISTANCE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

DISTANCE SENSOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010744025

JSOIA1631GB

Distance sensor Distance sensor bracket Front bumper reinforce

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010744026

REMOVAL
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect distance sensor connector.

BRC-304
DISTANCE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING]
3. Remove harness protectors from distance sensor bracket .
A

BRC

G
JSOIA1628ZZ

4. Remove distance sensor bracket mounting bolts to remove distance sensor with bracket from front
bumper reinforce. H
CAUTION:
Never give an impact to the distance sensor.
5. Remove distance sensor mounting bolts to remove distance sensor from distance sensor bracket. I
CAUTION:
Never give an impact to the distance sensor.
INSTALLATION J
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Perform additional service when replacing distance sensor. Refer to BRC-259, "Work Procedure". K

BRC-305
BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION BRM BODY REPAIR

E
CONTENTS
FOR EUROPE (LHD) Front Pillar ...............................................................40 F
Center Pillar .............................................................44
VEHICLE INFORMATION ............................. 4 Outer Sill (Partial Replacement) ..............................47
Outer Sill .................................................................48 G
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR ..................... 4 Inner Sill ...................................................................50
Body Exterior Paint Color ....................................... 4 Rear Fender ............................................................53
Rear Fender Extension ............................................56
PRECAUTION ............................................... 5 Outer Rear Wheelhouse ..........................................56
H

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5 Inner Rear Wheelhouse ...........................................57

Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 5 Inner Rear Pillar Reinforcement ..............................58
Inner Rear Pillar .......................................................59 I
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL .............. 7 Rear Panel ..............................................................61
High Strength Steel (HSS) ........................................ 7 Rear Floor Rear .....................................................62
Rear Side Member Extension (SUV Models) ..........63 J
PREPARATION ........................................... 12 Rear Side Member Extension (Wagon Models) ......63
Roof (Normal Roof Models) .....................................65
REPAIRING MATERIAL ....................................12 Roof (Sunroof Models) ............................................66
Foam Repair ........................................................... 12 BRM
Roof Rail ..................................................................67
BODY COMPONENT PARTS ............................14 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Ultra High Strength Steel Part ................................. 14 L
Underbody Component Parts .................................. 14
(SDS) ............................................................ 68
Body Component Parts ........................................... 17 BODY ALIGNMENT .......................................... 68
Body Center Marks ..................................................68 M
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 21
Description ...............................................................69
CORROSION PROTECTION .............................21 Engine Compartment ...............................................69
Description .............................................................. 21 Underbody ...............................................................72
Passenger Compartment .........................................75 N
Undercoating ........................................................... 21
Body Sealing ........................................................... 22 Rear Body ...............................................................78

BODY CONSTRUCTION ....................................26 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS .................... 80 O

Body Construction ................................................... 26 Precautions for Plastics ...........................................80
Location of Plastic Parts ..........................................81
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS ........................28 FOR EUROPE (RHD) P
Description .............................................................. 28
Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel ...................... 29 VEHICLE INFORMATION ........................... 83
Radiator Core Support ............................................ 31
Hoodledge ............................................................... 31 BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR ................... 83
Hoodledge (Partial Replacement) ........................... 33 Body Exterior Paint Color ......................................83
Front Side Member ................................................. 35
Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) .......... 38
PRECAUTION .............................................. 84

BRM-1
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 84 Passenger Compartment ...................................... 154
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 84 Rear Body ............................................................ 157

REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL ............ 86 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS .................... 159
High Strength Steel (HSS) ...................................... 86 Precautions for Plastics ........................................ 159
Location of Plastic Parts ....................................... 160
PREPARATION ........................................... 91 FOR RUSSIA
REPAIRING MATERIAL .................................... 91 VEHICLE INFORMATION ......................... 162
Foam Repair ........................................................... 91
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR ................... 162
BODY COMPONENT PARTS ........................... 93 Body Exterior Paint Color ................................... 162
Ultra High Strength Steel Part ................................ 93
Underbody Component Parts ................................. 93 PRECAUTION ........................................... 163
Body Component Parts .......................................... 96
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 163
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 100 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 163
CORROSION PROTECTION ........................... 100 REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL ........... 165
Description .............................................................100 High Strength Steel (HSS) .................................... 165
Undercoating .........................................................100
Body Sealing .........................................................101 PREPARATION ......................................... 170
BODY CONSTRUCTION ................................. 105 REPAIRING MATERIAL ................................... 170
Body Construction .................................................105 Foam Repair ......................................................... 170

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS ..................... 107 BODY COMPONENT PARTS .......................... 172

Description .............................................................107 Ultra High Strength Steel Part ............................... 172
Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel .....................108 Underbody Component Parts ............................... 172
Radiator Core Support ...........................................110 Body Component Parts ......................................... 175
Hoodledge .............................................................110
Hoodledge (Partial Replacement) .........................112 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 179
Front Side Member ................................................114
CORROSION PROTECTION ........................... 179
Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) .........117
Description ............................................................ 179
Front Pillar .............................................................119
Undercoating (MR20DD Engine Models) .............. 179
Center Pillar ...........................................................123
Undercoating (Except For MR20DD Engine Mod-
Outer Sill (Partial Replacement) ............................126
els) ........................................................................ 180
Outer Sill ...............................................................127
Body Sealing (MR20DD Engine Models) .............. 181
Inner Sill .................................................................129
Body Sealing (QR25DE Engine Models) .............. 184
Rear Fender ..........................................................132
Body Sealing (R9M Engine Models) ..................... 187
Rear Fender Extension ..........................................135
Outer Rear Wheelhouse ........................................135 BODY CONSTRUCTION .................................. 190
Inner Rear Wheelhouse .........................................136 Body Construction ................................................. 190
Inner Rear Pillar Reinforcement ............................137
Inner Rear Pillar .....................................................138 REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS ...................... 192
Rear Panel ............................................................140 Description ............................................................ 192
Rear Floor Rear ...................................................141 Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel .................... 193
Rear Side Member Extension (SUV Models) ........142 Radiator Core Support .......................................... 195
Rear Side Member Extension (Wagon Models) ....142 Hoodledge ............................................................. 195
Roof (Normal Roof Models) ...................................144 Hoodledge (Partial Replacement) ......................... 197
Roof (Sunroof Models) ..........................................145 Front Side Member ............................................... 199
Roof Rail ................................................................146 Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) ........ 202
Front Pillar ............................................................. 204
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Center Pillar .......................................................... 208
(SDS) .......................................................... 147 Outer Sill (Partial Replacement) ........................... 211
Outer Sill .............................................................. 212
BODY ALIGNMENT ......................................... 147 Rear Fender .......................................................... 215
Body Center Marks ................................................147 Rear Panel ........................................................... 218
Description .............................................................148 Rear Floor Rear ................................................... 219
Engine Compartment .............................................148 Rear Side Member Extension (SUV Models) ........ 220
Underbody .............................................................151

BRM-2
Rear Side Member Extension (Wagon Models) .... 220 Engine Compartment (Except For MR20DD En-
gine Models) .......................................................... 227 A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Underbody ............................................................. 230
(SDS) .......................................................... 222 Passenger Compartment (MR20DD Engine Mod-
els) ......................................................................... 233 B
BODY ALIGNMENT ......................................... 222 Passenger Compartment (Except For MR20DD
Body Center Marks (MR20DD Engine Models) .... 222 Engine Models) ...................................................... 236
Body Center Marks (Except For MR20DD Engine Rear Body ............................................................. 239
Models) ................................................................. 223 C
Description ............................................................ 224 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS .................. 241
Engine Compartment (MR20DD Engine Models).. 224 Precautions for Plastics ......................................... 241
Location of Plastic Parts ........................................ 242 D

BRM

BRM-3
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
< VEHICLE INFORMATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

VEHICLE INFORMATION
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
Body Exterior Paint Color INFOID:0000000010843415

JSKIA4358ZZ

Color code BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ
Dark Ol- Dark
Description Red Orange Black Silver Gray White
ive Blue
Component
Paint type note 2S 2PM 2PM 2P 2M 2M 3P 2M
Hard clear
× × × × – – – ×
coat
Door mirror cover Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ
Chromium
Front grille Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
plate
Bumper fascia Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ

Fillet molding Material color – – – – – – – –

Chromium
Door outside handle Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
plate
Rear spoiler (Side) Black G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01

Rear spoiler (Upper) Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ
Chromium
Back door finisher Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
plate
Back door Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ

Sill cover Material color – – – – – – – –

Side guard molding Material color – – – – – – – –

NOTE:
• 2M: 2-Coat Metallic
• 2P: 2-Coat pearl
• 2S: 2-Coat solid
• 3P: 3-Coat pearl
• 2PM: 2-Coat Pearl metallic

BRM-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010843416
B
• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time. C
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. D
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC E
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch. F
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. G
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
H
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
I
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. J
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time. BRM

D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes L
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes M
V9X engine : 4 minutes
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of N
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION: O
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry. P
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.

BRM-5
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.

BRM-6
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
A
High Strength Steel (HSS) INFOID:0000000010843417

High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight. B
Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:

BRM

BRM-7
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

Tensile strength Major applicable parts

• Rear seat crossmember reinforcement
(Rear seat crossmember assembly component part)
• Center front floor (Front)
(Center front floor component part)
• Trans control reinforcement
(Center front floor component part)
• Front floor (Front)
(Front floor component part)
• 2nd crossmember
(Front floor component part)
• 3rd crossmember
(Front floor component part)
• Inner sill reinforcement
(Inner sill component part)
• Side dash
(Side dash component part)
• Inner front pillar reinforcement (RH only)
(Side dash component part)
• Front suspension spring support
(Front strut housing assembly component part)
• Front bumper stay
• Front side member closing plate (Front)
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front side member flange
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front tie down hook
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front side member (Front)
(Front side member assembly component part)
440 - 780 MPa
• Front side member brace
(Front side member assembly component part)
• Front suspension mounting bracket
• Rear crossmember center assembly
• Rear side member
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear side member rear reinforcement
(Rear side member component part)
• Inner sill extension
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear side member reinforcement
(Rear side member component part)
• Outer rear anchor reinforcement
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear spring mounting bracket
(Rear side member component part)
• Spring mounting reinforcement
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear side member extension
• Inner center pillar assembly (Lower)
• Outer front pillar reinforcement (Rear)
• Lower center pillar brace (Lower)
• Lower front pillar hinge brace
• Outer sill reinforcement
• Rear pillar gusset
(Inner rear pillar component part)
• Rear pillar seat belt anchor
(Inner rear pillar component part)
• Rear bumper stay

BRM-8
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

Tensile strength Major applicable parts A

• Front side member rear extension
(Front floor component part)
• Inner sill
B
• Lower dash crossmember
(Lower dash complete component part)
• Lower dash crossmember
• Front bumper armature assembly C
• Front side member closing plate (Rear)
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front side member (Rear)
(Front side member assembly component part) D
• Inner center pillar (Upper)
980 - 1500 MPa
(Inner center pillar assembly component part)
• Upper center pillar brace
(Inner center pillar assembly component part) E
• Center pillar seat belt anchor
(Inner center pillar assembly component part)
• Outer front pillar reinforcement
(Outer front pillar reinforcement component part) F
• Center pillar hinge brace (Upper)
(Lower center pillar brace component part)
• Center pillar extension
G
(Lower center pillar brace component part)
• Inner center rear bumper reinforcement

Read the following precautions when repairing HSS: H

1. Additional points to consider
• The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heat-
ing is not recommended, because it may weaken the compo- I
nent. When heating is unavoidable, never heat HSS parts
above 550°C (1,022°F).
Verify heating temperature with a thermometer. J
(Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropri-
ate.)
BRM

PIIA0115E
L
• When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong,
pulling may cause deformation in adjacent sections of the body. In this case, increase the number of
measuring points, and carefully pull the HSS panel. M
• When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible.
Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas due
to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum N
margin of 50 mm (1.97 in).

P
PIIA0117E

BRM-9
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
• When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possi-
ble in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to
heat.
If spot welding is impossible, use MIG. welding. Do not use
gas (torch) for welding because it is inferior in welding
strength.

PIIA0144E

• Spot welding on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary

steel panel.
Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a low
speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bit
durability and facilitate the operation.

PIIA0145E

2. Precautions in spot welding HSS

This work should be performed under standard working condi-
tions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS:
• The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according to
the metal thickness.

PIIA0146E

• The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no

gaps.

PIIA0147E

BRM-10
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
• Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch.
Unit: mm (in) A
Thickness (T) Minimum pitch (L)
0.6 (0.024) 10 (0.39) or more
0.8 (0.031) 12 (0.47) or more B
1.0 (0.039) 18 (0.71) or more
1.2 (0.047) 20 (0.79) or more
1.6 (0.063) 27 (1.06) or more C
1.8 (0.071) 31 (1.22) or more
JSKIA0781ZZ

BRM

BRM-11
REPAIRING MATERIAL
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

PREPARATION
REPAIRING MATERIAL
Foam Repair INFOID:0000000010843418

During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the
vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS
Use commercially available Urethane foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle.

<Urethane foam for foaming agent> 3M™ Automix™ Flexible Foam 08463 or equiva-
lent
Read instructions on product for fill procedures.
Example of foaming agent filling operation procedure
1. Fill procedures after installation of service part.
a. Eliminate foam material remaining on vehicle side.
b. Clean area after eliminating form insulator and foam material.
c. Install service part.
d. Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill enough to close gap with the service part.

JSKIA0129GB

Urethane foam
Nozzle insert hole
: Vehicle front

2. Fill procedures before installation of service part.

a. Eliminate foam material remaining on vehicle side.
b. Clean area after eliminating foam insulator and foam material.
c. Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.

BRM-12
REPAIRING MATERIAL
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

A
Urethane foam
Fill while avoiding flange area
: Vehicle front B

NOTE:
Fill enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange
area. C
d. Install service part.
NOTE: JSKIA0130GB

Refer to label for information on working times. D

BRM

BRM-13
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
Ultra High Strength Steel Part INFOID:0000000010843419

DESCRIPTION
Ultra high strength steel parts signify high strength steel plates with tensile strength of 980 MPa or more.
When replacing parts made of ultra high strength steel or parts including ultra high strength steel, never per-
form the prohibition described below:
PROHIBITION
WARNING:
Never cut ultra high strength steel parts or perform butt welding. Violation of this prohibition causes
extreme strength degradation, and the strength before damage cannot be secured.
PART REPLACEMENT
To replace an ultra high strength part, be sure to replace it by panel supply unit of ultra high strength steel part.
For the welding method, refer to BRM-29, "Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Underbody Component Parts INFOID:0000000010843420

Refer to parts catalogue for the replacement parts.

BRM-14
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

JSKIA4701ZZ

P
SUV models Wagon models

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections
: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections

BRM-15
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Rear floor rear Under 440 ×

Spare tire clamp bracket Under 440 —

Rear floor side assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear floor front Under 440 —

Rear floor board reinforcement 590 ×

Rear floor front extension (Upper RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear seat crossmember assembly 590 ×

Center front floor 780 ×

980MPacaution
T=1.8 mm (0.071 in)
Front floor (RH & LH) c. Inside (RH only) 590 ×
caution
980MPa
T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)

Inner sill (RH & LH) 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=1.4 mm (0.055 in)
Cowl top Under 440 ×

Upper dash assembly Under 440 ×

Lower dash complete d. 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=1.4 mm (0.055 in)
Side dash (RH & LH) 590 ×

Lower dash crossmember 980MPacaution 440 ×

T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Front strut housing assembly (RH & LH) 590 ×

Upper hoodledge (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Lower hoodledge (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Hoodledge reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front hoodledge reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Upper front fender bracket (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front fender bracket (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Upper radiator core support assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front bumper armature assembly 1500MPacaution — —

T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Front bumper stay (RH & LH) 590 —

Hoodledge connector assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front side member closing plate (RH & LH) e. 980MPacaution 590 ×
T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)

Front side member assembly (RH & LH) f. 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Side radiator core support (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front suspension mounting bracket (RH & LH) 590 ×

BRM-16
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive A
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Rear floor front extension (Lower) Under 440 × B
Rear crossmember center assembly 590 ×

Rear side member (RH & LH) 590 ×

C
Muffler mounting bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear side member extension (RH & LH) 780 ×

D
Rear 3rd seat mounting bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×
CAUTION:
If the high strength steel (ultra high strength steel) of this is broken, replace by assembly for the supply part. E
NOTE:
• For the parts without a number described in the figure, it is supplied only with the assembly part that the part is included with.
• Tensile strength column shows the largest strength value of a part in the component part. F
Body Component Parts INFOID:0000000010843421

Refer to parts catalogue for the replacement parts. G

BRM

BRM-17
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4702ZZ

Sunroof models Normal roof models Right side

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections
: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections

BRM-18
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

Both sided A
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
B
Roof Under 440 —

Front roof rail Under 440 —

Roof bow No.4 Under 440 — C

Roof bow No.5 Under 440 —

Rear roof rail Under 440 — D

Roof bow No.1 Under 440 —

Roof bow No.2 Under 440 —

E
Roof bow No.3 Under 440 —

Upper inner front pillar (RH & LH) 590 —

caution
F
Inner center pillar assembly (RH & LH) d. 980MPa 590 —
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Hood 440 ×
G
Front fender (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Side body assembly (RH & LH) Refer to No. −

H
Outer front pillar reinforcement (RH & LH) e. 980MPacaution 590 —
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)

f. 980MPacaution I
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Lower center pillar brace (RH & LH) 590 —
g. 980MPacaution
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in) J
Outer front side body (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Lower front pillar hinge brace (RH & LH) 590 —

BRM
Front fender bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer sill reinforcement (RH & LH) 590 ×

L
Outer sill assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Inner rear pillar (RH & LH) 590 —

Upper rear pillar reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 — M

SUV models 440
Back pillar assembly (Inner RH & LH) —
Wagon models 590
N
Inner rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Inner rear wheelhouse rear extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×
O
Outer rear wheelhouse extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Jack mounting bracket Under 440 — P

Front door assembly (RH & LH) 590 ×

Outer front door panel (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear door assembly (RH & LH) 440 ×

Outer rear door panel (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

BRM-19
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Rear fender assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer back pillar (RH & LH) Under 440 —

Back pillar assembly (Outer RH & LH) Under 440 —

Rear fender extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Fuel filler lid assembly Under 440 ×

Upper rear panel Under 440 ×

Upper rear bumper retainer Under 440 ×

Rear bumper stay (RH & LH) 590 —

Inner center rear bumper reinforcement 1270MPacaution — —

T=1.2 mm (0.047 in)
CAUTION:
If the high strength steel (ultra high strength steel) of this is broken, replace by assembly for the supply part.
NOTE:
• For the parts without a number described in the figure, it is supplied only with the assembly part that the part is included with.
• Tensile strength column shows the largest strength value of a part in the component part.

BRM-20
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

CORROSION PROTECTION
Description INFOID:0000000010843422
B
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-cor-
rosive measures. C

Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel)

To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anti-
D
corrosive precoated steel sheet is adopted replacing conventional
zinc-coated steel sheet.
Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron
alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance E
with cationic electrodeposition primer.

SIIA2294E
G

NISSAN genuine parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that NISSAN
genuine parts or an equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built
H
into the vehicle at the factory.
Phosphate Coating Treatment and Cationic Electrodeposition Primer
A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrodeposition I
primer, which provide excellent corrosion protection, are applied to
all body components.
CAUTION:
Confine paint removal during welding operation to an absolute J
minimum.

BRM

PIIA0095E L

NISSAN genuine parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that NISSAN gen-
uine parts or an equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built into the M
vehicle at the factory.
Undercoating INFOID:0000000010860040

N
The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chip-
ping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoat-
ing which is rust resistant, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.
O
Precautions in Undercoating
1. Never apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three
way catalyst that are subjected to heat). P
2. Never undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts that become hot.
3. Never undercoat rotating parts.
4. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.
5. After putting seal on the vehicle, put undercoating on it.

BRM-21
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4703ZZ

: Undercoated areas
: Sealed portions

Body Sealing INFOID:0000000010860041

The following figure shows the areas that are sealed at the factory. Sealant that is applied to these areas
should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of sealant
and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant.

BRM-22
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4704ZZ

: Vehicle front O
: Sealed portions

BRM-23
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4705ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-24
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

JSKIA4706ZZ

P
: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-25
BODY CONSTRUCTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
BODY CONSTRUCTION
Body Construction INFOID:0000000010843427

JSKIA4707ZZ

Outer side body Outer front pillar reinforcement Upper inner front pillar
Weld nut Side dash Upper hinge plate
Inner front pillar reinforcement Upper dash Rear hoodledge reinforcement

BRM-26
BODY CONSTRUCTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Lower front pillar hinge brace Lower hinge plate Lower dash
A
Outer sill reinforcement Lower front pillar reinforcement Inner sill reinforcement
Inner sill Front floor Front side member outrigger
Inner center pillar Center pillar hinge brace Lower center pillar hinge brace B
Anchor plate Inner sill extension Rear floor front extension
Inner rear wheelhouse Outer rear wheelhouse Inner rear pillar
C
Inner rear pillar reinforcement Rear pillar seat belt anchor Back pillar seat belt anchor
Rear roof rail brace Upper back pillar reinforcement Center back pillar main

BRM

BRM-27
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
Description INFOID:0000000010843428

• This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing
collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body
repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section.
• Technicians are also encouraged to read the Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the
original functions and quality of the vehicle are maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) con-
tains additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Techni-
cians should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repair.
• Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures might not
apply in some regions or countries.
The symbols used in this section for welding operations are shown below.
Symbol marks Description

2-spot welds

JSKIA0049ZZ

JSKIA0053ZZ
3-spot welds

JSKIA0050ZZ

JSKIA0054ZZ
MIG plug weld
For 3 panels plug weld method

JSKIA0051ZZ

JSKIA0055ZZ

MIG seam weld / Point weld

JSKIA0052ZZ JSKIA0056ZZ

BRM-28
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
• Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded
area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is at A
position A due to the construction of the vehicle.

PIIA0150E

D
• Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating
indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer
front pillar over 60 mm (2.36 in) above the inner front pillar cut E
position.

G
JSKIA0104GB

• Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this will H
permit the service part to be accurately cut at the joint position.

BRM
JSKIA0105GB

• An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as per the fol-

L
lowing.
1. Mark cutting lines.
A: Cut position of outer pillar
B: Cut position of inner pillar M
2. Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar.
3. Cut outer pillar along groove of jig (at position A).
4. Remove jig and cut remaining portions.
N
5. Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner.

PIIA0153E
O
Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel INFOID:0000000010843429

SPOT WELDING P
Spot welding is limited to ultra high strength steel (tensile strength: 980 MPa) according to the welding condi-
tions listed below.
CAUTION:
• If the below welding conditions cannot be met, then perform plug welding.
• Never spot weld ultra high strength steel of tensile strength more than 980 MPa. For this type of ultra
high strength steel, perform plug welding.

BRM-29
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
• The below welding condition is applicable only to this vehicle. Never apply this same welding condi-
tion to other vehicles.
Welding condition
Welder tip diameter 6 mm
Welding pressure (Gun force) 3500 N
Welding current 8200 A
Weld time 0.22 sec (11 cyc: 50 Hz area,
13 cyc: 60 Hz area)
Panel configuration Combination of a plate of ten-
sile strength 980 MPa and that
of tensile strength less than
980 MPa. (Up to 3 plates)
PLUG WELDING
To weld ultra high strength steel of tensile strength 980 MPa or more, perform plug welding observing the
welding hole diameter described in the manual.
CAUTION:
• To perform plug welding, use fuel mixture (Ar 80% + CO2 20%) for shielding gas of welder.
• Never use carbon dioxide gas (CO2 100%) as shielding gas of welder. Using CO2 100% gas results in
inadequate weld strength.
• When welding hole diameter cannot be met, make multiple holes (smaller diameter) so that the sum
of the hole areas equals the area of the original weld hole.
EXAMPLE

JSKIA3503GB

Body sealing

: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to ″Welding of
Ultra High Strength Steel″.

BRM-30
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Radiator Core Support INFOID:0000000010843430

BRM

JSKIA3843ZZ O

: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part. P
Replacement part
z Upper radiator core support assem- z Side radiator core support
bly

Hoodledge INFOID:0000000010843431

Work after radiator core support is removed.

BRM-31
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4916ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
Replacement part
z Front strut housing assembly z Hoodledge reinforcement z Hoodledge connector assembly

BRM-32
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4616ZZ

: Vehicle front O
View F and H: Before installing hoodledge reinforcement
Hoodledge (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000010843432 P

Work after radiator core support is removed.

BRM-33
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4617ZZ

: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Front strut housing assembly z Hoodledge reinforcement z Hoodledge connector assembly

BRM-34
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4618ZZ

: Vehicle front O
View E: Before installing hoodledge reinforcement
Front Side Member INFOID:0000000010843433 P

Work after upper radiator core support assembly and hoodledge are removed.

BRM-35
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4918ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ11 mm (0.43 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ12 mm (0.47 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Front side member closing plate z Front side member assembly z Front suspension mounting bracket

BRM-36
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4919GB

: Vehicle front O
: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ10 mm (0.39 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ12 mm (0.47 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel). P
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

View E: Before installing front suspension mounting bracket

BRM-37
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA3850ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ10 mm (0.39 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ12 mm (0.47 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).

View H: Before installing front suspension mounting bracket

Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000010843434

Work after upper radiator core support assembly and hoodledge connector assembly are removed.

BRM-38
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4604GB

Unit: mm (in) O
: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part P
z Front side member closing plate z Front side member assembly (RH)
(RH)

POINT
The front side member on the left can also be replaced partially by cutting at the position shown in the figure.

BRM-39
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA3852GB

Front side member assembly cutting Front side member closing plate cut-
position (LH) ting position (LH)
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Front side member closing plate (LH) z Front side member assembly (LH)

Front Pillar INFOID:0000000010843435

Work after hoodledge reinforcement is removed.

BRM-40
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4920GB

Urethane foam Body sealing O

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel). P
: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Side body assembly z Upper inner front pillar z Side dash

BRM-41
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4921GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-29, "Weld-
ing of Ultra High Strength Steel"

View D: Before installing side body assembly

View F: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-42
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4922GB

View H and J: Before installing side body assembly

View O: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-43
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Center Pillar INFOID:0000000010843436

JSKIA4608GB

BRM-44
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Replacement part
z Side body assembly z Inner center pillar assembly A

BRM

O
JSKIA3857GB

Unit: mm (in)
P
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).

View B and F: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-45
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4609GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-29, "Weld-
ing of Ultra High Strength Steel"

BRM-46
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Outer Sill (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000010843437

BRM

JSKIA4626GB O

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front P
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-29, "Weld-
ing of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Replacement part
z Outer sill assembly z Outer sill reinforcement

View A and B: Before installing outer sill assembly

BRM-47
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Outer Sill INFOID:0000000010843438

JSKIA4923GB

Urethane foam Body sealing

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-29, "Weld-
ing of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Replacement part
z Outer sill assembly z Outer sill reinforcement

BRM-48
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
View A: Before installing outer sill assembly
A

BRM

JSKIA4611GB

O
Body sealing
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front P
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-29, "Weld-
ing of Ultra High Strength Steel"

BRM-49
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4924GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-29, "Weld-
ing of Ultra High Strength Steel"

View J: Before installing outer sill assembly

Inner Sill INFOID:0000000011005179

Work after outer sill assembly and outer sill reinforcement are removed.

BRM-50
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4927GB

Lower front pillar hinge brace (reus- Urethane foam O

able)
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front P
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
Replacement part
z Inner sill

View A: Before installing outer sill assembly and front fender bracket assembly

BRM-51
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4928GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ10 mm (0.39 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ12 mm (0.47 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-29, "Weld-
ing of Ultra High Strength Steel"

BRM-52
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Rear Fender INFOID:0000000010843439

BRM

JSKIA3863GB O

Urethane foam Body sealing

Unit: mm (in) P
: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Rear fender assembly

BRM-53
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4613GB

Body sealing
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front

BRM-54
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA3865GB

Adhesive O
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
P
View J: Before installing rear fender
View M: Right side rear fender

BRM-55
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Rear Fender Extension INFOID:0000000011005180

JSKIA4930GB

Body sealing
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Rear fender extension

Outer Rear Wheelhouse INFOID:0000000011005183

Work after rear fender is removed.

BRM-56
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4931GB

: Vehicle front O
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Replacement part P
z Outer rear wheelhouse

Inner Rear Wheelhouse INFOID:0000000011005182

Work after rear fender and outer rear wheelhouse are removed.

BRM-57
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4932ZZ

Replacement part
z Inner rear wheelhouse

Inner Rear Pillar Reinforcement INFOID:0000000011005184

Work after rear fender is removed.

BRM-58
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4933GB

Unit: mm (in) O
Replacement part
z Upper rear pillar reinforcement
P
Inner Rear Pillar INFOID:0000000011005185

Work after rear fender is removed.

BRM-59
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4934GB

Urethane foam

: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Replacement part
z Inner rear pillar z Upper rear pillar reinforcement

BRM-60
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Rear Panel INFOID:0000000010843440

BRM

JSKIA4614GB O

: Vehicle front
: Welding method, the number of welding points, and the tightening torque apply to both side of the vehicle. P
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Replacement part
z Upper rear panel

BRM-61
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Rear Floor Rear INFOID:0000000010843441

Work after rear panel is removed.

JSKIA3869ZZ

Left side Right side

: Vehicle front
: Welding method and the number of welding points apply to both side of the vehicle.
Replacement part
z Rear floor rear

BRM-62
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Rear Side Member Extension (SUV Models) INFOID:0000000010843442

A
Work after rear panel is removed.

BRM

O
JSKIA3872ZZ

: Vehicle front P
Replacement part
z Rear side member extension

Rear Side Member Extension (Wagon Models) INFOID:0000000010843443

Work after rear panel is removed.

BRM-63
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4034ZZ

: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Rear side member extension z Rear 3rd seat mounting bracket as-
sembly

BRM-64
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Roof (Normal Roof Models) INFOID:0000000011005186

BRM

JSKIA3873ZZ O

Body sealing adhesive

: Vehicle front P
: Welding method and the number of welding points apply to both side of the vehicle.
: Adhesive portion apply to both side of the vehicle.
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Roof z Roof bow No.1 z Roof bow No.2
z Roof bow No.3 z Roof bow No.4 z Roof bow No.5

BRM-65
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Roof (Sunroof Models) INFOID:0000000011005188

JSKIA4935ZZ

Body sealing adhesive

: Vehicle front
: Welding method and the number of welding points apply to both side of the vehicle.
: Adhesive portion apply to both side of the vehicle.
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Roof z Roof bow No.4 z Roof bow No.5

BRM-66
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Roof Rail INFOID:0000000011005189

A
Work after roof is removed.

BRM

O
JSKIA4936GB

: Vehicle front P
: Welding method and the number of welding points apply to both side of the vehicle.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Replacement part
z Front roof rail z Rear roof rail

BRM-67
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

BODY ALIGNMENT
Body Center Marks INFOID:0000000010860042

A mark is placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing the vehicle frame
(members, pillars, etc.) damaged by an accident which it enables more accurate and effective repair by using
these marks together with body alignment specifications.

JSKIA4708ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)
Points Portion Marks
A Front roof Embossment
B Cowl top Indent
C Cowl top Hole φ8 (0.31)
D Trans control reinforcement Hole 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

BRM-68
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Points Portion Marks
A
E Rear seat crossmember Embossment
F Rear roof Embossment

Description INFOID:0000000010860043
B

• All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.

• When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself C
to make sure there is no free play.
• When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
• Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
D
• An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side
is symmetrically the same value.
• The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of ″X″, ″Y″
and ″Z″. E
• ″Z″: Imaginary base line [200 mm (7.87 in) below datum line (″0Z″ at design plan)]

J
JSKIA0073GB

Vehicle center Front axle center Imaginary base line

BRM
Engine Compartment INFOID:0000000010860044

MEASUREMENT L
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.
M

BRM-69
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4709GB

Unit: mm (in)

«The others»
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

– 777 (30.59)* – 596 (23.46)* – 1000 (39.37)

– 852 (33.54)* – 1169 (46.02)* – 967 (38.07)

– 535 (21.06) – 986 (38.82) – 1425 (56.10)

– 546 (21.50) – 1509 (59.41) – 290 (11.42)

– 721 (28.39) – 1212 (47.72)* – 296 (11.65)

– 700 (27.56) – 1171 (46.10) – 362 (14.25)

– 789 (31.06) – 331 (13.03) – 375 (14.76)

– 869 (34.21) – 1435 (56.50) – 962 (37.87)*

– 884 (34.80) – 853 (33.58) – 1005 (39.57)*

– 872 (34.33) – 1003 (39.49) – 1071 (42.17)

– 474 (18.66) – 977 (38.46) – 1081 (42.56)*

– 1321 (52.01)* – 1073 (42.24) – 1059 (41.69)

– 1262 (49.68) – 1033 (40.67) – 1053 (41.46)

– 445 (17.52) – 973 (38.31) – 1027 (40.43)

– 1058 (41.65) – 959 (37.76) – 1021 (40.20)

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-70
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

L
JSKIA4710ZZ

: Vehicle front M

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material N

Front side member hole center
Cowl top hole center of center positioning mark : φ9 (0.35)
φ8 (0.31) : φ8 (0.31) O
: φ14 (0.55)
Engine mounting bracket hole center 12×10
Hood hinge installing hole center φ12 (0.47)
(0.47×0.39) P
Front suspension installing hole center 16×10
Hoodledge connector hole center φ12 (0.47)
(0.63×0.39)
Front side member hole center
: φ11 (0.43)
Front fender installing hole center φ7 (0.28)
: φ12 (0.47)
: φ13 (0.51)

BRM-71
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Point Material Point Material
Front hoodledge reinforcement hole center φ12 Torque rod mounting bracket hole center φ14
(0.47) (0.55)
Upper radiator core support hole center
: φ7 (0.28)
: φ13 (0.51)

Underbody INFOID:0000000010860045

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.

BRM-72
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

BRM

JSKIA4422GB

P
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Vehicle left side

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-73
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4423ZZ

: Vehicle front

BRM-74
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Unit: mm (in)
Coordinates Coordinates A
Points Remarks Points Remarks
X Y Z X Y Z
478.0 −566.6 375.5 ±650.0 1954.0 272.9
Hole φ18 (0.71) Hole φ16 (0.63)
(18.819) (−22.307) (14.783) (±25.591) (76.929) (10.744) B
−501.0 −566.6 375.5 ±525.4 2480.4 380.0
Hole φ18 (0.71) Hole φ12 (0.47)
(−19.724) (−22.307) (14.783) (±20.685) (97.653) (14.961)

: Hole φ30 (1.18)

C
462.4 −346.0 502.5 ±330.0 2501.0 434.0
Hole φ16 (0.63) : Hole 32×30
(18.205) (−13.622) (19.783) (±12.992) (98.464) (17.087)
(1.26×1.18)
−474.7 −372.0 502.5 549.0 2911.0 435.0 D
Hole φ16 (0.63) Hole φ20 (0.79)
(−18.689) (−14.646) (19.783) (21.614) (114.606) (17.126)

: Hole φ30 (1.18)

±305.0 301.0 277.8 −525.5 2897.2 435.0 E
: Hole 32×30 Hole φ20 (0.79)
(±12.008) (11.850) (10.936) (−20.689) (114.063) (17.126)
(1.26×1.18)
±410.0 660.0 190.4 551.0 3248.0 433.8 Hole 16×14
Hole φ14 (0.55) F
(±16.142) (25.984) (7.495) (21.693) (127.874) (17.079) (0.63×0.55)
±410.0 800.0 191.4 −523.5 3248.0 433.8 Hole 16×14
Hole φ12 (0.47)
(±16.142) (31.496) (7.535) (−20.610) (127.874) (17.079) (0.63×0.55)
±410.0 1270.0 189.2 ±598.6 7.4 911.9 G
Hole φ12 (0.47) Hole φ33 (1.30)
(±16.142) (50.000) (7.449) (±23.566) (0.291) (35.902)
±410.0 1751.0 180.2
Hole φ13 (0.51)
(±16.142) (68.937) (7.094) H

Passenger Compartment INFOID:0000000010860046

I
MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle. J

BRM

BRM-75
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4711GB

Unit: mm (in)

«The others»
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

- 1334 (52.52) - 1665 (65.55)* - 1077 (42.40)*

- 1616 (63.62)* - 1458 (57.40) - 943 (37.13)*

- 1494 (58.82)* - 1670 (65.75)* - 794 (31.26)*

- 1634 (64.33)* - 1461 (57.52) - 1179 (46.42)*

- 1441 (56.73) - 1749 (68.86)* - 1092 (42.99)*

- 1738 (68.43)* - 1567 (61.69)* - 782 (30.79)*

- 1458 (57.40) - 1281 (50.43) - 1592 (62.68)

- 1886 (74.25)* - 1602 (63.07)* - 1172 (46.14)*

- 1689 (66.50)* - 1419 (55.87) - 1175 (46.26)*

- 1327 (52.24) - 1462 (57.56) - 1623 (63.90)

- 1569 (61.77)* - 1110 (43.70)* - 1235 (48.62)*

- 1458 (57.40) - 979 (38.54)* - 1137 (44.76)*

- 1461 (57.52) - 890 (35.04)* - 1588 (62.52)

- 1326 (52.20) - 1233 (48.54)* - 1619 (63.74)

- 1562 (61.50)* - 1068 (42.05)*

- 1498 (58.98)* - 836 (32.91)*

BRM-76
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
MEASUREMENT POINTS
A

BRM

JSKIA4712ZZ
M
: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)
N
Point Material Point Material

Cowl top indent of center positioning mark Center pillar indent O

Roof flange end of center positioning mark Rear fender indent P

Trans control reinforcement hole center of center

Outer side body joggle
positioning mark 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

BRM-77
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Point Material Point Material
Rear seat crossmember positioning mark of cen-
Outer side body indent
ter positioning mark
Door hinge installing hole center
Front pillar indent : φ12 (0.47)
: φ9 (0.35)

Rear Body INFOID:0000000010860047

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.

JSKIA4428GB

Unit: mm (in)

«The others»
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

– 612 (24.09)* – 1131 (44.53) – 762 (30.00)*

– 797 (31.38)* – 323 (12.72)* – 1202 (47.32)

– 1042 (41.02)* – 1210 (47.64)* – 578 (22.76)*

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-78
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

I
JSKIA4429ZZ

: Vehicle front J
Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material

BRM
Roof flange end of center positioning mark Lower back pillar main joggle

Center back pillar main joggle Lower back pillar main hole center φ7 (0.28)

Center back pillar main hole center φ7 (0.28) Back door striker installing hole center L

BRM-79
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
Precautions for Plastics INFOID:0000000010843453

Heat resisting
Abbre- Resistance to gasoline and
Material name temperature Other cautions
viation solvents
°C (°F)
Gasoline and most solvents are
PE Polyethylene 60 (140) harmless if applied for a very Flammable
short time (wipe out quickly).
ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene 80 (176) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —
AES Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene 80 (176) ↑ —
Gasoline and most solvents are
EPM/ Ethylene Propylene (Diene) co-
80 (176) harmless if applied for a very Flammable
EPDM polymer
short time (wipe out quickly).
PS Polystyrene 80 (176) Avoid solvents. Flammable
Gasoline and most solvents are
Poisonous gas is emitted
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride 80 (176) harmless if applied for a very
when burned.
short time (wipe out quickly).
TPO Thermoplastic Olefine 80 (176) ↑ Flammable
AAS Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene 85 (185) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —
PMMA Poly Methyl Methacrylate 85 (185) ↑ —
EVAC Ethylene Vinyl Acetate 90 (194) ↑ —
Gasoline and most solvents are
Flammable, avoid bat-
PP Polypropylene 90 (194) harmless if applied for a very
tery acid.
short time (wipe out quickly).
PUR Polyurethane 90 (194) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —
UP Unsaturated Polyester 90 (194) ↑ Flammable
ASA Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate 100 (212) ↑ Flammable
PPE Poly Phenylene Ether 110 (230) ↑ —
TPU Thermoplastic Urethane 110 (230) ↑ —
PBT+ Poly Butylene Terephthalate +
120 (248) ↑ Flammable
PC Polycarbonate
PC Polycarbonate 120 (248) ↑ —
POM Poly Oxymethylene 120 (248) ↑ Avoid battery acid.
Avoid immersing in wa-
PA Polyamide 140 (284) ↑
ter.
PBT Poly Butylene Terephthalate 140 (284) ↑ —
PAR Polyarylate 180 (356) ↑ —
PET Polyethylene terephthalate 180 (356) ↑ —
PEI Polyetherimide 200 (392) ↑ —
CAUTION:
• When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics (influence of heat
and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them.
• Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials, characteristics.

BRM-80
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]
Location of Plastic Parts INFOID:0000000010843454

JSKIA4713ZZ
I
Component Material Component Material
Cover ABS Rear spoiler PC + ABS
J
PBT + PET +
Base Lens PMMA
Door mirror Glass fiber High mount stop lamp
Case ASA Housing ABS
BRM
Finisher ASA Back door finisher ABS
Lens PMMA Lens PC
Side turn signal lamp License plate lamp L
Housing ABS Housing PC
Side roof molding PVC + Stainless Lens PC
Rear fog lamp
Wind shield molding PVC Housing PC M
Lens PC Back door PP
Front combination lamp
Housing PP Lens PMMA
Reflex reflector N
Front grille ABS Housing ABS

Bumper fascia PP + EPM Lens PMMA

Rear combination lamp
Lens Glass Housing ASA O
Front fog lamp PBT + ASA +
Housing Sill cover PP
Glass fiber
P
Fillet molding PP Side guard molding PP

Front fender protector PP Grip cover PC + PET

Door outside handle
Door outside molding PVC + Stainless Grip body PC + ABS

BRM-81
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (LHD)]

JSKIA4714ZZ

Component Material Component Material

Side luggage finisher PP Cluster lid C PC + ABS

Lens PC Glove box PP

Personal lamp
Housing PP Lower side panel PP + EPM

Center pillar garnish PP Finisher PC + ABS

Switch finisher PP Manual A/C Switch PC
Map lamp
Console PP Case ABS
Lid box PC + ABS A/C Control Finisher PC + ABS

Front pillar garnish PP Automatic Switch PC

Cluster lid A PP A/C Case PC + ABS

Center ventilator grille PC + ABS Lens PC

Skin TPO Body PP
Pad PUR Console box PP
Instrument panel Center console
A/T console
Core PP + EPDM PC + ABS
finisher

BRM-82
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
< VEHICLE INFORMATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

VEHICLE INFORMATION A
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
Body Exterior Paint Color INFOID:0000000010843489
B

JSKIA4358ZZ
G

Color code BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ
Dark Ol- Dark
H
Description Red Orange Black Silver Gray White
ive Blue
Component
Paint type note 2S 2PM 2PM 2P 2M 2M 3P 2M
I
Hard clear
× × × × – – – ×
coat
Door mirror cover Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ J
Chromium
Front grille Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
plate
Bumper fascia Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ BRM
Fillet molding Material color – – – – – – – –
Chromium
Door outside handle Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr L
plate
Rear spoiler (Side) Black G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01

Rear spoiler (Upper) Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ M
Chromium
Back door finisher Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
plate
Back door Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ N

Sill cover Material color – – – – – – – –

Side guard molding Material color – – – – – – – – O

NOTE:
• 2M: 2-Coat Metallic
• 2P: 2-Coat pearl P
• 2S: 2-Coat solid
• 3P: 3-Coat pearl
• 2PM: 2-Coat Pearl metallic

BRM-83
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010843490

D4D engine : 20 minutes

BRM-84
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of A
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION: B
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.

BRM

BRM-85
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
High Strength Steel (HSS) INFOID:0000000010843491

High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight.
Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:

BRM-86
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

Tensile strength Major applicable parts A

• Rear seat crossmember reinforcement
(Rear seat crossmember assembly component part)
• Center front floor (Front)
B
(Center front floor component part)
• Trans control reinforcement
(Center front floor component part)
• Front floor (Front) C
(Front floor component part)
• 2nd crossmember
(Front floor component part)
• 3rd crossmember D
(Front floor component part)
• Inner sill reinforcement
(Inner sill component part)
• Side dash E
(Side dash component part)
• Inner front pillar reinforcement (RH only)
(Side dash component part)
• Front suspension spring support F
(Front strut housing assembly component part)
• Front bumper stay
• Front side member closing plate (Front)
G
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front side member flange
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front tie down hook H
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front side member (Front)
(Front side member assembly component part)
440 - 780 MPa
• Front side member brace I
(Front side member assembly component part)
• Front suspension mounting bracket
• Rear crossmember center assembly
• Rear side member J
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear side member rear reinforcement
(Rear side member component part)
• Inner sill extension
BRM
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear side member reinforcement
(Rear side member component part) L
• Outer rear anchor reinforcement
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear spring mounting bracket
(Rear side member component part) M
• Spring mounting reinforcement
(Rear side member component part)
• Rear side member extension
• Inner center pillar assembly (Lower) N
• Outer front pillar reinforcement (Rear)
• Lower center pillar brace (Lower)
• Lower front pillar hinge brace
• Outer sill reinforcement O
• Rear pillar gusset
(Inner rear pillar component part)
• Rear pillar seat belt anchor
(Inner rear pillar component part)
P
• Rear bumper stay

BRM-87
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

Tensile strength Major applicable parts

• Front side member rear extension
(Front floor component part)
• Inner sill
• Lower dash crossmember
(Lower dash complete component part)
• Lower dash crossmember
• Front bumper armature assembly
• Front side member closing plate (Rear)
(Front side member closing plate component part)
• Front side member (Rear)
(Front side member assembly component part)
• Inner center pillar (Upper)
980 - 1500 MPa
(Inner center pillar assembly component part)
• Upper center pillar brace
(Inner center pillar assembly component part)
• Center pillar seat belt anchor
(Inner center pillar assembly component part)
• Outer front pillar reinforcement
(Outer front pillar reinforcement component part)
• Center pillar hinge brace (Upper)
(Lower center pillar brace component part)
• Center pillar extension
(Lower center pillar brace component part)
• Inner center rear bumper reinforcement

Read the following precautions when repairing HSS:

1. Additional points to consider
• The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heat-
ing is not recommended, because it may weaken the compo-
nent. When heating is unavoidable, never heat HSS parts
above 550°C (1,022°F).
Verify heating temperature with a thermometer.
(Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropri-
ate.)

PIIA0115E

• When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong,
pulling may cause deformation in adjacent sections of the body. In this case, increase the number of
measuring points, and carefully pull the HSS panel.
• When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible.
Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas due
to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum
margin of 50 mm (1.97 in).

PIIA0117E

BRM-88
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
• When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possi-
ble in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to A
heat.
If spot welding is impossible, use MIG. welding. Do not use
gas (torch) for welding because it is inferior in welding
B
strength.

PIIA0144E

D
• Spot welding on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary
steel panel.
Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a low E
speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bit
durability and facilitate the operation.
F

G
PIIA0145E

2. Precautions in spot welding HSS H

PIIA0146E BRM

• The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no

gaps. L

PIIA0147E

BRM-89
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
• Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch.
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness (T) Minimum pitch (L)
0.6 (0.024) 10 (0.39) or more
0.8 (0.031) 12 (0.47) or more
1.0 (0.039) 18 (0.71) or more
1.2 (0.047) 20 (0.79) or more
1.6 (0.063) 27 (1.06) or more
1.8 (0.071) 31 (1.22) or more
JSKIA0781ZZ

BRM-90
REPAIRING MATERIAL
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

PREPARATION A
REPAIRING MATERIAL
Foam Repair INFOID:0000000010843492
B
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the
vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
C
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS
Use commercially available Urethane foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle.
D
<Urethane foam for foaming agent> 3M™ Automix™ Flexible Foam 08463 or equiva-
lent
Read instructions on product for fill procedures. E
Example of foaming agent filling operation procedure
1. Fill procedures after installation of service part.
a. Eliminate foam material remaining on vehicle side. F
b. Clean area after eliminating form insulator and foam material.
c. Install service part.
G
d. Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill enough to close gap with the service part.

BRM

L
JSKIA0129GB

Urethane foam
M
Nozzle insert hole
: Vehicle front

2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. N

a. Eliminate foam material remaining on vehicle side.
b. Clean area after eliminating foam insulator and foam material.
O
c. Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.

BRM-91
REPAIRING MATERIAL
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

Urethane foam
Fill while avoiding flange area
: Vehicle front
NOTE:
Fill enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange
area.
d. Install service part.
NOTE: JSKIA0130GB

Refer to label for information on working times.

BRM-92
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
A
Ultra High Strength Steel Part INFOID:0000000010843493

DESCRIPTION B
Ultra high strength steel parts signify high strength steel plates with tensile strength of 980 MPa or more.
When replacing parts made of ultra high strength steel or parts including ultra high strength steel, never per-
form the prohibition described below: C
PROHIBITION
WARNING:
Never cut ultra high strength steel parts or perform butt welding. Violation of this prohibition causes D
extreme strength degradation, and the strength before damage cannot be secured.
PART REPLACEMENT
E
To replace an ultra high strength part, be sure to replace it by panel supply unit of ultra high strength steel part.
For the welding method, refer to BRM-108, "Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Underbody Component Parts INFOID:0000000010843494
F
Refer to parts catalogue for the replacement parts.

BRM

BRM-93
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4715ZZ

SUV models Wagon models

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections
: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections

BRM-94
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

Both sided A
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
B
Rear floor rear Under 440 ×

Spare tire clamp bracket Under 440 —

Rear floor side assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 × C

Rear floor front Under 440 —

Rear floor board reinforcement 590 × D

Rear floor front extension (Upper RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear seat crossmember assembly 590 ×

E
Center front floor 780 ×

980MPacaution
T=1.8 mm (0.071 in) F
Front floor (RH & LH) c. Inside (RH only) 590 ×
caution
980MPa
T=2.0 mm (0.079 in) G

Inner sill (RH & LH) 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=1.4 mm (0.055 in)
H
Cowl top Under 440 ×

Upper dash assembly Under 440 ×

980MPacaution I
Lower dash complete d. 590 ×
T=1.4 mm (0.055 in)
Side dash (RH & LH) 590 ×
J
Lower dash crossmember 980MPacaution 440 ×
T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Front strut housing assembly (RH & LH) 590 × BRM
Upper hoodledge (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Lower hoodledge (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

L
Hoodledge reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front hoodledge reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

M
Upper front fender bracket (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front fender bracket (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Upper radiator core support assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 × N

Front bumper armature assembly 1500MPacaution — —

T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
O
Front bumper stay (RH & LH) 590 —

Hoodledge connector assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

980MPacaution P
Front side member closing plate (RH & LH) e. 590 ×
T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)

Front side member assembly (RH & LH) f. 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Side radiator core support (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front suspension mounting bracket (RH & LH) 590 ×

BRM-95
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Rear floor front extension (Lower) Under 440 ×

Rear crossmember center assembly 590 ×

Rear side member (RH & LH) 590 ×

Muffler mounting bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear side member extension (RH & LH) 780 ×

Rear 3rd seat mounting bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×
CAUTION:
If the high strength steel (ultra high strength steel) of this is broken, replace by assembly for the supply part.
NOTE:
• For the parts without a number described in the figure, it is supplied only with the assembly part that the part is included with.
• Tensile strength column shows the largest strength value of a part in the component part.

Body Component Parts INFOID:0000000010860048

Refer to parts catalogue for the replacement parts.

BRM-96
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

JSKIA4702ZZ

P
Sunroof models Normal roof models Right side

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections
: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections

BRM-97
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Roof Under 440 —

Front roof rail Under 440 —

Roof bow No.4 Under 440 —

Roof bow No.5 Under 440 —

Rear roof rail Under 440 —

Roof bow No.1 Under 440 —

Roof bow No.2 Under 440 —

Roof bow No.3 Under 440 —

Upper inner front pillar (RH & LH) 590 —

caution
Inner center pillar assembly (RH & LH) d. 980MPa 590 —
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Hood 440 ×

Front fender (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Side body assembly (RH & LH) Refer to No. −

Outer front pillar reinforcement (RH & LH) e. 980MPacaution 590 —

T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)

f. 980MPacaution
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Lower center pillar brace (RH & LH) 590 —
g. 980MPacaution
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Outer front side body (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Lower front pillar hinge brace (RH & LH) 590 —

Front fender bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer sill reinforcement (RH & LH) 590 ×

Outer sill assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Inner rear pillar (RH & LH) 590 —

Upper rear pillar reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 —

SUV models 440
Back pillar assembly (Inner RH & LH) —
Wagon models 590
Inner rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Inner rear wheelhouse rear extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer rear wheelhouse extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Jack mounting bracket Under 440 —

Front door assembly (RH & LH) 590 ×

Outer front door panel (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear door assembly (RH & LH) 440 ×

Outer rear door panel (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

BRM-98
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive A
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Rear fender assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 × B
Outer back pillar (RH & LH) Under 440 —

Back pillar assembly (Outer RH & LH) Under 440 —

C
Rear fender extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Fuel filler lid assembly Under 440 ×

D
Upper rear panel Under 440 ×

Upper rear bumper retainer Under 440 ×

Rear bumper stay (RH & LH) 590 — E

Inner center rear bumper reinforcement 1270MPacaution — —

T=1.2 mm (0.047 in)
F
CAUTION:
If the high strength steel (ultra high strength steel) of this is broken, replace by assembly for the supply part.
NOTE:
G
• For the parts without a number described in the figure, it is supplied only with the assembly part that the part is included with.
• Tensile strength column shows the largest strength value of a part in the component part.

BRM

BRM-99
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

CORROSION PROTECTION
Description INFOID:0000000010843496

To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-cor-
rosive measures.
Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel)
To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anti-
corrosive precoated steel sheet is adopted replacing conventional
zinc-coated steel sheet.
Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron
alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance
with cationic electrodeposition primer.

SIIA2294E

NISSAN genuine parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that NISSAN
genuine parts or an equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built
into the vehicle at the factory.
Phosphate Coating Treatment and Cationic Electrodeposition Primer
A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrodeposition
primer, which provide excellent corrosion protection, are applied to
all body components.
CAUTION:
Confine paint removal during welding operation to an absolute
minimum.

PIIA0095E

NISSAN genuine parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that NISSAN gen-
uine parts or an equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built into the
vehicle at the factory.
Undercoating INFOID:0000000010843497

The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chip-
ping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoat-
ing which is rust resistant, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.
Precautions in Undercoating
1. Never apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three
way catalyst that are subjected to heat).
2. Never undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts that become hot.
3. Never undercoat rotating parts.
4. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.
5. After putting seal on the vehicle, put undercoating on it.

BRM-100
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4717ZZ F

: Undercoated areas
: Sealed portions G
Body Sealing INFOID:0000000010843499

The following figure shows the areas that are sealed at the factory. Sealant that is applied to these areas H
should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of sealant
and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant.
I

BRM

BRM-101
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4718ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-102
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

JSKIA4719ZZ

P
: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-103
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4441ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-104
BODY CONSTRUCTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
BODY CONSTRUCTION
A
Body Construction INFOID:0000000010843501

BRM

JSKIA4721ZZ

Outer side body Outer front pillar reinforcement Upper inner front pillar
Weld nut Side dash Upper hinge plate
Upper dash Rear hoodledge reinforcement Lower front pillar hinge brace

BRM-105
BODY CONSTRUCTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Lower hinge plate Lower dash Outer sill reinforcement
Lower front pillar reinforcement Inner sill Front floor
Front side member outrigger Inner center pillar Center pillar hinge brace
Lower center pillar hinge brace Anchor plate Inner sill extension
Rear floor front extension Inner rear wheelhouse Outer rear wheelhouse
Inner rear pillar Inner rear pillar reinforcement Rear pillar seat belt anchor
Back pillar seat belt anchor Rear roof rail brace Upper back pillar reinforcement
Center back pillar main

BRM-106
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
A
Description INFOID:0000000010843502

• This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing B
collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body
repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section.
• Technicians are also encouraged to read the Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the
original functions and quality of the vehicle are maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) con- C
tains additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Techni-
cians should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repair.
• Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures might not D
apply in some regions or countries.
The symbols used in this section for welding operations are shown below.
Symbol marks Description
E

F
2-spot welds

G
JSKIA0049ZZ

H
JSKIA0053ZZ
3-spot welds
I

JSKIA0050ZZ

BRM

JSKIA0054ZZ L
MIG plug weld
For 3 panels plug weld method

M
JSKIA0051ZZ

N
JSKIA0055ZZ

MIG seam weld / Point weld

JSKIA0052ZZ JSKIA0056ZZ

BRM-107
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
• Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded
area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is at
position A due to the construction of the vehicle.

PIIA0150E

• Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating

indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer
front pillar over 60 mm (2.36 in) above the inner front pillar cut
position.

JSKIA0104GB

• Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this will
permit the service part to be accurately cut at the joint position.

JSKIA0105GB

• An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as per the fol-

lowing.
1. Mark cutting lines.
A: Cut position of outer pillar
B: Cut position of inner pillar
2. Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar.
3. Cut outer pillar along groove of jig (at position A).
4. Remove jig and cut remaining portions.
5. Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner.

PIIA0153E

Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel INFOID:0000000010843503

SPOT WELDING
Spot welding is limited to ultra high strength steel (tensile strength: 980 MPa) according to the welding condi-
tions listed below.
CAUTION:
• If the below welding conditions cannot be met, then perform plug welding.
• Never spot weld ultra high strength steel of tensile strength more than 980 MPa. For this type of ultra
high strength steel, perform plug welding.

BRM-108
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
• The below welding condition is applicable only to this vehicle. Never apply this same welding condi-
tion to other vehicles. A
Welding condition
Welder tip diameter 6 mm
Welding pressure (Gun force) 3500 N B
Welding current 8200 A
Weld time 0.22 sec (11 cyc: 50 Hz area,
C
13 cyc: 60 Hz area)
Panel configuration Combination of a plate of ten-
sile strength 980 MPa and that D
of tensile strength less than
980 MPa. (Up to 3 plates)
PLUG WELDING E
To weld ultra high strength steel of tensile strength 980 MPa or more, perform plug welding observing the
welding hole diameter described in the manual.
CAUTION: F
• To perform plug welding, use fuel mixture (Ar 80% + CO2 20%) for shielding gas of welder.
• Never use carbon dioxide gas (CO2 100%) as shielding gas of welder. Using CO2 100% gas results in
inadequate weld strength.
• When welding hole diameter cannot be met, make multiple holes (smaller diameter) so that the sum G
of the hole areas equals the area of the original weld hole.
EXAMPLE
H

BRM

JSKIA3503GB
M
Body sealing

: Vehicle front
N
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to ″Welding of
O
Ultra High Strength Steel″.

BRM-109
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Radiator Core Support INFOID:0000000010843504

JSKIA3843ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Upper radiator core support assem- z Side radiator core support
bly

Hoodledge INFOID:0000000011010379

Work after radiator core support is removed.

BRM-110
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4598ZZ

: Vehicle front O
: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
Replacement part
z Front strut housing assembly z Hoodledge reinforcement z Hoodledge connector assembly P

BRM-111
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4599ZZ

: Vehicle front

View F and H: Before installing hoodledge reinforcement

Hoodledge (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000011010380

Work after radiator core support is removed.

BRM-112
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4600ZZ

: Vehicle front O
Replacement part
z Upper hoodledge z Lower hoodledge z Hoodledge reinforcement
z Hoodledge connector assembly P

BRM-113
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4601ZZ

: Vehicle front

View E: Before installing hoodledge reinforcement

Front Side Member INFOID:0000000010843507

Work after upper radiator core support assembly and hoodledge are removed.

BRM-114
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA3848ZZ

: Vehicle front O
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ11 mm (0.43 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ12 mm (0.47 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel). P
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Front side member closing plate z Front side member assembly z Front suspension mounting bracket

BRM-115
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4603GB

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

View E: Before installing front suspension mounting bracket

BRM-116
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA3850ZZ

: Vehicle front O
: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ10 mm (0.39 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ12 mm (0.47 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel). P
View H: Before installing front suspension mounting bracket
Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000010843508

Work after upper radiator core support assembly and hoodledge connector assembly are removed.

BRM-117
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4604GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Front side member closing plate z Front side member assembly (RH)
(RH)

POINT
The front side member on the left can also be replaced partially by cutting at the position shown in the figure.

BRM-118
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

E
JSKIA3852GB

Front side member assembly cutting Front side member closing plate cut-
F
position (LH) ting position (LH)
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front G
Replacement part
z Front side member closing plate (LH) z Front side member assembly (LH)
H
Front Pillar INFOID:0000000011010381

Work after hoodledge reinforcement is removed.

BRM

BRM-119
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4605GB

Urethane foam Body sealing

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ8 mm (0.31 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Side body assembly z Upper inner front pillar z Side dash

BRM-120
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4606GB

Unit: mm (in) O
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel). P
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"

View D: Before installing side body assembly

View F: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-121
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4607GB

View H and J: Before installing side body assembly

View O: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-122
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Center Pillar INFOID:0000000010843510

BRM

JSKIA4608GB O

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front P
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"

BRM-123
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Replacement part
z Side body assembly z Inner center pillar assembly

JSKIA3857GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).

View B and F: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-124
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4609GB

Unit: mm (in) O
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part. P
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"

BRM-125
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Outer Sill (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000011010382

JSKIA3859GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Replacement part
z Outer sill assembly z Outer sill reinforcement

View A and B: Before installing outer sill assembly

BRM-126
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Outer Sill INFOID:0000000010843512

BRM

JSKIA4925GB O

Urethane foam Body sealing

Unit: mm (in) P
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Replacement part
z Outer sill assembly z Outer sill reinforcement z Front fender bracket assembly

BRM-127
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
View A: Before installing outer sill assembly and front fender bracket assembly

JSKIA4611GB

Body sealing
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"

BRM-128
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4926GB

Unit: mm (in) O
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel). P
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"

View J: Before installing outer sill assembly and front fender bracket assembly
Inner Sill INFOID:0000000011010468

Work after outer sill assembly and outer sill reinforcement are removed.

BRM-129
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4927GB

Lower front pillar hinge brace (reus- Urethane foam

able)
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
Replacement part
z Inner sill

View A: Before installing outer sill assembly and front fender bracket assembly

BRM-130
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4929GB

Unit: mm (in) O
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ6 mm (0.24 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ7 mm (0.28 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel). P
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ10 mm (0.39 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Drill φ12 mm (0.47 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-108,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"

BRM-131
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Rear Fender INFOID:0000000010843513

JSKIA3863GB

Urethane foam Body sealing

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Rear fender assembly

BRM-132
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4613GB

Body sealing O
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
P

BRM-133
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA3865GB

Adhesive
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front

View J: Before installing rear fender

View M: Right side rear fender

BRM-134
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Rear Fender Extension INFOID:0000000011005437

BRM

JSKIA4930GB O

Body sealing
Unit: mm (in) P
: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Rear fender extension

Outer Rear Wheelhouse INFOID:0000000011005438

Work after rear fender is removed.

BRM-135
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4931GB

: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Replacement part
z Outer rear wheelhouse

Inner Rear Wheelhouse INFOID:0000000011005439

Work after rear fender and outer rear wheelhouse are removed.

BRM-136
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4932ZZ

Replacement part O
z Inner rear wheelhouse

Inner Rear Pillar Reinforcement INFOID:0000000011005440

P
Work after rear fender is removed.

BRM-137
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4933GB

Unit: mm (in)
Replacement part
z Upper rear pillar reinforcement

Inner Rear Pillar INFOID:0000000011005441

Work after rear fender is removed.

BRM-138
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4934GB

Urethane foam O
: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
P
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Replacement part
z Inner rear pillar z Upper rear pillar reinforcement

BRM-139
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Rear Panel INFOID:0000000010843514

JSKIA4614GB

: Vehicle front
: Welding method, the number of welding points, and the tightening torque apply to both side of the vehicle.
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Replacement part
z Upper rear panel

BRM-140
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Rear Floor Rear INFOID:0000000010843515

A
Work after rear panel is removed.

BRM

O
JSKIA3869ZZ

Left side Right side

P
: Vehicle front
: Welding method and the number of welding points apply to both side of the vehicle.
Replacement part
z Rear floor rear

BRM-141
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Rear Side Member Extension (SUV Models) INFOID:0000000010843516

Work after rear panel is removed.

JSKIA3872ZZ

: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Rear side member extension

Rear Side Member Extension (Wagon Models) INFOID:0000000010843517

Work after rear panel is removed.

BRM-142
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

N
JSKIA4034ZZ

: Vehicle front O
Replacement part
z Rear side member extension z Rear 3rd seat mounting bracket as-
sembly P

BRM-143
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Roof (Normal Roof Models) INFOID:0000000011005442

JSKIA3873ZZ

Body sealing adhesive

BRM-144
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Roof (Sunroof Models) INFOID:0000000011005443

BRM

JSKIA4935ZZ O

Body sealing adhesive

BRM-145
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Roof Rail INFOID:0000000011005444

Work after roof is removed.

JSKIA4936GB

: Vehicle front
: Welding method and the number of welding points apply to both side of the vehicle.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Replacement part
z Front roof rail z Rear roof rail

BRM-146
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

BODY ALIGNMENT
Body Center Marks INFOID:0000000010843518
B
A mark is placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing the vehicle frame
(members, pillars, etc.) damaged by an accident which it enables more accurate and effective repair by using
these marks together with body alignment specifications. C

BRM

JSKIA4722ZZ
O

: Vehicle front
P
Unit: mm (in)
Points Portion Marks
A Front roof Embossment
B Cowl top Indent
C Cowl top Hole φ8 (0.31)
D Trans control reinforcement Hole 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

BRM-147
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Points Portion Marks
E Rear seat crossmember Embossment
F Rear roof Embossment

Description INFOID:0000000010843520

• All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.

• When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself
to make sure there is no free play.
• When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
• Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
• An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side
is symmetrically the same value.
• The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of ″X″, ″Y″
and ″Z″.
• ″Z″: Imaginary base line [200 mm (7.87 in) below datum line (″0Z″ at design plan)]

JSKIA0073GB

Vehicle center Front axle center Imaginary base line

Engine Compartment INFOID:0000000010843521

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.

BRM-148
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

I
JSKIA4723GB

Unit: mm (in)
J
«The others»
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo BRM
– 777 (30.59)* – 596 (23.46)* – 1000 (39.37)

– 852 (33.54)* – 1169 (46.02)* – 967 (38.07)

L
– 535 (21.06) – 986 (38.82) – 1425 (56.10)

– 546 (21.50) – 1509 (59.41) – 290 (11.42)

721 (28.39) 1212 (47.72)* 296 (11.65)

M
– – –

– 700 (27.56) – 1171 (46.10) – 362 (14.25)

– 789 (31.06) – 331 (13.03) – 375 (14.76) N

– 869 (34.21) – 1435 (56.50) – 962 (37.87)*

– 884 (34.80) – 853 (33.58) – 1005 (39.57)* O

– 872 (34.33) – 1003 (39.49) – 1071 (42.17)

– 474 (18.66) – 977 (38.46) – 1081 (42.56)*

P
– 1321 (52.01)* – 1073 (42.24) – 1059 (41.69)

– 1262 (49.68) – 1033 (40.67) – 1053 (41.46)

– 445 (17.52) – 973 (38.31) – 1027 (40.43)

– 1058 (41.65) – 959 (37.76) – 1021 (40.20)

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-149
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4724ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material

Front side member hole center
Cowl top hole center of center positioning mark : φ9 (0.35)
φ8 (0.31) : φ8 (0.31)
: φ14 (0.55)
Engine mounting bracket hole center 12×10
Hood hinge installing hole center φ12 (0.47)
(0.47×0.39)
Front suspension installing hole center 16×10
Hoodledge connector hole center φ12 (0.47)
(0.63×0.39)
Front side member hole center
: φ11 (0.43)
Front fender installing hole center φ7 (0.28)
: φ12 (0.47)
: φ13 (0.51)

BRM-150
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Point Material Point Material
A
Front hoodledge reinforcement hole center φ12 Torque rod mounting bracket hole center φ14
(0.47) (0.55)
Upper radiator core support hole center
: φ7 (0.28)
B
: φ13 (0.51)

Underbody INFOID:0000000010843523 C

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the D
vehicle.

BRM

BRM-151
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4422GB

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Vehicle left side

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-152
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

BRM

L
JSKIA4423ZZ

: Vehicle front M

BRM-153
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Unit: mm (in)
Coordinates Coordinates
Points Remarks Points Remarks
X Y Z X Y Z
478.0 −566.6 375.5 ±650.0 1954.0 272.9
Hole φ18 (0.71) Hole φ16 (0.63)
(18.819) (−22.307) (14.783) (±25.591) (76.929) (10.744)
−501.0 −566.6 375.5 ±525.4 2480.4 380.0
Hole φ18 (0.71) Hole φ12 (0.47)
(−19.724) (−22.307) (14.783) (±20.685) (97.653) (14.961)

: Hole φ30 (1.18)

462.4 −346.0 502.5 ±330.0 2501.0 434.0
Hole φ16 (0.63) : Hole 32×30
(18.205) (−13.622) (19.783) (±12.992) (98.464) (17.087)
(1.26×1.18)
−474.7 −372.0 502.5 549.0 2911.0 435.0
Hole φ16 (0.63) Hole φ20 (0.79)
(−18.689) (−14.646) (19.783) (21.614) (114.606) (17.126)

: Hole φ30 (1.18)

±305.0 301.0 277.8 −525.5 2897.2 435.0
: Hole 32×30 Hole φ20 (0.79)
(±12.008) (11.850) (10.936) (−20.689) (114.063) (17.126)
(1.26×1.18)
±410.0 660.0 190.4 551.0 3248.0 433.8 Hole 16×14
Hole φ14 (0.55)
(±16.142) (25.984) (7.495) (21.693) (127.874) (17.079) (0.63×0.55)
±410.0 800.0 191.4 −523.5 3248.0 433.8 Hole 16×14
Hole φ12 (0.47)
(±16.142) (31.496) (7.535) (−20.610) (127.874) (17.079) (0.63×0.55)
±410.0 1270.0 189.2 ±598.6 7.4 911.9
Hole φ12 (0.47) Hole φ33 (1.30)
(±16.142) (50.000) (7.449) (±23.566) (0.291) (35.902)
±410.0 1751.0 180.2
Hole φ13 (0.51)
(±16.142) (68.937) (7.094)

Passenger Compartment INFOID:0000000010843524

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.

BRM-154
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

I
JSKIA4457GB

Unit: mm (in)
J
«The others»
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo BRM
- 1334 (52.52) - 1665 (65.55)* - 1077 (42.40)*

- 1616 (63.62)* - 1458 (57.40) - 943 (37.13)*

L
- 1494 (58.82)* - 1670 (65.75)* - 794 (31.26)*

- 1634 (64.33)* - 1461 (57.52) - 1179 (46.42)*

1441 (56.73) 1749 (68.86)* 1092 (42.99)*

M
- - -

- 1738 (68.43)* - 1567 (61.69)* - 782 (30.79)*

- 1458 (57.40) - 1281 (50.43) - 1592 (62.68) N

- 1886 (74.25)* - 1602 (63.07)* - 1172 (46.14)*

- 1689 (66.50)* - 1419 (55.87) - 1175 (46.26)* O

- 1327 (52.24) - 1462 (57.56) - 1623 (63.90)

- 1569 (61.77)* - 1110 (43.70)* - 1235 (48.62)*

P
- 1458 (57.40) - 979 (38.54)* - 1137 (44.76)*

- 1461 (57.52) - 890 (35.04)* - 1588 (62.52)

- 1326 (52.20) - 1233 (48.54)* - 1619 (63.74)

- 1562 (61.50)* - 1068 (42.05)*

- 1498 (58.98)* - 836 (32.91)*

BRM-155
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
MEASUREMENT POINTS

JSKIA4726ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material

Cowl top indent of center positioning mark Center pillar indent

Roof flange end of center positioning mark Rear fender indent

Trans control reinforcement hole center of center

Outer side body joggle
positioning mark 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

BRM-156
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Point Material Point Material
A
Rear seat crossmember positioning mark of cen-
Outer side body indent
ter positioning mark
Door hinge installing hole center
Front pillar indent : φ12 (0.47)
B
: φ9 (0.35)

Rear Body INFOID:0000000010843526 C

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the D
vehicle.

BRM

JSKIA4428GB
M

Unit: mm (in)

«The others» N
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

O
– 612 (24.09)* – 1131 (44.53) – 762 (30.00)*

– 797 (31.38)* – 323 (12.72)* – 1202 (47.32)

– 1042 (41.02)* – 1210 (47.64)* – 578 (22.76)* P

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-157
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

JSKIA4429ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material

Roof flange end of center positioning mark Lower back pillar main joggle

Center back pillar main joggle Lower back pillar main hole center φ7 (0.28)

Center back pillar main hole center φ7 (0.28) Back door striker installing hole center

BRM-158
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
A
Precautions for Plastics INFOID:0000000010843527

B
Heat resisting
Abbre- Resistance to gasoline and
Material name temperature Other cautions
viation solvents
°C (°F)
C
Gasoline and most solvents are
PE Polyethylene 60 (140) harmless if applied for a very Flammable
short time (wipe out quickly).
ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene 80 (176) Avoid gasoline and solvents. — D
AES Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene 80 (176) ↑ —
Gasoline and most solvents are
EPM/ Ethylene Propylene (Diene) co-
80 (176) harmless if applied for a very Flammable
E
EPDM polymer
short time (wipe out quickly).
PS Polystyrene 80 (176) Avoid solvents. Flammable
F
Gasoline and most solvents are
Poisonous gas is emitted
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride 80 (176) harmless if applied for a very
when burned.
short time (wipe out quickly).
TPO Thermoplastic Olefine 80 (176) ↑ Flammable G
AAS Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene 85 (185) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —
PMMA Poly Methyl Methacrylate 85 (185) ↑ —
H
EVAC Ethylene Vinyl Acetate 90 (194) ↑ —
Gasoline and most solvents are
Flammable, avoid bat-
PP Polypropylene 90 (194) harmless if applied for a very
tery acid. I
short time (wipe out quickly).
PUR Polyurethane 90 (194) Avoid gasoline and solvents. —
UP Unsaturated Polyester 90 (194) ↑ Flammable J
ASA Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate 100 (212) ↑ Flammable
PPE Poly Phenylene Ether 110 (230) ↑ —
TPU Thermoplastic Urethane 110 (230) ↑ —
BRM
PBT+ Poly Butylene Terephthalate +
120 (248) ↑ Flammable
PC Polycarbonate
L
PC Polycarbonate 120 (248) ↑ —
POM Poly Oxymethylene 120 (248) ↑ Avoid battery acid.
Avoid immersing in wa- M
PA Polyamide 140 (284) ↑
ter.
PBT Poly Butylene Terephthalate 140 (284) ↑ —
PAR Polyarylate 180 (356) ↑ — N
PET Polyethylene terephthalate 180 (356) ↑ —
PEI Polyetherimide 200 (392) ↑ —
O
CAUTION:
• When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics (influence of heat
and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them.
• Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials, characteristics.
P

BRM-159
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]
Location of Plastic Parts INFOID:0000000010843528

JSKIA4713ZZ

Component Material Component Material

Cover ABS Rear spoiler PC + ABS
PBT + PET +
Base Lens PMMA
Door mirror Glass fiber High mount stop lamp
Case ASA Housing ABS
Finisher ASA Back door finisher ABS
Lens PMMA Lens PC
Side turn signal lamp License plate lamp
Housing ABS Housing PC
Side roof molding PVC + Stainless Lens PC
Rear fog lamp
Wind shield molding PVC Housing PC

Lens PC Back door PP

Front combination lamp
Housing PP Lens PMMA
Reflex reflector
Front grille ABS Housing ABS

Bumper fascia PP + EPM Lens PMMA

Rear combination lamp
Lens Glass Housing ASA
Front fog lamp PBT + ASA +
Housing Sill cover PP
Glass fiber
Fillet molding PP Side guard molding PP

Front fender protector PP Grip cover PC + PET

Door outside handle
Door outside molding PVC + Stainless Grip body PC + ABS

BRM-160
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR EUROPE (RHD)]

H
JSKIA3819ZZ

Component Material Component Material

I
Side luggage finisher PP Cluster lid C PC + ABS

Lens PC Glove box PP

Personal lamp
Housing PP Lower side panel PP + EPM J

Center pillar garnish PP Finisher PC + ABS

Switch finisher PP Manual A/C Switch PC BRM
Map lamp
Console PP Case ABS
Lid box PC + ABS A/C Control Finisher PC + ABS
L
Front pillar garnish PP Automatic Switch PC

Cluster lid A PP A/C Case PC + ABS

Center ventilator grille PC + ABS Lens PC M

Skin TPO Body PP
Pad PUR Console box PP
Instrument panel Center console N
A/T console
Core PP + EPDM PC + ABS
finisher

BRM-161
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
< VEHICLE INFORMATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

VEHICLE INFORMATION
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
Body Exterior Paint Color INFOID:0000000010843595

JSKIA4358ZZ

Fillet molding Material color – – – – – – – –

Chromium
Door outside handle Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
plate
Rear spoiler (Side) Black G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01 G01

Rear spoiler (Upper) Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ
Chromium
Back door finisher Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
plate
Back door Body color BAX6 BEAN BEAR BG41 BK23 BKAD BQAB BRAQ

Sill cover Material color – – – – – – – –

Side guard molding Material color – – – – – – – –

NOTE:
• 2M: 2-Coat Metallic
• 2P: 2-Coat pearl
• 2S: 2-Coat solid
• 3P: 3-Coat pearl
• 2PM: 2-Coat Pearl metallic

BRM-162
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FOR RUSSIA]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010843596
B
• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time. C
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. D
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC E
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch. F
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. G
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
H
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
I
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. J
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time. BRM

D4D engine : 20 minutes

BRM-163
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [FOR RUSSIA]
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.

BRM-164
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR RUSSIA]
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
A
High Strength Steel (HSS) INFOID:0000000010843597

High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight. B
Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:

BRM

BRM-165
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR RUSSIA]

Tensile strength Major applicable parts

BRM-166
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR RUSSIA]

Tensile strength Major applicable parts A

Read the following precautions when repairing HSS: H

P
PIIA0117E

BRM-167
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR RUSSIA]
• When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possi-
ble in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to
heat.
If spot welding is impossible, use MIG. welding. Do not use
gas (torch) for welding because it is inferior in welding
strength.

PIIA0144E

• Spot welding on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary

steel panel.
Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a low
speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bit
durability and facilitate the operation.

PIIA0145E

2. Precautions in spot welding HSS

PIIA0146E

• The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no

gaps.

PIIA0147E

BRM-168
REPAIRING HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
< PRECAUTION > [FOR RUSSIA]
• Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch.
Unit: mm (in) A
Thickness (T) Minimum pitch (L)
0.6 (0.024) 10 (0.39) or more
0.8 (0.031) 12 (0.47) or more B
1.0 (0.039) 18 (0.71) or more
1.2 (0.047) 20 (0.79) or more
1.6 (0.063) 27 (1.06) or more C
1.8 (0.071) 31 (1.22) or more
JSKIA0781ZZ

BRM

BRM-169
REPAIRING MATERIAL
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

PREPARATION
REPAIRING MATERIAL
Foam Repair INFOID:0000000010843598

JSKIA0129GB

Urethane foam
Nozzle insert hole
: Vehicle front

2. Fill procedures before installation of service part.

a. Eliminate foam material remaining on vehicle side.
b. Clean area after eliminating foam insulator and foam material.
c. Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.

BRM-170
REPAIRING MATERIAL
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

A
Urethane foam
Fill while avoiding flange area
: Vehicle front B

NOTE:
Fill enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange
area. C
d. Install service part.
NOTE: JSKIA0130GB

Refer to label for information on working times. D

BRM

BRM-171
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
Ultra High Strength Steel Part INFOID:0000000010843599

DESCRIPTION
Ultra high strength steel parts signify high strength steel plates with tensile strength of 980 MPa or more.
When replacing parts made of ultra high strength steel or parts including ultra high strength steel, never per-
form the prohibition described below:
PROHIBITION
WARNING:
Never cut ultra high strength steel parts or perform butt welding. Violation of this prohibition causes
extreme strength degradation, and the strength before damage cannot be secured.
PART REPLACEMENT
To replace an ultra high strength part, be sure to replace it by panel supply unit of ultra high strength steel part.
For the welding method, refer to BRM-193, "Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Underbody Component Parts INFOID:0000000010843600

Refer to parts catalogue for the replacement parts.

BRM-172
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

JSKIA4728ZZ

P
R9M engine models QR20DE engine models MR20DD engine models

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections
: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections

BRM-173
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Rear floor rear Under 440 ×

Spare tire clamp bracket Under 440 —

Rear floor side assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear floor front Under 440 —

Rear floor board reinforcement 590 ×

Rear floor front extension (Upper RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear seat crossmember assembly 590 ×

Center front floor 780 ×

980MPacaution
T=1.8 mm (0.071 in)
Front floor (RH & LH) d. Inside (RH only) 590 ×
caution
980MPa
T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)

Inner sill (RH & LH) 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=1.4 mm (0.055 in)
Cowl top Under 440 ×

Upper dash assembly Under 440 ×

Lower dash complete e. 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=1.4 mm (0.055 in)
Side dash (RH & LH) 590 ×

Lower dash crossmember 980MPacaution 440 ×

T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Front strut housing assembly (RH & LH) 590 ×

Upper hoodledge (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Lower hoodledge (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Hoodledge reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front hoodledge reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Upper front fender bracket (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front fender bracket (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Upper radiator core support assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front bumper armature assembly 1500MPacaution — —

T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Front bumper stay (RH & LH) 590 —

Hoodledge connector assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front side member closing plate (RH & LH) f. 980MPacaution 590 ×
T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)

Front side member assembly (RH & LH) g. 980MPacaution 590 ×

T=2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Side radiator core support (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Front suspension mounting bracket (RH & LH) 590 ×

BRM-174
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive A
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Rear floor front extension (Lower) Under 440 × B
Rear crossmember center assembly 590 ×

Rear side member (RH & LH) 590 ×

C
Muffler mounting bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear side member extension (RH & LH) 780 ×

D
CAUTION:
If the high strength steel (ultra high strength steel) of this is broken, replace by assembly for the supply part.
NOTE:
E
• For the parts without a number described in the figure, it is supplied only with the assembly part that the part is included with.
• Tensile strength column shows the largest strength value of a part in the component part.

Body Component Parts INFOID:0000000010860049 F

Refer to parts catalogue for the replacement parts.

BRM

BRM-175
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4702ZZ

Sunroof models Normal roof models Right side

: Both sided anti-corrosive precoated steel sections

: High strength steel (HSS) sections
: Both sided anti-corrosive steel and HSS sections

BRM-176
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

Both sided A
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
B
Roof Under 440 —

Front roof rail Under 440 —

Roof bow No.4 Under 440 — C

Roof bow No.5 Under 440 —

Rear roof rail Under 440 — D

Roof bow No.1 Under 440 —

Roof bow No.2 Under 440 —

E
Roof bow No.3 Under 440 —

Upper inner front pillar (RH & LH) 590 —

caution
F
Inner center pillar assembly (RH & LH) d. 980MPa 590 —
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Hood 440 ×
G
Front fender (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Side body assembly (RH & LH) Refer to No. −

H
Outer front pillar reinforcement (RH & LH) e. 980MPacaution 590 —
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)

f. 980MPacaution I
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Lower center pillar brace (RH & LH) 590 —
g. 980MPacaution
T=1.0 mm (0.039 in) J
Outer front side body (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Lower front pillar hinge brace (RH & LH) 590 —

BRM
Front fender bracket assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer sill reinforcement (RH & LH) 590 ×

L
Outer sill assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Inner rear pillar (RH & LH) 590 —

Upper rear pillar reinforcement (RH & LH) Under 440 — M

Back pillar assembly (Inner RH & LH) 440 —

Inner rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) Under 440 × N

Inner rear wheelhouse rear extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Outer rear wheelhouse extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

O
Outer rear wheelhouse (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Jack mounting bracket Under 440 —

P
Front door assembly (RH & LH) 590 ×

Outer front door panel (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear door assembly (RH & LH) 440 ×

Outer rear door panel (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Rear fender assembly (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

BRM-177
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
< PREPARATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Both sided
Tensile strength anti-corrosive
No. Parts name
(MPa) precoated
steel sections
Outer back pillar (RH & LH) Under 440 —

Back pillar assembly (Outer RH & LH) Under 440 —

Rear fender extension (RH & LH) Under 440 ×

Fuel filler lid assembly Under 440 ×

Upper rear panel Under 440 ×

Upper rear bumper retainer Under 440 ×

Rear bumper stay (RH & LH) 590 —

Inner center rear bumper reinforcement 1270MPacaution — —

BRM-178
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

CORROSION PROTECTION
Description INFOID:0000000010843602
B
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-cor-
rosive measures. C

Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel)

SIIA2294E
G

BRM

PIIA0095E L

BRM-179
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4730ZZ

: Undercoated areas
: Sealed portions

Undercoating (Except For MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010843604

JSKIA4703ZZ

: Undercoated areas
: Sealed portions

BRM-180
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Body Sealing (MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010843605

A
The following figure shows the areas that are sealed at the factory. Sealant that is applied to these areas
should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of sealant
and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant. B

BRM

JSKIA4732ZZ
P

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-181
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4705ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-182
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

JSKIA4706ZZ

P
: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-183
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Body Sealing (QR25DE Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010843606

JSKIA4735ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-184
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

JSKIA4705ZZ

P
: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-185
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4706ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-186
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Body Sealing (R9M Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010860050

BRM

JSKIA4704ZZ
P

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-187
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4705ZZ

: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-188
CORROSION PROTECTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

JSKIA4706ZZ

P
: Vehicle front
: Sealed portions

BRM-189
BODY CONSTRUCTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
BODY CONSTRUCTION
Body Construction INFOID:0000000010843607

JSKIA4741ZZ

Outer side body Outer front pillar reinforcement Upper inner front pillar
Weld nut Side dash Upper hinge plate
Inner front pillar reinforcement Upper dash Rear hoodledge reinforcement

BRM-190
BODY CONSTRUCTION
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Lower front pillar hinge brace Lower hinge plate Lower dash
A
Outer sill reinforcement Lower front pillar reinforcement Inner sill reinforcement
Inner sill Front floor Front side member outrigger
Inner center pillar Center pillar hinge brace Lower center pillar hinge brace B
Anchor plate Inner sill extension Rear floor front extension
Inner rear wheelhouse Outer rear wheelhouse Inner rear pillar
C
Inner rear pillar reinforcement Rear pillar seat belt anchor Rear roof rail brace
Upper back pillar reinforcement Center back pillar main

BRM

BRM-191
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
Description INFOID:0000000010843608

2-spot welds

JSKIA0049ZZ

JSKIA0053ZZ
3-spot welds

JSKIA0050ZZ

JSKIA0054ZZ
MIG plug weld
For 3 panels plug weld method

JSKIA0051ZZ

JSKIA0055ZZ

MIG seam weld / Point weld

JSKIA0052ZZ JSKIA0056ZZ

BRM-192
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
• Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded
area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is at A
position A due to the construction of the vehicle.

PIIA0150E

G
JSKIA0104GB

• Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this will H
permit the service part to be accurately cut at the joint position.

BRM
JSKIA0105GB

• An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as per the fol-

PIIA0153E
O
Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel INFOID:0000000010843609

BRM-193
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
• The below welding condition is applicable only to this vehicle. Never apply this same welding condi-
tion to other vehicles.
Welding condition
Welder tip diameter 6 mm
Welding pressure (Gun force) 3500 N
Welding current 8200 A
Weld time 0.22 sec (11 cyc: 50 Hz area,
13 cyc: 60 Hz area)
Panel configuration Combination of a plate of ten-
sile strength 980 MPa and that
of tensile strength less than
980 MPa. (Up to 3 plates)
PLUG WELDING
To weld ultra high strength steel of tensile strength 980 MPa or more, perform plug welding observing the
welding hole diameter described in the manual.
CAUTION:
• To perform plug welding, use fuel mixture (Ar 80% + CO2 20%) for shielding gas of welder.
• Never use carbon dioxide gas (CO2 100%) as shielding gas of welder. Using CO2 100% gas results in
inadequate weld strength.
• When welding hole diameter cannot be met, make multiple holes (smaller diameter) so that the sum
of the hole areas equals the area of the original weld hole.
EXAMPLE

JSKIA3503GB

Body sealing

BRM-194
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Radiator Core Support INFOID:0000000010843610

BRM

JSKIA3843ZZ O

: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part. P
Replacement part
z Upper radiator core support assem- z Side radiator core support
bly

Hoodledge INFOID:0000000010843611

Work after radiator core support is removed.

BRM-195
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4598ZZ

BRM-196
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA4599ZZ

: Vehicle front O
View F and H: Before installing hoodledge reinforcement
Hoodledge (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000010843612 P

Work after radiator core support is removed.

BRM-197
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4617ZZ

: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Front strut housing assembly z Hoodledge reinforcement z Hoodledge connector assembly

BRM-198
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA4618ZZ

: Vehicle front O
View E: Before installing hoodledge reinforcement
Front Side Member INFOID:0000000010843613 P

Work after upper radiator core support assembly and hoodledge are removed.

BRM-199
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4918ZZ

BRM-200
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA4919GB

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

View E: Before installing front suspension mounting bracket

BRM-201
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA3850ZZ

View H: Before installing front suspension mounting bracket

Front Side Member (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000010843614

Work after upper radiator core support assembly and hoodledge connector assembly are removed.

BRM-202
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA4604GB

Unit: mm (in) O
: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part P
z Front side member closing plate z Front side member assembly (RH)
(RH)

POINT
The front side member on the left can also be replaced partially by cutting at the position shown in the figure.

BRM-203
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA3852GB

Front Pillar INFOID:0000000010843615

Work after hoodledge reinforcement is removed.

BRM-204
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA4920GB

Urethane foam Body sealing O

BRM-205
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4921GB

View D: Before installing side body assembly

View F: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-206
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA4922GB

View H and J: Before installing side body assembly

View O: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-207
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Center Pillar INFOID:0000000010843616

JSKIA4608GB

BRM-208
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Replacement part
z Side body assembly z Inner center pillar assembly A

BRM

O
JSKIA3857GB

View B and F: Before installing outer front side body

BRM-209
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4609GB

BRM-210
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Outer Sill (Partial Replacement) INFOID:0000000010843617

BRM

JSKIA4626GB O

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front P
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-193,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Replacement part
z Outer sill assembly z Outer sill reinforcement

View A and B: Before installing outer sill assembly

BRM-211
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Outer Sill INFOID:0000000010843618

JSKIA4923GB

Urethane foam Body sealing

Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Drill φ9 mm (0.35 in) hole for the plug welding hole (ultra high strength steel).
: For spot welding of steel plate of tensile strength 980 MPa, observe the indicated welding conditions. Refer to BRM-193,
"Welding of Ultra High Strength Steel"
Replacement part
z Outer sill assembly z Outer sill reinforcement

BRM-212
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
View A: Before installing outer sill assembly
A

BRM

JSKIA4611GB

BRM-213
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4924GB

View J: Before installing outer sill assembly

BRM-214
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Rear Fender INFOID:0000000010843619

BRM

JSKIA3863GB O

Urethane foam Body sealing

Unit: mm (in) P
: Vehicle front
: Weld the parts onto the back of the component part.
Replacement part
z Rear fender assembly

BRM-215
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4613GB

Body sealing
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front

BRM-216
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA3865GB

Adhesive O
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
P
View J: Before installing rear fender
View M: Right side rear fender

BRM-217
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Rear Panel INFOID:0000000010843620

JSKIA4614GB

BRM-218
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Rear Floor Rear INFOID:0000000010843621

A
Work after rear panel is removed.

BRM

O
JSKIA3869ZZ

Left side Right side

P
: Vehicle front
: Welding method and the number of welding points apply to both side of the vehicle.
Replacement part
z Rear floor rear

BRM-219
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]
Rear Side Member Extension (SUV Models) INFOID:0000000010843622

Work after rear panel is removed.

JSKIA3872ZZ

: Vehicle front
Replacement part
z Rear side member extension

Rear Side Member Extension (Wagon Models) INFOID:0000000010843623

Work after rear panel is removed.

BRM-220
REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

N
JSKIA4034ZZ

: Vehicle front O
Replacement part
z Rear side member extension z Rear 3rd seat mounting bracket as-
sembly P

BRM-221
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

BODY ALIGNMENT
Body Center Marks (MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010860057

JSKIA4742ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)
Points Portion Marks
A Front roof Embossment
B Cowl top Indent
C Cowl top Hole φ8 (0.31)
D Trans control reinforcement Hole 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

BRM-222
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Points Portion Marks
A
E Rear seat crossmember Embossment
F Rear roof Embossment

Body Center Marks (Except For MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010860060

A mark is placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing the vehicle frame
(members, pillars, etc.) damaged by an accident which it enables more accurate and effective repair by using C
these marks together with body alignment specifications.

BRM

O
JSKIA4708ZZ

: Vehicle front P
Unit: mm (in)
Points Portion Marks
A Front roof Embossment
B Cowl top Indent
C Cowl top Hole φ8 (0.31)

BRM-223
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Points Portion Marks
D Trans control reinforcement Hole 14×12 (0.55×0.47)
E Rear seat crossmember Embossment
F Rear roof Embossment

Description INFOID:0000000010860052

• All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.

JSKIA0073GB

Vehicle center Front axle center Imaginary base line

Engine Compartment (MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010860058

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.

BRM-224
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

I
JSKIA4744GB

Unit: mm (in)
J
«The others»
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo BRM
– 777 (30.59)* – 1169 (46.02)* – 1425 (56.10)

– 852 (33.54)* – 1509 (59.41) – 290 (11.42)

L
– 535 (21.06) – 1212 (47.72)* – 296 (11.65)

– 546 (21.50) – 1435 (56.50) – 362 (14.25)

721 (28.39) 853 (33.58) 375 (14.76)

M
– – –

– 700 (27.56) – 1003 (39.49) – 962 (37.87)*

– 789 (31.06) – 977 (38.46) – 1005 (39.57)* N

– 869 (34.21) – 1073 (42.24) – 1071 (42.17)

– 884 (34.80) – 1033 (40.67) – 1081 (42.56)* O

– 872 (34.33) – 973 (38.31) – 1059 (41.69)

– 1321 (52.01)* – 959 (37.76) – 1053 (41.46)

P
– 1058 (41.65) – 1000 (39.37) – 1027 (40.43)

– 596 (23.46)* – 967 (38.07) – 1021 (40.20)

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-225
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4745ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material

Upper radiator core support hole center
Cowl top hole center of center positioning mark
: φ7 (0.28)
φ8 (0.31)
: φ13 (0.51)
Front side member hole center
: φ9 (0.35)
Hood hinge installing hole center φ12 (0.47)
: φ8 (0.31)
: φ14 (0.55)
Front suspension installing hole center 16×10 Engine mounting bracket hole center 12×10
(0.63×0.39) (0.47×0.39)

BRM-226
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Point Material Point Material
A
Front fender installing hole center φ7 (0.28) Hoodledge connector hole center φ12 (0.47)
Front side member hole center
Front hoodledge reinforcement hole center φ12 : φ11 (0.43) B
(0.47) : φ12 (0.47)
: φ13 (0.51)

Engine Compartment (Except For MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010860061

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the D
vehicle.

BRM

M
JSKIA4709GB

Unit: mm (in)
N
«The others»

BRM-227
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

– 777 (30.59)* – 596 (23.46)* – 1000 (39.37)

– 852 (33.54)* – 1169 (46.02)* – 967 (38.07)

– 535 (21.06) – 986 (38.82) – 1425 (56.10)

– 546 (21.50) – 1509 (59.41) – 290 (11.42)

– 721 (28.39) – 1212 (47.72)* – 296 (11.65)

– 700 (27.56) – 1171 (46.10) – 362 (14.25)

– 789 (31.06) – 331 (13.03) – 375 (14.76)

– 869 (34.21) – 1435 (56.50) – 962 (37.87)*

– 884 (34.80) – 853 (33.58) – 1005 (39.57)*

– 872 (34.33) – 1003 (39.49) – 1071 (42.17)

– 474 (18.66) – 977 (38.46) – 1081 (42.56)*

– 1321 (52.01)* – 1073 (42.24) – 1059 (41.69)

– 1262 (49.68) – 1033 (40.67) – 1053 (41.46)

– 445 (17.52) – 973 (38.31) – 1027 (40.43)

– 1058 (41.65) – 959 (37.76) – 1021 (40.20)

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-228
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

L
JSKIA4710ZZ

: Vehicle front M

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material N

BRM-229
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Point Material Point Material
Front hoodledge reinforcement hole center φ12 Torque rod mounting bracket hole center φ14
(0.47) (0.55)
Upper radiator core support hole center
: φ7 (0.28)
: φ13 (0.51)

Underbody INFOID:0000000010860054

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.

BRM-230
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

BRM

JSKIA4422GB

P
Unit: mm (in)
: Vehicle front
: Vehicle left side

MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-231
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4423ZZ

: Vehicle front

BRM-232
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Unit: mm (in)
Coordinates Coordinates A
Points Remarks Points Remarks
X Y Z X Y Z
478.0 −566.6 375.5 ±650.0 1954.0 272.9
Hole φ18 (0.71) Hole φ16 (0.63)
(18.819) (−22.307) (14.783) (±25.591) (76.929) (10.744) B
−501.0 −566.6 375.5 ±525.4 2480.4 380.0
Hole φ18 (0.71) Hole φ12 (0.47)
(−19.724) (−22.307) (14.783) (±20.685) (97.653) (14.961)

: Hole φ30 (1.18)

Passenger Compartment (MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010860059

I
MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle. J

BRM

BRM-233
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4748GB

Unit: mm (in)

«The others»
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

- 1334 (52.52) - 1665 (65.55)* - 1077 (42.40)*

- 1616 (63.62)* - 1458 (57.40) - 943 (37.13)*

- 1494 (58.82)* - 1670 (65.75)* - 794 (31.26)*

- 1634 (64.33)* - 1461 (57.52) - 1179 (46.42)*

- 1441 (56.73) - 1749 (68.86)* - 1092 (42.99)*

- 1738 (68.43)* - 1567 (61.69)* - 782 (30.79)*

- 1458 (57.40) - 1281 (50.43) - 1592 (62.68)

- 1886 (74.25)* - 1602 (63.07)* - 1172 (46.14)*

- 1689 (66.50)* - 1419 (55.87) - 1175 (46.26)*

- 1327 (52.24) - 1462 (57.56) - 1623 (63.90)

- 1569 (61.77)* - 1110 (43.70)* - 1235 (48.62)*

- 1458 (57.40) - 979 (38.54)* - 1137 (44.76)*

- 1461 (57.52) - 890 (35.04)* - 1588 (62.52)

- 1326 (52.20) - 1233 (48.54)* - 1619 (63.74)

- 1562 (61.50)* - 1068 (42.05)*

- 1498 (58.98)* - 836 (32.91)*

BRM-234
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
MEASUREMENT POINTS
A

BRM

JSKIA4749ZZ
M
: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)
N
Point Material Point Material

Cowl top indent of center positioning mark Center pillar indent O

Roof flange end of center positioning mark Rear fender indent P

Trans control reinforcement hole center of center

Outer side body joggle
positioning mark 14×12 (0.55×0.47)

BRM-235
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Point Material Point Material
Rear seat crossmember positioning mark of cen-
Outer side body indent
ter positioning mark
Door hinge installing hole center
Front pillar indent : φ12 (0.47)
: φ9 (0.35)

Passenger Compartment (Except For MR20DD Engine Models) INFOID:0000000010860062

MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle.

JSKIA4711GB

Unit: mm (in)

«The others»

BRM-236
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo A

- 1334 (52.52) - 1665 (65.55)* - 1077 (42.40)*

- 1616 (63.62)* - 1458 (57.40) - 943 (37.13)* B

- 1494 (58.82)* - 1670 (65.75)* - 794 (31.26)*

- 1634 (64.33)* - 1461 (57.52) - 1179 (46.42)*

C
- 1441 (56.73) - 1749 (68.86)* - 1092 (42.99)*

- 1738 (68.43)* - 1567 (61.69)* - 782 (30.79)*

D
- 1458 (57.40) - 1281 (50.43) - 1592 (62.68)

- 1886 (74.25)* - 1602 (63.07)* - 1172 (46.14)*

- 1689 (66.50)* - 1419 (55.87) - 1175 (46.26)* E

- 1327 (52.24) - 1462 (57.56) - 1623 (63.90)

- 1569 (61.77)* - 1110 (43.70)* - 1235 (48.62)* F

- 1458 (57.40) - 979 (38.54)* - 1137 (44.76)*

- 1461 (57.52) - 890 (35.04)* - 1588 (62.52)

G
- 1326 (52.20) - 1233 (48.54)* - 1619 (63.74)

- 1562 (61.50)* - 1068 (42.05)*

H
- 1498 (58.98)* - 836 (32.91)*

MEASUREMENT POINTS
I

BRM

BRM-237
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4712ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material

Cowl top indent of center positioning mark Center pillar indent

Roof flange end of center positioning mark Rear fender indent

Trans control reinforcement hole center of center

Outer side body joggle
positioning mark 14×12 (0.55×0.47)
Rear seat crossmember positioning mark of cen-
Outer side body indent
ter positioning mark
Door hinge installing hole center
Front pillar indent : φ12 (0.47)
: φ9 (0.35)

BRM-238
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Rear Body INFOID:0000000010860056

A
MEASUREMENT
Dimensions marked with ″*″ indicate symmetrically identical dimensions on both the right and left hand of the
vehicle. B

JSKIA4428GB
BRM
Unit: mm (in)

«The others»
L
Unit: mm (in)

Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo Point Dimension Memo

– 612 (24.09)* – 1131 (44.53) – 762 (30.00)* M

– 797 (31.38)* – 323 (12.72)* – 1202 (47.32)

– 1042 (41.02)* – 1210 (47.64)* – 578 (22.76)*

N
MEASUREMENT POINTS

BRM-239
BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

JSKIA4429ZZ

: Vehicle front

Unit: mm (in)

Point Material Point Material

Roof flange end of center positioning mark Lower back pillar main joggle

Center back pillar main joggle Lower back pillar main hole center φ7 (0.28)

Center back pillar main hole center φ7 (0.28) Back door striker installing hole center

BRM-240
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
A
Precautions for Plastics INFOID:0000000010843633

BRM-241
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]
Location of Plastic Parts INFOID:0000000010843634

JSKIA4713ZZ

Component Material Component Material

Lens PC Back door PP

Front combination lamp
Housing PP Lens PMMA
Reflex reflector
Front grille ABS Housing ABS

Bumper fascia PP + EPM Lens PMMA

Rear combination lamp
Lens Glass Housing ASA
Front fog lamp PBT + ASA +
Housing Sill cover PP
Glass fiber
Fillet molding PP Side guard molding PP

Front fender protector PP Grip cover PC + PET

Door outside handle
Door outside molding PVC + Stainless Grip body PC + ABS

BRM-242
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [FOR RUSSIA]

H
JSKIA4752ZZ

Component Material Component Material

I
Side luggage finisher PP Cluster lid C PC + ABS

Lens PC Glove box PP

Personal lamp
Housing PP Lower side panel PP + EPM J

Center pillar garnish PP Finisher PC + ABS

Switch finisher PP Manual A/C Switch PC BRM
Map lamp
Console PP Case ABS
Lid box PC + ABS A/C Control Finisher PC + ABS
L
Front pillar garnish PP Automatic Switch PC

Cluster lid A PP A/C Case PC + ABS

Center ventilator grille PC + ABS Lens PC M

Skin TPO Body PP
Pad PUR Console box PP
Instrument panel Center console N
A/T console
Core PP + EPDM PC + ABS
finisher

BRM-243
CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE

SECTION
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CCS B

E
CONTENTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 2 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE F
(ASCD) ............................................................... 2
Information ................................................................ 2
G

CCS

CCS-1
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Information INFOID:0000000010957977

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) system is controlled by ECM.

Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-64, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) : System Description" (MR20DD), EC-473, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : Sys-
tem Description" (QR25DE), and EC-845, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System
Description" (R9M).

CCS-2
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION CHG
CHARGING SYSTEM
B

E
CONTENTS
TYPE 1 CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................... 10 F
Wiring Diagram ........................................................10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................... 3
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 14 G
APPLICATION NOTICE ...................................... 3
Information ................................................................ 3 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 14
Work Flow ................................................................14
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 H
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY IN-
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 SPECTION ........................................................ 15
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Inspection Procedure ...............................................15 I
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................... 4 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 16
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 4
Precaution for Stop/Start System Service ................. 5 B20BD BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .......... 16 J
Precaution for Energy Management System ............ 5 DTC Description ......................................................16
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................16
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6 Component Inspection .............................................19 K
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6 B20BE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR... 20
Component Parts Location ........................................ 6 DTC Description ......................................................20
Alternator ................................................................... 6 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................20 L
Battery Current Sensor (With Battery Tempera- Component Inspection .............................................22
ture Sensor) .............................................................. 6
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 24
CHG
SYSTEM .............................................................. 8 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................24

ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ........................... 8 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 25

ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM : System De- N
scription ..................................................................... 8 CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................... 25
Symptom Table .......................................................25
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ......................... 8
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 26 O
Lamps/Indicator Lamps ............................................. 8
ALTERNATOR .................................................. 26
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............... 9 P
R9M ............................................................................26
ECM, IPDM E/R ................................................... 9 R9M : Exploded View ..............................................26
List of ECU Reference .............................................. 9 R9M : Removal and Installation ...............................26

WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 10 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

(SDS) ............................................................ 29

CHG-1
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS CHARGING SYSTEM ........................................ 36
(SDS) .................................................................. 29 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 36
Alternator ................................................................ 29
TYPE 2 BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 40
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 40
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................... 30
Work Flow ............................................................... 40
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................... 30
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY IN-
Information .............................................................. 30
SPECTION ......................................................... 41
PRECAUTION ............................................. 31 Inspection Procedure .............................................. 41

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 31 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 42

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 42
SIONER" ................................................................. 31 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 42
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 31 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 43
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 33 CHARGING SYSTEM ........................................ 43
COMPONENT PARTS ....................................... 33 Symptom Table ....................................................... 43
Component Parts Location ..................................... 33 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 44
Alternator ................................................................ 33
ALTERNATOR .................................................. 44
SYSTEM ............................................................. 34
MR20DD .................................................................... 44
CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................... 34
MR20DD : Exploded View ...................................... 44
CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description ........... 34
MR20DD : Removal and Installation ....................... 44
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ....................... 34
QR25DE ..................................................................... 45
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
QR25DE : Exploded View ....................................... 46
Lamps/Indicator Lamps .......................................... 34
QR25DE : Removal and Installation ....................... 46
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 35 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
ECM, IPDM E/R ................................................. 35 (SDS) .......................................................... 48
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 35
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 36 (SDS) ................................................................. 48
Alternator ................................................................ 48

CHG-2
APPLICATION NOTICE
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [TYPE 1]

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A

APPLICATION NOTICE
Information INFOID:0000000010957593
B
Check the vehicle type to use the service information in this section.

Service information System C

TYPE 1 With stop/start system
TYPE 2 Without stop/start system
D

CHG

CHG-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TYPE 1]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010957594

CHG-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TYPE 1]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
B
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes D
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Stop/Start System Service INFOID:0000000010957630
K

CAUTION:
When performing an inspection and its related work with the engine at idle, always turn the stop/start L
OFF switch ON or open the hood to release the stop/start system.
Precaution for Energy Management System INFOID:0000000010957597

CHG
CAUTION:
Never connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The con-
nection causes the malfunction of the energy management system, and then the battery discharge N
may occur.

CHG-5
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010957631

JMMIA1712ZZ

No. Component Function

Battery current sensor
(With battery temperature Refer to CHG-6, "Battery Current Sensor (With Battery Temperature Sensor)".
sensor)
Alternator Refer to CHG-6, "Alternator".
ECM transmits the received alternator voltage request signal to alternator via LIN communica-
ECM tion.
Refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
IPDM E/R sends the alternator voltage request signal to ECM via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.

Alternator INFOID:0000000010957599

The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical

system and to keep the battery charged.

JMMIA1018ZZ

Battery Current Sensor (With Battery Temperature Sensor) INFOID:0000000010957600

BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

CHG-6
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
The battery current sensor is installed to the battery negative cable.
The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the bat- A
tery.

JPBIA3262ZZ

D
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Battery temperature sensor is integrated in battery current sensor.
The sensor measures temperature around the battery.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature E
increases.

Temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ) F

25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
90 (194) 0.222 - 0.258
G

SEF012P

CHG

CHG-7
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM
ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010957601

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMMIA1835GB

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• Battery current sensor (With battery temperature sensor) measures the charging/discharging current of the
battery and the temperature around the battery.
• IPDM E/R judges battery condition according to the charging/discharging current of the battery and the tem-
perature around the battery.
• IPDM E/R calculates the target power generation voltage according to the battery condition and sends the
calculated value as alternator voltage request signal to ECM via CAN communication.
• ECM transmits alternator voltage request signal to alternator via LIN communication.
• Control module inside alternator controls the power generation voltage based on the received alternator volt-
age request signal.
• Alternator includes a self-diagnosis function and transmits the diagnosis result to ECM via LIN communica-
tion when detecting any malfunction.
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamps/Indicator Lamps INFOID:0000000010957634

Item Design Reference

For layout, refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
Charge warning lamp For function, refer to MWI-30, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Charge
Warning Lamp".

CHG-8
ECM, IPDM E/R
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [TYPE 1]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

ECM, IPDM E/R
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000010957602
B

ECU Reference
C
EC-889, "Reference Value"
EC-901, "Fail-safe"
ECM
EC-907, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D
EC-908, "DTC Index"
PCS-22, "Reference Value"
E
PCS-34, "Fail-safe"
IPDM E/R
PCS-37, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
PCS-38, "DTC Index" F

CHG

CHG-9
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 1]

WIRING DIAGRAM
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010957603

JRMWF4092GB

CHG-10
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 1]

CHG

JRMWF4093GB

CHG-11
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 1]

JRMWF4094GB

CHG-12
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 1]

CHG

JRMWF4095GB

CHG-13
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TYPE 1]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010957604

DETAILED FLOW
1.CHECK FOR DTC
Perform self diagnosis with CONSULT
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair as needed.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-15, "Inspection Procedure".

>> GO TO 3.
3.STOP POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the battery current sensor connector to stop the operation of energy
management system. [However, DTC (B20BD or B20BE) might remain. After finishing the inspection, connect
the battery current sensor connector and erase the self-diagnostic results history using CONSULT.]

>> GO TO 4.
4.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)
Start the engine and run it at idle.
Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 2,500 RPM)
Increase and maintain the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> INSPECTION END
6.MEASURE “B” TERMINAL VOLTAGE
Start engine. With engine running at 2,500 rpm, measure “B” terminal voltage.
What voltage does the measurement result show?
Less than 13.0 V>>GO TO 7.
More than 16.0 V>>Replace alternator. Refer to CHG-26, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
7.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-24, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace alternator. Refer to CHG-26, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair as needed.

CHG-14
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TYPE 1]
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
A
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010957605

1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION B

Check if battery terminals are clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair battery terminals connection.
2.CHECK “E” TERMINAL CONNECTION D
Check if “E” terminal (alternator ground harness) is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Repair “E” terminal connection.
3.CHECK BATTERY STATUS
F
Check battery status. Refer to PG-120, "R9M : Work Flow".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. G
NO >> Replace battery. Refer to PG-139, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION
Check drive belt tension. Refer to EM-301, "Inspection". H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair as needed. I

CHG

CHG-15
B20BD BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
B20BD BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010957606

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONSULT screen terms

DTC detecting condition
No. (Trouble diagnosis content)
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to IPDM
[CIRC SHORT TO GRND]
E/R.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to IPDM
[CIRC SHORT TO BATTERY]
CURRENT SENSOR E/R.
B20BD
(Current sensor)
[CIRC OPEN] The output voltage of the battery current sensor is lower
than the specified value while the battery voltage is high
[CMPNENT INTERNAL enough or the changing of voltage is lower than the speci-
MLFNCTN] fied value.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
[CIRC SHORT TO GRND]
• Harness or connectors
- Battery current sensor input signal (Current) circuit is shorted (Ground)
- Battery current sensor power circuit is open
• Battery current sensor
[CIRC SHORT TO BATTERY]
• Harness or connectors
- Battery current sensor input signal (Current) circuit is shorted (Power)
• Battery current sensor
[CIRC OPEN] or [CMPNENT INTERNAL MLFNCTN]
• Battery terminal is not connected
• Harness or connectors
- Battery current sensor input circuit is open
• Battery current sensor
FAIL-SAFE
Stop/start system is inhibited when this DTC is detected.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
1. Start engine and wait for 10 seconds or more.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
YES-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
NO >> Proceed to CHG-16, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010957607

1.CHECK DTC
Perform each inspection according to the displayed DTC.
Which DTC is displayed?
[CIRC SHORT TO GRND]>>GO TO 2.
[CIRC SHORT TO BATTERY]>>GO TO 7.
[CIRC OPEN] or [CMPNENT INTERNAL MLFNCTN]>>GO TO 8.
2.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER
CHG-16
B20BD BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery current sensor connector. A
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.
B
(+)
Battery current sensor (-) Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal C
F43 4 Ground Approx. 5
Is the inspection result normal?
D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connec- F
tor.

Battery current sensor IPDM E/R G

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F43 4 F74 95 Existed
H
4. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

Battery current sensor

— Continuity I
Connector Terminal
F43 4 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground. L

Battery current sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal CHG
F43 2 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
N
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT O
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
2. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor. P

Battery current sensor IPDM E/R

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F43 2 F74 96 Existed
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

CHG-17
B20BD BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]

Battery current sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
F43 2 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
2. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

Battery current sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
F43 1 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
7.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 2
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery current sensor connector.
3. Check the voltage between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

(+)
Battery current sensor (-) Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
F43 1 Ground 0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
8.CHECK BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL CONNECTION
Check if battery negative terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair battery negative terminal connection.
9.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 3
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery current sensor connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor.

Battery current sensor IPDM E/R

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F43 1 F74 97 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
10.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Refer to CHG-19, "Component Inspection".

CHG-18
B20BD BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". If the inspection result of the connector is normal then A
replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace battery current sensor.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010957608
B

1.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

C
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect connector which is disconnected
3. Disconnect battery negative cable.
4. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body D
ground.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
6. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector termi- E
nals as per the following.

IPDM E/R F
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal JPBIA3287ZZ

97 G
F74 96 Approx. 2.5
(Battery current sensor signal)
Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-120, "R9M :
Work Flow". H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace battery current sensor. I

CHG

CHG-19
B20BE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
B20BE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010957609

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC CONSULT screen terms

DTC detecting condition
No. (Trouble diagnosis content)
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to IPDM
[CIRC SHORT TO GRND]
TEMP SENSOR E/R.
B20BE
(Temperature sensor) [CIRC SHORT TO BATTERY An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to IPDM
OR OPEN] E/R.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
[CIRC SHORT TO GRND]
• Harness or connectors
- Battery current sensor input signal (Temperature) circuit is shorted (Ground)
- Battery current sensor power circuit is open
• Battery current sensor
[CIRC SHORT TO BATTERY]
• Harness or connectors
- Battery current sensor input signal (Temperature) circuit is shorted (Power)
- Battery current sensor input signal (Temperature) circuit is open
• Battery current sensor
FAIL-SAFE
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
1. Turn ignition ON, and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
YES-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
NO >> Proceed to CHG-20, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010957610

1.CHECK DTC
Perform each inspection according to the displayed DTC.
Which DTC is displayed?
[CIRC SHORT TO GRND]>>GO TO 2.
[CIRC SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN]>>GO TO 7.
2.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery current sensor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

(+)
Battery current sensor (-) Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
F43 4 Ground Approx. 5

CHG-20
B20BE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. A
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
B
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor. C

Battery current sensor IPDM E/R

Continuity D
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F43 4 F74 95 Existed
4. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground. E

Battery current sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal F
F43 4 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.
I
Battery current sensor
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
F43 2 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6. K
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
L
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
2. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor.
CHG
Battery current sensor IPDM E/R
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
N
F43 2 F74 96 Existed
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.
O
Battery current sensor
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
F43 2 Ground Not existed
P

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK BATTERY TEMPERATURE INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.

CHG-21
B20BE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
2. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

Battery current sensor

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
F43 3 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
7.CHECK BATTERY TEMPERATURE INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 2
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery current sensor connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor.

Battery current sensor IPDM E/R

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F43 3 F74 110 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
8.CHECK BATTERY TEMPERATURE INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 3
1. Connect IPDM E/R connector.
2. Check the voltage between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

(+)
Battery current sensor (-) Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
F43 3 Ground 0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
9.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Refer to CHG-22, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". If the inspection result of the connector is normal then
replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace battery current sensor.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010957611

1.CHECK BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery current sensor connector.
3. Check the resistance between battery current sensor terminals.

Battery current sensor

Resistance
Terminal
2 3 Continuity existed and the resistance value is 100 Ω or more
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
CHG-22
B20BE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
NO >> Replace battery current sensor.
A

CHG

CHG-23
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010957612

1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check if “B” terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair “B” terminal connection.
2.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between alternator “B” terminal and ground.

(+)
Alternator (–) Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F131 1 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness for open between alternator and fusible link.
3.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1. Start engine, then engine running at idle and warm.
2. Check voltage between battery positive terminal and alternator “B” terminal.

(–)
(+) Alternator Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Battery positive terminal F131 1 Less than 0.2 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-14, "Work Flow".
NO >> Check harness between battery and alternator for poor continuity.

CHG-24
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
CHARGING SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010957613
B

Symptom Reference
C
Discharged battery
The charge warning lamp does not turn OFF after the engine Refer to CHG-14, "Work Flow".
starts.
D

CHG

CHG-25
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 1]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

ALTERNATOR
R9M
R9M : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010728733

JMMIA1609GB

Alternator mounting bolt Alternator “B” terminal harness

“B” terminal nut Alternator bracket Alternator connector

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

R9M : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010728734

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery cable from negative terminal. Refer to PG-139, "R9M : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-300, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-308, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-314, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Cover the openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
5. Remove electric throttle control actuator bracket mounting nut
and bolt , and then remove electric throttle control actuator
bracket .

JMMIA1822ZZ

6. Remove air inlet hose 2. Refer to EM-310, "Removal and Installation".

CHG-26
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 1]
7. Remove air inlet tube 2 mounting bolt and disconnect air inlet
tube 2 from charge air cooler, and then get air inlet tube 2 out A
of alternator removal area.

JMMIA1821ZZ

D
8. Remove solenoid valve and bracket assembly.
a. Remove water hose fixing clip from solenoid valve bracket.
E
: Vehicle front

JMMIA0964ZZ

H
b. Disconnect vacuum hose and from solenoid valve.
c. Disconnect solenoid valve connector .
d. Remove solenoid valve harness fixing clips from solenoid I
valve bracket.

: Vehicle front
J

K
JMMIA0965ZZ

e. Remove mounting bolts and , and then remove solenoid

valve and bracket assembly as a set. L

: Vehicle front
CHG

JMMIA0966ZZ

O
9. Remove oil level gauge and oil level gauge guide. Refer to EM-330, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Cover the openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
10. Disconnect alternator connector. P
11. Remove “B” terminal nut and disconnect “B” terminal harness.
12. Remove alternator mounting bolts.
13. Remove alternator upward from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never contact with and damage surrounding parts when removing alternator from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CHG-27
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 1]
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Temporarily tighten the alternator bolts in order from the upper to the lower, and then tighten them in
order from the upper to the lower.
For the alternator, the front side (pulley side) surface is the reference surface. Fit the reference sur-
face to the alternator mounting part, and then tighten the bolts.
• Be careful to tighten “B” terminal nut to the specified torque.
• Install alternator, and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-301, "Inspection".
• For this model (with battery current sensor models), the energy management system that controls
the power generation voltage of the alternator has been adopted. Therefore, the power generation
voltage variable control system operation inspection should be performed after replacing the alter-
nator, and then make sure that the system operates normally. Refer to CHG-14, "Work Flow".
The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at
the negative terminal.

JPBIA3262ZZ

• When installing the tire assembly, tighten wheel nuts to the specified torque. Refer to WT-61,
"Exploded View".

CHG-28
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [TYPE 1]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Alternator INFOID:0000000010957626
B

Applied model R9M

C
F 000 BL0 841
Type
BOSCH make
Nominal rating [V - A] 14 - 150 D
Ground polarity Negative
Minimum revolution under no-load
[rpm] Less than 1,500 E
(When 13.5 V is applied)
More than 84/1,800
Hot output current
[A/rpm] More than 124/2,500
(When 13.5 V is applied)
More than 151/5,000 F
Regulated output voltage [V] 12.0 - 14.8*
*: Adjustment range of energy management system.
G

CHG

CHG-29
APPLICATION NOTICE
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [TYPE 2]

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

APPLICATION NOTICE
Information INFOID:0000000010957592

Check the vehicle type to use the service information in this section.

Service information System

TYPE 1 With stop/start system
TYPE 2 Without stop/start system

CHG-30
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TYPE 2]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010957577

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key K
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
L
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition CHG
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
N
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of O
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE: P
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

CHG-31
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TYPE 2]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.

CHG-32
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 2]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010957581
B

I
JMMIA1712ZZ

No. Component Function J

Battery current sensor* —

Alternator Refer to CHG-33, "Alternator".

K
ECM transmits the received alternator voltage request signal to alternator via LIN communica-
tion.
ECM
Refer to EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" (MR engine) or
EC-440, "Component Parts Location" (QR engine) for detailed installation location. L
IPDM E/R sends the alternator voltage request signal to ECM via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
CHG
*: Not applicable
Alternator INFOID:0000000010957582

N
The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical
system and to keep the battery charged.
O

JMMIA1018ZZ

CHG-33
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 2]
SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010957583

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMMIA1816GB

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• IPDM E/R sends alternator voltage request signal to ECM via CAN communication.
• ECM transmits alternator voltage request signal to alternator via LIN communication.
• Control module inside alternator controls the power generation voltage based on the received alternator volt-
age request signal.
• Alternator includes a self-diagnosis function and transmits the diagnosis result to ECM via LIN communica-
tion when detecting any malfunction.
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamps/Indicator Lamps INFOID:0000000010957584

Item Design Reference

For layout, refer to MWI-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design".
Charge warning lamp For function, refer to MWI-30, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Charge
Warning Lamp".

CHG-34
ECM, IPDM E/R
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [TYPE 2]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

ECM, IPDM E/R
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000010957585
B

ECU Reference
C
EC-89, "Reference Value".
EC-103, "Fail-safe".
ECM (MR engine) EC-107, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". D
EC-109, "DTC Index".
EC-112, "Test Value and Test Limit".
E
EC-501, "Reference Value".
EC-513, "Fail Safe".
ECM (QR engine) EC-515, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". F
EC-517, "DTC Index".
EC-519, "Test Value and Test Limit".
PCS-22, "Reference Value". G
PCS-34, "Fail-safe".
IPDM E/R
PCS-37, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
H
PCS-38, "DTC Index".

CHG

CHG-35
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 2]

WIRING DIAGRAM
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010957586

JRMWF4092GB

CHG-36
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 2]

CHG

JRMWF4093GB

CHG-37
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 2]

JRMWF4094GB

CHG-38
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 2]

CHG

JRMWF4095GB

CHG-39
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TYPE 2]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010957587

DETAILED FLOW
1.CHECK FOR DTC
Perform self diagnosis with CONSULT.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair as needed.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-41, "Inspection Procedure".

>> GO TO 3.
3.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)
Start the engine and run it at idle.
Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 2,500 RPM)
Increase and maintain the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END
5.MEASURE “B” TERMINAL VOLTAGE
Start engine. With engine running at 2,500 rpm, measure “B” terminal voltage.
What voltage does the measurement result show?
Less than 13.0 V>>GO TO 6.
More than 16.0 V>>Replace alternator. Refer to CHG-44, "MR20DD : Removal and Installation" (MR engine)
or CHG-46, "QR25DE : Removal and Installation" (QR engine).
6.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-42, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace alternator. Refer to CHG-44, "MR20DD : Removal and Installation" (MR engine) or CHG-
46, "QR25DE : Removal and Installation" (QR engine).
NO >> Repair as needed.

CHG-40
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TYPE 2]
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
A
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010957588

1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION B

Check if battery terminals are clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair battery terminals connection.
2.CHECK “E” TERMINAL CONNECTION D
Check if “E” terminal (alternator ground harness) is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. E
NO >> Repair “E” terminal connection.
3.CHECK BATTERY STATUS
F
Check battery status. Refer to PG-124, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Work Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. G
NO >> Replace battery. Refer to PG-142, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION
Check drive belt tension. Refer to EM-23, "Inspection" (MR engine) or EM-167, "Inspection" (QR engine). H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair as needed. I

CHG

CHG-41
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 2]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010957589

1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION

(+)
Alternator (–) Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E68 1 Ground Battery voltage

QR engine

(+)
Alternator (–) Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F14 1 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness for open between alternator and fusible link.
3.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1. Start engine, then engine running at idle and warm.
2. Check voltage between battery positive terminal and alternator “B” terminal.
MR engine

(–)
(+) Alternator Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Battery positive terminal E68 1 Less than 0.2 V

QR engine

(–)
(+) Alternator Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Battery positive terminal F14 1 Less than 0.2 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-40, "Work Flow".
NO >> Check harness between battery and alternator for poor continuity.

CHG-42
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 2]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
CHARGING SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010957590
B

Symptom Reference
C
Discharged battery
The charge warning lamp does not turn OFF after the engine Refer to CHG-40, "Work Flow".
starts.
D

CHG

CHG-43
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 2]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

ALTERNATOR
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010957571

JMMIA0640GB

“B” terminal nut “B” terminal harness Alternator

Alternator mounting bolt (upper) Alternator mounting bolt (lower) Alternator harness connector

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

MR20DD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010957572

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery cable from negative terminal. Refer to PG-142, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-22, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove washer tank inlet. Refer to WW-91, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove low pressure flexible hose bracket mounting bolt and
nut .
5. Remove ground cable clip .

: Vehicle front

JMMIA1601ZZ

CHG-44
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 2]
6. Remove “B” terminal nut and “B” terminal harness.
7. Disconnect alternator harness connector and harness clips A
.

: Vehicle front B

JMMIA1602ZZ

D
8. Remove alternator mounting bolt (upper).
9. Completely loosen alternator mounting bolt (lower), and pull it out until the bolt head is in contact with the
side member. And then, remove the alternator by pulling it forward.
E
NOTE:
The alternator can be removed together with the bolts by pulling it forward and using the alternator bracket
bolt hole cutout.
10. Remove alternator upward from the vehicle. F
CAUTION:
• Never put excessive power on low pressure flexible hose
and high pressure pipe. G
• Never bend ground cable.

: Vehicle front H

JMMIA1603ZZ
I

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. J
CAUTION:
• Temporarily tighten the alternator bolts in order from the lower to the upper, and then tighten them in
order from the upper to the lower.
• For the alternator, the front side (pulley side) surface is the reference surface. Fit the reference sur- K
face to the alternator mounting part, and then tighten the bolts.
• Be careful to tighten “B” terminal nut to the specified torque.
• Install alternator, and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-23, "Inspection". L
QR25DE

CHG

CHG-45
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 2]
QR25DE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010957573

JMMIA1615GB

Alternator harness connector “B” terminal harness “B” terminal nut

Alternator Alternator mounting bracket

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

QR25DE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010957574

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery cable from negative terminal. Refer to PG-142, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-166, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove washer tank inlet. Refer to WW-91, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove ground cable bracket mounting bolt , and then move
ground cable bracket to a location where it does not inhibit
work.
CAUTION:
Never bend ground cable.

: Vehicle front

JMMIA1805ZZ

5. Remove low pressure flexible hose bracket mounting bolts

and nut .

: Vehicle front

JMMIA1806ZZ

6. Remove “B” terminal nut and disconnect “B” terminal harness.

CHG-46
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 2]
7. Disconnect alternator harness connector.
8. Remove alternator mounting bolts. A
9. Remove alternator upward from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never strong force to low pressure flexible hose and high pressure pipe. B
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: C
• Temporarily tighten the alternator bolts in order from the lower side to the upper side, and then
tighten them in order from the upper side to the lower side.
• For the alternator, the front side (pulley side) surface is the reference surface. Fit the reference sur- D
face to the alternator mounting part, and then tighten the bolts.
• Be careful to tighten “B” terminal nut to the specified torque.
• Install alternator and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-167, "Inspection".
NOTE: E
Tighten mounting bolts according to the following procedure for
installing alternator bracket.
F

H
JMMIA1414ZZ

CHG

CHG-47
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [TYPE 2]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Alternator INFOID:0000000010957591

Applied model MR engine QR engine

2620093 2620168
Type
Valeo Make Valeo Make
Nominal rating [V - A] 12 - 120 12 - 120
Ground polarity Negative Negative
Minimum revolution under no-load
[rpm] Less than 1,200 Less than 1,200
(When 13.5 V is applied)
More than 46/1,500 More than 46/1,500
Hot output current
[A/rpm] More than 96/2,500 More than 96/2,500
(When 13.5 V is applied)
More than 117/5,000 More than 117/5,000
Regulated output voltage [V] 14.0 – 14.6 14.0 – 14.6

CHG-48
TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

SECTION CL CLUTCH
B

E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 LHD : Removal and Installation ...............................14 F
LHD : Inspection and Adjustment ............................16
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System RHD ............................................................................17
G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- RHD : Exploded View ..............................................18
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 RHD : Removal and Installation ..............................18
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- RHD : Inspection and Adjustment ...........................20
H
tion After Battery Disconnect ..................................... 3
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ........................ 22
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 4
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 4 LHD ............................................................................22
Precaution for Stop/Start System Service ................. 5 LHD : Exploded View ...............................................22 I
Service Notice or Precautions for Clutch .................. 5 LHD : Removal and Installation ...............................22
LHD : Inspection and Adjustment ............................23
PREPARATION ............................................ 6 J
RHD ............................................................................23
PREPARATION ................................................... 6 RHD : Exploded View ..............................................24
Special Service Tools ................................................ 6 RHD : Removal and Installation ..............................24
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 6 RHD : Inspection and Adjustment ...........................25 K
Lubricant or/and Sealant ........................................... 6
CLUTCH PIPING ............................................... 26
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 8 Exploded View .........................................................26 L
Hydraulic Piping .......................................................27
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Removal and Installation .........................................27
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 8 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................28
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 8 M
CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) ....... 30
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 9 Exploded View .........................................................30
Removal and Installation .........................................30 N
CLUTCH PEDAL ................................................. 9
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................31
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 9
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER ............ 32
CLUTCH FLUID ..................................................11 O
Inspection ................................................................ 11 MR20DD .....................................................................32
Draining ................................................................... 11 MR20DD : Exploded View .......................................32
Refilling ................................................................... 12 MR20DD : Removal and Installation .......................32 P
Air Bleeding ............................................................. 13 MR20DD : Inspection ..............................................33
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 14 R9M ............................................................................34
R9M : Exploded View ..............................................35
CLUTCH PEDAL ................................................14 R9M : Removal and Installation ...............................35
R9M : Inspection ......................................................39
LHD ............................................................................ 14
LHD : Exploded View .............................................. 14

CL-1
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications ............................................ 41
(SDS) ........................................................... 41 Clutch Pedal ............................................................ 41
Clutch Disc .............................................................. 41
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Clutch Cover ........................................................... 42
(SDS) .................................................................. 41

CL-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010745311

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: CL
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000010745312

CL-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000010745313

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010745361

D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes

CL-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes A
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes
B
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal. C
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
CL
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied. E
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
F
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of G
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION: H
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Precaution for Stop/Start System Service INFOID:0000000011045986
I
CAUTION:
When performing an inspection and its related work with the engine at idle, always turn the stop/start
OFF switch ON or open the hood to release the stop/start system. J
Service Notice or Precautions for Clutch INFOID:0000000010745315

K
WARNING:
After cleaning clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Never use compressed air.
CAUTION:
Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Because CSC slides back to the original position every L
time when removing transaxle assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding parts may damage a seal of
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-30, "Removal and Installation".
• Use recommended clutch fluid only, refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants". M
• Never reuse drained clutch fluid.
• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. It will ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system. N
• Never disassemble clutch master cylinder and CSC.

CL-5
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000010745316

Tool number
(RENAULT tool No.) Description
Tool name
ST20050240 Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring le-
( — ) ver
Diaphragm adjusting wrench

ZZA0508D

— Locking flywheel
(Mot.1431)
Flywheel locking tool

JMAIA0431ZZ

— Holding clutch cover

(Emb.1761)
Tool kit for clutch cover removal and
installation

E1BIA0775ZZ

— Rearming clutch cover compensation system

(Emb.1604)
Clutch compression tool

E1BIA0778ZZ

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010745317

Tool name Description

Clutch aligner Installing clutch disc

MCIB0404E

Lubricant or/and Sealant INFOID:0000000010745318

CL-6
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Item Use
A
Lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide Application to clutch disc and input shaft splines area

CL-7
Symptom
Reference

Clutch slips
Clutch noisy
Clutch pedal spongy
Clutch grabs/chatters
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause)

Clutch does not disengage

NVH Troubleshooting Chart

essary, repair or replace these parts.

CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" CLUTCH PEDAL (Inspection and adjustment)

1
1
CL-13, "Air Bleeding" CLUTCH LINE (Air in line)

2
1
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

CL-22, "LHD : Exploded View" (LHD), CL-24, "RHD : Exploded View" (RHD) MASTER CYLINDER PISTON CUP (Damaged)

3
2
EM-56, "Exploded View" (MR20DD), EM-365, "Exploded View" (R9M) ENGINE MOUNTING (Loose)

1
CL-30, "Exploded View" CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) (Worn, dirty or damaged)

4
1
2

CL-8
CLUTCH DISC (Out of true)

4
CLUTCH DISC (Runout is excessive)

4
2
CLUTCH DISC (Lining broken)

4
CLUTCH DISC (Dirty or burned)

4
CLUTCH DISC (Oily)

4
2
2
CL-33, "MR20DD : Inspection" (MR20DD), CL-39, "R9M : Inspection" (R9M) CLUTCH DISC (Worn out)

2
2
CLUTCH DISC (Hardened)

2
CLUTCH DISC (Lack of spline grease)

4
DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Damaged)

5
3
DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Out of tip alignment)

5
2
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

PRESSURE PLATE (Distortion)

6
4
EM-63, "Inspection" (MR20DD), EM-401, "Inspection" (R9M) FLYWHEEL (Distortion)

5
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If nec-
INFOID:0000000010745319
CLUTCH PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
CLUTCH PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010745320
B

INSPECTION
Clutch Pedal Height C
1. Turn the floor carpet.
2. Check that the clutch pedal height (H1) from the surface for
measurement is within the reference value. CL

Measurement surface : Top surface of floor panel

E
Clutch pedal height : Refer to CL-41, "Clutch Pedal".
• Replace clutch pedal if the height is outside the reference
value. F

JPFIA0065ZZ
G
Clutch Pedal Height when Disengaging the Clutch
1. Securely engage the parking brake.
2. Turn the floor carpet. H
3. Start the engine and run at idle.
4. Fully depress clutch pedal and shift to the 1st gear.
CAUTION: I
Securely depress the brake pedal with shift lever in 1st gear.
5. Gradually release the clutch pedal and check that the clutch
pedal height (H2) from the surface for measurement is within J
the reference value with a scale immediately before the clutch is
engaged.
K
Measurement surface : Top surface of floor panel

Clutch pedal height at

L
clutch disengagement : Refer to CL-41, "Clutch Pedal".
• Replace clutch pedal if the height is outside the reference JPFIA0068ZZ
value. M
NOTE:
Although the clutch pedal height differs according to whether the clutch gets disengaged or engaged,
clutch-engaged case is regarded as clutch-disengaged case for easier inspection.
N
Clutch Pedal Play
Push the pedal pad by hand until a resistance can be felt and check
that the play (A) on the upper surface of the pedal pad is within the
reference value. O

Clutch pedal play : Refer to CL-41, "Clutch Pedal".

P
• Replace clutch pedal if the play is outside the reference value.

JPFIA0121ZZ

Position of Clutch Interlock Switch

CL-9
CLUTCH PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Check that the clearance (C) between the thread end of clutch inter-
lock switch and clutch pedal lever is within the specified value
while clutch pedal is fully depressed.

Clearance : Refer to CL-41, "Clutch Pedal".

JSDIA5611ZZ

Position of Clutch Pedal Position Switch

Check that the clearance (C) between the thread end of clutch pedal
position switch and clutch pedal lever is within the specified
value while clutch pedal is fully released.

Clearance : Refer to CL-41, "Clutch Pedal".

JSDIA5611ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
Position of Clutch Interlock Switch
1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch connector.
2. Loosen the clutch interlock switch 45 degrees counterclockwise.
3. With the clutch pedal fully depressed, press into the clutch inter-
lock switch until it reaches the clutch pedal lever and turn
the switch clockwise by 45 degrees to secure it.
CAUTION:
The clearance (C) show in the figure must be within the
specified value.

Clearance : Refer to CL-41, "Clutch Pedal".

NOTE:
Fully depressed clutch pedal means a clutch pedal condition
that the clutch pedal lever contacts the pedal stopper rubber. JSDIA5611ZZ

Position of Clutch Pedal Position Switch

1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch connector.
2. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch 45 degrees counterclockwise.
3. Press-fit the clutch pedal position switch until the clutch pedal
position switch hits the clutch pedal lever 45 degrees clock-
wise while pulling the pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
The clearance (C) show in the figure must be within the
specified value.

Clearance : Refer to CL-41, "Clutch Pedal".

JSDIA5611ZZ

CL-10
CLUTCH FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
CLUTCH FLUID
A
Inspection INFOID:0000000010745321

FLUID LEAKAGE B
• Check clutch line for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
• Check for fluid leakage by fully depressing clutch pedal while engine is running.
CAUTION: C
If leakage occurs around joints, reinstall the joints or, if necessary, replace damaged parts.
FLUID LEVEL
• Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified CL
range (MAX – MIN lines).
• Visually check for any clutch fluid leakage around the reservoir
tank.
E
• Check the clutch system for any leakage if the fluid level is
extremely low (lower than MIN).

SFIA2634J G
Draining INFOID:0000000010745322

CAUTION: H
Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water.
1. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding I
connector .

JSDIA5568ZZ L

2. Press the lock pin into the bleeding connector , and main-
tain the position. M

JPDIB0041ZZ

CL-11
CLUTCH FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Slide bleeding connector in the direction of the arrow as
shown in the figure.

: Clutch housing

Dimension (A) : 10 mm (0.39 in)

4. Depress clutch pedal to gradually discharge clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Since the inside of clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure,
hold the tube to prevent it from getting disconnected. JPDIB0042ZZ

Refilling INFOID:0000000010745323

CAUTION:
Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and then fill with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained clutch fluid.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding
connector .

JSDIA5568ZZ

3. Press the lock pin into the bleeding connector , and main-
tain the position.

JPDIB0041ZZ

4. Slide bleeding connector in the direction of the arrow as

shown in the figure.

: Clutch housing

Dimension (A) : 10 mm (0.39 in)

5. Slowly depress clutch pedal to the full stroke position, and then
release the pedal.
CAUTION:
Since the inside of clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure, JPDIB0042ZZ

hold the tube to prevent it from getting disconnected.

6. Repeat step 5 at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new clutch fluid is discharged.
CAUTION:
Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.

CL-12
CLUTCH FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
7. Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions while clutch pedal is depressed.
8. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-13, "Air Bleeding". A

Air Bleeding INFOID:0000000010745324

CAUTION: B
• Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.
• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water. C
NOTE:
Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or
power bleeder will not purge all the air from the system.
CL
1. Fill reservoir tank with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Never reuse drained clutch fluid.
E
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding
connector .
3. “Depress” and “Release” the clutch pedal slowly and fully 15
F
times at an interval of 2 to 3 seconds and release the clutch
pedal.

H
JSDIA5568ZZ

4. Press the lock pin into the bleeding connector , and main-
tain the position. I
CAUTION:
Since the inside of clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure,
hold the tube to prevent it from getting disconnected. J

JPDIB0041ZZ
L
5. Slide bleeding connector in the direction of the arrow as
shown in the figure.
M
: Clutch housing

Dimension (A) : 10 mm (0.39 in) N

6. Depress the clutch pedal soon and hold it, and then bleed the air
from the piping.
CAUTION: O
Since the inside of clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure, JPDIB0042ZZ

hold the tube to prevent it from getting disconnected.

7. Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions. P
8. Release clutch pedal and wait for 5 seconds.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until no bubbles are observed in the clutch fluid.
10. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to CL-
11, "Inspection".

CL-13
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CLUTCH PEDAL
LHD
LHD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010745325

JSDIA6100GB

Clutch interlock switch Clutch pedal stroke sensor Clutch pedal position switch
Clip Clutch pedal assembly

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

LHD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010745326

REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect clutch pedal position switch harness connector.
3. Disconnect clutch interlock switch harness connector.
4. Disconnect clutch pedal stroke sensor harness connector.
5. Disconnect harness clip from clutch pedal bracket .

: Hole for harness clip

JSDIA6104ZZ

CL-14
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove clutch pedal stroke sensor .
a. Pull sensor lever cover A
b. While turn lever pin and pull it.
c. Remove clutch pedal stroke sensor.
B

JSDIA5591ZZ

CL
7. Remove master cylinder rod end from clutch pedal lever .

G
JSDIA6109ZZ

8. Remove clutch pedal position switch and clip from clutch H

pedal bracket.

JSDIA6105ZZ
K
9. Remove clutch interlock switch and clip from clutch pedal
bracket.
L

N
JSDIA6106ZZ

10. Remove clutch pedal assembly. O

11. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to CL-16, "LHD :
Inspection and Adjustment".
P

JSDIA5589ZZ

CL-15
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Push clip until it clicks.
• Press master cylinder rod end to pin of clutch pedal until it stops.
• Perform inspection and adjustment after installation. Refer to CL-16, "LHD : Inspection and Adjustment".
• Install clutch pedal stroke sensor, according to the following procedure.
CAUTION:
Install clutch pedal position switch before installing clutch pedal stroke sensor.
1. Insert pawl into the hole and hook it, and fit lever pin into
the hole. And then clutch pedal stroke sensor is installed tem-
porary.

JSDIA5601ZZ

2. Push lever pin and insert it into the hole deeply.

JSDIA5602ZZ

3. Turn lever pin as shown in the figure and fix lever pin to stop-
per . And then clutch pedal stroke sensor is installed com-
pletely.

JSDIA5603ZZ

4. Push sensor lever cover , then hold on pin of clutch pedal.

JSDIA5604ZZ

LHD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010745327

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

CL-16
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check clutch pedal for bend, damage, or a cracked weld. If bend, damage, or a cracked weld is found,
replace clutch pedal assembly. A
• Check pedal stopper rubber . If damage or deformation is found,
replace clutch pedal assembly.
B

CL
JSDIA6112ZZ

• Check pedal pad . If wear or damage is found, replace clutch E

pedal assembly.

JSDIA6113ZZ H
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the clutch pedal height, clutch pedal height at clutch disengagement, and clutch pedal play. Refer to
CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment". I
• Check the clutch pedal position switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Check the clutch interlock switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION J
• Adjust the clutch pedal position switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Adjust the clutch interlock switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform reset of clutch pedal stroke sensor, after installation clutch pedal or clutch pedal stroke sensor. K
Refer to PB-59, "Work Procedure".
RHD
L

CL-17
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
RHD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010745328

JSDIA5585GB

Clutch pedal assembly Clutch pedal stroke sensor Clutch pedal position switch
Clip Pedal pad Clutch interlock switch

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

RHD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010745329

REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect clutch pedal position switch harness connector.
3. Disconnect clutch interlock switch harness connector.
4. Disconnect clutch pedal stroke sensor harness connector.
5. Disconnect harness clip from clutch pedal bracket .

: Hole for harness clip

JSDIA6110ZZ

CL-18
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove clutch pedal stroke sensor .
a. Pull sensor lever cover A
b. While turn lever pin and pull it.
c. Remove clutch pedal stroke sensor.
B

JSDIA5591ZZ

CL
7. Remove master cylinder rod end from clutch pedal lever .

G
JSDIA6109ZZ

8. Remove clutch pedal position switch and clip from clutch H

pedal bracket.

JSDIA5592ZZ
K
9. Remove clutch interlock switch and clip from clutch pedal
bracket.
L

N
JSDIA5593ZZ

10. Remove clutch pedal assembly. O

11. Remove pedal pad from clutch pedal.
12. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to CL-20, "RHD :
Inspection and Adjustment". P

JSDIA5594ZZ

CL-19
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Push clip until it clicks.
• Press master cylinder rod end to pin of clutch pedal until it stops.
• Perform inspection and adjustment after installation. Refer to CL-20, "RHD : Inspection and Adjustment".
• Install clutch pedal stroke sensor, according to the following procedure.
CAUTION:
Install clutch pedal position switch before installing clutch pedal stroke sensor.
1. Insert pawl into the hole and hook it, and fit lever pin into
the hole. And then clutch pedal stroke sensor is installed tem-
porary.

JSDIA5601ZZ

2. Push lever pin and insert it into the hole deeply.

JSDIA5602ZZ

3. Turn lever pin as shown in the figure and fix lever pin to stop-
per . And then clutch pedal stroke sensor is installed com-
pletely.

JSDIA5603ZZ

4. Push sensor lever cover , then hold on pin of clutch pedal.

JSDIA5604ZZ

RHD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010745330

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

CL-20
CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check clutch pedal for bend, damage, or a cracked weld. If bend, damage, or a cracked weld is found,
replace clutch pedal assembly. A
• Check pedal stopper rubber . If damage or deformation is found,
replace clutch pedal assembly.
B

CL
JSDIA6114ZZ

• Check pedal pad . If wear or damage is found, replace pedal E

pad.

JSDIA6115ZZ H
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the clutch pedal height, clutch pedal height at clutch disengagement, and clutch pedal play. Refer to
CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment". I
• Check the clutch pedal position switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Check the clutch interlock switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION J
• Adjust the clutch pedal position switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Adjust the clutch interlock switch position. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform reset of clutch pedal stroke sensor, after installation clutch pedal or clutch pedal stroke sensor. K
Refer to PB-59, "Work Procedure".

CL-21
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
LHD
LHD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010745331

JSDIA5571ZZ

Master cylinder Reservoir hose Reservoir tank

LHD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010745332

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water.
• Never disassemble clutch master cylinder.
1. Remove the air cleaner case and air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-31, "Removal and Installation" (MR20DD),
EM-308, "Removal and Installation" (R9M)
2. Drain clutch fluid. Refer to CL-11, "Draining".
3. Remove reservoir hose from reservoir tank and master cylinder.
4. Remove master cylinder rod end from clutch pedal.

PCIB1491E

CL-22
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Pull up the lock pin from connector of master cylinder and
separate clutch tube . A
6. Rotate master cylinder clockwise by 45 degrees, and then
remove master cylinder.
B

JPDIB0167ZZ

CL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water. E
1. Tilt master cylinder clockwise by 45 degrees and insert it to
the mounting hole. Rotate counterclockwise and secure it. At
this time, nipple is upward of the vehicle. F
2. Install master cylinder rod end to clutch pedal.
CAUTION:
Press master cylinder rod end to clutch pedal until it stops. G
3. Install reservoir hose to reservoir tank and master cylinder.
CAUTION:
Set reservoir hose with painted mark facing upward. H
4. Press down the lock pin into connector of master cylinder until it
JSDIA5573ZZ
stops.
5. Install clutch tube into connector of master cylinder until it stops. I
6. Fill with clutch fluid. Refer to CL-12, "Refilling".
7. Perform inspection and adjustment after installation. Refer to CL-23, "LHD : Inspection and Adjustment".
8. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal. J

LHD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010745333

K
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the fluid leakage and the fluid level. Refer to CL-11, "Inspection".
• Check for the clutch pedal condition. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
L
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-13, "Air Bleeding".
RHD M

CL-23
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
RHD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010745334

JSDIA5572ZZ

Master cylinder Reservoir hose Reservoir tank

RHD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010745335

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water.
• Never disassemble clutch master cylinder.
1. Drain clutch fluid. Refer to CL-11, "Draining".
2. Remove reservoir hose from reservoir tank and master cylinder.
3. Remove master cylinder rod end from clutch pedal.

PCIB1491E

4. Pull up the lock pin from connector of master cylinder and

separate clutch tube .
5. Rotate master cylinder clockwise by 45 degrees, and then
remove master cylinder from the vehicle.

JPDIB0169ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water.

CL-24
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Tilt master cylinder clockwise by 45 degrees and insert it to
the mounting hole. Rotate counterclockwise and secure it. At A
this time, nipple is upward of the vehicle.
2. Install master cylinder rod end to clutch pedal.
CAUTION: B
Press master cylinder rod end to clutch pedal until it stops.
3. Install reservoir hose to reservoir tank and master cylinder.
4. Press down the lock pin into connector of master cylinder until it C
stops.
5. Install clutch tube into connector of master cylinder until it stops. JSDIA5573ZZ

6. Fill with clutch fluid. Refer to CL-12, "Refilling". CL

7. Perform inspection and adjustment after installation. Refer to CL-25, "RHD : Inspection and Adjustment".
8. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal.
E
RHD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010745336

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION F

• Check the fluid leakage and the fluid level. Refer to CL-11, "Inspection".
• Check for the clutch pedal condition. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION G
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-13, "Air Bleeding".

CL-25
CLUTCH PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CLUTCH PIPING
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010745337

MR20DD

JSDIA5583ZZ

CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) Clip Clutch tube

Clutch damper Bracket Master cylinder

R9M

CL-26
CLUTCH PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

H
JSDIA6097GB

CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) Clutch tube Clip

I
Bracket Clutch damper Bracket
Master cylinder

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) J

Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000010745338

N
PCIB1499E

Clutch tube Lock pin CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder)

O
Clutch damper Master cylinder Clutch pedal

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010745339

P
CAUTION:
Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
and wash the affected area with water.
REMOVAL
Note the following, and refer to CL-26, "Exploded View" for removal procedure.
• Drain clutch fluid. Refer to CL-11, "Draining".

CL-27
CLUTCH PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Press the lock pin into the bleeding connector of the CSC ,
and then remove clutch tube from CSC.

JSDIA5580ZZ

• Pull the lock pins from the connectors of the clutch damper
until the pins stop, and then remove clutch tubes from clutch
damper.

JSDIA5581ZZ

• Pull the lock pin from the connector of the clutch master cylinder
until the pin stop, and then remove clutch tube from clutch
master cylinder.
• Perform inspection after removal. Refer to CL-28, "Inspection and
Adjustment".

JSDIA5582ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and refer to CL-26, "Exploded View" for installation procedure.
CAUTION:
Never damage clutch tube.
• Insert each clutch tube into the CSC bleeding connector, the clutch damper connector, and the clutch master
cylinder connector until it contacts the end of each connector.
• Install each lock pin into the clutch damper connector and the clutch master cylinder connector until it con-
tacts the end of each connector.
• Perform inspection and adjustment after installation. Refer to CL-28, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010745340

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

• Check the clutch tube for cracks and damage. If the clutch tube has cracks or damage, replace it with a new
one.
• Check the O-ring of the clutch tube for cracks and damage. If the O-ring of the clutch tube has cracks or
damage, replace clutch tube with a new one.
• Check the clutch damper for cracks and damage. If the clutch damper has cracks or damage, replace it with
a new one.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the fluid leakage and the fluid level. Refer to CL-11, "Inspection".
• Check for the clutch pedal condition. Refer to CL-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".

CL-28
CLUTCH PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-13, "Air Bleeding". A

CL-29
CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010745341

MR20DD

JPDIB0040GB

Transaxle assembly CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

R9M

JPDIB0048GB

Transaxle assembly CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) Sealing bolt

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010745342

CAUTION:

CL-30
CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Because CSC slides back to the original position
every time when removing transaxle assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding parts may damage A
a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage.
• Never disassemble CSC.
• Keep painted surface on the body or other parts free of clutch fluid. If it spills, wipe up immediately
B
and wash the affected area with water.
REMOVAL
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-41, "Removal and Installation" (RS6F94R), TM-122, "Removal C
and Installation" (RS6F52A).
2. Remove CSC from clutch housing.
INSTALLATION CL

1. Install CSC to clutch housing, and then tighten CSC mounting bolts to the specified torque.
• For tightening torque, refer to CL-30, "Exploded View".
CAUTION: E
• Never reuse CSC.
• Never reuse sealing bolt. (R9M only)
• Never insert and operate CSC because piston and stopper of CSC components may fall off. F
2. Install transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-41, "Removal and Installation" (RS6F94R), TM-122, "Removal
and Installation" (RS6F52A).
3. Perform inspection and adjustment after installation. Refer to CL-31, "Inspection and Adjustment". G
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000010745343

H
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the fluid leakage and the fluid level. Refer to CL-11, "Inspection".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION I
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-13, "Air Bleeding".

CL-31
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010745344

JPDIB0049GB

Flywheel Clutch disc Clutch cover

Input shaft
First step Final step

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.

MR20DD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010745345

CAUTION:
• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Because CSC slides back to the original position
every time when removing transaxle assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding parts may damage
a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-30, "Removal and Installation".
• Never bring any grease to the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface and flywheel surface.
• Never clean clutch disc using solvent.
REMOVAL
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-41, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove clutch cover mounting bolts while holding clutch cover.
CAUTION:
Never drop clutch disc.
3. Remove clutch cover and clutch disc.
CAUTION:
Never drop clutch disc.
4. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to CL-33, "MR20DD : Inspection".
INSTALLATION
1. Clean clutch disc and input shaft splines to remove grease and powder arisen from abrasion.

CL-32
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and input shaft
splines area . For recommended grease, refer to CL-32, A
"MR20DD : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply grease to the points specified. Otherwise, B
noise, poor disengagement, or damage to the clutch may
result. Excessive grease may cause slip or judder. And if it
adheres to seal of CSC, it cause clutch fluid leakage. Wipe
out excess grease. Wipe out any grease oozing from the C
parts.
JSDIA3617ZZ

CL
3. Install clutch disc using clutch aligner (A) (commercial service
tool), and temporarily install clutch cover.
CAUTION:
E
• Never drop clutch disc and clutch cover.

G
JSDIA3358ZZ

• Be careful with the orientation of the clutch disc. H

: Engine side
I

JSDIA6017ZZ K
4. Tighten clutch cover mounting bolts to the specified torque
evenly in two steps in the numerical order as shown in the fig-
ure. L
• For tightening torque, refer to CL-32, "MR20DD : Exploded
View".
• After installation, perform inspection. Refer to CL-33, M
"MR20DD : Inspection".
5. Install transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-41, "Removal and Instal-
lation". N

PCIB1772E

MR20DD : Inspection INFOID:0000000010745346 O

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Clutch Disc P

CL-33
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Measure circumferential runout relative to clutch disc center spline.
If it is outside the specification, replace clutch disc.

Runout limit/diameter of the area to : Refer to CL-41,

be measured "Clutch Disc".
• Measure backlash to clutch disc spline and input shaft spline at the
circumference of clutch disc. If it is outside the specification,
replace clutch disc.

Maximum allowable spline backlash : Refer to CL-41,

SCL221
(at outer edge of disc) "Clutch Disc".
• Measure the depth (A) to clutch disc facing rivet heads, using a
calipers. If it exceeds the allowable wear limit, replace clutch disc.

Facing wear limit (depth to the rivet : Refer to CL-41,

head) "Clutch Disc".

JPDIB0026ZZ

Clutch Cover
• Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or breakage. If wear or breakage is found, replace clutch cover.
NOTE:
• Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet with a hammer.
• Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down.
• If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact surface,
repair the surface with sandpaper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace clutch cover.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Clutch Cover
Check diaphragm spring lever claws for unevenness with the lever
still on the vehicle. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust lever height,
using the diaphragm adjusting wrench (A) (SST: ST20050240).

Tolerance for diaphragm spring : Refer to CL-42,

lever unevenness "Clutch Cover".

JPDIB0160ZZ

R9M

CL-34
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
R9M : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010752997

JSDIA6096GB

G
Flywheel Clutch disc Clutch cover
Input shaft

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.

R9M : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010752998

CAUTION:
• Never reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Because CSC slides back to the original position J
every time when removing transaxle assembly. At this timing, dust on the sliding parts may damage
a seal of CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-30, "Removal and Installation".
• Never bring any grease to the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface and flywheel surface.
• Never clean clutch disc using solvent. K

REMOVAL
1. Remove transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-122, "Removal and Installation". L
2. Lock the flywheel using the flywheel locking tool (A) [SST: —
(Mot.1431)].
3. Remove clutch cover and clutch disc according to the following M
procedure.
NOTE:
These instructions must be respected to prevent twisting the
clutch cover. N
a. Remove three clutch cover mounting bolts at 120° intervals.
O
JSDIA6085ZZ

CL-35
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b. Replace these three bolts to the bolts of the tool kit (A)
[SST: — (Emb.1761)].
c. Place the three spacers of the tool kit [SST: — (Emb.1761)]
in contact with the nuts.
d. Gradually remove the remaining bolts.
e. Unscrew and gradually remove by quarter turns the three nuts of
the tool kit [SST: — (Emb.1761)] one by one.
f. Remove clutch cover and clutch disc.
CAUTION:
Never drop clutch disc. JSDIA6086ZZ
g. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to CL-39, "R9M :
Inspection".
INSTALLATION
In Case of Clutch Cover Reused:
NOTE:
The automatic compensation must be repositioned at its first point.
1. Clean clutch disc and input shaft splines to remove grease and powder arisen from abrasion.
2. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and input shaft
splines area . For recommended grease, refer to CL-35, "R9M
: Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply grease to the points specified. Otherwise,
noise, poor disengagement, or damage to the clutch may
result. Excessive grease may cause slip or judder. And if it
adheres to seal of CSC, it cause clutch fluid leakage. Wipe
out excess grease. Wipe out any grease oozing from the
parts.
JSDIA3617ZZ

3. Place the base plate of clutch compression tool [SST: —

(Emb.1604)] in a vice jaw.

E1BIA0779ZZ

4. Install clutch cover onto the base plate then install the ball bear-
ing or bronze ring (A) and the nut (B) of clutch compression tool
[SST: — (Emb.1604)].

JSDIA6088ZZ

CL-36
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Tighten the nut (A) fully.
A

JSDIA6089ZZ

CL
6. Fit a circlip and clamp it at .

G
JSDIA6090ZZ

7. Compress the spring to reprime the automatic compensation. H

Then slacken off the nut (A) completely. (Spring is compressed.)
8. Release clutch cover.
I

JSDIA6091ZZ
K
9. Remove clutch cover from the base plate of clutch compression
tool [SST: — (Emb.1604)].
CAUTION: L
Be sure that the springs are correctly compressed.

N
E1BIA0784ZZ

10. Install clutch disc using clutch aligner (A) (commercial service O
tool), and temporarily install clutch cover.
CAUTION:
• Never drop clutch disc and clutch cover. P

JSDIA3358ZZ

CL-37
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

• Be careful with the orientation of the clutch disc.

: Engine side

JSDIA6092ZZ

11. Tighten clutch cover mounting bolts to the specified torque

evenly in the numerical order as shown in the figure.
• For tightening torque, refer to CL-35, "R9M : Exploded View".
• After installation, perform inspection. Refer to CL-39, "R9M :
Inspection".
12. Install transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-122, "Removal and
Installation".

JSDIA3045ZZ

In Case of New Clutch Cover Installation:

1. Clean clutch disc and input shaft splines to remove grease and powder arisen from abrasion.
2. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and input shaft
splines area . For recommended grease, refer to CL-35, "R9M
: Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply grease to the points specified. Otherwise,
noise, poor disengagement, or damage to the clutch may
result. Excessive grease may cause slip or judder. And if it
adheres to seal of CSC, it cause clutch fluid leakage. Wipe
out excess grease. Wipe out any grease oozing from the
parts.
JSDIA3617ZZ

3. Install clutch disc using clutch aligner (A) (commercial service

tool), and temporarily install clutch cover.
CAUTION:
• Never drop clutch disc and clutch cover.

JSDIA3358ZZ

CL-38
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Be careful with the orientation of the clutch disc.
A
: Engine side

JSDIA6092ZZ

CL
4. Tighten clutch cover mounting bolts to the specified torque
evenly in the numerical order as shown in the figure.
• For tightening torque, refer to CL-35, "R9M : Exploded View".
• After installation, perform inspection. Refer to CL-39, "R9M : E
Inspection".
5. Install transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-122, "Removal and
Installation". F

G
JSDIA3045ZZ

R9M : Inspection INFOID:0000000010752999

H
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clutch Disc
I
• Measure circumferential runout relative to clutch disc center spline.
If it is outside the specification, replace clutch disc.

Runout limit/diameter of the area to : Refer to CL-41, J

be measured "Clutch Disc".
• Measure backlash to clutch disc spline and input shaft spline at the
circumference of clutch disc. If it is outside the specification, K
replace clutch disc.

Maximum allowable spline backlash : Refer to CL-41, L

SCL221
(at outer edge of disc) "Clutch Disc".
• Measure the depth (A) to clutch disc facing rivet heads, using a
calipers. If it exceeds the allowable wear limit, replace clutch disc. M

Facing wear limit (depth to the rivet : Refer to CL-41,

head) "Clutch Disc". N

JPDIB0026ZZ
P
Clutch Cover
• Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or breakage. If wear or breakage is found, replace clutch cover.
NOTE:
• Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet with a hammer.
• Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down.
• If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact surface,
repair the surface with sandpaper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace clutch cover.

CL-39
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Clutch Cover
Check diaphragm spring lever claws for unevenness with the lever
still on the vehicle. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust lever height,
using the diaphragm adjusting wrench (A) (SST: ST20050240).

Tolerance for diaphragm spring : Refer to CL-42,

lever unevenness "Clutch Cover".

JPDIB0160ZZ

CL-40
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications INFOID:0000000010745347
B
Unit: mm (in)

Engine MR20DD R9M C

Type of clutch control Hydraulic
Facing size 230 × 155 × 3.2 239 × 170 × 3.45
Clutch disc
(Outer dia. × Inner dia. × Thickness) (9.06 × 6.10 × 0.126) (9.41 × 6.69 × 0.1358) CL
Recommended clutch fluid Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Clutch Pedal INFOID:0000000010745348

LHD MODELS
Unit: mm (in)
F
Item Standard
Clutch pedal height 193.6 – 203.6 (7.62 – 8.02)
MR20DD 111.7 (4.40) or more G
Clutch pedal height at clutch disengagement
R9M 96.0 (3.780) or more
Clutch pedal play 2 – 8 (0.08 – 0.31)
H
Between the thread end of clutch interlock switch and
0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077)
clutch pedal lever
Clearance
Between the thread end of clutch pedal position switch
0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077) I
and clutch pedal lever

RHD MODELS
Unit: mm (in) J
Item Standard
Clutch pedal height 188.5 – 198.5 (7.42 – 7.81)
K
MR20DD —
Clutch pedal height at clutch disengagement
R9M 93.4 (3.677) or more
Clutch pedal play 2 – 8 (0.08 – 0.31) L
Between the thread end of clutch interlock switch and
0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077)
clutch pedal lever
Clearance
Between the thread end of clutch pedal position switch
0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077)
M
and clutch pedal lever

Clutch Disc INFOID:0000000010745349

N
Unit: mm (in)

Item Standard
O
MR20DD 1.0 (0.039) / 220 (8.66) dia.
Runout limit/diameter of the area to be measured
R9M 1.0 (0.039) / 229 (9.02) dia.
MR20DD 0.9 (0.035) P
Maximum allowable spline backlash (at outer edge of disc)
R9M 1.0 (0.039)
MR20DD
Facing wear limit (depth to the rivet head) 0.3 (0.012)
R9M

CL-41
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutch Cover INFOID:0000000010745350

Unit: mm (in)

Item Standard
MR20DD 0.7 (0.028) or less
Tolerance for diaphragm spring lever unevenness
R9M 0.8 (0.031) or less

CL-42
ENGINE

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

SECTION CO CO

E
CONTENTS
MR20DD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 17 F

PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 RADIATOR ........................................................ 17

Exploded View .........................................................17 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 Removal and Installation .........................................17
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Inspection ................................................................20
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................... 4 COOLING FAN .................................................. 21 H
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 4 Exploded View .........................................................21
Removal and Installation .........................................21
PREPARATION ............................................ 6 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................22 I
Inspection ................................................................23
PREPARATION ................................................... 6
Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 6 WATER PUMP .................................................. 24
Lubricant or/and Sealant ........................................... 6 Exploded View .........................................................24 J
Removal and Installation .........................................24
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 7 Inspection ................................................................24
K
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 7 THERMOSTAT .................................................. 26
Engine Cooling System ............................................. 7 Exploded View .........................................................26
Engine Cooling System Schematic ........................... 9 Removal and Installation .........................................26
L
Inspection ................................................................27
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 11
WATER OUTLET .............................................. 28
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................11 Exploded View .........................................................28 M
Troubleshooting Chart ............................................. 11
Removal and Installation .........................................28
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 13 Inspection ................................................................29

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS N

ENGINE COOLANT ...........................................13
Inspection ................................................................ 13 (SDS) ............................................................ 31
Draining ................................................................... 13
Refilling ................................................................... 14
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS O
Flushing ................................................................... 15 (SDS) ................................................................. 31
Periodical Maintenance Specification ......................31
RADIATOR .........................................................16 Radiator ...................................................................31 P
Thermostat ..............................................................31
RADIATOR CAP ........................................................ 16 Water Control Valve ................................................31
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection .................................. 16 QR25DE
RADIATOR ................................................................ 16
RADIATOR : Inspection .......................................... 16
PRECAUTION .............................................. 32
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 32

CO-1
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- (SDS) .......................................................... 55
SIONER" ................................................................. 32
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 32 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 55
PREPARATION ........................................... 34 Periodical Maintenance Specification ..................... 55
PREPARATION ................................................. 34 Radiator .................................................................. 55
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 34 Thermostat .............................................................. 55
Lubricant or/and Sealant ........................................ 34 R9M

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 35 PRECAUTION ............................................ 56

DESCRIPTION ................................................... 35 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 56

Engine Cooling System .......................................... 35 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Engine Cooling System Schematic ........................ 36 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................. 56
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 37 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 56

OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS ................ 37 PREPARATION .......................................... 58

Troubleshooting Chart ........................................... 37
PREPARATION ................................................. 58
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ........................ 39 Special Service Tool ............................................... 58

ENGINE COOLANT ........................................... 39 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 59

Inspection ............................................................... 39
Draining .................................................................. 39 DESCRIPTION ................................................... 59
Refilling ................................................................... 40 Engine Cooling System ........................................... 59
Flushing .................................................................. 41 Engine Cooling System Schematic ......................... 61

RADIATOR ........................................................ 42 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 62

RADIATOR CAP ....................................................... 42 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS ................ 62
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection ................................. 42 Troubleshooting Chart ............................................ 62

RADIATOR ................................................................ 42 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 64

RADIATOR : Inspection .......................................... 42
ENGINE COOLANT ........................................... 64
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 43 Inspection ................................................................ 64
Draining ................................................................... 64
RADIATOR ........................................................ 43 Refilling ................................................................... 65
Exploded View ........................................................ 43 Flushing .................................................................. 66
Removal and Installation ........................................ 43
Inspection ............................................................... 46 RESERVOIR TANK CAP .................................. 68
Inspection ................................................................ 68
COOLING FAN .................................................. 47
Exploded View ........................................................ 47 RADIATOR ........................................................ 69
Removal and Installation ........................................ 47 Inspection ................................................................ 69
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 48
Inspection ............................................................... 49 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 70
WATER PUMP ................................................... 50 RADIATOR ........................................................ 70
Exploded View ........................................................ 50 Exploded View ........................................................ 70
Removal and Installation ........................................ 50 Removal and Installation ......................................... 71
Inspection ............................................................... 51 Inspection ................................................................ 75

THERMOSTAT AND WATER OUTLET ............ 52 COOLING FAN .................................................. 76

Exploded View ........................................................ 52 Exploded View ........................................................ 76
Removal and Installation ........................................ 52 Removal and Installation ......................................... 76
Inspection ............................................................... 53 Inspection ................................................................ 77

THERMO PLUNGER UNIT ................................ 79

Exploded View ........................................................ 79

CO-2
Removal and Installation ......................................... 79 Inspection ................................................................84
A
WATER INLET AND WATER OUTLET .............81 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Exploded View ........................................................ 81 (SDS) ............................................................ 85
Removal and Installation ......................................... 81
Inspection ................................................................ 82 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS CO
(SDS) ................................................................. 55
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 83 Periodical Maintenance Specification ......................85
Radiator ...................................................................85 C
WATER PUMP ...................................................83
Thermostat ..............................................................85
Exploded View ........................................................ 83
Removal and Installation ......................................... 83
D

CO-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MR20DD]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010782922

CO-4
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MR20DD]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
CO
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes D
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
K

CO-5
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MR20DD]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010782924

Tool name Description

Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap

PBIC1982E

Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and water outlet (front) filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)

S-NT564

Lubricant or/and Sealant INFOID:0000000010782925

Name Description Note

Three bond 1303 Cooling fan Fan moter shaft

CO-6
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MR20DD]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System INFOID:0000000010782926
CO

CVT models
C

JPBIA6908ZZ J

Electric control throttle actuator Water pump Thermostat

Water inlet Oil cooler Water control valve K
Water outlet
From radiator To CVT oil warmer To radiator
L
From CVT oil warmer From heater To heater

CO-7
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MR20DD]
M/T models

JPBIA6909ZZ

Water pump Thermostat Water inlet

Water inlet Oil cooler Water control valve
Water outlet
From radiator To radiator From heater
To heater

CO-8
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MR20DD]
Engine Cooling System Schematic INFOID:0000000010782927

A
CVT models

JPBIA6910GB J

CO-9
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MR20DD]
M/T models

JPBIA6911GB

CO-10
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MR20DD]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000010782928
CO

Symptom Check items

C
Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat and water con-
—
trol valve stuck closed
D
Dust contamination or pa-
Poor heat transfer —
Damaged fins per clogging
Physical damage E
Clogged radiator cooling Excess foreign material
tube (rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not oper- F
ate
Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rota- Fan assembly —
tion
G
Damaged fan blades
Damaged radiator shroud — — —

Cooling sys- Improper engine coolant H

— — —
tem parts mixture ratio
malfunction Poor engine coolant quality — Engine coolant viscosity —
Loose clamp I
Cooling hose
Cracked hose
Water pump Poor sealing
J
Loose
Reservoir tank cap
Poor sealing
Engine coolant leakage
O-ring for damage, deterio- K
Insufficient engine coolant ration or improper fitting
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core L
Reservoir tank Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Exhaust gas leakage into M
Overflowing reservoir tank Cylinder head gasket deteri-
cooling system
oration

CO-11
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MR20DD]
Symptom Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Driving in low gear for ex-
Abusive driving
tended time
Driving at extremely high
speed
— Overload on engine
Power train system mal-
function
Installed improper size
Except cool- —
wheels and tires
ing system
parts mal- Dragging brakes
function
Improper ignition timing
Blocked bumper —
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille Mud contamination or paper
Blocked or restricted air clogging —
flow
Blocked radiator —
Blocked condenser
Blocked air flow
Installed large fog lamp

CO-12
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [MR20DD]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782929
CO

LEVEL
• Check that the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the C
“MIN” to “MAX” when the engine is cool.

: MAX
D
: MIN

• Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary.

CAUTION: E
Refill Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent in its quality mixed with water (distilled or deminer-
alized). Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants". JPBIA0102ZZ
F
LEAKAGE
• To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system with the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) (A) and the radiator G
cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) (B).

Testing pressure: Refer to CO-31, "Radiator". H

WARNING:
Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns
may occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from I
engine cooling system.
CAUTION:
Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator dam- PBIC5121J

age. J
NOTE:
In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts. K
Draining INFOID:0000000010782930

WARNING: L
• Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns may occur from high-pressure engine
coolant escaping from radiator.
• Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pres- M
sure. Then turn it all the way.
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and then N
remove radiator cap.

: Vehicle front O
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
• When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water P
drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer to EM-61, "Setting".

JPBIA6838ZZ

3. Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.

CO-13
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [MR20DD]
• Move reservoir tank , and then remove it numerical order as
shown in the figure.

: Nut
: Pawl

JPBIA6839ZZ

4. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated,
flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-15, "Flushing".
Refilling INFOID:0000000010782931

CAUTION:
• Do not put additive such as waterleak preventive, since it may cause cooling waterway clogging.
• When refilling use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality
mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants".
1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.

Radiator drain plug : Refer to CO-17, "Exploded View".

• If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-107, "Disas-
sembly and Assembly".
2. Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.
3. Fill radiator to specified level.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments
(alternator etc.).
• Pour coolant slowly of less than 2 (1-3/4 Imp qt) a
minute to allow air in system to escape.

Engine coolant capacity

(With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
Refer to CO-31, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".
JPBIA0412ZZ

4. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.

: MAX
: MIN

Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity

(At “MAX” level)
Refer to CO-31, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".

JPBIA0102ZZ

5. Install radiator cap.

6. Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at
3,000 rpm.
• Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.
CAUTION:
Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.

CO-14
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [MR20DD]
7. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).
• Cool down using fan to reduce the time. A
• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments (alternator etc.).
CO
8. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no longer
drops.
C
10. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.
11. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”. D
• Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.
12. Repeat step 11 three times.
13. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 5 through 8 until reservoir tank level no E
longer drops.
Flushing INFOID:0000000010782932

F
1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring. G

Radiator drain plug : Refer to CO-17, "Exploded View".

• If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-107, "Disas- H
sembly and Assembly".
2. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.
3. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
4. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
6. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-13, "Draining". J
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.

CO-15
RADIATOR
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [MR20DD]
RADIATOR
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection INFOID:0000000010782933

• Check valve seat of radiator cap.

- Check that valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the
plunger cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the top.
- Check that valve seat has no soil and damage.
- Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator
cap negative-pressure valve.
- Check that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing
conditions of negative-pressure valve.

JPBIA1961ZZ

• Check radiator cap relief pressure.

Standard and Limit : Refer to CO-31, "Radiator".

- When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commer-
cial service tool) (A) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commer-
cial service tool) (B), apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface.

PBIC5122J

• Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.

CAUTION:
When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue
or foreign material.
RADIATOR
RADIATOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000010782934

Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan
assembly and horns. Then tape harness and harness connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (4.9 bar, 5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.81 in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.

CO-16
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

RADIATOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782935
CO

REMOVAL
C

K
JSBIA4311GB

Reservoir tank cap Reservoir tank Reservoir tank hose L

Clip Mounting bracket Mounting rubber (upper)
Radiator cap Side seal Side seal
M
Radiator Mounting rubber (lower) O-ring
Drain plug Side seal Clamp
Radiator hose (lower) Clamp Radiator hose (upper) N
Cooling fan assembly
To water outlet To water inlet
O
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

P
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782936

REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns may occur from high-pressure engine
coolant escaping from radiator.

CO-17
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
• Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pres-
sure. Then turn it all the way.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.
3. Remove radiator hose (lower) from radiator.
4. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-31, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove battery and battery bracket. Refer to PG-140, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Exploded View".
6. Remove radiator hose (upper) from radiator.
CAUTION:
Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
7. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-21, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove condenser from radiator , and move it frontward.

: Mount

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage condenser core.
• Minimize the moving distance of condenser to prevent
load to air conditioner piping.

JPBIA6840ZZ

9. Remove radiator from the clearance between condenser

and upper radiator core support.

: Radiator moving direction

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage radiator core.
• Minimize the moving distance of condenser to prevent
load to air conditioner piping.

JPBIA6841ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Radiator hose
CAUTION:
• Use genuine mounting bolts for the cooling fan assembly and strictly observe the tightening torque.
(Breakage prevention for radiator)
NOTE:
• Insert the radiator hose all the way to the stopper or by 33 mm (1.30 in) (hose without a stopper).

CO-18
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]

JPBIA4294GB

D
Unit: mm (in)
Radiator side Engine side

• For the orientation of the hose clamp pawl, refer to the figure. E

Position of hose clamp*

Radiator hose Hose end Paint mark

JPCIA0366ZZ

: Vehicle upper H

I
Radiator side Upper

J
JPCIA0362ZZ
Radiator hose (upper)
K

Engine side Upper

JPCIA0363ZZ
M

N
Radiator side Lower

O
JSBIA4312ZZ
Radiator hose (lower)

Engine side Front

JPCIA0365ZZ

*Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.

CO-19
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
• The angle created by the hose clamp pawl and the specified line
must be within ±30° as shown in the figure.

JPBIA4295ZZ

• To install hose clamps , check that the dimension (A) from the
hose end to the hose clamp is within the reference value.

3 - 5 mm
Dimension “A”
0.12 - 0.20 in

JPBIA3527ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000010782937

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-13, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.

CO-20
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
COOLING FAN
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782938

J
JSBIA4999GB

Fan motor (RH) Fan motor (LH) Fan shroud K

Cooling fan (LH) Cooling fan (RH)
Apply on fan motor shaft
L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Apply high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent.

M
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782939

REMOVAL N
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Draining".
CAUTION: O
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.
3. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-30, "Exploded View". P
4. Remove radiator hose (upper) from radiator. Refer to CO-17, "Exploded View".
5. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
6. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-31, "Exploded View".
7. Remove hood lock bell crank and hood lock assembly. Refer to folloing table:

CO-21
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]

TYPE Reference
1 DLK-297, "Exploded View"
2 DLK-605, "Exploded View"
3 DLK-768, "Exploded View"
4 DLK-910, "Exploded View"
How to select vehicle type: refer to DLK-22, "Information".
8. Disconnect harness connector from fan motor (RH and LH), and move harness to aside.
9. Remove mounting bolts and clips of mounting bracket .

JPBIA6842ZZ

10. Remove radiator core support upper. Refer to folloing table:

TYPE Reference
2 DLK-572, "MR20DD : Exploded View"
4 DLK-876, "MR20DD : Exploded View"
How to select vehicle type: refer to DLK-22, "Information".
11. Remove mounting bracket.
12. Remove cooling fan assembly according to the following instructions:
a. Lift cooling fan assembly and disconnect the lower mount.
b. Move cooling fan assembly to rightward of vehicle ( 1) and
lift ( 2) the right side to remove it.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core when
removing.

JPBIA6843ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Only use genuine parts for fan shroud mounting bolt and observe the specified torque (to prevent
radiator from being damaged).
NOTE:
Cooling fans are controlled by ECM. For details. Refer to EC-57, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System
Description".
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010782940

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove cooling fan mounting nuts, and then remove the cooling fans (RH and LH).
2. Remove fan motors (RH and LH).

CO-22
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. A
CAUTION:
RH and LH cooling fans are different. Be careful not to misassemble them.
• Install each fan in the following position. CO

Right side : 9 blades

Left side : 7 blades C
• Secure the harness to the fan shroud to prevent the fan rotation area from being loose.
• Apply high thread locking sealant on fan motor shaft.
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782941
D

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

E
Cooling Fan
Inspect cooling fan for crack or unusual bend.
• If anything is found, replace cooling fan.
F

CO-23
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
WATER PUMP
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782942

JSBIA1603GB

Pulley Water pump Gasket

: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782943

REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Perform this step when the engine is cold.
3. Remove front wheel (RH). Refer to WT-61, "Exploded View".
4. Remove front fillet molding (RH). Refer to EXT-32, "FRONT FILLET MOLDING : Removal and Installa-
tion".
5. Remove front fender protector. Refer ro EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove drive belts. Refer to EM-22, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove water pump.
• Engine coolant leakage from cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION:
• Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782944

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

CO-24
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
• Check visually that there is no significant dirt or rusting on water
pump body and vane . A
• Check that there is no looseness in vane shaft, and that it turns
smoothly when rotated by hand.
• Replace water pump, if necessary. CO

PBIC3313J

D
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-13, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant. E

CO-25
THERMOSTAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
THERMOSTAT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782945

JSBIA4314GB

Thermostat housing Gasket Rubber ring

Thermostat Water inlet
To oil cooler To radiator
: Engine front
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782946

REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
3. Disconnect radiator hose (lower) from water inlet. Refer to CO-17, "Exploded View".
4. Remove water inlet and thermostat.
• Engine coolant leakage from cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
5. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-140, "EXCEPT FOR R9M :
Exploded View".
6. Remove thermostat housing with the following procedure:
a. Remove water pump. Refer to CO-24, "Exploded View".
b. Remove alternator. Refer to CHG-44, "MR20DD : Exploded View".
c. Remove A/C compressor with A/C piping connected, and temporarily fasten it on vehicle with a rope.
Refer to HA-76, "Exploded View".

CO-26
THERMOSTAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
d. Remove water hoses. Refer to LU-13, "Exploded View".
e. Remove thermostat housing. A

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CO
Thermostat
• Install thermostat with making rubber ring groove fit to thermo-
stat flange with the whole circumference. C

JPBIA5191ZZ

F
• Install thermostat with jiggle valve facing upwards.

: Thermostat housing G

I
PBIC3548J

Inspection INFOID:0000000010782947
J

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Thermostat K
• Place a thread so that it is caught in the valves of thermostat .
Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring.
• The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the L
valve opens and falls from the thread.
• Continue heating. Check the full open valve lift amount.
• After checking the maximum valve lift amount, lower the water
temperature and check the valve closing temperature. M

Standard: Refer to CO-31, "Thermostat".

• If out of the standard, replace thermostat. N
PBIC3314J

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the O
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-13, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
P

CO-27
WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
WATER OUTLET
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782948

JPBIA6912GB

Water control valve Rubber ring Water outlet

Engine coolant temperature sensor Clamp Water hose
Water hose
To radiator To CVT oil warmer (CVT models) To heater
To heater
: Engine front
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782949

REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.
2. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-30, "Exploded View".
3. Remove battery. Refer to PG-140, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Exploded View".
4. Remove battery tray. Refer to PG-146, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Exploded View".
5. Disconnect radiator hose (upper) form water outlet. Refer to CO-17, "Exploded View".
6. Disconnect harness connector from engine coolant temperature sensor.

CO-28
WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]
7. Remove heater hoses and water hose (CVT models).
A
: Water outlet

JPBIA6844ZZ

D
8. Remove water outlet.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. E
Water Control Valve
• Install water control valve with making rubber ring groove fit to
water control valve flange with the whole circumference. F

JPBIA5193ZZ
I
• Install water control valve with the arrow facing up and the
frame center part facing upwards.
J
: Water outlet

L
JPBIA5194ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000010782950 M

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Water Control Valve N
• Place a thread so that it is caught in the valves of water control
valve . Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat
while stirring. O
• The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the
valve opens and falls from the thread.
• Continue heating. Check the continuous valve lifting toward maxi- P
mum valve lift.
NOTE:
The maximum valve lift amount standard temperature for water
control valve is the reference value.
• After checking the maximum valve lift amount, lower the water PBIC3314J
temperature and check the valve closing temperature.

CO-29
WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MR20DD]

Standard: Refer to CO-31, "Water Control Valve".

• If out of the standard, replace water control valve.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-13, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant.

CO-30
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [MR20DD]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000010782951
CO

ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)

Unit: (Imp qt) C
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) CVT models 7.7 (6-6/8)
M/T models 7.2 (6-3/8)
Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level) 0.85 (6/8) D

Radiator INFOID:0000000010782952

E
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

Standard 90 (0.9, 0.9, 13.1)

Cap relief pressure
Lower limit 60 (0.6, 0.6, 8.7) F
Leakage testing pressure 157 (1.6, 1.6, 22.8)

Thermostat INFOID:0000000010782953 G

Standard

Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F) H

Maximum valve lift 8.0 mm/95°C (0.315 in/203°F)
Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F)
I
Water Control Valve INFOID:0000000010782954

Standard J
Valve opening temperature 93.5 - 96.5°C (200 - 206°F)
Maximum valve lift 8.0 mm/108°C (0.315 in/226°F)
K
Valve closing temperature 90°C (194°F)

CO-31
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [QR25DE]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010782955

CO-32
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [QR25DE]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
CO
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes D
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
K

CO-33
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [QR25DE]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010782957

Tool name Description

Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap

PBIC1982E

Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)

S-NT564

Lubricant or/and Sealant INFOID:0000000010782958

Name Description Note

Three bond 1303 Cooling fan Fan moter shaft

CO-34
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [QR25DE]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System INFOID:0000000010782959
CO

JPBIA6488GB J

Cylinder head Cylinder block Water pump

Thermostat Water inlet Radiator K
Thermostat housing (Cylinder block) Water outlet
To electric throttle control actuator To oil cooler To CVT oil warmer
L
To heater From heater From electric throttle control actuator
From oil cooler From CVT oil warmer

CO-35
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [QR25DE]
Engine Cooling System Schematic INFOID:0000000010782960

JPBIA6489GB

CO-36
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [QR25DE]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000010782961
CO

Symptom Check items

C
Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat and water con-
—
trol valve stuck closed
D
Dust contamination or pa-
Poor heat transfer —
Damaged radiator fins per clogging
Physical damage E
Clogged radiator cooling Excess foreign material
tube (rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not oper- F
ate
Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rota- Fan assembly —
tion
G
Damaged fan blades
Damaged radiator shroud — — —

Cooling sys- Improper engine coolant H

— — —
tem parts mixture ratio
malfunction Poor engine coolant quality — Engine coolant density —
Loose clamp I
Cooling hose
Cracked hose
Water pump Poor sealing
J
Loose
Radiator cap
Poor sealing
Engine coolant leakage
O-ring for damage, deterio- K
Insufficient engine coolant ration or improper fitting
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core L
Reservoir tank Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Exhaust gas leaks into cool- M
Overflowing reservoir tank Cylinder head gasket deteri-
ing system
oration

CO-37
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [QR25DE]
Symptom Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Driving in low gear for ex-
Abusive driving
tended time
Driving at extremely high
speed
— Overload on engine
Powertrain system malfunc-
tion
Installed improper size
Except cool- —
wheels and tires
ing system
parts mal- Dragging brakes
function
Improper ignition timing
Blocked bumper —
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille Mud contamination or paper
Blocked or restricted air clogging —
flow
Blocked radiator —
Blocked condenser
Blocked air flow
Installed large fog lamp

CO-38
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [QR25DE]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782962
CO

LEVEL
• Check that the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the C
“MIN” to “MAX” when the engine is cool.

: MAX
D
: MIN

• Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary.

CAUTION: E
Refill Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent in its quality mixed with water (distilled or deminer-
alized). Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants". JPBIA0102ZZ
F
LEAKAGE
• To check for leaks, apply pressure to the cooling system with the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) (A) and the radiator G
cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) (B).

Testing pressure: Refer to CO-55, "Radiator". H

age. J
NOTE:
In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts. K
Draining INFOID:0000000010782963

: Vehicle front O
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
• When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water P
drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer to EM-207, "Setting".

JPBIA6838ZZ

3. Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.

CO-39
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [QR25DE]
• Move reservoir tank , and then remove it numerical order as
shown in the figure.

: Nut
: Pawl

JPBIA6839ZZ

4. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated,
flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-41, "Flushing".
Refilling INFOID:0000000010782964

Radiator drain plug : Refer to CO-43, "Exploded View".

• If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-248, "Disas-
sembly and Assembly".
2. Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.
3. Fill radiator to specified level.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments
(alternator etc.).
• Pour coolant slowly of less than 2 (1-3/4 Imp qt) a
minute to allow air in system to escape.

Engine coolant capacity

(With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
Refer to CO-55, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".
JPBIA0412ZZ

4. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.

: MAX
: MIN

Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity

(At “MAX” level)
Refer to CO-55, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".

JPBIA0102ZZ

5. Install radiator cap.

CO-40
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [QR25DE]
7. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).
• Cool down using fan to reduce the time. A
• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments (alternator etc.).
CO
8. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no longer
drops.
C
10. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.
11. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”. D
• Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.
12. Repeat step 11 three times.
13. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 5 through 8 until reservoir tank level no E
longer drops.
Flushing INFOID:0000000010782965

F
1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring. G

Radiator drain plug : Refer to CO-43, "Exploded View".

• If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-248, "Disas- H
sembly and Assembly".
2. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.
3. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
4. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
6. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-39, "Draining". J
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.

CO-41
RADIATOR
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [QR25DE]
RADIATOR
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection INFOID:0000000010782966

• Check valve seat of radiator cap.

JPBIA1961ZZ

• Check radiator cap relief pressure.

Standard and Limit : Refer to CO-55, "Radiator".

PBIC5122J

• Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.

CAUTION:
When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue
or foreign material.
RADIATOR
RADIATOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000010782967

Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan
assembly and horns. Then tape harness and harness connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (4.9 bar, 5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.8 in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.

CO-42
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

RADIATOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782968
CO

REMOVAL
C

K
JSBIA4998GB

Reservoir tank cap Reservoir tank Reservoir tank hose L

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

P
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782969

REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns may occur from high-pressure engine
coolant escaping from radiator.

CO-43
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
• Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pres-
sure. Then turn it all the way.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-39, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.
3. Remove radiator hose (lower) from radiator.
4. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-175, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove battery and battery bracket. Refer to PG-140, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Exploded View".
6. Remove radiator hose (upper) from radiator.
CAUTION:
Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
7. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-47, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove condenser from radiator , and move it frontward.

: Mount

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage condenser core.
• Minimize the moving distance of condenser to prevent
load to air conditioner piping.

JPBIA6840ZZ

9. Remove radiator from the clearance between condenser

and upper radiator core support.

: Radiator moving direction

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage radiator core.
• Minimize the moving distance of condenser to prevent
load to air conditioner piping.

JPBIA6841ZZ

CO-44
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]

JPBIA4294GB

D
Unit: mm (in)
Radiator side Engine side

• For the orientation of the hose clamp pawl, refer to the figure. E

Position of hose clamp*

Radiator hose Hose end Paint mark

JPCIA0366ZZ

: Vehicle upper H

I
Radiator side Upper

J
JPCIA0362ZZ
Radiator hose (upper)
K

Engine side Upper

JPCIA0363ZZ
M

N
Radiator side Lower

O
JSBIA4312ZZ
Radiator hose (lower)

Engine side Front

JPCIA0365ZZ

*Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.

CO-45
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
• The angle created by the hose clamp pawl and the specified line
must be within ±30° as shown in the figure.

JPBIA4295ZZ

• To install hose clamps , check that the dimension (A) from the
hose end to the hose clamp is within the reference value.

3 - 5 mm
Dimension “A”
0.12 - 0.20 in

JPBIA3527ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000010782970

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-39, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.

CO-46
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
COOLING FAN
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782971

J
JSBIA4999GB

Fan motor (RH) Fan motor (LH) Fan shroud K

Cooling fan (LH) Cooling fan (RH)
Apply on fan motor shaft
L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Apply high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent.

M
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782972

REMOVAL N
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-39, "Draining".
CAUTION: O
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.
3. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-174, "Exploded View". P
4. Remove radiator hose (upper) from radiator. Refer to CO-43, "Exploded View".
5. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
6. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-31, "Exploded View".
7. Remove hood lock bell crank and hood lock assembly. Refer to folloing table:

CO-47
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]

TYPE Reference
2 DLK-605, "Exploded View"
4 DLK-910, "Exploded View"
How to select vehicle type: refer to DLK-22, "Information".
8. Disconnect harness connector from fan motor (RH and LH), and move harness to aside.
9. Remove mounting bolts and clips of mounting bracket .

JPBIA6842ZZ

10. Remove radiator core support upper. Refer to folloing table:

JPBIA6843ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Only use genuine parts for fan shroud mounting bolt and observe the specified torque (to prevent
radiator from being damaged).
NOTE:
Cooling fans are controlled by ECM. For details. Refer to EC-472, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System
Description".
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000010782973

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove cooling fan mounting nuts, and then remove the cooling fans (RH and LH).
2. Remove fan motors (RH and LH).
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

CO-48
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
CAUTION:
RH and LH cooling fans are different. Be careful not to misassemble them. A
• Install each fan in the following position.

Right side : 9 blades CO

Left side : 7 blades
• Secure the harness to the fan shroud to prevent the fan rotation area from being loose.
• Apply high thread locking sealant on fan motor shaft. C
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782974

D
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Cooling Fan
Inspect cooling fan for crack or unusual bend. E
• If anything is found, replace cooling fan.

CO-49
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
WATER PUMP
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782975

JSBIA5000GB

O-ring Water pipe Water pump housing

Gasket Water pump Gasket
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782976

REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-39, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
3. Remove the following parts.
• Drive belt: Refer to EM-166, "Removal and Installation".
• Alternator: Refer to CHG-46, "QR25DE : Exploded View".
4. Remove water pump.
• Engine coolant leaks from cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION:
• Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
5. Remove water pump housing with the following procedure:
a. Remove oil level gauge and oil level gauge guide. Refer to EM-247, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Plug the oil level gauge guide opening to prevent oil pan from entering foreign materials.
b. Remove exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-180, "Exploded View".

CO-50
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
c. Remove water pump housing.
6. Remove water pipe. A

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring. CO
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• When inserting water pipe end into cylinder block, apply a neutral detergent to O-ring. Then insert it immedi-
ately. C
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782977

D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check visually that there is no significant dirt or rusting on water
pump body and vane.
• Check that there is no looseness in vane shaft, and that it turns E
smoothly when rotated by hand.
• Replace water pump, if necessary.
F

G
KBIA0155E

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION H

• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-39, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up engine. Check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
I

CO-51
THERMOSTAT AND WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
THERMOSTAT AND WATER OUTLET
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782978

JSBIA5001GB

Thermostat O-ring Water inlet

O-ring Heater pipe Clamp
Water hose water outlet Clamp
Engine coolant temperature sen-
Water hose Water hose
sor
To radiator To CVT oil warmer To oil cooler
To heater
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

, : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782979

REMOVAL
Thermostat
1. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-174, "Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-39, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
3. Remove exhaust manifold cover. Refer to EM-180, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect radiator hose (lower) at water inlet side. Refer to CO-43, "Exploded View".
5. Remove water inlet and thermostat.
Water Outlet

CO-52
THERMOSTAT AND WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
1. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-174, "Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-39, "Draining". A
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
3. Remove battery and battery bracket. Refer to PG-140, "EXCEPT FOR R9M : Exploded View". CO
4. Disconnect radiator hose (upper) at water outlet side.
5. Disconnect harness connector from engine coolant temperature sensor.
6. Disconnect water hoses. C
7. Remove heater pipe and heater hose.
8. Remove water outlet.
D
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Thermostat E
• Install thermostat with making rubber ring groove fit to thermo-
stat flange with the whole circumference.
F

H
JPBIA4456ZZ

• Install thermostat with jiggle valve facing upwards. (The position I

deviation may be within the range of 20 degrees as shown in the
figure.)
J
: Up

JPBIA6501ZZ
L

Heater Pipe Installation

Apply a neutral detergent to O-ring, then quickly insert the insertion part of heater pipe into cylinder block.
M
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782980

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL N

• Place a thread so that it is caught in the valves of thermostat .
Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring.
• The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the O
valve opens and falls from the thread.
• Continue heating. Check the maximum valve lift amount.
• After checking the maximum valve lift amount, lower the water
temperature and check the valve closing temperature. P

Standard
Thermostat : Refer to CO-55, "Thermostat".
PBIC3314J
• If out of the standard, replace thermostat.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

CO-53
THERMOSTAT AND WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [QR25DE]
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-39, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up engine. Check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant.

CO-54
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000010782981
CO

ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)

Unit: (lmp qt) C
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) 8.2 (7-2/8)
Reservoir tank 0.85 (6/8)
D
Radiator INFOID:0000000010782982

Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi) E

Standard 90 (0.9, 0.9, 13.1)
Cap relief pressure
Lower limit 60 (0.6, 0.6, 8.7)
Leakage testing pressure 157 (1.6, 1.6, 22.8) F

Thermostat INFOID:0000000010782983

G
Standard
Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F)
Maximum valve lift 8.0 mm/95°C (0.315 in/203°F) H
Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F)

CO-55
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [R9M]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010783281

CO-56
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [R9M]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
CO
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes D
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
K

CO-57
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [R9M]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000010969419

NISSAN tool number

(RENAULT too number) Description
Tool name
WS39930000 Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
( — )
Tube pressure

S-NT052

— Leak checking
(M.S. 554-07) Checking reservoir tank cap
Tester

MLIA0012E

— Adapting tester to reservoir tank

(M.S. 554-01)
Reservoir tank cap tester adapter A

MLIA0013E

— Adapting tester to reservoir tank cap

(M.S. 554-06)
Reservoir tank cap tester adapter B

MLIA0014E

NI. 205 Refilling engine cooling system

—
Coolant refill tool

LMA053

CO-58
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [R9M]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System INFOID:0000000010782988
CO

M/T models
C

E1BIA1150ZZ J

Reservoir tank Water pump Air relief plug

EGR cooler Heater Thermoplunger K
Water inlet (Thermostat housing) Air relief plug Radiator
Water outlet (With engine coolant by-
Oil cooler L
pass valve)

CO-59
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [R9M]
CVT models

JPBIA6987ZZ

Reservoir tank Water pump Air relief plug

EGR cooler Heater Thermoplunger
Water inlet (Thermostat housing) Air relief plug CVT oil warmer
Water outlet (With engine coolant by-
Radiator Oil cooler
pass valve)

CO-60
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [R9M]
Engine Cooling System Schematic INFOID:0000000010782989

A
M/T models

JPBIA6917GB
I
CVT models

JPBIA6918GB

CO-61
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [R9M]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000010782990

Symptom Check items

Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat and water con-
—
trol valve stuck closed
Dust contamination or pa-
Poor heat transfer —
Damaged radiator fins per clogging
Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling Excess foreign material
tube (rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not oper-
ate
Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rota- Fan assembly —
tion
Damaged fan blades
Damaged radiator shroud — — —

Cooling sys- Improper engine coolant

— — —
tem parts mixture ratio
malfunction Poor engine coolant quality — Engine coolant density —
Loose clamp
Cooling hose
Cracked hose
Water pump Poor sealing
Loose
Radiator cap
Poor sealing
Engine coolant leakage
O-ring for damage, deterio-
Insufficient engine coolant ration or improper fitting
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Exhaust gas leaks into cool-
Overflowing reservoir tank Cylinder head gasket deteri-
ing system
oration

CO-62
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [R9M]
Symptom Check items
A
High engine rpm under no
load
Driving in low gear for ex-
Abusive driving CO
tended time
Driving at extremely high
speed
— Overload on engine C
Powertrain system malfunc-
tion
Installed improper size
Except cool- —
wheels and tires D
ing system
parts mal- Dragging brakes
function
Improper ignition timing
E
Blocked bumper —
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille Mud contamination or paper F
Blocked or restricted air clogging —
flow
Blocked radiator —
Blocked condenser G
Blocked air flow
Installed large fog lamp

CO-63
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [R9M]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection INFOID:0000000010969777

LEVEL
• Check if the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the “MIN”
to “MAX” when the engine is cool.
• Adjust the engine coolant level as necessary.
CAUTION:
Refill Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent in its quality mixed with water (distilled or deminer-
alized). Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.
WARNING:
Never remove reservoir tank cap when engine is hot. Serious
burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping E1BIA1145ZZ
from reservoir tank.
LEAKAGE
• To check for leakage, fit the adapter to the reservoir tank, and
then connect it to the reservoir tank cap tester [SST: — (M.S.554-
07)] as shown.

Testing pressure: Refer to CO-85, "Radiator".

WARNING:
Never remove reservoir tank cap when engine is hot. Serious
burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escap-
ing from reservoir tank.
CAUTION:
Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator dam- E1BIA1148ZZ

age.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
Draining INFOID:0000000010969778

WARNING:
• Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns may occur from high-pressure engine
coolant escaping from radiator.
• Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pres-
sure. Then turn it all the way.
1. Remove engine under cover.
2. Remove reservoir tank cap.
3. Open radiator drain plug of radiator.

: Vehicle front

CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
4. Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant
and clean reservoir tank before installing. Refer to CO-70,
"Exploded View".
5. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust,
corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated, flush the engine JPBIA6988ZZ
cooling system. Refer to CO-66, "Flushing".

CO-64
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [R9M]
Refilling INFOID:0000000010969779

A
CAUTION:
• Never put additive such as waterleak preventive, since it may cause cooling waterway clogging.
• When refilling use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality CO
mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to MA-23, "Fluids and Lubricants".
1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug .
CAUTION:
C
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.

: Vehicle front
D

JPBIA6988ZZ

2. Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened. F

3. Open radiator air relief plug .

: Vehicle front
G

I
JPBIA6919ZZ

4. Disconnect heater hose at position ( ) in the figure. J

: Vehicle front
K
• Enhance heater hose as high as possible.

JPBIA4208ZZ
M

5. Open air relief plug .

N
: Vehicle front

E1BIA1151ZZ

6. Fill reservoir tank with engine coolant.

CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments (alternator etc.).
CO-65
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [R9M]
• Pour coolant slowly of less than 3 (2-5/8 Imp qt) per minute to allow air in system to escape.
•
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
Refer to CO-85, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".

7. When engine coolant spill from radiator air relief plug with continuous flow, close air relief plug and con-
tinue filling reservoir tank.
8. When engine coolant spill from air relief plug with continuous flow, close air relief plug and continue filling
reservoir tank.
9. When engine coolant spill from heater hose with continuous
flow, connect heater hose and continue filling reservoir tank until
reach “MAX” level

: MAX
: MIN

Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level)

Refer to CO-85, "Periodical Maintenance Specifica-
tion". JPBIA0102ZZ

10.

11. Install radiator cap.

12. Warm up engine at 3000 rpm until thermostat is opened.
• Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.
CAUTION:
Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.
13. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).
• Cool down using fan to reduce the time.
• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments (alternator etc.).
14. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.
15. Repeat steps 11 through 14 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no
longer drops.
16. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.
17. Warm up the engine, and check for flowing noise while repeat at least three time slow acceleration from
idle up to 3,000 rpm.
18. If flowing noise is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 11 through 17 until flowing noise
is no longer heard.
Flushing INFOID:0000000010969780

1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug .

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.

: Vehicle front

JPBIA6988ZZ

CO-66
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [R9M]
2. Open radiator air relief plug .
A
: Vehicle front

JPBIA6919ZZ

D
3. Disconnect heater hose at position ( ) in the figure.

: Vehicle front
E
• Enhance heater as high as possible.

G
JPBIA4208ZZ

4. Open air relief plug .

H
: Vehicle front

E1BIA1151ZZ
K
5. Fill reservoir tank with water.
• When engine coolant over flows opened radiator air relief plug, close air relief plug, and continue filling
the engine coolant. L
• When engine coolant over flows opened water outlet air relief plug, close air relief plug, and continue fill-
ing the engine coolant.
• When engine coolant over flows disconnected heater hose, connect heater hose, and continue filling the
engine coolant. M
6. Install radiator cap.
7. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
8. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. N
9. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
10. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-64, "Draining".
O
11. Repeat steps 1 through 10 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.

CO-67
RESERVOIR TANK CAP
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [R9M]
RESERVOIR TANK CAP
Inspection INFOID:0000000010969781

• Fit the adapter to the reservoir tank cap tester [SST: — (M.S. 554-
07)] (A) as shown.
• When connecting the reservoir tank cap to the reservoir tank cap
tester, apply water or LLC to the reservoir tank cap seal part.
• Check reservoir tank cap relief pressure.

Standard: Refer to CO-85, "Radiator".

• Replace the reservoir tank cap if the engine coolant passes
through it, or if any fur signs is detected.
CAUTION:
When installing reservoir tank cap, thoroughly wipe out the res- E1BIA0057ZZ

ervoir tank filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign

material.

CO-68
RADIATOR
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [R9M]
RADIATOR
A
Inspection INFOID:0000000010969782

Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. CO

CAUTION:
• Never bend or damage the radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator fan, radia-
tor shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and connectors to prevent water from entering. C
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downwards.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surface once per minute.
D
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downwards.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (4.9 bar 5 kg/cm2, 71psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 E
in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surface once per minute until no water sprays out.
F

CO-69
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

RADIATOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010782997

REMOVAL
M/T models

JPBIA6920GB

Reservoir tank cap Reservoir tank Clamp

Reservoir tank hose Clamp Reservoir tank hose
Reservoir tank tube Reservoir tank hose Connector
Clamp Radiator hose (upper) Radiator
Mounting rubber (upper) Mounting bracket O-ring
Air relief plug Mounting rubber (lower) O-ring
Drain plug Clamp Radiator hose (lower)
Cooling fan assembly
To water inlet To water connector To water outlet
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

CO-70
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
CVT models
A

I
JPBIA6921GB

Reservoir tank cap Reservoir tank Clamp

J
Reservoir tank hose Clamp Reservoir tank hose
Reservoir tank tube Reservoir tank hose Connector
Clamp Radiator hose (upper) Radiator K
Mounting rubber (upper) Mounting bracket O-ring
Air relief plug Mounting rubber (lower) O-ring
L
Drain plug Clamp Radiator hose (lower)
Connector Radiator hose (lower) Clamp
Water hose Water hose Cooling fan assembly M
To water inlet To water connector To water outlet
To CVT oil warmer
N
: Always replace after every disassembly.

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

O
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010782998

REMOVAL P
WARNING:
• Never remove reservoir tank cap when engine is hot. Serious burns may occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from cooling system.
• Wrap a thick cloth around the reservoir tank cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up
pressure. Then turn it all the way.
NOTE:

CO-71
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-64, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.
3. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-308, "Exploded View".
4. Remove front bumper. Refer to EXT-14, "Exploded View".
5. Remove headlamp (RH). Refer to EXL-190, "Exploded View" (LED headlamp models) or EXL-375,
"Exploded View" (halogen headlamp models).
6. Remove charge air cooler. Refer to EM-310, "Exploded View".
7. Remove radiator hose (lower) from radiator.
8. Disconnect harness connectors from cooling fan assembly, and move harness aside.
9. Remove condenser from radiator according to the follow-
ing instructions:

: Vehicle front

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage condenser core.
• Minimize the moving distance of condenser to prevent
load to air conditioner piping.
a. Remove bolt .
b. Unlock pawl , and move condenser to rightward of vehicle JSBIA5313ZZ

( 1).
c. Move condenser to forward of vehicle ( 2).
10. Remove radiator and cooling fan assembly from the clear-
ance between condenser and upper radiator core support .

: Vehicle front
: Radiator moving direction

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage radiator core.
• Minimize the moving distance of condenser to prevent
load to air conditioner piping.
11. Remove cooling fan assembly. JSBIA5314ZZ

REPAIR
If the pin of radiator inserted to mounting rubber breaks, repair according to the following procedure.
1. Cut the broken pin at the base.

: Radiator
: Cut line

JPBIA6929ZZ

CO-72
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
2. Make a hole in the position that cut the pin.
A
: Radiator

Hole's diameter : φ 6 mm (0.24 in) CO

JPBIA6929ZZ

D
3. Install pin .

: Radiator E
: Nut

G
JPBIA6931ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. H
Radiator hose
CAUTION:
• Use genuine mounting bolts for the cooling fan assembly and strictly observe the tightening torque. I
(Breakage prevention for radiator)
NOTE:
• Insert the radiator hose all the way to the stopper or by 33 mm (1.30 in) (hose without a stopper). J

M
JPBIA4294GB

Unit: mm (in)
N
Radiator side Engine side

• For the orientation of the hose clamp pawl, refer to the figure.
O

CO-73
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]

Position of hose clamp*

Radiator hose Hose end Paint mark

JPCIA0366ZZ

: Vehicle upper

Radiator side Upper

JPCIA0362ZZ
Radiator hose (upper)

Engine side Upper

JPBIA6939ZZ

Radiator side Upper

JPCIA0362ZZ
Radiator hose (lower)

Engine side Front

JPBIA6940ZZ

*Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
• The angle created by the hose clamp pawl and the specified line
must be within ±30° as shown in the figure.

JPBIA4295ZZ

CO-74
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
• To install hose clamps , check that the dimension (A) from the
hose end to the hose clamp is within the reference value. A

3 - 5 mm
Dimension “A”
0.12 - 0.20 in CO

JPBIA3527ZZ

D
Inspection INFOID:0000000010782999

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION E

• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-64, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
F

CO-75
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
COOLING FAN
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010783000

JPBIA6922ZZ

Cooling fan assembly Fan resistor

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010783001

REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-39, "ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-64, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belts.
3. Remove air duct 1 and air duct 2. Refer to EM-308, "Exploded View".
4. Remove radiator hose (upper) from radiator. Refer to CO-70, "Exploded View".
5. Remove air inlet tube 2 and air inlet hose 2. Refer to EM-308, "Exploded View".
6. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
7. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-31, "Exploded View".
8. Remove hood lock bell crank and hood lock assembly. Refer to folloing table:

TYPE Reference
1 DLK-297, "Exploded View"
2 DLK-605, "Exploded View"
3 DLK-768, "Exploded View"
4 DLK-910, "Exploded View"
How to select vehicle type: refer to DLK-22, "Information".
9. Disconnect harness connectors from cooling fan and fan resistor, and move harness to aside.

CO-76
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
10. Remove mounting bolts and clips of mounting bracket .
A

JSBIA5285ZZ

D
11. Remove radiator core support upper. Refer to folloing table:

TYPE Reference E
1 DLK-268, "R9M : Exploded View"
2 DLK-576, "R9M : Exploded View"
F
3 DLK-738, "R9M : Exploded View"
4 DLK-880, "R9M : Exploded View"
How to select vehicle type: refer to DLK-22, "Information". G
12. Remove cooling fan assembly according to the following instructions:
a. Remove screws .
H
: Cooling fan assembly

JSBIA5284ZZ

K
b. Unlock pawl ( 1), and side mounting part ( 2).
c. Remove cooling fan assembly to upward of vehicle ( 3).
CAUTION: L
Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core when
removing.
13. Remove fan resistor, if necessary. M

N
JPBIA6941ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
Only use genuine parts for fan shroud mounting bolt and observe the specified torque (to prevent
radiator from being damaged).
P
NOTE:
Cooling fans are controlled by ECM. For details. Refer to EC-843, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System
Description".
Inspection INFOID:0000000010783003

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

CO-77
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
Cooling Fan
Inspect cooling fan for crack or unusual bend.
• If anything is found, replace cooling fan.

CO-78
THERMO PLUNGER UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
THERMO PLUNGER UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010969487

I
JPBIA6923GB

Water hose Clamp Thermo plunger unit J

Bracket Water hose Water hose clip
To oil cooler To heater
K
: Vehicle front

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

L
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010969488

REMOVAL M

CAUTION:
Make sure that the engine is cool down before operating, in order to avoid hot coolant outflow, as the N
electric pump is turned on even if the engine is off. On the other hand the pump is turned off when the
engine is on. In this case as the electric pump is working, the thermostat will have to stay open due to
high temperatures.
O
1. Remove the battery negative cable.
2. Remove front side of front fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded
View"
P
3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to CO-64, "Draining".
NOTE:
Perform this step when removing water hoses.
4. Remove the ground cable bolt.
5. Disconnect thermo plunger unit connector.
6. Remove the water hose from thermo plunger unit.
NOTE:

CO-79
THERMO PLUNGER UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
When removing thermo plunger unit only, pinching water hoses near thermo plunger unit to prevent
engine coolant from spilling out.
7. Remove the thermo plunger unit.

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Thermo plunger caps must be correctly installed after removal.
• The hoses must be fully pushed onto pipe before tightening the clamp.
• Clamp must be fixed 5mm MIN from end of hose.

CO-80
WATER INLET AND WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
WATER INLET AND WATER OUTLET
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010969489

I
JPBIA6925GB

O-ring Water pump inlet pipe Clamp J

Water pump inlet hose Vacuum hose Water outlet (with engine coolant by-
pass valve)
O-ring Clamp Water hose K
Clamp Clamp Water hose
Water inlet Clamp Water hose
L
Clamp Water connector Heater hose
Clamp Heater hose Clamp
To water pump To engine coolant bypass valve con- To cylinder block M
trol solenoid valve
To radiator To reservoir tank Air relief valve
To intake manifold To oil cooler To EGR cooler N
To heater To thermo plunger unit

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

O
: Always replace after every disassembly.

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010969490

REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-64, "Draining".
CAUTION:
Perform this step when engine is cold.
2. Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-313, "Exploded View"
3. Disconnect radiator hose (lower). Refer to CO-70, "Exploded View".
CO-81
WATER INLET AND WATER OUTLET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [R9M]
4. Disconnect water hoses from water inlet.
5. Remove water inlet.
CAUTION:
The thermostat cannot be separated from the water inlet.
6. Disconnect radiator hose (upper). Refer to CO-70, "Exploded View".
7. Disconnect water hoses from water outlet.
8. Remove water outlet.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection INFOID:0000000010969491

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Water inlet
1. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly.

Standard: Refer to CO-85, "Thermostat".

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.
• Check for leaks of engine coolant using the adapter and the reservoir tank cap tester [SST: — (M.S. 554-07).
Refer to CO-64, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there is no leaks of engine coolant.

CO-82
WATER PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [R9M]

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

WATER PUMP
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010969492
CO

JPBIA6989GB J

Water pump pulley Water pump O-ring

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) K

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Always replace after every disassembly. L

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010969493

M
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine. Refer to EM-365, "Exploded View".
2. Remove water pump pulley. N
3. Remove water pump.
• Loosen mounting bolts in reverse order as shown in the figure.
CAUTION: O
• Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any
other parts.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be
replaced as a unit. P

JPBIA0746ZZ

INSTALLATION

CO-83
WATER PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [R9M]
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Water pump
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
• Tighten mounting bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure.
• When inserting water pump end into cylinder block, apply a neutral
detergent to O-ring. Then insert it immediately.

JPBIA0746ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000010969494

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

• Visually check if there is no significant dirt or rusting on water
pump body and vane .
• Check that there is no looseness in vane shaft, and that it turns
smoothly when rotated by hand.
• Replace water pump, if necessary.

JPBIA0747ZZ

CO-84
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [R9M]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000010783010
CO

ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)

Unit: (lmp qt) C
M/T models 7.9 (7)
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
CVT models 8.1 (7-1/8)
Reservoir tank 0.57 (4/8) D

Radiator INFOID:0000000010783011

E
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

Standard 130 (1.3, 1.3, 19)

Cap relief pressure
Lower limit 110 (1.1, 1.1, 16) F
Leakage testing pressure 157 (1.6, 1.6, 22.8)

Thermostat INFOID:0000000010783012 G

Standard
Valve opening temperature 80.0 - 92.0°C (176 - 197°F) H

CO-85
CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE

SECTION
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
DAS B

E
CONTENTS
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION F
METER) ......................................................................28
PRECAUTION ............................................... 7 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : Warning/Indicator (On Information Dis- G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 7 play) .........................................................................28
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- OPERATION ..................................................... 30
SIONER" ................................................................... 7 H
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 7 LDW ...........................................................................30
Precaution for LDW System Service ......................... 8 LDW : Switch Name and Function ...........................30
Precaution for BSW System Service ......................... 8 LDW : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch....30
I
Precaution for TSR System Service .......................... 8 BSW ...........................................................................32
Precaution for DAA System Service ......................... 9 BSW : Switch Name and Function ..........................32
BSW : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch....33 J
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 10
TSR ............................................................................35
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................10 TSR : Switch Name and Function ...........................36
Component Parts Location ...................................... 10 K
TSR : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch ....36
Combination Meter .................................................. 13
Around View Monitor Control Unit ........................... 13 DAA ............................................................................37
BSW Indicator LH/RH ............................................. 13 DAA : Switch Name and Function ...........................38 L
Rear Camera ........................................................... 13 DAA : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch ....38
Pump Control Unit ................................................... 14
Air Pump ................................................................. 15 HANDLING PRECAUTION ............................... 40
Rear Camera Washer Pump ................................... 15 Precautions for Lane Departure Warning ................40 M
Front Camera Unit ................................................... 15 Precautions for Blind Spot Warning .........................40
Precautions for Traffic Sign Recognition .................41
SYSTEM .............................................................16 Precautions for Drive Attention Alert .......................41 N
LDW ........................................................................... 16 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (FRONT CAMERA
LDW : System Description ...................................... 16 UNIT) ................................................................. 42
CONSULT Function (LANE CAMERA) ...................42 DAS
BSW ........................................................................... 17
BSW : System Description ...................................... 18 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
TSR ............................................................................ 20 ITOR CONTROL UNIT) ..................................... 45 P
TSR : System Description ....................................... 21 CONSULT Function .................................................45

DAA ........................................................................... 23 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 51

DAA : System Description ....................................... 24
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 25 FRONT CAMERA UNIT .................................... 51
Fail-safe (Front Camera Unit) ................................. 25 Reference Value ......................................................51
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) ......... 26 Fail-safe (Front Camera Unit) ..................................55

DAS-1
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 56 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
DTC Index .............................................................. 56 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 107
Description ............................................................ 107
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ... 57 Work Procedure .................................................... 107
Reference Value ..................................................... 57
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) ......... 63 CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONI-
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 66 TOR CONTROL UNIT) ..................................... 108
DTC Index .............................................................. 66 Work Procedure .................................................... 108
PUMP CONTROL UNIT ..................................... 68 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
Reference Value ..................................................... 68 VIEW MONITOR) .............................................. 110
Description ............................................................ 110
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 70
Work Procedure (Preparation) .............................. 110
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS ................... 70 Work Procedure (Target Setting) .......................... 111
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 70 Work Procedure (Rear Camera Calibration) ......... 113
Work Procedure (Target Mark Sample) ................ 114
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 88
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 116
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 88
Work Flow ............................................................... 88 C1B00 CAMERA UNIT MALF .......................... 116
DTC Description .................................................... 116
ACTION TEST ................................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116

LDW ........................................................................... 91 C1B01 CAM AIMING INCMP ........................... 117

LDW : Description ................................................... 91 DTC Description .................................................... 117
LDW : Work Procedure ........................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 117
BSW .......................................................................... 92 C1B02 VHCL SPD DATA MALF ...................... 118
BSW : Description .................................................. 92 DTC Description .................................................... 118
BSW : Work Procedure .......................................... 92 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118
TSR ............................................................................ 93 C1B03 ABNRML TEMP DETECT .................... 119
TSR : Description ................................................... 94 DTC Description .................................................... 119
TSR : Work Procedure ........................................... 94 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119
DAA ........................................................................... 95 C1B09 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT, C1B0A
DAA : Description ................................................... 95 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT2 ............................ 120
DAA : Work Procedure ........................................... 95 DTC Description .................................................... 120
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS (CAM- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120
ERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT) ........................... 97 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 121
Inspection Procedure .............................................. 97 DTC Description .................................................... 121
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS (CALI- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 121
BRATING CAMERA IMAGE) ............................ 98 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 122
Inspection Procedure .............................................. 98 DTC Description .................................................... 122
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
FRONT CAMERA UNIT ..................................... 99 U0122 VDC CAN CIR1 (LDP) .......................... 123
Description .............................................................. 99 DTC Description .................................................... 123
Work Procedure ...................................................... 99 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT .................. 100 U0126 STRG SEN CAN 1 ................................ 124
Description .............................................................100 DTC Description .................................................... 124
Work Procedure (Preparation) ...............................100 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
Work Procedure (Target Setting) ...........................101
Work Procedure (Camera Aiming Adjustment) ......103 U0155 METER CAN 1 ...................................... 125
Work Procedure (Target Mark Sample) .................104 DTC Description .................................................... 125
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 125
REAR VIEW CAMERA WASHER/AIR BLOW-
ER FUNCTION INSPECTION .......................... 106 U0235 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 1 ........................ 126
Inspection Procedure .............................................106 DTC Description .................................................... 126

DAS-2
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126 Description ............................................................. 145
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145 A
U0416 VDC CHECKSUM DIAG ....................... 127
DTC Description .................................................... 127 THE SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 127 WHEN USING TURN SIGNAL ........................ 146
B
Description ............................................................. 146
U0428 STRG SEN CAN 2 ................................ 128 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146
DTC Description .................................................... 128
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 128 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 147 C
Description ............................................................. 147
U0433 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 2 ........................ 129
DTC Description .................................................... 129 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 149
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129 D
FRONT CAMERA UNIT .................................. 149
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 130 Exploded View ....................................................... 149
Removal and Installation ....................................... 149 E
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 130
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Di- AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 151
agnosis Procedure ................................................ 130 Removal and Installation ....................................... 151
F
PUMP CONTROL UNIT ........................................... 131 REAR CAMERA .............................................. 152
PUMP CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .. 131 Removal and Installation ....................................... 152
FRONT CAMERA UNIT ........................................... 131 G
PUMP CONTROL UNIT .................................. 153
FRONT CAMERA UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .... 131
Removal and Installation ....................................... 153
REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL AIR PUMP ....................................................... 154 H
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 133 Removal and Installation ....................................... 154
Component Function Check .................................. 133
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 133 REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR NOZZLE &
TUBE ............................................................... 155 I
WASHER PUMP CIRCUIT ............................... 135 Exploded View ....................................................... 155
Component Function Check .................................. 135 Removal and Installation ....................................... 156
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135 J
BSW INDICATOR ........................................... 160
WASHER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.. 136 Removal and Installation ....................................... 160
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 136
WASHER PUMP ............................................. 161 K
REAR WASHER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Exploded View ....................................................... 161
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 137 Removal and Installation ....................................... 161
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137 L
CHASSIS CONTROL
BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CIR-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................. 162
CUIT .................................................................. 138
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 138 M
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ....................... 162
Information ............................................................. 162
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 140
PRECAUTION ............................................ 163 N
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM SYMP-
TOMS ................................................................ 140 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 163
Symptom Table ..................................................... 140 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
DAS
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SYSTEM SETTINGS CANNOT BE TURNED SIONER" ............................................................... 163
ON/OFF ............................................................ 142 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal .......... 163
Description ............................................................ 142 Precaution for Stop/Start System Service ............. 164 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142 Precautions for Harness Repair ............................ 164
CHIME DOES NOT SOUND ............................. 143 Precaution for Chassis Control .............................. 165
Description ............................................................ 143 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 166
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143
COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 166
THE SYSTEM OPERATES EVEN WHEN US- Component Parts Location .................................... 166
ING TURN SIGNAL .......................................... 145
DAS-3
Chassis Control Module ........................................167 C1B93-00 ENGINE SYSTEM ........................... 217
DTC Description .................................................... 217
SYSTEM ........................................................... 168 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 217
System Description ................................................168
Circuit Diagram ......................................................171 C1B94-00 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ............. 219
Fail-safe .................................................................171 DTC Description .................................................... 219
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 219
ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (DYNAMIC CORNER-
ING ENHANCEMENT) FUNCTION ..........................173 C1B95-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 221
ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (DYNAMIC COR- DTC Description .................................................... 221
NERING ENHANCEMENT) FUNCTION : System Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 221
Description .............................................................173
C1B99-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 222
ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION ....................179 DTC Description .................................................... 222
ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION : System Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 222
Description .............................................................179
C1BA0-00 CHASSIS CONTROL BRAKE
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL FUNCTION .....................182 SYSTEM ........................................................... 223
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL FUNCTION : System
DTC Description .................................................... 223
Description .............................................................182
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 223
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
C1BA2-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ........ 225
METER) ....................................................................187
DTC Description .................................................... 225
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 225
METER) : Chassis Control Display ........................187
C1BA5-00 CHASSIS CONTROL ENGINE
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL
SYSTEM ........................................................... 227
MODULE) ......................................................... 191
DTC Description .................................................... 227
CONSULT Function ...............................................191
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 227
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 197 C1BAB-00 STOP LAMP SWITCH ................... 228
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE ...................... 197 DTC Description .................................................... 228
Reference Value ....................................................197 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 228
Fail-safe .................................................................202 C1BB2-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 230
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................203 DTC Description .................................................... 230
DTC Index .............................................................204 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 230
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 206 C1BB3-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 231
CHASSIS CONTROL ....................................... 206 DTC Description .................................................... 231
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 231
Wiring Diagram ......................................................206
C1BB4-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 232
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 209
DTC Description .................................................... 232
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 209 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 232
Work Flow ..............................................................209
C1BB5-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY .......... 233
Diagnostic Work Sheet ..........................................210
DTC Description .................................................... 233
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 233
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE ...................... 212 C1BB6-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY .......... 235
Description .............................................................212
DTC Description .................................................... 235
CONFIGURATION (CHASSIS CONTROL Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 235
MODULE) ......................................................... 213 C1BB7-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 237
Work Procedure .....................................................213 DTC Description .................................................... 237
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 237
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 215
C1BB8-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 238
C1B92-00 BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 215
DTC Description .................................................... 238
DTC Description ....................................................215
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 238
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................215

DAS-4
C1BB9-00 CONTROL MODULE ...................... 239 U1A35-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICA-
DTC Description .................................................... 239 TION ................................................................ 260 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 239 DTC Description .................................................... 260
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 260
C1BBA-00 CONTROL MODULE ..................... 240
B
DTC Description .................................................... 240 U1A36-00 BCM COMMUNICATION ............... 262
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 240 DTC Description .................................................... 262
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 262
C1BBB-00 CONTROL MODULE ..................... 241 C
DTC Description .................................................... 241 U1A39-00 COMBINATION METER COMMU-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 241 NICATION ....................................................... 264
DTC Description .................................................... 264 D
C1BBC-00 CONTROL MODULE ..................... 242 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264
DTC Description .................................................... 242
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 242 U1A3B-00 TCM COMMUNICATION ............... 266
DTC Description .................................................... 266 E
C1BBD-00 VARIANT CODING ........................ 243 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 266
DTC Description .................................................... 243
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243 U1A42-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR F
COMMUNICATION ......................................... 268
C1BC0-00 FRONT RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR.. 244
DTC Description .................................................... 268
DTC Description .................................................... 244
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 268
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 244 G
U1A43-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
C1BC1-00 FRONT LEFT WHEEL SENSOR .. 246
DTC Description .................................................... 246
COMMUNICATION ......................................... 270
DTC Description .................................................... 270 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 270
C1BC2-00 REAR RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR .. 248
DTC Description .................................................... 248
U1A48-00 ECM COMMUNICATION ............... 272
DTC Description .................................................... 272 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 248
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 272
C1BC3-00 REAR LEFT WHEEL SENSOR ...... 250
DTC Description .................................................... 250
U1A4A-00 CONTROL MODULE (CAN) ......... 274 J
DTC Description .................................................... 274
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 250
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 274
C1BC4-00 DECEL G SENSOR ........................ 252 K
DTC Description .................................................... 252
U1A4E-00 ECM COMMUNICATION ............... 275
DTC Description .................................................... 275
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 252
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 275
C1BC5-00 SIDE G SENSOR ............................ 253 L
DTC Description .................................................... 253
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 277
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 277
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 253
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 278 M
C1BC6-00 PRESSURE SENSOR .................... 254
DTC Description .................................................... 254 CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE ..................... 278
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 254
Exploded View ....................................................... 278 N
U1000-00 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ..................... 256 Removal and Installation ....................................... 278
DTC Description .................................................... 256 PARK ASSIST
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 256
PRECAUTION ............................................ 280 DAS
U1010-49 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ................... 257
DTC Description .................................................... 257 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 280
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 257 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System P
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
U1A34-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICA- SIONER" ............................................................... 280
TION ................................................................. 258 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal .......... 280
DTC Description .................................................... 258
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 258 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 282
COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 282
Component Parts Location .................................... 282
DAS-5
Around View Monitor Control Unit .........................285 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 324
Sonar Control Unit .................................................285 DTC Index ............................................................. 324
EPS control unit .....................................................286
SONAR CONTROL UNIT ................................. 326
SYSTEM ........................................................... 287 Reference Value ................................................... 326
System Description ................................................287 Fail-Safe (Sonar Control Unit) ............................... 332
Circuit Diagram ......................................................294 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 332
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) ........295 DTC Index ............................................................. 333
Fail-Safe (Sonar Control Unit) ...............................298
WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 335
OPERATION .................................................... 299
Switch Name and Function ....................................299 DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS .................. 335
Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch ............301 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 335

HANDLING PRECAUTION .............................. 303 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 353

Precautions for Around View Monitor with Park
Assist .....................................................................303 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 353
Work Flow ............................................................. 353
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) ................................... 304 ACTION TEST .................................................. 355
Description ............................................................ 355
CONSULT Function ...............................................304
Work Procedure .................................................... 355
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SONAR CONTROL
UNIT) ................................................................ 310 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 356
CONSULT Function ...............................................310 PARK ASSIST SYMPTOMS ............................ 356
Symptom Table ..................................................... 356
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 315
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 357
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 315
Description ............................................................ 357
Reference Value ....................................................315
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) ........321

DAS-6
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010727876

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key K
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
L
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition M
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
N
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of DAS
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE: P
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

DAS-7
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.

D4D engine : 20 minutes

WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Do not use the front camera unit that is removed from the vehicle.
• Never disassemble and remodel the front camera unit.
• Never change LDW initial state ON ⇒ OFF without the consent of the customer.
Precaution for BSW System Service INFOID:0000000010727879

WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Never perform the active test while driving.
• Never change BSW initial state ON ⇒ OFF without the consent of the customer.
Precaution for TSR System Service INFOID:0000000010842483

WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Do not use the front camera unit that is removed from the vehicle.
• Never disassemble and remodel the front camera unit.
• Never change TSR initial state ON ⇒ OFF without the consent of the customer.

DAS-8
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Precaution for DAA System Service INFOID:0000000010842482

A
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION: B
Never change DAA initial state ON ⇒ OFF without the consent of the customer.

DAS

DAS-9
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010727880

LHD MODELS

JSOIA1654ZZ

Behind front fender protector (RH) Luggage room rear Rear under body (LH)

No. Component Function

• Refer to DAS-13, "Rear Camera"
Rear camera
• Refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
Front camera unit Refer to DAS-15, "Front Camera Unit"

BSW indicator RH Refer to DAS-13, "BSW Indicator LH/RH"

• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits the vehicle speed signal (ABS)
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- and VDC/TCS/ABS system operation condition to around view monitor control unit
trol unit) via CAN communication
• Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
• Transmits the accelerator pedal position signal, etc. to around view monitor control
unit via CAN communication
• Refer to following for detailed installation location
ECM
- R9M: EC-812, "Component Parts Location"
- MR20DD: EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
- QR25DE: EC-440, "Component Parts Location"

DAS-10
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
No. Component Function
A
• Transmits the turn indicator signal and position light request signal to around view
monitor via CAN communication
BCM
• Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location B
BSW indicator LH Refer to DAS-13, "BSW Indicator LH/RH"
• Operates the buzzer using the buzzer output signal from around view monitor control
unit* C
Sonar control unit • Refer to following for detailed installation location
- WITHOUT PARK ASSIST: SN-8, "Component Parts Location"
- WITH PARK ASSIST: SN-119, "Component Parts Location"
D
• Refer to DAS-13, "Around View Monitor Control Unit"
Around view monitor control unit
• Refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
• Transmits the speed limit information signal to the front camera unit via CAN commu- E
NAVI control unit nication
• Refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
• Refer to DAS-13, "Combination Meter"
Combination meter • Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed instal- F
lation location
• Transmits the steering angle sensor signal to around view monitor control unit via
Steering angle sensor CAN communication G
• Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location

• The warning buzzer sounds with the signal from the sonar control unit*
Buzzer • Refer to following for detailed installation location H
- WITHOUT PARK ASSIST: SN-8, "Component Parts Location"
- WITH PARK ASSIST: SN-119, "Component Parts Location"
Rear camera washer pump Refer to DAS-15, "Rear Camera Washer Pump" I
Pump control unit Refer to DAS-14, "Pump Control Unit"

Air pump Refer to DAS-15, "Air Pump"

J
*: For vehicles without sonar system, meter buzzer is used.
RHD MODELS
K

DAS

DAS-11
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JSOIA1655ZZ

Behind front fender protector (RH) Luggage room rear Rear under body (LH)

No. Component Function

• Refer to DAS-13, "Rear Camera"
Rear camera
• Refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
Front camera unit Refer to DAS-15, "Front Camera Unit"

BSW indicator RH Refer to DAS-13, "BSW Indicator LH/RH"

• Transmits the accelerator pedal position signal, etc. to around view monitor control
ECM unit via CAN communication
• Refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits the vehicle speed signal (ABS)
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- and VDC/TCS/ABS system operation condition to around view monitor control unit
trol unit) via CAN communication
• Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
BSW indicator LH Refer to DAS-13, "BSW Indicator LH/RH"
• Operates the buzzer using the buzzer output signal from around view monitor control
unit*
Sonar control unit • Refer to following for detailed installation location
- WITHOUT PARK ASSIST: SN-8, "Component Parts Location"
- WITH PARK ASSIST: SN-119, "Component Parts Location"
• Transmits the steering angle sensor signal to around view monitor control unit via
Steering angle sensor CAN communication
• Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
• Refer to DAS-13, "Combination Meter"
Combination meter • Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed instal-
lation location

DAS-12
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
No. Component Function
A
• Transmits the speed limit information signal to the front camera unit via CAN commu-
NAVI control unit nication
• Refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
• Refer to DAS-13, "Around View Monitor Control Unit" B
Around view monitor control unit
• Refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
• Transmits the turn indicator signal and position light request signal to around view
monitor via CAN communication C
BCM
• Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location

• The warning buzzer sounds with the signal from the sonar control unit* D
Buzzer • Refer to following for detailed installation location
- WITHOUT PARK ASSIST: SN-8, "Component Parts Location"
- WITH PARK ASSIST: SN-119, "Component Parts Location"
E
Rear camera washer pump Refer to DAS-15, "Rear Camera Washer Pump"

Pump control unit Refer to DAS-14, "Pump Control Unit"

Air pump Refer to DAS-15, "Air Pump" F

*: For vehicles without sonar system, meter buzzer is used.
Combination Meter INFOID:0000000010727881 G

• Receives meter display signal and buzzer output signal* from around view monitor control unit via CAN com-
munication. H
• Displays the each system operation status according to meter display signal received form the around view
monitor control unit.
• Operates the buzzer according to the signal from the around view monitor control unit.*
I
• Transmits the ambient temperature signal to around view monitor via CAN communication.
*: For vehicles with sonar system, sonar buzzer is used.
Around View Monitor Control Unit INFOID:0000000010727882 J

• The around view monitor control unit is installed behind the glove
box.
• The around view monitor control unit controls following systems K
according to the signals via CAN communication from each control
unit.
- BSW L
- DAA

JSOIA0646ZZ

BSW Indicator LH/RH INFOID:0000000010727883 N

• BSW indicator is installed in the door mirror corner cover.

• Receives a BSW indicator operation signal from the around view monitor control unit and blinks or turns ON/ DAS
OFF the BSW indicator.
Rear Camera INFOID:0000000010727884

P
• The rear view camera is installed to the back door finisher.
• With the mirror processing function, a mirror image is sent as if it is viewed by a rear view mirror.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor control unit, and the image at the rear of the
vehicle is sent to the around view monitor control unit.
• The rear camera is equipped with a washer nozzle and air nozzle for cleaning camera. A check valve is
installed to the tube connected to the washer nozzle.

DAS-13
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JSOIA1299ZZ

Air tube Harness Rear camera

Washer/Air nozzle Washer tube

Camera Specification

Image pickup element 1/4-inch CMOS* image sensor

Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
Minimum brightness 1 lx
Angle of view H: Approx. 190° V: Approx. 144°
Image With mirror processing function
NOTE:
*: “CMOS” is abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor, and features low power consump-
tion and high speed reading rate of electric charge.
Pump Control Unit INFOID:0000000010727885

• Pump control unit is installed under the luggage rear plate.

JSOIA1300ZZ

• Communicates with around view monitor control unit via communication line.
• Activates air pump and washer pump according to the signal from around view monitor control unit.

DAS-14
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Air Pump INFOID:0000000010727886

A
• Rear view camera air pump motor is installed to the rear left under-
body.
B

D
JSOIA1301ZZ

• Air pump is activated and generates compressed air when power is supplied from the pump control unit. E
• Compressed air jets out from the air nozzle of rear view camera via air tube.
Rear Camera Washer Pump INFOID:0000000010727887
F
Washer fluid is sprayed according to washer switch states.

I
JMLIA3077ZZ

Front Camera Unit INFOID:0000000010842520

J
• The front camera unit is installed to the windshield and detects
information ahead of the vehicle.
• Based on the detected information and CAN communication sig- K
nals received from each control unit, the front camera unit controls
the systems listed below:
- LDW L
- TSR

M
JSOIA1307ZZ

DAS

DAS-15
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
SYSTEM
LDW
LDW : System Description INFOID:0000000010727888

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSOIA1656GB

FRONT CAMERA UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM

Input Signal Item

Transmit unit Signal name Description

ABS actuator CAN com-
and electric unit munica- Vehicle speed signal (ABS) Receives wheel speeds of four wheels
(control unit) tion
CAN com-
Combination Receives a selection state of LDW in “Driver Aids” se-
munica- System selection signal
meter lected with the information display
tion
CAN com-
Receives an operational state of the turn signal lamp
BCM munica- Turn indicator signal
and the hazard lamp
tion
CAN com-
Steering angle Receives the number of revolutions, turning direction of
munica- Steering angle sensor signal
sensor the steering wheel
tion

Output Signal Item

Reception unit Signal name Description

Meter display LDW system display Transmits a signal to display a state of the system on
Combination CAN commu- signal signal the information display
meter nication Transmits a buzzer output signal to activates the
Buzzer output signal*1 warning buzzer
Sonar control CAN commu-
Buzzer drive signal Transmits a buzzer drive signal to activate buzzer
unit*2 nication

*1: Without sonar system

*2: With sonar system
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
• The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is
driven at speeds of approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) or more.

DAS-16
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
• When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning will alert the
driver (the buzzer and the display on the combination meter). A
• The warning does not occur during turn signal operation (Lane change side).
• The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
EXAMPLE B

JPOIA0014GB

When the vehicle approaches the right lane marker, the driver is alerted by the buzzer and the display on the G
combination meter.
NOTE:
For details of LDW system indication on the combination meter, refer to DAS-30, "LDW : Menu Displayed by
Pressing Each Switch". H

OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• LDW system is controlled by the front camera unit.
• When the system is turned ON, the front camera unit transmits LDW system display signal to combination I
meter via CAN communication.
• The front camera unit monitors lane markers of the traveling lane.
• When judging from a lane marker detection signal that the vehicle is approaching the lane marker, the front J
camera unit controls the following item to alert the driver.
- Activates warning buzzer in the sonar control unit (With sonar system) or combination meter (Without sonar
system).
K
- The front camera unit transmits a LDW system display signal to combination meter via CAN communication
and blinks the LDW system indicator (“icon”).
Operating Condition L
• LDW system indicator (white): ON (“lane”)
When the LDW system setting on the combination meter is ON
• Vehicle speed: approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) or more
• Turn indicator signal: After 2 seconds or more from turned OFF M
NOTE:
• LDW system ON/OFF can be set on the combination meter
• After the operating conditions of warning are satisfied, the warning continues until the vehicle speed reaches N
approximately 55 km/h (34 MPH)
• LDW system may not function properly, depending on the situation. Refer to DAS-40, "Precautions for Lane
Departure Warning".
DAS
BSW

DAS-17
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
BSW : System Description INFOID:0000000010727889

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSOIA1657GB

AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM

Around view monitor control unit receives signals via CAN communication. It also detects vehicle conditions
that are necessary for BSW control.
Input Signal Item

DAS-18
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Transmit unit Signal name Description A

ABS actuator CAN com-
and electric unit munica- Vehicle speed signal (ABS) Receives wheel speeds of four wheels
(control unit) tion
B
CAN com- Receives an operational state of the turn signal lamp
Turn indicator signal
BCM munica- and the hazard lamp
tion Position light request signal Receives an operational state of tail lamp C
CAN com- Receives a selection state of each item in “Driver Aids”
Combination System selection signal
munica- selected with the combination meter
meter
tion Ambient sensor signal Receives the ambient temperature D
CAN com-
Steering angle Receives the number of revolutions, turning direction of
munica- Steering angle sensor signal
sensor the steering wheel
tion
E
CAN com- Engine status signal Receives the engine status
ECM munica-
tion Engine coolant temperature signal Receives the engine coolant temperature
F
Output Signal Item

Reception unit Signal name Description G

Meter dis- BSW system dis- Transmits a meter display signal to turn ON the Blind
Combination play signal play signal Spot Warning system display
CAN communication
meter Transmits a buzzer output signal to activates the H
Buzzer output signal*1 warning buzzer
Transmits a rear camera washer signal to activates
Rear camera washer signal
Pump control the washer pump I
Communication line
unit Transmits a rear camera air blow signal to activates
Rear camera air blow signal
the air pump
Sonar control J
CAN communication Buzzer drive signal Transmits a buzzer drive signal to activate buzzer
unit*2
*1: Without sonar system
*2: With sonar system K
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
• The BSW system can help alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
• The BSW system uses rear camera installed the back door finisher to detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. L
• The rear camera can detect vehicles on either side of vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated.
• This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind
the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways. M
• The BSW system operates above approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH).
• If the rear camera detects vehicles in the detection zone, the BSW indicator illuminates.
N

DAS

JSOIA0642ZZ

DAS-19
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
• If the driver then activates the turn signal, a buzzer will sound twice and the BSW indicator will blink.
NOTE:
A buzzer sounds if the rear camera have already detected vehicles when the driver activates the turn signal.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the BSW indica-
tor blinks and no buzzer sounds.

JSOIA0643ZZ

OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• Around view monitor control unit enables BSW system.
• The around view monitor control unit turns on the BSW system when the turned ON by combination meter.
• Rear camera transmits the camera image signal to around view monitor control unit.
• Around view monitor control unit starts the control as follows, based on a camera image signal, turn indicator
signal and position light request signal transmitted from BCM via CAN communication:
- Buzzer drive signal transmission to sonar control unit via CAN communication. (With sonar system)
- Buzzer output signal transmission to combination meter via CAN communication. (Without sonar system)
• Around view monitor control unit transmits an indicator operation signal to the BSW indicator.
Operation Condition
• BSW system indicator (white): ON (Speaker icon ON in “Blind spot” position)
• When the vehicle drives at 32 km/h (20 MPH) or more to the forward direction.
NOTE:
BSW system ON/OFF can be set on the combination meter
• After the operating conditions of warning are satisfied, the warning continues until the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 29 km/h (18 MPH)
• The BSW system may not function properly, depending on the situation. Refer to DAS-40, "Precautions for
Blind Spot Warning".
TSR

DAS-20
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
TSR : System Description INFOID:0000000010795655

A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSOIA1658GB

G
FRONT CAMERA UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM
Input Signal Item
H
Transmit unit Signal name Description
ABS actuator CAN com-
and electric unit munica- Vehicle speed signal (ABS) Receives the wheel speed of the four wheels I
(control unit) tion
CAN com-
Combination Receives a selection state of each item in “Driver Aids”
munica- System selection signal
meter selected with the combination meter J
tion

NAVI control CAN com-

Receives the speed limit information data in the NAVI
munica- Speed limit information signal
unit* tion
control unit
K
CAN com-
Steering angle Receives the number of revolutions, turning direction of
munica- Steering angle sensor signal
sensor the steering wheel
tion L
*: With navigation system
Output Signal Item
M
Reception unit Signal name Description
• Speed limit sign sig-
Combination CAN commu- Meter display Transmits a signal and displays the status on the ve- N
nal
meter nication signal hicle information display
• Do not pass sign

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION DAS

Displays the road conditions as identified by the front camera unit on the information display, and alerts the
driver. Identifies the road sign information.
The front camera unit detects road signs as described below and displays them on the information display.
P

DAS-21
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JSOIA1626ZZ

Latest detected speed limit National speed limit No-overtaking zone

End of no-overtaking zone Conditional speed limit No road sign information*1
Snow Slip (rain 1) Rain (rain 2)
Towing Generic*2

*1: Displayed when TSR is ON and road signs are not recognized.
*2: Displayed when a supplemental sign other than those from to is detected.

DAS-22
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
EXAMPLE
A

H
JSOIA1617ZZ

OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• The TSR system is controlled by the front camera unit. I
• The front camera unit turns on the TSR system when the turned ON by combination meter.
• The front camera unit detects the road sign.
• The front camera unit transmits the meter display signal to the combination meter, when detecting the road
sign. J
• The front camera unit receives the speed limit information data from the NAVI control unit. (With navigation
system)
• The front camera unit detects speed limit signs, recognizes speed limit signs by combining the detected K
speed limit signs with speed limit information data received from the NAVI control unit, and transmits a meter
display signal to the combination meter. (With navigation system)
• The front camera unit adjusts the detection range of road signs according to a steering angle sensor signal
L
received from the steering angle sensor.
Operation Condition
• TSR: ON
M
NOTE:
• TSR system ON/OFF can be set on the combination meter
• The TSR system may not function properly, depending on the situation. Refer to DAS-41, "Precautions for
Traffic Sign Recognition". N
DAA
DAS

DAS-23
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DAA : System Description INFOID:0000000010795656

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSOIA1659GB

AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM

Input Signal Item

Transmit unit Signal name Description

ABS actuator CAN com-
and electric unit munica- Vehicle speed signal (ABS) Receives the wheel speed of the four wheels
(control unit) tion
CAN com-
Combination Receives a selection state of each item in “Driver Assis-
munica- System selection signal
meter tance” selected with the combination meter
tion
CAN com-
Steering angle Receives the amount of rotation, rotational angle, and
munica- Steering angle sensor signal
sensor rotational direction of the steering wheel
tion

Output Signal Item

Reception unit Signal name Description

• Speed limit sign sig-
Meter display Transmits a signal and displays the status on the ve-
Combination CAN commu- nal
signal hicle information display
meter nication • Do not pass sign
Buzzer output signal Operates the buzzer

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
• Operates when the vehicle speed is 60 km/h or higher.
• Detects the steering status and judges the attentiveness of the driver. The driver's attentiveness is shown on
the vehicle information display in eight stages (level indicator).
• When it is judged from the degree of minor swerving in the steering operation that the vehicle is drifting, the
driver is prompted to exert caution by the drift warning, which displays on the combination meter, and by a
buzzer sound.
• When the engine is stopped, the system is reset.
• When the level indicator on the drift warning display becomes 1, the system warns the driver with a buzzer
sound.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• The DAA (Driver Attention Alert) is controlled by the around view monitor control unit.
• ON/OFF of the DAA is performed by using the combination meter.
• The steering angle sensor detects the degree of swerving in the steering operation.
• When the around view monitor control unit judges that the steering operation is drifting (when the level indi-
cator in the drift warning display becomes 1), the following control is performed and the driver is warned.
- Transmits the buzzer output signal to the combination meter and sounds the buzzer.
DAS-24
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Operation Condition
• DAA: ON A
• Vehicle speed approximately 60 km/h or more
NOTE:
• DAA system ON/OFF can be set on the combination meter.
B
• When the engine is stopped, the system is reset.
• The DAA system may not function properly, depending on the situation. Refer to DAS-41, "Precautions for
Drive Attention Alert".
C
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010727890

JSOIA1660GB DAS

Fail-safe (Front Camera Unit) INFOID:0000000010924936

P
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
LDW (Lane Departure Warning)
If a malfunction occurs in front camera unit, front camera unit cancels control, and turns ON the LDW malfunc-
tion in information display.
TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition)

DAS-25
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
If a malfunction occurs in front camera unit, front camera unit cancels control, and turns ON the TSR malfunc-
tion in information display.
FRONT CAMERA UNIT TEMPORARY OPERATION CANCELLATION
• Temporary disabled status at high temperature
- If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions, the system may be deactivated
automatically. And the system malfunction in information display.
- When interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operation automatically.
• When vehicle front identification is difficult
- When vehicle front identification is difficult due to soiling of windshield glass and strong light shining from the
front, operation may be canceled temporarily. At this time, a warning is displayed on the vehicle information
display in the combination meter.
- Normal operation recovers when conditions improve.
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010924927

DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
C1A00 Around view monitor control unit internal mal- Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
CONTROL UNIT function cel
• The battery voltage sent to around view mon-
itor control unit remains less than 7.9 V for 5
C1A01 seconds Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
POWER SUPPLY CIRC • The battery voltage sent to around view mon- cel
itor control unit remains more than 19.3 V for
5 seconds
• BSW system is cancel
If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from • DAA system is stopped.
C1A03 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) re- • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC ceived by the around view monitor control unit cancel
via CAN communication, are inconsistent • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• DAA system is stopped.
C1A04 If a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC system cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
C1A07 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the CVT is malfunction
CVT CIRCUIT cel
• BSW system is cancel
C1A39 • DAA system is stopped.
If the steering angle sensor is malfunction
STRG SEN CIR • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
cancel
C1A56 The around view monitor control unit detects Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR CIRC that sonar control unit has a malfunction cel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0122 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0416 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel

DAS-26
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U0428 stopped. B
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- • BSW system is stopped.
sensor is not complete.
TION • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped C
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal D
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- BSW system is stopped. E
- DAA system is stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot • When communication of vehicle signal,
U1000
transmit/receive CAN communication signal wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
continuously for 2 seconds or more. is not normal F
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- LDW system is stopped. G
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is
H
stopped
U1010 MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) stopped.
I
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition • Camera image is not displayed (Gray
U111A switch is ON. screen display).
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL NOTE: • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is J
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not stopped.
saved.
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
K
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not L
saved.
No-signal status of front camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111C
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
M
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. N
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111D
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG- DAS
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
U112F Around view monitor with Park Assist is can- P
If the EPS system is malfunction
EPS CIRCUIT cel

DAS-27
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle stopped.
U1232
sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • BSW system is stopped.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
angle sensor is received. • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON.
U1302
• When camera power supply output is ON: 5.9 Camera power output is stopped
CAMERA POWER VOLT
- 6.5 V
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply
measurement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view • Unmatched icon display (red) is dis-
monitor control unit and information read played (applicable for unmatched camera
U1304
from camera are not the same. only).
CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
NOTE: • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not cancel.
saved.
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
trol unit is incomplete. • On applicable camera screen marking
U1305 (Red) is displayed.
NOTE:
CONFIG UNFINISH • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. cancel.

• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is

INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER)

INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Warning/Indicator (On Informa-

DAS-28
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
tion Display) INFOID:0000000010727894

Name Design Function

C
• LDW: DAS-30, "LDW : Menu Dis-
• LDW played by Pressing Each Switch"
• BSW • BSW: DAS-33, "BSW : Menu Dis-
played by Pressing Each Switch" D

E
JSOIA1586ZZ

DAS-36, "TSR : Menu Displayed by G

TSR
Pressing Each Switch"

JSOIA1588ZZ

J
DAS-38, "DAA : Menu Displayed by
DAA
Pressing Each Switch"
K

JSOIA1587ZZ
L

DAS

DAS-29
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
OPERATION
LDW
LDW : Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000010727895

LDW

JSOIA1589ZZ

No. Switch name Description

LDW system setting screen
(Combination meter settings The setting of LDW system can be switched between ON and OFF
screen)

LDW : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch INFOID:0000000010727896

SYSTEM DISPLAY

JSOIA1590ZZ

No. Display item Description

Warning systems indicator (LDW) Indicates that LDW system is ON
Warning systems indicator “Lane”
Indicates that LDW system is ON
position

DISPLAY AND WARNING

System Display
The LDW systems operate when ON is selected with the combination meter.

DAS-30
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Display on combination meter A

System status Condition
Upper part Middle part
White
B

LDW OFF — —
C

JSOIA1591ZZ

White White
D

E
LDW ON System ON

JSOIA1422ZZ JSOIA1592ZZ
F
Orange

Orange
H
The LDW
system is JSOIA1592ZZ
LDW is malfunction automati-
cally can- I
celed.

JSOIA1422ZZ

JSOIA1593ZZ
K
White (Blink) White

The LDW
system is L
Front camera unit high temperature automati-
cally can-
celed.
M
JSOIA1367ZZ JSOIA1592ZZ

Display And Warning Operation

DAS

DAS-31
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation Action

Vehicle Status of ve- Indication on the combination meter
Turn signal
speed hicle close to Buzzer
condition Upper part Middle part
(Approx.) lane marker
White White

Less than
55 km/h (34 Close to lane
— OFF
MPH) marker

JSOIA1422ZZ JSOIA1592ZZ

Orange (Blink) Orange (Blink)

• OFF
Short
• ON (Op-
Close to lane continu-
posite to
marker ous
the devi-
beeps
ate side)
60 km/h (37 JSOIA1367ZZ JSOIA1594ZZ
MPH) or
more White White

ON (Devi- Close to lane

OFF
ate side) marker

JSOIA1422ZZ JSOIA1592ZZ

NOTE:
After the operating conditions of warning are satisfied, the warning continues until the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 55 km/h (34 MPH). Refer to DAS-16, "LDW : System Description".
BSW
BSW : Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000010784380

BSW

JSOIA1595ZZ

No. Switch name Description

BSW system setting screen
(Combination meter settings The setting of BSW system can be switched between ON and OFF
screen)

DAS-32
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
BSW : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch INFOID:0000000010784381

A
SYSTEM DISPLAY

JSOIA1596ZZ F

No. Display item Description

Warning systems indicator (BSW) Indicates that BSW system is ON G
Warning systems indicator “Blind
Indicates that BSW system is ON
spot” position
• Illuminates when detect other vehicles beside vehicle in an adjacent lane
H
Blind Spot Warning indicator LH/RH
• Blinks when BSW system is warning to driver

DISPLAY AND WARNING I

System Display
The BSW systems operate when ON is selected with the combination meter.
J
Display on combination meter
System status Condition
Upper part Middle part
White K

BSW OFF — — L

JSOIA1591ZZ
M
White White

N
BSW ON System ON

DAS
JSOIA1423ZZ JSOIA1597ZZ

DAS-33
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Display on combination meter
System status Condition
Upper part Middle part
Orange

Orange

The BSW
system is JSOIA1597ZZ
BSW is malfunction automati-
cally can-
celed.

JSOIA1423ZZ

JSOIA1598ZZ

White (Blink)

The BSW
system is
Dirt around the rear camera* automati-
cally can-
celed.

JSOIA1425ZZ JSOIA1599ZZ

White (Blink)

The BSW
system is
When the back door is open
automati-
(Back door open warning ON)
cally can-
celed.

JSOIA1425ZZ JSOIA1600ZZ

*: This indication shows the possibility of no washer fluid. Check washer fluid level.
Display And Warning Operation

DAS-34
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Vehicle condition/ Driver's opera- A

Action
tion
Status of Indication on the combination meter
vehicle Indication
Vehicle Turn sig- B
detection on the
speed nal con- Buzzer
within de- BSW indi- Upper part Middle part
(Approx.) dition
tection cator
area C
White White

Less than D
29 km/h — — OFF OFF
(18 MPH)
E
JSOIA1423ZZ JSOIA1597ZZ

White White
F
Vehicle is
— not de- OFF OFF
tected G

JSOIA1423ZZ JSOIA1597ZZ

White White H

Vehicle is I
OFF ON OFF
detected

32 km/h JSOIA1423ZZ JSOIA1597ZZ

J
(20 MPH)
or more Orange (Blink) Orange (Blink)
Before
turn sig- Short K
nal oper- contin-
Blink
ates uous
Vehicle is beeps
L
ON detected
(vehicle JSOIA1425ZZ JSOIA1600ZZ
detect-
ed direc- Orange (Blink) Orange (Blink)
M
tion)
Vehicle is
detected
after turn Blink OFF
N
signal op-
erates

JSOIA1425ZZ JSOIA1600ZZ
DAS
NOTE:
• If vehicle speed exceeds approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH), BSW function operates until the vehicle speed
becomes lower than approximately 29 km/h (18 MPH).
P
• Time shown in the figure is approximate time.
TSR

DAS-35
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
TSR : Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000010784384

TSR

JSOIA1609ZZ

No. Switch name Description

TSR system setting screen
(Combination meter settings The setting of TSR system can be switched between ON and OFF
screen)

TSR : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch INFOID:0000000010784385

SYSTEM DISPLAY

JSOIA1610ZZ

No. Display item Description

• Displays speed limit signs detected by the front camera unit
• Allows the displaying of up to 2 signs
Speed limit sign indicator
• For speed limit signs with a supplemental sign, the supplemental sign is displayed
together
• Displays road signs detected by the front camera unit
Road sign indicator
• Allows the displaying of up to 3 signs i.e. 2 speed limit signs and 1 do not pass sign
• Displays supplemental signs detected by the front camera unit
Supplemental sign indicator
• Allows the displaying of up to 3 supplemental signs

DISPLAY AND WARNING

System Display
The TSR systems operate when ON is selected with the combination meter.

DAS-36
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Display on combination meter A

System status Condition
Upper part Middle part

TSR OFF — —
C

JSOIA1611ZZ

Road sign
E
TSR ON not detect- —
ed

JSOIA1612ZZ
F
This is an example. For details of dis-
played signs, refer to DAS-21, "TSR :
System Description" G
Road sign
detected
(except for —
speed limit H
signs)

JSOIA1613ZZ I
This is an example. For details of dis- This is an example. For details of dis-
played signs, refer to DAS-21, "TSR : played signs, refer to DAS-21, "TSR :
System Description" System Description" J
Road sign
detected
(Speed limit
signs) K

JSOIA1614ZZ JSOIA1615ZZ L

The TSR
system is M
TSR is malfunction automati- —
cally can-
celed.
N
JSOIA1616ZZ

DAA DAS

DAS-37
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DAA : Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000010784382

DAA

JSOIA1601ZZ

No. Switch name Description

DAA system setting screen
(Combination meter settings The setting of DAA system can be switched between ON and OFF
screen)

DAA : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch INFOID:0000000010784383

SYSTEM DISPLAY

JSOIA1602ZZ

No. Display item Description

Level indicator The driver’s attentiveness is shown in eight stages

DISPLAY AND WARNING

DAS-38
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Vehicle condition/ Driv- Driver’s condi- Vehicle speed A

Action Display on combination meter
er’s operation tion (Approx.)

DAA OFF — — —
C

JSOIA1603ZZ

0 km/h (0MPH) ≤
Vehicle speed <
— — E
60 km/h (37
MPH)

JSOIA1604ZZ F

G
Normal Level indicator: Blue

H
JSOIA1605ZZ
DAA ON

Attention di- More than 60 km/

Level indicator: Yellow
minished h (37 MPH) J

JSOIA1606ZZ
K

Attention sig- L
• Level indicator: Orange
nificantly di-
• Buzzer sounds
minished

M
JSOIA1607ZZ

DAA is malfunction — — —

DAS

JSOIA1608ZZ

DAS-39
HANDLING PRECAUTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
HANDLING PRECAUTION
Precautions for Lane Departure Warning INFOID:0000000010727897

FRONT CAMERA UNIT HANDLING

To keep the proper operation of the LDW systems and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the
following:
• Always keep the windshield clean.
• Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the front camera unit.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of
sunlight may adversely affect the front camera unit capability of detecting the lane markers.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the
screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
• If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically, and the LDW malfunction message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
• LDW system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not
steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the
vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
• LDW system will not operate at speeds below approximately 70 km/h (45 MPH) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
• LDW system may not function properly under the following conditions:
- On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly;
yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt or snow,
etc.
- On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
- On roads where there are sharp curves.
- On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or
lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
- On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
- When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
- When traveling close to the vehicle in front of driver, which obstructs the front camera unit detection range.
- When the road surface is very dark due to weak ambient light or impaired tail lamp.
- When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the front camera unit.
- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
- When strong light enters the front camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehi-
cle at sunrise or sunset.)
- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or
under a bridge.)
• When driving on a curved road, warning will be late on the outside of the curve.
Precautions for Blind Spot Warning INFOID:0000000010727898

REAR CAMERA HANDLING

The rear camera for the BSW systems is located above the rear licence plate. To keep the proper operation of
the BSW systems and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the rear camera clean. Be careful not to damage the nozzle of automatic washer and blower.
• Do not attach “licence plate accessory” that reflect light.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the rear camera.
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
• The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact
with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the
direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
• The rear camera may not function properly under the following conditions:
- When towing a trailer.
- When strong light enters the rear camera. (For example, direct sunlight or headlight from the rear)
- When ambient brightness changes instantly. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or
passes under a bridge.)

DAS-40
HANDLING PRECAUTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
• Automatic washer and blower may not be able to secure detection capability when excessive dirt adheres on
the camera lens. A
• The rear camera may not be able to detect when certain objects are present such as:
- Pedestrians, bicycles, animals
- Several types of vehicles such as motorcycles and very short length vehicle
B
- Oncoming vehicles
- A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
- A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
- A vehicle that merges or changes lanes rapidly directly next to your vehicle. C
• The rear camera may not be able to detect property when your vehicle travels beside the middle section of a
vehicle with long wheelbase (for example, trailer truck, semi-trailer, tractor).
• The rear camera detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, D
the camera unit may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the camera unit
may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
• The rear camera is designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operating condition. E
• The rear camera may detect reflection image of vehicles or roadside objects that are not actually in the
detection zone, especially when the road is wet.
Precautions for Traffic Sign Recognition INFOID:0000000010924937
F

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR)

• The TSR system is only intended to be a support device to provide the driver with information. It is not a G
replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent
accidents due to carelessness. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.
• The Traffic Sign Recognition system is intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the driver's responsibility to H
stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road
signs.
• The Traffic Sign Recognition system may not function properly under the following conditions:
- When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windscreen in front of the front camera unit. I
- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
- When strong light enters the camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at
sunrise or sunset.) J
- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or
under a bridge.)
- In areas not covered by the navigation system.
K
- If there are deviations in relation to the navigation, for example due to changes in the road routing.
- When overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers.
Precautions for Drive Attention Alert INFOID:0000000010924938
L

DRIVE ATTENTION ALERT (DAA)

This system is not designed to assist driving impaired due to fatigue, or other causes. Be attentive at all times, M
and avoid driving when tired. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control of the vehicle, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
N

DAS

DAS-41
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (FRONT CAMERA UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (FRONT CAMERA UNIT)
CONSULT Function (LANE CAMERA) INFOID:0000000010924957

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT performs the following functions by communicating with the front camera unit.

Diagnosis mode Description

Work Support Performs the camera aiming.
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the name of a malfunctioning system stored in the front camera unit
Data Monitor Displays front camera unit input/output data in real time
ECU Identification Displays front camera unit part number
CAN Diag Support Monitor Displays a reception/transmission state of CAN communication

WORK SUPPORT

Work support items Description

AUTO AIM Outputs camera unit, calculates dislocation of the camera, and displays adjustment direction.
NOTE:
AIM CHECK
The item is displayed, but it is not used.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Refer to DAS-56, "DTC Index".
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
Front camera unit records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays
on CONSULT.

CONSULT screen item

Description
(Indication/Unit)
ODO/TRIP METER
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected.
(km/h)

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitored item
Description
(Unit)
CAMRA HIGH TEMP
Displays status of front camera unit high temperature judgment.
(Normal/High)
TURN SIGNAL
Displays status of “Turn signal” received from BCM via CAN communication.
(Off/LH/ RH/LH&RH)
WIPER
Displays the wiper operating status.
(Off/Lo/Hi)
VEHICLE SPEED Displays vehicle speed received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN com-
(km/h) munication.
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM SET
(NO REQ/BSW Off/BSW On/TSR Displays Driver Assist System setting status.
Off/TSR On/FEB Off/FEB On)
BRAKE OPERATION STATUS
Displays the brake operating status.
(Off/On/CNFRM/UNKWN)
AIMING DONE
Displays status that camera aiming is done.
(not finished/finished)

DAS-42
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (FRONT CAMERA UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Monitored item
Description
(Unit) A
AIMING RESULT
Displays result of camera aiming.
(NOK/OK)
STEERING ANGLE B
Displays the steering angle from the steering angle sensor.
(deg)
YAW RATE
Displays the yaw rate.
(deg/s) C
FCTRY AIM YAW
Displays the yaw angle result of camera aiming.
(deg)
FCTRY AIM ROL D
Displays the roll angle result of camera aiming.
(deg)
FCTRY AIM PIT
Displays the pitch angle result of camera aiming.
(deg) E
FEB OPERATION DISP
Displays the control operation of FEB.
(0, 1, 2, 3)
BSW LEFT DISP F
Displays BSW indicator LH status.
(0, 1)
BSW RIGHT DISP
Displays BSW indicator RH status.
(0, 1)
G
FCW STATUS DISPLAY NOTE:
(0, 1, 2, 3) The item is indicated, but not monitored.
BSW STATUS DISPLAY H
Displays status of BSW.
(0, 1, 2, 3)
FEB STATUS DISPLAY
Displays status of FEB.
(0, 1, 2, 3)
I
FCW BUZZER NOTE:
(0, 2, 4, 6, 7) The item is indicated, but not monitored.
FCW SETTING DISPLAY NOTE: J
(0, 1, 2, 3) The item is indicated, but not monitored.
BSW SETTING DISPLAY
Displays BSW setting status.
(0, 1, 2)
K
MOD SETTING DISPLAY
Displays MOD setting status.
(0, 1, 2)
FEB SETTING DISPLAY
Displays FEB setting status. L
(0, 1, 2)
DAA SETTING DISPLAY
Displays DAA setting status.
(0, 1, 2)
M
BSW IND BRIGHT DISP NOTE:
(0, 1, 2, 3) The item is indicated, but not monitored.
CLN RR CAMERA MSG
Displays the clean rear camera warning status. N
(0, 1)
FCW MALFUNCTION MSG NOTE:
(0, 1) The item is indicated, but not monitored.
DAS
DAA LEVEL DISPLAY
Displays DAA level status.
(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 14, 15)
DAA WARNING DISPLAY
Displays DAA warning indicator status. P
(0, 1)
LDW MALFUNCTION MSG
Displays LDW malfunction status.
(0, 1)
BSW MALFUNCTION MSG
Displays BSW malfunction status.
(0, 1)
CAMERA HI TEMP MSG
Displays status of front camera unit high temperature warning display output.
(0, 1)

DAS-43
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (FRONT CAMERA UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Monitored item
Description
(Unit)
FCW BLOCK MSG NOTE:
(0, 1) The item is indicated, but not monitored.
FEB BLOCK MSG
Displays FEB radar blockage status.
(0, 1)
FEB MALFUNCTION MSG
Displays FEB malfunction status.
(0, 1)
LDW FUNCTION
Displays LDW function status.
(NORMAL/MALF)
LDW SETTING DISPLAY
Displays LDW setting status.
(NTHNG/Off/On)
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM BZZR
Displays Driver Assist System warning buzzer status.
(NO REQ/BSW/LDW/MOD)
LDW LEFT
Displays the deviating status on the LH side lane.
(Off/On)
LDW RIGHT
Displays the deviating status on the RH side lane.
(Off/On)
LDW STATUS DISPLAY
Displays status Lane Departure Warning system.
(OFF/ON/TMP MF/ MF)
HBA FUNCTION
Displays High beam assist system function status.
(MALF/NORMAL/TP OFF)
HBA REQUEST
Displays High beam assist request status.
(NO REQ/LOW/HIGH/UNMBL)
LOW BEAM STATUS
Displays low beam status of the vehicle.
(Off/On)
HIGH BEAM STATUS
Displays high beam status of the vehicle.
(Off/On)
TSR STATUS
Displays setting of the TSR.
(Nothing/Off/On)
TSR FUNCTION
Displays TSR function status.
(NORMAL/MALF)
TSR SPEED LIMIT SIGN 1
Displays the speed limit sign indicator 1 status.
(km/h,mph)
TSR SPEED LIMIT SIGN 2
Displays the speed limit sign indicator 2 status.
(km/h,mph)
TSR SUPPLEMENT SIGN 1
(Display OFF/RAIN1/RAIN2/
Displays the supplementsign indicator 1.
SNOW/TOWING/AROW L/AROW
R/WHITE/TRUCK)
TSR SUPPLEMENT SIGN 2
(Display OFF/RAIN1/RAIN2/
Displays the supplementsign indicator 2.
SNOW/TOWING/AROW L/AROW
R/WHITE/TRUCK)
TSR SUPPLEMENT SIGN 3
(Display OFF/RAIN1/RAIN2/
Displays the supplementsign indicator 3.
SNOW/TOWING/AROW L/AROW
R/WHITE/TRUCK)
CAMERA INACTIVE CAUSE
Displays factors causing temporary breakdown of a function of front camera unit.
(FS1 - FS11)

DAS-44
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
A
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010924956

Item name Display content M

ODO/TRIP
METER Total driving distance (odometer value) upon DTC detection is displayed.
(km) N

DATA MONITOR
NOTE: DAS
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the around view monitor control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system. P

Display Item Remarks

DAS-45
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Display Item Remarks
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Receiving status of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
[ON/OFF] unit) is displayed by ON/OFF.
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL Receiving status of camera switch signal received from NAVI control unit is displayed by ON/
[ON/OFF] OFF.
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL Receiving status of camera OFF signal received from NAVI control unit is displayed by ON/
[ON/OFF] OFF.
Input type of steering angle sensor is displayed.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE
NOTE:
[Absolute]
For this vehicle, “Absolute” is displayed.
Type of steering gear ratio is displayed.
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE
NOTE:
[TYPE 0]
For this vehicle, “TYPE 0” is displayed.
STEERING POSITION
Steering position is displayed.
[RHD/LHD]
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Input status of rear camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
Indicates [On/Off] status of the washer switch signal input.
WASH SW
NOTE:
[OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.
R-CAMERA COMM STATUS
Communication status with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
R-CAMERA COMM LINE
Status of communication line with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Input status of front view camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
• Input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (LHD mod-
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG els)
[OK/NG] • Input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (RHD mod-
els)
• Input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (LHD mod-
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG els)
[OK/NG] • Input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (RHD mod-
els)
PUMP COMM STATUS
Communication status with pump control unit is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
ILL
Receiving status of dimmer signal received from BCM is displayed by ON/OFF.
[ON/OFF]
ITS SW 1 Indicates the state of the warning systems switch as seen by the around view monitor control
[ON/OFF] unit.
Indicates the state of the warning systems switch indicator output.
ITS SW 1 IND
NOTE:
[OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.
TURN SIGNAL
Indicates [OFF/LEFT/RIGHT] status of the turn signal input.
[OFF/LEFT/RIGHT]
Indicates the status of warning systems switch as seen by the around view monitor control unit.
ITS SW 2
NOTE:
[NO SET]
For this vehicle, “NO SET” is displayed.
Indicates the status of warning systems switch indicator output.
ITS SW 2 IND
NOTE:
[NO SET]
For this vehicle, “NO SET” is displayed.
VEHICLE SPEED
Vehicle speed from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
[km/h]
The stop/start status received from ECM is displayed.
IDLE STOP STATUS
NOTE:
[ON/OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.

DAS-46
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Display Item Remarks
A
TRAILER HITCH SW
The towed vehicle connection status is displayed.
[ON/OFF]
STEERING ANGLE
Steering angle received from steering angle sensor is displayed. B
[°]

WORK SUPPORT
C
Display Item Remarks
NON-VIEWABLE AREA REMINDER ON/OFF setting of the non-viewable area reminder can be performed.
REAR WIDE-VIEW FIXED GUIDE D
The position of rear wide view guiding line can be changed.
LINE CORRECTION
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE DIS-
ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed.
PLAY E
The calibration can be initialized to factory shipment condition.
INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALI- NOTE:
BRATION Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
F
Steering angle sensor neutral position can be adjusted and registered.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AD- CAUTION:
JUSTMENT For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS ac- G
tuator control unit side. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".
Performs the calibration of front camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE: H
(FRONT CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
• Performs the calibration of side camera RH. (LHD models)
I
• Performs the calibration of side camera LH. (RHD models)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
NOTE:
(PASS-SIDE CAMERA)
Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed. J
• Performs the calibration of side camera LH. (LHD models)
• Performs the calibration of side camera RH. (RHD models)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
NOTE:
(DR-SIDE CAMERA)
Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
K
formed.
Performs the calibration of rear camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE: L
(REAR CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
The confirmation and adjustment of the difference between each camera can be performed. M
FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW The fine adjustment function of camera calibration can check and adjust the difference be-
tween each camera.
Language of warning message shown during camera image display can be selected.
SELECT LANGUAGE OF WARNING N
[ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, DUTCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, PORTUGAL, RUSSIAN, JAP-
MESSAGE
ANESE, CHINESE 1 (TRADITIONAL), CHINESE 2 (SIMPLIFIED), KOREAN]
REAR CAMERA ITS Calibration for BSW can be performed.
DAS
NOTE:
CAUSE OF LDW CANCEL
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
CAUSE OF BSW CANCEL Displays causes of automatic system cancellation occurred during control of the BSW system.
P
Displays causes of automatic system cancellation occurred during control of the around view
CAUSE OF IPA CANCEL
monitor with Park Assist system.
NOTE:
• Causes of the maximum five cancellations (system cancel) are displayed.
• The displayed cancellation causes display the number of the ignition switch ON/OFF up to 254. It is fixed to
254 if it is over 254. It returns to 0 when the same cancellation cause is detected again.
Display Items for The Cause of BSW Cancel

DAS-47
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Cause of cancellation Description

Test items Description

DAS-48
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Test items Description
A
AIR ACTIVE Camera blower can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.
AIR & WASH ACTIVE Camera blower and washer can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.

LED LH INDICATOR B

Test item Operation Description BSW indicator LH

Stops transmitting the BSW indicator LH signal below to C
Off OFF
end the test
LED LH INDICATOR
Transmits the BSW indicator LH signal to the BSW indi-
On ON
cator D
LED RH INDICATOR
E
Test item Operation Description BSW indicator RH
Stops transmitting the BSW indicator RH signal below to
Off OFF
end the test
LED RH INDICATOR F
Transmits the BSW indicator RH signal to the BSW indi-
On ON
cator

WASH ACTIVE G

Test item Operation Description Rear camera washer

Test item Operation Description Rear camera air blower

Rear camera air blower and

Test item Operation Description
washer N
Stops transmitting the rear camera air blow / washer sig-
Off OFF
AIR & WASHER AC- nal below to end the test
TIVE Transmits the rear camera air blow / washer signal to DAS
On ON
the pump control unit via communication line
NOTE:
The test can be performed only when the trunk lid is closed. (Trunk room lamp switch is OFF.) P
CONFIGURATION
Configuration includes functions as follows.

DAS-49
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS-50
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

FRONT CAMERA UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010926629
B

VALUE ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

C
Monitor item Condition Value/Status
When the temperature around lane camera unit is adequate Normal
CAMERA HIGH TEMP
when the temperate around the lane camera unit is high High D
Turn signal lamp LH and RH blinking LH&RH
Turn signal lamp LH blinking LH
TURN SIGNAL E
Turn signal lamp RH blinking RH
Turn signal lamps OFF Off
Wiper position is High Hi F
WIPER Wiper position is Low Lo
Wiper position is OFF Off
VEHICLE SPEED While drive km/h
G

When no operation in setting display on combination meter NO REQ

When LDW Off is selected in setting display on combination meter LDW Off H
When LDW On is selected in setting display on combination meter LDW On
When BSW Off is selected in setting display on combination meter BSW Off
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM SET When BSW On is selected in setting display on combination meter BSW On I
When TSR Off is selected in setting display on combination meter TSR Off
When TSR On is selected in setting display on combination meter TSR On
J
When FEB Off is selected in setting display on combination meter FEB Off
When FEB On is selected in setting display on combination meter FEB On
When brake pedal is depressed Off K
When brake pedal is pressed On
BRAKE OPERATION STATUS
When brake pedal is pressed CFNRM
L
When brake pedal operation is not judged UNKWN
Camera aiming is completed finished
AIMING DONE
Camera aiming is not adjusted not finished M
Camera aiming is completed OK
AIMING RESULT
Camera aiming is not completed NOK
N
STEERING ANGLE When driving straight 0 ± 3.0 deg
YAW RATE Vehicle stopped 0 ± 3.0 deg/s
FCTRY AIM YAW Camera aiming is completed 0 ± 3.0 deg DAS
FCTRY AIM ROL Camera aiming is completed 0 ± 3.0 deg
FCTRY AIM PIT Camera aiming is completed 0 ± 3.0 deg
No display 0 P
Forward object is displayed 1
FEB OPERATION DISP
Approach warning is displayed 2
Collision warning is displayed 3
BSW is not operated for left side 0
BSW LEFT DISP
BSW is operated for left side 1

DAS-51
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Monitor item Condition Value/Status
BSW is not operated for right side 0
BSW RIGHT DISP
BSW is operated for right side 1
0

NOTE: 1
FCW STATUS DISPLAY
The item is displayed, but it is not monitored 2
3
BSW is OFF 0
BSW is ON 1
BSW STATUS DISPLAY
BSW indicator is flashing 2
BSW is malfunctioning 3
FEB is OFF 0
FEB is ON 1
FEB STATUS DISPLAY
FEB indicator is flashing 2
FEB is malfunctioning 3
0
2
NOTE:
FCW BUZZER 4
The item is displayed, but it is not monitored
6
7
0

NOTE: 1
FCW SETTING DISPLAY
The item is displayed, but it is not monitored 2
3
Nothing 0
BSW SETTING DISPLAY BSW is OFF 1
BSW is ON 2
Nothing 0
MOD SETTING DISPLAY MOD is OFF 1
MOD is ON 2
Nothing 0
FEB SETTING DISPLAY FEB is OFF 1
FEB is ON 2
Nothing 0
DAA SETTING DISPLAY DAA is OFF 1
DAA is ON 2
0

NOTE: 1
BSW IND BRIGHT DISP
The item is displayed, but it is not monitored 2
3
No display 0
CLN RR CAMERA MSG
Rear camera clean message is displayed 1

NOTE: 0
FCW MALFUNCTION MSG
The item is displayed, but it is not monitored 1

DAS-52
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Monitor item Condition Value/Status
A
No display 0
DAA OFF 1
DAA LEVEL DISPLAY DAA level (1 – 8) 2–9 B
DAA standby 14
DAA malfunction 15
No warning 0 C
DAA WARNING DISPLAY
DAA warning 1
No display 0
LDW MALFUNCTION MSG D
LDW malfunction message is displayed 1
No display 0
BSW MALFUNCTION MSG
BSW malfunction message is displayed 1 E
No display 0
CAMERA HI TEMP MSG
Front camera unit high temperature message is displayed 1
F
NOTE: 0
FCW BLOCK MSG
The item is displayed, but it is not monitored 1
No display 0 G
FEB BLOCK MSG
Radar blockage message is displayed for FEB 1
No display 0
FEB MALFUNCTION MSG H
FEB malfunction message is displayed 1
When LDW function is ON NORMAL
LDW FUNCTION
When LDW function malfunction is detected MALF I
Nothing NTHNG
LDW SETTING DISPLAY LDW is OFF Off
LDW is ON On
J

No request NO REQ

DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM BSW is requested BSW

K
BZZR LDW is requested LDW
MOD is requested MOD
Left side lane maker is not detected Off L
LDW LEFT
Left side lane maker is detected On
Right side lane maker is not detected Off
LDW RIGHT M
Right side lane maker is detected On
LDW is OFF OFF
LDW is ON ON N
LDW STATUS DISPLAY
LDW indicator is flashing TPM MF
LDW is malfunctioning MF
DAS
HBA is malfunctioning MALF
HBA FUNCTION HBA is normal NORMAL
HBA is unavailable TP OFF P
No request NO REQ
Low beam is requested LOW
HBA REQUEST
High beam is requested HIGH
HBA is unavailable UNMBL

DAS-53
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Monitor item Condition Value/Status
Low beam OFF Off
LOW BEAM STATUS
Low beam ON On
High beam OFF Off
HIGH BEAM STATUS
High beam ON On
Nothing Nothing
TSR STATUS TSR is OFF Off
TSR is ON On
TSR is normal NORMAL
TSR FUNCTION
TSR is malfunctioning MALF
km/h
TSR SPEED LIMIT SIGN 1 Speed limit 1 is displayed
mhp
km/h
TSR SPEED LIMIT SIGN 2 Speed limit 2 is displayed
mhp
No display Display OFF
Rain1 is displayed RAIN1
Rain2 is displayed RAIN2
Snow is displayed SNOW
TSR SUPPLEMENT SIGN 1 Towing is displayed TOWING
Arrow L is displayed AROW L
Arrow R is displayed AROW R
White box is displayed WHITE
Truck is displayed TRUCK
No display Display OFF
Rain1 is displayed RAIN1
Rain2 is displayed RAIN2
Snow is displayed SNOW
TSR SUPPLEMENT SIGN 2 Towing is displayed TOWING
Arrow L is displayed AROW L
Arrow R is displayed AROW R
White box is displayed WHITE
Truck is displayed TRUCK
No display Display OFF
Rain1 is displayed RAIN1
Rain2 is displayed RAIN2
Snow is displayed SNOW
TSR SUPPLEMENT SIGN 3 Towing is displayed TOWING
Arrow L is displayed AROW L
Arrow R is displayed AROW R
White box is displayed WHITE
Truck is displayed TRUCK

DAS-54
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Monitor item Condition Value/Status
A
The forward of front camera unit is completely blocked FS1
Occurrence of smear 1 from light source FS2
The forward of front camera unit is partially blocked FS3 B
Subjected to direct sunlight FS4
Subjected to spray of water FS5
CAMERA INACTIVE CAUSE Low visibility due to bad weather FS6 C
Heavy fog FS7
Occurrence of smear 2 from light source FS8
D
Unexpected road environment FS9
Subjected to the sun FS10
Icy road FS11 E

TERMINAL LAYOUT
F

JSOIA1370ZZ

I
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal No. J
Description
(Wire color) Standard val- Reference
Condition
Input/ ue (V) value (V)
+ – Signal name
Output
K
2
CAN- H — — — —
(L)
3 L
CAN - L — — — —
(R)
Ground
6 Battery volt-
Ignition power supply Input Ignition switch ON 12 – 14
(R) age
M
7
Ground — — 0 – 0.1 Approx. 0
(B)

Fail-safe (Front Camera Unit) INFOID:0000000010926630

FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC

DAS
LDW (Lane Departure Warning)
If a malfunction occurs in front camera unit, front camera unit cancels control, and turns ON the LDW malfunc-
tion in information display.
P
TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition)
If a malfunction occurs in front camera unit, front camera unit cancels control, and turns ON the TSR malfunc-
tion in information display.
FRONT CAMERA UNIT TEMPORARY OPERATION CANCELLATION
• Temporary disabled status at high temperature
- If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions, the system may be deactivated
automatically. And the system malfunction in information display.
DAS-55
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
- When interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operation automatically.
• When vehicle front identification is difficult
- When vehicle front identification is difficult due to soiling of windshield glass and strong light shining from the
front, operation may be canceled temporarily. At this time, a warning is displayed on the vehicle information
display in the combination meter.
- Normal operation recovers when conditions improve.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010926631

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.

Priority Detected items (DTC)

• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
1
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• C1B01: CAM AIMING INCMP
• C1B02: VHCL SPD DATA MALF
• C1B03: ABNRML TEMP DETECT
• C1B09: POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
• C1B0A: POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
• U0122: VDC CAN CIR 1 (LDP)
2
• U0126: STRG SEN CAN CIR 1
• U0155: METER CAN CIRC 1
• U0235: DIST SEN CAN CIRC 1
• U0416: VDC CAN CIR 2 (LDP)
• U0428: STRG SEN CAN CIR 2
• U0433: DIST SEN CAN CIRC 2
3 C1B00: CAMERA UNIT MALF

DTC Index INFOID:0000000010926632

×:Applicable

Fail-safe
DTC
LDW TSR Reference

C1B00 CAMERA UNIT MALF × × DAS-116

C1B01 CAM AIMING INCMP × × DAS-117
C1B02 VHCL SPD DATA MALF × × DAS-118
C1B03 ABNRML TEMP DETECT × × DAS-119
C1B09 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT × × DAS-120
C1B0A POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 × × DAS-120
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT × × DAS-121
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) × × DAS-122
U0122 VDC CAN CIR 1 (LDP) × × DAS-123
U0126 STRG SEN CAN CIR 1 × × DAS-124
U0155 METER CAN CIRC 1 × × DAS-125
U0235 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 1 × × DAS-126
U0416 VDC CAN CIR 2 (LDP) × × DAS-127
U0428 STRG SEN CAN CIR 2 – – DAS-128
U0433 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 2 – – DAS-129

DAS-56
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010926625

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B

Ignition switch When steering angle sensor signal is input ON D

ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF

Ignition switch When selector lever is in “R” ON

REVERSE SIGNAL
ON
E
When selector lever is in any position other than “R” OFF

Ignition switch When vehicle speed is input ON

VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF F
Ignition switch When camera switch signal is input ON
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF
When camera OFF signal is input ON
G
Ignition switch
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF
Ignition switch H
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE — Absolute
ON
Ignition switch
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE — TYPE 0
ON
I
Ignition switch LHD models LHD
STEERING POSITION
ON RHD models RHD
When rear camera image signal input status is normal OK J
Ignition switch
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL When rear camera image signal input status is not
ON NG
normal
Ignition switch K
WASH SW — OFF
ON
When communication status with rear camera is nor-
OK
Ignition switch mal L
R-CAMERA COMM STATUS
ON When communication status with rear camera is not
NG
normal
When communication line with rear camera is normal OK M
Ignition switch
R-CAMERA COMM LINE When communication line with rear camera is not nor-
ON NG
mal
When front camera image signal input status is nor- N
OK
Ignition switch mal
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
ON When front camera image signal input status is not
NG
normal DAS
When driver side camera image signal input status is
OK
Ignition switch normal
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
ON When driver side camera image signal input status is P
NG
not normal
When passenger side camera image signal input sta-
OK
Ignition switch tus is normal
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
ON When passenger side camera image signal input sta-
NG
tus is not normal

DAS-57
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch When communication signal is input OK

PUMP COMM STATUS
ON Other than the above NG

Ignition switch When lighting switch is ON ON

Ignition switch When a towing vehicle is connected ON

TRAILER HITCH SW
ON Other than the above OFF
Displays a value
STEERING ANGLE Ignition switch ON that corresponds to
the steering angle.

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA4749ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Without BSW

DAS-58
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Ignition
24
23 Camera image signal Output switch — I
(G)
ON

J
JSNIA0834GB

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
N
Rear camera image
27 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
signal (−)
ON
Ignition DAS
28 Rear camera power
27 Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(W) supply
ON
Ignition P
29 Driver side camera
Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(Y) ground
ON
Ignition
30 29 Driver side camera
Output switch — 5.0 - 9.0 V 6.0 V
(L) (Y) power supply
ON

DAS-59
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Driver side camera
31 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
image signal (−)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
32 Driver side camera
31 Input switch —
(G) image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
36 Passenger side cam-
35 Input switch —
(Y) era image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
40 Front camera image
39 Input switch —
(LG) signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

With BSW

DAS-60
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(B)
ON
C
Ignition
2 1
Battery power supply Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(Y) (B)
OFF
Ignition D
3 1
Ignition signal Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(SB) (B)
ON
Ignition Approx. 2 sec. after ignition E
7
Ground BSW indicator LH Output switch switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb 5.5 - 16 V 12.0 V
(R)
ON check).
Ignition Approx. 2 sec. after ignition F
8
Ground BSW indicator RH Output switch switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb 5.5 - 16 V 12.0 V
(G)
ON check)
27 Input/
— CAN-H — — — — G
(L) Output
28 Input/
— CAN-L — — — —
(R) Output
H
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status.

Communication sig- Ignition I

36
Ground nal Output switch —
(Y)
(CAMERA → PUMP) ON

J
PKIB5039J

Ignition
37 K
Ground COMM GND — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(V)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status. L

Communication sig- Ignition

38
Ground nal Input switch —
(SB) M
(PUMP → CAMERA) ON

PKIB5039J N
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.
DAS
Ignition
47
48 Camera image signal Output switch —
(G)
ON
P

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
Camera image signal
48 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
ground
ON

DAS-61
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status.

Ignition
49 52 Rear camera commu- Input/
switch —
(LG) (B) nication signal Output
ON

JSNIA0836GB

Ignition
53 Rear camera image
54 Input switch —
(W) signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
59 Driver side camera
60 Input switch —
(G) image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

DAS-62
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Input the waveform synchronized B
with the camera image signal.

Ignition C
65 Passenger side cam-
66 Input switch —
(Y) era image signal (+)
ON

D
JSNIA0834GB

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
J
Front camera image
72 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
signal (−)
ON
K
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010926626

DTC L
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
C1A00 Around view monitor control unit internal mal- Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
CONTROL UNIT function cel M
• The battery voltage sent to around view mon-
itor control unit remains less than 7.9 V for 5
C1A01 seconds Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
N
POWER SUPPLY CIRC • The battery voltage sent to around view mon- cel
itor control unit remains more than 19.3 V for
5 seconds
• BSW system is cancel DAS
If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from • DAA system is stopped.
C1A03 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) re- • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC ceived by the around view monitor control unit cancel
via CAN communication, are inconsistent • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
P
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• DAA system is stopped.
C1A04 If a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC system cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel

DAS-63
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
C1A07 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the CVT is malfunction
CVT CIRCUIT cel
• BSW system is cancel
C1A39 • DAA system is stopped.
If the steering angle sensor is malfunction
STRG SEN CIR • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
cancel
C1A56 The around view monitor control unit detects Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR CIRC that sonar control unit has a malfunction cel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0122 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0416 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U0428 stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- • BSW system is stopped.
sensor is not complete.
TION • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot • When communication of vehicle signal,
U1000
transmit/receive CAN communication signal wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
continuously for 2 seconds or more. is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- LDW system is stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
U1010 MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) stopped.
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition • Camera image is not displayed (Gray
U111A switch is ON. screen display).
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL NOTE: • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not stopped.
saved.
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.

DAS-64
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of front camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111C
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen B
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
C
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111D
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display). D
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
U112F Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the EPS system is malfunction E
EPS CIRCUIT cel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U1232
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle stopped. F
sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • BSW system is stopped.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
angle sensor is received. • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped. G
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
U1302
when ignition switch is turned ON. H
• When camera power supply output is ON: 5.9 Camera power output is stopped
CAMERA POWER VOLT
- 6.5 V
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply
measurement. I
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view • Unmatched icon display (red) is dis-
monitor control unit and information read played (applicable for unmatched camera J
U1304
from camera are not the same. only).
CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
NOTE: • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not cancel.
saved. K
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
trol unit is incomplete. • On applicable camera screen marking
U1305 (Red) is displayed.
NOTE: L
CONFIG UNFINISH • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. cancel.

• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is

U1308 stopped.
M
R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDG- Camera image calibration is incomplete • BSW system is stopped.
MNT • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped. N
Around view monitor control unit detects the
U1309
value of current from pump control unit is incor- BSW system is stopped.
PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE
rect
DAS
U130A PUMP ECU JUDGE If the pump control unit is malfunction BSW system is stopped.
Around view monitor control unit receives the • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U130B
incorrect communication signal from rear view stopped.
RR CAMERA COMM ERROR
camera • BSW system is stopped.
P

DAS-65
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
U1971 Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER correct signal from sonar control unit via CAN
cel
DIAG communication
Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
U1972 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
correct signal from EPS control unit via CAN
EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG cel
communication
When around view monitor control unit is not
Other Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010926627

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.

Priority Detected items (DTC)

DTC Index INFOID:0000000010926628

Fail-safe subject system

• A: Around View Monitor system
• B: MOD (Moving Object Detection)
• C: BSW (Blind Spot Warning)
• D: DAA (Driver Attention Alert)
• E: Around view monitor with Park Assist

DAS-66
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

U0416 VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS × (Orange) × × × AV-175

U0428 ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION × × (Orange) × × × AV-176
F
U1000NOTE CAN COMM CIRC × × (Orange) × × × AV-178
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) × AV-180
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-182
G
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-186
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-192 H
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-195
U112F EPS CIRCUIT × AV-201
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB × × (Orange) × × × AV-205 I
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT × AV-222
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIB × × AV-230
J
U1305NOTE CONFIG UNFINISH × AV-231
U1308 R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDGMNT × × AV-232
U1309 PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE × (Blue) × AV-233 K
U130A PUMP ECU JUDGE × (Blue) × AV-234
U130B RR CAMERA COMM ERROR × (Orange) × AV-235
L
U1320 REPROGRAMMING × AV-237
U150E BCM CIRCUIT × AV-238
U1971 SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG × AV-239 M
U1972 EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG × AV-240
NOTE:
N
Some systems activate fail-safe when U1000 is detected, and some do not.
• The systems which activate failsafe are those which use the signal from the control unit where communica-
tion with the around view monitor control unit is interrupted.
• When U1305 is detected, operates with vehicle settings set to default values. DAS

DAS-67
PUMP CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
PUMP CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010727914

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSOIA0648ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition Air pump operated 9.5 – 16 V 12 V
1 2 Air pump power sup-
Output switch
(SB) (LG) ply Air pump not operated 0 – 0.1 V 0V
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Air pump ground — switch — 0 –0.1 V 0V
(LG)
ON
Front window washer op-
Ignition 0 – 0.1 V 0V
3 5 Washer pump erated
Output switch
(GR) (B) ground Front window washer not
ON 9.5 –16 V 12 V
operated
Rear camera washer op-
Ignition 0 – 0.1 V 0V
4 5 Washer pump power erated
Output switch
(Y) (B) supply Rear camera washer not
ON 9.5 – 16 V 12 V
operated
Ignition
5
Ground Ground — switch — 0 – 0.1 V 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
6 Communication line
Ground — switch — 0 – 0.1 V 0V
(V) ground
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status.

Communication line Ignition

7
Ground (PUMP → CAM- Output switch —
(L)
ERA) ON

PKIB5039J

DAS-68
PUMP CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Input the waveform synchronized B
with the communication status.

Communication line Ignition C

8
Ground (CAMERA → Input switch —
(BR)
PUMP) ON

D
PKIB5039J

Ignition Rear washer switch is ON. 0 – 0.1 V 0V

9 5 E
Rear washer status Output switch Rear washer switch is
(LG) (B) 9.5 – 16 V 12 V
ON OFF.

Ignition Rear washer switch is ON. 9.5 – 16 V 12 V

10 5 Rear washer switch F
Input switch Rear washer switch is
(BR) (B) input 0 – 0.1 V 0V
ON OFF.
12 Ignition power sup-
Ground Input Ignition switch ON 12 – 14 V Battery voltage G
(LG) ply

DAS

DAS-69
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

WIRING DIAGRAM
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010727915

JROWC2843GB

DAS-70
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2844GB

DAS-71
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2845GB

DAS-72
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2846GB

DAS-73
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2847GB

DAS-74
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2848GB

DAS-75
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2849GB

DAS-76
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2850GB

DAS-77
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2851GB

DAS-78
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2852GB

DAS-79
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2853GB

DAS-80
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2854GB

DAS-81
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2855GB

DAS-82
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2856GB

DAS-83
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2857GB

DAS-84
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2858GB

DAS-85
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JROWC2859GB

DAS-86
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DAS

JROWC2860GB

DAS-87
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010727916

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JSOIA0654GB

DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION
It is also important to clarify the customer concerns before starting the inspection. Interview the customer
about the concerns carefully and understand the symptoms fully.
NOTE:
DAS-88
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
The customers are not professionals. Never assume that “maybe the customer means···” or “maybe the cus-
tomer mentioned this symptom”. A

>> GO TO 2.
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT B

1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.

2. Check if the DTC is detected on the self-diagnosis results of following.
C
- “LANE CAMERA”
- “AVM”
3. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data. D
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 3. E
3.PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS
Perform pre-inspection for diagnosis. F
• Camera aiming adjustment: DAS-97, "Inspection Procedure"
• Calibrating camera image: DAS-98, "Inspection Procedure"

G
>> GO TO 4.
4.ACTION TEST
Perform following systems action test to check the operation status. H
• LDW: DAS-91, "LDW : Work Procedure"
• BSW: DAS-92, "BSW : Work Procedure"
• TSR: DAS-94, "TSR : Work Procedure" I
• DAA: DAS-95, "DAA : Work Procedure"

>> GO TO 6. J
5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC
1. Check the DTC in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. K
- “LANE CAMERA”: DAS-56, "DTC Index"
- “AVM”: DAS-66, "DTC Index"
L
>> GO TO 8.
6.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS M
Perform symptom diagnosis. Specify malfunctioning part. Refer to DAS-140, "Symptom Table".

>> GO TO 7. N
7.MALFUNCTION PART REPAIR
Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts. DAS

>> GO TO 8.
8.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT) P
Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Check that any DTC is not detected. Erase DTC if DTC is detected
before the repair. Check that DTC is not detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 9.

DAS-89
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

9.REPAIR CHECK (ACTION TEST)

Perform following systems action test. Also check the system operation.
• LDW: DAS-91, "LDW : Work Procedure"
• BSW: DAS-92, "BSW : Work Procedure"
• TSR: DAS-94, "TSR : Work Procedure"
• DAA: DAS-95, "DAA : Work Procedure"
Does it operate normally?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 4.

DAS-90
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
ACTION TEST
A
LDW
LDW : Description INFOID:0000000010727917
B
• Perform action test to verify the customer's concern.
• Perform action test and check the system operation after system diagnosis.
WARNING: C
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
D
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-8, "Precaution for LDW System Service".
- System description for LDW: Refer to DAS-16, "LDW : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-40, "Precautions for Lane Departure Warning".
E
LDW : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010727918

WARNING:
F
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-8, "Precaution for LDW System Service". G
- System description for LDW: Refer to DAS-16, "LDW : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-40, "Precautions for Lane Departure Warning".
1.CHECK LDW SYSTEM SETTING H
1. Start the engine.
2. After starting the engine wait for 30 seconds or more.
3. Enable the setting of the LDW system on the combination meter. I
4. Turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 5 seconds or more.
5. Check that the previous setting is saved when the engine starts again.
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.ACTION TEST FOR LDW
K
1. Enable the setting of the LDW system on the combination meter.
2. Check the LDW operation according to the following table.
L
Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation Action
Vehicle Status of ve- Indication on the combination meter
Turn signal
speed hicle close to Buzzer
condition Upper part Middle part M
(Approx.) lane marker
White White

Less than N
55 km/h (34 Close to lane
— OFF
MPH) marker

DAS
JSOIA1422ZZ JSOIA1592ZZ

DAS-91
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation Action
Vehicle Status of ve- Indication on the combination meter
Turn signal
speed hicle close to Buzzer
condition Upper part Middle part
(Approx.) lane marker
Orange (Blink) Orange (Blink)

• OFF
Short
• ON (Op-
Close to lane continu-
posite to
marker ous
the devi-
beeps
ate side)
60 km/h (37 JSOIA1367ZZ JSOIA1594ZZ
MPH) or
more White White

ON (Devi- Close to lane

OFF
ate side) marker

JSOIA1422ZZ JSOIA1592ZZ

NOTE:
After the operating conditions of warning are satisfied, the warning continues until the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 55 km/h (34 MPH). Refer to DAS-16, "LDW : System Description".

>> INSPECTION END

BSW
BSW : Description INFOID:0000000010727919

Always perform the Blind Spot Warning system action test to check that the system operates normally after
replacing the around view monitor control unit or repairing any Blind Spot Warning system malfunction.
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-8, "Precaution for BSW System Service".
- System description for Blind Spot Warning: Refer to DAS-18, "BSW : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-40, "Precautions for Blind Spot Warning".
BSW : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010727920

WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-8, "Precaution for BSW System Service".
- System description for Blind Spot Warning: Refer to DAS-18, "BSW : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-40, "Precautions for Blind Spot Warning".
1.CHECK BSW SYSTEM SETTING
1. Start the engine.
2. After starting the engine wait for 30 seconds or more.
3. Check that the BSW system setting can be enabled/disabled on the combination meter.
4. Turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 5 seconds or more.
5. Check that the previous setting is saved when the engine starts again.

>> GO TO 2.
2.BSW SYSTEM ACTION TEST
DAS-92
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
1. Enable the setting of the BSW system on the combination meter.
2. Check BSW operation according to the following table. A

Vehicle condition/ Driver's opera-

Action
tion
B
Status of Indication on the combination meter
vehicle Indication
Vehicle Turn sig-
detection on the
speed nal con- Buzzer
within de- BSW indi- Upper part Middle part C
(Approx.) dition
tection cator
area
White White D

Less than
29 km/h — — OFF OFF E
(18 MPH)

JSOIA1423ZZ JSOIA1597ZZ
F
White White

Vehicle is G
— not de- OFF OFF
tected
H
JSOIA1423ZZ JSOIA1597ZZ

White White
I

Vehicle is
OFF ON OFF
detected
J

32 km/h JSOIA1423ZZ JSOIA1597ZZ

(20 MPH) K
or more Orange (Blink) Orange (Blink)
Before
turn sig- Short
nal oper-
Blink
contin- L
ates uous
Vehicle is beeps
ON detected
(vehicle JSOIA1425ZZ JSOIA1600ZZ
M
detect-
ed direc- Orange (Blink) Orange (Blink)
tion)
Vehicle is N
detected
after turn Blink OFF
signal op-
erates DAS

JSOIA1425ZZ JSOIA1600ZZ

NOTE: P
• If vehicle speed exceeds approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH), BSW function operates until the vehicle
speed becomes lower than approximately 29 km/h (18 MPH).
• Time shown in the figure is approximate time.

>> INSPECTION END

TSR

DAS-93
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
TSR : Description INFOID:0000000010927844

• Perform action test to verify the customer's concern.

• Perform action test and check the system operation after system diagnosis.
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-8, "Precaution for TSR System Service".
- System description for TSR: Refer to DAS-21, "TSR : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-41, "Precautions for Traffic Sign Recognition".
TSR : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010927845

WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-8, "Precaution for TSR System Service".
- System description for TSR: Refer to DAS-21, "TSR : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-41, "Precautions for Traffic Sign Recognition".
1.CHECK TSR SYSTEM SETTING
1. Start the engine.
2. After starting the engine wait for 30 seconds or more.
3. Enable the setting of the TSR system on the combination meter.
4. Turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 5 seconds or more.
5. Check that the previous setting is saved when the engine starts again.

>> GO TO 2.
2.ACTION TEST FOR LDW
1. Enable the setting of the TSR system on the combination meter.
2. Check the TSR operation according to the following table.

Display on combination meter

System status Condition
Upper part Middle part

TSR OFF — —

JSOIA1611ZZ

DAS-94
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Display on combination meter
System status Condition A
Upper part Middle part

B
Road sign
not detect- —
ed
C

JSOIA1612ZZ

This is an example. For details of dis- D

played signs, refer to DAS-21, "TSR :
System Description"
Road sign
detected E
(except for —
TSR ON speed limit
signs)
F
JSOIA1613ZZ

This is an example. For details of dis- This is an example. For details of dis-
played signs, refer to DAS-21, "TSR : played signs, refer to DAS-21, "TSR : G
System Description" System Description"
Road sign
detected H
(Speed limit
signs)

I
JSOIA1614ZZ JSOIA1615ZZ

J
>> INSPECTION END
DAA
DAA : Description INFOID:0000000010927846
K

Always perform the TSR system action test to check that the system operates normally after replacing the
around view monitor control unit or repairing any TSR system malfunction. L
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION: M
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-9, "Precaution for DAA System Service".
- System description for DAA: Refer to DAS-24, "DAA : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-41, "Precautions for Drive Attention Alert". N

DAA : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010927847

DAS
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Fully understand the following items well before the road test; P
- Precautions: Refer to DAS-9, "Precaution for DAA System Service".
- System description for DAA: Refer to DAS-24, "DAA : System Description".
- Handling precaution: Refer to DAS-41, "Precautions for Drive Attention Alert".
1.CHECK DAA SYSTEM SETTING
1. Start the engine.
2. After starting the engine wait for 30 seconds or more.

DAS-95
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
3. Check that the DAA system setting can be enabled/disabled on the combination meter.
4. Turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 5 seconds or more.
5. Check that the previous setting is saved when the engine starts again.

>> GO TO 2.
2.ACTION TEST FOR DAA
1. Enable the setting of the DAA system on the combination meter.
2. Check the DAA operation according to the following table.

Vehicle condition/ Driv- Driver’s condi- Vehicle speed

Action Display on combination meter
er’s operation tion (Approx.)
0 km/h (0 MPH) ≤
Vehicle speed <
— — —
60 km/h (37
DAA ON MPH)
More than 60 km/
Normal Level indicator: Blue —
h (37 MPH)

>> INSPECTION END

DAS-96
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS (CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS (CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT)
A
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010917455

1.CHECK CAMERA LENS AND WINDSHIELD B

Are camera lens and windshield contaminated with foreign materials?

C
YES (When the camera lens is contaminated with foreign materials.)>>Replace front camera unit (Refer to
DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".) and GO TO 2.
YES (When the windshield is contaminated with foreign materials.)>>Clean windshield.
NO >> GO TO 2. D
2.CHECK FRONT CAMERA UNIT INSTALLATION CONDITION
Check front camera unit installation condition (installation position, properly tightened, a bent bracket). E
Is it properly installed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Install front camera unit properly, and perform camera aiming. F
3.CHECK VEHICLE HEIGHT
Check vehicle height. Refer to FSU-24, "Wheelarch Height".
Is vehicle height appropriate? G
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair vehicle to appropriate height.
H

DAS

DAS-97
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS (CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS (CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE)
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010727921

1.CHECK REAR CAMERA LENS

Are rear camera lens contaminated with foreign materials?
YES >> Clean rear camera lens.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR CAMERA INSTALLATION CONDITION
Check rear camera installation condition (e.g. position, looseness, bent in back door).
Is it properly installed?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Install rear camera properly, and perform rear camera calibration. Refer to DAS-110, "Work Pro-
cedure (Preparation)".

DAS-98
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING FRONT CAMERA UNIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000010917456

Always adjust the camera aiming after removing and installing or replacing the front camera unit. B
CAUTION:
The system does not operate normally unless the camera aiming adjustment is performed. Always
perform it.
C
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010917457

1.CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT D

Perform the camera aiming adjustment with CONSULT. Refer to DAS-100, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".

>> GO TO 2. E
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform the self-diagnosis of front camera unit with CONSULT. Check if any DTC is detected. F
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to DAS-56, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3. G
3.LDW AND TSR SYSTEM ACTION TEST
1. Perform the LDW and TSR system action test. Refer to DAS-91, "LDW : Work Procedure" (LDW) and
DAS-94, "TSR : Work Procedure" (TSR). H
2. Check that the LDW and TSR system operates normally.

>> WORK END I

DAS

DAS-99
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
Description INFOID:0000000010917460

Always adjust the camera aiming after removing and installing or replacing the front camera unit.
CAUTION:
• Place the vehicle on level ground when the camera aiming adjustment is operated.
• Be sure to place the target correctly according to work procedures because the system may not
operate normally.
• Follow the CONSULT when performing the camera aiming. (Camera aiming adjustment cannot be
operated without CONSULT.)
Work Procedure (Preparation) INFOID:0000000010917461

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis of front camera unit.
Is any DTC detected?
Except “C1B01”>>Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the applicable item. Refer to
DAS-56, "DTC Index".
“C1B01” or no DTC>>GO TO 2.
2.PREPARATION BEFORE CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
1. Perform pre-inspection for diagnosis. Refer to DAS-97, "Inspection Procedure".
2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value.
3. Maintain no-load in vehicle.
4. Check if coolant and engine oil are filled up to correct level and fuel tank is full.
5. Shift the selector lever to “P” position and release the parking brake. (CVT models)
6. Shift the shift lever to “N” position and release the parking brake.(M/T models)
CAUTION:
Use wheel chocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving.
7. Clean the windshield.
8. Completely clear off the instrument panel.
NOTE:
If any fixed object is put on instrument panel, cover the upper of the instrument panel with black cloth to
prevent an object from reflecting in the windshield.

>> GO TO 3.
3. PREPARATION OF AIMING ADJUSTMENT JIG
Prepare the aiming adjustment jig according to the following procedure and the figure.
1. Prepare six sheets of white paper and black paper, respectively, with dimensions of 120 mm (4.72 in) ×
120 mm (4.72 in) to create a left target and right target.
NOTE:
Correct the magnification of print and print the target mark sample in the service manual on the black
paper. Refer to DAS-104, "Work Procedure (Target Mark Sample)".
2. Tape three sheets of black paper and three sheets of white
paper together to make a target of 360 mm (14.17 in) × 240 mm
(9.45 in).

L : 120 mm (4.72 in)

W : 120 mm (4.72 in)
NOTE:
• Use a transparent tape.
• Never apply tape to target surface.
• Never allow a clearance on the black and white boundary.
JSOIA1426ZZ

3. Stick a printed target mark on the board with a scotch tape or a piece of double-sided tape.
NOTE:
• Use the board that peripheral area of the target is monochrome such as a white-board.
DAS-100
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
• Notice that the cross of the target is horizontal and vertical.
A

F
JSOIA1661ZZ

Board String Cone

G
Center between two targets

Side of a target (Ts) : 120 mm (4.72 in) H

Height of a target lower end (Hti) : 1180 mm (46.46 in)
Height of a target center (Ht) : 1300 mm (51.18 in)
I
Height of a target upper end (Htu) : 1420 mm (55.91 in)
Width between a right target cen- : 720 mm (28.35 in)
ter from a left target center (Dbt) J
W1 : 180 mm (7.09 in)
W2 : 180 mm (7.09 in)
K
>> Proceed to DAS-101, "Work Procedure (Target Setting)".
Work Procedure (Target Setting) INFOID:0000000010917462 L

CAUTION:
• Be sure to place the target correctly according to work procedures because the system may not
M
operate normally.
• Perform this operation in a horizontal position where there is a clear view for 5 m (16.4 ft) forward
and 3 m (9.84 ft) wide.
• Place the target in a well-lighted location. (Poor lighting may make it hard to adjust.) N
• The target may not be detected when there is a light source within 1.5 m (4.92 ft) from either side and
within 1 m (3.28 ft) upward/downward from the target.
• Check the location of the sun. (Sunlight should not shine directly on the front of the vehicle.) DAS
• The target may not be detected when there is the same pattern of black and white as the target when
the pattern is within 1 m (3.28 ft) from either side and upward/downward position from the target. (It
is desirable that the vehicle is positioned on the opposite side of a single-color wall.)
1. TARGET SETTING
P

DAS-101
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JSOIA1662GB

– ( – ) : 3000 mm (118.11 in)

1. Mark points “A”, “B”, “C” and “D”at the center of the lateral sur-
face of each wheels.
NOTE:
Hang a string with a cone from the fender so as to pass through
the center of wheel, and then mark a point at the center of the
lateral surface of the wheel.
2. Draw line “LH” passing through points “A” and “B” on the left side
of vehicle.
NOTE:
Approximately 4 m (13.12 ft) or more from the front end of vehi-
cle.
JSOIA1043GB
3. Mark point “E” on the line “LH” at the positions 3000 mm (118.11
in) from point “A”.
4. Draw line “RH” passing through points “C” and “D” on the right side of vehicle in the same way as step 2.
NOTE:
Approximately 4 m (13.12 ft) or more from the front end of vehicle.
5. Mark point “F” on the line “RH” at the positions 3000 mm (118.11 in) from point “C”.
6. Draw line “FW” passing through the points “E” and “F” on the front side of vehicle.
7. Mark point “X” at the center of point “E” and “F” on the line “FW”.
CAUTION:
Make sure that “E” to “X” is equal to “F” to “X”.
8. Place a target on either side of point “X”. Each distance from point “X” must be equal each other.

JSOIA1663GB

DAS-102
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

>> Proceed to DAS-103, "Work Procedure (Camera Aiming Adjustment)". A

Work Procedure (Camera Aiming Adjustment) INFOID:0000000010917463

CAUTION: B
Perform the adjustment under unloaded vehicle condition.
1.CHECK VEHICLE HEIGHT C
Measure the wheelarch height. Calculate “Dh”.

Dh [mm] = (Hfl + Hfr) ÷ 2 − 800 D

Hfl: Front left wheelarch height [mm]
Hfr: Front right wheelarch height [mm]
CAUTION: E
Be sure to measure wheelarch height correctly.
NOTE:
“Dh” may be calculated as a minus value. F
JSOIA1046GB

>> GO TO 2.
2.CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT G

With CONSULT
CAUTION: H
Operate CONSULT outside the vehicle, and close all the doors. (To retain vehicle attitude appropri-
ately)
1. Select “Work Support” on “LANE CAMERA” with CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTO AIM”. I
3. Confirm the following items;
- The target should be accurately placed.
- The vehicle should be stopped. J
4. Select “CHANGE SET” to perform camera aiming.
CAUTION:
• Never select “CHANGE SET” when the target is not accurately placed.
• Wait 5 seconds or more after selecting “CHANGE SET”. K
5. Input “Dh”.
6. Input the following parameters, and then select “CHANGE SET”.
L
Htu : 1420 mm
Htl : 1180 mm
Dt : 3000 mm M
Ts : 120 mm
Dbt : 720 mm
N
VP :3
7. Confirm the displayed item.
- “Normally Completed”: Select “Completion”. DAS
- “SUSPENSION”, “ABNORMALLY COMPLETED”: Perform the following services.

Displayed item Possible cause Service procedure

P
Temporary malfunction in internal processing of the front
— Go back to step 1.
camera unit.
00H Routine not ac-
Front camera unit malfunction. Position the target appro-
SUSPENSION tivated
priately again.
• Temporary malfunction in internal processing of the Then perform the aiming
10H Writing error front camera unit. again.
• Front camera unit malfunction.

DAS-103
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Displayed item Possible cause Service procedure
Front camera unit cannot detect the target
• A target is not -yet-placed.
• The position of the targets is not correct.
• The position of the front camera unit is not correct.
2
• Inappropriate work environment.
• Inappropriate vehicle condition.
• Input value is not correct against actual setting posi-
tion.
Roll angle is outside the threshold
• The position of the targets is not correct.
• The position of the front camera unit is not correct.
3 • Inappropriate work environment.
• Inappropriate vehicle condition.
• Input value is not correct against actual setting posi-
tion.
Position the target appro-
The size of target is different. (A numerical value input to
ABNORMALLY COM- priately again.
CONSULT differs from detected size)
PLETED Then perform the aiming
• The position of the targets is not correct.
again.
• The position of the front camera unit is not correct.
4
• Inappropriate work environment.
• Inappropriate vehicle condition.
• Input value is not correct against actual setting posi-
tion.
Yow/pitch angle is outside the threshold.
• The position of the targets is not correct.
• The position of the front camera unit is not correct.
7 • Inappropriate work environment.
• Inappropriate vehicle condition.
• Input value is not correct against actual setting posi-
tion.
Waiting for the start or aiming. (Insufficient passage of
13 time from key SW ON to the start of aiming.)
• Inappropriate work environment.
NOTE:
Replace camera unit if “00H Routine not activated” or “10H Writing error” are repeatedly indicated during the
above two services are performed.
8. Confirm that “Normally completed” is displayed and then select “End” to close the adjustment procedure.

>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis of “LANE CAMERA” with CONSULT.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the applicable item. Refer to DAS-
56, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.ACTION TEST
Perform the LDW and TSR system action test. Refer to DAS-91, "LDW : Work Procedure" (LDW) or DAS-94,
"TSR : Work Procedure" (TSR).

>> WORK END

Work Procedure (Target Mark Sample) INFOID:0000000010917464

NOTE:

DAS-104
CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Change the magnification of print to 250 mm (9.84 in) × 250 mm (9.84 in) and print the target mark sample.
A

DAS

JSOIA0633ZZ

DAS-105
REAR VIEW CAMERA WASHER/AIR BLOWER FUNCTION INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
REAR VIEW CAMERA WASHER/AIR BLOWER FUNCTION INSPECTION
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010727922

1.CHECK REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR BLOWER FUNCTION

1. Start the engine.
2. Select the ACTIVE TEST item “AIR&WASH ACTIVE” of “AVM” with CONSULT.
NOTE:
Before function check, perform the following items:
• Fill with washer fluid.
• Perform ACTIVE TEST item “WASH ACTIVE” of “AVM” with CONSULT for 4 seconds.
3. With operating the test item, check the operation.
Is it properly operated?
Washer fluid ejects 4 - 6 times. (Normal function)>>INSPECTION END.
Washer fluid ejects 7 times or more.>>Properly install or replace air tube.
Washer fluid ejects only once>> Properly install or replace air tube.
Washer fluid does not eject>>Properly install washer tube or replace washer tube and check valve.

DAS-106
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CON-
TROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR
A
CONTROL UNIT
Description INFOID:0000000010931470
B
• Always perform the around view monitor control unit configuration after replacing the around view monitor
control unit.
• Always perform the around view monitor calibration after removing and installing or replacing the rear cam- C
era.
• Always perform the rear camera calibration after removing and installing or replacing the rear camera.
• Always perform the rear camera calibration after replacing the around view monitor control unit.
• Always perform the around view monitor calibration after replacing the around view monitor control unit. D
CAUTION:
The system does not operate normally unless the around view monitor and rear camera calibration are
performed. Always perform it. E
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010931471

1.AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION F

Perform the around view monitor control unit configuration with CONSULT. Refer to AV-159, "CONFIGURA-
TION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
G

>> GO TO 2.
2.AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT CALIBRATION H
Perform the around view monitor calibration with CONSULT. Refer to AV-161, "CALIBRATING CAMERA
IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure".
I
>> GO TO 3.
3.REAR CAMERA CALIBRATION J
Perform the rear camera calibration with CONSULT. Refer to DAS-110, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".

>> GO TO 4. K
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform the self-diagnosis of around view monitor control unit with CONSULT (AVM). Check if any DTC is L
detected.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index". M
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.LDW AND BSW SYSTEM ACTION TEST
1. Perform the BSW and DAA system action test. Refer to DAS-92, "BSW : Work Procedure" (BSW) and N
DAS-95, "DAA : Work Procedure" (DAA).
2. Check that the BSW and DAA system operates normally.
DAS
>> WORK END

DAS-107
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010931472

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

CONSULT Configuration
Perform “Before Replace ECU”, and save the current vehicle specification in CONSULT.
Is the vehicle specification saved normally?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT Configuration
Select “Configuration” or “After Replace ECU”, and write the vehicle specification saved in CONSULT to
around view monitor control unit.

>> GO TO 6.
4.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT Self Diagnostic Result

DAS-108
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Perform self-diagnosis of CONSULT, and check whether or not DTC U1305 is detected.
Is DTC U1305 detected? A
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 7.
7.OPERATION CHECK B

Check that the operation of the around view monitor control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and
predictive course lines) are normal.
C

>> WORK END

DAS

DAS-109
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
Description INFOID:0000000010727932

• Always perform the rear camera calibration after removing and installing or replacing the rear camera.
• Always perform the rear camera calibration after replacing the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
• Place the vehicle on level ground when the calibration is operated.
• Follow the CONSULT when performing the calibration. (Rear camera calibration cannot be operated
without CONSULT.)
Work Procedure (Preparation) INFOID:0000000010727933

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis of the camera control unit with CONSULT (AVM).
Is any DTC detected?
Except “U1308”>>Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the applicable item. Refer to
AV-120, "DTC Index".
“U1308” or no DTC>>GO TO 2.
2.PREPARATION BEFORE REAR CAMERA CALIBRATION
1. Perform pre-inspection for diagnosis. Refer to DAS-98, "Inspection Procedure".
2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value.
3. Maintain no-load in vehicle.
4. Check if coolant and engine oil are filled up to correct level and fuel tank is full.
5. Shift the selector lever to “P” position and release the parking brake.
6. Clean the rear camera.

>> GO TO 3.
3.PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION TARGET MARK
1. Prepare six sheets of white paper and black paper, respectively, with dimensions of 200 mm (7.87 in) ×
200 mm (7.87 in) to create a left target, right target, and center target.
NOTE:
Correct the magnification of print and print the target mark sample in the service manual on the black
paper. Refer to DAS-114, "Work Procedure (Target Mark Sample)".
2. Tape two sheets of black paper and two sheets of white paper
together to make a target of 400 mm (15.75 in) × 400 mm (15.75
in).

W : 200 mm (7.87 in)

L : 200 mm (7.87 in)
NOTE:
Use a transparent tape.

JSOIA0635ZZ

3. Create two more targets according to step 2.

DAS-110
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JSOIA0630ZZ F

W1 : 200 mm (7.87 in) W2 : 400 mm (15.75 in)

L1 : 200 mm (7.87 in) L2 : 400 mm (15.75 in)
G
Left target and right target Center target

>> Refer to DAS-111, "Work Procedure (Target Setting)". H

Work Procedure (Target Setting) INFOID:0000000010727934

I
CAUTION:
• Perform this operation in a horizontal position where there is a clear view for 3 m (9.84 ft) backward
and 4 m (13.12 ft) wide.
• Place the target in a well-lighted location. (Poor lighting may make it hard to adjust.) J
• The target may not be detected when it shines by the reflected light of the sun or lighting.
• The target may not be detected when there is the same pattern of black and white as the target when
the pattern is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft) from either side and upward/downward position from the target. (It K
is desirable that the target is positioned on the single-color floor.)
1.TARGET SETTING
L

DAS

JSOIA1098GB

DAS-111
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Distance between B and E : 1,444 mm (56.85 in)

Distance between D and F : 1,444 mm (56.85 in)
Distance W1 : 1,500 mm (59.06 in)
Distance W2 : 1,500 mm (59.06 in)
Distance L : 1,444 mm (56.85 in)

1. Mark points “A”, “B”, “C” and “D” at the center of the lateral sur-
face of each wheel.
NOTE:
Hang a string with a cone from the fender so as to pass through
the center of wheel, and then mark a point at the center of the
lateral surface of the wheel.
2. Draw line “LH” passing through points “A” and “B” on the left side
of vehicle.
NOTE:
Approximately 2.2 m (7.22 ft) or more at the rear from the rear
axle.
PKIB7667E
3. Mark point “E” on the line “LH” at the positions 1,444 mm (56.85
in) from point “B”.
4. Draw line “RH” passing through points “C” and “D” on the right side of vehicle in the same way as step 2.
NOTE:
Approximately 2.2 m (7.22 ft) or more at the rear from the rear axle.
5. Mark point E on the line “RH” at the positions 1,444 mm (56.85 in) from point “D”.
6. Draw line “RW” passing through the points “E” and “F” on the rear of vehicle.
NOTE:
Approximately 1.8 m (5.91 ft) or more at both left and right sides from vehicle center.
7. Mark point “Ct” at the center of point “E” and “F” on the line “RW”.
CAUTION:
Make sure that “E” to “Ct” is equal to “F” to “Ct”.
8. Mark point “Lt” and “Rt” on the line “RW” at the positions 1,500 mm (59.06 in) from point “Ct”.
9. Position the center of the target mark to point of “Ct”, “Lt” and “Rt”.
CAUTION:
To perform an accurate calibration, check that the black-and-white pattern is as shown in the fig-
ure. The pattern of the center target differs from that of right/left target.

JSOIA1097GB

W1 : 1,500 mm (59.06 in)

W2 : 1,500 mm (59.06 in)
L : 1,444 mm (56.85 in)

DAS-112
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
>> Refer to DAS-113, "Work Procedure (Rear Camera Calibration)".
A
Work Procedure (Rear Camera Calibration) INFOID:0000000010727935

CAUTION:
For accuracy, perform the calibration under the specified vehicle condition (Fuel full, no-load, speci- B
fied tire pressure, etc.). Refer to DAS-110, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".
1.CHECK REAR CAMERA HEIGHT
C
Measure the rear camera height.

JSOIA0634ZZ

H: Rear camera height. H

>> GO TO 2.
I
2.REAR CAMERA CALIBRATION
1. Select “Work Support” on “AVM” with CONSULT.
2. Select “REAR CAMERA ITS” and then touch “Start”. J
3. Touch “OK”.
4. Input the rear camera height “H”, and then touch “APPLY”.
5. Confirm that the same value is displayed on the center display.
K
6. Confirm the following items;
- The target should be accurately placed.
- The vehicle should be stopped.
- The vehicle should be under the specified vehicle condition. L
7. Select “Start” to perform camera aiming.
CAUTION:
To properly maintain vehicle attitude, operate CONSULT outside the vehicle with all the doors M
closed.
8. Confirm the displayed item.
- “Completed”: Select “Completion”.
- “Not completed”: Perform the following services. N

DAS

DAS-113
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Displayed item Code Possible causes Service procedure

• Position the target appropriately again. (Center)
Refer to DAS-111, "Work Procedure (Target
• A target is not-yet-placed. (Center)
11 Setting)".
• Target mark reflects the light. (Center)
• Shut out the light reflecting on target mark.
(Center)
• Position the target appropriately again. (Right)
Refer to DAS-111, "Work Procedure (Target
• A target is not-yet-placed. (Right)
12 Setting)".
• Target mark reflects the light. (Right)
• Shut out the light reflecting on target mark.
(Right)
• Position the target appropriately again. (Left)
• A target is not-yet-placed. (Left) Refer to DAS-111, "Work Procedure (Target
13
• Target mark reflects the light. (Left) Setting)".
• Shut out the light reflecting on target mark. (Left)
21 A target is dirty. (Center) Clean target mark. (Center)
22 A target is dirty. (Right) Clean target mark. (Right)
23 A target is dirty. (Left) Clean target mark. (Left)
Check the error contents
using the screen of naviga- • Set target mark direction as shown in the figure.
tion system. • The position of the target is not correct. (Center)
(Center) Refer to DAS-111, "Work Procedure (Target
51 • Target mark reflects the light. (Center) Setting)".
• The position of the rear camera is not • Shut out the light reflecting on target mark.
correct. (Center)
• Install rear camera properly
• Set target mark direction as shown in the figure.
• The position of the target is not correct. (Right)
(Right) Refer to DAS-111, "Work Procedure (Target
52 • Target mark reflects the light. (Right) Setting)".
• The position of the rear camera is not • Shut out the light reflecting on target mark.
correct. (Right)
• Install rear camera properly
• Set target mark direction as shown in the figure.
• The position of the target is not correct.
(Left)
(Left)
Refer to DAS-111, "Work Procedure (Target
53 • Target mark reflects the light. (Left)
Setting)".
• The position of the rear camera is not
• Shut out the light reflecting on target mark. (Left)
correct.
• Install rear camera properly

>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform self-diagnosis of around view monitor control unit with CONSULT (AVM).
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the applicable item. Refer to AV-
120, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.ACTION TEST
Perform the BSW and DAA system action test. Refer to DAS-92, "BSW : Work Procedure" (BSW) and DAS-
95, "DAA : Work Procedure" (DAA).

>> WORK END

Work Procedure (Target Mark Sample) INFOID:0000000010727936

NOTE:

DAS-114
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Change the magnification of print to 200 mm (7.87 in) × 200 mm (7.87 in) and print the target mark sample.
A

DAS

JSOIA0633ZZ

DAS-115
C1B00 CAMERA UNIT MALF
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
C1B00 CAMERA UNIT MALF
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765932

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CAMERA UNIT MALF
C1B00 If lane camera unit is malfunctioning
(Camera unit malfunction)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Front camera unit
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition ON.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1B00” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAM-
ERA”.
Is “C1B00” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765933

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Check if any DTC other than “C1B00” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAMERA”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-56, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-116
C1B01 CAM AIMING INCMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
C1B01 CAM AIMING INCMP
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765934

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CAM AIMING INCMP
C1B01 Camera aiming is not completed
(Camera aiming incomplete)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Front camera aiming is not completed
• Front camera aiming adjustment has been interrupted
E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW F
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1B01” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAM- H
ERA”.
Is “C1B01” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-117, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765935

1.CAMERA AIMING ADJUSTMENT K

1. Perform the camera aiming. Refer to DAS-100, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".
2. Erase all self-diagnosis results with CONSULT.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
L
4. Check if the “C1B01” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAMERA”.
Is “C1B01” detected?
YES >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation". M
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-117
C1B02 VHCL SPD DATA MALF
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
C1B02 VHCL SPD DATA MALF
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010836777

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
VHCL SPD DATA MALF Front camera unit receives an error signal from ABS actuator and electric unit
C1B02
(Vehicle speed data malfunction) (control unit) via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Front camera unit
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1B02” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAM-
ERA”.
Is “C1B02” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-118, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010836778

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-118
C1B03 ABNRML TEMP DETECT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
C1B03 ABNRML TEMP DETECT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765936

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ABNRML TEMP DETECT
C1B03 Temperature around front camera unit is excessively high
(Abnormal temperature detect)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Interior room temperature is excessively high
• Front camera unit
E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW F
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1B03” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAM- H
ERA”.
Is “C1B03” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-119, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765937

1.COOLING FRONT CAMERA UNIT K

1. Wait for 10 minutes or more to cool the front camera unit.
2. Erase All self-diagnosis results with CONSULT.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
L
4. Check if the “C1B03” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAMERA”.
Is “C1B03” detected?
YES >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation". M
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-119
C1B09 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT, C1B0A POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
C1B09 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT, C1B0A POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT2
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765938

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
C1B09 Front camera unit iginition voltage is greater than 16 V for 5 seconds
(Power supply circuit)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
C1B0A Front camera unit iginition voltage is less than 10.5 V for 5 seconds
(Power supply circuit 2)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness, connector, or fuse
• Front camera unit
• Power supply circuit
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1B09” is detected as the current malfunction on the self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAM-
ERA”.
Is “C1B09” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-120, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765939

1.CHECK FRONT CAMERA UNIT SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply and ground circuit of front camera unit. Refer to DAS-131, "FRONT CAMERA UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

DAS-120
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765940

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CAN COMM CIRCUIT Front camera unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal
U1000
(CAN communication circuit) for 2 seconds or more.
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW
• TSR F
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction on the self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAM- H
ERA”.
Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-121, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765941

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC K

1. Start the engine.
2. Erases DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
L
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> INSPECTION END M

DAS

DAS-121
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765942

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of front cam-
U1010
[Control unit(CAN)] era unit.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Front camera unit
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction on the self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAM-
ERA”.
Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-122, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765943

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

1. Start the engine.
2. Erases DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to DAS-122, "DTC Description".
Is “U1010” detected?
YES >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-122
U0122 VDC CAN CIR1 (LDP)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U0122 VDC CAN CIR1 (LDP)
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765944

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
VDC CAN CIR1(LDP)
[Vehicle dynamic control CAN Front camera unit receives incorrect signal (P-RUN) from ABS actuator and
U0122
circuit1 (Lane departure preven- electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. D
tion)]

POSSIBLE CAUSE
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E

FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• LDW F
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0122” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0122”.
H
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
I
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON. J
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0122” is detected as the current malfunction on the self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAM-
ERA”.
K
Is “U0122” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-123, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
L
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765945

M
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0122” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0122”.
Is applicable DTC detected? N
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT DAS

Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS” using CONSULT.

Are any DTCs detected? P
YES >> Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-123
U0126 STRG SEN CAN 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U0126 STRG SEN CAN 1
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765946

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
STRG SEN CAN CIR1 Front camera unit receives an error signal from steering angle sensor via CAN
U0126
(Steering sensor CAN circuit1) communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
The following systems are canceled.
• LDW
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0126” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0126”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0126” is detected as the current malfunction on the self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAM-
ERA”.
Is “U0126” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-124, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765947

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “U0126” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0126”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-124
U0155 METER CAN 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U0155 METER CAN 1
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765948

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

C
METER CAN CIRC 1 Front camera unit receives an error signal from combination meter via CAN
U0155
(Meter CAN circuit 1) communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
Combination meter
FAIL-SAFE
The following systems are canceled. E
• LDW
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “U0155” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0155”. G
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2. H
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
I
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0155” is detected as the current malfunction on the self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAM-
ERA”. J
Is “U0155” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-125, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". K
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765949
L
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0155” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0155”. M
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK COMBINATION METAER SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A” using CONSULT.
DAS
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".
P

DAS-125
U0235 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U0235 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 1
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010836773

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
DIST SEN CAN CIRC 1 If front camera unit detects an error signal that is received from distance sensor
U0235
(Distance Sensor CAN circuit 1) via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Distance sensor
• Front camera unit
FAIL-SAFE
The following systems are canceled.
• LDW
• TSR
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0235” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0235”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAMERA” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DAS-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010836774

1.CHECK DISTANCE SENSOR SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/RADAR” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to BRC-247, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-126
U0416 VDC CHECKSUM DIAG
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U0416 VDC CHECKSUM DIAG
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010836768

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
VDC CAN CIR2(LDP)
[Vehicle dynamic control CAN Front camera unit receives incorrect signal (P-RUN) from ABS actuator and elec-
U0416
circuit1 (Lane departure preven- tric unit (control unit) via CAN communication. D
tion)]

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E
• Front camera unit
FAIL-SAFE
The following systems are canceled. F
• LDW
• TSR
G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
1. Turn ignition ON. H
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAMERA” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DAS-127, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010836769

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
K
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index". L
NO >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

DAS

DAS-127
U0428 STRG SEN CAN 2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U0428 STRG SEN CAN 2
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010765950

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
STRG SEN CAN CIR2 If front camera unit detects an error signal that is received from steering angle
U0428
(Steerg sensor CAN circuit2) sensor via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
None
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0428” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0428”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the LDW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0428” is detected as the current malfunction on the self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAM-
ERA”.
Is “U0428” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-128, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010765951

1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY

If DTC “U0428” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0428”.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-128
U0433 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
U0433 DIST SEN CAN CIRC 2
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010836775

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition

C
DIST SEN CAN CIRC 2 If front camera unit detects an error signal that is received from distance sensor
U0433
(Distance sensor CAN circuit 2) via CAN communication

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Distance sensor
• Front camera unit
FAIL-SAFE E
None
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
F
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC “U0433” is displayed with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U0433”.
Is applicable DTC detected? G
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable. Refer to DAS-121, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT H

1. Start the engine.

2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LANE CAMERA” using CONSULT.
I
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DAS-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010836776

K
1.CHECK DISTANCE SENSOR SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “LASER/RADAR” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected? L
YES >> Refer to BRC-247, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".
M

DAS

DAS-129
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011064017

1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
With stop/start system

Power source Fuse No.

Battery #63
Ignition switch ON or START #56

Without stop/start system

Power source Fuse No.

Battery #16
Ignition switch ON or START #30
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.
With BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Condition
Terminal Standard Reference voltage
Connector (+) (–) voltage (Approx.)
Ignition
Terminal switch

2 OFF
M101 1 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
3 ON

Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit

Condition
Terminal Standard Reference voltage
Connector (+) (–) voltage (Approx.)
Ignition
Terminal switch

Around view monitor control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M101 1 Existed

DAS-130
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Without BSW

Around view monitor control unit A

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M24 1 Existed
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair the around view monitor control unit ground circuit. C
PUMP CONTROL UNIT
PUMP CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727940
D
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses. E

Power source Fuse No.

Ignition power supply 33
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. G
2.CHECK PUMP CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between pump control unit harness connector and ground.
H

Terminal
Condition
(+) (-) Standard Reference I
Pump control unit voltage voltage
Ignition
Connector Terminal switch
Ground OFF 0 - 0.1 V 0V
J
B74 12 Battery volt-
ON 12 - 14 V
age
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the pump control unit power supply circuit.
L
3.CHECK PUMP CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the pump control unit connector. M
3. Check for continuity between pump control unit harness connector and ground.

Pump control unit N

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B74 5 Existed
DAS
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair the pump control unit ground circuit.
P
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
FRONT CAMERA UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010836887

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

DAS-131
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
With stop/start system
Signal name Fuse No.
Ignition power supply #56

Without stop/start system

Signal name Fuse No.
Ignition power supply #30
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front camera unit connector.
3. Check voltage between front camera unit connector and ground.

Front camera unit Voltage

Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

Ignition switch: OFF

R22 6 — Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between front camera unit connector and ground.

Front camera unit

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
R22 7 — Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

DAS-132
REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010727941

1.REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION B

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Select the “DATA MONITOR” mode of “AVM” with CONSULT. C
3. Check “R-CAMERA COMM STATUS” indication under the following conditions.

Monitor Item Condition Status D

R-CAMERA COMM Rear camera image is
OK
STATUS displayed
NOTE: E
Refer to AV-78, "System Description" for around view monitor operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> DAS-133, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727942
G

1.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL

1. Turn the ignition switch ON. H
2. Check the signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector terminals.

Terminal I
Around view monitor control unit
Condition Reference value
Terminal
Connector J
(+) (−)

M102 49 52 Ignition switch ON

JSNIA0836GB

Is the inspection result normal? M

YES >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN N
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the around view monitor control unit connector and rear camera connector.
3. Check the continuity between the around view monitor control unit harness connector and the rear cam- DAS
era harness connector.

Around view monitor con- P

Rear camera
trol unit Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M102 49 D177 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

DAS-133
REAR CAMERA COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

3.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

Check the continuity between the around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.

Around view monitor con-

trol unit Continuity
Ground
Connector Terminal
M102 49 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the rear camera. Refer to AV-270, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

DAS-134
WASHER PUMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
WASHER PUMP CIRCUIT
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010727943

1.CHECK WASHER PUMP CIRCUIT B

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Select the ACTIVE TEST item “WASH ACTIVE” of “AVM” with CONSULT.
3. With operating the test item, check the operation. C

On : Rear camera washer is activated.

Off : Rear camera washer is not activated. D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> DAS-135, "Diagnosis Procedure" E

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727944

F
1.CHECK WINDSHIELD WASHER OPERATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Operates windshield washer switch. G
Is the operation normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair windshield washer circuit. H
2.CHECK REAR CAMERA WASHER PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear camera washer pump connector. I
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Select the ACTIVE TEST item “WASH ACTIVE” of “AVM” with CONSULT.
5. Check voltage between rear camera washer pump harness connector and ground. J

Terminal
(+) (−) K
Voltage
Rear camera washer pump (Approx.)

Connector Terminal Ground

L
E69 1 12 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> Repair rear camera washer pump power supply circuit.
3.CHECK REAR CAMERA WASHER PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
N
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect pump control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between rear camera washer pump harness connector and the pump control unit har-
ness connector. DAS

Rear camera washer pump Pump control unit

Continuity P
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E69 1 B74 3 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace pump control unit. Refer to DAS-153, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

DAS-135
WASHER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
WASHER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727945

1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect pump control unit connector and combination switch connector.
3. Check continuity between combination switch harness connector and pump control unit harness connec-
tor.

Pump control unit Combination switch

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B74 10 M31 9 Existed
4. Check continuity between pump control unit harness connector and the ground.

Pump control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B74 10 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace pump control unit. Refer to DAS-153, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

DAS-136
REAR WASHER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
REAR WASHER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727946

1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT B

Pump control unit Combination switch D

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B74 9 M31 11 Existed
E
4. Check continuity between pump control unit harness connector and the ground.

Pump control unit

Continuity F
Connector Terminal Ground
B74 9 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> Replace pump control unit. Refer to DAS-153, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
H

DAS

DAS-137
BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727947

1.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit harness connector and BSW indicator harness connector.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and BSW indicator harness
connector.

Around view monitor control

BSW indicator
unit Continuity

Connector Terminal Connector Terminal

7 D30 (LH)
M101 1 Existed
8 D12 (RH)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 2
Check continuity between BSW indicator harness connector and ground.

BSW indicator
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
D30 (LH)
4 Existed
D12 (RH)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
3.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector and ground.

Around view monitor control

unit Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
7
M101 Not existed
8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
4.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE OUTPUT
1. Connect around view monitor control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between BSW indicator harness connector and ground.

DAS-138
BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

Terminal A
(+) (−) Voltage
Condition
BSW indicator (Approx.)
B
Connector Terminal
D30 (LH) Ground Approx. 2 sec.
after ignition
1 12 V C
D12 (RH) switch
OFF ⇒ ON
Is the inspection result normal?
D
YES >> Replace BSW indicator.
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".
E

DAS

DAS-139
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010727948

Before performing diagnosis, check that it is not a symptom caused by normal operation. Refer to DAS-147,
"Description".

Symptom Confirmation item Inspection item/Reference page

System settings cannot be
turned ON/OFF
All of system display does not illuminate
LDW/BSW system display does Refer to DAS-142, "Diagnosis
not illuminate Procedure"
Combination meter
Other information display is not illuminated
Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index"
Remove the front camera unit
LDW Refer to DAS-149, "Removal
and Installation".
Information display is func-
tioning normally Remove the around view moni-
LDW/BSW warning display does tor control unit
BSW
not illuminate (Buzzer is func- Refer to AV-268, "Removal and
tioning normally) Installation".
On board diagnosis function
(Combination meter)
Information display is not functioning normally
Refer to MWI-84, "On Board Di-
agnosis Function".
LDW/BSW/DAA warning buzzer Chime does not sound. Refer to
is not sounding (Warning display — DAS-143, "Diagnosis Proce-
is functioning normally) dure".
LDW system operates even
when using turn signal
LDW system operates even when using turn signal
Refer to DAS-145, "Diagnosis
Procedure".
LDW is not functioning normally
Warning functions are not timely Front camera unit aiming adjust-
• Does not function when driving on lane markers ment
• Functions when driving in a lane Refer to DAS-100, "Work Proce-
• Functions in a different position from the actual position dure (Preparation)".
Check cause of auto-cancel with
BSW
The system operates once but is cancelled
Refer to DAS-45, "CONSULT
Function".
BSW system does not operates
even when using turn signal. Re-
BSW system does not operates even when using turn signal
fer to DAS-146, "Diagnosis Pro-
cedure".
BSW is not functioning normally
Refer to DAS-138, "Diagnosis
BSW indicator does not illuminate
Procedure".
Warning functions are not timely
• Does not function when approaching to an adjacent vehicle
Rear camera calibration
• Functions even when the vehicle does not approach to an
Refer to DAS-110, "Work Proce-
adjacent vehicle.
dure (Preparation)".
• Functions in a different position from the actual position
• Functions when driving in the middle of lane
Rear camera washer is not acti-
Refer to DAS-135, "Component
vated (Windshield washer is —
Function Check".
functioning normally)
Refer to DAS-106, "Inspection
Rear camera wash is insufficient —
Procedure".

DAS-140
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
Symptom Confirmation item Inspection item/Reference page
A
Remove the around view moni-
tor control unit
DAA is not functioning normally A warning is issued even when the driver is in normal condition
Refer to AV-268, "Removal and
Installation". B
Remove the around view moni-
tor control unit
Information display is functioning normally
Refer to AV-268, "Removal and
Installation".
C
DAA warning display does not il-
luminate On board diagnosis function
(Combination meter)
Information display is not functioning normally D
Refer to MWI-84, "On Board Di-
agnosis Function".
• A road sign different from actual one is displayed or no road Remove the front camera unit
TSR is not functioning normally sign is displayed Refer to DAS-149, "Removal E
• A road sign is displayed despite no road sign and Installation".
Remove the front camera unit
Information display is functioning normally Refer to DAS-149, "Removal
and Installation".
F
TSR display does not illuminate* On board diagnosis function
(Combination meter)
Information display is not functioning normally G
Refer to MWI-84, "On Board Di-
agnosis Function".
*: Check if the road sign can be displayed with TSR. Refer to DAS-21, "TSR : System Description".
H

DAS

DAS-141
SYSTEM SETTINGS CANNOT BE TURNED ON/OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
SYSTEM SETTINGS CANNOT BE TURNED ON/OFF
Description INFOID:0000000010727949

System setting is not selectable on the combination meter.

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
• Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
• Driver Attention Alert (DAA)
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is in ACC position, each system settings cannot be changed.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727950

1.CHECK SYSTEM SETTING

1. Start the engine.
2. Check that the each system settings is selectable on the combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 (LDW/TSR)>>GO TO 3.
NO-1 (BSW/DAA)>>GO TO 4.
2.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAMERA”, “AVM” and “METER/M&A”.
Refer to the following.
- LAME CAMERA: DAS-56, "DTC Index"
- AVM: DAS-66, "DTC Index"
- METER/M&A: MWI-105, "DTC Index"
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK DATA MONITOR OF FRONT CAMERA UNIT
Check that “LDW STATUS DISPLAY” or “TSR STATUS” operates normally in “DATA MONITOR” of “LANE
CAMERA” with CONSULT.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to MWI-84, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STERING SWITCH
Operate the steering switch to check that the information display on the combination meter operate properly.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 (LDW/TSR)>>Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".
YES-2 (BSW/DAA)>>Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installa-
tion"].
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

DAS-142
CHIME DOES NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
CHIME DOES NOT SOUND
A
Description INFOID:0000000010727951

The warning chime does not sound when the system is warning to driver. B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727952

1.CHECK THE VEHICLE SPECIFICATION C

Check the vehicle specification.

D
With sonar system>>GO TO 2.
Without sonar system>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM ACTIVE TEST E
Check if the warning chime sounds on the active test item “FRONT BUZZER” of “SONAR” with CONSULT.
Does the warning chime sound?
YES >> GO TO 4. F
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK OPERATION OF METER BUZZER G
Check operation of meter buzzer. Refer to WCS-54, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. H
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM DURING WARNING CHIME OPERATION
Understand the vehicle ahead detection condition when the malfunction occurred. If the warning chime should I
have sounded, replace the front camera unit or the around view monitor control unit. Refer to following.
• LDW: DAS-30, "LDW : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch"
• BSW: DAS-33, "BSW : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch" J
• DAA: DAS-38, "DAA : Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch"
Does the warning chime sound?
YES >> INSPECTION END K
NO (LDW does not sound.)>>GO TO 5.
NO (BSW or DAA does not sound.)>>GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS L
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the “U1000” is detected in self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAMERA”.
Is “U1000” detected? M
YES >> Check the CAN communication and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-121,
"DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 7. N
6.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT. DAS
2. Check if the “U1000” is detected in self-diagnosis results of “AVM”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Check the CAN communication and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Refer to AV-178, P
"AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 8.
7.REPLACE FRONT CAMERA UNIT
Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 9.

DAS-143
CHIME DOES NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

8.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT

Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK IF THE EACH SYSTEM IS NORMAL.
1. Erase “self-diagnosis result”, and then perform “All DTC Reading” again after performing the action
test.Refer to the following.
- Lane Departure Warning (LDW): DAS-91, "LDW : Work Procedure"
- Blind Spot Warning (BSW): DAS-92, "BSW : Work Procedure"
- Driver Attention Alert (DAA): DAS-95, "DAA : Work Procedure"
2. Check if the each system is normal.

>> INSPECTION END

DAS-144
THE SYSTEM OPERATES EVEN WHEN USING TURN SIGNAL
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
THE SYSTEM OPERATES EVEN WHEN USING TURN SIGNAL
A
Description INFOID:0000000010727953

The warning of Lane Departure Warning (LDW) is activated during the use of a turn signal. B
NOTE:
For the operational conditions of Lane Departure Warning (LDW), refer to DAS-16, "LDW : System Descrip-
tion".
C
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727954

1.CHECK TURN SIGNAL OPERATION D

Check that both right and left turn signals are normal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. E
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Refer to EXL-176, "Symptom Table" (LED HEADLAMP) or
EXL-361, "Symptom Table" (HALOGEN HEADLAMP).
2.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS F
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “LANE CAMERA”. Refer to DAS-56, "DTC Index".
G
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
NO >> Replace the front camera unit. Refer to DAS-149, "Removal and Installation".
H

DAS

DAS-145
THE SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN WHEN USING TURN SIGNAL
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
THE SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN WHEN USING TURN SIGNAL
Description INFOID:0000000010727955

The warning of Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is not activated during the use of a turn signal.
NOTE:
For the operational conditions of BSW, refer to DAS-18, "BSW : System Description".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010727956

1.CHECK TURN SIGNAL OPERATION

Check that both right and left turn signals are normal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Refer to EXL-176, "Symptom Table" (LED HEADLAMP),
or EXL-361, "Symptom Table" (HALOGEN HEADLAMP).
2.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “AVM” Refer to
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
NO >> Replace the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-146
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000010727957

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) B

• If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically, and the LDW malfunction message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
• LDW system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not C
steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the
vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
• LDW system will not operate at speeds below approximately 70 km/h (45 MPH) or if it cannot detect lane
markers. D
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
• LDW system may not function properly under the following conditions:
- On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; E
yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt or snow,
etc.
- On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
- On roads where there are sharp curves. F
- On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or
lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
- On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates. G
- When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
- When traveling close to the vehicle in front of driver, which obstructs the front camera unit detection range.
- When the road surface is very dark due to weak ambient light or impaired tail lamp.
H
- When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the front camera unit.
- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
- When strong light enters the front camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehi-
cle at sunrise or sunset.) I
- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or
under a bridge.)
• When driving on a curved road, warning will be late on the outside of the curve.
J
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
• The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact
with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the K
direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
• The rear camera may not function properly under the following conditions:
- When towing a trailer.
- When strong light enters the rear camera. (For example, direct sunlight or headlight from the rear) L
- When ambient brightness changes instantly. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or
passes under a bridge.)
• Automatic washer and blower may not be able to secure detection capability when excessive dirt adheres on M
the camera lens.
• The rear camera may not be able to detect when certain objects are present such as:
- Pedestrians, bicycles, animals
- Several types of vehicles such as motorcycles and very short length vehicle N
- Oncoming vehicles
- A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
- A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly. DAS
- A vehicle that merges or changes lanes rapidly directly next to your vehicle.
• The rear camera may not be able to detect property when your vehicle travels beside the middle section of a
vehicle with long wheelbase (for example, trailer truck, semi-trailer, tractor).
• The rear camera detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, P
the camera unit may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the camera unit
may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
• The rear camera is designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operating condition.
• The rear camera may detect reflection image of vehicles or roadside objects that are not actually in the
detection zone, especially when the road is wet.

DAS-147
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR)
• The TSR system is only intended to be a support device to provide the driver with information. It is not a
replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent
accidents due to carelessness. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.
• The Traffic Sign Recognition system is intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the driver's responsibility to
stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road
signs.
• The Traffic Sign Recognition system may not function properly under the following conditions:
- When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windscreen in front of the front camera unit.
- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
- When strong light enters the camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at
sunrise or sunset.)
- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or
under a bridge.)
- In areas not covered by the navigation system.
- If there are deviations in relation to the navigation, for example due to changes in the road routing.
- When overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers.
DRIVE ATTENTION ALERT (DAA)
This system is not designed to assist driving impaired due to fatigue, or other causes. Be attentive at all times,
and avoid driving when tired. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control of the vehicle, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.

DAS-148
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

FRONT CAMERA UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010946215
B
CAUTION:
• Never remove the front camera unit bracket and the camera/sensor cover bracket from windshield
glass. C
• The front camera unit bracket and the front camera unit bracket must be replaced together with
windshield glass as an assembly.
D

K
JSOIA1633ZZ

Camera/sensor cover bracket Front camera unit bracket Front camera unit L
Camera/sensor cover
: Metal clip
M
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010946216

REMOVAL N
1. Remove the camera/sensor cover in the order from 1 to 2 shown
in the figure.
DAS
: Metal clip
: Pawl
P

JSOIA1634ZZ

2. Disconnect front camera unit connector.

DAS-149
FRONT CAMERA UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
3. Release front camera unit fixing pawls using removal tool,
and then remove front camera unit from front camera unit
bracket.

JSOIA1635ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Must be perform additional service when replacing front camera unit. Refer to DAS-99, "Work Proce-
dure".
• Never give an impact to the front camera unit.
• Perform the camera aiming every time the front camera unit is removed and installed. Refer to DAS-
100, "Work Procedure (Preparation)".

DAS-150
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010727958

Refer to AV-268, "Removal and Installation". B

DAS

DAS-151
REAR CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
REAR CAMERA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010727959

Refer to AV-270, "Removal and Installation".

DAS-152
PUMP CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
PUMP CONTROL UNIT
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010727960

REMOVAL B
1. Remove luggage rear plate. Refer to INT-41, "LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove pump control unit mounting nuts , disconnect pump
control unit connector and remove pump control unit . C

JSOIA1380ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G

DAS

DAS-153
AIR PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
AIR PUMP
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010727961

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the air tube .

JSOIA1381ZZ

2. Remove bolt and harness clip, disconnect air pump connec-

tor and remove air pump.

JSOIA1382ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

DAS-154
REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR NOZZLE & TUBE
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010727962

REAR VIEW CAMERA WASHER / AIR NOZZLE & TUBE B

JSOIA1383ZZ
K
Grommet Air tube Air pump assembly
Rear camera with air/washer nozzle Washer pump Clip
L
NOTE:
For washer pump, refer to DAS-161, "Removal and Installation".
M
HYDRAULIC LAYOUT

DAS

DAS-155
REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

JSOIA1384ZZ

Washer pump Back door Rear camera with air/washer nozzle

Air pump
Washer tube Air tube

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010727963

REMOVAL
1. Remove front fender protector RH. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front kicking plate (inner). Refer to INT-24, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove dash side finisher. Refer to INT-26, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove headlining assembly. Refer to INT-37, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View".
6. Remove washer tube from washer tank and tube clip .

JSOIA1385ZZ

7. Remove washer tube from tube clip , then pull washer tube towards interior with grommet .
NOTE:
Do not allow washer fluid to spill in the vehicle.

: Vehicle front

JSOIA1386ZZ

DAS-156
REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]

8. Remove washer tube from tube clip . A

JSOIA1387ZZ
D

9. Remove washer tube from harness protector clip .

JSOIA1557GB
L

10. Remove washer tube from tube clip .

DAS

JSOIA1389ZZ

DAS-157
REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
11. Remove washer tube from tube clip .

JSOIA1390ZZ

12. Remove washer tube from tube clip and joint .

JMLIA5025ZZ

13. Remove air tube from tube clip .

JSOIA1392ZZ

DAS-158
REAR CAMERA WASHER/AIR NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
14. Remove air tube protector .
A

JSOIA1393ZZ

D
15. Since the following washer/air tubes are not replaceable, replace back door assembly when replacement
is necessary due to malfunction:
• Between joint described in Step 12 and the rear camera assembly E
• Between air tube protector described in Step 14 and the rear camera assembly

INSTALLATION F
Note the following items, then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Securely install grommet to prevent the entry of water and dirt.
G
• Check washer tube for bend and damage.
• Align the mark of rear camera washer/air tube with the vehicle installation position.

DAS

DAS-159
BSW INDICATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
BSW INDICATOR
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010727964

REMOVAL
1. Remove the door mirror corner cover. Refer to MIR-27, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove the bolt and remove BSW indicator.

JSOIA1395ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

DAS-160
WASHER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM]
WASHER PUMP
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010727965

G
AWOIA0072ZZ

1. Washer pump (Front / rear washer) 2. Packing 3. Rear camera wash-

er pump H
4. Washer tank
: Vehicle front
I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010727966

REMOVAL J
1. Remove the front fender protector RH. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear camera K
washer pump and then remove the rear camera washer tube
.
L
: Vehicle front

JMLIA4858ZZ
N

3. Remove the rear camera washer pump from washer tank.

4. Remove the packing from washer tank seal. DAS
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: P
Add water to the top of washer tank inlet after installing. Check that no leaks exist.

DAS-161
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Information INFOID:0000000010724535

• Both “VDC” and “ESP” are used in this manual. These indicate the same system.
• Both “hill start assist” and “Uphill start support” are used in this manual. These indicate the same system.
• Both “advanced hill descent control” and “downhill drive support” are used in this manual. These indicate the
same system.
• Both “active trace control” and “dynamic cornering enhancement” are used in this manual. These indicate
the same system.

DAS-162
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010735360

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key K
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
L
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition M
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
N
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of DAS
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE: P
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

DAS-163
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.

D4D engine : 20 minutes

• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).

SKIB8766E

DAS-164
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE: A
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost.
B

SKIB8767E

D
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communica-
tion line.
E
Precaution for Chassis Control INFOID:0000000010721685

• Never disassemble the chassis control module.

• The parts must not be reused if they are dropped. F
• Never perform ACTIVE TEST while driving the vehicle.
• When the active trace control function and the active ride control function are activated, the driver may feel
some vibration on the brake pedal, hear operating sound, or have feel of the deceleration. This is not a mal- G
function because it is caused by active engine brake function that is normally operated.
• When the active engine brake function is activated, engine sound becomes loud or the tacho meter needle
fluctuates. This is not a malfunction because it is caused by active engine brake function that is normally
operated. H
• Active trace control function, active engine control function and active ride control function are not always
activated in any driving conditions.
I

DAS

DAS-165
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010721686

LHD MODELS

JSOIA1533ZZ

Upside of instrument lower panel RH

No. Component parts Function

Chassis control module DAS-167, "Chassis Control Module"

RHD MODELS

JSOIA1226ZZ

Upside of instrument lower panel LH

DAS-166
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

No. Component parts Function A

Chassis control module DAS-167, "Chassis Control Module"

Chassis Control Module INFOID:0000000010721687 B

Chassis control module controls the following systems based on the

signals from each sensor, each switch, and each control unit.
C
• Active trace control function
• Active engine control function
• Active ride control function
D

JSOIA1227ZZ

DAS

DAS-167
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000010721688

• Chassis control to integrally control the driving system was adopted.

• Chassis control module inputs the necessary information for control from CAN communication and each
switch and integrally controls each system. Refer to the following table for systems controlled and input out-
put signals.

Function Reference page

DAS-173, "ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL
Active trace control function (DYNAMIC CORNERING ENHANCE-
MENT) FUNCTION : System Description"
DAS-179, "ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE
Active engine control function
FUNCTION : System Description"
DAS-182, "ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL
Active ride control function
FUNCTION : System Description"

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
TCM is applied to CVT models.

JSOIA1446GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

DAS-168
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

Component parts Signal description A

Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Engine speed signal
B
ECM • Estimate drive torque signal
• Request drive torque signal
• ECM malfunction signal
• Request drive torque status signal C
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Front LH wheel speed signal
• Front RH wheel speed signal
• Rear LH wheel speed signal
D
• Rear RH wheel speed signal
• TCS operation signal
• VDC operation signal E
• Side G signal
• VDC OFF switch signal
• Brake fluid pressure signal
• Steering angle signal F
• VDC accept permission signal
• ABS operation signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
• Vehicle speed signal
unit)
• Decel G signal G
• ABS malfunction signal
• VDC malfunction signal
• TCS malfunction signal
• Yaw rate signal H
• EBD operation signal
• EBD malfunction signal
• hill start assist display request signal
• hill descent control display request signal
I
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Active trace control signal
• Active engine brake control signal J
• Active ride control signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM • Turn signal switch signal K
• Brake pedal position switch signal
• BCM malfunction signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication. L
IPDM E/R
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Current gear position signal M
• CVT target gear ratio signal
TCM
• CVT accept permission signal
• Input speed signal
• TCM malfunction signal N

DAS

DAS-169
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Component parts Signal description
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Active trace control setting change request signal
• Active engine brake setting change request signal
• Combination meter malfunction signal
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Curve display request signal
• Tire display request signal
Combination meter • Active trace control setting display request signal
• Chassis control malfunction display request signal
• Active engine brake setting display request signal
• Active trace control display request signal
• Active engine brake display request signal
• Active ride control display request signal
• hill start assist display signal
• hill descent control display signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
Steering angle sensor
• Steering angle sensor signal

DAS-170
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010721689

DAS

JSOIA1618GB
P
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010735364

When a malfunction occurs in the chassis control module, the master warning lamp turns ON and an interrupt
is displayed on the information display of the combination meter.

DAS-171
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

DTC Vehicle condition

The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
C1B92-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
C1B93-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
The following functions are suspended.
C1B94-00 • Active trace control function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
C1B95-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control (brake control) function
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
C1B99-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
The following functions are suspended.
C1BA0-00 • Active trace control function
• Active ride control (brake control) function
The following functions are suspended.
C1BA2-00 • Active trace control function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
C1BA5-00 Normal control
The following functions are suspended.
C1BAB-00 • Active trace control function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
C1BB2-00
The following functions are suspended.
C1BB3-00 • Active trace control function
C1BB4-00 • Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
C1BB5-00
C1BB6-00 Normal control
C1BB7-00
C1BB8-00 The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
C1BB9-00
• Active engine brake function
C1BBA-00 • Active ride control function
C1BBB-00
C1BBC-00 Normal control
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
C1BBD-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
C1BC0-00
C1BC1-00 The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
C1BC2-00 • Active ride control function
C1BC3-00
The following functions are suspended.
C1BC4-00
• Active ride control (brake control) function
The following functions are suspended.
C1BC5-00
• Active trace control function

DAS-172
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
DTC Vehicle condition
A
The following functions are suspended.
C1BC6-00 • Active trace control function
• Active ride control (brake control) function
The following functions are suspended. B
• Active trace control function
U1000-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
C
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1010-49
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function D
U1A34-00 The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1A35-00
• Active engine brake function E
U1A36-00 • Active ride control function
U1A39-00 Normal control
The following functions are suspended. F
• Active trace control function
U1A3B-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
G
U1A42-00 The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1A43-00 • Active ride control (engine control) function
U1A48-00 The following functions are suspended. H
• Active trace control function
U1A4A-00 • Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
I
The following functions are suspended.
U1A4E-00
• Active ride control (engine control) function

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (DYNAMIC CORNERING ENHANCEMENT) FUNC- J

TION
ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (DYNAMIC CORNERING ENHANCEMENT) FUNCTION K
: System Description INFOID:0000000010721691

• The steering operation condition by the driver and the information from multiple sensors are computed by L
the chassis control module, and a command is transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
• The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) control the brake based on the command from the chassis
M
control module.
• When cornering, driver operation is reduced and vehicle behavior is smoothened.
• When the VDC function is turned OFF with the VDC OFF switch, active trace control function also turns
OFF. N
• When the active trace control function operates, operation display can be checked on the information display
in the combination meter. However, when assist control operates to an excessive degree during cornering,
this is not displayed. Refer to DAS-187, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Chassis DAS
Control Display".
• The active trace control function can be turned ON/OFF by operating the steering switch. However, even
when turned OFF, a portion of functions (emergency avoidance, etc.) turn ON. Refer to MWI-71, "INFORMA-
TION DISPLAY : System Description". P
• When a malfunction occurs in active trace control function, the master warning lamp illuminates and at the
same time the information display in the combination meter informs the driver.
NOTE:
• Active trace control function may not be effective in all driving environments (traction conditions, etc.).
• When active trace control function operates, vibration may be transmitted to the brake pedal, an operation
sound may be heard, and a feeling of deceleration may be felt. These are not symptoms of malfunctions and
indicate normal operating conditions.

DAS-173
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• Even when active trace control function OFF is selected with chassis control setting, it is not turned com-
pletely OFF for continuing to provide assistance in scenes where steering load is in the high excess range
(emergency avoidance, etc.).
OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS
• This performs assistance when switching from deceleration (brake
operation) to acceleration (accelerator operation) when driving on
a curve. It operates the brake automatically to stabilize cornering,
and smoothens acceleration in the longitudinal and lateral direc-
tions.

JSOIA1448GB

- The brake is controlled according to the steering operation condition of the driver and the cornering condition
of the vehicle.

JSOIA1449GB

DAS-174
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• For the purpose of improving responsiveness during excessive
steering operation, such as emergency avoidance steering, etc., A
the brake is applied to the inside wheel of the steering direction
and causes turning moment to be generated.
B

G
JSOIA1450GB

- The brake is controlled according to the steering operation condition of the driver. H

JSOIA1451GB

DAS

DAS-175
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• When driving on a curve, change of the steering operation angle is
controlled, vehicle movement is smoothened and cornering with a
stable feeling is realized simultaneously, by controlling the brake
on the inner wheel, according to accelerator operation.

JSOIA1452GB

- The brake is controlled according to the steering operation condition of the driver and the cornering condition
of the vehicle.

JSOIA1453GB

DAS-176
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• When performing quick lane changes, and other excessive steer-
ing operations, the brake is operated automatically, and erratic A
vehicle behavior due to steering operation is reduced.

G
JSOIA1454GB

- The brake is controlled according to the steering operation condition of the driver and the cornering condition H
of the vehicle.

JSOIA1455GB
M
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
TCM is applied to CVT models. N

DAS

DAS-177
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

JSOIA1446GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Engine speed signal
ECM
• Estimate drive torque signal
• Request drive torque signal
• Request drive torque status signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Front LH wheel speed signal
• Front RH wheel speed signal
• Rear LH wheel speed signal
• Rear RH wheel speed signal
• TCS operation signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control • VDC operation signal
unit) • Side G signal
• VDC OFF switch signal
• Brake fluid pressure signal
• Steering angle signal
• VDC accept permission signal
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Active trace control signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
BCM
• Stop lamp switch signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
TCM • Current gear position signal
• CVT target gear ratio signal

DAS-178
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Component parts Signal description
A
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Active trace control setting change request signal
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
Combination meter • Curve display request signal B
• Tire display request signal
• Active trace control setting display request signal
• Chassis control malfunction display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
C
Steering angle sensor
• Steering angle sensor signal

ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION D

ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010721692

• When the active engine brake (cornering control) function operates, operation display can be checked on E
the information display in the combination meter. Refer to DAS-187, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINA-
TION METER) : Chassis Control Display".
• The active engine control function can be turned ON/OFF by operating the steering switch. Refer to MWI-71,
F
"INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description".
CORNERING CONTROL
• For the purpose of reducing the operation of switching to depress the brake pedal during cornering, the G
operation information of the driver is computed with the chassis control module and a command is transmit-
ted to TCM.
• Based on the command from the chassis control module, TCM shifts the gear ratio of the transaxle to the
low side and applies the engine brake. H

JSOIA1456GB

DAS

DAS-179
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
- The transaxle is controlled according to the steering operation of the driver, as well as the accelerator pedal
condition and cornering condition of the vehicle.

JSOIA1457GB

BRAKING CONTROL
• For the purpose of improving the feeling of effectiveness of the brake when decelerating, the brake operation
amount of the driver is computed by the chassis control module, and a command is transmitted to TCM.
• Based on the command from the chassis control module, TCM shifts the gear ratio of the transaxle to the
low side and applies the engine brake.

JSOIA1458GB

DAS-180
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
- The transaxle is controlled according to the brake condition.
A

H
JSOIA1459GB

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE: I
TCM is applied to CVT models.

DAS

JSOIA1460GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

DAS-181
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM
• Estimate drive torque signal
• Request drive torque status signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Front LH wheel speed signal
• Front RH wheel speed signal
• Rear LH wheel speed signal
• Rear RH wheel speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
• VDC operation signal
unit)
• Side G signal
• Brake fluid pressure signal
• Steering angle signal
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Active engine brake control signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
BCM
• Stop lamp switch signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
TCM
• CVT accept permission signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Active engine brake setting change request signal
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
Combination meter
• Curve display request signal
• Tire display request signal
• Active engine brake setting display request signal

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL FUNCTION

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010721693

• When the VDC function is turned OFF by operation of VDC OFF switch, active ride control function also
turns OFF.
• When the active ride control (braking control) function operates, operation display can be checked on the
information display in the combination meter. Refer to DAS-187, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : Chassis Control Display".
• When a malfunction occurs in active ride control function, the master warning lamp illuminates and at the
same time the information display in the combination meter informs the driver.
NOTE:
Active ride control function may not be effective in all driving environments (traction conditions, etc.).
ENGINE CONTROL
Riding Comfort Improvement
• When driving on an uneven road surface, the rotation of each wheel, the steering angle, and the requested
traction torque are computed by the chassis control module and a command is transmitted to ECM.
• Based on the command from the chassis control module, ECM corrects the engine torque that is output.

DAS-182
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• By correcting the engine torque that is output, the load of weight on the front and rear wheels stabilizes and
riding comfort is improved. A

H
JSOIA1461GB

- Engine torque is corrected according to driving conditions.

DAS

P
JSOIA1462GB

Steering Stability
• The rotation of each wheel, the steering angle, and the requested traction torque are computed by the chas-
sis control module and a command is transmitted to ECM.
• Based on the command from the chassis control module, ECM corrects the engine torque that is output.

DAS-183
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• By correcting the engine torque that is output, vehicle behavior during cornering is smoothened.

JSOIA1463GB

- Engine torque is corrected according to steering operation conditions.

JSOIA1464GB

BRAKING CONTROL
• When driving on an uneven road surface, mainly the rotation speed information of each wheel is computed
by the chassis control module to estimate vertical G, and a command is transmitted to the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
• The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) control brake fluid pressure (brake force) according to the
command from the chassis control module.

DAS-184
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
• By controlling the brake fluid pressure (brake force), behavior of the vehicle in the vertical direction
decreases, and riding comfort is improved. A

F
JSOIA1465GB

- Brake fluid pressure (brake force) is controlled according to driving conditions.

JSOIA1466GB N
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NOTE:
TCM is applied to CVT models. DAS

DAS-185
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

JSOIA1446GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.

Component parts Signal description

Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Accelerator pedal position signal
ECM • Request drive torque signal
• Request drive torque status signal
• Engine speed signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Front LH wheel speed signal
• Front RH wheel speed signal
• Rear LH wheel speed signal
• Rear RH wheel speed signal
• ABS operation signal
• TCS operation signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control • VDC operation signal
unit) • Vehicle speed signal
• Decel G signal
• Side G signal
• VDC OFF switch signal
• Brake fluid pressure signal
• VDC accept permission signal
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
• Active ride control signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
BCM
• Stop lamp switch signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
IPDM E/R
• Ignition switch ON signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication.
TCM • Current gear position signal
• Input speed signal

DAS-186
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Component parts Signal description
A
Mainly receives the following signals from chassis control module via CAN communication.
Combination meter • Active ride control display request signal
• Tire display request signal
Mainly transmits the following signals to chassis control module via CAN communication. B
Steering angle sensor
• Steering angle sensor signal

INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER)

C
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Chassis Control Display
INFOID:0000000010721694

D
DESIGN/PURPOSE
• The warning message is displayed on the information display when “Chassis Control” detected the system
malfunction. E
• Each chassis control system information is displayed on the information display.
NOTE:
• hill start assist function: Refer to BRC-67, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Chassis
Control Display". F
• Advanced hill descent control function: Refer to BRC-67, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : Chassis Control Display".
Warning Message G

Design Warning Message

Chassis Control
H
— System Error
See Owner’s Manual

System Information I

Active trace control

Design Description
J

Active trace control function inactive.

M
JSFIA2371ZZ

Active trace control function is active. (Steering angle is less than the specified an- DAS
gle.)

JSOIA1467ZZ

DAS-187
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Design Description

Active trace control function is active. (Steering angle is the specified angle or more
in the leftward direction.)

JSOIA1468ZZ

Active trace control function is active. (Steering angle is the specified angle or more
in the rightward direction.)

JSOIA1469ZZ

Active engine brake function

Design Description

Active engine brake (cornering control) function inactive.

JSFIA2371ZZ

Active engine brake (cornering control) function is active. (Steering angle is less
than the specified angle.)

JSOIA1467ZZ

DAS-188
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Design Description
A

Active engine brake (cornering control) function is active. (Steering angle is the
specified angle or more in the leftward direction.)
C

D
JSOIA1468ZZ

Active engine brake (cornering control) function is active. (Steering angle is the F
specified angle or more in the rightward direction.)

JSOIA1469ZZ

Active ride control function

H
Design Description

J
Active ride control (brake control) function inactive.

JSFIA2371ZZ
L

Active ride control (brake control) function is active.

DAS
JSOIA1470ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

P
Applicable
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".

DAS-189
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSOIA1566GB

SIGNAL PATH
Active Trace Control Function
• The chassis control module transmits a active trace control display request signal to the combination meter
via CAN communication.
• The combination meter shows the chassis control display on the information display, according to the signal.
Active Engine Brake Function
• The chassis control module transmits a active engine brake display request signal to the combination meter
via CAN communication.
• The combination meter shows the chassis control display on the information display, according to the signal.
Active Ride Control Function
• The chassis control module transmits a active ride control display request signal to the combination meter
via CAN communication.
• The combination meter shows the chassis control display on the information display, according to the signal.
Malfunction of Chassis Control System Detected
• The chassis control module transmits a chassis control module malfunction signal to the combination meter
via CAN communication.
• The combination meter shows the chassis control display on the information display, according to the signal.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATING CONDITION
Warning
When all of the following conditions are satisfied
• Ignition switch is ON
• Chassis control system malfunction is detected. Refer to DAS-204, "DTC Index".
Operating
• Active trace control function: Refer to DAS-173, "ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (DYNAMIC CORNERING
ENHANCEMENT) FUNCTION : System Description".
• Active engine brake function: Refer to DAS-179, "ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE FUNCTION : System Descrip-
tion".
• Active ride control function: Refer to DAS-182, "ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL FUNCTION : System Descrip-
tion".

DAS-190
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
A
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010721695

APPLICATION ITEM B
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes as follows.

Mode Function description C

ECU identification Parts number of chassis control module can be read.
Self Diagnostic Results Self-diagnostic results and freeze frame data (FFD) can be read and erased quickly.*
D
DATA MONITOR Input/Output data in chassis control module can be read.
ACTIVE TEST Send the drive signal from CONSULT to the actuator. The operation check can be performed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification (TYPE ID). E
Re/programming, Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification (TYPE ID) when replacing chassis control module.
*
: The following diagnosis information is erased by erasing.
• DTC F
• Freeze frame data (FFD)
ECU IDENTIFICATION
Chassis control module part number can be read. G

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Refer to DAS-204, "DTC Index".
H
When “CRNT” is displayed on self-diagnosis result
• The system is presently malfunctioning.
When “PAST” is displayed on self-diagnosis result
I
• System malfunction in the past is detected, but the system is presently normal.
Freeze frame data (FFD)
J
When DTC is detected, a vehicle state shown below is recorded and displayed on CONSULT.

Item name Indication/Unit Display item

Odometer/Trip meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular.
K

DTC LOCAL CODE — Not used

CAN DIAG PERMIS CONDITION Off / On Displays CAN network diagnosis status. L
BRAKE SWITCH 1 Off / On Displays brake switch operating status (Off: close / On: open).
BRAKE SWITCH 2 Off / On Displays brake switch operating status (Off: open / On: close).
ABS NORMAL/ABNOR Displays ABS function status. M
TCS NORMAL/ABNOR Displays TCS function status.
VDC NORMAL/ABNOR Displays VDC function status.
N
VEHICLE SPEED km Displays the vehicle speed.
FR WHEEL SPEED rpm Displays the rotational speed of front RH tire.
FL WHEEL SPEED rpm Displays the rotational speed of front LH tire. DAS
RR WHEEL SPEED rpm Displays the rotational speed of rear RH tire.
RL WHEEL SPEED rpm Displays the rotational speed of rear LH tire.
P
STEERING ANG SENSOR deg Displays the steering angle from the steering angle sensor.
SIDE G SENSOR G Displays the side G.
DECEL G SENSOR G Displays the decel G.
YAW RATE SENSOR deg/s Displays the yaw rate.
THRTL OPENING % Displays the electric throttle position.

DAS-191
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Item name Indication/Unit Display item
SHIFT POSITION — Not used
PRESS SENSOR bar Displays the brake fluid pressure.

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Item
Description
[Unit]
IGN VOLT [V] Displays the ignition power supply voltage.
CONTROL MODULE MALF [Off / On] Displays the chassis control module malfunction.
CAN DIAG STATUS [Off / On] Displays CAN network diagnosis status.
STOP LAMP OFF RELAY 1 — Displayed but not used.
STOP LAMP OFF RELAY 2 — Displayed but not used.
ESS RELAY — Displayed but not used.
VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] Displays the vehicle speed.
FR WHEEL SPEED [rpm] Displays the rotational speed of front RH tire.
FL WHEEL SPEED [rpm] Displays the rotational speed of front LH tire.
RR WHEEL SPEED [rpm] Displays the rotational speed of rear RH tire.
RL WHEEL SPEED [rpm] Displays the rotational speed of rear LH tire.
STEERING ANG SENSOR [deg] Displays the steering angle from the steering angle sensor.
DECEL G SENSOR [G] Displays the decel G.
SIDE G SENSOR [G] Displays the side G.
YAW RATE SENSOR [deg/s] Displays the yaw rate.
ACCELE PEDAL POSITION [%] Displays the accelerator pedal position.
[NORMAL / INCORR / PREV /
THROTTLE CONTROL Displays the electric throttle status.
INPOSSI]
SHIFT POSITION — Displayed but not used.
Displays the brake pedal position switch operating status (Off: close
BRAKE SWITCH 2 [Off / On]
/ On: open).
Displays the brake pedal position switch operating status (Off: open
BRAKE SWITCH 1 [Off / On]
/ On: close).
STOP LAMP SW [ACT / INACT] Displays the stop lamp switch status.
PRESS SENSOR [bar] Displays the brake fluid pressure.
ABS [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the ABS function status.
ABS MALF [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the ABS function status.
EBD [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the EBD function status.
ACCELE PEDAL MALF [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the accelerator pedal status.
TCS [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the TCS function status.
TCS MALF [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the TCS function status.
VDC [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the VDC function status.
VDC MALF [NORMAL / ABNOR] Displays the VDC function status.
VDC OFF SWITCH [Off / On] Displays VDC OFF switch status.
PARKING BRAKE — Displayed but not used.
[INITIAL / NORMAL / STOP 1 Displays the status of correction to slightly increase/decrease the
DRV TRQ CTRL MODE
/ STOP 2 / LIMIT 1 / PROHIBI] drive torque.

DAS-192
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Item
Description
[Unit] A
Displays the permission status (basic requirement) of correction to
DRV TRQ CTRL PERMIS 1 [NO PER / PERMIS]
slightly increase/decrease drive torque.
Displays the permission status (system requirement) of correction to B
DRV TRQ CTRL PERMIS 2 [NO PER / PERMIS]
slightly increase/decrease drive torque.
Displays the stop request status of correction to slightly increase de-
DRV TRQ CTRL STOP [REQ / NO REQ]
crease drive torque. C
Displays the prohibition request status of correction to slightly in-
DRV TRQ CTRL PROHIBIT [REQ / NO REQ]
crease/ decrease drive torque.
Displays the active engine brake (brake control) function operation D
AEB STATUS [Off / On]
status.
ATC 1 [Off / On] Displays the active trace control function operation status.
ATC 2 [Off / On] Displays the active trace control function operation status. E
ATC 4 [Off / On] Displays the active trace control function operation status.
BRAKE HOLD [ACT / INACT / RELEA] Displays the brake hold status.
F
ATC 3 [Off / On] Displays the active trace control function operation status.
ATC 5 [Off / On] Displays the active trace control function operation status.
Displays the active ride control (brake control) function operation G
ARC BRAKE [Off / On]
status.
Displays the status of front LH tire displayed on the information dis-
FL TIRE DISP [DEF / 1]
play in the combination meter. H
Displays the status of front RH tire displayed on the information dis-
FR TIRE DISP [DEF / 1]
play in the combination meter.
Displays the status of rear LH tire displayed on the information dis- I
RL TIRE DISP [DEF / 1]
play in the combination meter.
Displays the status of rear RH tire displayed on the information dis-
RR TIRE DISP [DEF / 1]
play in the combination meter. J
Displays the operating status of active ride control (brake control)
VEHICLE DISP [DEF / 1] function displayed on the information display in the combination
meter.
K
[NO REQ / HOLD 1 / HOLD 2 / Displays the interruption status on the information display in the
INTERRUPT DISP
HDC] combination meter.
Displays the turning direction of active trace control function and ac-
L
TURN DISP [N STEER / LEFT / RIGHT] tive engine brake function on the information display in the combina-
tion meter.
ALC LEVEL [0 – 4] Displayed but not used.
M
ALC STATUS [INACT / ACT] Displayed but not used.
Displays the operating status of hill start assist function displayed on
BRAKE HOLD DISP [ACT / INACT / RELEA]
the information display in the combination meter.
N
Displays the operating status of active trace control function dis-
ATC DISP [Off / On]
played on the information display in the combination meter.
Displays the operating status of active ride control (brake control)
DAS
ARC BRAKE DISP [Off / On] function displayed on the information display in the combination
meter.
Displays the operating status of advanced hill descent control func-
HDC DISP [Off / On] P
tion displayed on the information display in the combination meter.
Displays the transaxle authorized state for active engine brake func-
AEB CVT PERMIT [Off / On]
tion.
AEB STATUS [Off / On] Displays the setting status of active engine brake function.
AEB COMMAND 1 [G] Displays the relative command value of active engine brake function.
AEB COMMAND 2 — Displayed but not used.

DAS-193
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Item
Description
[Unit]
AEB SLIP RATE [%] Displays the slip ratio of active engine brake function is operating.
Displays the setting status of active trace control function by steering
ATC SETTING [Off / On]
switch.
Displays the setting status of active engine brake function by steer-
AEB SETTING [Off / On]
ing switch.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH [Off / LEFT/ RIGHT / MALF] Displays the operating status of turn signal switch.

ACTIVE TEST
The active test is used to determine and identify details of a malfunction, based on self-diagnosis test results
and data obtained in the DATA MONITOR. In response to instructions from CONSULT, instead of those from
chassis control module on the vehicle, a drive signal is sent to the actuator to check its operation.
CAUTION:
• Never perform ACTIVE TEST while driving the vehicle.
• Always bleed air from brake system before active test.
• Never perform active test when system is malfunctioning.
NOTE:
• When active test is performed while depressing the brake pedal, the brake pedal depressing stroke may
change. This is not a malfunction.
• During an active test, sometimes a chassis control warning is displayed and the master warning lamp illumi-
nates on the information display in the combination meter; however, this is not a malfunction.

Test item Operation Description

BRAKE ACTUATOR 1 MODE 1 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 1 MODE 2 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 1 MODE 3 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 2 MODE 1 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 2 MODE 2 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 2 MODE 3 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 MODE 1 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 MODE 2 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 MODE 3 Start Controls brake fluid pressure.
On Displays the front RH tire on the information display in the combination meter.
FR TIRE DISP Does not display the front RH tire on the information display in the combination
Off
meter.
On Displays the rear RH tire on the information display in the combination meter.
RR TIRE DISP Does not display the rear RH tire on the information display in the combination
Off
meter.
On Displayed, but not use.
STOP LAMP OFF RELAY 2 ACTIVE
Off Displayed, but not use.
If touching “On” with the master warning lamp not illuminated, the master warning
On
MASTER WARNING ACTIVE lamp illuminates. Stops in approximately 1 minute.
Off The master warning lamp turns OFF. (vehicle in normal state)
Displays the operating status of advanced hill descent control function displayed
On
on the information display in the combination meter.
HDC DISP
Does not display the operating status of advanced hill descent control function
Off
displayed on the information display in the combination meter.

DAS-194
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Test item Operation Description
A
Does not display the operating status of hill start assist function displayed on the
INACT
information display in the combination meter.
Displays the operating status of hill start assist function displayed on the informa-
ACTIVE B
tion display in the combination meter.
BRAKE HOLD DISP
Displays the ready status of hill start assist function displayed on the information
READY
display in the combination meter.
Does not display the operating status of hill start assist function displayed on the C
ERROR
information display in the combination meter.
Displays the operating status of active engine brake (brake control) function dis-
On
played on the information display in the combination meter. D
AEB DISP
Does not display the operating status of active engine brake (brake control) func-
Off
tion displayed on the information display in the combination meter.
On Displays the front LH tire on the information display in the combination meter. E
FL TIRE DISP Does not display the front LH tire on the information display in the combination
Off
meter.
On Displays the rear LH tire on the information display in the combination meter. F
RL TIRE DISP Does not display the rear LH tire on the information display in the combination
Off
meter.
G
Displays the operating status of active ride control (brake control) function dis-
On
played on the information display in the combination meter.
VEHICLE DISP
Does not display the operating status of active ride control (brake control) func-
Off H
tion displayed on the information display in the combination meter.
Does not display the interrupt of hill start assist function displayed on the informa-
NO REQ
tion display in the combination meter.
Displays the interrupt of ready status of hill start assist function displayed on the
I
READY
information display in the combination meter.
INTERRUPT DISP
Displays the interrupt of operating status of hill start assist function displayed on
ACT J
the information display in the combination meter.
Displays the interrupt of operating status of advanced hill descent control function
HDC
displayed on the information display in the combination meter.
Does not display the turning status on the information display in the combination K
NO DISP
meter.
Displays the LH turning status on the information display in the combination
TURN DISP LH
meter. L
Displays the RH turning status on the information display in the combination
RH
meter.
Displays the active trace control function on the information display in the combi- M
On
nation meter.
ATC 1 DISP
Does not display the active trace control function on the information display in the
Off
combination meter. N
Displays the active trace control function on the information display in the combi-
On
nation meter.
ATC 2 DISP
Does not display the active trace control function on the information display in the DAS
Off
combination meter.
Displays the active ride control (brake control) function on the information display
On
in the combination meter. P
ARC DISP
Does not display the active ride control (brake control) function on the information
Off
display in the combination meter.
Displays the active trace control function on the information display in the combi-
On
nation meter.
ATC 3 DISP
Does not display the active trace control function on the information display in the
Off
combination meter.

DAS-195
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Test item Operation Description
Displays the active trace control function on the information display in the combi-
On
nation meter.
ATC 4 DISP
Does not display the active trace control function on the information display in the
Off
combination meter.
Displays the active trace control function on the information display in the combi-
On
nation meter.
ATC 5 DISP
Does not display the active trace control function on the information display in the
Off
combination meter.

RE/PROGRAMMING, CONFIGURATION
Configuration includes the following functions.

Function Description
• Allows the reading of vehicle specification (Type ID) written in chassis con-
Before replacing ECU trol module.
Read/Write Configuration • Allows the reading of vehicle specification (Type ID) store in CONSULT.
Allows the writing of vehicle information (Type ID) stored in CONSULT into
After replacing ECU
the chassis control module.
Allows the writing of vehicle specification (Type ID) into the chassis control
Manual Configuration
module.
CAUTION:
Use “Manual Configuration” only when “TYPE ID” of chassis control module cannot be read.

DAS-196
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010721696
B

CONSULT DATA MONITOR STANDARD VALUE

NOTE: C
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitor item Condition Reference value in normal operation D

IGN VOLT Ignition switch ON 10 − 16 V
When chassis control module is normal Off
CONTROL MODULE MALF E
When chassis control module malfunction is detected On
When diagnosis of CAN communication malfunction is
Off
CAN DIAG STATUS detected F
When diagnosis of CAN communication is normal On
STP LAMP OFF RELAY 1 Displayed but not used —
STP LAMP OFF RELAY 2 Displayed but not used — G
ESS RELAY Displayed but not used —
Vehicle stopped 0 km/h
H
VEHICLE SPEED Almost same reading as speedometer
*
Vehicle driving (Within ±10%)
Vehicle stopped 0 rpm I
FR WHEEL SPEED
Vehicle driving* Increases according to vehicle speed
Vehicle stopped 0 rpm
FL WHEEL SPEED J
Vehicle driving* Increases according to vehicle speed
Vehicle stopped 0 rpm
RR WHEEL SPEED
Vehicle driving * Increases according to vehicle speed K
Vehicle stopped 0 rpm
RL WHEEL SPEED
Vehicle driving* Increases according to vehicle speed
L
When vehicle driving straight 0±3.5 deg
STEERING ANG SENSOR When steering wheel is steered to RH by 90° Approx. +90 deg
When steering wheel is steered to LH by 90° Approx. −90 deg M
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 G
DECEL G SENSOR When during acceleration Positive value
N
When during deceleration Negative value
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 G
SIDE G SENSOR When right turn Negative value DAS
When left turn Positive value
Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 deg/s
P
YAW RATE SENSOR When right turn Negative value
When left turn Positive value
When accelerator pedal is released 0%
ACCELE PEDAL POSITION
When accelerator pedal is depressed 0 − 100%

DAS-197
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Monitor item Condition Reference value in normal operation
When electric throttle control actuator is normal NORMAL
When electric throttle control actuator does not
achieve the requirement (measured value is inaccu- INCORR
rate)
THROTTLE CONTROL
When electric throttle control actuator does not
PREV
achieve the requirement (temporary prevention)
When electric throttle control actuator does not
INPOSSI
achieve the requirement (impossible)
SHIFT POSITION Displayed but not used —
When brake pedal is not depressed Off
BRAKE SWITCH 2
When brake pedal is depressed On
When brake pedal is depressed Off
BRAKE SWITCH 1
When brake pedal is not depressed On
When brake pedal is depressed ACT
STOP LAMP SW
When brake pedal is not depressed INACT
When brake pedal is not depressed Approx. 0 bar
PRESS SENSOR
When brake pedal is depressed 0 − 255 bar
When ABS function is normal NORMAL
ABS
When ABS function malfunction is detected ABNOR
When ABS function is normal NORMAL
ABS MALF
When ABS function malfunction is detected ABNOR
When EBD function is normal NORMAL
EBD
When EBD function malfunction is detected ABNOR
When accelerator pedal is normal NORMAL
ACCELE PEDAL MALF
When accelerator pedal malfunction is detected ABNOR
When TCS function is normal NORMAL
TCS
When TCS function malfunction is detected ABNOR
When TCS function is normal NORMAL
TCS MALF
When TCS function malfunction is detected ABNOR
When VDC function is normal NORMAL
VDC
When VDC function malfunction is detected ABNOR
When VDC function is normal NORMAL
VDC MALF
When VDC function malfunction is detected ABNOR
PARKING BRAKE Displayed but not used —
When correction coefficients are initialized INITIAL
When correction is executed NORMAL
When correction is stopped (computing is impossible) STOP 1
DRV TRQ CTRL MODE
When correction is stopped (computing is possible) STOP 2
When correction is limited LIMIT 1
When correction is prohibited PROHIBI
When correction is permitted (basic requirement) PERMIS
DRV TRQ CTRL PERMIS 1
When correction is not permitted (basic requirement) NO PER
When correction is permitted (system requirement) PERMIS
DRV TRQ CTRL PERMIS 2 When correction is not permitted (system require-
NO PER
ment)

DAS-198
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Monitor item Condition Reference value in normal operation
A
When correction is requested to stop REQ
DRV TRQ CTRL STOP
When correction is not requested to stop NO REQ
When prohibition of correction is requested REQ B
DRV TRQ CTRL PROHIBIT
When prohibition of correction is not requested NO REQ
When active engine brake (brake control) function is
On
active C
AEB STATUS
When active engine brake (brake control) function is
Off
inactive.
When active trace control function is inactive Off D
ATC 1
When active trace control function is active On
When active trace control function is inactive Off
ATC 2 E
When active trace control function is active On
When active trace control function is inactive Off
ATC 4
When active trace control function is active On F
When brake fluid pressure is hold ACT
BRAKE HOLD When brake fluid pressure is not hold INACT
When brake fluid pressure is decreases RELEA
G

When active trace control function is inactive Off

ATC 3
When active trace control function is active On H
When active trace control function is inactive Off
ATC 5
When active trace control function is active On
When active ride control (brake control) function is in- I
Off
active
ARC BRAKE
When active ride control (brake control) function is ac-
On
tive J
When the front LH tire is not displayed on the informa-
DEF
tion display in the combination meter
FL TIRE DISP
When the front LH tire is displayed on the information K
1
display in the combination meter
When the front RH tire is not displayed on the informa-
DEF
tion display in the combination meter L
FR TIRE DISP
When the front RH tire is displayed on the information
1
display in the combination meter
When the rear LH tire is not displayed on the informa- M
DEF
tion display in the combination meter
RL TIRE DISP
When the rear LH tire is displayed on the information
1
display in the combination meter N
When the rear RH tire is not displayed on the informa-
DEF
tion display in the combination meter
RR TIRE DISP
When the rear RH tire is displayed on the information DAS
1
display in the combination meter
When the active ride control (brake control) function is
not displayed on the information display in the combi- DEF
P
nation meter
VEHICLE DISP
When the active ride control (brake control) function is
displayed on the information display in the combina- 1
tion meter

DAS-199
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Monitor item Condition Reference value in normal operation
When not interrupt displayed on the information dis-
NO REQ
play in the combination meter
When the hill start assist function is not interrupt dis-
played on the information display in the combination HOLD 1
meter
INTERRUPT DISP When the hill start assist function is not interrupt dis-
played on the information display in the combination HOLD 2
meter
When the advanced hill descent control function is not
interrupt displayed on the information display in the HDC
combination meter
When the straight-ahead status is displayed on the in-
N STEER
formation display in the combination meter
When the left turning status is displayed on the infor-
TURN DISP LEFT
mation display in the combination meter
When the right turning status is displayed on the infor-
RIGHT
mation display in the combination meter
ALC LEVEL Displayed but not used —
ALC STATUS Displayed but not used —
When the operation condition is satisfied (inactive)
status of hill start assist function is displayed on the in- ACT
formation display in the combination meter
When the operation condition is not satisfied status of
BRAKE HOLD DISP hill start assist function is displayed on the information INACT
display in the combination meter
When the activation status of hill start assist function
is displayed on the information display in the combina- RELEA
tion meter
When the activation of active trace control function is
not displayed on the information display in the combi- Off
nation meter
ATC DISP
When the activation of active trace control function is
displayed on the information display in the combina- On
tion meter
When the activation of active ride control (brake con-
trol) function is displayed on the information display in On
the combination meter
ARC BRAKE DISP
When the activation of active ride control (brake con-
trol) function is not displayed on the information dis- Off
play in the combination meter
When the activation of advanced hill descent control
function is displayed on the information display in the On
combination meter
HDC DISP
When the activation of advanced hill descent control
function is not displayed on the information display in Off
the combination meter
When transaxle control is authorized On
AEB CVT PERMIT
When transaxle control is not authorized Off
When active engine brake function is ON On
AEB STATUS
When active engine brake function is OFF Off
When active engine brake function is inactive 0 – 0.1023 G
AEB COMMAND 1
When active engine brake function is active 0G
AEB COMMAND 2 Displayed but not used —

DAS-200
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Monitor item Condition Reference value in normal operation
A
When slip ratio of active engine brake function is inac-
0%
tive
AEB SLIP RATE
When slip ratio of active engine brake function is ac-
0 – 100% B
tive
When active trace control function is ON by steering
On
switch
ATC SETTING C
When active trace control function is OFF by steering
Off
switch
When active engine brake function is ON by steering
On
switch D
AEB SETTING
When active engine brake function is OFF by steering
Off
switch
When turn signal lamp is OFF Off E
When turn signal lamp LH is blinking LEFT
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
When turn signal lamp RH is blinking RIGHT
F
When turn signal lamp system malfunction is detected MALF
*: Check tire pressure under normal conditions.
TERMINAL LAYOUT G

J
JSOIA1076ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
K
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition L
Input/ (Approx.)
+ − Signal name
Output
3
CAN-L — — — — M
(P)
4
CAN-H — — — —
(L)
7
N
Chassis comm-L — — — —
(W)
8
Chassis comm-L — — — — DAS
(W)
Ground
10
IGN Input Ignition switch ON 6.4 − 16 V
(SB)
11 P
Chassis comm-H — — — —
(L)
12 Ignition
GND — — 0V
(B) switch ON
19
Chassis comm-H — — — —
(L)

DAS-201
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000010721697

When a malfunction occurs in the chassis control module, the master warning lamp turns ON and an interrupt
is displayed on the information display of the combination meter.

DTC Vehicle condition

DAS-202
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
DTC Vehicle condition
A
The following functions are suspended.
C1BC4-00
• Active ride control (brake control) function
The following functions are suspended.
C1BC5-00 B
• Active trace control function
The following functions are suspended.
C1BC6-00 • Active trace control function
• Active ride control (brake control) function C
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1000-00
• Active engine brake function D
• Active ride control function
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1010-49 E
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
U1A34-00 The following functions are suspended.
U1A35-00
• Active trace control function F
• Active engine brake function
U1A36-00 • Active ride control function
U1A39-00 Normal control G
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1A3B-00
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control (engine control) function H
U1A42-00 The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1A43-00 • Active ride control (engine control) function I
U1A48-00 The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
U1A4A-00 • Active engine brake function J
• Active ride control function
The following functions are suspended.
U1A4E-00
• Active ride control (engine control) function
K
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010721698

When multiple DTCs are displayed simultaneously, check them one by one according to the following priority L
list.

Priority Detected item (DTC) M

1 • U1000-00 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• U1A34-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMM
• U1A35-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMM N
• U1A36-00 BCM/IPDM COMM
• U1A39-00 COMBINATION METER COMM
• U1A3B-00 TCM COMM
2
• U1A42-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMM DAS
• U1A43-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMM
• U1A48-00 ECM/HPCM COMM
• U1A4A-00 CONTROL MODULE (CAN)
• U1A4E-00 ECM/HPCM COMM P
3 • C1BBD-00 VARIANT CODING

DAS-203
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Priority Detected item (DTC)
• C1B92-00 BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
• C1B93-00 ENGINE/HEV SYSTEM
• C1B94-00 TM SYSTEM
• C1BA0-00 ADAS/CHASSIS CTRL BRAKE SYS
• C1BA2-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
• C1BA5-00 ADAS/CHASSIS CTRL ENGINE SYS
• C1BAB-00 STOP LAMP SW
4
• C1BC0-00 FR WHEEL SENSOR
• C1BC1-00 FL WHEEL SENSOR
• C1BC2-00 RR WHEEL SENSOR
• C1BC3-00 RL WHEEL SENSOR
• C1BC4-00 DECEL G SENSOR
• C1BC5-00 SIDE G SENSOR
• C1BC6-00 PRESSURE SENSOR
• C1BB5-00 IGN POWER SUPPLY
5
• C1BB6-00 IGN POWER SUPPLY
• C1B95-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1B99-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BB2-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BB3-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BB4-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BB7-00 CONTROL MODULE
6
• C1BB8-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BB9-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BBA-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BBB-00 CONTROL MODULE
• C1BBC-00 CONTROL MODULE
• U1010-49 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

DTC Index INFOID:0000000010721699

DTC Display item Refer to

C1B92-00 BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM DAS-215, "DTC Description"
C1B93-00 ENGINE/HEV SYSTEM DAS-217, "DTC Description"
C1B94-00 TM SYSTEM DAS-219, "DTC Description"
C1B95-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-221, "DTC Description"
C1B99-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-222, "DTC Description"
C1BA0-00 ADAS/CHASSIS CTRL BRAKE SYS DAS-223, "DTC Description"
C1BA2-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR DAS-225, "DTC Description"
C1BA5-00 ADAS/CHASSIS CTRL ENGINE SYS DAS-227, "DTC Description"
C1BAB-00 STOP LAMP SW DAS-228, "DTC Description"
C1BB2-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-230, "DTC Description"
C1BB3-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-231, "DTC Description"
C1BB4-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-232, "DTC Description"
C1BB5-00 IGN POWER SUPPLY DAS-233, "DTC Description"
C1BB6-00 IGN POWER SUPPLY DAS-235, "DTC Description"
C1BB7-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-237, "DTC Description"
C1BB8-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-238, "DTC Description"
C1BB9-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-239, "DTC Description"
C1BBA-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-240, "DTC Description"
C1BBB-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-241, "DTC Description"
C1BBC-00 CONTROL MODULE DAS-242, "DTC Description"
C1BBD-00 VARIANT CODING DAS-243, "DTC Description"

DAS-204
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
DTC Display item Refer to
A
C1BC0-00 FR WHEEL SENSOR DAS-244, "DTC Description"
C1BC1-00 FL WHEEL SENSOR DAS-246, "DTC Description"
C1BC2-00 RR WHEEL SENSOR DAS-248, "DTC Description" B
C1BC3-00 RL WHEEL SENSOR DAS-250, "DTC Description"
C1BC4-00 DECEL G SENSOR DAS-252, "DTC Description"
C1BC5-00 SIDE G SENSOR DAS-253, "DTC Description" C
C1BC6-00 PRESSURE SENSOR DAS-254, "DTC Description"
U1000-00 CAN COMM CIRCUIT DAS-256, "DTC Description"
D
U1010-49 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) DAS-257, "DTC Description"
U1A34-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMM DAS-258, "DTC Description"
U1A35-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMM DAS-260, "DTC Description" E
U1A36-00 BCM/IPDM COMM DAS-262, "DTC Description"
U1A39-00 COMBINATION METER COMM DAS-264, "DTC Description"
F
U1A3B-00 TCM COMM DAS-266, "DTC Description"
U1A42-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMM DAS-268, "DTC Description"
U1A43-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMM DAS-270, "DTC Description" G
U1A48-00 ECM/HPCM COMM DAS-272, "DTC Description"
U1A4A-00 CONTROL MODULE (CAN) DAS-274, "DTC Description"
H
U1A4E-00 ECM/HPCM COMM DAS-275, "DTC Description"

DAS

DAS-205
CHASSIS CONTROL
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

WIRING DIAGRAM
CHASSIS CONTROL
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010721700

JROWC2861GB

DAS-206
CHASSIS CONTROL
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

DAS

JROWC2862GB

DAS-207
CHASSIS CONTROL
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

JROWC2863GB

DAS-208
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010721702
B

DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FROM THE CUSTOMER C
Clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, perform an interview utilizing DAS-210, "Diagnostic
Work Sheet" and reproduce the symptom as well as fully understand it. Ask customer about his/her complaints
carefully. Check symptoms by driving vehicle with customer, if necessary. D
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. Never guess easily like “maybe the customer means that...,” or
“maybe the customer mentions this symptom”. E

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM F

Reproduce the symptom that is indicated by the customer, based on the information from the customer
obtained by the interview. Also check that the symptom is not caused by fail-safe mode. Refer toDAS-202,
"Fail-safe". G
CAUTION:
When the symptom is caused by normal operation, fully inspect each portion and obtain the under-
standing of customer that the symptom is not caused by a malfunction. H

>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”. J
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Record or print self-diagnosis results and freeze frame data (FFD), and GO TO 4.
NO >> INSPECTION END K
4.
With CONSULT
Perform DTC confirmation procedures for the error-detected system. L
NOTE:
If some DTCs are detected at the some time, determine the order for performing the diagnosis based on DAS-
203, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". M
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by the interview. Refer to LAN- N
7, "Precautions for Harness Repair".
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE ERROR-DETECTED PARTS
DAS
1. Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2. Reconnect part or connector after repairing or replacing.
3. When DTC is detected, erase self-diagnosis results for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
P
>> GO TO 6.
6.FINAL CHECK
With CONSULT
1. Check the reference value for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Recheck the symptom and check that the symptom is not reproduced on the same conditions.

DAS-209
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Is the symptom reproduced?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000010721703

Description
• In general, customers have their own criteria for a symptom. Therefore, it is important to understand the
symptom and status well enough by interviewing the customer about the symptom carefully. To systemize all
the information for the diagnosis, prepare the interview sheet referring to the interview points.
• In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may cause a DTC to be detected.
INTERVIEW SHEET SAMPLE

Interview sheet
Registration Initial year
Customer number registration
MR/MS
name
Vehicle type VIN
Engine, Trac-
Storage date Mileage km ( Mile)
tion motor
Does not operate ( ) function
Warning lamp for ( ) turns ON.
Symptom Noise Vibration
Other
( )
First occurrence Recently Other ( )
Frequency of occurrence Always Under a certain conditions of Sometimes ( time(s)/day)
Irrelevant

Climate con- Weather Fine Cloud Rain Snow Others ( )

ditions Temperature Hot Warm Cool Cold Temperature [Approx. °C ( °F)]
Relative humidity High Moderate Low
Urban area Suburb area Highway
Road conditions
Mountainous road (uphill or downhill) Rough road
Irrelevant
When traction motor starts During idling
During driving During acceleration At constant speed driving
Operating condition, etc.
During deceleration
During cornering (right curve or left curve)
When steering wheel is steered (to right or to left)

Other conditions

DAS-210
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Interview sheet
A
Registration Initial year
Customer number registration
MR/MS
name
Vehicle type VIN
B
Engine, Trac-
Storage date Mileage km ( Mile)
tion motor
Vehicle equipment
C

Memo
F

DAS

DAS-211
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CHASSIS CONTROL MOD-
ULE
Description INFOID:0000000010721704

When replaced the chassis control module, configuration of the chassis control module is required. Refer to
DAS-213, "Work Procedure".

DAS-212
CONFIGURATION (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
CONFIGURATION (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
A
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010721705

CAUTION: B
• Use “Manual Configuration” only when “TYPE ID” of the chassis control module cannot be read.
• After configuration, turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON and check that the chassis control warn-
ing to information display of combination meter displays OFF after staying illuminated for approxi-
mately two seconds. C
• If an error occurs during configuration, start over from the beginning.
1.CHECKING TYPE ID (1)
D
Use FAST (service parts catalogue) to search the chassis control module of the applicable vehicle and find
“Type ID”.
Is “Type ID” displayed? E
YES >> Print out “Type ID”, and GO TO 2.
NO >> “Configuration” is not required for the chassis control module. Replace in the usual manner. Refer
to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
F
2.CHECKING TYPE ID (2)
CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “Before Replace ECU” of “Read/Write Configuration”. G
2. Check that “Type ID” is displayed on the CONSULT screen.
Is “Type ID” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3. H
NO >> GO TO 7.
3.VERIFYING TYPE ID (1)
I
CONSULT Configuration
Compare a “Type ID” displayed on the CONSULT screen with the one searched by using FAST (service parts
catalogue) to check that these “Type ID” agree with each other.
NOTE: J
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”.

>> GO TO 4. K

4.SAVING TYPE ID
CONSULT Configuration L
Save “Type ID” on CONSULT.

>> GO TO 5. M
5.REPLACING CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE (1)
Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation". N

>> GO TO 6.
6.WRITING (AUTOMATIC WRITING) DAS

CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “After Replace ECU” of “Re/programming, Configuration” or that of “Read / Write Configuration”.
2. Select the “Type ID” agreeing with the one stored on CONSULT and the one searched by using FAST P
(service parts catalogue) to write the “Type ID” into the chassis control module.
NOTE:
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”.

>> GO TO 9.
7.REPLACING CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE (2)
DAS-213
CONFIGURATION (CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 8.
8.WRITING (MANUAL WRITING)
CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “Manual Configuration”.
2. Select the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalogue) to write the “Type ID” into the
chassis control module.
NOTE:
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”.

>> GO TO 9.
9.VERIFYING TYPE ID (2)
CONSULT Configuration
Compare “Type ID” written into the chassis control module with the one searched by using FAST (service parts
catalogue) to check that these “Type ID” agree with each other.
NOTE:
For the “Type ID” searched by using FAST (service parts catalog), use the last five digits of the “Type ID”.

>> GO TO 10.
10.CHECKING CHASSIS CONTROL WARNING
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and check that the “Chassis Control” warning to information display of combi-
nation meter displays OFF.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
11.PERFORMING SUPPLEMENTARY WORK
With CONSULT
1. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
2. Record or print self-diagnosis results and freeze frame data (FFD).
3. Erase self-diagnosis results.

>> End of work.

DAS-214
C1B92-00 BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
C1B92-00 BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721706
B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM When a malfunction is detected in ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) sys-
C1B92-00 D
(Brake control system) tem.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system E
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended. F
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING H
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
J
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON. K
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1B92-00” detected?
L
YES >> Proceed to DAS-215, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721707

1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) N

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected? DAS
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS P

With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1B92-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?

DAS-215
C1B92-00 BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES (“C1B92-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-216
C1B93-00 ENGINE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1B93-00 ENGINE SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721708

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ENGINE/HEV SYSTEM
C1B93-00 When a malfunction is detected in ECM system.
(Engine/HEV system)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Engine system
• ECM
• Chassis control module E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function F
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF H
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT J
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”. K
Is DTC “C1B93-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-217, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721709
M

1.CHECK ECM SYSTEM

With CONSULT N
Perform self-diagnosis for “ENGINE”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. DAS
• MR20DD: Refer to EC-109, "DTC Index".
• QR25DE: Refer to EC-517, "DTC Index".
• R9M: Refer to EC-908, "DTC Index". P
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.

DAS-217
C1B93-00 ENGINE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1B93-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1B93-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-218
C1B94-00 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1B94-00 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721710

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
TM SYSTEM
C1B94-00 When a malfunction is detected in transaxle system.
(Transmission system)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Transaxle system
• TCM
• Chassis control module E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function F
• Active ride control (engine control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H

>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. J
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
K
Is DTC “C1B94-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-219, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
L
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721711

M
1.CHECK TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “TRANSMISSION” N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC.
• Gasoline engine models: Refer to TM-288, "DTC Index". DAS
• Diesel engine models: Refer to TM-529, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS P

DAS-219
C1B94-00 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES (“C1B94-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-220
C1B95-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1B95-00 CONTROL MODULE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721712

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL MODULE
C1B95-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control (brake control) function F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1B95-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-221, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721713

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. N
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1B95-00” detected? DAS
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
P

DAS-221
C1B99-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1B99-00 CONTROL MODULE
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721714

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROL MODULE
C1B99-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1B99-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-222, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721715

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1B99-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-222
C1BA0-00 CHASSIS CONTROL BRAKE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BA0-00 CHASSIS CONTROL BRAKE SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721716

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
When receiving from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) that the value
ADAS/CHASSIS CTRL BRAKE SYS
C1BA0-00 of the brake system signal transmitted from the chassis control module to ABS
(ADAS Chassis Control brake system)
actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning.
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function F
• Active ride control (brake control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. J
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
K
Is DTC “C1BA0-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-223, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END L

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721717

M
1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2. DAS
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT P
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BA0-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1BA0-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
DAS-223
C1BA0-00 CHASSIS CONTROL BRAKE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-224
C1BA2-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BA2-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721718

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
C1BA2-00 When a malfunction is detected in steering angle sensor system.
(Steering angle sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Steering angle sensor
• Chassis control module
E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control (engine control) function F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BA2-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-225, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721719

1.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SYSTEM M

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
DAS
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”. P
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BA2-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1BA2-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
DAS-225
C1BA2-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-226
C1BA5-00 CHASSIS CONTROL ENGINE SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BA5-00 CHASSIS CONTROL ENGINE SYSTEM
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721720

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ADAS/CHASSIS CTRL ENGINE SYS When receiving from ECM that the value of the engine system signal trans-
C1BA5-00
(ADAS/Chassis control engine system) mitted from the chassis control module to ECM is malfunctioning.

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F

>> GO TO 2.
G
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. H
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
I
Is DTC “C1BA5-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-227, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721721

K
1.CHECK ECM SYSTEM
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ENGINE”. L
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC.
• MR20DD: Refer to EC-109, "DTC Index". M
• QR25DE: Refer to EC-517, "DTC Index".
• R9M: Refer to EC-908, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT DAS
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”. P
Are DTC “C1BA5-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1BA5-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-227
C1BAB-00 STOP LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BAB-00 STOP LAMP SWITCH
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721722

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
STOP LAMP SW
C1BAB-00 When a malfunction is detected in stop lamp switch system.
(Stop lamp switch)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Stop lamp switch
• BCM
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BAB-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-228, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721723

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH SYSTEM

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “BCM”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BAB-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1BAB-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
DAS-228
C1BAB-00 STOP LAMP SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END A

DAS

DAS-229
C1BB2-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB2-00 CONTROL MODULE
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721724

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROL MODULE
C1BB2-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB2-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-230, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721725

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB2-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-230
C1BB3-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB3-00 CONTROL MODULE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721726

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL MODULE
C1BB3-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB3-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-231, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721727

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. N
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB3-00” detected? DAS
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
P

DAS-231
C1BB4-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB4-00 CONTROL MODULE
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721728

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROL MODULE
C1BB4-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB4-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-232, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721729

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB4-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-232
C1BB5-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB5-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721730

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
IGN POWER SUPPLY Ignition power supply voltage of chassis control module is as shown below.
C1BB5-00
(Ignition power supply) • Ignition power supply voltage: 6.4 V ≥ Ignition power supply voltage

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• Fuse
• Ignition power supply system E
• Battery
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE F
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function G
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION J

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: K
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB5-00” detected? L
YES >> Proceed to DAS-233, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721731

1.CHECK CONNECTOR N

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
DAS
3. Check the connector for disconnection or looseness.
4. Check the pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the harness connector, and GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)
1. connect the chassis control module harness connector.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB5-00” detected?

DAS-233
C1BB5-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between chassis control module harness connector and ground.

Chassis control module Voltage

—
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

M73 10 Ground 0V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
5. Check the voltage between chassis control module harness connector and ground.

Chassis control module

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
M73 10 Ground 6.4 − 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the fuse (#30).
3. Check the continuity and for short circuit between chassis control module harness connector terminal (10)
and 10A fuse (#30).
4. Check the continuity between chassis control module harness connector and the ground.

Chassis control module

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M73 10 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
5.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the continuity between chassis control module harness connector and the ground.

Chassis control module

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M73 12 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
1. connect the chassis control module harness connector.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB5-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-234
C1BB6-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB6-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721732

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY Ignition power supply voltage of chassis control module is as shown below.
C1BB6-00
(Ignition power supply) • Ignition power supply voltage: 16 V ≤ Ignition power supply voltage

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Harness or connector
• Fuse
• Ignition power supply system E
• Battery
• Chassis control module
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF G
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
I
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”. J
Is DTC “C1BB6-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-235, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". K
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721733
L
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Check the connector for disconnection or looseness.
4. Check the pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts, securely lock the harness connector, and GO TO 2.
DAS
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (1)
1. connect the chassis control module harness connector.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”. P
Is DTC “C1BB6-00” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.

DAS-235
C1BB6-00 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
3. Check the voltage between chassis control module harness connector and ground.

Chassis control module Voltage

—
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

M73 10 Ground 0V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
5. Check the voltage between chassis control module harness connector and ground.

Chassis control module

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M73 12 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (2)
1. connect the chassis control module harness connector.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB6-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-236
C1BB7-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB7-00 CONTROL MODULE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721734

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL MODULE
C1BB7-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function F

TC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB7-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-237, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721735

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. N
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB7-00” detected? DAS
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
P

DAS-237
C1BB8-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB8-00 CONTROL MODULE
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721736

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROL MODULE
C1BB8-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB8-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-238, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721737

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB8-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-238
C1BB9-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BB9-00 CONTROL MODULE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721738

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL MODULE
C1BB9-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB9-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-239, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721739

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. N
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BB9-00” detected? DAS
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
P

DAS-239
C1BBA-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BBA-00 CONTROL MODULE
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721740

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROL MODULE
C1BBA-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBA-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-240, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721741

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBA-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-240
C1BBB-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BBB-00 CONTROL MODULE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721742

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL MODULE
C1BBB-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBB-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-241, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721743

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. N
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBB-00” detected? DAS
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
P

DAS-241
C1BBC-00 CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BBC-00 CONTROL MODULE
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721744

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CONTROL MODULE
C1BBC-00 When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module.
(Control module)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Chassis control module
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBC-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-242, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721745

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBC-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-242
C1BBD-00 VARIANT CODING
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BBD-00 VARIANT CODING
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721746

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
VARIANT CODING
C1BBD-00 When configuration is incomplete.
(Variant coding)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE E
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBD-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-243, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721747

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. N
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BBD-00” detected? DAS
YES >> Perform configuration. Refer to DAS-213, "Work Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
P

DAS-243
C1BC0-00 FRONT RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BC0-00 FRONT RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721748

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
FR WHEEL SENSOR
C1BC0-00 When a malfunction is detected in front right wheel sensor system.
(Front wheel sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Front right wheel sensor
• Front right sensor rotor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BC0-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-244, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721749

1.CHECK FRONT RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR SYSTEM

DAS-244
C1BC0-00 FRONT RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BC0-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected? A
YES (“C1BC0-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC. B
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-245
C1BC1-00 FRONT LEFT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BC1-00 FRONT LEFT WHEEL SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721750

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
FL WHEEL SENSOR
C1BC1-00 When a malfunction is detected in front left wheel sensor system.
(Front left wheel sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Front left wheel sensor
• Front left sensor rotor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BC1-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-246, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721751

1.CHECK FRONT LEFT WHEEL SENSOR SYSTEM

DAS-246
C1BC1-00 FRONT LEFT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BC1-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected? A
YES (“C1BC1-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC. B
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-247
C1BC2-00 REAR RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BC2-00 REAR RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721752

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
RR WHEEL SENSOR
C1BC2-00 When a malfunction is detected in rear right wheel sensor system.
(Rear right wheel sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Rear right wheel sensor
• Rear right sensor rotor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BC2-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-248, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721753

1.CHECK REAR RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR SYSTEM

DAS-248
C1BC2-00 REAR RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BC2-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected? A
YES (“C1BC2-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC. B
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-249
C1BC3-00 REAR LEFT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BC3-00 REAR LEFT WHEEL SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721754

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
RL WHEEL SENSOR
C1BC3-00 When a malfunction is detected in rear left wheel sensor system.
(Rear left wheel sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Rear left wheel sensor
• Rear left sensor rotor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
5. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BC3-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-250, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721755

1.REAR LEFT WHEEL SENSOR SYSTEM

DAS-250
C1BC3-00 REAR LEFT WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BC3-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected? A
YES (“C1BC3-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC. B
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-251
C1BC4-00 DECEL G SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BC4-00 DECEL G SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721756

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
DECEL G SENSOR
C1BC4-00 When a malfunction is detected in decel G sensor system.
(Decel G sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following function is suspended.
• Active ride control (brake control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BC4-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-252, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721757

1.CHECK DECEL G SENSOR SYSTEM

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BC4-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1BC4-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END
DAS-252
C1BC5-00 SIDE G SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BC5-00 SIDE G SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721758

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
SIDE G SENSOR
C1BC5-00 When a malfunction is detected in side G sensor system.
(Side G sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
F
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT I
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON. J
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BC5-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-253, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721759 L

1.CHECK SIDE G SENSOR SYSTEM

M
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
N
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS DAS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. P
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BC5-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1BC5-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END
DAS-253
C1BC6-00 PRESSURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
C1BC6-00 PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721760

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
PRESSURE SENSOR
C1BC6-00 When a malfunction is detected in brake fluid pressure system.
(Pressure sensor)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control (brake control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “C1BC6-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-254, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721761

1.CHECK BRAKE FLUIFD PRESSURE SYSTEM

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “C1BC6-00”, “U1000-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“C1BC6-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
DAS-254
C1BC6-00 PRESSURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
NO >> INSPECTION END
A

DAS

DAS-255
U1000-00 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1000-00 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721762

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT When CAN communication signal is not continuously transmitted or received for 2
U1000-00
(CAN communication circuit) seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1000-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-256, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721763

Proceed to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

DAS-256
U1010-49 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1010-49 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721764

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of chassis con-
U1010-49
[Control unit (CAN)] trol module.

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line
E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function F
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H

>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON. J
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
K
Is DTC “U1010-49” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-257, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
L
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721765

M
1.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
Check the chassis control module harness connector for disconnection and deformation.
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
DAS

DAS-257
U1A34-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A34-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721766

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
When chassis control module is not receiving CAN communication signal [be-
BRAKE CONTROL COMM
U1A34-00 tween chassis control module and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)] for
(Brake control communication)
2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A34-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-258, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721767

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

DAS-258
U1A34-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. A
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (1) B
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals (CAN communication C
line) or damage or loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. D
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (2) E

With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. F
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON. G
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index". H
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. J
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A34-00” or other DTC detected? K
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A34-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
L
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-259
U1A35-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A35-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721768

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
A calculated signal value differs between a signal transmitted from the ABS actu-
BRAKE CONTROL COMM
U1A35-00 ator and electric unit (control unit) and a signal received from chassis control mod-
(Brake control communication)
ule via CAN communication.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) system
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A35-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-260, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721769

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

With CONSULT
1. Select “CHASSIS CONTROL” of “CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor”.
2. Check malfunction history between each control unit connected to chassis control module.
Check the result of “PAST”?
All items are “OK”>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
“TRANSMIT DIAG” is other than “OK”>>GO TO 2.
“ABS” is other than “OK”>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK TRANSMITTING SIDE UNIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Check the chassis control module harness connector terminals No. 3 and 4 for damage or loose connec-
tion. (CAN communication line))
DAS-260
U1A35-00 BRAKE CONTROL COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. A
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (1) B
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
3. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals (CAN communication C
line) or damage or loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. D
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (2) E

With CONSULT
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. F
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON. G
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index". H
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. J
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A35-00” or other DTC detected? K
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A35-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
L
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-261
U1A36-00 BCM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A36-00 BCM COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721770

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
BCM/IPDM COMM When chassis control module is not receiving CAN communication signal (be-
U1A36-00
(BCM/IPDM communication) tween chassis control module and BCM) for 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• BCM
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A36-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-262, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721771

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

DAS-262
U1A36-00 BCM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness A
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK BCM (1)
B
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the BCM harness connector.
3. Check the BCM harness connector terminals (CAN communication line) or damage or loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4. D
4.CHECK BCM (2)
With CONSULT E
1. Connect the BCM harness connector.
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “BCM”.
F
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “BCM”.
Is DTC detected? G
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 5.
H
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”. I
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”. J
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A36-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A36-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation". K
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END
L

DAS

DAS-263
U1A39-00 COMBINATION METER COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A39-00 COMBINATION METER COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721772

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
COMBINATION METER COMM
When chassis control module is not receiving CAN communication signal (be-
U1A39-00 (Combination meter communica-
tween chassis control module and combination meter) for 2 seconds or more.
tion)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Combination meter
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A39-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-264, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721773

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

With CONSULT
1. Select “CHASSIS CONTROL” of “CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor”.
2. Check malfunction history between each control unit connected to chassis control module.
Check the result of “PAST”?
All items are “OK”>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
“TRANSMIT DIAG” is other than “OK”>>GO TO 2.
“METER/M&A” is other than “OK”>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK TRANSMITTING SIDE UNIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Check the chassis control module harness connector terminals No. 3 and 4 for damage or loose connec-
tion. (CAN communication line)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER (1)
DAS-264
U1A39-00 COMBINATION METER COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the combination meter harness connector. A
3. Check the combination meter harness connector terminals (CAN communication line) or damage or loose
connection.
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK COMBINATION METER (2)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the combination meter harness connector. D
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “METER/M&A”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. E
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “METER/M&A”.
Is DTC detected? F
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to MWI-105, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS G

With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
H
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A39-00” or other DTC detected? I
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A39-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC. J
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-265
U1A3B-00 TCM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A3B-00 TCM COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721774

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TCM COMM When chassis control module is not receiving CAN communication signal (be-
U1A3B-00
(TCM communication) tween chassis control module and TCM) for 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TCM
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A3B-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-266, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721775

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

DAS-266
U1A3B-00 TCM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness A
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK TCM (1)
B
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the TCM harness connector.
3. Check the TCM harness connector terminals (CAN communication line) or damage or loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4. D
4.CHECK TCM (2)
With CONSULT E
1. Connect the TCM harness connector.
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “TRANSMISSION”.
F
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “TRANSMISSION”.
Is DTC detected? G
YES >> Check the DTC.
• Gasoline engine models: Refer to TM-288, "DTC Index".
• Diesel engine models: Refer to TM-529, "DTC Index". H
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
I
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. J
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A3B-00” or other DTC detected?
K
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A3B-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END L

DAS

DAS-267
U1A42-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A42-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721776

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
COMM When chassis control module is not receiving CAN communication signal (be-
U1A42-00
(Steering angle sensor communi- tween chassis control module and steering angle sensor) for 2 seconds or more.
cation)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Steering angle sensor
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active ride control (engine control) function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A42-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-268, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721777

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

DAS-268
U1A42-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. A
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR B
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the steering angle sensor harness connector.
3. Check the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals (CAN communication line) or damage or C
loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. D
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) E

With CONSULT
1. Connect the steering angle sensor harness connector. F
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON. G
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index". H
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. J
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A42-00” or other DTC detected? K
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A42-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
L
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-269
U1A43-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A43-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721778

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A calculated signal value differs between a signal transmitted from the steering an-
COMM
U1A43-00 gle sensor and a signal received from chassis control module via CAN communi-
(steering angle sensor communi-
cation.
cation)

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A43-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-270, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721779

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

DAS-270
U1A43-00 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. A
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR B
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the steering angle sensor harness connector.
3. Check the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals (CAN communication line) or damage or C
loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. D
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) E

With CONSULT
1. Connect the steering angle sensor harness connector. F
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ABS”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON. G
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BRC-84, "DTC Index". H
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more. J
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A43-00” or other DTC detected? K
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A43-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
L
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-271
U1A48-00 ECM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A48-00 ECM COMMUNICATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721780

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
ECM/HPCM COMM When chassis control module is not receiving CAN communication signal (be-
U1A48-00
(ECM/HPCM communication) tween chassis control module and ECM) for 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ECM
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active trace control function
• Active engine brake function
• Active ride control function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A48-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-272, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721781

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR

DAS-272
U1A48-00 ECM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness A
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK ECM (1)
B
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ECM harness connector.
3. Check the ECM harness connector terminals (CAN communication line) or damage or loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4. D
4.CHECK ECM (2)
With CONSULT E
1. Connect the ECM harness connector.
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ENGINE”.
F
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ENGINE”.
Is DTC detected? G
YES >> Check the DTC.
• MR20DD: Refer to EC-109, "DTC Index".
• QR25DE: Refer to EC-517, "DTC Index". H
• R9M: Refer to EC-908, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I

With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”. J
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A48-00” or other DTC detected? K
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A48-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC. L
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS

DAS-273
U1A4A-00 CONTROL MODULE (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A4A-00 CONTROL MODULE (CAN)
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011003155

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
• When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module (transmission via
CONTROL MODULE (CAN) CAN communication is impossible).
U1A4A-00
[Control module (CAN)] • When a malfunction is detected in chassis control module (transmission via
chassis communication is impossible).

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A4A-00” detected?
YES >> Proceed to DAS-274, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011003156

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A4A-00” detected?
YES >> Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-274
U1A4E-00 ECM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
U1A4E-00 ECM COMMUNICATION
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000010721782

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Display Item
DTC Malfunction detected condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
ECM/HPCM COMM A calculated signal value differs between a signal transmitted from the ECM and
U1A4E-00
(ECM/HPCM communication) a signal received from chassis control module via CAN communication.

POSSIBLE CAUSE D
• ECM
• Chassis control module
• CAN communication line E
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are suspended.
• Active ride control (engine control) function F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING G
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION: J
Be sure to wait of 10 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF or ON.
2. Perform self-diagnosis for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
Is DTC “U1A4E-00” detected? K
YES >> Proceed to DAS-275, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721783

1.CHECK CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR M

With CONSULT
1. Select “CHASSIS CONTROL” of “CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor”.
2. Check malfunction history between each control unit connected to chassis control module. N
Check the result of “PAST”?
All items are “OK”>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
“TRANSMIT DIAG” is other than “OK”>>GO TO 2. DAS
“ENGINE” is other than “OK”>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK TRANSMITTING SIDE UNIT P
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Check the chassis control module harness connector terminals No. 3 and 4 for damage or loose connec-
tion. (CAN communication line)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.

DAS-275
U1A4E-00 ECM COMMUNICATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 5.
3.CHECK ECM (1)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the ECM harness connector.
3. Check the ECM harness connector terminals (CAN communication line) or damage or loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Recheck terminals for damage or loose connection. Refer to LAN-7, "Precautions for Harness
Repair", and GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ECM (2)
With CONSULT
1. Connect the ECM harness connector.
2. Connect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Erase self-diagnosis result for “ENGINE”.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Perform self-diagnosis for “ENGINE”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC.
• MR20DD: Refer to EC-109, "DTC Index".
• QR25DE: Refer to EC-517, "DTC Index".
• R9M: Refer to EC-908, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnosis result for “CHASSIS CONTROL”.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “All DTC Reading”.
Are DTC “U1000-00”, “U1A4E-00” or other DTC detected?
YES (“U1000-00”)>>Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
YES (“U1A4E-00”)>>Replace the chassis control module. Refer to DAS-278, "Removal and Installation".
YES (other DTC)>>Check the DTC.
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-276
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010721784

1.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE IGNITION POWER SUPPLY B

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the chassis control module harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between chassis control module harness connector and ground. C

Chassis control module Voltage

—
Connector Terminal (Approx.) D
M73 10 Ground 0V
4. Turn the ignition switch ON. E
5. Check the voltage between chassis control module harness connector and ground.

Chassis control module

— Voltage F
Connector Terminal
M73 10 Ground 6.4 − 16 V
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
H
2.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the 10A fuse (#30). I
3. Check the continuity and for short circuit between chassis control module harness connector terminal (10)
and 10A fuse (#30).
Is the inspection result normal?
J
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
3.CHECK CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT K
Check the continuity between chassis control module harness connector and the ground.

Chassis control module L

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M73 12 Ground Existed
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. N
4.CHECK TERMINAL
Check the chassis control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
DAS
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
P

DAS-277
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010721785

LHD MODELS

JSOIA1471ZZ

Steering member Chassis control module Chassis control module harness

connector

RHD MODELS

JSOIA1251ZZ

Steering member Chassis control module Chassis control module harness

connector

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010721786

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When replacing chassis control module, configuration of chassis control module is required. Refer to
DAS-213, "Work Procedure".
1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation". (LHD models)
2. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-41, "Removal and Installation". (RHD models)

DAS-278
CHASSIS CONTROL MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [CHASSIS CONTROL]
3. Remove the chassis control module.
CAUTION: A
Never drop the chassis control module.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install in the reverse order of removal. B
• When replacing the chassis control module, be sure to perform the configuration of chassis control module.
Refer to DAS-213, "Work Procedure".
• After replace the chassis control module, depress brake pedal and check that the stop lamp turns ON. C

DAS

DAS-279
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [PARK ASSIST]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010721637

DAS-280
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [PARK ASSIST]
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. A
4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
B
D4D engine : 20 minutes
HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes C
M9R engine : 4 minutes
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes D
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. E
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. F
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE: G
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood. H
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION: I
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal. J
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
K

DAS

DAS-281
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010721639

LHD MODELS

JSOIA1639ZZ

No. Component Description

• Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".
Side camera RH
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Transmits the operating status and other information concerning the wheel sensor sig-
ABS actuator and electric unit nal, and the VDC, TCS, and ABS systems, to the around view monitor control unit / so-
(control unit) nar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to AV-76, "Front Camera"
Front camera
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Detects a parking space on the right side of the vehicle
Side sensor front RH
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".
• Transmits the signals related to CVT control to the around view monitor control unit /
sonar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM :
TCM
Component Parts Location" (Gasoline engine models).
• For details of the installation position, refer to TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location" (Diesel engine models).

DAS-282
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
No. Component Description
A
• Transmits the ECM malfunction signal and engine speed signal to around view monitor
control unit / sonar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location" (MR20DD). B
ECM
• For details of the installation position, refer to EC-440, "Component Parts Location"
(QR25DE).
• For details of the installation position, refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location"
(R9M). C
• Detects a parking space on the left side of the vehicle
Side sensor front LH
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".
• Transmits neutral position signal and reverse position switch signal to the around view D
IPDM E/R monitor control unit / sonar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to DAS-286, "EPS control unit". E
EPS control unit
• For details of the installation position, refer to STC-7, "Component Parts Location".
• Transmits the turn signal switch signal to the around view monitor control unit / sonar
control unit via CAN communication.
BCM
• For details of the installation position, refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM :
F
Component Parts Location".
• Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".
Side camera LH G
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to DAS-285, "Sonar Control Unit".
Sonar control unit
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to AV-77, "Rear Camera". H
Rear camera
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to DAS-285, "Around View Monitor Control Unit".
Around view monitor control unit
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location". I
• NAVI control unit performs display of the lines for the around view monitor with Park
Assist that are drawn by the around view monitor control unit, as well as display of the
switches for the around view monitor with Park Assist, display of guidance messages, J
NAVI control unit and audio guide.
• Transmits the camera switch signal, Park Assist switch signal, and other signals to the
around view monitor control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location". K
• Transmits the steering angle sensor signal to the around view monitor control unit via
Steering angle sensor CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location". L
• Sounds the buzzer according to the operation signal from the sonar control unit.
Sonar buzzer
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".

RHD MODELS M

DAS

DAS-283
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]

JSOIA1640ZZ

No. Component Description

• Refer to DAS-286, "EPS control unit".
EPS control unit
• For details of the installation position, refer to STC-7, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".
Side camera RH
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to AV-76, "Front Camera"
Front camera
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Detects a parking space on the right side of the vehicle
Side sensor front RH
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".
• Transmits the signals related to CVT control to the around view monitor control unit /
sonar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM :
TCM
Component Parts Location" (Gasoline engine models).
• For details of the installation position, refer to TM-466, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location" (Diesel engine models).
• Transmits the ECM malfunction signal and engine speed signal to around view monitor
control unit / sonar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to EC-28, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location" (MR20DD).
ECM
• For details of the installation position, refer to EC-440, "Component Parts Location"
(QR25DE).
• For details of the installation position, refer to EC-812, "Component Parts Location"
(R9M).
• Detects a parking space on the left side of the vehicle
Side sensor front LH
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".
• Transmits neutral position signal and reverse position switch signal to the around view
IPDM E/R monitor control unit / sonar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location".

DAS-284
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
No. Component Description
A
• Transmits the operating status and other information concerning the wheel sensor sig-
ABS actuator and electric unit nal, and the VDC, TCS, and ABS systems, to the around view monitor control unit / so-
(control unit) nar control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location". B
• Transmits the turn signal switch signal to the around view monitor control unit / sonar
control unit via CAN communication.
BCM
• For details of the installation position, refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location".
C
• Refer to AV-77, "Side Camera".
Side camera LH
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
D
• Refer to DAS-285, "Sonar Control Unit".
Sonar control unit
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".
• Refer to AV-77, "Rear Camera".
Rear camera E
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Transmits the steering angle sensor signal to the around view monitor control unit via
Steering angle sensor CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location". F
• NAVI control unit performs display of the lines for the around view monitor with Park
Assist that are drawn by the around view monitor control unit, as well as display of the
switches for the around view monitor with Park Assist, display of guidance messages, G
NAVI control unit and audio guide.
• Transmits the camera switch signal, Park Assist switch signal, and other signals to the
around view monitor control unit via CAN communication.
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location". H
• Refer to DAS-285, "Around View Monitor Control Unit".
Around view monitor control unit
• For details of the installation position, refer to AV-64, "Component Parts Location".
• Sounds the buzzer according to the operation signal from the sonar control unit. I
Sonar buzzer
• For details of the installation position, refer to SN-119, "Component Parts Location".

Around View Monitor Control Unit INFOID:0000000010721640

J
• The around view monitor control unit controls the around view
monitor with Park Assist. (Perpendicular parking)
• The around view monitor control unit is located in the rear of the K
glove box.
• It sends and receives the necessary signals to/from each ECU via
CAN communication. L
• Power is supplied to each camera when the ignition switch is ON.
• The camera image signals received from the cameras are con-
verted and combined within the around view monitor control unit
and then sent to the NAVI control unit. M
JSOIA0646ZZ

Sonar Control Unit INFOID:0000000010727797 N

• The sonar control unit controls the around view monitor with Park
Assist. (Parallel parking)
• The warning buzzer outputs by inputting the sensor signal from DAS
sonar sensor. The warning buzzer outputs the separated buzzer.

JSNIA5812ZZ

DAS-285
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
EPS control unit INFOID:0000000010721641

• EPS control unit receives the Park Assist status signal for
changing from normal operation to Park Assist mode via CAN
communication, and the steering angle command signal for steer-
ing operation, from the around view monitor control unit or sonar
control unit, and controls the Park Assist.

JSGIA1430ZZ

DAS-286
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
SYSTEM
A
System Description INFOID:0000000010721642

SYSTEM DIAGRAM B

JSOIA1575GB

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEMS K

Input Signal Item

L
Transmit unit Reception unit Signal name Description
Receives notice that operation of the around
Around view moni- Park Assist permit signal
EPS control unit CAN view monitor with Park Assist is permitted.
tor control unit M
EPS torque signal Receives steering input torque.
• Around view
Receives the steering wheel rotation
Steering angle sen- monitor control
CAN Steering angle sensor signal amount, angular velocity, and rotation direc- N
sor unit
tion.
• Sonar control unit
Receives the wheel speeds from the four
• Around view Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
ABS actuator and wheels. DAS
monitor control
electric unit (control CAN
unit VDC operation signal Receives VDC operation status.
unit)
• Sonar control unit
VDC malfunction signal Receives VDC malfunction status.
P
• Around view CVT malfunction signal Receives CVT malfunction status.
monitor control
TCM CAN
unit Shift position signal Receives select lever position.
• Sonar control unit
• Around view
monitor control
BCM CAN Turn signal switch signal Receives turn signal switch position.
unit
• Sonar control unit

DAS-287
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Transmit unit Reception unit Signal name Description
• Around view
monitor control
ECM CAN Stop/start status signal Receives stop/start status.
unit
• Sonar control unit
• Around view Neutral position signal Receives select lever neutral position (M/T)
monitor control
IPDM E/R CAN
unit Reverse switch signal Receives select lever reverse position (M/T)
• Sonar control unit
Around view moni- Receives the around view monitor with Park
NAVI control unit CAN Park Assist switch signal
tor control unit Assist switch status.
Around view moni- Receives distance to obstacle detected by
Sonar control unit CAN Sonar indicator display signal
tor control unit the sonar sensor.
Side sensor front
Hard
LH/RH (Sonar sen- Sonar control unit Sensor signal Detects distance to obstacle.
wire
sor)

Output Signal Item

Reception unit Transmit unit Signal name Description

• Around view mon-
itor control unit CAN Steering angle command signal Transmits signal to operate the steering.
• Sonar control unit
EPS control unit Transmits the around view monitor with
Park Assist status signal
Around view monitor Park Assist operation status.
CAN
control unit Transmits the around view monitor with
Park Assist malfunction signal
Park Assist malfunction status.
• Around view mon-
Transmits the signal to display the around
NAVI control unit itor control unit CAN Park Assist switch display signal
view monitor with Park Assist switch.
• Sonar control unit
Around view monitor Transmits the signal to output the around
Sonar control unit CAN Buzzer drive signal
control unit view monitor with Park Assist sound.

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
• The around view monitor with Park Assist (PA) is designed to assist drivers with perpendicular and parallel
parking. This system operates the steering wheel to park the vehicle in the parking space set by the driver on
the around view monitor screen (perpendicular mode), or searched by parking sensors (sonar) in the left/
right side of the front bumper (parallel mode). Screen guidance for the shift lever operation is also provided
during the parking maneuvers.
• When the system is operating, the conditions surrounding the vehicle are displayed on the around view
monitor screen, and at the same time the predicted course line, forward/reverse starting position rectangle
(perpendicular parking), and other information is also displayed.

DAS-288
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Perpendicular parking
A

I
JSOIA1521ZZ

Setting the target parking position Moving the vehicle forward

J
Moving the vehicle backward (when re- Moving the vehicle backward (when tar-
verse starting position rectangle is de- get parking rectangle is detected)
tected)
K

No. Line/rectangle name Color Function

Forward: Green
Displays the course that will putting the vehicle into the target parking
L
Predicted course line Reverse: Or-
rectangle.
ange
Clearance guide line Red Displays the guide lines to avoid a collision to a obstacle. M
Target parking rectangle Blue Displays the position where the driver wants to park.
Forward/reverse starting po-
Green Displays the position to start reversing or turning N
sition rectangle

DAS

DAS-289
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Parallel parking

JSOIA1665ZZ

Finding a parking space Moving the vehicle backward

Moving the vehicle forward

No. Line/rectangle name Color Function

Forward: Green
Predicted course line Reverse: Or- Displays the predicted course.
ange
Sonar indicator Orange Displays the sonic wave position and direction.

Available Parking Patterns

The parking patterns supported by the around view monitor with Park Assist are as follows.

DAS-290
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]

Screen displayed when selecting parking mode Image of parking course A

Perpendicular (R) C

JSOIA1268ZZ JSOIA1362ZZ

Perpendicular (L)
G

H
JSOIA1269ZZ JSOIA1363ZZ

J
Parallel (R)

JMOIA0049ZZ JSOIA1666GB
L

Parallel (L)
N

DAS
JMOIA0050ZZ JSOIA1667GB

NOTE:
: Vehicle stop point (start of steering control) P
: Operation end point

Perpendicular Parking
• System operates the steering wheel to park the vehicle in the parking space set by the driver on the bird’s-
eye view screen.
NOTE:

DAS-291
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
The shift lever, accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and clutch pedal are operated by the driver.

JSOIA1668ZZ

Setting target parking rectangle Automatic steering control

Vehicle stop point (Start of steering
control)
Operation end point

NOTE:
• Operating the turn signal switch allows the switching between right and left.
• When the adjust switch is pressed to set a target parking rectangle, while lines are recognized and fine
adjustment is performed.
Parallel Parking
• System operates the steering wheel to park the vehicle in the parking space searched by parking sensors
(sonar) in the left/right side of the front bumper.
NOTE:
The shift lever, accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and clutch pedal are operated by the driver.

JSOIA1577ZZ

Finding a parking space Automatic steering control

Vehicle stop point (Start of steering
control)
Operation end point

NOTE:
Operating the turn signal switch allows the switching of scanning directions between right and left.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION (PERPENDICULAR PARKING)

DAS-292
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
• The around view monitor control unit calculates the trajectory needed to move to the final parking space (tar-
get parking rectangle), and the required amount of steering rotation, and performs the following control. A
- The forward/reverse starting position rectangle (green) and target parking rectangle (blue) are set based on
internal calculations and the shift position signal, and the camera image signal is transmitted to the NAVI
control unit in order to show the target position in the display.
B
- The target steering angle is calculated based on the vehicle speed signal, steering angle sensor signal, and
shift position signal. The system transmits the steering angle command via CAN communication to the EPS
control unit for performing steering.
- Buzzer drive signal is transmitted to the sonar control unit via CAN communication for outputting the buzzer. C
- The sonar indicator display signal is received by CAN communication from the sonar control unit. If an
obstacle is present, the camera image signal is transmitted to the NAVI control unit and a warning is shown
in the display. For sonar functions, refer to SN-124, "SONAR SYSTEM : System Description". D
Operation Condition

Park Assist switch ON conditions

• The engine is started E
• The around view monitor screen (top view) is displayed on the display
• The vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) (Except reverse range/gear)
• The vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) (Reverse range/gear) F
Start switch ON conditions
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) (vehicle is completely stopped)
• Steering wheel position is straight-ahead G
• Selector lever is in the D position.
The Park Assist is deactivated under the following conditions:
• When the steering wheel is operated manually H
• When the shift lever is placed in the P range (CVT model).
• When 5 seconds have passed since the shift lever was placed and kept in the N range/neutral position.
• When reverse operations are conducted more than 10 times for steering corrections. I
• When the system judges that the conditions (such as worn out or low pressure tires, road conditions, etc.)
are not suitable for correct course predictions.
• When the vehicle backs up to a position behind the place from which Park Assist operation started.
• When the vehicle passes the reverse starting position by over 2 m (7 ft). J
• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 MPH).
• When the parking operation by the driver deviates from the Park Assist guidance to some extent.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION (PARALLEL PARKING) K
• The sonar control unit detects parking space and performs the Park Assist.
• The sonar control unit calculates the space needed to move to the final parking space, and the required
amount of steering rotation, and performs the following control. L
- The target steering angle is calculated based on the vehicle speed signal, steering angle sensor signal, and
shift position signal/shift lever position. The system transmits the steering angle command via CAN commu-
nication to the EPS control unit for performing steering. M
- Outputting the buzzer.
- If an obstacle is present, the camera image signal is transmitted to the NAVI control unit and a warning is
shown in the display. For sonar functions, refer to SN-124, "SONAR SYSTEM : System Description".
N
Operation Condition

Park Assist switch ON conditions

• The engine is started DAS
• The around view monitor screen (top view) is displayed on the display
• The vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) (Except reverse range/gear)
• The vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) (Reverse range/gear)
P
Start switch ON conditions
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) (vehicle is completely stopped)
• Steering wheel position is straight-ahead
• Selector lever is in the D position.
The Park Assist is deactivated under the following conditions:
• When the steering wheel is operated manually.
• When the shift lever is placed in the P range (CVT model).
DAS-293
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
• When 5 seconds have passed since the shift lever was placed and kept in the N range/neutral position.
• When the system judges that the conditions (such as worn out or low pressure tires, road conditions, etc.)
are not suitable for correct course predictions.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 MPH).
• When the parking operation by the driver deviates from the Park Assist guidance to some extent.
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010721643

WITHOUT BSW SYSTEM

JSOIA1641GB

DAS-294
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
WITH BSW SYSTEM
A

K
JSOIA1642GB

Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010752982

DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
M
C1A00 Around view monitor control unit internal mal- Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
CONTROL UNIT function cel
• The battery voltage sent to around view mon-
itor control unit remains less than 7.9 V for 5 N
C1A01 seconds Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
POWER SUPPLY CIRC • The battery voltage sent to around view mon- cel
itor control unit remains more than 19.3 V for
DAS
5 seconds
• BSW system is cancel
If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from • DAA system is stopped.
C1A03 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) re- • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is P
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC ceived by the around view monitor control unit cancel
via CAN communication, are inconsistent • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel

DAS-295
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
• BSW system is cancel
• DAA system is stopped.
C1A04 If a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC system cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
C1A07 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the CVT is malfunction
CVT CIRCUIT cel
• BSW system is cancel
C1A39 • DAA system is stopped.
If the steering angle sensor is malfunction
STRG SEN CIR • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
cancel
C1A56 The around view monitor control unit detects Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR CIRC that sonar control unit has a malfunction cel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0122 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0416 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U0428 stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- • BSW system is stopped.
sensor is not complete.
TION • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot • When communication of vehicle signal,
U1000
transmit/receive CAN communication signal wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
continuously for 2 seconds or more. is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- LDW system is stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
U1010 MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) stopped.
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition • Camera image is not displayed (Gray
U111A switch is ON. screen display).
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL NOTE: • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not stopped.
saved.

DAS-296
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen B
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of front camera image signal is
C
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111C
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display). D
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni- E
U111D
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
F
saved.
U112F Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the EPS system is malfunction
EPS CIRCUIT cel
G
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle stopped.
U1232
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • BSW system is stopped. H
angle sensor is received. • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped.
I
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON.
U1302
• When camera power supply output is ON: 5.9 Camera power output is stopped J
CAMERA POWER VOLT
- 6.5 V
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply
measurement.
K
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view • Unmatched icon display (red) is dis-
monitor control unit and information read played (applicable for unmatched camera
U1304
from camera are not the same. only). L
CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
NOTE: • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not cancel.
saved.
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
M
trol unit is incomplete. • On applicable camera screen marking
U1305 (Red) is displayed.
NOTE:
CONFIG UNFINISH • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not N
saved. cancel.

• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is

U1308 stopped.
R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDG- Camera image calibration is incomplete • BSW system is stopped. DAS
MNT • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped.

U1309
Around view monitor control unit detects the P
value of current from pump control unit is incor- BSW system is stopped.
PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE
rect
U130A PUMP ECU JUDGE If the pump control unit is malfunction BSW system is stopped.
Around view monitor control unit receives the • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U130B
incorrect communication signal from rear view stopped.
RR CAMERA COMM ERROR
camera • BSW system is stopped.

DAS-297
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
U1320 Reprogramming of around view monitor control Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
REPROGRAMMING unit is incomplete cel
U150E Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the BCM is malfunction
BCM CIRCUIT cel
U1971 Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER correct signal from sonar control unit via CAN
cel
DIAG communication
Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
U1972 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
correct signal from EPS control unit via CAN
EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG cel
communication
When around view monitor control unit is not
Other Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.

Fail-Safe (Sonar Control Unit) INFOID:0000000011025227

The sonar control unit controls as follows if it detects a malfunction in the sonar sensor:
• Obstacle detection function is stopped.
• Alarm display is displayed on the information display of combination meter.
• Parking Assist in parallel mode is stopped.

DAS-298
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
OPERATION
A
Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000010721645

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH B

JMOIA0030ZZ

G
No. Name Function
Switches the NAVI control unit display between the camera image screen and nav-
Camera switch
igation screen.
H
DISPLAY 1

JSOIA1579ZZ
M

No. Name Function

PA (Park Assist) switch Turns ON the Park Assist function. N

DAS

DAS-299
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
DISPLAY 2

JSOIA1580ZZ

No. Name Function

Cancel switch Ends operation of the around view monitor with Park Assist.

Perpendicular mode switch Switches the mode to the perpendicular parking mode.

DISPLAY 3

JSOIA1581ZZ

No. Name Function

Start switch Starts operation of the Park Assist.

Parallel mode switch Switches the mode to the parallel parking mode.

Adjust switch Used to make fine adjustments to the parking guide rectangle position.

DAS-300
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
DISPLAY 4
A

E
JSOIA1582ZZ

No. Name Function F

Used to make fine adjustments to the target parking rectangle.
Parking position adjustment switch NOTE:
Can be adjusted by up to approximately 70 cm (27.56 in).
G
Back switch Allows to go back to the previous screen.

Menu Displayed by Pressing Each Switch INFOID:0000000010721646

SYSTEM DISPLAY
I

JSOIA1583ZZ

No. Name Function L

Camera image screen Displays the area around the vehicle, the target parking rectangle, and other information.

Automatic steering status display Indicates that an automated steering control is operating. M

WARNING DISPLAY AND VOICE GUIDANCE

N
System status Warning/display Buzzer* Audio guide
OFF — — —
DAS

DAS-301
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
System status Warning/display Buzzer* Audio guide
Vehicle movement judg-
Ensure it is safe before maneuvering — —
ment in progress
At the time of parking
space detection (Parallel Use turn signal to switch side
parking)
Setting the target parking
rectangle (Perpendicular Stop beside parking space to start Park Assist — —
parking)
Park Assist starts Drive forward — “Start Park Assist”
Vehicle starts to move for-
ward (when steering wheel Drive forward — “Drive forward”
is turned)
Vehicle speed is too fast Reduce speed Short beep —
The vehicle is moving for-
ward and moves close to
Stop and select reverse gear Long beep “Select reverse gear”
the forward/reverse start-
ing position rectangle
ON
The vehicle is moving in re-
verse and moves close to
Stop and select forward gear Long beep “Select drive gear”
the forward/reverse start-
ing position rectangle
Vehicle starts to move in re-
Drive backward — “Drive rearward”
verse
The target parking rectan-
gle fine adjustment screen Adjust park position — —
is displayed
Park Assist ends Park Assist finished Long beep “Park Assist finished”
D position is not selected Select forward gear — “Park Assist could not start”
Steering wheel is not in
Center steering wheel — “Park Assist could not start”
neutral position

System malfunction Park Assist fault Long beep —

System limit Park Assist canceled Long beep “Park Assist canceled”
Start is not possible Park Assist unavailable — —
*: Sonar buzzer sounds.

DAS-302
HANDLING PRECAUTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
HANDLING PRECAUTION
A
Precautions for Around View Monitor with Park Assist INFOID:0000000010721647

• Around view monitor with Park Assist is designed to support the driver’s steering wheel operation in a park- B
ing lot. It does not automatically lower the vehicle speed or avoid contact with objects. As when performing
ordinary parking maneuvers, always look out the windows and check with own eyes to be sure that the sur-
rounding and road conditions are safe for the maneuvers before operating the vehicle. Operate the vehicle
slowly during the parking maneuvers. If the vehicle gets close to people or objects near the vehicle, avoid C
making contact by using the brakes and other maneuvers.
• Do not touch the spoke of the steering wheel while the around view monitor with Park Assist is operating. It
could cause injuries to hands or fingers. Keep neckties, scarves. etc. away from the steering wheel since D
they may get entangled and cause unexpected accidents.
• Do not drive looking only at the screen. It could cause unexpected accidents or cause the vehicle to contact
surrounding objects.
• When assistance from the around view monitor with Park Assist is no longer necessary, turn off the system E
by touching the “Cancel” button on the screen. If the around view monitor with Park Assist remains on, the
steering wheel may operate automatically and may cause unexpected accidents.
• Make sure that there is enough space for parking maneuvers before starting to use the around view monitor F
with Park Assist.
• Keep in mind that the front of the vehicle may swing out towards oncoming traffic while the around view
monitor with Park Assist.
• Do not use the around view monitor with Park Assist under the following conditions. G
- On unpaved roads.
- On slippery roads like snow-covered or frozen roads.
- On uneven roads with slants, bumps, curbstones, wheel tracks, etc. H
- On curved roads.
- At mechanical parking facilities.
- Where parking or stopping is prohibited.
I
- When tire chains or a spare tire are installed.
- When the vehicle is being towed.
- When the doors (including the back door) are not closed.
- When transporting a load that protrudes from own vehicle. J
- When the vehicle is laden with heavy loads.

DAS

DAS-303
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000010752972

CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via the CAN communication with the around view monitor control
unit.

Diagnosis mode Description

ECU Identification Around view monitor control unit part number can be identified.
Around view monitor control unit diagnosis is performed. Current and previous malfunctions are
Self Diagnostic Results
displayed collectively.
Diagnosis of vehicle signal that is received by around view monitor control unit can be per-
Data Monitor
formed.
• Calibration and initialization of each camera can be performed.
• Fine tuning of Birds-eye view can be performed.
• Target line calibration of rear wide view can be performed.
• Language of warning message can be selected.
Work Support • Display of predicted course line can be switched to ON/OFF.
• Neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor can be performed.
• Camera screen activation enhancing display can be switched to ON/OFF.
• Calibration for BSW can be performed.
• Displays causes of system cancellation occurred during system control.
Enables an operational check of a load by transmitting a driving signal from the around view
Active Test
monitor control unit to the load.
• The vehicle specification that is written in around view monitor control unit can be displayed
Configuration or stored.
• The vehicle specification can be written when around view monitor control unit is replaced.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
Around view monitor control unit part number can be identified.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• Refer to DAS-324, "DTC Index".
• In CONSULT self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000] and [U1010] is detected. The counter
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Freeze Frame Data (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT.

Item name Display content

ODO/TRIP
METER Total driving distance (odometer value) upon DTC detection is displayed.
(km)

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the around view monitor control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.

Display Item Remarks

DAS-304
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Display Item Remarks
A
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Receiving status of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
[ON/OFF] unit) is displayed by ON/OFF.
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL Receiving status of camera switch signal received from NAVI control unit is displayed by ON/
[ON/OFF] OFF. B
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL Receiving status of camera OFF signal received from NAVI control unit is displayed by ON/
[ON/OFF] OFF.
Input type of steering angle sensor is displayed. C
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE
NOTE:
[Absolute]
For this vehicle, “Absolute” is displayed.
Type of steering gear ratio is displayed. D
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE
NOTE:
[TYPE 0]
For this vehicle, “TYPE 0” is displayed.
STEERING POSITION E
Steering position is displayed.
[RHD/LHD]
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Input status of rear camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
F
Indicates [On/Off] status of the washer switch signal input.
WASH SW
NOTE:
[OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.
G
R-CAMERA COMM STATUS
Communication status with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
R-CAMERA COMM LINE
Status of communication line with rear camera is displayed by OK/NG in real time. H
[OK/NG]
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Input status of front view camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
• Input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (LHD mod-
I
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG els)
[OK/NG] • Input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (RHD mod-
els) J
• Input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (LHD mod-
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG els)
[OK/NG] • Input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. (RHD mod-
els) K
PUMP COMM STATUS
Communication status with pump control unit is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
L
ILL
Receiving status of dimmer signal received from BCM is displayed by ON/OFF.
[ON/OFF]
ITS SW 1 Indicates the state of the warning systems switch as seen by the around view monitor control
[ON/OFF] unit. M
Indicates the state of the warning systems switch indicator output.
ITS SW 1 IND
NOTE:
[OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed. N
TURN SIGNAL
Indicates [OFF/LEFT/RIGHT] status of the turn signal input.
[OFF/LEFT/RIGHT]
Indicates the status of warning systems switch as seen by the around view monitor control unit. DAS
ITS SW 2
NOTE:
[NO SET]
For this vehicle, “NO SET” is displayed.
Indicates the status of warning systems switch indicator output. P
ITS SW 2 IND
NOTE:
[NO SET]
For this vehicle, “NO SET” is displayed.
VEHICLE SPEED
Vehicle speed from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed.
[km/h]
The stop/start status received from ECM is displayed.
IDLE STOP STATUS
NOTE:
[ON/OFF]
For this vehicle, “OFF” is displayed.

DAS-305
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Display Item Remarks
TRAILER HITCH SW
The towed vehicle connection status is displayed.
[ON/OFF]
STEERING ANGLE
Steering angle received from steering angle sensor is displayed.
[°]

WORK SUPPORT

Display Item Remarks

NON-VIEWABLE AREA REMINDER ON/OFF setting of the non-viewable area reminder can be performed.
REAR WIDE-VIEW FIXED GUIDE
The position of rear wide view guiding line can be changed.
LINE CORRECTION
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE DIS-
ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed.
PLAY
The calibration can be initialized to factory shipment condition.
INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALI- NOTE:
BRATION Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
Steering angle sensor neutral position can be adjusted and registered.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AD- CAUTION:
JUSTMENT For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS ac-
tuator control unit side. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure".
Performs the calibration of front camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE:
(FRONT CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
• Performs the calibration of side camera RH. (LHD models)
• Performs the calibration of side camera LH. (RHD models)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
NOTE:
(PASS-SIDE CAMERA)
Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
• Performs the calibration of side camera LH. (LHD models)
• Performs the calibration of side camera RH. (RHD models)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
NOTE:
(DR-SIDE CAMERA)
Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
Performs the calibration of rear camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE:
(REAR CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is per-
formed.
The confirmation and adjustment of the difference between each camera can be performed.
FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW The fine adjustment function of camera calibration can check and adjust the difference be-
tween each camera.
Language of warning message shown during camera image display can be selected.
SELECT LANGUAGE OF WARNING
[ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, DUTCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, PORTUGAL, RUSSIAN, JAP-
MESSAGE
ANESE, CHINESE 1 (TRADITIONAL), CHINESE 2 (SIMPLIFIED), KOREAN]
REAR CAMERA ITS Calibration for BSW can be performed.
NOTE:
CAUSE OF LDW CANCEL
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
CAUSE OF BSW CANCEL Displays causes of automatic system cancellation occurred during control of the BSW system.
Displays causes of automatic system cancellation occurred during control of the around view
CAUSE OF IPA CANCEL
monitor with Park Assist system.
NOTE:
• Causes of the maximum five cancellations (system cancel) are displayed.
• The displayed cancellation causes display the number of the ignition switch ON/OFF up to 254. It is fixed to
254 if it is over 254. It returns to 0 when the same cancellation cause is detected again.
Display Items for The Cause of BSW Cancel

DAS-306
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]

Cause of cancellation Description A

REAR CAMERA DIRTY Rear camera lens is dirty.
TRUNK OPEN Back door is open.
TRAILER HITCH ON Towing (by attaching a trailer).
B

R CAMERA COMM ERR Communication error between around view monitor control unit and rear camera.
LOW WASH FLUID Washer fluid level is low. C
LO TMP(AIR WIPING) Ambient temperature drops to -20 °C (-4 °F) or less.
LO TMP(WSH WIPING) Washer fluid temperature drops to -20 °C (-4 °F) or less.
CAMERA ANGLE ERROR Improper installation of rear camera. D
PUMP C/U COMM ERROR Communication error between around view monitor control unit and pump control unit.
CAMERA IMAGE ERROR Camera image signal is malfunction.
E
NO RECORD —

Display Items for The Cause of Around View Monitor with Park Assist Cancel
NOTE: F
• Causes of the maximum five cancellations (system cancel) are displayed.
• The displayed cancellation causes display the number of the ignition switch ON/OFF up to 254. It is fixed to
254 if it is over 254. It returns to 0 when the same cancellation cause is detected again. G

Cause of cancellation Description

STRG SEN CIRCUIT A malfunction is detected in steering angle sensor. H
TRUNK OPEN Back door is open.
Vehicle towed A towing vehicle is connected.
VDC CIRCUIT VDC detects a malfunction. I
VHCL SPD UNMATCH A malfunction is detected in vehicle speed signal.
SONAR CIRCUIT A sonar control unit malfunction has occurred. J
The CAN communication signals needed by the Around view monitor control unit cannot be re-
CAN COMM ERROR
ceived.
BCM CIRCUIT BCM detects a malfunction. K
ESP CIRCUIT EPS control unit detects a malfunction.
CVT CIRCUIT TCM detects a malfunction.
ECM CIRCUIT ECM detects a malfunction.
L

DOOR OPEN A door is open.

VDC OFF VDC OFF switch is pressed.
M
SHIFT POSITION A shift position other than the specified position is detected.
NO RECORD —
N
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Never perform “Active Test” while driving the vehicle.
• The “Active Test” cannot be performed when the following systems malfunction is displayed. DAS
- LDW
- BSW
• Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then perform the test. P

Test items Description

DAS-307
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Test items Description
AIR ACTIVE Camera blower can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.
AIR & WASH ACTIVE Camera blower and washer can be operated by ON/OFF operations as necessary.

LED LH INDICATOR

Test item Operation Description BSW indicator LH

Stops transmitting the BSW indicator LH signal below to
Off OFF
end the test
LED LH INDICATOR
Transmits the BSW indicator LH signal to the BSW indi-
On ON
cator

LED RH INDICATOR

Test item Operation Description BSW indicator RH

Stops transmitting the BSW indicator RH signal below to
Off OFF
end the test
LED RH INDICATOR
Transmits the BSW indicator RH signal to the BSW indi-
On ON
cator

WASH ACTIVE

Test item Operation Description Rear camera washer

Stops transmitting the rear camera washer signal below
Off OFF
to end the test
WASH ACTIVE
Transmits the rear camera washer signal to the pump
On ON
control unit via communication line
NOTE:
The test can be performed only when the trunk lid is closed. (Trunk room lamp switch is OFF.)
AIR ACTIVE

Test item Operation Description Rear camera air blower

Stops transmitting the rear camera air blow signal below
Off OFF
to end the test
AIR ACTIVE
Transmits the rear camera air blow signal to the pump
On ON
control unit via communication line
NOTE:
The test can be performed only when the trunk lid is closed. (Trunk room lamp switch is OFF.)
AIR & WASHER ACTIVE

Rear camera air blower and

Test item Operation Description
washer
Stops transmitting the rear camera air blow / washer sig-
Off OFF
AIR & WASHER AC- nal below to end the test
TIVE Transmits the rear camera air blow / washer signal to
On ON
the pump control unit via communication line
NOTE:
The test can be performed only when the trunk lid is closed. (Trunk room lamp switch is OFF.)
CONFIGURATION
Configuration includes functions as follows.

DAS-308
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]

Function Description A
Allows the reading of vehicle specification written in around view
Before Replace ECU
monitor control unit to store the specification in CONSULT.
Read/Write Configuration
Allows the writing of the vehicle information stored in CONSULT B
After Replace ECU
into the around view monitor control unit.
Allows the writing of the vehicle specification into the around view
Manual Configuration
monitor control unit by hand. C

DAS

DAS-309
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SONAR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SONAR CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000011025229

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown as follows:

Test mode Function

Ecu Identification Sonar control unit part number can be read.
Self Diagnostic Results Sonar control unit checks the conditions and displays memorized error.
Data Monitor Sonar control unit input/output data in real time.
Active Test Gives a drive signal to a load to check the operation.
Work support Changes setting of each function.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing sonar control unit.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
Displays the part number of the sonar control unit.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
For details, refer to SN-28, "DTC Index".
Freeze Frame Data (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT.

Item name Display content

ODO/TRIP
METER Total driving distance (odometer value) upon DTC detection is displayed.
(km)
Numerical value is displayed indicating the number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after the DTC is
detected.
• When “0”is displayed, it indicates that the system is presently malfunctioning.
• When any numerical number other than “0” is displayed, it indicates that system malfunction in the past is de-
IGN counter
tected, but the system is presently normal.
(0 ∼ 39)
NOTE:
Each time when ignition switch turns OFF→ON, numerical number increases from 1→2→3...38→39. When
number of times exceeds 39, numeric display does not increase and 39 is displayed until self-diagnosis is
erased.

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Display/
Monitor Item Description
UNIT
VEHICLE SPEED km/h Value of vehicle speed signal.
SONAR C/U POWER
V Value of battery voltage (Ignition signal)
SUPPLY
SENSOR VOLTAGE V Value of sensor voltage
MODE1/ NOTE:
DETECTION MODE
MODE2 This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
SW OPRT AFTER IGN
Yes/No Temporary/permanent OFF operation by the user after turning ON the ignition switch.
ON

DAS-310
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SONAR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Display/
Monitor Item Description
UNIT A
Sonar system is in temporary OFF state.
SONAR TEMPORARY NOTE:
Yes/No
OFF The user can set temporary OFF by canceling the sonar indicator displayed on the combi- B
nation meter.
Sonar system is in permanent OFF state.
SONAR PERMANENT
Yes/No NOTE:
OFF
The user can set permanent OFF on the settings screen of the combination meter.
C
P N RANGE On/Off Status of shift position
NOTE: D
LED On/Off
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE:
TRAILER CONNECT On/Off
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
E
REVERSE RANGE On/Off Status of shift position
SHRT DST FRM RR
cm Display the closest approach detection distance that rear sensor detects.
SENS
F
SHRT DST FRM FR
cm Display the closest approach detection distance that front sensor detects.
SENS
Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor rear LH and detection by corner sen-
COR[RL] cm G
sor rear LH.
COR[RL]->CEN[RL]/ Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor rear LH and detection by center sen-
cm
CEN[R] sor rear LH.
H
CEN[RL]/CEN[R]- Distance according to oscillation from center sensor rear LH and detection by corner sen-
cm
>COR[RL] sor rear LH.
Distance according to oscillation from center sensor rear LH and detection by center sen-
CEN[RL]/CEN[R] cm
sor rear LH.
I

Distance according to oscillation from center sensor rear LH and detection by center sen-
CEN[RL]->CEN[RR] cm
sor rear RH.
J
Distance according to oscillation from center sensor rear RH and detection by center sen-
CEN[RR]->CEN[RL] cm
sor rear LH.
Distance according to oscillation from center sensor rear RH and detection by center sen-
CEN[RR] cm K
sor rear RH.
CEN[RR]/CEN[R]- Distance according to oscillation from center sensor rear RH and detection by corner sen-
cm
>COR[RR] sor rear RH.
L
COR[RR]->CEN[RR]/ Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor rear RH and detection by center sen-
cm
CEN[R] sor rear RH.
Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor rear RH and detection by corner sen-
COR[RR] cm M
sor rear RH.
Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor front LH and detection by corner sen-
COR[FL] cm
sor front LH.
COR[FL]->CEN[FL]/ Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor front LH and detection by center sen- N
cm
CEN[F] sor front LH.
CEN[FL]/CEN[F]- Distance according to oscillation from center sensor front LH and detection by corner sen-
cm
>COR[FL] sor front LH. DAS
Distance according to oscillation from center sensor front LH and detection by center sen-
CEN[FL]/CEN[F] cm
sor front LH.
Distance according to oscillation from center sensor front LH and detection by center sen- P
CEN[FL]->CEN[FR] cm
sor front RH.
Distance according to oscillation from center sensor front RH and detection by center sen-
CEN[FR]->CEN[FL] cm
sor front LH.
Distance according to oscillation from center sensor front RH and detection by center sen-
CEN[FR] cm
sor front RH.

DAS-311
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SONAR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Display/
Monitor Item Description
UNIT
CEN[FR]/CEN[F]- Distance according to oscillation from center sensor front RH and detection by corner sen-
cm
>COR[FR] sor front RH.
COR[FR]->CEN[FR]/ Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor front RH and detection by center sen-
cm
CEN[F] sor front RH.
Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor front RH and detection by corner sen-
COR[FR] cm
sor front RH.
Reverberating time of corner sensor rear LH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME COR[RL] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
Reverberating time of corner sensor rear RH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME COR[RR] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
Reverberating time of center sensor rear LH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME CEN[RL] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
Reverberating time of center sensor rear RH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME CEN[RR] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
Reverberating time of corner sensor front LH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME COR[FL] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
Reverberating time of corner sensor front RH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME COR[FR] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
Reverberating time of center sensor front LH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME CEN[FL] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
Reverberating time of center sensor front RH.
NOTE:
RVRB TIME CEN[FR] ms
Reverberating time is a period of time while sensor vibrates by super sonic waves after os-
cillating super sonic waves.
The operating state of buzzer (frontward) is displayed.
FRONT BUZZER On/Off • On: Buzzer (frontward) operation
• Off: Buzzer (frontward) non-operation
The operating state of buzzer (backward) is displayed.
REAR BUZZER On/Off • On: Buzzer (backward) operation
• Off: Buzzer (backward) non-operation
NORMAL/
PSM SYSTEM The state of a parking space measurement system is displayed.
ERROR
The parking method is displayed.
PARKING MODE PARA/PER • PARA: Parallel parking
• PER: Perpendicular parking
PSM ACTIVATION On/Off The operating state of parking space measurement system is displayed.
RIGHT/
PARKING DIRECTION Parking position is displayed.
LEFT
PARKING START POSI-
NG/OK Detection of a parking starting position is displayed.
TION
PARKING SPACE DE- NON/DE-
The detection state of a parking space is displayed.
TECT TECT

DAS-312
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SONAR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]
Display/
Monitor Item Description
UNIT A
COR X POSI FOR VEHI-
mm X position of the vehicles next to a parking space is displayed (horizontal axis).
CLE 1
COR Y POSI FOR VEHI- B
mm Y position of the vehicles next to a parking space is displayed (vertical axis).
CLE 1
COR X POSI FOR VEHI-
mm X position of the vehicles next to a parking space is displayed (horizontal axis).
CLE 2 C
COR Y POSI FOR VEHI-
mm Y position of the vehicles next to a parking space is displayed (vertical axis).
CLE 2
ANGLE BETWEEN 2 The angle of the line which connected the angle of the vehicles of parking space neighbors D
deg
CORNERS is displayed.
Distance according to oscillation from side sensor front LH and detection by side sensor
SIDE[FL] cm
front LH. E
Distance according to oscillation from side sensor front LH and detection by corner sensor
SIDE[FL]->COR[FL] cm
front LH.
Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor front LH and detection by side sensor F
COR[FL]->SIDE[FL] cm
front LH.
Distance according to oscillation from corner sensor front RH and detection by side sensor
COR[FR]->SIDE[FR] cm
front RH.
G
Distance according to oscillation from side sensor front RH and detection by corner sensor
SIDE[FR]->COR[FR] cm
front RH.
Distance according to oscillation from side sensor front RH and detection by side sensor H
SIDE[FR] cm
front RH.
SIDE[RL] cm
SIDE[RL]->COR[RL] cm I
COR[RL]->SIDE[RL] cm NOTE:
COR[RR]->SIDE[RR] cm This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
J
SIDE[RR]->COR[RR] cm
SIDE[RR] cm
ATTENUATION TIME K
ms Attenuation time of side sensor front LH.
SIDE[FL]
ATTENUATION TIME
ms Attenuation time of side sensor front RH.
SIDE[FR]
L
ATTENUATION TIME
ms
SIDE[RL] NOTE:
ATTENUATION TIME This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ms M
SIDE[RR]

ACTIVE TEST
N
Active test item Function
FRONT BUZZER This test is able to check buzzer (frontward) operation.
DAS
REAR BUZZER This test is able to check buzzer (backward) operation.
NOTE:
LED
This item is displayed, but cannot be tested
P
WORK SUPPORT

DAS-313
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SONAR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PARK ASSIST]

Work support item Function

VOLUME SETTING Adjusts the volume of buzzer.
Adjusts the distance to trailer hitch.
NOTE:
TRAILER HITCH DETECTION
After adjusting the distance to trailer hitch, the adjustment value automatically turns to 0 after
RANGE ADJUSTMENT
a lapse of 10 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON if the trailer
hitch is not connected to the vehicle.

CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows.

Function Description
Allows the reading of vehicle specification written in sonar control
Before Replace ECU
unit to store the specification in CONSULT.
Read/Write Configuration
Allows the writing of the vehicle information stored in CONSULT
After Replace ECU
into the sonar control unit.
Allows the writing of the vehicle specification into the sonar control
Manual Configuration
unit by hand.

DAS-314
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010752974
B

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Ignition switch When steering angle sensor signal is input ON

ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF E
Ignition switch When selector lever is in “R” ON
REVERSE SIGNAL
ON When selector lever is in any position other than “R” OFF
F
Ignition switch When vehicle speed is input ON
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF

Ignition switch When camera switch signal is input ON G

CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL
ON Other than the above OFF

Ignition switch When camera OFF signal is input ON

CAMERA OFF SIGNAL H
ON Other than the above OFF
Ignition switch
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE — Absolute
ON
I
Ignition switch
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE — TYPE 0
ON

Ignition switch LHD models LHD

STEERING POSITION J
ON RHD models RHD
When rear camera image signal input status is normal OK
Ignition switch
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL When rear camera image signal input status is not K
ON NG
normal
Ignition switch
WASH SW — OFF
ON
L
When communication status with rear camera is nor-
OK
Ignition switch mal
R-CAMERA COMM STATUS
ON When communication status with rear camera is not
NG M
normal
When communication line with rear camera is normal OK
Ignition switch
R-CAMERA COMM LINE When communication line with rear camera is not nor- N
ON NG
mal
When front camera image signal input status is nor-
OK
Ignition switch mal
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL DAS
ON When front camera image signal input status is not
NG
normal
When driver side camera image signal input status is P
OK
Ignition switch normal
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
ON When driver side camera image signal input status is
NG
not normal
When passenger side camera image signal input sta-
OK
Ignition switch tus is normal
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
ON When passenger side camera image signal input sta-
NG
tus is not normal

DAS-315
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Ignition switch When communication signal is input OK

PUMP COMM STATUS
ON Other than the above NG

Ignition switch When lighting switch is ON ON

Ignition switch When a towing vehicle is connected ON

TRAILER HITCH SW
ON Other than the above OFF
Displays a value
STEERING ANGLE Ignition switch ON that corresponds to
the steering angle.

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA4749ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Without BSW

DAS-316
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]

Ignition
24
23 Camera image signal Output switch — I
(G)
ON

J
JSNIA0834GB

JSNIA0834GB

DAS-317
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
Driver side camera
31 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
image signal (−)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.

Ignition
32 Driver side camera
31 Input switch —
(G) image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
36 Passenger side cam-
35 Input switch —
(Y) era image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
40 Front camera image
39 Input switch —
(LG) signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

With BSW

DAS-318
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(B)
ON
C
Ignition
2 1
Battery power supply Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(Y) (B)
OFF
Ignition D
3 1
Ignition signal Input switch — 9.5 - 16 V Battery voltage
(SB) (B)
ON
Ignition Approx. 2 sec. after ignition E
7
Ground BSW indicator LH Output switch switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb 5.5 - 16 V 12.0 V
(R)
ON check).
Ignition Approx. 2 sec. after ignition F
8
Ground BSW indicator RH Output switch switch OFF ⇒ ON (bulb 5.5 - 16 V 12.0 V
(G)
ON check)
27 Input/
— CAN-H — — — — G
(L) Output
28 Input/
— CAN-L — — — —
(R) Output
H
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status.

Communication sig- Ignition I

36
Ground nal Output switch —
(Y)
(CAMERA → PUMP) ON

J
PKIB5039J

Ignition
37 K
Ground COMM GND — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
(V)
ON
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status. L

Communication sig- Ignition

38
Ground nal Input switch —
(SB) M
(PUMP → CAMERA) ON

PKIB5039J N
Input the waveform synchronized
with the camera image signal.
DAS
Ignition
47
48 Camera image signal Output switch —
(G)
ON
P

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
Camera image signal
48 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
ground
ON

DAS-319
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Input the waveform synchronized
with the communication status.

Ignition
49 52 Rear camera commu- Input/
switch —
(LG) (B) nication signal Output
ON

JSNIA0836GB

Ignition
53 Rear camera image
54 Input switch —
(W) signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
59 Driver side camera
60 Input switch —
(G) image signal (+)
ON

JSNIA0834GB

DAS-320
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition Standard value
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Input the waveform synchronized B
with the camera image signal.

Ignition C
65 Passenger side cam-
66 Input switch —
(Y) era image signal (+)
ON

D
JSNIA0834GB

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
J
Front camera image
72 Ground — switch — 0 - 0.1 V 0V
signal (−)
ON
K
Fail-Safe (Around View Monitor Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010752975

DTC L
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
C1A00 Around view monitor control unit internal mal- Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
CONTROL UNIT function cel M
• The battery voltage sent to around view mon-
itor control unit remains less than 7.9 V for 5
C1A01 seconds Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
N
POWER SUPPLY CIRC • The battery voltage sent to around view mon- cel
itor control unit remains more than 19.3 V for
5 seconds
• BSW system is cancel DAS
If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from • DAA system is stopped.
C1A03 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) re- • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC ceived by the around view monitor control unit cancel
via CAN communication, are inconsistent • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
P
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
• DAA system is stopped.
C1A04 If a malfunction occurs in the VDC/TCS/ABS • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC system cancel
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel

DAS-321
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
C1A07 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the CVT is malfunction
CVT CIRCUIT cel
• BSW system is cancel
C1A39 • DAA system is stopped.
If the steering angle sensor is malfunction
STRG SEN CIR • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
cancel
C1A56 The around view monitor control unit detects Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR CIRC that sonar control unit has a malfunction cel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0122 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC P-RUN DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• BSW system is cancel
If around view monitor control unit detects an • DAA system is stopped.
U0416 error signal that is received from ABS actuator • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu- cancel
nication • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
cancel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U0428 stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- • BSW system is stopped.
sensor is not complete.
TION • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot • When communication of vehicle signal,
U1000
transmit/receive CAN communication signal wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
continuously for 2 seconds or more. is not normal
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- LDW system is stopped.
- BSW system is stopped.
- DAA system is stopped.
- Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped
U1010 MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected.
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) stopped.
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition • Camera image is not displayed (Gray
U111A switch is ON. screen display).
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL NOTE: • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not stopped.
saved.
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.

DAS-322
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of front camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111C
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen B
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display).
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
C
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111D
tion switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (Gray screen
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG-
NOTE: display). D
NAL
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
U112F Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
If the EPS system is malfunction E
EPS CIRCUIT cel
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
U1232
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle stopped. F
sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • BSW system is stopped.
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
angle sensor is received. • DAA system is stopped.
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is
stopped. G
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
U1302
when ignition switch is turned ON. H
• When camera power supply output is ON: 5.9 Camera power output is stopped
CAMERA POWER VOLT
- 6.5 V
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply
measurement. I
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view • Unmatched icon display (red) is dis-
monitor control unit and information read played (applicable for unmatched camera J
U1304
from camera are not the same. only).
CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
NOTE: • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not cancel.
saved. K
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
trol unit is incomplete. • On applicable camera screen marking
U1305 (Red) is displayed.
NOTE: L
CONFIG UNFINISH • Around view monitor with Park Assist is
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. cancel.

• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is

DAS-323
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
U1971 Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER correct signal from sonar control unit via CAN
cel
DIAG communication
Around view monitor control unit receives an in-
U1972 Around view monitor with Park Assist is can-
correct signal from EPS control unit via CAN
EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG cel
communication
When around view monitor control unit is not
Other Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000010752976

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.

Priority Detected items (DTC)

DTC Index INFOID:0000000010752977

Fail-safe subject system

• A: Around View Monitor system
• B: MOD (Moving Object Detection)
• C: BSW (Blind Spot Warning)
• D: DAA (Driver Attention Alert)
• E: Around view monitor with Park Assist

DAS-324
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]

U0416 VDC CHECKSUM DIAGNOSIS × (Orange) × × × AV-175

U0428 ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION × × (Orange) × × × AV-176
F
U1000NOTE CAN COMM CIRC × × (Orange) × × × AV-178
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) × AV-180
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-182
G
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-186
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-192 H
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL × AV-195
U112F EPS CIRCUIT × AV-201
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB × × (Orange) × × × AV-205 I
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT × AV-222
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIB × × AV-230
J
U1305NOTE CONFIG UNFINISH × AV-231
U1308 R-CAMERA (R&L) CALIB JDGMNT × × AV-232
U1309 PUMP INPUT CURRENT JUDGE × (Blue) × AV-233 K
U130A PUMP ECU JUDGE × (Blue) × AV-234
U130B RR CAMERA COMM ERROR × (Orange) × AV-235
L
U1320 REPROGRAMMING × AV-237
U150E BCM CIRCUIT × AV-238
U1971 SONAR MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG × AV-239 M
U1972 EPS MESSAGE COUNTER DIAG × AV-240
NOTE:
N
Some systems activate fail-safe when U1000 is detected, and some do not.
• The systems which activate failsafe are those which use the signal from the control unit where communica-
tion with the around view monitor control unit is interrupted.
• When U1305 is detected, operates with vehicle settings set to default values. DAS

DAS-325
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000010924097

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Ignition switch Input value of vehicle
VEHICLE SPEED While driving
ON speed signal
SONAR C/U POWER SUP- Ignition switch Input value of battery volt-
While driving
PLY ON age
Output value of power sup-
Ignition switch
SENSOR VOLTAGE While driving ply voltage
ON
(Approx. 8.0 V)
Ignition switch NOTE:
DETECTION MODE
ON This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Temporary OFF or permanent OFF is set by the user af-
Ignition switch Yes
SW OPRT AFTR IGN ON ter the ignition switch ON.
ON
Other than the above No

Ignition switch Sonar system is in temporary OFF state. Yes

SONAR TEMPORARY OFF
ON Other than the above No

Ignition switch Sonar system is in permanent OFF state. Yes

SONAR PERMANENT OFF
ON Other than the above No

Ignition switch Shift position: “P” or “N” position On

P N RANGE
ON Other than the above Off
Ignition switch NOTE:
LED
ON This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Ignition switch NOTE:
TRAILER CONNECT
ON This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

Ignition switch Shift position: “R” position On

REVERSE RANGE
ON Other than the above Off
Ignition switch Distance between rear
SHRT DST FRM RR SENS When obstacles exist around rear bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between front
SHRT DST FRM FR SENS When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by corner sensor rear LH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm
COR[RL] [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56 in)]
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56
in)]
When no obstacles exist around corner sensor rear LH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
Ignition switch Distance between rear
COR[RL]->CEN[RL]/CEN[R] When obstacles exist around rear bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between rear
CEN[RL]/CEN[R]->COR[RL] When obstacles exist around rear bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.

DAS-326
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
A
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by center sensor rear LH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm
CEN[RL]/CEN[R] [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73 in)]
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73 B
in)]
When no obstacles exist around center sensor rear LH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
Ignition switch Distance between rear C
CEN[RL]->CEN[RR] When obstacles exist around rear bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between rear
CEN[RR]->CEN[RL] When obstacles exist around rear bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle. D
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by center sensor rear RH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm
CEN[RR] [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73 in)] E
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73
in)]
When no obstacles exist around center sensor rear RH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
CEN[RR]/CEN[R]- Ignition switch Distance between rear
F
When obstacles exist around rear bumper.
>COR[RR] ON bumper and obstacle.
COR[RR]->CEN[RR]/ Ignition switch Distance between rear
When obstacles exist around rear bumper. G
CEN[R] ON bumper and obstacle.
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by corner sensor rear RH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm H
COR[RR] [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56 in)]
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56
in)]
When no obstacles exist around corner sensor rear RH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
I
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by corner sensor front LH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm
COR[FL] [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56 in)] J
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56
in)]
When no obstacles exist around corner sensor front LH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
Ignition switch Distance between front K
COR[FL]->CEN[FL]/CEN[F] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between front
CEN[FL]/CEN[F]->COR[FL] When obstacles exist around front bumper. L
ON bumper and obstacle.
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by center sensor front LH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm M
CEN[FL]/CEN[F] [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73 in)]
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73
in)]
When no obstacles exist around center sensor front LH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
N
Ignition switch Distance between front
CEN[FL]->CEN[FR] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between front DAS
CEN[FR]->CEN[FL] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by center sensor front RH. P
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm
CEN[FR] [Approx. 27 cm - 100 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73 in)]
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 39.73
in)]
When no obstacles exist around center sensor front RH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
Ignition switch Distance between front
CEN[FR]/CEN[F]->COR[FR] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.

DAS-327
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Ignition switch Distance between front
COR[FR]->CEN[FR]/CEN[F] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by corner sensor front RH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm
COR[FR] [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56 in)]
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56
in)]
When no obstacles exist around corner sensor front RH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
RVRB TIME COR[RL] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
RVRB TIME COR[RR] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
RVRB TIME CEN[RL] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
RVRB TIME CEN[RR] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
RVRB TIME COR[FL] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
RVRB TIME COR[FR] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
RVRB TIME CEN[FL] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
RVRB TIME CEN[FR] Ignition switch ON Approx. 1.5 ms
When the buzzer (frontward) is operating On
FRONT BUZZER
Except above Off
When the buzzer (backward) is operating On
REAR BUZZER
Except above Off
NOTE:
LED
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
PSM function of park assist is Normal NORMAL
PSM SYSTEM
PSM function of park assist is Malfunctioning ERROR
Parallel parking PARA
PARKING MODE
Perpendicular parking PER
PSM function of park assist is activated On
PSM ACTIVATION
PSM function of park assist is deactivated Off
Parking the right-hand side. RIGHT
PARKING DIRECTION
Parking the left-hand side. LEFT

PARKING START POSI- A parking starting position is reached. OK

TION A parking starting position is not reached. NG
The parking space non-detection NON
PARKING SPACE DETECT
The parking space detection DETECT
Distance with the vehicles
COR X POSI FOR VEHICLE which the sensor detected
Ignition switch ON
1 is displayed. (Horizontal
axis)
Distance with the vehicles
COR Y POSI FOR VEHICLE
Ignition switch ON which the sensor detected
1
is displayed.(Vertical axis)
Distance with the vehicles
COR X POSI FOR VEHICLE which the sensor detected
Ignition switch ON
2 is displayed. (Horizontal
axis)
Distance with the vehicles
COR Y POSI FOR VEHICLE
Ignition switch ON which the sensor detected
2
is displayed.(Vertical axis)

DAS-328
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
A
The angle by the position
ANGLE BETWEEN 2 COR- of the vehicles which the
Ignition switch ON
NERS sensor detected is dis-
played. B
Distance between sensor
and obstacle.
When an obstacle is detected by side sensor front LH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm
SIDE[FL] [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56 in)]
(Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56
C
ON
in)]
When no obstacles exist around side sensor front LH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
D
Ignition switch Distance between front
SIDE[FL]->COR[FL] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between front
COR[FL]->SIDE[FL] When obstacles exist around front bumper. E
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between front
COR[FR]->SIDE[FR] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Ignition switch Distance between front
F
SIDE[FR]->COR[FR] When obstacles exist around front bumper.
ON bumper and obstacle.
Distance between sensor
and obstacle. G
When an obstacle is detected by side sensor front RH.
Ignition switch [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm
SIDE[FR] [Approx. 27 cm - 70 cm (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56 in)]
ON (Approx. 10.63 in - 27.56
in)]
H
When no obstacles exist around side sensor front RH. 255 cm (100.39 in)
NOTE:
SIDE[RL]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
I
NOTE:
SIDE[RL]->COR[RL]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE: J
COR[RL]->SIDE[RL]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE:
COR[RR]->SIDE[RR]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
K
NOTE:
SIDE[RR]->COR[RR]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE: L
SIDE[RR]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ATTENUATION TIME
Ignition switch ON 0.01 - 2.55 ms
SIDE[FL]
M
ATTENUATION TIME
Ignition switch ON 0.01 - 2.55 ms
SIDE[FR]
ATTENUATION TIME NOTE:
SIDE[RL] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
N
ATTENUATION TIME NOTE:
SIDE[RR] This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
DAS
TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA7372ZZ

DAS-329
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
2 13 Front buzzer pow-
Output [Ignition switch ON] — 0V
(Y) (B) er supply

Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
6 22 Corner sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in R posi-
(R) (P) nal rear LH sor signal is
tion.
input

SKIB8942E

Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
7 22 Center sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in R posi-
(V) (P) nal rear RH sor signal is
tion.
input

SKIB8942E

NOTE:
• Voltage depends on volume.
• Cycle depends on distance be-
[Ignition switch ON] tween sensor and obstacle.
When the distance be-
9 13 Rear buzzer drive
Input tween the sensor and ob- —
(G) (B) signal
stacle is approx 60 cm
(23.62 in).

JSNIA5232GB

NOTE:
• Voltage depends on volume.
• Cycle depends on distance be-
[Ignition switch ON] tween sensor and obstacle.
When the distance be-
10 13 Front buzzer drive
Input tween the sensor and ob- —
(SB) (B) signal
stacle is approx 60 cm
(23.62 in).

JSNIA5232GB

13 Groun
Ground — — — 0V
(B) d
14 13 Ignition power sup-
Input — 9.0 - 16.0 V Battery voltage
(BR) (B) ply
15 13 Rear buzzer power
Output [Ignition switch ON] — 0V
(Y) (B) supply
[Ignition switch ON]
16 Groun Sonar system While pressing the sonar 2.0 V 2.0 V
Input system switch.
(V) d switch signal
Other than above. 12.0 V 12.0 V

DAS-330
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
[Ignition switch ON] B
Sonar system switch indi- 12.0 V 12.0 V
Sonar system cator lamp is ON.
17 Groun
switch indicator Output
(SB) d [Ignition switch ON] C
signal
Sonar system switch indi- 0V 0V
cator lamp is OFF.
18 22 Rear sensor power D
Output — — 8.0 V
(SB) (P) supply

E
Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
20 22 Center sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in R posi-
(G) (P) nal rear LH sor signal is
tion.
input F

SKIB8942E

Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
21 22 Corner sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in R posi- H
(LG) (P) nal rear RH sor signal is
tion.
input

SKIB8942E
I
22 Groun Rear sensor
— — — 0V
(P) d ground
23
— CAN–L
Input/
— — —
J
(P) Output
24 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output K

Waveform ac- L
[Ignition switch ON]
28 36 Side sensor signal cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in D posi-
(BR) (P) front LH sor signal is
tion.
input
M
SKIB8942E

N
Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
29 36 Center sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in D posi-
(G) (P) nal front LH sor signal is
tion. DAS
input

SKIB8942E

Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
30 36 Corner sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in D posi-
(V) (P) nal front RH sor signal is
tion.
input

SKIB8942E

DAS-331
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition Standard
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
36 Groun Front sensor
— — — 0V
(P) d ground

Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
37 36 Corner sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in D posi-
(W) (P) nal front LH sor signal is
tion.
input

SKIB8942E

Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
38 36 Center sensor sig- cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in D posi-
(LG) (P) nal front RH sor signal is
tion.
input

SKIB8942E

Waveform ac-
[Ignition switch ON]
39 36 Side sensor signal cording to sen-
Input Shift position is in D posi-
(R) (P) front RH sor signal is
tion.
input

SKIB8942E

40 36 Front sensor pow-

Output — — 8.0 V
(SB) (P) er supply

Fail-Safe (Sonar Control Unit) INFOID:0000000010924098

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.

Priority Detected items (DTC)

• U1000-01: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
1
• U1010-49: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

DAS-332
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
Priority Detected items (DTC)
A
2 B2724-55: SONAR CONTROL UNIT
• B2720-12: CORNER SENSOR [RL]
• B2720-14: CORNER SENSOR [RL]
• B2720-55: CORNER SENSOR [RL] B
• B2720-92: CORNER SENSOR [RL]
• B2721-12: CENTER SENSOR [RL]
• B2721-14: CENTER SENSOR [RL]
• B2721-55: CENTER SENSOR [RL]
C
• B2721-92: CENTER SENSOR [RL]
• B2722-12: CENTER SENSOR [RR]
• B2722-14: CENTER SENSOR [RR] D
• B2722-55: CENTER SENSOR [RR]
• B2722-92: CENTER SENSOR [RR]
• B2723-12: CORNER SENSOR [RR]
• B2723-14: CORNER SENSOR [RR] E
• B2723-55: CORNER SENSOR [RR]
• B2723-92: CORNER SENSOR [RR]
• B2725-12: REAR BUZZER
• B2725-14: REAR BUZZER F
• B2728-11: LED
• B2728-12: LED
• B2728-14: LED
• B2729-12: CORNER SENSOR [FL] G
• B2729-14: CORNER SENSOR [FL]
3 • B2729-55: CORNER SENSOR [FL]
• B2729-92: CORNER SENSOR [FL]
H
• B272A-12: CENTER SENSOR [FL]
• B272A-14: CENTER SENSOR [FL]
• B272A-55: CENTER SENSOR [FL]
• B272A-92: CENTER SENSOR [FL] I
• B272B-12: CENTER SENSOR [FR]
• B272B-14: CENTER SENSOR [FR]
• B272B-55: CENTER SENSOR [FR]
• B272B-92: CENTER SENSOR [FR] J
• B272C-12: CORNER SENSOR [FR]
• B272C-14: CORNER SENSOR [FR]
• B272C-55: CORNER SENSOR [FR]
• B272C-92: CORNER SENSOR [FR] K
• B272D-12: FRONT BUZZER
• B272D-14: FRONT BUZZER
• B272E-12: SIDE SENSOR [FL]
• B272E-14: SIDE SENSOR [FL] L
• B272E-55: SIDE SENSOR [FL]
• B272E-92: SIDE SENSOR [FL]
• B272F-12: SIDE SENSOR [FR]
M
• B272F-14: SIDE SENSOR [FR]
• B272F-55: SIDE SENSOR [FR]
• B272F-92: SIDE SENSOR [FR]
N
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010924100

×: Applicable
DAS
DTC Display item Reference
U1000-01 CAN COMM CIRCUIT SN-231, "DTC Description"
U1010-49 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) SN-232, "DTC Description" P
B2720-12 SHORT-BAT SN-158, "DTC Description"
B2720-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-160, "DTC Description"
CORNER SENSOR [RL]
B2720-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-162, "DTC Description"
B2720-92 SENSOR SN-163, "DTC Description"

DAS-333
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PARK ASSIST]
DTC Display item Reference
B2721-12 SHORT-BAT SN-164, "DTC Description"
B2721-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-166, "DTC Description"
CENTER SENSOR [RL]
B2721-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-168, "DTC Description"
B2721-92 SENSOR SN-169, "DTC Description"
B2722-12 SHORT-BAT SN-170, "DTC Description"
B2722-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-172, "DTC Description"
CENTER SENSOR [RR]
B2722-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-174, "DTC Description"
B2722-92 SENSOR SN-175, "DTC Description"
B2723-12 SHORT-BAT SN-176, "DTC Description"
B2723-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-178, "DTC Description"
CORNER SENSOR [RR]
B2723-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-180, "DTC Description"
B2723-92 SENSOR SN-181, "DTC Description"
B2724-55 SONAR CONTROL UNIT CONFIG ERROR SN-182, "DTC Description"
B2725-12 SHORT-BAT SN-183, "DTC Description"
REAR BUZZER
B2725-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-185, "DTC Description"
B2728-11 SHORT-GND SN-187, "DTC Description"
B2728-12 LED SHORT-BAT SN-188, "DTC Description"
B2728-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-189, "DTC Description"
B2729-12 SHORT-BAT SN-191, "DTC Description"
B2729-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-193, "DTC Description"
CORNER SENSOR [FL]
B2729-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-195, "DTC Description"
B2729-92 SENSOR SN-196, "DTC Description"
B272A-12 SHORT-BAT SN-197, "DTC Description"
B272A-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-199, "DTC Description"
CENTER SENSOR [FL]
B272A-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-201, "DTC Description"
B272A-92 SENSOR SN-202, "DTC Description"
B272B-12 SHORT-BAT SN-203, "DTC Description"
B272B14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-205, "DTC Description"
CENTER SENSOR [FR]
B272B-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-207, "DTC Description"
B272B-92 SENSOR SN-208, "DTC Description"
B272C-12 SHORT-BAT SN-209, "DTC Description"
B272C-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-211, "DTC Description"
CORNER SENSOR [FR]
B272C-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-213, "DTC Description"
B272C-92 SENSOR SN-214, "DTC Description"
B272D-12 SHORT-BAT SN-215, "DTC Description"
FRONT BUZZER
B272D-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-217, "DTC Description"
B272E-12 SHORT-BAT SN-219, "DTC Description"
B272E-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-221, "DTC Description"
SIDE SENSOR [FL]
B272E-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-223, "DTC Description"
B272E-92 SENSOR SN-224, "DTC Description"
B272F-12 SHORT-BAT SN-225, "DTC Description"
B272F-14 OPEN/SHORT-GND SN-227, "DTC Description"
SIDE SENSOR [FR]
B272F-55 CONFIG ERROR SN-229, "DTC Description"
B272F-92 SENSOR SN-230, "DTC Description"

DAS-334
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011045916
B

DAS

JROWC2843GB

DAS-335
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2844GB

DAS-336
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2845GB

DAS-337
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2846GB

DAS-338
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2847GB

DAS-339
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2848GB

DAS-340
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2849GB

DAS-341
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2850GB

DAS-342
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2851GB

DAS-343
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2852GB

DAS-344
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2853GB

DAS-345
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2854GB

DAS-346
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2855GB

DAS-347
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2856GB

DAS-348
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2857GB

DAS-349
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2858GB

DAS-350
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

DAS

JROWC2859GB

DAS-351
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PARK ASSIST]

JROWC2860GB

DAS-352
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PARK ASSIST]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010721654
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

DAS

P
JSOIA0485GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION

It is also important to clarify the customer concerns before starting the inspection. Interview the customer
about their concerns carefully and understand the symptoms fully.
DAS-353
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PARK ASSIST]
NOTE:
The customers are not professionals. Never assume that “maybe the customer means···” or “maybe the cus-
tomer mentioned this symptom”.

>> GO TO 2.
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the DTC is detected on the self-diagnosis results of “AVM” and “SONAR”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Record or print self-diagnosis results and freeze frame data (FFD). GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.ACTION TEST
Perform around view monitor with Park Assist system action test to check the operation status. Refer to DAS-
355, "Description".
Check if any other malfunctions occur.

>> GO TO 4.
4.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the applicable diagnosis according to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to DAS-356, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 6.
5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC
1. Check the DTC in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to DAS-324, "DTC Index"
NOTE:
If “DTC: U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system.

>> GO TO 6.
6.MALFUNCTIONING PART REPAIR
Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 7.
7.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT)
1. Erases self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” again after repairing or replacing the specific items.
3. Check if any DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “AVM”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.REPAIR CHECK (ACTION TEST)
Perform the around view monitor with Park Assist system action test. Check that the malfunction symptom is
solved or no other symptoms occur.
Is there a malfunction symptom?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> INSPECTION END

DAS-354
ACTION TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PARK ASSIST]
ACTION TEST
A
Description INFOID:0000000010721655

After the around view monitor is replaced or a malfunction of the around view monitor with Park Assist is B
repaired, perform an operation inspection and check that the system operates normally.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000010721656

C
1.CHECK OPERATION OF THE AROUND VIEW MONITOR
Check whether or not the around view monitor and sonar system are operating normally. Refer to AV-78, "Sys-
tem Description" (Around view monitor) or SN-124, "SONAR SYSTEM : System Description" (Sonar system). D

>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CHECK STARTUP OF THE AROUND VIEW MONITOR WITH PARK ASSIST
1. Press the “Camera switch” to change to the camera screen.
2. Press the “Park Assist (PA) switch” on the screen. F
3. Check that the screen changes to the parallel parking mode screen.

>> GO TO 3. G
3.CHECK OPERATION OF PARALLEL PARKING MODE
1. Operate a turn signal and check that the detection direction switches.
2. Check that a parking rectangle can be detected in scan mode. H

>> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK OPERATION OF PERPENDICULAR PARKING MODE
1. Press the“Perpendicular mode switch” on the screen.
2. Operate a turn signal and check that the detection direction of a target parking rectangle switches. J
3. Press the “Adjust switch” on the screen, and check whether or not fine adjustment of the rectangle lines
occurs.
4. Check whether or not the automatic adjustment is performed so that the positions of the target parking
K
rectangle (blue) and the actual vehicle rectangle match.
5. Start the Park Assist and check that the vehicle can be properly perked.

L
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK OPERATION OF THE AROUND VIEW MONITOR WITH PARK ASSIST.
1. Press the “Start switch” and perform parking using automatic steering. M
2. Check that the steering operates automatically when parking is started.
3. Check that the target parking rectangle and other information is displayed on the screen. Refer to DAS-
287, "System Description" (function description). N
4. Check that the obstacle is detected and the warning sound occurs when there is an obstacle in the for-
ward/reverse starting position rectangle.
5. Check that the chime sounds and around view monitor with Park Assist ends automatically when the vehi-
cle moves close to the target parking rectangle (blue). DAS

>> INSPECTION END

DAS-355
PARK ASSIST SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PARK ASSIST]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
PARK ASSIST SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000010721657

Probable malfunction location / Refer-

Symptoms Check items
ence
Touch operation occurs correctly at the same lo- Replacement of the around view moni-
cation on the display when the map screen or tor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Re-
other screen is displayed. moval and Installation".
Touch panel cannot be operated.
Touch operation does not occur correctly at the
NAVI control unit malfunction diagno-
same location on the display when the map
sis. Refer to AV-252, "Symptom Table".
screen or other screen is displayed.
Replacement of the around view moni-
Steering does not operate automatically
— tor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Re-
after Park Assist is started.
moval and Installation".
Power steering malfunction diagnosis.
“ Park Assist fault” is displayed on the screen. Refer to STC-21, "DTC Index".
System does not cancel when the steer-
ing wheel is turned during Park Assist Replacement of the around view moni-
operation. “ Park Assist fault” is not displayed on the tor control unit. Refer to AV-268, "Re-
screen. moval and Installation".
• Around view monitor control unit in-
spection. Refer to AV-155, "AROUND
VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM : Work
Buzzer sound is not output. —
Flow"
• Sonar control unit inspection. Refer
to SN-154, "Work Flow".
Parking space measurement function is Sonar control unit inspection. Refer to
A sonar system error is displayed.
not activated. SN-154, "Work Flow".

DAS-356
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PARK ASSIST]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000010721658

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE AROUND VIEW MONITOR WITH PARK ASSIST B
• Around view monitor with Park Assist is designed to support the driver’s steering wheel operation in a park-
ing lot. It does not automatically lower the vehicle speed or avoid contact with objects. As when performing
ordinary parking maneuvers, always look out the windows and check with own eyes to be sure that the sur- C
rounding and road conditions are safe for the maneuvers before operating the vehicle. Operate the vehicle
slowly during the parking maneuvers. If the vehicle gets close to people or objects near the vehicle, avoid
making contact by using the brakes and other maneuvers.
• Do not touch the spoke of the steering wheel while the around view monitor with Park Assist is operating. It D
could cause injuries to hands or fingers. Keep neckties, scarves. etc. away from the steering wheel since
they may get entangled and cause unexpected accidents.
• Do not drive looking only at the screen. It could cause unexpected accidents or cause the vehicle to contact E
surrounding objects.
• When assistance from the around view monitor with Park Assist is no longer necessary, turn off the system
by touching the “Cancel” button on the screen. If the around view monitor with Park Assist remains on, the
steering wheel may operate automatically and may cause unexpected accidents. F
• Make sure that there is enough space for parking maneuvers before starting to use the around view monitor
with Park Assist.
• Keep in mind that the front of the vehicle may swing out towards oncoming traffic while the around view G
monitor with Park Assist.
• Do not use the around view monitor with Park Assist under the following conditions.
- On unpaved roads.
H
- On slippery roads like snow-covered or frozen roads.
- On uneven roads with slants, bumps, curbstones, wheel tracks, etc.
- On curved roads.
- At mechanical parking facilities. I
- Where parking or stopping is prohibited.
- When tire chains or a spare tire are installed.
- When the vehicle is being towed.
J
- When the doors (including the back door) are not closed.
- When transporting a load that protrudes from own vehicle.
- When the vehicle is laden with heavy loads.
K
PHENOMENA WHICH CAN BE EASILY MISTAKEN FOR MALFUNCTIONS
Perpendicular Mode
• After the white line is automatically detected and fine adjustment of the target parking rectangle is per- L
formed, if the vehicle is moved before “Start” (start switch) is pressed, the target parking rectangle returns to
its initial position (position prior to fine adjustment).
• When aligning the parking rectangle position in the display, if the vehicle drives for 5 seconds or more or
M
drives at a speed of 4 km/h or more, then the target parking rectangle and forward/reverse starting position
rectangle disappear and the guidance message changes to “Check directly for safety around the vehicle”.
Perpendicular Parking Mode and Parallel Parking Mode N
• The steering wheel does not fully return to straight-ahead (neutral position) when the around view monitor
with Park Assist is ended.
DAS

DAS-357
DRIVER CONTROLS

SECTION DEF DEFOGGER

E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 Work Flow ................................................................25 F

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 26

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ........... 26
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 Component Function Check ....................................26
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 3 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26
H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY ............. 27
Component Function Check ....................................27
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................27
I
Component Parts Location ........................................ 5 Component Inspection .............................................28
Rear Window Defogger ............................................. 6
Door Mirror Defogger ................................................ 6
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .......................... 29
Component Function Check ....................................29 J
SYSTEM .............................................................. 7 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................29
System Description ................................................... 7 Component Inspection .............................................31
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 9 K
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ........................... 32
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................10 Component Function Check ....................................32
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 10 DEF
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ... 33
COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 10 Component Function Check ....................................33
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................33
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ................................... 11 M
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Func- PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOG-
tion (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) ............................ 11 GER ................................................................... 35
Component Function Check ....................................35 N
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 12 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................35
BCM ....................................................................12 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 37
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 12 O
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 13 MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT OPERATE. ... 37
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................37 P
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM ............13
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 13 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 25 OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR DE-
FOGGERS OPERATE ...................................... 38
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........25 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38

DEF-1
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OP- REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR
ERATE BUT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT ILLUMINATE .................................. 40
OPERATE .......................................................... 39 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 40

BOTH SIDES ............................................................. 39 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 41

BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 39
FILAMENT ......................................................... 41
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 39 Inspection and Repair ............................................. 41
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 39
CONDENSER .................................................... 43
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 39 Removal and Installation ......................................... 43
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 39

DEF-2
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010774365

• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key K
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing DEF
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition M
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
N
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of O
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE: P
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below.
For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2.
INSTRUCTION 1
1. Open the hood.

DEF-3
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
4. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
5. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF)
1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry.
NOTE:
At this moment, ACC power is supplied.
2. Open the driver side door.
3. Open the hood.
4. Close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes.
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.

DEF-4
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010774367
B

DEF

N
JMLIA4909ZZ

Back side of headlining assembly

rear side O

No. Component Function

P
Door mirror defogger Refer to DEF-6, "Door Mirror Defogger".
• Receives rear window defogger switch signal.
• Performs the timer control of rear window defogger.
BCM
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed in-
stallation location.
Rear window defogger Refer to DEF-6, "Rear Window Defogger".

DEF-5
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No. Component Function
• Rear window defogger switch is installed.
A/C control
• Turns the indicator lamp ON when detecting the operation of rear window defogger.
(Automatic air conditioning
Refer to HAC-8, "AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
models)
tion" for detailed installation location.
• Rear window defogger switch is installed.
• A/C amp. transmits rear window defogger switch signal to BCM via CAN communication.
A/C amp. • A/C amp. receives rear window defogger feedback signal from BCM via CAN communi-
(Manual air conditioning mod- cation.
els) • Turns the indicator lamp ON when detecting the operation of rear window defogger.
Refer to HAC-140, "MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
• A/C auto amp. receives rear window defogger switch signal from A/C control and trans-
mits it to BCM via CAN communication.
A/C auto amp.
• A/C auto amp. receives rear window defogger feedback signal from BCM via CAN com-
(Automatic air conditioning
munication and transmits it to A/C control.
models)
Refer to HAC-8, "AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion" for detailed installation location.
Condenser Condenser reduce the noise of rear window defogger operation

Rear Window Defogger INFOID:0000000010774368

Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window
defogger relay to prevent the rear window from fogging up.

JMLIA2595GB

Door Mirror Defogger INFOID:0000000010774369

Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window
defogger relay to prevent the door mirror from fogging up.

JMLIA2596GB

DEF-6
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
System Description INFOID:0000000010774370

SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
Automatic Air Conditioning Models

JMLIA5343GB
G

Manual Air Conditioning Models

DEF
JMLIA5217GB

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION

Automatic Air Conditioning Models M
• Turn rear window defogger switch ON when the ignition switch turns ON. Then A/C control transmits rear
window defogger switch signal to A/C auto amp. via LIN communication line.
• A/C auto amp. transmits rear window defogger switch signal to BCM via CAN communication. N
• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON and transmits rear window defogger feedback signal to A/C auto
amp. via CAN communication when rear window defogger switch signal is received.
• Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger are supplied with power and operate when rear window O
defogger relay turns ON.
• A/C auto amp. transmit rear window defogger feedback signal to A/C control via LIN communication line
when rear window defogger feedback signal is received.
• A/C control turns on the rear window defogger indicator lamp when rear window defogger feedback signal is P
received.
Manual Air Conditioning Models
• Turn rear window defogger switch ON when the ignition switch turns ON. Then A/C amp. transmits rear win-
dow defogger switch signal to BCM via CAN communication.
• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON and transmits rear window defogger feedback signal to A/C amp.
via CAN communication when rear window defogger switch signal is received.

DEF-7
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger are supplied with power and operate when rear window
defogger relay turns ON.
• A/C amp. turns on the rear window defogger indicator lamp when rear window defogger feedback signal is
received.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER TIMER FUNCTION
• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON for approximately 15 minutes when rear window defogger switch
turns ON. It makes rear window defogger and door mirror defogger operate.
• Timer is canceled after pressing rear window defogger switch again during timer operation. Then BCM turns
rear window defogger relay OFF. The same reaction also occurs during timer operation, if the ignition switch
is turned OFF.

DEF-8
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010774371

DEF

JMLIA5342GB
P

DEF-9
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000010774372

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

Diagnosis mode Function Description

Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item

Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
Door lock DOOR LOCK × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP ×
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × ×
— AIR CONDITONER* × ×
Intelligent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×
Combination switch COMB SW ×
Body control system BCM ×
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER ×
Back door open TRUNK ×
Vehicle security THEFT ALM × ×
RAP RETAINED PWR ×
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
NOTE:
*: This item is displayed, but not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.

DEF-10
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description A

NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
C
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK STATUS —
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
POWER SUPPLY
min Displays the cumulative time from the time that the battery terminal is connected. D
COUNTER

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

E
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER)
INFOID:0000000010774373

WORK SUPPORT F

Service item Setting item Description

G
MODE1*
NOTE:
SET R-DEF TIMER MODE2 Do not use this function.
MODE3 H
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
I
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
J
Monitor Item Description
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
REAR DEF SW Displays “Press (On)/other (Off)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch K

ACTIVE TEST
DEF
Test Item Description
REAR DEFOGGER Rear window defogger operates when “On” on CONSULT screen is touched
M

DEF-11
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000010774374

ECU Reference
BCS-53, "Reference Value"
BCS-76, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-77, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-78, "DTC Index"

DEF-12
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM A
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010774375
B

LHD MODELS
C

DEF

JRLWD5749GB

DEF-13
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRLWD5750GB

DEF-14
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

DEF

JRLWD5751GB

DEF-15
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRLWD5752GB

DEF-16
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

DEF

JRLWD5753GB

DEF-17
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRLWD5754GB

DEF-18
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
RHD MODELS
A

DEF

JRLWD5755GB
P

DEF-19
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRLWD5756GB

DEF-20
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

DEF

JRLWD5757GB

DEF-21
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRLWD5758GB

DEF-22
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

DEF

JRLWD5759GB

DEF-23
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

JRLWD5760GB

DEF-24
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010774376
B

DETAILED FLOW
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM C
Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.
D
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC E
Perform self diagnosis with CONSULT.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-78, "DTC Index". F
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION G
Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.
Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.
H
>> GO TO 4.
4.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS”
I
Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 3. Then identify where to start perform-
ing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.

J
>> GO TO 5.
5.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS”
Perform the diagnosis with “Component diagnosis” of the applicable system. K

>> GO TO 6.
DEF
6.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
M
>> GO TO 7.
7.FINAL CHECK
N
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3.
Are all malfunctions corrected?
O
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 4.
P

DEF-25
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010774377

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION

Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger illuminates when rear window defogger switch ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger switch function is OK.
NO >> Refer to DEF-26, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774378

1.CHECK A/C TYPE

Check A/C type.

Automatic A/C>>GO TO 2.
Manual A/C>>GO TO 3.
2.REPLACE A/C CONTROL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Replace A/C control. Refer to HAC-125, "Removal and Installation".
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Operate rear window defogger switch and check the operating condition.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace A/C auto amp. Refer to HAC-126, "Removal and Installation"
3.REPLACE A/C AMP.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Replace A/C amp. Refer to HAC-222, "Removal and Installation".
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Operate rear window defogger switch and check the operating condition.

>> INSPECTION END

DEF-26
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010774379

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT B

1. Perform BCM Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer. C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger relay power supply circuit is OK.
NO >> Refer to DEF-27, "Diagnosis Procedure" D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774380

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1 E

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
F
(+)
BCM (-) Condition Voltage
G
Connector Terminal
ON 0 – 1.5 V
M87 64 Ground Rear window defogger switch
OFF 9 – 16 V H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO-1 >> Fixed at 0 V and remains unchanged: GO TO 2. I
NO-2 >> Fixed at 9 – 16 V and remains unchanged: Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and
Installation".
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 2 J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect BCM connector and fuse block (J/B) connector.
K
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and fuse block (J/B) harness connector.

BCM Fuse block (J/B)

Continuity DEF
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M87 64 M3 6C Existed
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY N
Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-28, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay.
4.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B) P
1. Install the rear window defogger relay.
2. Connect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and ground.

DEF-27
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

(+)
Fuse block (J/B) (-) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M3 6C Ground 9 – 16 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace fuse block (J/B).
5.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check rear window defogger relay. Refer to DEF-28, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010774381

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
3. Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminals.

Terminal
Rear window Condition Continuity
defogger relay
12 V direct current supply between termi-
Existed
nals and .
No current supply Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END SEF497Y
NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay.

DEF-28
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010774382

B
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
1. Perform BCM Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”. C
3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger is OK. D
NO >> Refer to DEF-29, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774383
E
1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Check that the following fuses are not fusing.

Fuse No. Capacity

G
23
15 A
24
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

1. Disconnect rear window defogger connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON.
J
3. Check voltage between rear window defogger harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage K
Rear window defogger (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

Rear window defogger ON Battery voltage DEF

B165 1 Ground
switch OFF 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT N
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between rear window defogger harness connector and ground.
O
Rear window defogger
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D166 2 Existed P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser connector.

DEF-29
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between condenser harness connector and rear window defogger harness connector.

Condenser Rear window defogger

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
D167 2 D165 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and condenser harness connector.

Fuse block (J/B) Condenser

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
3G
B106 B19 1 Existed
5G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
1. Connect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Fuse block (J/B) (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
ON Battery voltage
3G
Rear window defogger OFF 0V
B106 Ground
switch ON Battery voltage
5G
OFF 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace or repair fuse block (J/B).
7.CHECK FILAMENT
Check the filament for damage or blown. Refer to DEF-41, "Inspection and Repair".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace condenser. Refer to DEF-43, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK CONDENSER
Check condenser. Refer to DEF-31, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair filament.
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

DEF-30
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010774384

A
1.CHECK CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF
2. Disconnect condenser connector. B
3. Check continuity between condenser terminals.

Terminal Continuity C
1 2 Existed
4. Check continuity between condenser and ground part of condenser.
D
Condenser
Continuity
Terminal Ground part of condenser
E
1 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Replace condenser. Refer to DEF-43, "Removal and Installation".

DEF

DEF-31
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010774385

1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER

1. Perform BCM Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that both side door mirror glass is getting warmer.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door mirror defogger is OK.
NO >> Refer to DEF-32, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774386

1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check that the following fuse is not fusing.

Fuse No. Capacity

22 10 A
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
1. Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Fuse block (J/B) (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
ON Battery voltage
4C
Rear window OFF 0V
M3 Ground
defogger switch ON Battery voltage
5C
OFF 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace or repair fuse block (J/B).
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

DEF-32
DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010774387

1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER B

1. Perform BCM Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that the driver side door mirror glass is getting warmer. C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Driver side door mirror defogger is OK.
NO >> Refer to DEF-33, "Diagnosis Procedure" D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774388

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector.
F
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
G
(+)
Voltage
Door mirror (driver side) (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal H
Rear window defogger ON Battery voltage
D3 2 Ground
switch OFF 0V
I
RHD models
(+)
Voltage
Door mirror (driver side) (-) Condition
(Approx.) J
Connector Terminal

Rear window defogger ON Battery voltage

D23 2 Ground
switch OFF 0V K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. DEF

2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and door mirror (driver side) harness con-
nector.
N
LHD models
Fuse block (J/B) Door mirror (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
M3 4C D3 2 Existed

RHD models
Fuse block (J/B) Door mirror (driver side) P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M3 5C D23 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

DEF-33
DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
1. Connect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+)
Voltage
Fuse block (J/B) (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

Rear window ON Battery voltage

M3 4C Ground
defogger switch OFF 0V

RHD models
(+)
Voltage
Fuse block (J/B) (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

Rear window ON Battery voltage

M3 5C Ground
defogger switch OFF 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace or repair fuse block (J/B).
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Door mirror (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D3 10 Existed

RHD models
Door mirror (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D23 10 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace glass mirror (driver side). Refer to MIR-30, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installa-
tion".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

DEF-34
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010774389

1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER B

1. Perform BCM Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that the passenger side door mirror glass is getting warmer. C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Passenger side door mirror defogger is OK.
NO >> Refer to DEF-35, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774390

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect door mirror (passenger side) connector.
F
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
G
(+)
Voltage
Door mirror (passenger side) (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal H
Rear window defogger ON Battery voltage
D43 2 Ground
switch OFF 0V
I
RHD models
(+)
Voltage
Door mirror (passenger side) (-) Condition
(Approx.) J
Connector Terminal

Rear window defogger ON Battery voltage

D98 2 Ground
switch OFF 0V K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. DEF

2.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness
connector.
N
LHD models
Fuse block (J/B) Door mirror (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
M3 5C D43 2 Existed

RHD models
Fuse block (J/B) Door mirror (passenger side) P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M3 4C D98 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

DEF-35
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
1. Connect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+)
Voltage
Fuse block (J/B) (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

Rear window ON Battery voltage

M3 5C Ground
defogger switch OFF 0V

RHD models
(+)
Voltage
Fuse block (J/B) (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

Rear window ON Battery voltage

M3 4C Ground
defogger switch OFF 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace or repair fuse block (J/B).
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Door mirror (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D43 10 Existed

RHD models
Door mirror (passenger side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D98 10 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace glass mirror (passenger side). Refer to MIR-30, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Instal-
lation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

DEF-36
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT OP-
ERATE.
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT
OPERATE.
B
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774391

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH C

Check rear window defogger switch.
Refer to DEF-26, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
E
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Check rear window defogger relay.
Refer to DEF-27, "Component Function Check". F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. G
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check door mirror defogger.
Refer to DEF-32, "Component Function Check". H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I

4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION

Confirm the operation again. J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1. K

DEF

DEF-37
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGERS OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR
MIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774392

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Check rear window defogger.
Refer to DEF-29, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1.

DEF-38
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT REAR WINDOW DE-
FOGGER OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT REAR WINDOW
A
DEFOGGER OPERATE
BOTH SIDES
B
BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774393

1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER C

Check door mirror defogger.
Refer to DEF-32, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION E
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1.
DRIVER SIDE G
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774394

1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER H

Check driver side door mirror defogger.
Refer to DEF-33, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
J
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE DEF

PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774395

M
1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER.
Check passenger side door mirror defogger.
Refer to DEF-35, "Component Function Check". N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1.

DEF-39
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010774396

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

Check rear window defogger switch. Refer to DEF-26, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1.

DEF-40
FILAMENT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A
FILAMENT
Inspection and Repair INFOID:0000000010774397
B

INSPECTION
1. When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the neg- C
ative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.

SEL122R F

2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of

each filament. G

SEL263

J
3. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery
voltage.
4. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along fil- K
ament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.
DEF

SEL265

REPAIR
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)

DEF-41
FILAMENT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.

PIIA0215E

4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for conti-
nuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.

SEL012D

5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.

SEL013D

DEF-42
CONDENSER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CONDENSER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010774398

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the back door weather-strip. Refer to DLK-295, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation" (RHD models with Intelligent Key), DLK-603, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal
and Installation" (LHD models with intelligent Key), DLK-766, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal C
and Installation" (RHD models without Intelligent Key) or DLK-908, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP :
Removal and Installation" (LHD models without Intelligent Key)
2. Remove clips of headlining assembly rear side, and remove headlining assembly rear side. Refer to INT- D
37, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Does not bend hard the headlining assembly, because headlining assembly is damaged.
E
3. Remove the condenser mounting bolt , and then remove the
condenser .
F

H
JMLIA4854ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. I

DEF

DEF-43
BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK

E
CONTENTS
TYPE 1 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly .......31 F
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..................... 22 Switch ......................................................................31
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Status Indica- G
APPLICATION NOTICE .....................................22 tor ............................................................................32
Information .............................................................. 22 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch ......32
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch .....................32
PRECAUTION .............................................. 23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna .........32
H

PRECAUTIONS ..................................................23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Buzzer .....................................................................33
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna ......33 I
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................. 23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit .....................33
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 23 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor ..................34
Work ........................................................................ 23 J
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) .... 35
PREPARATION ........................................... 24 System Description ..................................................35
Circuit Diagram ........................................................37
DLK
PREPARATION ..................................................24
Special Service Tools .............................................. 24
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ......... 38
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ....................................38
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 25 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
L

COMPONENT PARTS .......................................25 tion ...........................................................................38

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ......40
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ............................................. 25 M
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ..........................................41
Component Parts Location .................................... 25 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....42
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION ...............................44 N
Close Switch ........................................................... 29 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De-
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door scription ...................................................................44
Control Unit ............................................................. 29
O
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door SUPER LOCK FUNCTION ........................................45
Main Switch ............................................................. 29 SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....46
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door
Switch ...................................................................... 30 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ..................47 P
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
Warning Buzzer ....................................................... 30 tem Description ........................................................47
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assem- KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ....................................49
bly ............................................................................ 30 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener tion ...........................................................................49
Switch Assembly ..................................................... 30

DLK-1
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION List of ECU Reference ............................................ 82
METER) ..................................................................... 50
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT... 83
METER) : Door Open Warning ............................... 50 Reference Value ..................................................... 83
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Fail-safe .................................................................. 87
METER) : Engine Start Information ........................ 51 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 88
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION DTC Index .............................................................. 88
METER) : Intelligent Key Low Battery Warning ...... 53
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 89
METER) : Intelligent Key System Malfunction ........ 54 DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM .................................. 89
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 89
METER) : Key ID Verification Information .............. 55
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM .............. 103
METER) : Key ID Warning ...................................... 56 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 103
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : P Position Warning (Information Dis- BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 112
play) ........................................................................ 57
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 112
METER) : Steering Lock Information ...................... 59 Work Flow ............................................................. 112
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
METER) : Take Away Warning (Information Dis-
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................. 115
play) ........................................................................ 60
Description ............................................................ 115
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ....................... 61 Work Procedure .................................................... 115
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) ...................... 61
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT.. 116
Chime ..................................................................... 61 Description ............................................................ 116
Work Procedure .................................................... 116
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYS-
TEM) ................................................................... 62 CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK
System Description ................................................. 62 DOOR POSITION INFORMATION ................... 117
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 71 Description ............................................................ 117
Work Procedure .................................................... 117
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................ 73
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 118
COMMON ITEM ........................................................ 73
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - B2401 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT.. 118
COMMON ITEM) .................................................... 73 DTC Description .................................................... 118
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118
DOOR LOCK ............................................................. 74
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - B2409 HALF LATCH SWITCH ......................... 120
DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and DTC Description .................................................... 120
Super Lock) ............................................................ 74 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120

INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 75 B2416 TOUCH SENSOR RH ........................... 123

INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - DTC Description .................................................... 123
INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock) ................. 75 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123
Component Inspection .......................................... 125
TRUNK ...................................................................... 79
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) B2417 TOUCH SENSOR LH ............................ 126
(With Intelligent Key System and Super Lock) ....... 79 DTC Description .................................................... 126
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK Component Inspection .......................................... 128
DOOR CONTROL UNIT) ................................... 80
CONSULT Function (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR B2419 OPEN SWITCH ..................................... 129
CONTROL UNIT) ................................................... 80 DTC Description .................................................... 129
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 82
B2420 CLOSE SWITCH ................................... 132
BCM ................................................................... 82 DTC Description .................................................... 132

DLK-2
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132 Component Inspection ........................................... 163
A
B2422 BACK DOOR STATE ........................... 134 BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR .................. 165
DTC Description .................................................... 134 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 134
BACK DOOR SWITCH ................................... 166 B
B2423 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MOTOR Component Function Check ................................ 166
OPERATION TIME ........................................... 137 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166
DTC Description .................................................... 137 Component Inspection ........................................... 167 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ................... 168
B2426 ENCODER ............................................ 139 Component Function Check ................................ 168
DTC Description .................................................... 139 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168 D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 139 Component Inspection ........................................... 169

B2427 ENCODER ............................................ 142 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ................. 170 E
DTC Description .................................................... 142 Description ............................................................. 170
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142 Component Function Check ................................ 170
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170
B2428 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL Component Inspection ........................................... 171 F
UNIT .................................................................. 145
DTC Description .................................................... 145 CLOSE SWITCH ............................................. 172
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145 Component Function Check ................................ 172 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172
B242A CLOSURE CONDITION ....................... 146
DTC Description .................................................... 146 COMBINATION METER BUZZER .................. 174
Component Function Check ................................ 174 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 174
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 149
DTC Description .................................................... 149 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .............................. 175 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 149
DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 175
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 152 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 175
DTC Description .................................................... 152 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 175 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 152
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 176
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 155 PASSENGER SIDE :
DLK
DTC Description .................................................... 155 Component Function Check ................................ 176
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 155 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 176

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 156 REAR LH .................................................................. 177 L

REAR LH : Component Function Check .............. 177
DTC Description .................................................... 156
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 177
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 156
REAR RH ................................................................. 178 M
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH.. 157
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 178
Component Function Check ................................ 157
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 178
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 157
Component Inspection .......................................... 158 N
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 180
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH .............. 159 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 180
Component Function Check ................................ 159 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 180 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 159 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 180
Component Inspection .......................................... 160
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 181
AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH ............... 161 PASSENGER SIDE : P
Component Function Check ................................ 161 Component Function Check ................................ 181
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 161 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 181
Component Inspection .......................................... 162
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR .............. 183
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ- Component Function Check ................................ 183
ER ..................................................................... 163 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 183
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 163

DLK-3
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................. 184 LH : Component Function Check ........................ 208
Component Function Check ................................184 LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 209
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................184 LH : Component Inspection .................................. 210
Component Inspection ...........................................185
SPINDLE MOTOR ............................................ 211
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 186
Component Function Check ................................186 RH ............................................................................ 211
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................186 RH : Diagnosis Procedure .................................... 211
Component Inspection ...........................................187 LH ............................................................................ 212
LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 212
HALF LATCH SWITCH ................................... 188
Component Function Check ..................................188 SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 214
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................188
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 214
HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 190 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 214
Component Function Check ................................190 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 214
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................190
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 215
INFORMATION DISPLAY ............................... 191 PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check ................................191 Component Function Check ................................ 215
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................191 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 215
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 192 REAR LH ................................................................. 216
Component Inspection ...........................................192 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 216
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 216
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 193
Component Function Check ................................193 REAR RH ................................................................. 217
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................193 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 217
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 217
OPEN SWITCH ................................................ 195
Component Function Check ..................................195 UNLOCK SENSOR ........................................... 219
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................195 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 219
Component Inspection .......................................... 220
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 197
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 221
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................197
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................197 ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 221
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................199
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 221
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........199

REAR BUMPER .......................................................201

AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure ................201 OPERATE ......................................................... 222
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 222
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 204
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPERATION
FRONT DOOR LOCK ..............................................204 DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 223
FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure .......204
ALL SWITCHES ...................................................... 223
REAR DOOR LOCK .................................................204 ALL SWITCHES : Description ............................... 223
REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ..........204 ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 223
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT .........205 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ..................... 224
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Di- AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Descrip-
agnosis Procedure .................................................205 tion ........................................................................ 224
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Diagnosis
TOUCH SENSOR ............................................ 207 Procedure ............................................................. 224
RH .............................................................................207 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH ........ 224
RH : Component Function Check ........................207 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH :
RH : Diagnosis Procedure .....................................207 Description ............................................................ 224
RH : Component Inspection ..................................208 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Di-
LH .............................................................................208 agnosis Procedure ................................................ 224

DLK-4
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 224 REAR RH ................................................................. 234
INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 225 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 234 A
INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 225 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 234

BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ............................ 225 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Description .... 225 B
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Pro- KEY CYLINDER .............................................. 236
cedure ................................................................... 225 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236
C
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING DOES DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
NOT OPERATE ................................................ 227 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................ 237
BUZZER ................................................................... 227 D
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES ........................ 237
BUZZER : Description ........................................... 227 ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description.. 237
BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 227 ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 237 E
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR FUNCTIONS DO
NOT CANCEL .................................................. 228 DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............. 237
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 228 DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De-
F
scription ................................................................. 238
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR ANTI-PINCH DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................. 229 nosis Procedure ..................................................... 238
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 229 G
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .... 238
BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 230 Description ............................................................. 238
H
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION ................................. 230 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 238
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description ......... 230
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Proce- DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN- I
dure ....................................................................... 230 TELLIGENT KEY ............................................ 239
CLOSURE FUNCTION ............................................ 231 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 239
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description .................... 231 J
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 231 NOT OPERATE ............................................... 241
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 241
DLK
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 232 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES
ALL DOOR .............................................................. 232 NOT ILLUMINATE .......................................... 242
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 232 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 242 L
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 232
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTO-
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 232 MATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERATED ............. 243
FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 232 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243 M
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 232
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
REAR DOOR ........................................................... 233 ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 244 N
REAR DOOR : Description ................................... 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 244
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 233
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 233 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 245 O
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 245
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 233
KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE .... 246 P
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 234
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 234 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 247
REAR LH ................................................................. 234
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 247
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 234
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 234 OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 248
DLK-5
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................248 HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 265
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 265
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
ATE .................................................................. 249 HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 266
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................249 HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 266
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE .................................................................. 250 RADIATOR CORE SEAL ........................................ 266
RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa-
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .....................................250 tion ........................................................................ 266
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description .............250
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce- HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 267
dure .......................................................................250 HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ... 267

INTELLIGENT KEY ..................................................250 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 268

INTELLIGENT KEY : Description ..........................250
R9M ......................................................................... 268
INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure ...........250
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 268
SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE ............ 251 R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 268

ALL DOOR ...............................................................251 FRONT FENDER .............................................. 271

ALL DOOR : Description .......................................251 Exploded View ...................................................... 271
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................251
FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 271
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................251 FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ....... 271
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................251 FENDER COVER .................................................... 272
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................251 FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 272
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................251
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 274
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................251
Exploded View ...................................................... 274
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........252
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 275
REAR LH ..................................................................252
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 275
REAR LH : Description ..........................................252
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 276
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................252
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 276
REAR RH .................................................................252
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 278
REAR RH : Description .........................................252
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 278
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................252
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 278
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 278
ATE .................................................................. 254
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................254 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 279
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 279
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 255 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 279
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................255 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 279
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES ............................................................. 256 REAR DOOR .................................................... 282
Work Flow ..............................................................256 Exploded View ...................................................... 282
Inspection Procedure .............................................258
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 283
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................260
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 283
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 262 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 284
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 284
HOOD ............................................................... 262
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 286
Exploded View .......................................................262
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 286
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................262
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 286
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....262
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 286
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................263
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................263 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 287

DLK-6
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 287 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 309
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 309 A
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 287
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa- OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 309
tion ........................................................................ 287 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 310
B
BACK DOOR .................................................... 290 BACK DOOR LOCK ....................................... 312
Exploded View ...................................................... 290 Exploded View ....................................................... 312

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 290 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 312 C

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 312
tion ........................................................................ 290 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 312
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 292 DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................ 313 D
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 293
SPINDLE UNIT ......................................................... 313
BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 295 SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation ........... 313
E
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 295 TOUCH SENSOR ..................................................... 315
TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation ....... 315
BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 295 F
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 295 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 316
Exploded View ....................................................... 316
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 295
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and FUEL FILLER LID .................................................... 316 G
Installation ............................................................. 295 FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 316

HOOD LOCK .................................................... 297 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ......................................... 317
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- H
Exploded View ...................................................... 297
tion ......................................................................... 317
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 297
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 297 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 318 I
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 298 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 318
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 299
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 319 J
Installation ............................................................. 299 Removal and Installation ....................................... 319

HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 300 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR .............. 320
DLK
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Removal and Installation ....................................... 320
Installation ............................................................. 300
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 321
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 300 L
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal- INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 321
lation ...................................................................... 300 INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa-
tion ......................................................................... 321
M
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 302
LUGGAGE ROOM ................................................... 321
Exploded View ...................................................... 302
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ...... 321
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 302 N
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 303
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 323
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 303 FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 323
FRONT DOOR : Removal and Installation ............ 323 O
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 303
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 303 REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 323
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation .......... 323
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 304
P
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 304 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 324
REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 308 Removal and Installation ....................................... 324
Exploded View ...................................................... 308 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 325
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 308 Removal and Installation ....................................... 325
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 308 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 309
. 326
DLK-7
Removal and Installation .......................................326 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch .... 341
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch .................. 342
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT. 327 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Hands Free Sensor ...... 342
Removal and Installation .......................................327 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna ...... 342
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH ... 328
Buzzer ................................................................... 343
Removal and Installation .......................................328
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna .... 343
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ............. 329 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit .................. 343
Removal and Installation .......................................329 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor ............... 344

AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH. 330 SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) .... 345
Removal and Installation .......................................330 System Description ............................................... 345
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 347
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ-
ER .................................................................... 331 SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ........ 348
Removal and Installation .......................................331 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ................................. 348
TYPE 2 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion ........................................................................ 348
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 332 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ... 350
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 332 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ....................................... 351
Information .............................................................332 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ... 352
PRECAUTION ............................................ 333 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION ............................ 354
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De-
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 333 scription ................................................................. 355
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ............... 356
SIONER" ................................................................333 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..333 tem Description ..................................................... 356
Work ......................................................................333
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION .................................. 358
PREPARATION .......................................... 334 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
tion ........................................................................ 358
PREPARATION ............................................... 334
Special Service Tools ............................................334 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) ................................................................... 359
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 335 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : Door Open Warning ............................. 359
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 335 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) : Engine Start Information ...................... 360
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ............................................335
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
METER) : Intelligent Key Low Battery Warning .... 362
Component Parts Location ..................................335
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door
METER) : Intelligent Key System Malfunction ...... 363
Close Switch ..........................................................338
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door
METER) : Key ID Verification Information ............. 364
Control Unit ............................................................338
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door
METER) : Key ID Warning .................................... 365
Main Switch ...........................................................338
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door
METER) : P Position Warning (Information Dis-
Switch ....................................................................339
play) ...................................................................... 366
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
Warning Buzzer .....................................................340
METER) : Steering Lock Information .................... 368
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assem-
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
bly ..........................................................................340
METER) : Take Away Warning (Information Dis-
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener
play) ...................................................................... 369
Switch Assembly ...................................................340
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly .....341 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ..................... 370
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Switch ....................................................................341 Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) .................... 370
DLK-8
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Chime .................................................................... 370 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT . 426 A
Description ............................................................. 426
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYS- Work Procedure ..................................................... 426
TEM) ................................................................. 371
B
System Description ............................................... 371 CALIBRATION OF AUTOMATIC BACK
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 381 DOOR POSITION INFORMATION ................. 427
Description ............................................................. 427
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 383 Work Procedure ..................................................... 427 C
COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 383
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 428
COMMON ITEM) ................................................... 383 D
B2401 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT . 428
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 384 DTC Description .................................................... 428
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 428
E
DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System, With- B2409 HALF LATCH SWITCH ....................... 430
out Super Lock) ..................................................... 384
DTC Description .................................................... 430
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 385 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 430 F
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
B2416 TOUCH SENSOR RH .......................... 433
INTELLIGENT KEY) (Without Super Lock) ........... 385
DTC Description .................................................... 433
TRUNK ..................................................................... 389 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 433 G
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) Component Inspection ........................................... 435
(With Intelligent Key System, Without Super Lock)
.. 389
B2417 TOUCH SENSOR LH .......................... 436 H
DTC Description .................................................... 436
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 436
DOOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................. 390 Component Inspection ........................................... 438
I
CONSULT Function (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
B2419 OPEN SWITCH .................................... 439
CONTROL UNIT) .................................................. 390
DTC Description .................................................... 439
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 392 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 439 J

BCM .................................................................. 392 B2420 CLOSE SWITCH .................................. 442

List of ECU Reference .......................................... 392 DTC Description .................................................... 442
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 442 DLK
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT.. 393
Reference Value ................................................... 393 B2422 BACK DOOR STATE .......................... 444
Fail-safe ................................................................ 397 DTC Description .................................................... 444 L
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 398 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 444
DTC Index ............................................................ 398 B2423 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MOTOR
OPERATION TIME .......................................... 447 M
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 400
DTC Description .................................................... 447
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 400 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 447
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 400 N
B2426 ENCODER ........................................... 449
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM ............. 413 DTC Description .................................................... 449
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 413 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 449
O
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 422 B2427 ENCODER ........................................... 452
DTC Description .................................................... 452
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 422 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 452 P
Work Flow ............................................................. 422
B2428 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING UNIT ................................................................ 455
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................. 425 DTC Description .................................................... 455
Description ............................................................ 425 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 455
Work Procedure .................................................... 425
B242A CLOSURE CONDITION ...................... 456
DTC Description .................................................... 456

DLK-9
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................456 Component Function Check ................................ 483
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 483
B242B HANDS FREE DETECT SENSOR ...... 459
DTC Description ....................................................459 COMBINATION METER BUZZER ................... 485
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................459 Component Function Check ................................ 485
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 485
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ............................... 460
DTC Description ....................................................460 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 486
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................460
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 486
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ............................... 463 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 486
DTC Description ....................................................463 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 486
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................463
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 487
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 466 PASSENGER SIDE :
DTC Description ....................................................466 Component Function Check ................................ 487
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................466 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 487

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 467 REAR LH ................................................................. 488

DTC Description ....................................................467 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 488
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................467 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 488

AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH. 468 REAR RH ................................................................. 489

Component Function Check ................................468 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 489
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................468 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 489
Component Inspection ...........................................469 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 491
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ............. 470 Component Function Check ................................ 491
Component Function Check ................................470 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 491
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................470 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 493
Component Inspection ...........................................471
Component Function Check ................................ 493
AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH ............... 472 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 493
Component Function Check ................................472 Component Inspection .......................................... 494
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................472 DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 495
Component Inspection ...........................................473
Component Function Check ................................ 495
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 495
ER .................................................................... 474 Component Inspection .......................................... 496
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................474 HALF LATCH SWITCH .................................... 497
Component Inspection ...........................................474 Component Function Check ................................. 497
BACK DOOR CLOSURE MOTOR .................. 476 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 497
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................476 HANDS FREE SENSOR ................................... 499
BACK DOOR SWITCH .................................... 477 Component Function Check ................................ 499
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 499
Component Function Check ................................477
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................477 HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 502
Component Inspection ...........................................478 Component Function Check ................................ 502
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 479 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 502
Component Function Check ................................479 INFORMATION DISPLAY ................................ 503
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................479 Component Function Check ................................ 503
Component Inspection ...........................................480 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 503
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................. 481 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ........................ 504
Description .............................................................481 Component Inspection .......................................... 504
Component Function Check ................................481
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................481 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ........ 505
Component Inspection ...........................................482 Component Function Check ................................ 505
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 505
CLOSE SWITCH .............................................. 483

DLK-10
OPEN SWITCH ................................................. 507 ALL SWITCHES ....................................................... 530
Component Function Check .................................. 507 ALL SWITCHES : Description ............................... 530 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 507 ALL SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 530

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 509 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH ...................... 531
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Descrip- B
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 509 tion ......................................................................... 531
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 509 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 531 C
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 511
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 511 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH ........ 531
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH :
REAR BUMPER ...................................................... 513 D
Description ............................................................. 531
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 513
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH : Di-
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 516 agnosis Procedure ................................................. 531
E
FRONT DOOR LOCK .............................................. 516 INTELLIGENT KEY .................................................. 531
FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ....... 516 INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 532
INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 532
REAR DOOR LOCK ................................................ 516 F
REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 516 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ............................ 532
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Description ..... 532
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT ........ 517 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Diagnosis Pro- G
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT : Di- cedure .................................................................... 532
agnosis Procedure ................................................ 517
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR HANDS FREE
TOUCH SENSOR ............................................. 519 FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................ 534 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 534
RH ............................................................................ 519
RH : Component Function Check ........................ 519 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING DOES I
RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 519 NOT OPERATE ............................................... 535
RH : Component Inspection .................................. 520
BUZZER ................................................................... 535
LH ............................................................................ 520 BUZZER : Description ........................................... 535 J
LH : Component Function Check ........................ 520 BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 535
LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 521
LH : Component Inspection ................................... 522 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR FUNCTIONS DO DLK
NOT CANCEL ................................................. 536
SPINDLE MOTOR ............................................ 523 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 536
RH ............................................................................ 523 L
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR ANTI-PINCH
RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 523
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................ 537
LH ............................................................................ 524 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 537
LH : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 524 M
BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 526 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 538
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 526
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION ................................. 538 N
Component Inspection .......................................... 527
OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description ......... 538
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 528 OPEN/CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Proce-
dure ....................................................................... 538 O
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 528 CLOSURE FUNCTION ............................................ 539
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 528 CLOSURE FUNCTION : Description ..................... 539
CLOSURE FUNCTION : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 539 P
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 529 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 529 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 540

AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPERATION ALL DOOR ............................................................... 540

ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 540
DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 530
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 540

DLK-11
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................540 INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
FRONT DOOR : Description .................................540 ING DOES NOT OPERATE .............................. 551
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................540 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 551
REAR DOOR ............................................................541 IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
REAR DOOR : Description ....................................541 DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 552
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................541 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 552
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................541 KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ..... 553
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................541
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 553
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................541
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................541
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................541
ERATE .............................................................. 554
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........542 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 554

REAR LH ..................................................................542 OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-

REAR LH : Description ..........................................542 ERATE .............................................................. 555
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................542 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 555

REAR RH .................................................................542 P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-

REAR RH : Description .........................................542 ATE ................................................................... 556
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................542 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 556

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR ATE ................................................................... 557
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 544
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ..................................... 557
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................544
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description ............. 557
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................. 545 dure ....................................................................... 557

ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES .........................545 INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 557

ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description..545 INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 557
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 557
Procedure ..............................................................545 TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............545 ATE ................................................................... 558
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 558
scription .................................................................546
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
nosis Procedure .....................................................546 ERATE .............................................................. 559
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 559
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ....546
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
Description .............................................................546 NOSES .............................................................. 560
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Work Flow ............................................................. 560
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................546 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 562
Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 564
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN-
TELLIGENT KEY ............................................. 547 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 566
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................547
HOOD ............................................................... 566
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES Exploded View ...................................................... 566
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 549 HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 566
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................549
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 566
HAZARD LAMP OPERATES WHEN AUTO- HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 567
MATIC BACK DOOR IS OPERATED ............. 550 HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 567
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................550 HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 569
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 569

DLK-12
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 570 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ......... 594
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- A
tion ........................................................................ 570 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 594
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 594
RADIATOR CORE SEAL ........................................ 570
RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa- DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 595 B
tion ........................................................................ 570 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 595

HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 571 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ........................................ 595

DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa- C
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation .. 571
tion ......................................................................... 595
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 572
BACK DOOR ................................................... 290 D
MR20DD .................................................................. 572 Exploded View ....................................................... 598
MR20DD : Exploded View ..................................... 572
MR20DD : Removal and Installation ..................... 572 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 598
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- E
QR25DE ................................................................... 573 tion ......................................................................... 598
QR25DE : Exploded View ..................................... 574 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 600
QR25DE : Removal and Installation ..................... 574 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................ 601 F
R9M .......................................................................... 575 BACK DOOR STRIKER ........................................... 603
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 576 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 576 tion ......................................................................... 603 G

FRONT FENDER .............................................. 579 BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 603

Exploded View ...................................................... 579 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 603
H
FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 579 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 603
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ........ 579 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 603 I
FENDER COVER ..................................................... 580
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 580 HOOD LOCK ................................................... 605
Exploded View ....................................................... 605
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 582 J
Exploded View ...................................................... 582 HOOD LOCK ............................................................ 605
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 605
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 583 HOOD LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 606 DLK
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 583
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 584 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 607
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 584 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 607 L
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 586
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 586 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 608
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 586 Installation ............................................................. 608 M
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 586
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 608
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 587 HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal- N
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 587 lation ...................................................................... 608
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 587 FRONT DOOR LOCK ..................................... 610
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ....................................................... 610 O
tion ........................................................................ 587
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 610
REAR DOOR .................................................... 590 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 610
Exploded View ...................................................... 590 P
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 611
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 591 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 611
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 591 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 611
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 592
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 592 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 612
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 612
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 594

DLK-13
REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 615 Removal and Installation ....................................... 631
Exploded View .......................................................615
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
DOOR LOCK ............................................................615 .. 632
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............615 Removal and Installation ....................................... 632
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................616
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT.. 633
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................616 Removal and Installation ....................................... 633
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........616
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR MAIN SWITCH .... 634
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................616 Removal and Installation ....................................... 634
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....617
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SWITCH .............. 635
BACK DOOR LOCK ........................................ 619 Removal and Installation ....................................... 635
Exploded View .......................................................619
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH.. 636
DOOR LOCK ............................................................619 Removal and Installation ....................................... 636
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............619
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................619 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR WARNING BUZZ-
DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................620 ER ..................................................................... 637
Removal and Installation ....................................... 637
SPINDLE UNIT .........................................................620
SPINDLE UNIT : Removal and Installation ...........620 HANDS FREE SENSOR ................................... 638
Removal and Installation ....................................... 638
TOUCH SENSOR .....................................................622
TOUCH SENSOR : Removal and Installation .......622 TYPE 3

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 623 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................. 639
Exploded View .......................................................623
APPLICATION NOTICE ................................... 639
FUEL FILLER LID ....................................................624 Information ............................................................ 639
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation .......624
PRECAUTION ........................................... 640
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK .........................................624
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 640
tion .........................................................................624 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE .............................625 SIONER" ............................................................... 640
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 640
Installation .............................................................625 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 640
Work ...................................................................... 641
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 626
Removal and Installation .......................................626 PREPARATION ......................................... 642
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 627 PREPARATION ................................................ 642
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 642
INSTRUMENT CENTER ..........................................627
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa- SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 643
tion .........................................................................627
COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 643
LUGGAGE ROOM ...................................................627
Component Parts Location .................................. 643
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ......627
Back Door Lock Assembly .................................... 644
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 629 Back Door Opener Switch Assembly .................... 644
Door Lock Assembly ............................................. 644
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................629 Door Lock and Unlock Switch ............................... 644
FRONT DOOR : Removal and Installation ............629 Door Switch ........................................................... 645
Ignition Key Cylinder ............................................. 645
REAR BUMPER .......................................................629
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation ..........629 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ...................... 646
System Description ............................................... 646
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 630 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 648
Removal and Installation .......................................630
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ............ 649
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 631
DLK-14
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ............... 649 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 681
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- A
tem Description ..................................................... 649 BACK DOOR SWITCH ................................... 681
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Circuit Component Function Check ................................ 681
Diagram ................................................................. 651 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 681
B
Component Inspection ........................................... 682
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION ...................................... 651
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description.. 652 BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ............. 683
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 683 C
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) ................................................................... 652 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ................... 684
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Component Function Check ................................ 684
METER) : Door Open Warning ............................. 652 D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 684
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION Component Inspection ........................................... 685
METER) : Key System Malfunction ....................... 653
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .............................. 686 E
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ..................... 654
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 686
Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) .................... 654 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 686
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 686 F
Chime .................................................................... 654
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 687
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM .................... 655 PASSENGER SIDE :
G
System Description ............................................... 655 Component Function Check ................................ 687
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 656 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 687

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 657 REAR LH .................................................................. 688 H

REAR LH : Component Function Check .............. 688
COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 657 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 688
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - I
COMMON ITEM) ................................................... 657 REAR RH ................................................................. 689
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 689
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 658 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 689
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - J
DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System, DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 691
With Super Lock) ................................................... 658
DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 691
MULTI REMOTE ENT .............................................. 659 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 691 DLK
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 691
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (With Super Lock).. 659
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 692
L
TRUNK ..................................................................... 660 PASSENGER SIDE :
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) Component Function Check ................................ 692
(Without Intelligent Key System, With Super Lock) PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 692
.. 660 M
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR .............. 694
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 662 Component Function Check ................................ 694
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 694
N
BCM .................................................................. 662
List of ECU Reference .......................................... 662 DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 695
Component Function Check ................................ 695
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 663 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 695 O
Component Inspection ........................................... 696
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 663
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 663 HAZARD FUNCTION ...................................... 697
P
Component Function Check ................................ 697
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 677 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 697

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 677 KEY SWITCH .................................................. 698
Work Flow ............................................................. 677 Component Function Check .................................. 698
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 698
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION .......................... 680 Component Inspection ........................................... 699
Description ............................................................ 680

DLK-15
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 700 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 714
Component Inspection ...........................................700
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 714
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 701 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 715
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 715
FRONT DOOR LOCK ..............................................701
FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure .......701 REAR LH ................................................................. 715
REAR LH : Description ......................................... 715
REAR DOOR LOCK .................................................701 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 715
REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ..........701
REAR RH ................................................................. 715
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 703 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 715
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 715
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................703
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......703 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................703 DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................704 KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 717
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 717
Component Function Check ................................704 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........704
KEYFOB ........................................................... 718
REAR LH ..................................................................705 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 718
REAR LH : Component Function Check ..............705
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................705
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES
NOT ILLUMINATE ............................................ 719
REAR RH .................................................................706 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 719
REAR RH : Component Function Check .............706
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................706 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE .............................................................. 720
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 708 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 720
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................708
Component Inspection ...........................................709 REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 721
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 710 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 721
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER- SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE ............ 722
ATE .................................................................. 710
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................710 ALL DOOR .............................................................. 722
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 722
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 722
OPERATE ........................................................ 711
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 722
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................711
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 722
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPEN .................... 712 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 722
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................712
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 722
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 722
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 713 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 723

REAR LH ................................................................. 723

ALL DOOR ...............................................................713
REAR LH : Description ......................................... 723
ALL DOOR : Description .......................................713
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 723
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................713
REAR RH ................................................................. 723
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................713
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 723
FRONT DOOR : Description .................................713
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 723
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................713

REAR DOOR ............................................................714 UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-

REAR DOOR : Description ....................................714 ERATE .............................................................. 725
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................714 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 725

DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................714 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-

DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................714 NOSES .............................................................. 726
DLK-16
Work Flow ............................................................. 726 REAR DOOR ................................................... 752
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 728 Exploded View ....................................................... 752 A
Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 730
DOOR ASSEMBLY .................................................. 753
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 732 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 753
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 754 B
HOOD ............................................................... 732 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 754
Exploded View ...................................................... 732
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 756 C
HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 732 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ......... 756
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 732
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 733 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 756
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 733 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 756 D

HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 735 DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 757

HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 735 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 757
E
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 736 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ........................................ 757
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 736 tion ......................................................................... 757 F
RADIATOR CORE SEAL ........................................ 736 BACK DOOR ................................................... 290
RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ....................................................... 760
tion ........................................................................ 736 G
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 760
HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 737 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation .. 737 tion ......................................................................... 760 H
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 762
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 738 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................ 763
R9M .......................................................................... 738 BACK DOOR STRIKER ........................................... 765 I
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 738 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 738 tion ......................................................................... 765
FRONT FENDER .............................................. 741 BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 765 J
Exploded View ...................................................... 741 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 765
FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 741 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................. 765 DLK
FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ........ 741 BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 765
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal .............................. 766
FENDER COVER ..................................................... 742
FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 742 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 766 L
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 744 Installation ............................................................. 766
Exploded View ...................................................... 744
M
HOOD LOCK ................................................... 768
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 745
Exploded View ....................................................... 768
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 745
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................ 746 HOOD LOCK ............................................................ 768 N
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 746 HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 768
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 769
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 748
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 748 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 770 O
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 748
Installation ............................................................. 770
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 748
P
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 771
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 749
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 749 Installation ............................................................. 771
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 749
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 771
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal-
tion ........................................................................ 749
lation ...................................................................... 771

DLK-17
FRONT DOOR LOCK ...................................... 773 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 791
Exploded View .......................................................773 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
DOOR LOCK ............................................................773 SIONER" ............................................................... 791
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............774 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 791
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................774 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 791
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................774 Work ...................................................................... 792
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........774
PREPARATION ......................................... 793
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................775
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....775
PREPARATION ................................................ 793
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 793
REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 778
Exploded View .......................................................778 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 794

DOOR LOCK ............................................................778 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 794

DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............778 Component Parts Location .................................. 794
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................779 Back Door Lock Assembly .................................... 795
Back Door Opener Switch Assembly .................... 795
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................779 Door Lock Assembly ............................................. 795
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........779 Door Lock and Unlock Switch ............................... 796
Door Switch ........................................................... 796
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................779 Ignition Key Cylinder ............................................. 796
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....780
SYSTEM ........................................................... 797
BACK DOOR LOCK ........................................ 782
Exploded View .......................................................782 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ............................. 797
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : System De-
DOOR LOCK ............................................................782 scription ................................................................. 797
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............782
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................782 . 799
DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................783
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ................... 799
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 784 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM : System
Exploded View .......................................................784 Description ............................................................ 800
FUEL FILLER LID ....................................................784 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM : Circuit
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation .......784 Diagram ................................................................ 802

FUEL FILLER LID LOCK .........................................785 BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM ........................... 802
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM : System De-
tion .........................................................................785 scription ................................................................. 803
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM : Circuit Dia-
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE .............................786 gram ...................................................................... 804
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation .............................................................786 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) ................................................................... 804
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 787 INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
Removal and Installation .......................................787 METER) : Door Open Warning ............................. 804
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ............... 788 METER) : Key System Malfunction ....................... 805
Removal and Installation .......................................788
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ..................... 806
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 789 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Removal and Installation .......................................789 Lamp/Indicator (Information Display) .................... 806
TYPE 4 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
Chime .................................................................... 806
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 790
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 807
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 790
Information .............................................................790 COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 807
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
PRECAUTION ............................................ 791 COMMON ITEM) .................................................. 807

DLK-18
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 808 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 838
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 838 A
DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System
and Super Lock) .................................................... 808 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 840
Component Function Check ................................ 840
MULTI REMOTE ENT .............................................. 809 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 840 B
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Without Super DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 842
Lock) ..................................................................... 809 Component Function Check ................................ 842 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 842
TRUNK ..................................................................... 810 Component Inspection ........................................... 843
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK)
(Without Intelligent Key System and Super Lock).. 810 HAZARD FUNCTION ...................................... 844 D
Component Function Check ................................ 844
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 812 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 844
E
BCM .................................................................. 812 KEY SWITCH .................................................. 845
List of ECU Reference .......................................... 812 Component Function Check .................................. 845
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 845
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 813 Component Inspection ........................................... 846 F

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 813 KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 847
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 813 Component Inspection ........................................... 847 G
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 826 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 848
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 826 FRONT DOOR LOCK .............................................. 848 H
Work Flow ............................................................. 826 FRONT DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure ....... 848
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION .......................... 829 REAR DOOR LOCK ................................................ 848
Description ............................................................ 829 REAR DOOR LOCK : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 848 I

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 830 UNLOCK SENSOR ......................................... 850

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 850 J
BACK DOOR SWITCH ..................................... 830 Component Inspection ........................................... 851
Component Function Check ................................ 830
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 830 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 852
Component Inspection .......................................... 831 DLK
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 832 ATE .................................................................. 852
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 832 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 852 L
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 833 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
Component Function Check ................................ 833 OPERATE ....................................................... 853
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 833 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 853 M
Component Inspection .......................................... 834
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPEN .................... 854
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 835 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 854 N
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 835 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 835 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 855
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 835 O
ALL DOOR ............................................................... 855
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 836 ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 855
PASSENGER SIDE : ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 855
Component Function Check ................................ 836 P
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 836 FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 855
FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 855
REAR LH ................................................................. 837 FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 855
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 837
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 837 REAR DOOR ............................................................ 856
REAR DOOR : Description .................................... 856
REAR RH ................................................................. 838 REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 856

DLK-19
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................856 RADIATOR CORE SEAL : Removal and Installa-
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................856 tion ........................................................................ 874
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................856
HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 875
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................856 HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ... 875
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................856
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........857 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 876

REAR LH ..................................................................857 MR20DD .................................................................. 876

REAR LH : Description ..........................................857 MR20DD : Exploded View .................................... 876
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................857 MR20DD : Removal and Installation ..................... 876

REAR RH .................................................................857 QR25DE ................................................................... 877

REAR RH : Description .........................................857 QR25DE : Exploded View ..................................... 878
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................857 QR25DE : Removal and Installation ..................... 878

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH R9M ......................................................................... 879

DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 880
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 880
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 859
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................859 FRONT FENDER .............................................. 883
Exploded View ...................................................... 883
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
KEYFOB .......................................................... 860 FRONT FENDER ..................................................... 883
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................860 FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation ....... 883
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- FENDER COVER .................................................... 884
ERATE ............................................................. 861 FENDER COVER : Removal and Installation ....... 884
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................861
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 886
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER- Exploded View ...................................................... 886
ATE .................................................................. 862
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 887
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................862
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 887
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 888
ERATE ............................................................. 863 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 888
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................863 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 890
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 890
NOSES ............................................................. 864 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 890
Work Flow ..............................................................864 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 890
Inspection Procedure .............................................866
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................868 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 891
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 891
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 870
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 891
HOOD ............................................................... 870 DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
Exploded View .......................................................870 tion ........................................................................ 891

HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................870 REAR DOOR .................................................... 894

HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....870 Exploded View ...................................................... 894
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............................871
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................871 DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 895
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 895
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................873 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........................... 896
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............873 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 896

HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................874 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 898

HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 898
tion .........................................................................874
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 898
RADIATOR CORE SEAL .........................................874 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 898

DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 899

DLK-20
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 899 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 915
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 915 A
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ....................................... 899 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 916
DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 899 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 916
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 916 B
BACK DOOR .................................................... 290
Exploded View ...................................................... 902 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 917
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 917 C
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 902
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 920
tion ........................................................................ 902 Exploded View ....................................................... 920
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Inspection ................. 904 D
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 905 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 920
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 920
BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 907 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 921
E
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 907 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 921
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 921
BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 907 F
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 907 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 921
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 922
BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 907
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 907 BACK DOOR LOCK ....................................... 924 G
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ............................. 908 Exploded View ....................................................... 924

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 908 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 924

DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 924 H
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 908 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 924
DOOR LOCK : Unlock procedures ........................ 925
HOOD LOCK .................................................... 910 I
Exploded View ...................................................... 910 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 926
Exploded View ....................................................... 926
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 910
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 910 FUEL FILLER LID .................................................... 927 J
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 911 FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 927

HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 912 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ......................................... 927
DLK
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa-
Installation ............................................................. 912 tion ......................................................................... 927

HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 913 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 928 L
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 913 Installation ............................................................. 928

HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK ................................... 913 DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 929 M
HOOD LOCK BELL CRANK : Removal and Instal- Removal and Installation ....................................... 929
lation ...................................................................... 913
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 930 N
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 915 Removal and Installation ....................................... 930
Exploded View ...................................................... 915
O

DLK-21
APPLICATION NOTICE
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [TYPE 1]

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

APPLICATION NOTICE
Information INFOID:0000000010709172

Check the vehicle type to use the service information in this section.

Destination
Service information
Handle Intelligent Key system Super lock function
Type 1 RHD With With
Type 2 LHD With Without
Type 3 RHD Without With
Type 4 LHD Without Without

DLK-22
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TYPE 1]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010708011

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
F
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. G
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. I
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing J
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
DLK
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000010708012

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
L
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J
O
Work INFOID:0000000010708013

• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their P
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.

DLK-23
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [TYPE 1]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000010708014

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name

(J-39570)
Locates the noise
Chassis ear

SIIA0993E

(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rat- Repairs the cause of noise
tle Kit

SIIA0994E

DLK-24
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
B
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010708015

VIEW WITH REAR C

DLK

DLK-25
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]

JMKIB3673ZZ

View with door opened View with door panel View with front bumper fascia as-
sembly removed
View with A/C control removed View with instrument panel center View with rear seat removed
View with front luggage floor board View with rear bumper fascia assem- View with back door panel
removed bly removed

DLK-26
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]

No. Component Function A

Rear door lock assembly RH DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"

Front door lock assembly (driver side) DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
B
Power window main switch (door lock
DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch"
and unlock switch)
• Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer.
Combination meter C
• Transmits vehicle speed signal to CAN communication line.
Inputs push-button ignition switch ON/OFF condition to BCM.
Push-button ignition switch
Refer to PCS-65, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
D
Transmits shift position signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit via
CAN communication line.
TCM
Refer to TM-235, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location. E
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch and
each outside/inside key antenna. BCM transmits drive signal to door lock actuator
when BCM receives operation signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each F
BCM
switch.
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location.
Front door lock assembly (passenger G
DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
side)
Rear door lock assembly LH DLK-31, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly"
H
Back door lock assembly DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly"

Door switch DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch"

Front door request switch DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch"
I

Outside key antenna (front door) DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna"

Intelligent Key warning buzzer DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer" J
Inside key antenna (instrument cen-
DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna"
ter)
Door lock status indicator DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Status Indicator"
DLK

Inside key antenna (luggage room)

DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna"
(For 3 seat rows models)
L
Inside key antenna (luggage room)
DLK-32, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna"
(For 2 seat rows models)
Outside key antenna (rear bumper) DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna"
M
Back door opener switch assembly DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Switch Assembly"

VIEW WITH FRONT N

DLK-27
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]

JMKIB2949ZZ

View with back door opened View with instrument lower panel LH View with luggage side lower finisher
removed
View with rear bumper fascia assem-
bly removed

No. Component Function

Transmits ignition switch ON signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit
IPDM E/R via CAN communication line.
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Transmits vehicle speed signal to BCM and automatic back door control unit via
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
CAN communication line.
unit)
Refer to BRC-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Touch sensor RH DLK-34, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor"

Automatic back door close switch DLK-29, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Close Switch"

Touch sensor LH DLK-34, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor"

DLK-28
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
No. Component Function
A
Spindle unit LH DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit"

Spindle unit RH DLK-33, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit"

Automatic back door switch DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Switch" B

Automatic back door main switch DLK-29, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Main Switch"

Automatic back door control unit DLK-29, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Control Unit" C
Automatic back door warning buzzer DLK-30, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Warning Buzzer"

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Close Switch INFOID:0000000010708016 D

• When automatic back door close switch is pressed, back door auto close or reverse operation is detected
and transmits automatic back door close switch signal to automatic back door control unit. E
• Automatic back door close switch is installed in the back door
panel.

H
JMKIB2928ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Control Unit INFOID:0000000010708017

I
• Automatic back door control unit controls the automatic back door system.
• Automatic back door control unit is installed behind luggage side
lower finisher. J

DLK

JMKIB2929ZZ
M

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Main Switch INFOID:0000000010708018

• Controls automatic back door open/close operation of automatic back door open/close function. N
• Automatic back door main switch is installed in the instrument
lower panel RH.
O

JMKIB3657ZZ

DLK-29
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Switch INFOID:0000000010708019

• When automatic back door switch is pressed, back door auto open/close operation is detected and transmits
automatic back door switch signal to automatic back door control unit.
• Automatic back door switch is installed in the instrument lower
panel LH.

JMKIB2930ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Automatic Back Door Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000010708020

• Warns the user of the automatic back door condition and inappropriate operations with the buzzer sounds.
• Automatic back door warning buzzer is installed behind rear
bumper fascia assembly.

JMKIB2931ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708021

• Back door lock assembly integrates back door closure motor, half latch switch, open switch, close switch
and back door switch.
• Closure motor: Inputs open/close signal from automatic back door control unit and activates the back door
auto closure operation.
• Half latch switch: Starts the closure motor close operation.
• Open switch: Stops the closure motor open operation.
• Close switch: Stops the closure motor close operation
• Back door switch: Detects open/close status of back door.
• Back door lock assembly is installed in the back door panel.

JMKIB2942ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Switch Assembly INFOID:0000000010708022

• Back door opener switch assembly integrates back door opener switch and back door opener request
switch.

DLK-30
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
• Back door opener switch detects open operation of back door and transmits back door opener switch sig-
nal to BCM. A
• Back door request switch detects door lock/unlock operation and transmits door request switch signal to
BCM.
• Back door opener switch assembly is installed in the back door B
panel.

JMKIB2937ZZ
E

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000010708023

F
• Door lock actuator and unlock sensor are integrated in front door
lock assembly (driver side).
• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then
locks/unlocks door. G
• Only front door lock assembly (driver side) integrates unlock sen-
sor. Unlock sensor transmits lock/unlock status of driver side door
to BCM. H

I
JMKIA9347ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch INFOID:0000000010708024

J
• Door lock and unlock switch transmits door lock/unlock signal operation to BCM.
• Driver side door lock and unlock switch is integrated in the
power window main switch. DLK

JMKIA9352ZZ

N
• Passenger side door lock and unlock switch is integrated in front
power window switch (passenger side).
O

JMKIB1506ZZ

DLK-31
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock Status Indicator INFOID:0000000010713165

• Door lock status indicates door lock status.

• The indicator illuminates when a lock operation is successful.
• Door lock status indicator is integrated in the integral switch.

JMKIB1879ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Request Switch INFOID:0000000010708025

• Door request switch detects door lock/unlock operation and transmits door request switch signal to BCM.
• Door request switch is integrated in the outside handle grip.

JMKIB2935ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch INFOID:0000000010708026

Detects door open/close condition.

JMKIA9779ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna INFOID:0000000010708028

• Inside key antenna detects that Intelligent Key is within the inside
detection area, and then transmits detection status to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (instrument center) is installed behind instru-
ment lower cover.
• Inside key antenna (luggage room) is installed behind rear seat.

JMKIA8646ZZ

DLK-32
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000010708029

A
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who is outside vehi-
cle, of operation confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation
and door request switch operation, or of an inappropriate opera- B
tion.
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer is installed in the rear of front
bumper fascia assembly.
C

D
JMKIB1354ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna INFOID:0000000010708030

E
• Outside key antenna detects that Intelligent Key is within the outside detection area, and then transmits
detection status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (driver side) and outside key antenna (passenger side) are installed in the outside han- F
dle.
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is installed in the rear of bumper fascia assembly.
DRIVER SIDE AND PASSENGER SIDE G

JMKIA8648ZZ J

REAR BUMPER
DLK

JMKIA8646ZZ
N

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Spindle Unit INFOID:0000000010708031

• Spindle unit integrates encoder O

• Encoder: Automatic back door control unit receives the pulse signals from encoders A and B that occurred
due to synchronization with the back door operation. The automatic back door control unit calculates the
back door position, operation direction, and operation speed according to the received pulse signals. P

DLK-33
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
• Spindle motor: Inputs open/close signal from automatic back door
control unit and activates the automatic back door open/close
operation.

JMKIB2939ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Touch Sensor INFOID:0000000010708032

During back door close operation, the touch sensor detects any
trapped foreign material.

JMKIB2940ZZ

DLK-34
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
A
System Description INFOID:0000000010708033

SYSTEM DIAGRAM B

JMKIB2435GB

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION G

Door Lock and Unlock Switch

• The door lock and unlock switches are built into power window main switch and front power window switch H
(passenger side).
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuator of all doors are
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuator of all doors are I
unlocked.
Unlock Sensor
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when driver door lock knob is operated. J
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door
lock actuator of all doors.
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position once DLK
unlocks the driver door, turning it to unlock position again within 5 seconds after the first unlock operation
unlocks all of the other doors actuator. (Anti-hijack function operation)
Anti-hijack function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. Refer to DLK-74, "DOOR LOCK :
L
CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and Super Lock)".
Operation Condition
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed using the door lock
M
and unlock switch.

Door lock and unlock switch operation Operation condition

N
• Doors are not locked by Intelligent Key, door request switch
and auto door lock function
• Ignition position warning function is not activated
LOCK/UNLOCK
• Key remainder function (driver door opened) is not activated. O
Refer to DLK-49, "KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System
Description"

IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION P

When ignition switch position is ON and any door is open, all doors cannot locked when door lock and unlock
switch is operated in lock direction.
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description".
OVERRIDE FUNCTION

DLK-35
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
When inside handle of driver door is operated while doors are in lock states, lock state of the applicable door
lock becomes invalid and the door is open.
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION
When driver door is opened using the override function, all doors are unlocked.
Unlock function operates when driver door is open while all of the following conditions are satisfied.

• Doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or by automatic lock/unlock function

• Driver side door switch is switched from OFF to ON
Operation condition
• Anti-hijack function is not activated
• Vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
NOTE:
When anti-hijack function is activated, only the applicable door is unlocked.
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR OPERATION
The door lock status indicator indicates door lock status under the following condition.

Indicator operation Ignition position Door status Lock operation

All doors are closed and door
ON (30 minutes timer) OFF Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
All doors are closed and door
ON ON Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
Intelligent Key, door request
All doors are closed and door
ON (1 minute timer) OFF switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
Intelligent Key, door request
All doors are closed and door
ON ON switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
(All doors are closed → any
door is open) or (All doors are
ON → OFF – –
locked → any door is un-
locked)
ON (timer is running) → ON
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
ON → ON (30 minutes timer) ON → OFF – Door lock and unlock switch
Intelligent Key, door request
ON → ON (1 minute timer) ON → OFF – switch or auto door lock func-
tion

DLK-36
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010708034

DLK

JMKIB3706GB
P

DLK-37
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010708035

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3640GB

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verifica-
tion using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM).
NOTE:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT.
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered.
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT.

Function Description Refer

Door lock Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the door request switch. DLK-42
The back door can be opened by carrying the Intelligent Key and pressing the
Back door open DLK-44
back door opener switch.

DLK-38
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
Function Description Refer
A
When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by Intelligent
Super lock DLK-46
Key or door request switch
Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the
Remote keyless entry DLK-47 B
Intelligent Key.
The Intelligent Key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with
Key reminder DLK-49
the key left inside the vehicle.
Warning (information dis- If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys- C
DLK-61
play) tem is taken, the information display displays to inform the driver.
If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys-
Warning (buzzer) DLK-61
tem is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver. D
Engine start The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key. SEC-15
Interior room lamp control Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state. INL-11
E

DLK

DLK-39
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000010708036

JMKIB3707GB

DLK-40
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]

DLK

JMKIB3708GB

P
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

DLK-41
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708037

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3641GB

Door lock function controls operation function of the following items.

• Door lock and unlock function (door request switch)
• Anti-hijack function (door request switch)
• Reminder function (door request switch)
• Auto door lock function (door request switch)
• Door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
When pressing the door request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent
Key.
Operation Description
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna and inside
key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the Intelli-
gent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator.
Operation Condition
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed if the door request switch
is operated.

DLK-42
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]

Each door request switch operation Operation condition A

• All doors are closed
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position
Lock • P position warning is not activated
B
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
• All doors are closed
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position C
Unlock
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare D
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.

How to Change Door Lock and Unlock Function Operation Mode

Door lock and unlock function (door request switch) operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. E
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock)".
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION
Information of super lock system with anti-hijack function. F
Refer to DLK-46, "SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description".
REMINDER FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
G
When doors are locked or unlocked by door request switch, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder.
Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position.

Door lock operation H

Hazard warning lamp blink
(With door request switch)
Lock Once
Unlock (all door unlock) Twice I
Unlock (anti-hijack operation) Twice (quick)

How to Change Reminder Function Operation Mode J

With CONSULT
Reminder function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock)". DLK
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti- L
vate.

• Door switch is ON (each door is open) M

Operating condition • BCM receives door lock signal
• Push switch is pressed

How to Change Auto Door Lock Function Operation Time N

With CONSULT
Auto door lock function operation time can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock)".
O
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR OPERATION
• Door lock status indicator turns indicator lamp ON or OFF and indicates door lock or unlock state.
• For door lock status indicator operation, refer to DLK-35, "System Description". P
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA

DLK-43
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
driver outside door handle, passenger outside door handle and
back door request switch . However, this operating range depends
on the ambient conditions.

JMKIA1954ZZ

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS

Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

Remote keyless entry receiver

CAN communication system

Push-button ignition switch

Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch

Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator
Function
Intelligent Key

Door switch

BCM
Door lock and unlock function (door request switch) × × × × × × × ×
Anti-hijack function (door request switch) × × × × × × × ×
Reminder function (door request switch) × × × ×
Auto door lock function (door request switch) × × × × × ×

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708038

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3642GB

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION

• When the BCM detects that back door opener switch is pressed, it activates the outside key antenna (rear
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. And then, check that
the Intelligent Key is near the back door.

DLK-44
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver. A
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• If the verification result is OK, BCM transmits the back door open request signal to automatic back door con-
trol unit via CAN communication.
B
• BCM unlocks all doors (except back door) and blinks hazard lamp 2 times as a reminder.
• Automatic back door control unit transmits back door open request signal to back door lock assembly and
back door is open.
• When the back door is open, automatic back door system performs waiting operation for next back door C
close operation.
The operation of then back door open is the same as the automatic back door system, refer to DLK-62,
"System Description". D
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, the back door can be opened.
E
Back door opener switch operation Operation condition
• All door: locked
Open • Ignition switch: OFF F
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area*
*
: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, back door can be opened from outside of
the vehicle with a spare Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different. G
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA
The outside key antenna detection area of back door open function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding back H
door opener switch . However, this operating range depends on
the ambient conditions.
I

JMKIA1955ZZ
DLK
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.
L
Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

Automatic back door control unit

Remote keyless entry receiver

CAN communication system

M
Back door opener switch
Inside key antenna

Function
Back door switch

N
Intelligent Key

O
BCM

Back open function (back door opener switch) × × × × × × × × ×

P
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION

DLK-45
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010709247

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3312GB

• Super lock provides a higher anti-theft performance than a conventional door lock function.
• BCM controls the super lock function.
• When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by Intelligent Key or door request switch.
• When super lock is set, inside handle of doors do not work.
SUPER LOCK SET OPERATION (LOCK OPERATION)
Super Lock Set by Intelligent Key
When Intelligent Key lock button is operated while all doors are in unlock state, super lock of all doors is set,
and simultaneously, all doors are locked.
Super Lock Set by Door Request Switch
When door request switch (driver side, passenger side, or back door) is operated while all doors are in unlock
state, super lock of all doors is set, and simultaneously, all doors are locked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITH ANTI-HIJACK MODE
Super Lock Release by Intelligent Key
When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated again,
all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Driver Side)
When driver side door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When driver side door request switch is operated
again within 5 seconds of the 1st driver side door request switch operation, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Passenger Side)
When passenger side door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all
doors is released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Back Door)
When back door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, back door are unlocked. When back door request switch is operated again
within 5 seconds of the 1st back door request switch operation, all doors are unlocked.

DLK-46
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITHOUT ANTI-HIJACK MODE
A
Super Lock Release by Intelligent Key
When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
B
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch
When door request switch (driver side, passenger side or back door) is operated while super lock of all doors
is set, super lock of all doors is released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
C
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) CHANGE IGNITION SWITCH
Super Lock Release by Ignition Switch is Changed from OFF to ON
When the super lock is set, release super lock when the ignition switch is changed from OFF to ON. D
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION SETTING
With CONSULT E
Anti-hijack function can be set to ON/OFF using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-74, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and
Super Lock)". F
Without CONSULT
Anti-hijack function can be set to ON/OFF by user with a registered Intelligent Keyfob.
• ON/OFF can be switched when Intelligent Key lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for G
5 seconds or more while steering lock is locked.
• When mode is switched, hazard warning lamp blinks.
H
OFF → ON : 1 blink
ON → OFF : 3 blinks

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION I

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708039

J
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

DLK

JMKIB3643GB
O
The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry function. Therefore, it can be used in
the same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
Remote keyless entry function controls operation function of the following items. P
• Door lock and unlock function (Intelligent Key)
• Anti-hijack function
• Reminder function (Intelligent Key)
• Auto door lock function (Intelligent Key)
• Automatic back door open/close function
• Door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)
DLK-47
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
Operation Description
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator, when key ID matches.
Operation Condition
If the following condition is satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed if the Intelligent Key button is
pressed.

Intelligent Key button opera-

Operation condition
tion
• All doors are closed
Lock/set • Ignition switch: OFF position
• P position warning is not activated
Unlock/release Ignition switch: OFF position

ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION
Information of super lock system with anti-hijack function.
Refer to DLK-46, "SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description".
REMINDER FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)
Operation Description
When doors are locked or unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as
a reminder.

Door lock operation

Hazard warning lamp blink
(With Intelligent Key button)
Lock Once
Unlock (all door unlock) Twice
Unlock (anti-hijack operation) Twice (quick)

Operation Condition
• Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position.
• When any door is open, reminder function does not operate according to door lock operation.
How to Change Reminder Function Operation Mode
With CONSULT
Reminder function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock)".
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)
After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti-
vate.

• Door switch is ON (door is open)

Operating condition • BCM receives lock signal
• Push switch is pressed

How to Change Auto Door Lock Function Operation Time

Auto door lock function operation time can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-75, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (With Super Lock)".
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION
When back door open button is pressed, back door open automatically for detailed description.
Refer to DLK-62, "System Description".
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR OPERATION
• Door lock status indicator turns indicator lamp ON or OFF and indicates door lock or unlock state.
• For door lock status indicator operation, refer to DLK-35, "System Description".

DLK-48
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft.) range of each door, however the opera- A
ble range may differ according to surroundings.
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation. B

Automatic back door control unit

Remote keyless entry receiver
C

CAN communication system

Push-button ignition switch

Hazard warning lamp

Combination meter
D

Door lock actuator

Function

Intelligent Key

Door switch

IPDM E/R
E

BCM
Door lock and unlock function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × F
Reminder function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × × × ×
Auto door lock function (Intelligent Key) × × × × × ×
G
Automatic back door open/close function × × × × ×

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION

H
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010708040

SYSTEM DIAGRAM I

DLK

JMKIB3314GB

BASIC OPERATION N
Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.
O
Key remainder function Operation condition Operation
Right after door is locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
knob operation under the following conditions
Driver door opened • Ignition switch: LOCK or OFF position All doors unlock
P
• Registered Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
• Driver door is opened

DLK-49
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
Key remainder function Operation condition Operation
When all doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
Driver door closed* knob within 0.2 seconds after driver door is closed
All doors unlock

When all of the following conditions are satisfied

• All doors unlock
• Locked all doors
Door is open to closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• [Any door: open] → [all doors: closed]
ing buzzer
• Registered Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
*:If the door closing impact shocks the door lock knob, or contacts against baggage with the door lock knob might activate the door locks
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases.
NOTE:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be times when
the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intelligent Key is on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system sometimes does not operate if the
Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER)
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Door Open Warning INFOID:0000000010708041

DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that each door is open or is not fully closed.

Symbol Message

JMKIB2780ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

Synchronization is applied.
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3593GB

SIGNAL PATH
• BCM transmits door switch signal to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter judges according to received door switch signal that a door is open or not fully
closed, door open warning displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATIONG CONDITION
Each door switch is ON
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
All door switches are OFF
DLK-50
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
TIMING CHART
A

JMKIB3594GB

D
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Engine Start Information
INFOID:0000000010708042

DESIGN/PURPOSE E
Information display informs the driver that the engine can be started.

Symbol Message F

CVT models – H

I
JMKIB1883ZZ

DLK
M/T models –

JMKIB1884ZZ M

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

No applicable
N

DLK-51
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3596GB

SIGNAL PATH
• BCM receives shift position signal and engine status signal from TCM and ECM via CAN communication
and checks that the engine can be started.
• When BCM detects that the engine can be started, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combina-
tion meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, engine start information displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATIONG CONDITION
When Ignition Switch is ON.
When all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition switch is in ON position.
• Shift position: P position
• Engine can be started.
When Ignition Switch is Other Than ON.
When all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• One condition of A
• All conditions of B

A condition B condition
• Any door is open → All door is closed
• Ignition switch: Other than ON position
• Push-button ignition switch: Pressed
• Shift position: P position
• Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition
• Registered Intelligent Key is detected inside vehicle.
switch while brake pedal is depressed.

When Ignition Switch is Turned From ON to OFF.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition switch: ON → OFF
• Shift position: P position
• Registered Intelligent Key is detected inside vehicle.
NOTE:
Engine start information turns ON for several seconds and then turns OFF, when ignition switch is turned to
the ON position from the OFF position. Engine start information does not turn ON until opening and closing of
driver door is detected again.
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
When Ignition Switch is ON.
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Shift position: Other than P position
• Engine is started.
• Engine cannot start.
When Ignition Switch is Other than ON.
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
DLK-52
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
• Shift position: Other than P position
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle. A
• When BCM receives Intelligent Key button operation via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives door request switch signal from door request switch.
• After 15 seconds are passed since the engine start information is displayed.
B
When Ignition Switch is Turned From ON to OFF.
• After several seconds are passed since the engine start information is displayed.
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Intelligent Key Low Battery C
Warning INFOID:0000000010708043

D
DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key battery level is low.
NOTE:
Information display does not display when Intelligent Key battery is discharged. E

Symbol Message
F

Key Battery Low

JMKIB1397ZZ
I

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

No applicable J
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
DLK

JMKIB3597GB
O

SIGNAL PATH
• When Intelligent Key receives request signal from inside key antenna or outside key antenna, transmits key
P
ID signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key to remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives key ID signal via remote keyless entry receiver and detects that Intelligent Key battery level is
low.
• When BCM detects that ignition switch is ON, meter display signal is transmitted by BCM to combination
meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, Intelligent Key low battery warning displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATIONG CONDITION

DLK-53
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
When all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition switch is in ON position.
• Intelligent Key battery level is low.
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• After 30 seconds are passed since the Intelligent Key low battery warning is displayed
• Ignition switch is in a position other than ON.
• When Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed.
TIMING CHART

JMKIB1406GB

INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Intelligent Key System Malfunc-

tion INFOID:0000000010708044

DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key system malfunctions or that engine cannot be started.

Symbol Message

Key System Error

See Owner’s Manual

JMKIB1398ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

Synchronization is applied.
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".

DLK-54
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
A

JMKIB1417GB

D
SIGNAL PATH
• When BCM detects that Intelligent Key system malfunctions or that the engine cannot be started, meter dis-
play signal is transmitted by BCM to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, Intelligent Key system malfunction displays. E

WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATING CONDITION

When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• The engine cannot be started. F
• Intelligent Key system malfunction is detected.
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION G
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Intelligent Key system malfunction or engine non-start status is resolved.
• Ignition switch is turned to LOCK or OFF, and 15 seconds are passed.
H
TIMING CHART

DLK
JMKIB1418GB

INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key ID Verification Information

INFOID:0000000010708045 L

DESIGN/PURPOSE
If the system cannot detect a registered Intelligent Key inside the vehicle, it informs the driver that it is neces- M
sary for the vehicle to detect a registered Intelligent Key.

Symbol Message
N

–
P

JMKIB1887ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

No applicable

DLK-55
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3598GB

SIGNAL PATH
• BCM activates inside key antenna and checks that Intelligent Key is in vehicle, when push-button ignition
switch operation is performed while ignition switch position is LOCK.
• When BCM does not detect a registered Intelligent Key in vehicle, meter display signal is transmitted by
BCM to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, key ID warning displays.
• After 5 seconds are passed since the key ID warning is displayed, key ID verification information displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATIONG CONDITION
When all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition switch: LOCK position
• Push-button ignition switch operation is performed.
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle.
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• After 25 seconds are passed since the key ID verification information is displayed.
• When all door is locked with Intelligent Key or door request switch
• Lock the doors after all doors are closed
• When Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed.
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Key ID Warning INFOID:0000000010708046

DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key is not detected in vehicle.

Symbol Message

Key ID Incorrect

JMKIB1398ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

Synchronization is applied.
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".

DLK-56
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
A

E
JMKIB3599GB

SIGNAL PATH
F
• BCM activates inside key antenna and checks that Intelligent Key is in vehicle, when push-button ignition
switch operation is performed while ignition switch position is LOCK.
• When BCM does not detect a registered Intelligent Key in vehicle, meter display signal is transmitted by
BCM to combination meter via CAN communication. G
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, key ID warning displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATING CONDITION
When all of the following conditions are satisfied. H
• Ignition switch is in LOCK position
• Push-button ignition switch operation is performed.
• A registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle. I
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• 5 seconds are passed since operation start. J
• A registered Intelligent Key is detected in passenger room when push-button ignition switch is operated.
• Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed (when
Intelligent Key battery is discharged). DLK
TIMING CHART

JMKIB1420GB

INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : P Position Warning (Information

Display) INFOID:0000000010708047

DESIGN/PURPOSE
DLK-57
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
Information display warns the driver of egression from the vehicle while shift is other than P position.

Symbol Message

Shift to Park

JMKIB1400ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

Synchronization is applied.
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".
SYNCHRONIZATION WITH WARNING CHIME
Synchronization is applied. [P position warning (buzzer)]
Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB1422GB

SIGNAL PATH
• BCM transmits meter display signal to combination meter via CAN communication, when P position warning
(buzzer) is operated.
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, P position warning displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATING CONDITION
P position warning (buzzer) is operated.
Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)".
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
P position warning (buzzer) is canceled.
Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)".
TIMING CHART

JMKIB1423GB

DLK-58
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Steering Lock Information
INFOID:0000000010708048 A

DESIGN/PURPOSE
When unlocking steering the lock, the system informs the driver that it cannot be unlocked unless the steering B
wheel is turned.

Symbol Message
C

–
E

F
JMKIB1874ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP G

Synchronization is applied.
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM H

JMKIB3595GB DLK
SIGNAL PATH
• BCM transmits the steering lock unit unlock request signal to the steering lock unit, and simultaneously the
steering lock unit checks that the steering lock can be unlocked. L
• If the LOCK status of the steering lock unit is detected by the steering lock unit even after BCM is transmitted
to the steering unlock request signal, the meter display signal is sent to the combination meter via CAN com-
munication. M
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, steering lock information displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATIONG CONDITION
When the steering lock cannot be unlocked. N
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
When any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• When the steering lock is unlocked. (Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel O
to the left and right gently.)
• After 15 seconds are passed since the steering lock information is displayed.
P

DLK-59
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
TIMING CHART

JMKIB1427GB

INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Take Away Warning (Informa-

tion Display) INFOID:0000000010708049

DESIGN/PURPOSE
Information display warns the driver that Intelligent Key is not detected in vehicle.

Symbol Message

No Key Detected

JMKIB1398ZZ

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP

Synchronization is applied.
Refer to MWI-47, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Master Warning Lamp".
SYNCHRONIZATION WITH WARNING CHIME
Take away warning
Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB1428GB

SIGNAL PATH

DLK-60
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
• BCM transmits meter display signal to combination meter via CAN communication, when take away warning
(buzzer) is operated. A
• When combination meter receives meter display signal, take away warning displays.
WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATING CONDITION
Take away warning (buzzer) operates. B
Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)".
WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION
Take away warning (buzzer) is canceled. C
Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)"
TIMING CHART D

JMKIB1429GB
G
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator (Information Display)
INFOID:0000000010708050 H

Item Reference
I
Refer to DLK-50, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) :
Door open warning
Door Open Warning"
Refer to DLK-51, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : J
Engine start information
Engine Start Information"
Refer to DLK-53, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) :
Intelligent Key low battery warning
Intelligent Key Low Battery Warning"
DLK
Refer to DLK-54, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) :
Intelligent Key system malfunction
Intelligent Key System Malfunction"
Refer to DLK-55, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) :
Key ID verification information L
Key ID Verification Information"
Refer to DLK-56, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) :
Key ID warning
Key ID Warning"
M
Refer to DLK-57, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : P
P position warning
Position Warning (Information Display)"
Refer to DLK-57, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : P
Steering lock information N
Position Warning (Information Display)"
Refer to DLK-60, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) :
Take away warning
Take Away Warning (Information Display)"
O
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Chime INFOID:0000000010708051

P
Item Reference
Door lock operation warning Refer to WCS-10, "WARNING CHIME : Door Lock Operation Warning".
OFF position warning Refer to WCS-13, "WARNING CHIME : OFF Position Warning".
P position warning (buzzer) Refer to WCS-15, "WARNING CHIME : P Position Warning (Buzzer)".
Take away warning (buzzer) Refer to WCS-20, "WARNING CHIME : Take Away Warning (Buzzer)".

DLK-61
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM)
System Description INFOID:0000000010708054

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIB3678GB

The automatic back door system performs the auto open/close operation of the back door by operating the
automatic back door switch, the automatic back door close switch, the back door opener switch, and Intelligent
Key.
Automatic back door system controls operation function of the following items.
• Automatic open/close temporary stop function
• Back door open position setting function
• Automatic back door open/close function
• Warning function
• Back door auto closure function
• Anti-pinch function

AUTOMATIC OPEN/CLOSE TEMPORARY STOP FUNCTION

Automatic open/close temporary stop function temporarily stops the open/close operation by operating back
door opener switch during auto open/close operation or by turning automatic back door main switch OFF.

DLK-62
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
Back Door Opener Switch Operation
• Automatic open/close operation stops when back door opener switch is operated during auto open/close A
operation.
• Back door performs auto open operation in an open direction when back door opener switch is operated
again during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
B
• Back door performs auto close operation in a close direction when automatic back door close switch is oper-
ated during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.
Automatic Back Door Main Switch Operation
C
• While automatic back door main switch is ON, automatic open/close operation stops when automatic back
door main switch is turned OFF during automatic open/close operation.
• While automatic back door main switch is OFF, automatic open/close operation stops when automatic back
door main switch is turned ON then turned OFF during automatic open/close operation. D
• Back door performs automatic open operation in an open direction when back door opener switch is oper-
ated again during auto open/close temporary stop function operation.
• Back door performs automatic close operation in a close direction when automatic back door close switch is E
operated during automatic open/close temporary stop function operation.

BACK DOOR OPEN POSITION SETTING FUNCTION F

Back door fully open position setting function is a function that enables users to set the full opening stop posi-
tion of automatic open operation when back door may contact an obstacle if fully opened by the automatic
open operation.
CAUTION: G
• It is not possible to set the position farther than the initial setting fully open position in the open
direction.
• If a vehicle is parked on a steep slope after setting the fully open position of back door to half open H
or less, the door may open to near the half open position instead of stopping at the set position.
• When more than one user uses the vehicle, the back door fully open position setting function may
be changed. Be careful when operating automatic open operation for the first time.
I
Setting Procedure
By performing the following operations, stop position of the back door open position setting function can be
set. J
1. Set the shift position to P range.
2. Fully close the back door.
3. After turning OFF the automatic back door main switch, release the latch by back door opener switch
operation. DLK
4. Manually move the back door to the desired stop position.
5. While maintaining the back door position, press and hold the automatic back door close switch for 3 sec-
onds or more. When the setting is successfully completed, automatic back door buzzer sounds (pattern L
D).
Reset Procedure
By performing the following operation, the setting of the back door fully open position setting function can be M
canceled.
1. Set the shift position to P range.
2. Open the back door to the fully open position.
3. Manually move the back door to the upper limit position in the opening direction. N
4. Press and hold the automatic back door close switch for 3 seconds or more. When the setting is success-
fully completed, automatic back door buzzer sounds (pattern D).
O
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION
• In the case of the back door fully closed, operate the automatic back door switch, Intelligent Key or back
door opener switch with the back door unlock. The back door closure motor releases the latch, then the spin- P
dle motor opens the back door to the fully open position. The closure motor reverses to the neutral position
simultaneously.
• In the case of the back door fully open, operate the automatic back door switch, Intelligent Key or automatic
back door close switch. The spindle motor closes the back door to the half-latch position, then the back door
closure motor to the full latch position. Then, the closure motor reverses to the neutral position.
Operation Condition
When all of the following conditions are satisfied.

DLK-63
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
• Shift position: P position (CVT models)
• Parking brake: ON (M/T models)
• Vehicle speed: 0 km/h
• Power supply (automatic power back door control unit): Approx. 11 V or more
Automatic Open/close Operation When Each Switch is Operated
The automatic open/close operation when each switch is operated differs according to the stop position or
operating status of back door. Refer to the following.

JMKIB3531GB

Automatic back door switch

Condition
Automatic back door Automatic back door Back door operation
Back door position Back door condition
main switch switch
Perform the auto close
Full open ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
Perform the auto close
ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function
Perform the auto close
Fully open to just before Auto open function op-
– Press function (reverse oper-
fully open erating
ation)
Auto close function op-
– Press Operation is continued
erating
Non-operation (manual
– Stop Press
movement only)
Perform the auto close
Auto open function op-
– Press function (reverse oper-
Middle erating
ation)
Perform the auto open
Auto close function op-
– Press function (reverse oper-
erating
ation)
Non-operation (manual
– Stop Press
movement only)
Auto open function op-
Just before fully closed – Press Operation is continued
erating
to fully closed
Perform the auto open
Auto close function op-
– Press function (reverse oper-
erating
ation)
Perform the auto open
Full closed ON Stop Long press (1 sec)
function

DLK-64
SYSTEM (AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
Intelligent Key
Condition A
Back door opera-
Automatic back Back door condition
Back door position Ignition switch Intelligent Key
door main switch tion
Perform the auto B
Full open OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
close function
Perform the auto
OFF – Stop Long press (1 sec)
close function C
Perform the auto
Fully open to just Auto open function

PCM Flash Pinout Guide
No ratings yet
PCM Flash Pinout Guide
1 page
L200 2015 - 2018 Service Specifications
50% (2)
L200 2015 - 2018 Service Specifications
72 pages
Accelerator Control System: Section
No ratings yet
Accelerator Control System: Section
5 pages
Accelerator Control System: Section
No ratings yet
Accelerator Control System: Section
5 pages
Airbag
100% (1)
Airbag
430 pages
Transmission Oil Change of Toyota Vitz:Belta:Passo: (K410 Transmission) - Technical Forums: D.I.Y Projects - PakWheels Forums
No ratings yet
Transmission Oil Change of Toyota Vitz:Belta:Passo: (K410 Transmission) - Technical Forums: D.I.Y Projects - PakWheels Forums
35 pages
Defogger: Section
No ratings yet
Defogger: Section
43 pages
PG - Power Supply Ground & Circuit Elements PDF
No ratings yet
PG - Power Supply Ground & Circuit Elements PDF
157 pages
Sistema de Control de Acelerador Nissan Patrol 2016
No ratings yet
Sistema de Control de Acelerador Nissan Patrol 2016
5 pages
Heater & Air Conditioning Control System: Section
No ratings yet
Heater & Air Conditioning Control System: Section
252 pages
Power Control System: Section
100% (3)
Power Control System: Section
123 pages
Section: Driver Controls
No ratings yet
Section: Driver Controls
8 pages
2020 Altima Owner Manual PDF
No ratings yet
2020 Altima Owner Manual PDF
559 pages
Suzuki Diesel
100% (2)
Suzuki Diesel
746 pages
Engine Control System: Section
100% (1)
Engine Control System: Section
60 pages
E Z GO RXV Fleet Freedom Shuttle 2plus2 E Service and Repair Manual
No ratings yet
E Z GO RXV Fleet Freedom Shuttle 2plus2 E Service and Repair Manual
188 pages
Ec PDF
No ratings yet
Ec PDF
786 pages
Peirspeed Sachs FY50QT-5 Owner Manual
No ratings yet
Peirspeed Sachs FY50QT-5 Owner Manual
59 pages
Workshop Manual - Steering: 2013 - CX-5 On-Board Diagnostics
100% (1)
Workshop Manual - Steering: 2013 - CX-5 On-Board Diagnostics
112 pages
DTC P205C - 00 (MZR-CD 2.2)
No ratings yet
DTC P205C - 00 (MZR-CD 2.2)
2 pages
53. PCS - СИСТЕМА КОНТРОЛЯ ЭЛЕКТРОЭНЕРГИИ
No ratings yet
53. PCS - СИСТЕМА КОНТРОЛЯ ЭЛЕКТРОЭНЕРГИИ
123 pages
F01 Single-Axle Air Suspension
100% (1)
F01 Single-Axle Air Suspension
11 pages
ECM Communication
No ratings yet
ECM Communication
2 pages
ECM Terminal Function Accent 2014
No ratings yet
ECM Terminal Function Accent 2014
25 pages
HRN - Horn
No ratings yet
HRN - Horn
7 pages
BCS PDF
No ratings yet
BCS PDF
89 pages
Print
No ratings yet
Print
4 pages
Charging System
No ratings yet
Charging System
24 pages
P0B3B
No ratings yet
P0B3B
2 pages
Navara D40
No ratings yet
Navara D40
352 pages
Mitsubishi Colt Component Locations
No ratings yet
Mitsubishi Colt Component Locations
18 pages
Accent Cylinder Block
No ratings yet
Accent Cylinder Block
27 pages
XW Operations Guide
No ratings yet
XW Operations Guide
112 pages
2001 Kia Optima Fuel System
No ratings yet
2001 Kia Optima Fuel System
136 pages
Accelerator Control System: Section
No ratings yet
Accelerator Control System: Section
5 pages
Srs Airbag Control System: Section
No ratings yet
Srs Airbag Control System: Section
92 pages
Fgtech Boot Tricore User Manual
100% (1)
Fgtech Boot Tricore User Manual
80 pages
Wiring Diagram by Model
No ratings yet
Wiring Diagram by Model
25 pages
Nissan Navara D22 Service Manual - File - Description
No ratings yet
Nissan Navara D22 Service Manual - File - Description
1 page
Ford Cortina Workshop Manual
88% (8)
Ford Cortina Workshop Manual
594 pages
Ciaz 2014keyless Start System-01-01
No ratings yet
Ciaz 2014keyless Start System-01-01
36 pages
D1415 Schemactic
No ratings yet
D1415 Schemactic
4 pages
428L2 PDF
No ratings yet
428L2 PDF
13 pages
2022 1 4 20DT+12V喷油器清洗机 - 1650262347011
No ratings yet
2022 1 4 20DT+12V喷油器清洗机 - 1650262347011
10 pages
Almera n16 Europa FWD
50% (2)
Almera n16 Europa FWD
2 pages
Audi A4 T Codigo de Erro
No ratings yet
Audi A4 T Codigo de Erro
16 pages
2005 - Mazda6 - Workshop Manual - Engine: Applies To
No ratings yet
2005 - Mazda6 - Workshop Manual - Engine: Applies To
4 pages
Nissan Cube Z12 2008-2012 General Information
100% (1)
Nissan Cube Z12 2008-2012 General Information
51 pages
Overseas Agents Directory
100% (1)
Overseas Agents Directory
41 pages
2012 Kia Rio EWD - Sistema de Control MFI (G4FD GAMMA 1.6L GDI M T PDF
No ratings yet
2012 Kia Rio EWD - Sistema de Control MFI (G4FD GAMMA 1.6L GDI M T PDF
4 pages
93c56 Datasheet
No ratings yet
93c56 Datasheet
15 pages
Imo Mitsubishi
No ratings yet
Imo Mitsubishi
11 pages
Wheel Nut Torque Chart
No ratings yet
Wheel Nut Torque Chart
12 pages
U1205 HONDA Code IMA-CAN Malfunction Battery Condition Monitor Module-Motor Control Module
No ratings yet
U1205 HONDA Code IMA-CAN Malfunction Battery Condition Monitor Module-Motor Control Module
3 pages
Msb-14exml00 23 42-501
No ratings yet
Msb-14exml00 23 42-501
6 pages
2014 Toyota"Fault Code"C1515 "Torque Sensor Zero Adjustment Is Not Complete" Operation Method
No ratings yet
2014 Toyota"Fault Code"C1515 "Torque Sensor Zero Adjustment Is Not Complete" Operation Method
8 pages
Diagnostic KeyLess System
No ratings yet
Diagnostic KeyLess System
1 page
Daewoo Fault Codes
No ratings yet
Daewoo Fault Codes
3 pages
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements: Section
100% (1)
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements: Section
50 pages
DTC C1252/52 Brake Booster Pump Motor On Time Abnor-Mally Long
No ratings yet
DTC C1252/52 Brake Booster Pump Motor On Time Abnor-Mally Long
3 pages
Vehicle Power Plant and Transmission Characteristics
No ratings yet
Vehicle Power Plant and Transmission Characteristics
14 pages
Toeic Speaking Part 2
No ratings yet
Toeic Speaking Part 2
33 pages
Annexure - Analysis of Gap Between Rmpu Base and FRP
No ratings yet
Annexure - Analysis of Gap Between Rmpu Base and FRP
6 pages
GMV Rules 1989
No ratings yet
GMV Rules 1989
236 pages
VigoElecWiringDiagram PDF
No ratings yet
VigoElecWiringDiagram PDF
18 pages
Axle Load Spectrum
No ratings yet
Axle Load Spectrum
144 pages
Blitz FATT DC Installation
No ratings yet
Blitz FATT DC Installation
4 pages
Form-1721 A
No ratings yet
Form-1721 A
4 pages
2021 Zipp Spare Parts Catalog
No ratings yet
2021 Zipp Spare Parts Catalog
58 pages
CNA Paper Is The ARG MEU Still Relevant
No ratings yet
CNA Paper Is The ARG MEU Still Relevant
90 pages
Https :fees - Muet.edu - pk:Receipts:Output:Challans Print
No ratings yet
Https :fees - Muet.edu - pk:Receipts:Output:Challans Print
1 page
Categories of Driving Licence in Tanzania
No ratings yet
Categories of Driving Licence in Tanzania
9 pages
Emmanuel Peprah Kwarteng: Automobile Engineer
No ratings yet
Emmanuel Peprah Kwarteng: Automobile Engineer
3 pages
2 - Copy of The Class Certificate
100% (1)
2 - Copy of The Class Certificate
2 pages
Service Manual Compact Optimum After May 2004 PDF
No ratings yet
Service Manual Compact Optimum After May 2004 PDF
65 pages
NORWAY JOB PACKAGE Org.
50% (2)
NORWAY JOB PACKAGE Org.
2 pages
PolicySchedule SR039719 134623191
No ratings yet
PolicySchedule SR039719 134623191
1 page
Compact Sized Reliable Marine Engine-S6A3-MPTAW
No ratings yet
Compact Sized Reliable Marine Engine-S6A3-MPTAW
2 pages
Accepting Rides and GPS Tracking Link
No ratings yet
Accepting Rides and GPS Tracking Link
4 pages
456
No ratings yet
456
1 page
Aust Brochure
No ratings yet
Aust Brochure
8 pages
Wa0153.
No ratings yet
Wa0153.
2 pages
Gate 2005 PDF
No ratings yet
Gate 2005 PDF
22 pages
Bog M 46323000
No ratings yet
Bog M 46323000
3 pages
Infopack 2016 en
No ratings yet
Infopack 2016 en
44 pages
Bagh Express Sleeper Class (SL)
No ratings yet
Bagh Express Sleeper Class (SL)
2 pages
Prem 2 June
No ratings yet
Prem 2 June
2 pages
AIr India Price
No ratings yet
AIr India Price
2 pages
Barisal Water Transport Network Drying Up
No ratings yet
Barisal Water Transport Network Drying Up
4 pages
Industrial Warehouse Lighting - Lighting For Warehouse - Lighting in Warehouse - Lamp and Lighting Warehouse
No ratings yet
Industrial Warehouse Lighting - Lighting For Warehouse - Lighting in Warehouse - Lamp and Lighting Warehouse
3 pages